diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14034-0.txt | 9066 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14034-h/14034-h.htm | 7376 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/14034-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 161965 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/14034-h/14034-h.htm | 7787 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/14034.txt | 9452 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/14034.zip | bin | 0 -> 158110 bytes |
9 files changed, 33697 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/14034-0.txt b/14034-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..af2c760 --- /dev/null +++ b/14034-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9066 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 14034 *** + +King Alfred's Viking +A Story of the First English Fleet +by Charles W. Whistler. + + + +Preface. + + +The general details and course of events given in this story are, so +far as regards the private life and doings of King Alfred, from his +life as written by his chaplain, Asser. One or two further incidents +of the Athelney period are from the later chroniclers--notably the +sign given by St. Cuthberht--as are also the names of the herdsman +and the nobles in hiding in the fen. + +That Alfred put his first fleet into the charge of "certain +Vikings" is well known, though the name of their chief is not +given. These Vikings would certainly be Norse, either detached from +the following of Rolf Ganger, who wintered in England in 875 A.D. +the year before his descent on Normandy; or else independent rovers +who, like Rolf, had been driven from Norway by the high-handed +methods of Harald Fairhair. Indeed, the time when a Norse +contingent was not present with the English forces, from this +period till at least that of the battle of Brunanburh in 947 A.D. +would probably be an exception. + +There are, therefore, good historic grounds for the position given +to the hero of the story as leader of the newly-formed fleet. The +details of the burning of his supposed father's hall, and of the +Orkney period, are from the Sagas. + +Much controversy has raged over the sites of Ethandune and the +landing place of Hubba at Kynwith Castle, owing probably to the +duplication of names in the district where the last campaign took +place. The story, therefore, follows the identifications given by +the late Bishop Clifford in "The Transactions of the Somerset +Archaeological Society" for 1875 and other years, as, both from +topographic and strategic points of view, no other coherent +identification seems possible. + +The earthworks of the Danish position still remain on Edington +hill, that looks out from the Polden range over all the country of +Alfred's last refuge, and the bones of Hubba's men lie everywhere +under the turf where they made their last stand under the old walls +and earthworks of Combwich fort; and a lingering tradition yet +records the extermination of a Danish force in the neighbourhood. +Athelney needs but the cessation of today's drainage to revert in a +very few years to what it was in Alfred's time--an island, alder +covered, barely rising from fen and mere, and it needs but little +imagination to reproduce what Alfred saw when, from the same point +where one must needs be standing, he planned the final stroke that +his people believed was inspired directly from above. + +It would seem evident from Alfred's method with Guthrum that he +realized that this king was but one among many leaders, and not +directly responsible for the breaking of the solemn peace sworn at +Exeter and Wareham. His position as King of East Anglia has gained +him an ill reputation in the pages of the later chronicles; but +neither Asser nor the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle--our best authorities-- +blames him as they, for his contemporaries knew him to be but a +"host king," with no authority over newcomers or those who did not +choose to own allegiance to him. + +Save in a few cases, where the original spelling preserves a lost +pronunciation, as in the first syllable of "Eadmund," the modern +and familiar forms of the names have been used in preference to the +constantly-varying forms given by the chroniclers. Bridgwater has +no Saxon equivalent, the town being known only as "The Bridge" +since the time when the Romans first fortified this one crossing +place of the Parret; and the name of the castle before which Hubba +fell varies from Cynuit through Kynwith to Kynwich, whose +equivalent the Combwich of today is. Guthrum's name is given in +many forms, from Gytro to Godramnus. Nor has it been thought worth +while to retain the original spelling AElfred, the ae diphthong +having been appropriated by us to an entirely new sound; while our +own pronunciation of the name slightly broadened as yet in Wessex, +is correct enough. + +The exact relationship of St. Neot to Alfred, beyond that he was a +close kinsman, is very doubtful. He has been identified with a +brother, Athelstan of East Anglia, who is known to have retired to +Glastonbury; but there is no more than conjecture, and I have been +content with "cousinship." + +C. W. Whistler + +Stockland, 1898. + + + +Chapter I. The Seeking of Sword Helmbiter. + + +Men call me "King Alfred's Viking," and I think that I may be proud +of that name; for surely to be trusted by such a king is honour +enough for any man, whether freeman or thrall, noble or churl. +Maybe I had rather be called by that name than by that which was +mine when I came to England, though it was a good title enough that +men gave me, if it meant less than it seemed. For being the son of +Vemund, king of Southmereland in Norway, I was hailed as king when +first I took command of a ship of my own. Sea king, therefore, was +I, Ranald Vemundsson, but my kingdom was but over ship and men, the +circle of wide sea round me was nought that I could rule over, if I +might seem to conquer the waves by the kingship of good seaman's +craft. + +One may ask how I came to lose my father's kingdom, which should +have been mine, and at last to be content with a simple English +earldom; or how it was that a viking could be useful to Alfred, the +wise king. So I will tell the first at once, and the rest may be +learned from what comes after. + +If one speaks to me of Norway, straightway into my mind comes the +remembrance of the glare of a burning hall, of the shouts of savage +warriors, and of the cries of the womenfolk, among whom I, a +ten-year-old boy, was when Harald Fairhair sent the great Jarl +Rognvald and his men to make an end of Vemund, my father. For +Harald had sworn a great oath to subdue all the lesser kings in the +land and rule there alone, like Gorm in Denmark and Eirik in +Sweden. So my father's turn came, and as he feasted with his ninety +stout courtmen, the jarl landed under cover of the dark and fell on +him, surrounding the house and firing it. Then was fierce fighting +as my father and his men sallied again and again from the doors and +were driven back, until the high roof fell in and there was a +sudden silence, and an end. + +Then in the silence came my mother's voice from where she stood on +the balcony of the living house across the garth {i}. I mind +that she neither wept nor shrieked as did the women round her, and +her voice was clear and strong over the roaring of the flames. I +mind, too, the flash of helms and armour as every man turned to +look on her who spoke. + +"Coward and nidring art thou, Rognvald, who dared not meet Vemund, +my husband, in open field, but must slay him thus. Ill may all +things go with thee, till thou knowest what a burning hall is like +for thyself. I rede thee to the open hillside ever, rather than +come beneath a roof; for as thou hast wrought this night, so shall +others do to thee." + +Then rose a growl of wrath from Rognvald's men, but the great Jarl +bade them cease, and harm none in all the place. So he went down to +his ships with no more words and men said that he was ill at ease +and little content, for he had lost as many men as he had slain, so +stoutly fought my father and our courtmen, and had earned a curse, +moreover, which would make his nights uneasy for long enough. + +Then as he went my mother bade me look well at him, that in days to +come I might know on whom to avenge my father's death. After that +she went to her own lands in the south, for she was a jarl's +daughter, and very rich. + +Not long thereafter Harald Fairhair won all the land, and then +began the trouble of ruling it; and men began to leave Norway +because of the new laws, which seemed hard on them, though they +were good enough. + +Now two of Jarl Rognvald's sons had been good friends of my father +before these troubles began, and one, Sigurd, had been lord over +the Orkney Islands, and had died there. The other, Jarl Einar, fell +out with Rognvald, his father, and we heard that he would take to +the viking path, and go to the Orkneys, to win back the jarldom +that Sigurd's death had left as a prey to masterless men and +pirates of all sorts. So my mother took me to him, and asked him +for the sake of old friendship to give me a place in his ship; for +I was fourteen now, and well able to handle weapons, being strong +and tall for my age, as were many of the sons of the old kingly +stocks. + +So Einar took me, having had no part in his father's doings towards +us, and hating them moreover. He promised to do all that he might +towards making a good warrior and seaman of me; and he was ever +thereafter as a foster father to me, for my own had died in the +hall with Vemund. It was his wish to make amends thus, if he could, +for the loss his folk had caused me. + +Of the next five years I need speak little, for in them I learned +the viking's craft well. We won the Orkneys from those who held +them, and my first fight was in Einar's ship, against two of the +viking's vessels. After that we dwelt in Sigurd's great house in +Kirkwall, and made many raids on the Sutherland and Caithness +shores. I saw some hard fighting there, for the Scots are no babes +at weapon play. + +Then when I was nineteen, and a good leader, as they said, the +words that my mother spoke to Jarl Rognvald came true, and he died +even as he had slain my father. + +For Halfdan and Gudrod, Harald Fairhair's sons, deeming that the +Jarl stood in their way to power in Norway, burned him in his hall +by night, and so my feud was at an end. But the king would in +nowise forgive his sons for the slaying of his friend, and outlawed +them. Whereon Halfdan came and fell on us in the Orkneys; and that +was unlucky for him, for we beat him, and Jarl Einar avenged on him +his father's death. + +Now through this it came to pass that I saw Norway for the last +time, for I went thither in Einar's best ship to learn if Harald +meant to make the Orkneys pay for the death of his son--which was +likely, for a son is a son even though he be an outlaw. + +So I came to my mother's place first of all, and full of joy and +pleasant thoughts was I as we sailed into the well-remembered fiord +to seek the little town at its head. And when we came there, nought +but bitterest sorrow and wrath was ours; for the town was a black +heap of ruin, and the few men who were left showed me where the +kindly hands of the hill folk had laid my mother, the queen, in a +little mound, after the Danish vikings, who had fallen suddenly on +the place with fire and sword, had gone. They had grown thus bold +because the great jarl was dead, and the king's sons had left the +land without defence. + +There I swore vengeance for this on every viking of Danish race +that I might fall in with; for I was wild with grief and rage, as +one might suppose. I set up a stone over the grave of my mother, +graving runes thereon that should tell who she was and also who +raised it; for I was skilled in the runic lore, having learned much +from one of Einar's older men who had known my father. + +Thereafter we cruised among the islands northwards until we learned +that Harald was indeed upon us, and then I saw my last of Norway as +we headed south again, and the last hilltop sank beneath the sea's +rim astern of us. I did not know that so it would be at that +time--it is well that one sees not far into things to come--but +even now all my home seemed to be with Einar; and that also was not +to last long, as things went. How that came about I must tell, for +the end was that I came to Alfred the king. + +When we came back to Kirkwall, I told the jarl all that I had done +and learned; and grieved for me he was when he heard of my mother's +death. Many things he said to me at that time which made him dearer +to me. Then after a while he spoke of Harald, who, as it seemed, +might come at any time. + +"We cannot fight Norway," he said, "so we must even flit hence to +the mainland and wait until Harald is tired of seeking us. It is in +my mind that he seeks not so much for revenge as for payment of +scatt from our islands. Now he has a reason for taking it by force. +He will seek to fine us, and then make plans by which I shall hold +the jarldom from him for yearly dues." + +So he straightway called the Thing {ii} of all the Orkney folk, +who loved him well, and put the matter before them; and they set to +work and did his bidding, driving the cattle inland and scattering +them, and making the town look as poor as they might. + +Then in three days' time we sailed away laughing; for none but +poor-looking traders were left, and no man would think that never +had the Orkneys been so rich as in Einar's time. And he bade them +make peace with the king when he came, and told them that so all +would be well, for Harald would lay no heavy weregild on so poor a +place for his son's slaying. + +Southward we went to Caithness, and so westward along the +Sutherland coast; for we had taken no scatt there for this year, +and Einar would use this cruise to do so, seeing that we must put +to sea. We were not the first who had laid these shores under rule +from the Orkneys, for Jarl Sigurd had conquered them, meeting his +death at last in a Sutherland firth, after victory, in a strange +way. + +He fought with a Scottish chief named Melbrigda of the Tusks, and +slew him, and bore back his head to the ships at his saddle bow. +Then the great teeth of the chief swung against the jarl's leg and +wounded it, and of that he died, and so was laid in a great mound +at the head of the firth where his ships lay. After that, the +Orkneys were a nest of evil vikings till we came. + +So it had happened that, from the time when it was made over him, +Jarl Sigurd's mound had been untended, for we ourselves had never +been so far south as this firth before. Indeed, it had been so laid +waste by Sigurd's men after his death that there was nought to go +there for. But at this time we had reason for getting into some +quiet, unsought place where we should not be likely to be heard of, +for the king had over-many ships and men for us to meet. So after a +week's cruising we put into that firth, and anchored in the shelter +of its hills. + +There is no man of all our following who will forget that day, +because of what happened almost as soon as the anchor held. It was +very hot that morning, and what breeze had been out in the open sea +was kept from us now by the hills, so that for some miles we had +rowed the ships up the winding reaches of the firth; and then, as +we laid in the oars and the anchorage was reached, there crept from +inland a dim haze over the sun, dimming the light, and making all +things look strange among the mountains. Then the sounds of the +ships seemed to echo loudly over the still water and when all the +bustle of anchoring was over, the stillness seemed yet greater, for +the men went to their meals, and for a while spoke little. + +Einar and I sat on his after deck under the awning, and spoke in +low voices, as if afraid to raise our tones. + +"There is a thunderstorm about," I said. + +"Ay--listen," the jarl answered. + +Then I heard among the hills, far up the firth beyond us, a strange +sound that seemed to draw nearer, like and yet unlike thunder, +roaring and jarring ever closer to us, till it was all around us +and beneath us everywhere, and our very hearts seemed to stop +beating in wonder. + +Then of a sudden the ship was smitten from under the keel with a +heavy, soundless blow, and the waters of the firth ebbed and flowed +fiercely about us; and then the sound passed on and down the firth +swiftly and strangely as it had come, and left us rocking on the +troubled waters that plashed and broke along the rocks of the +shore, while the still, thick air seemed full of the screams of the +terrified eagles and sea birds that had left them. + +"Odin defend us!" the jarl said; "what is this?" + +I shook my head, looking at him, and wondering if my face was white +and scared as his and that of every man whom I could see. + +Now we waited breathless for more to come, but all was quiet again. +The birds went back to their eyries, and the troubled water was +still. Then presently our fears passed enough to let us speak with +one another; and then there were voices enough, for every man +wished to hear his own again, that courage might return. + +Then a man from the Orkneys who had been with Jarl Sigurd came aft +to us, and stood at the break of the deck to speak with Einar. + +"Jarl," he said, almost under his breath, "it is in my mind that +Sigurd, your brother, is wroth because his mound has been untended +since we made it." + +Then Einar said: + +"Was it so ill made that it needs tending?" + +"It was well made, jarl; but rain and frost and sun on a new-made +mound may have wrought harm to it. Or maybe he thinks that enough +honour has not been paid him. He was a great warrior, jarl, and +perhaps would have more sacrifice, and a remembrance cup drunk by +his own brother at his grave." + +Now this man's name was Thord, the same who taught me runes--a good +seaman and leader of men, and one who was held to be wise in more +matters than most folk. So his word was to be listened to. + +"You know more of these matters than I, Thord," Einar answered. "Is +it possible that Sigurd could work this?" + +"Who knows what a dead chief of might cannot work?" Thord said. "I +think it certain that Sigurd is angry for some reason; and little +luck shall we have if we do not appease his spirit." + +Then the jarl looked troubled, as well he might, for to go near the +mound that held an angry ghost was no light matter. It lay far up +the firth, Thord said, and the ships could not go so far. But Einar +was very brave, and when he had thought for a little while he said: + +"Well, then, I will take boat and go to Sigurd's mound and see if +he ails aught. Will any man come with me, however?" + +I liked not the errand, as may be supposed, but I could not leave +my foster father to go alone. + +"I will be with you," I said. "Will not Thord come also?" + +"Ay," the grim Orkney man answered. + +Now all our crew were listening to us, and I looked down the long +gangways by chance, and when I did so no man would meet my eye. +They feared lest they should be made to go to this haunted place, +as it seemed--all but one man, who sat on the mast step swinging +his feet. This was Kolgrim the Tall, the captain of the fore deck, +a young man and of few words, but a terrible swordsman, and knowing +much of sea craft. And when this man saw that I looked at him, he +nodded a little and smiled, for he had been a friend of mine since +I had first come to Einar. + +"Two men to row the boat will be enough, jarl," I said. "Kolgrim +yonder will come with us." + +"Well," the jarl answered, "maybe four of us are enough. We shall +not fright Sigurd with more, and maybe would find it hard to get +them to come." + +So he called Kolgrim, and he said that he would go with us, and +went to get the boat alongside without more words. + +Then the jarl and I and Thord armed ourselves--for a warrior should +be met by warriors. The men were very silent, whispering among +themselves, until the jarl was ready and spoke to them. + +"Have no fear for us," he said. "Doubtless my brother needs +somewhat, and calls me. I am going to find out what it is and +return." + +So we pushed off, Thord and Kolgrim rowing. It was strange to look +back, as we went, on the ships, for not a soul stirred on board +them, as it seemed, so intently were we watched; and the water was +like a sheet of steel under them, so that they were doubled. + +Presently they were hidden as we rounded a turn in the firth, and +we were alone among the hills, and the lonesomeness was very great. +There was no dwelling anywhere along the shores, nor in the deep +glens that came down to them, each with its noisy burn falling +along it. Once I saw deer feeding far up at the head of a valley +that opened out, but they and the eagles were the only living +things we could see beside the loons that swam and dived silently +as we neared them. + +The silence and the heat weighed on us, and we went for a mile or +more without a word. Then we turned into the last reach of the +water, and saw Sigurd's mound beside its edge at the very head of +the firth, where the hills came round in a circle that was broken +only by the narrow waters and the valley that went beyond them +among the mountains. It was a fitting resting place for one who +would sleep in loneliness; but I thought that I had rather lie +where I could look out on the sea I loved, and see the long ships +pass and the white waves break beneath me. + +Now all seemed very peaceful here in the hot haze that brooded over +the still mountains, and there seemed to be nought to fear. We drew +swiftly up to the mound, with the plash of oars only to break the +silence, and there was nought amiss that we could see. They had +made it on a little flat tongue of land that jutted from the +mountain's foot into the deep water, so that on two sides the mound +was close to its edge. So we pulled on softly round the tongue of +land, being maybe about fifty paces from the mound across the +water. And when we saw the other side of Sigurd's resting place, +the oars stayed suddenly, and the jarl, who held the tiller, swung +the boat away from the shore, and I think I knew then what fear +was. + +The mound was open. There was a wide, brown scar, as of +freshly-moved earth, across its base, reaching from the level to +six or eight feet of its height, as though half the grass-grown +side had been shorn away by a sword cut; and in the midst of that +scar was a doorway, open to the grave's heart, low and stone built. +Some of the earth that had fallen lay before it on the water's +edge, but the rest was doubtless in the water, for there was but a +narrow path between bank and mound. + +At that sight we stared, thinking we should surely see the grim +form of Sigurd loom gigantic and troll-like {iii} across the +doorway; and the jarl half rose from his seat beside me, and cried +out with a great voice: + +"Sigurd--my brother!" + +I think he knew not what or why he cried thus, for he sank back +into his place and swayed against me, while his cry rang loud among +the hills, and the eagles answered it. + +And I grasped my sword hilt, as one does in some sudden terror, +staring at the open mound; while old Thord muttered spells against +I know not what, and Kolgrim looked at me, pale and motionless. + +Then came the sharp, mocking cry of a diver, that rang strangely; +and at once, without order. Thord dug his oar blade into the water +and swung the boat round, and when once Kolgrim's back was towards +that he feared, he held water strongly and then the boat was about, +and we were flying from the place towards the ships, before we knew +what was being done, panic stricken. + +But Einar said never a word, and the two rowers slackened their +pace only when the bend of the firth hid the mound from our sight. + +Then said I, finding that Einar spoke not: + +"What are we flying from? there was nought to harm us." + +For I began to be ashamed. Thereat Kolgrim stopped rowing, and +Thord must needs do likewise, though he said: + +"It is ill for us to stay here. The dead jarl is very wroth." + +"I saw nought to fray us; the cry we heard was but that of a loon." + +But Thord shook his head. The silence of the place had made all +things seem strange, with the dull light that was over us, and the +great heat among the towering hills. + +"The mound was freshly opened," he said. "I saw earth crumbling +even yet from the broken side. The blow we felt was that which +Sigurd struck when he broke free." + +Then at last Einar spoke, and his voice was strange: + +"I have left my brother unhonoured, and he is angry. What must be +done?" + +Now I cannot tell what hardiness took hold of me, but it seemed +that I must needs go back and see more of this. I was drawn to do +so, as a thing they fear will make some men long to face it and +know its worst, not as if they dared so much as when they must. + +"I think we should have waited to ask Sigurd that," I said; and +Einar looked strangely at me. + +"Would you have us return?" he asked. + +"Why not?" said I. "If the great jarl has called us as it seems, +needs must that we know what he wills." + +Then said Thord: + +"I helped to lay him in that place, and I mind how he looked at +that time. Somewhat we left undone, doubtless. I dare not go back." + +Einar looked at the hills, leaning his chin on his hand, and said +slowly, when Thord had done: + +"That is the first time Thord has said 'I dare not.' Now I would +that I had stayed to fight Harald and fall under his sword before. +I too must say the same. I have left my brother unhonoured, and I +dare not go back." + +Pale and drawn the jarl's face was, and I knew he meant what he +said. Nevertheless it seemed to me that some one must know what +Sigurd willed. + +"Jarl Einar," I said, "this is a strange business, and one cannot +tell what it means. Now Sigurd was my father's close friend, and I +have had nought to do with him. I will go back, therefore, and +learn what I can of him. I think he will not harm me, for he has no +reason to do so. Moreover if he does, none will learn what he +needs." + +"I have heard," said Thord, "that a good warrior may ask what he +will of a dead hero, so that he shows no fear and is a friend. If +his courage fails, however, then he will be surely destroyed." + +Then I said: + +"I have no cause to fear Sigurd, save that he is a ghost. I do not +know if I fear him as such; that is to be seen." + +Now Einar laid his hand on mine and spoke gravely: + +"I think it is a hero's part to do what you say. If you go back and +return in safety, the scalds will sing of you for many a long day. +Go, therefore, boldly; this is not a matter from which you should +be held back, as it has come into your mind." + +Then said Thord: + +"It will be well to ask Sigurd for a token whereby we may know that +he sends messages by you." + +And Einar said on that: + +"In Sigurd's hand is his sword Helmbiter. I think he will give that +to the man who dares speak to him, for he will know that it goes +into brave hands. Ask him for it bravely." + +"Put me ashore, therefore, before my courage goes," I said; and +they pulled the boat to the bank where I could step on a rock and +so to shore. And when I was there, Kolgrim rose up and followed me +without a word. + +"Bide here for two hours, jarl, and maybe I will return in that +time," I said. "Farewell." + +So I turned away as they answered me, thinking that Kolgrim held +the boat's painter. But he came after me, and I spoke to him: + +"Why, Kolgrim, will you come also?" + +"You shall not go alone, Ranald the king's son; I will come with +you as far as I dare." + +"That is well," I answered, and with that wasted no more words, but +climbed the hillside a little, and then went steadily towards where +the mound was, with Kolgrim close at my shoulder, and the jarl and +Thord looking fixedly after us till we were out of sight. + + + +Chapter II. The Gifts of Two Heroes. + + +I will not say that my steps did not falter when we came to whence +we could see the mound. But it was lonely and still and silent; no +shape of warrior waited our coming. + +"Almost do I fear to go nearer," said Kolgrim. + +"Put fear away, comrade," said I; "we shall fare ill if we turn our +backs now." + +"Where you go I go," he answered, "though I am afraid." + +"The next best thing to not being afraid is to be afraid and not to +show it," I said then, comforting myself also with a show of wisdom +at least. "Maybe fear is the worst thing we have to face." + +So we went on more swiftly, and at last were on the tongue of land +on the tip of which the mound stood. Still, since we could not see +the open doorway, which was towards the water, the place seemed not +so terrible. Yet I thought that by this time we should have seen +Sigurd, or maybe heard his voice from the tomb. So now I dared to +call softly: + +"Jarl Sigurd, here is one, a friend's son, who will learn what you +will." + +My voice seemed to fill all the ring of mountains with echoes, but +there was no answer. All was still again when the last voice came +back from the hillsides. + +Then I went nearer yet, and passed to the waterside, where I could +look slantwise across the doorway. And again I called, and waited +for an answer that did not come. + +"It seems that I must go even to the door, and maybe into the +mound," I said, whispering. + +"Not inside," said Kolgrim, taking hold of my arm. + +But I had grown bolder with the thought that the hero seemed not +angry, and now I had set my heart on winning the sword of which the +jarl had told me, and I thought that I dared go even inside the +tomb to speak with Sigurd. + +"Bide here, and I will go at least to the door," said I. + +So I stepped boldly before it, standing on the heap of newly-fallen +earth that had slipped from across it. The posts and lintel of the +door were of stone slabs such as lay everywhere on the hillsides, +and I stood so close that I could touch them. The doorway was not +so high that I could see into it without stooping, for it was +partly choked with the fallen earth, and I bent to look in. But I +could only see for a few feet into the passage, as I looked from +light to darkness. + +"Ho, Jarl Sigurd! what would you? Why have you opened your door +thus?" + +Very hollow my voice sounded, and that was all. + +"Sigurd of Orkney--Sigurd, son of Rognvald--I am the son of Vemund +your friend. Speak to me!" + +There was no answer. A bit of earth crumbled from the broken side +of the mound and made me start, but I saw nothing. So I stepped +away from the door and back to my comrade, who had edged nearer the +place, though his face showed that he feared greatly. + +"I think that the mound has been rifled," I said. "Sigurd would +have us know it and take revenge." + +"No man has dared to go near that doorway till you came, Ranald +Vemundsson," Kolgrim answered. "Now I fear that he plans to lure +you into the mound, and slay you there without light to help you. +Go no further, maybe you will be closed up with the ghost." + +That was not pleasant to think of, but I had seen nought to make me +fear to go in. There was no such unearthly light shining within the +mound as I had heard of in many tales of those who sought to speak +with dead chiefs. + +"Well, I am going in," I said stoutly; "but do you hide here, and +make some noise that I may know you are near me. It is the silence +that frays me. + +"What can I do?" he said. "I know no runes that are of avail. It +would be ill to disturb this place with idle sounds." + +That seemed right, but I thought I could not bear the silence--silence +of the grave. I must know that he was close at hand. Then a thought +came to me, and I unfastened the silver-mounted whetstone that hung +from my belt and gave it him. + +"Whet your sword edge sharply," I said. "That is a sound a hero +loves, for it speaks of deeds to be done." + +"Ay, that is no idle sound," he said, and drew his sword gladly. +The haft of the well-known blade brought the light into his eyes +again. I drew my own sword also. + +"If you need me, call, and I think I shall not fail you," he +whispered. "It shall not be said that I failed you in peril." + +"I know it," I answered, putting my hand on his shoulder. + +Then I went boldly, and stepped into the passage. The whetstone +sang shrill on the sword edge as it kissed the steel behind me, and +the sound was good to hear as I went into darkness with my weapon +ready. + +I half feared that my first step would be my last, but it was made +in safety. Very black seemed the low stone-walled passage before +me, and I had to stoop as I went on, feeling with my left hand +along the wall. The way was so narrow that little light could pass +my body, and therefore it seemed to grow darker as I went deeper +into the mound's heart. + +Five steps I took, and then my outstretched hand was on the post +that ended the passage, and beyond that I felt nothing. I had come +to the inner doorway, and before me was the place where Sigurd lay. +Yet no fiery eyes glared on me, and nothing stirred. The air was +heavy with a scent as of peat, and the sound of the whetstone +seemed loud as I stood peering into the darkness. + +I moved forward, and somewhat rattled under my foot, and I started. +Then my fear left me altogether, for I had trodden on dry bones, +and shuddered at the first touch of them in that place. I had faced +fear, and had overcome it; maybe it was desperation that made me +cool then, for it was certain now that I must be slain or else +victor over I knew not what. + +So I took one pace forward into the chamber, and stood aside from +the doorway; and the grey light from the passage came in and filled +all the place, so that it fell first on him whom I had come to +seek--Jarl Sigurd of Orkney. + +And when I saw, a great awe fell upon me, and a sadness, but no +terror; and in my heart I would that hereafter I might rest as +slept the hero where the hands that had loved him had placed him. + +Into the silent place came once more with me the clank of mail and +weapons that he had loved, and from without the song of the keen +sword edge whispered to him; but these could not wake him. +Peacefully he seemed to sleep as I stood by his side, and I thought +that I should take back no word of his to the jarl, his brother, +whom both he and I loved. + +They had brought the great carven chair on which he was wont to sit +on his ship's quarterdeck, and thereon had set the jarl, as though +he yet lived, and did but sleep as he sat from weariness after +fight, with helm and mail upon him. Shield and axe rested on either +side of him, ready to hand, against the chair; and behind him, +along the wall, were his spears, ashen shafted and rune graven. + +His blue, fur-trimmed cloak was round him, and before him was a +little table, heavy and carved, whereon were vessels for food, +empty now save for dust that showed that they had been full. And +across his knees was his sword, golden hilted, with a great yellow +cairngorm in the pommel, and with gold-wrought patterns from end to +end of the scabbard--such a sword as I had never seen before. His +right hand held the hilt, and his left rested on the shield's rim +beside him; and so Sigurd slept with his head bowed on his breast, +waiting for Ragnaroek and the last great fight of all. + +The light seemed to grow stronger as I looked, or my eyes grew used +to it, and then I saw that the narrow chamber was full of things, +though I minded them afterwards, for now I was as in a dream, +noting only the jarl himself. Costly stuffs were on the floor, and +mail and helms and more weapons. Gold work there was also, and in +one corner lay the dried-up body of a great wolf hound, coiled as +in sleep where it had been chained. Another had been tied by the +passage doorway, where I had stepped on it; and below a spar that +stood across a corner lay a tumbled heap of feathers that had been +a falcon. + +Many more things there were maybe, but this I saw at last--that the +jarl's right foot rested on the skull of a man whose teeth had been +long and tusk-like. It was the head of the Scot whose teeth had +been his death. + +Now the sword drew my eyes, for Einar bade me ask for it, else I +think I had gone softly hence without a word, so peaceful seemed +the dead. And as I looked again, I saw that the hand holding the +hilt was dry and brown and shrunken, so that one might see all the +bones through the skin, and at first I was afraid to ask. + +At last I said, and my mouth was dry: + +"Jarl Einar, your brother, bids me ask for sword Helmbiter, great +Sigurd. Let me take it, that he may know how you rest in peace." + +But Sigurd stirred not nor spoke; and slowly I put out my hand on +the sword to take it very gently, but his grasp was yet firm on it. +Then, as I bent to see if it had tightened when I would draw the +sword away, I could see beneath the helm the face of the dead, +shrunken indeed and brown, but as of one at rest and beyond anger. + +Once more then I took the jarl's sword in my right hand, and raised +his hand with my left, putting my own weapon by against the wall. +And then the hilt slipped from the half-open fingers, and the sword +was mine, and my hand held the jarl's. And it seemed to me that he +gave it me, and that I must thank him for such a gift. The sword +though it was sheathed, was not girt to him, and its golden-studded +belt was twisted about it, and it was no imperfect giving. + +So I spoke in a low voice: + +"Jarl Sigurd, I thank you. If my might is aught, the sword will be +used as you would have used it. Surely I will say to Einar that you +rest in peace, and we will come here and close your mound again in +all honour." + +I set back his hand then, and it seemed empty and helpless, not as +a warrior's should be. So I ungirt my own weapon--a good plain +sword that I had won from a viking in Caithness--and laid it in the +place of that he had given me. And as I put the thin fingers on its +hilt, almost thinking that they would chose around it, a ring +slipped from them into my hand, as if he would give that also, and +I kept it therefore. + +Then for a minute I stood before Jarl Sigurd, waiting to see if he +had any word; but when he spoke not, I lifted the sword and saluted +him. + +"Skoal to Jarl Sigurd; rest in peace, and farewell." + +Then I went forth softly, and came out into sunshine; for the wind +was singing round the hilltops, and the dun mist had gone. Then I +was ware that the sound of the stone on the sword edge had long +ceased, and I looked for Kolgrim. + +He was lying on the grass in the place where I had left him, but he +was on his face, and the sword and whetstone were flung aside from +him. At first I feared that he had been in some way slain because +of his terror; but when I came near, I saw that his shoulders +heaved as if he wept. Then I stood over him, treading softly. + +"Kolgrim," I said. + +At that he looked up, and a great light came into his face, and he +sprang to his feet and threw his arms round me, weeping, yet with a +strong man's weeping that does but come from bitter grief. + +"Master," he cried, "O master I thought you lost--and I dared not +follow you." + +"I have met with no peril," I said, "nor have I been long gone." + +"More than two hours, master, have you been in that place--two long +hours. See how the sun has sunk since you left me!" + +So indeed it seemed, though I knew not that I had been so long. I +had stayed still and gazed on that strange sight without stirring +for what seemed but a little while. Yet I had thought long thoughts +in that time, and I mind every single thing in that dim chamber, +even to the markings on the stones that made its walls and roof and +floor. + +"See," I said, "Jarl Sigurd has given me the sword!" + +Kolgrim gazed in wonder. There was no speck of dust on the broad +blade as I drew it, and the waving lines of the dwarf-wrought steel +and gold-inlaid runes were clear and bright along its middle for +half its length. For the mound was very dry, and they had covered +all the chamber with peat before piling the earth over it. + +"Let us go back to Jarl Einar; he will fear for us," I said, +sheathing the sword and girding it to me. + +So we went across the meadow, and even as we went a blast of cold +wind came from, over the mountains, and with it whirled the black +thunderclouds of the storm that had been gathering all day. We ran +to an overhanging rock on the hillside and crept beneath it, while +the thunder crashed and the lightning struck from side to side of +the firth, and smote the wind-swept water that was white with foam. + +"Master," said Kolgrim, "the Jarl Sigurd is wroth; he repents the +sword gift." + +But I did not think that he had aught to do with this. For, as any +hill-bred man could tell, the storm had been brewing in the heat, +and was bound to come, and would pass to and fro among the hills +till it was worn out. + +Nevertheless, when it passed away in pouring rain that swept like a +hanging sheet of moving mist down the glens from the half-hidden +mountains, and the sun shone out brightly again over the clear-cut +purple hillsides and rippling water, I looked at the mound in +wonder. For it was closed. We had sought shelter in a place near +that whence we saw the mound in coming, and could see the fallen +side, though not the doorway, looking across its front. And now the +slope of the bank seemed to have been made afresh, as on the day +when Sigurd had been closed in, years ago. None could say, save +those who had seen it, where the opening into the grave-chamber +might be. + +Now both the opening and closing of Sigurd's grave mound seem very +strange to me. Thord and the scalds will have it that he himself +wrought both. As for me, I know not. In after days I told this to +Alfred the king when he wondered at my sword, and he said that he +thought an earthquake opened and washing rain closed the mound, but +that it happened strangely for me. I cannot gainsay his wise words, +and I will leave the matter so. + +Thereafter Kolgrim and I went back to Einar, who yet waited for us. +Glad was he to see us return in safety; but both he and Thord were +speechless when they saw the jarl's sword girt to me and the jarl's +golden ring on my hand. Neither they nor any one else will believe +that I met with no peril; and the tale that the scalds made +hereafter of the matter is over wonderful, in spite of all I may +say. For they think it but right that I should not be over boastful +of my deeds. + +But Jarl Einar looked on sword and ring, and said: + +"Well have you won these gifts. My brother is in peace in his +resting place now. I hold that he called for you." + +So we went back to the ships, and there for many days the men +stared at Kolgrim and me strangely. They say I was very silent for +long, and it is likely enough. Moreover, Einar was wont to say that +I seemed five years older from that day forward. + +We went no more to the place of the mound, for it seemed to need no +care of earthly hands. Nor were any wishing to go to so awesome a +place, and we left the firth next day, for the men waxed uneasy +there. + +But on that day Einar gave me the great ship that we had taken from +Halfdan, the king's son, saying that he would add to Sigurd's +giving. Also he bade me choose what men I would for her crew, +bidding me thank him not at all, for I was his foster son, and a +king by birth moreover. + +So when I knew that this would please him, I chose Thord for my +shipmaster, and Kolgrim for marshal, as we call the one who has +charge of the ordering of the crew. And I chose a hundred good men +whom I knew well, so that indeed I had the best ship and following +in Norway, as I thought. At least there were none better, unless +Harald Fairhair might match me. + +Now there was one thing that pleased me not at this time, and that +was that Kolgrim, my comrade, never called me aught but "master" +since I came from Sigurd's presence--which is not the wont of our +free Norsemen with any man. Nor would he change it, though I was +angry, until I grew used to it in time. + +"Call me not 'master,' Kolgrim, my comrade," I said; "it is +unfittinq for you." + +At last he answered me in such wise that I knew it was of no more +use to speak of it. + +"Master of mine you are, Ranald the king, since the day when you +dared more than I thought man might, while I lay like a beaten +hound outside, and dared not go within that place to see what had +become of you. Little comradeship was mine to you on that day, and +I am minded to make amends if I can. I think I may dare aught +against living men for you, though I failed at that mound. I will +give life for you, if I may." + +I told him that what he had done was well done, and indeed he had +had courage to go where none else had dared; for I had ties of +friendship that made me bold to meet Jarl Sigurd, and might go +therefore where he might not. It was well that he did not come into +the presence of the dead. + +"Therefore we are comrades, not master and man," I said. + +"Nay, but master and man--lord and thrall," he answered. + +So I must let him have his way, but he could not make me think of +him as aught but a good and brave comrade whom I loved well. + +They hailed me as king when I went on board my ship for the first +time with my own men, as I have said. Then our best weapon smith +asked for gold from the men, and they gave what they had--it was in +plenty with us of Einar's following--and made a golden circlet +round my helm, that they might see it and follow it in battle. + +It was good to wear the crown thus given willingly, but in the end +it sent me from north to south, as will be seen. That, however, is +a matter with which I will not quarrel, for it sent me to Alfred +the king. + +We had left the firth two days, cruising slowly northward, when one +ship came from the north and met us, not flying from our fleet, but +bearing up to join us. And when she was close, there came a hail to +tell Einar that she bore a messenger from Harald the king in peace, +and presently we hove to while this messenger went on board the +Jarl's ship. + +Then it seemed that Einar had been right, and that Harald would lay +a fine on the islands for Halfdan's slaying, and so give them back +to Einar to hold for him. The messenger was Thiodolf, Harald's own +scald, and he put the matter very plainly before the jarl, so that +he thought well of the offer, but would nevertheless not trust +himself in the king's power before all was certain, and confirmed +by oath. Whereon Thiodolf said that one must see the king on the +Jarl's part, and so I seemed the right man to go, as the jarl's +foster son and next in command to him. + +"Nevertheless," said Thiodolf, "I would not advise you to sail in +Halfdan's ship, for that might wake angry thoughts, and trouble +would come especially as Halfdan took her without leave when he was +outlawed." + +So I took the Jarl's cutter, manning her with enough men of my own +crew; and Kolgrim came with me, and we sailed to Kirkwall in +company with Thiodolf the scald. + +Then when Thiodolf took me into his presence, I saw Harald Fairhair +for the first time, as he sat to receive Einar's messenger in the +great hall that Sigurd had built and which we had dwelt in. Then I +thought that never before could have been one more like a king. +Hereafter, when sagamen will sing of a king in some fancied story, +they will surely make him like King Harald of Norway. I myself have +little skill to say what he was like beyond this--that never had I +seen a more handsome man, nor bigger, nor stronger. King-like he +was in all ways, and his face was bright and pleasant, though it +was plain that it would be terrible if he was angry, or with the +light of battle upon it. + +The hair, whence he had his name, was golden bright and shining, +and beard and eyebrows were of the same colour. But his eyes were +neither grey nor blue altogether, most piercing, seeming to look +straight into a man's heart, so that none dared lie to him. + +I think that it is saying much for King Harald that, though his +arms and dress were wonderfully rich and splendid, one cared only +to look on his face; and that though many men of worth were on the +high place with him, there seemed to be none but he present. + +When the scald told the king who I was, and what was my errand, +with all ceremony, he looked fixedly at me, so that I was ashamed, +and grew red under his gaze. Then he smiled pleasantly, and spoke +to me. His voice was as I thought to hear it--clear and steady, and +yet deep. + +"So, Ranald Vemundsson, you are worthy of your father. It may be +that you bear me ill will on his account, but I would have you +forget the deeds done that Norway might be one, and the happier +therefor." + +"Had my father been slain in fair fight, lord king," I said, "no +ill will had been thought of. It has not been in my mind that you +bade Rognvald slay him as he did. And that Jarl is dead, and the +feud is done with therefore. Jarl Einar is my foster father, +moreover." + +"That is well said," answered Harald. "But I thought Sigurd must +have fostered you; he was ever a close friend of Vemund's." + +I did not know why the king thought this, though the reason was at +my side; so I only said that my mother had given me to Einar's +keeping, and the king said no more at that time about it. + +After that I gave the Jarl's messages, and the king heard them well +enough, though it seemed to Einar that the weregild to be paid was +over heavy, and he had bidden me tell Harald that it was so. +Therefore the king said that he would give me an answer on the +morrow, and I went away into the town well pleased with his kindly +way with me. + +There was a feast made for me that night, and after it I must sit +still and hear the scalds sing of the deeds of Harald the king, +which was well enough. But then Thiodolf rose up and sang a great +saga about the winning of Sigurd's sword, wherein it seemed that I +had fought the dead jarl, and bale fires, and I know not what. He +had heard strange tales from Einar's men, if they told him all that +he sang. + +Some men may be pleased to hear their own deeds sung of, with more +added thus; but I was not used to it, and the turning of all eyes +to me made me uncomfortable. But Harald had paid no sort of heed to +what they sang of him, and so I tried to look at my ease, and gave +the scald a bracelet when he ended. + +"Overmuch make you of that matter, scald," said I quietly. + +He laughed a little, and answered: + +"One has to fill in what a warrior will not tell of himself." + +Now the men shouted when I gave Thiodolf the bracelet, and Harald +looked quickly at me. Then I thought that maybe I had overdone the +gift, though Einar had ever told me that a good scald deserved good +reward, and Thiodolf was well known as the best in Norway. It was a +heavy ring, silver gilt, and of good design, that I took from the +same viking whose sword I gave to Sigurd. + +"Overpaid am I," the scald said, putting it on his arm. + +"You are the first who has ever sung of me," I answered; "and the +voice and tune were wonderful, if the saga was too strong for me." + +Then Harald smiled again, and praised Thiodolf also, and I thought +no more of the matter. The feast was pleasant enough in the hall, +full of Harald's best men and chiefs, though it seemed strange to +sit as a guest in Einar's house. + +Now on the next morning I was to speak with the king about Einar's +business, and I went to him unarmed, as was right, save for helm +and Sigurd's sword. He was in the jarl's own chamber, and with him +were Thiodolf and a young scald named Harek, who sat with things +for writing before him, which was what I had never seen before. + +We talked for some time, and all went well for peace; but one more +message was to go and come between the king and Einar, and so I +said I would sail at once. + +"Not so much need for haste but that you can bide here for a day or +two," Harald said. "I will not have you complain of my hospitality +hereafter. And Thiodolf and Harek here want to learn more about +Sigurd's sword and its winning." + +"If I tell them the truth, I shall spoil their saga, lord king!" I +said, laughing. + +"Trust the scalds to mind you do not," he answered. "There are +times when I have to ask them which of my own doings they are +singing about now. But is there no wonder in the tale?" + +So I told him just how the matter was. And when he heard of the +noise, and the stroke with which the ships were smitten, he said, +looking troubled, as I thought: + +"Sigurd is stronger now that he is dead than when he lived. We felt +that stroke even here." + +But when I told how I had seen the dead jarl, his face grew +thoughtful, and at last he said: + +"So shall I lie some day in a grave mound. It is passing strange to +think on. I would that if one comes to my side he may step gently +as you, Ranald Vemundsson." + +"Else will that comer fare ill," said Thiodolf. + +The king glanced up at him, and his face changed, and he said, +smiling grimly: + +"Maybe. I think none will win my sword from me." + +Then he had Kolgrim sent for, and Thord, and they told him truly +what they had seen, and how they had fared in the matter. + +"You are a truth teller, Kolgrim the Tall," Harald said. "Now if +you will leave Einar's service and come and be of my courtmen, I +will speak to the jarl and make matters right with him, and it +shall be worth your while." + +Then my comrade answered plainly: + +"I am no jarl's man now, King Harald; I belong to King Ranald here, +and I will not leave him." + +"So," said Harald, knitting his brows suddenly, "we have two kings +in the room, as it seems; and you dare choose another instead of +me." + +"Not so, King Harald," Kolgrim answered, with all respect; "I chose +between the jarl and my king. If there is peace between you and the +jarl, I suppose we are all your men." + +Now Harald's face was growing black, and I could see that his anger +was rising. But he stayed what words he was about to speak, and +only said: + +"Jarl Einar is well served when he has a king in his train." + +Then he rose up and turned to Thiodolf, who was looking anxious. + +"Bid King Ranald to the feast tonight. He knows my words to Einar +his foster father, and I have no more to say." + +So I was dismissed, and was not sorry to be outside the hall. + +"Let us get down to the ship," said Thord. "Here is trouble +brewing, as I think." + +So we went on board, and I wished that we might go. Yet the king +had bidden me stay, and I had no reason for what would be +discourteous at least, if it did not look like flight. What the +trouble was we could hardly understand. + +In an hour's time or so I saw Thiodolf and the young scald Harek +coming along the wharf and towards our ship, which lay clear of +Harald's vessels, and next the harbour mouth. They came over the +gang plank, and I welcomed them, but I saw that they had somewhat +special to say to me. + +They sat down under the after awning with me, and at once Thiodolf +said: + +"That was an unlucky speech of your comrade's just now. No man +dares name himself king in Harald's presence--not even his own +sons. It is the one thing that he will not bear." + +"So it seemed," said I; "and, in truth, he had enough trouble with +under kings not long since. But he knows what a sea king is--no +king at all, so to speak. He need not grudge the old title." + +"That is not all," Thiodolf said. "It is in his mind that he has to +guard yet against risings of men of the old families of the kings, +and thinks you are likely to give him trouble. Maybe the portent of +the blow that spread from Sigurd's tomb to us has seemed much to +him. 'Here,' he says, 'is one who will gather masterless men to him +in crowds because he wears Sigurd's sword and ring, and has gained +with them the name of a hero. Already he has two of Einar's best +men at his heels. Yet I like him well enough, and I have no fault +to find with him, save that he puts a gold circle round his helm +and is called king--as he would have been but for me. Go to him, +therefore, and tell him to keep out of my way. I will not have two +kings in Norway.'" + +"Well," I said, "that is plain speaking. But I cannot help what the +men call me. The king makes overmuch of the business. I am not +foolish enough to try to overturn Harald Fairhair." + +"Maybe," said Thiodolf, "but those are his words. I rede you get +away quickly on the next tide." + +"Ay," said Harek. "Harald is mild of mood now, because you made no +secret of what men call you. Five years ago you would not have +escaped hence at all." + +"Then," said I, "I will go. I think you are right. Vemund's son +troubles Harald;" and I laughed, and added, "I have to thank you +for kindly counsel, scalds, as I think. Farewell. Tide serves at +any time now, and I will get my men and be gone." + +"That is wise," they answered. "Einar must find some other +messenger, if he comes not himself, after you return." + +They went, and I called two or three men and sent them into the +town for their comrades who were at friends' houses and in the +guest house where we were lodged, while Kolgrim made ready for +instant sailing. + +The next thing that I was ware of was that there was a fight on the +wharf end next the town, and men were running to it. Then I heard +my own name shouted on one part, and that of Eric, the king's young +son, on the other. So I was going to lead down twenty men to quiet +the scuffle, when my people had the best of the matter, and broke +through the throng, cheering, and came on to me. The rest did not +follow them, for they saw that I was coming, and the wharf was +clear behind them but for three of their foes who stayed where they +had fallen. + +Then another man broke away from the crowd, and came running after +my folk. It was Harek the scald, with his head broken. + +"Here are fine doings," said Kolgrim, as the men swarmed on board. +"What is on hand now?" + +"It is not done with yet," said a man: "look at yon ship." + +Then came Harek, out of breath, and pale. + +"Let me on board, King Ranald, or I am a dead man," he cried. + +"Come, then!" I answered; and he ran across the plank, and Kolgrim +pulled it in after him. All my men were come. + +Then I looked at the ship spoken of. Men were swarming into her, +and were making ready to sail. But if she meant to stay our going, +she was too far up the harbour, and we were already casting off the +shore ropes. + +"Hold on," said Thord; "here come the other scald and two men." + +The crowd that was yet round the fallen men had parted to let +Thiodolf pass, and he came quickly. One of the men bore a chest, +and the other a bale of somewhat. They gave these over the gunwale +to my people, and Thiodolf spoke to me from the wharf. + +"These are gifts from Harald to Einar's foster son," he said. "He +bids me say that you have done your errand well, and that this is +to prove it. Also he says that Ranald, son of Vemund, may need mail +to keep his kingship withal, and so he has sent you a suit." + +"That is a hard saying," I answered; "is it insult?" + +"Nay, but a broad hint only. The gift is most goodly." + +"Well," said I, "it is plain that he will warn me from Norway. I +will leave you, good friend, to say for me what should be said. +Maybe if I sent a message it would go wrongly from my lips." + +Thiodolf laughed, and bade me farewell. He paid no heed to Harek, +who sat on the deck with his back to him. + +Then Kolgrim whistled shrill to his men, and we began to move down +to the harbour mouth. I heard a sharp voice hurrying the men in the +other ship; but they could not be ready in time to catch us. + +When we were well out to sea, I asked Harek what all this was +about. + +"Your going has spoiled a plan that Eric, the king's son, had made. +He wanted your sword, and thought also that to rid himself now of +Vemund's son might save him trouble when the crown came to him, as +it will. You were to be set on as you came from the feast tonight +to the guest quarters, as if in a common broil between your men and +his. Then he found you were going, and tried to stay your men, and +next to take these gifts from Thiodolf and me, being very angry, +even to trying to cut me down. Lucky for me that his sword turned +in his hand. But he would have had me slain tonight, certainly, for +he says that it was our fault that you are getting away. He fears +Thiodolf, however. Now I must take service with you, if you will +have me." + +It seemed to me that I was making friends with one hand and enemies +with the other, and that last rather more quickly than was well. So +I laughed, and answered: + +"I suppose that if I have a scald of my own, King Harald will blame +me for overmuch kingship. However, he is angry enough already, and +maybe a good friend will balance that to me. So if you will indeed +cast in your lot with me, I am glad!" + +So I took his hand, and more than friends have he and I been from +that day forward. + +Now, when I looked at Harald's strangely-given gifts, I had reason +to say that he was open handed. The chest held two mail shirts, one +of steel rings, gold ornamented and fastened, and the other of +scales on deerskin, both fit for a king. There were two helms also, +one to match either byrnie {iv}, and a seax that was fit to +hang with Sigurd's sword. As for the bale, that held furs of the +best, and blue cloth and scarlet. If Harald banished me, it was for +no ill will; and it was handsomely done, as though he would fit me +out for the viking's path in all honour, that men might not deem me +outlawed for wrongdoing. So I have no ill word to say against him. +Five years later he would have troubled about me and my kingship +not at all; now he must be careful, for his power was not at its +full. + +As for young Eric, I suppose that he boasted ever after that he had +put me to flight; but I do not know that it matters if he did. + +So I came back to Durness, where I was to meet with Einar; and +peace was made between him and the king, and he thought it well to +go and speak with him. Then he and I must part, and that was hard. + +"Now must you go your own way, son Ranald, for Harald is too strong +for us. Maybe that is best for you, for here shall I bide in peace +in Orkney; and that is not a life for a king's son--to sit at a +jarl's table in idleness, or fight petty fights for scatt +withholden and the like. Better for you the wide seas and the lands +where you may make a name, and maybe a kingdom, for yourself. Yet I +shall miss you sorely." + +So he said, and I knew that he was right. Maybe the spirit of the +sword I had won got hold of me, as they say will happen; for I had +waxed restless of late, and I had tried to keep it from Einar. Now +I hated myself for it, seeing at hand what I had longed for. + +So he went north to meet Harald, and of our parting I will not say +more. I could not then tell that I should not see him again, and +that was well: but I know that when I saw the last flicker of his +sails against the sky, I felt more lonely even than at the +graveside in Southmere. + +Yet I was in no worse case than were many nobly-born men at that +time; for whosoever would not bow to Harald and his new laws must +leave Norway, and her bravest were seeking new homes everywhere. +Some had gone to far-off Iceland, and some to East Anglia; some to +the Greek emperor, or Gardariki, and more yet to Ireland. But the +greatest viking of all, Rolf, the son of Rognvald, Einar's young +brother, had gone to France or England, with a mighty following; +for Harald had outlawed him among the first who broke his law by +plundering on the Norway coasts. A good law it was, but it was new, +and so went against the grain at first. Rolf had sworn to make a +new kingdom for himself, and why should not I do the same? + +So when I was in the open sea again, with all the world before me, +as the long sea-miles passed I grew lighthearted, and many were the +thoughts of great deeds to come that filled my mind. + + + +Chapter III. Odda, the Ealdorman of Devon. + + +Now I steered eastward from Sutherland, and sailed down the east +coasts of Scotland and England; and there is nothing to say about +such a cruise, that had nought more wonderful in it than the +scaring of the folk when we put in for food. I had made up my mind +to go to Ireland for the winter, where, as every Northman knew, +there were kingdoms to be won--having no wish to be Rolf's +follower, seeing he was but a jarl's son; and finding that England +had no overlord, seeing that even now Alfred of Wessex and Guthrum +of East Anglia were fighting for mastery, so that the whole land +was racked and torn with strife. + +Maybe I thought too much of myself at that time, but I was in no +haste to do aught but cruise about and find where I might best make +a name. I had but my one ship and crew, and I would not throw them +away on some useless business for want of care in choosing. + +Now, when we came into the English Channel, a gale began to blow up +from the southwest; and we held over to the French shore, and there +put into a haven that was sheltered enough. The gale strengthened, +and lasted three days; but the people were kindly enough, being of +Saxon kin, who had settled there under the headland they call +Greynose, since Hengist's times of the winning of England across +the water. And when the gale was over, we waited for the sea to go +down, and then came a fair wind from the eastward, as we expected. +So we got provisions on board, and sailed westward again, taking a +long slant over to the English coast, until we sighted the great +rock of Portland; and then the wind came off the land, and in the +early morning veered to the northwest. + +The tide was still with us as the light strengthened; then as the +day broke, with the haze of late summer over the land, we found +that we were right in the track of a strange fleet that was coming +up fast from the westward--great ships and small, in a strange +medley and in no sort of order, so that we wondered what they would +be. + +"Here comes Rolf Ganger back from Valland," said Kolgrim. "He has +gathered any vessels he could get together, and is going to land in +England." + +"We will even head out to sea from across their course," I said. +"Maybe they are Danes from Exeter, flying from the Saxons." + +So we headed away for the open channel until at least we knew more. +The fleet drew up steadily, bringing the tide with them; and +presently we fell to wondering at the gathering. For there were +some half-dozen ships that were plainly Norse like ourselves, maybe +twenty Danish-built longships, and about the same number of heavy +trading vessels. There were a few large fishing boats also; but +leading the crowd were five great vessels the like of which none of +us had ever seen or heard of before. And even as we spoke of them, +two of these shook out reefs in their sails, and drew away from the +rest across channel, as if to cut us off. + +"Ho, men," I said, when I saw that, "get to arms; for here they +come to speak with us. Maybe we shall have to fight--and these are +no easy nuts to crack!" + +Whereat the men laughed; and straightway there was the pleasant +hustle and talk of those who donned mail shirt and helm and set the +throwing weapons to hand with all good will. + +"Let us keep on our course," I said to Kolgrim. "We will see if we +cannot weather on these ships, and anyway shall fight them better +apart from the rest. It is a fine breeze for a sailing match." + +So we held on; and the two great ships to windward of us began to +gain on us slowly, which was a thing that had never been done by +any ship before. I do not know that even Harald Fairhair had any +swifter ship than this that Halfdan had taken in his flight from +home. Kolgrim waxed very wroth when it became plain that these +could outsail us. + +"There is witchcraft about those great hulks," he growled. "They +are neither Norse, nor Frisian, nor Danish, but better than all +three put together." + +"I have sailed in ships, and talked of ships, and dreamed of them +moreover, since I could stand alone," said Thord, "but I never so +much as thought of the like of these. If they belong to some new +kind of viking, there are hard times in store for some of us." + +"Faith," said I, "I believe they have swept up and made prizes of +all that medley astern of them." + +So we held on for half an hour, and all that time they gained +steadily on us; and we neared them quickly at last, for we tried to +hold across their bows and weather on them. That was no good, for +they were as weatherly as we. + +Now we could see that their decks were covered with armed men, and +it seemed certain that they meant to make prize of us. The leading +ship was maybe half a mile ahead of the other, and that a mile from +us--all three close-hauled as we strove to gain a weather berth. +Then the leading ship put her helm up and stood across our course, +and the second followed her. + +"We must out oars now if we are to weather on them," said Kolgrim +at last. + +Then the men shouted; and I looked at the second ship, to which +they were pointing. Her great sail was overboard, for the halliards +had gone--chafed through maybe, or snapped with the strain as she +paid off quickly. Then a new hope came to me. + +"Men," I said, "let us take the other vessel, and then come back on +this; they are worth winning." + +They cheered. And now the fight seemed to be even--ship to ship at +least, if our foe was larger and higher and swifter than ours; for +I thought that he would hardly have a crew like mine. + +We up helm and stood away on the new course the foe had taken, +leaving the crippled ship astern very fast. And now we began to +edge up towards the other vessel, meaning to go about under her +stern, and so shoot to windward of her on the other tack. But then +I thought of a plan which might help us in the fighting. There had +seemed little order and much shouting on board the ship we had left +when her sail fell, and maybe there was the same want of discipline +here. + +"Out oars, men! Keep them swinging, but put no weight on them. Let +them pull after us and tire themselves. I have a mind to see how +our dragon looks on yonder high stem head." + +The men laughed grimly, and the oars were run out. One called to +me: + +"Maybe they beat us in sailing, king; we can teach them somewhat in +weapon play." + +"See how they get their oars out," said Kolgrim, with a sour grin; +"a set of lubbers they are." + +One by one, and in no order, the long oars were being got to work. +The great ship was half as long again as ours, pulling twenty-eight +oars a side to our twenty. But while ours rose and fell as if +worked by one man, theirs were pulled anyhow, as one might say. + +"Better are they at sailing than rowing," said Thord. + +Nevertheless they flew down on us, and that because we only made a +show of rowing. + +Then we laid on the oars, and came head to wind. The sail rattled +down, and was stowed on deck; and silently we waited, arrows on +string, for the fight that was now close at hand. + +Then the great ship hove up, head to wind, right ahead of us, and a +loud hail came from her. + +"Who knows what tongue he talks?" I said. "I cannot make him out +rightly." + +"'Tis West Saxon," said an old warrior from the waist. "He asks who +we are and what is our business." + +"Tell him therefore, if you can speak in his way," I answered; "and +ask the same of him." + +So a hail or two went backwards and forwards, and then: + +"Says he is Odda, jarl or somewhat of Devon in Wessex, and bids us +yield to Alfred the king." + +"In truth," said I, "if he had not spoken of yielding, I had had +more to say to a king who can build ships like these. Now we will +speak with him on his own deck. Tell him he will have to fight us +first." + +The old warrior sent a mighty curt hail back in answer to Odda's +summons; then our war horns blew, and the oars rose and fell, and +we were grinding our bows alongside the great ship's quarter before +they knew we were there. Alfred's men had yet somewhat to learn of +fighting in a sea way, as it seemed, for we were on their deck aft +before they had risen from their oar benches. There were but one or +two men on the quarter deck, besides the steersman, to oppose us. +Odda thought we should lay our ship alongside his towering sides if +we fought, as I suppose, for he was amidships. + +So we swept the decks from aft forward without any hurt to +ourselves: for the Saxons were hampered with the oars, and fell +backward over them, and hindered one another. It was strange to +hear my men laughing in what seemed most terrible slaughter; for +their foes fell before they were smitten, and lay helpless under +the oars, while their comrades fell over them. + +So we won to the foot of the mast, and then found that there were +some on board who were none so helpless: for as we came they swung +the great yard athwart ships, and that stayed us; while over the +heap of canvas glared those who would make it hard for us to win +the ship altogether. + +But before we came to stern fighting, I had a word to say; so I +called for Odda. + +A square built, brown-bearded man with a red, angry face pushed his +way to the front of his men, and frowned at me. + +"What will you? here am I," he said shortly. + +One could understand his words well enough when face to face, for +he spoke in the mixed tongue that any Northman understands, the +plain words of which all our kin have in common. + +"I am no foe of Alfred's," I said; "I do not know, therefore, why I +should fight you." + +"Are you not for the Danes?" he said. + +"I hate them more or less, and I have no traffic with them." + +"Well, then, what will you?" + +"You bade me yield, and therefore I am here. Now I think it is a +matter to be seen whether of us does so." + +"It seems that you have slain about half my men," he said. +"Nevertheless, I do not give up without fighting for the rest of my +ship that you have not won." + +"That is well said," I answered. + +But the men were laughing, for Kolgrim had stooped, and, reaching +under an oar bench, had dragged out a rower by the neck. The man +swore and struggled; but Kolgrim hove him up, and lifted him over +the yard to Odda's feet. + +"They are all like that, Saxon," he said cheerfully. "Maybe there +is a head or two broken; 'tis mostly what we call seasickness, +however." + +Odda looked at the man, who seemed wretched enough, but had no +hurt; then he stared at our laughing faces, and his own brow began +to clear. + +"It comes into my mind," he said, "that maybe you would listen to +me if I owned first that you have the best of us, and then asked +you to fight for Alfred of Wessex. We need the help of such men as +you just now; and if you hate Danes, we have work enough for you." + +"One may certainly listen to that," I answered, laughing. + +"What say you, men? Shall we cast in our lot with Alfred for a +while?" + +"We follow you, Ranald the king," Kolgrim answered for all. "If it +seems good to you, it is good for us. There will be fighting +enough, I trow, if all we have heard is true." + +Then said Odda: + +"And that before long. There is a Danish fleet in Poole Harbour +that is to bring Danes from Wareham to the help of those whom +Alfred holds in Exeter. We have to meet this fleet and scatter it." + +"Then," said old Thord, "your men must be better handled, for Danes +are no new swordsmen or seamen either." + +Now the men stood listening to our talk, and this sort of saying +was not good for them to hear, if they were to meet the foe soon +with a good hope of victory. So Odda said quickly: + +"If you will indeed fight for us, you must trust to Alfred to give +you fitting reward. I do not know what I might say about that, +having thought of no such chance as this. But there is no man who +can complain of him." + +I had heard that the king was ever open handed, but also that at +this time he had little to give. Maybe, however, we might help him +to riches again. I had the men to think of, but I will say for +myself that I had not thought of asking what reward or pay should +be given. + +I sheathed my sword, and held out my hand to Odda across the yard +that was between us; and he grasped it honestly, while the men on +either side cheered. + +"Stay here and speak with me," Odda said. "Now we must get back to +the fleet." + +Then went back to our ship, all but Thord and half a dozen +warriors, whom he kept as guard for me, I suppose; and the +grappling lines were cast off. Then we made sail again, and headed +to rejoin the rest of the Saxon vessels. Odda's crippled ship had +repaired her damage at this time, and went with us. But first it +was plain that she thought we had taken her consort, for she +prepared to fight us, and Odda had to hail her once or twice before +she was sure of what had happened. Then her crew cheered also. + +Now Odda took me aft, and we sat together on his quarter deck. +Thord came also, and leaned on the rail beside us, looking with +much disfavour at the crew, who were plainly landsmen at sea for +the first time, if they were stout fighting men enough. Maybe there +were ten seamen among the hundred and fifty, but these had handled +the ship well under canvas, as we knew. + +"You have come in good time, King Ranald," Odda said. "You see what +state we are in; can you better it for us?" + +"Many things I can see that need strengthening," I answered. "But +you seem to take me into your counsels over soon, seeing that I +have just fallen on you sword in hand." + +"Why," said Odda frankly, "it is just your way of speaking to me +sword in hand that makes me sure that I can trust you. I cannot +deny that you had this ship at your mercy, and that the other would +have been yours next; and you knew it, and yet spoke me fair. So it +is plain that you mean well by us." + +"Ay," said I, "but for your bidding me to yield, there would have +been no fighting at all, when I knew to whom the ships belonged." + +"You have put a thought in my mind, and I am glad you did board us, +seeing there is no harm done," Odda answered. "I will tell you what +it is. Send me some of your men to order my people and tell them +how to prepare for battle. Here am I sent to sea for the first +time, with good warriors enough who are in like case, and a few +seamen who can sail the ship and know nought else." + +"You have some Norsemen yonder, if I mistake not," I said, looking +at the fleet which we were nearing. + +"Ay--wandering vikings who care nought for what I say. They were +going to Rolf, and the king persuaded them to take this cruise +first. If you can make them follow you, there will be another +matter for which I shall be more than thankful." + +Thereat Thord growled: "They will follow Ranald Vemundsson well +enough; have no care about that." + +Then said I: + +"These are the finest ships I have ever seen. Where did they come +from?" + +"Alfred, our king, planned them," said Odda, with much pride; "and +they were built by our own men, working under Frisian shipwrights, +in Plymouth." + +"How will you like to command one of these, Thord?" I asked then. + +"I like the ship well enough. The crew is bad. And then, whose +command is the fleet under?" + +"Take the ship, Thord, and lick my crew into shape; and Ranald, +your king, shall command the fleet," Odda said plainly. + +"Fair and softly," said Thord bluntly. "I can do the two things you +ask me; but will your men follow Ranald?" + +"Faith," said Odda, "if I say they are to do so, they must." + +So in the end I left Thord and my seamen with Odda; but I would not +take his place, only saying that I would lead the Norsemen, and +that he could follow our plans. I would put more good men into each +of his five ships, and they should do what they could. At least +they could teach the Saxons how to board a ship, and how to man +their own sides against boarders from a foe. + +Those Norsemen said they would gladly follow the son of King Vemund +and foster son of Einar the jarl; and so we led the strange fleet, +and held on eastward with a light breeze all that day, making +little way when the tide turned, and held back by the slower +vessels. Men in plenty there were, but ill fitted for aught but +hand fighting; though I had more Norsemen sent into the larger +ships, such as those that had been taken from the Danes and the +better trading vessels. One might soon see the difference in the +trim and order on board as the vikings got to work and the Saxons +overcame their sickness. + +Now we might meet the Danes at any time, and I could not tell how +matters would go. One thing was certain, however, and that was that +they looked for no gathering of ships by Alfred. We should +certainly take them by surprise, and I hoped, therefore, that they +would be in no trim for fighting. + +There was a very swift cutter belonging to the Norsemen, and as +night fell I sent her on to keep watch along the shore for the +first coming of the Danes, while we shortened sail; for the mouth +of Poole Harbour was not far distant, and if we passed that we +should be seen, and perhaps it would be guessed that we were not a +friendly fleet. Towards evening, too, the wind shifted, and blew +more off the shore, and that might bring them out from their haven. +Kolgrim, who was weather wise, said that a shift of wind to the +southward was coming presently. + +When morning came, the high cliffs of Swanage were on our bow, the +wind was yet steady from off shore, and beyond the headland lay +Poole Harbour, at whose head is Wareham, where the Danes were. It +is a great sea inlet with a narrow mouth, and one must have water +enough on a rising tide to enter it. Now the ebb was running, and +if the Danes came this morning, it would be soon. + +They came, as it seemed, for the cutter was flying back to us under +sail and oars; and before she reached us, the first Danish ships +were clear of the Swanage headlands, making for the offing. Then I +got my ships into line abreast, and Thord worked up Odda's five +alongside us to seaward; and all the while the Danish sails hove +into sight in no sort of order, and seeming so sure that none but +friends could be afloat that they paid no heed to us. + +Soon there were full a hundred vessels of all sorts off Swanage +point, and the cutter brought word that there were but twenty more. +Then I ran up my fighting flag, and everywhere along our line rose +a great cheering as we hoisted sail and sped down on the foe. It +was long since the seas had borne a fleet whence the Saxon war cry +rang. + +The leading Danes were ahead of us as we gathered way, and their +long line straggled right athwart our course. We should strike +their midmost ships; and at last they saw what was coming, and +heard the din of war horns and men's voices that came down wind to +them, and there were confusion and clamour on their decks, and +voices seemed to call for order that did not come. + +Then one or two longships from among them struck sail and cleared +for action, and on these swooped Alfred's great ships. Odda's +crashed upon and sank the first she met, and plunged and shook +herself free from the wreck, and sought another. And beyond her the +same was being wrought; and cheers and cries were strangely mixed +where those high bows went forward unfaltering. + +Now a ship crowded with men was before me. As we boarded, her crew +were yet half armed, and struggling to reach the weapon chests +through the press, even while our dragon head was splintering the +gunwale; and I leaped on board her, with my men after me and Harek +beside me. + +Then sword Helmbiter was let loose for the first time since Sigurd +wielded her; and though a great and terrible cry came from over the +water as one of Alfred's ships sank another Dane, I could look no +more, for there was stern fighting before me. + +What a sword that was! Hardly could my arm feel the weight of it as +it swung in perfect balance, and yet I knew the weight it had as it +fell. Helm and mail seemed as nought before the keen edge, and the +shields flew in twain as it touched them. + +Forward I went, and aft went Harek the scald, and there was soon an +end. The Danes went overboard, swimming or sinking, as their fate +might be, and only the slain bided before us. The ship was ours, +and I looked round to see what should be next. No other ship had +come to help our prey. + +Then I saw a wonderful sight. Panic terror had fallen on the Danes, +and not one ship of all that great fleet was not flying down the +wind without thought of fighting. Among them went our vessels, +great and small, each doing her work well; and the Saxon shouts +were full of victory. + +So we must after them, and once more we boarded a longship, and had +the victory; and then we were off the haven mouth, and with the +flood tide the wind was coming up in gusts from the southeast that +seemed to bode angry weather. By that time no two Danish ships were +in company, and the tide was setting them out to sea. + +"Here is a gale coming," said Kolgrim, looking at the sky and the +whitening wave crests. "We had best get our ships into this haven +while we can." + +It seemed that Thord was of the same mind, for now he was heading +homeward, and the other Saxons were putting about and following +him. So I got men into the best of the ships we had taken, and +waited till Thord in Odda's ship led the way, and so followed into +Poole Harbour. + +Well it was for us that we had refuge so handy. For by noonday the +gale was blowing from the southwest, and two Danish ships were +wrecked in trying to gain the harbour--preferring to yield to us +rather than face the sea, with a lee shore, rocky and hopeless, +waiting for them. + +We went into the Poole inlet, which is on the eastern side of the +wide waters of the haven, and there found good berths enough. The +village was empty, save for a few Saxon fishermen, who hailed us +joyfully. And then Odda made for us as good a feast as he might in +the best house that was there, bidding every shipmaster to it. +Merry enough were all, though we had but ship fare; for the Saxons +had great hopes from this victory. + +Now Odda made much of what I had done--though it was little +enough--saying that I and my men deserved well of Alfred, and that +he hoped that we should stay with him for this winter, which would +perhaps see the end of the war. + +"Why," said I, "things would have been much the same if I had not +been here." + +"That they would not," he answered. "I should have blundered past +this place in the night, and so lost the Danes altogether; or if I +had not done that, they would soon have found out what state my men +were in. You should have heard old Thord rate them into order; it +is in my mind that he even called me--Odda the ealdorman--hard +names in his broad Norse tongue. But at least he gave us somewhat +more to think of than the sickness that comes of heaving planks +that will by no means keep steady for a moment." + +He laughed heartily at himself, and then added: + +"Good King Alfred thought not at all of that matter. Now I can +shift the whole credit of this victory to your shoulders, and then +he will not believe that I am the born sea captain that he would +have me think myself." + +"I will not have that," I said, "for I have not deserved it." + +"Ay; but, I pray you, let me put it from myself, else shall I be +sent to sea again without any one to look to for advice," he said +earnestly, and half laughing at the same time. "I did but take +command of this fleet because the king could find no one else at a +pinch. Heaven defend me from such a charge again!" + +"Now you have only the Exeter Danes to deal with," I said. + +"How many men might these ships have held?" he asked. + +"Maybe five thousand," I answered. + +Thereat his face changed, and he rose up from his seat at the high +table, and said that he would go down to see that the ships were +safe, for the gale was blowing heavily as the night fell. + +So we went outside the house, and called a man, telling him to find +one of the Poole fishermen and bring him to speak to us. + +"There were twelve thousand Danes in Wareham," he said, "for more +have come lately. I thought they would all have been in the ships." + +"If that had been possible, not one would have seen the morning's +light," I answered, "for their ships are lost in this gale +certainly." + +Now I will say that I was right. The wrecks strewed the shore of +Dorset and Hants next morning; and if any men won to land, there +waited for them the fishers and churls, who hated them. No Danish +fleet was left in the channel after that gale was spent. + +When the fisher came, he told us that as many more Danes were left +in Wareham, and that those from Poole had fled thither when they +saw what had happened to the fleet. + +"Shall you march on Wareham and scatter them, or will they fall on +us here?" I asked; for we had no more than two thousand men at +most. + +"I would that I knew what they thought of this business," he +answered; "but I shall not move tonight. It is far by land, and I +suppose we could not get the ships up in the dark." + +So he posted pickets along the road to Wareham, and we went back to +the house for a while. And presently, as it grew dark, a wild +thought came into my mind. I would go to Wareham with a guide, and +see what I could find out of the Danish plans. Maybe there were +fewer men than was thought, or they might be panic-stricken at our +coming in this wise; or, again, they might march on us, and if so, +we should have to get to sea again, to escape from double our +numbers. + +Now the more I thought of this, the more I grew bent on going, for +I was sure that we must know what was going on. And at last I took +Odda aside while Harek sang among the men, and told him what I +would do. + +At first he was against my running the risk; but I told him that a +Norseman might go safely where a Saxon could not among the Danes, +and at last I persuaded him. Then I called Kolgrim, and we went out +together into the moonlight and the wind, to find the fisherman we +had spoken with already and get him to act as guide. I think that +Odda did not expect to see either of us again; and when I came to +know more of Saxons, I learned that he trusted me most fully, for +many thanes would have thought it likely that I went on some +treacherous errand. + + + +Chapter IV. Jarl Osmund's Daughter. + + +To my mind, no gale seems so wild as one that comes at the time of +full moon, when the clouds break up and fly in great masses of +black and silver against the deeper sky beyond, while bright light +and deepest shadow chase each other across land and sea beneath +them. Kolgrim and I stood under the lee of a shed, waiting for the +fisher to get his boat afloat, and looked out on bending trees and +whitened water, while beyond the harbour we could see the great +downs, clear cut and dark, almost as well as by day, so bright it +was. + +It was low water now, which was good for us, for the winding +channels that lead up to Wareham were sheltered under their bare +banks. We could hear the thunder of the surf along the rocky coast +outside, when the wind ceased its howling for a moment; and at high +water the haven had been well nigh too stormy for a small boat. Now +we should do best to go by water, for wind was with us; though, +unless the gale dropped very quickly, we could not return in her, +for there would be a heavy sea and tide against us if we could get +away before it turned, while if we were long wind against tide +would be worse yet. + +The fisherman was eager to help us against the Danes, who had made +him work for nought; and so in half an hour we were flying up the +haven on the first rise of tide, and the lights of Wareham town +grew plainer every moment. From the number of twinkling sparks that +flitted here and there, it would seem that many folk were waking, +even if some movement were not on hand. + +Presently we turned into the channel that bends to the southwest +from the more open water, and the town was before us. The fisher +took to his oars now, lowering the scrap of sail that had been +enough to drive us very swiftly before the gale so far. + +Wareham stands on the tongue of land between two rivers' mouths, +and the tide was setting us into the northward of these. That was +the river one would have to cross in coming to or from Poole, and +maybe we should learn as much there as anywhere. + +There were three ships on the mud, but even in the moonlight it was +plain that they were not seaworthy. There were wide gaps in their +bulwarks, which none had tried to mend, and the stem head of one +was gone. + +"These ships were hurt in the storm of lest week," the fisher said, +as we drifted past them; "there was hardly one that came in unhurt. +But the Danes were eager to go, and mended them as they could." + +Perhaps that was partly the reason why we gained so easy a victory, +I thought at the time, and afterwards knew that I was right. They +had suffered very much, while we lay across channel in safety. + +There loomed before us the timbers of a strong bridge that had been +over the north river, when we were fairly in it and under the +nearer houses of the town. But now it was broken down, and the gap +in its middle was too wide for hasty repair. + +"When was this done?" I asked the fisherman. + +"Since yesterday," he answered. + +Now this seemed to me to indicate that the Danes meant to guard +against attack by land from Poole; also that they overrated our +numbers, which was probable in any case, seeing that a fleet had +fled from before us. + +There were wharves on the seaward side of the bridge, but none were +beyond; and the houses stood back from the water, so that there was +a sort of open green between it and them. There were no people +about, but we could hear shouts from the town now and then. + +"Let us go ashore and speak with some one," I said; "it is of no +use our biding here on the water." + +Kolgrim and I were fully armed, and had boat cloaks with us which +covered us well, and we thought none would question who we were if +we mixed among the men in some inn or other gathering place. So we +bade the fisher wait for us, and found the stairs, and went to the +wide green along the waterside, and across it to the houses, which +were mostly poor enough here. + +Many of them stood open, and in one a fire burned on the hearth, +but all were empty. So we turned into a street that led seemingly +from one bridge to the other across the town. Here men were going +hither and thither with torches, and groups were outside some of +the houses. To the nearest of these I went, as if I had all right +to be in the place. + +They were bringing goods out of the house, and loading a cart with +them. + +"Here is a flitting," said Kolgrim, "and another or two are on hand +yonder." + +I stayed a man who came past me from out of a house. + +"I have fled from Poole," I said. "What is in the wind here? Are we +to leave Wareham also?" + +"If you come from Poole, you should know that it is time we did +so," he answered shortly. "I suppose you saw the whole business." + +"So I did," I answered. "What are the orders?" + +"Pack up and quit with all haste," said he. "You had better get to +work if you have aught to save." + +"Shall we go to Exeter, or back to Mercia?" I said. + +"Exeter they say; but I know not. Why not go and ask Jarl Osmund +himself--or follow the crowd and hinder no one with questions?" + +He hurried on; but then some men began to question us about the +doings off Swanage, and Kolgrim told them such tales that they +shivered, and soon we had a crowd round us listening. Nor did I +like to hurry away, for I heard a man say that we were Northmen, by +our voices. But there were plenty of our folk among the Danes. + +Then came a patrol of horsemen down the street, and they bade the +loiterers hurry. I drew Kolgrim into an open doorway, and stood +there till they passed, hearing them rate their fellows for delay. + +"Wareham will be empty tomorrow," I said. "Now we can go; we have +learned enough." + +Still I would see more, for there seemed no danger. Every man was +thinking of himself. So we went across the town, and as we came +near the western bridge the crowd grew very thick. + +We heard before long that the army was as great as Odda had +thought, and that they were going to Exeter. Already the advance +guard had gone forward, but this train of followers would hardly +get clear of the town before daylight. They had heard great +accounts of our numbers, and I wished we had brought the ships up +here at once. There would have been a rout of the Danes. + +But the place was strange to me, and to Odda also, so that we could +not be blamed. + +We got back by the way we came, and then knew that we could in no +way take the boat to Poole. The gale was raging at its highest, and +thatch was flying from the exposed roofs. It would be dead against +us; and the sea was white with foam, even in the haven. So we must +go by road, and that was a long way. But we must get back to Odda, +for he should be in Wareham before the Danes learned, maybe, that +their flight was too hurried. + +Now it seemed to me that to leave Wareham was not so safe as to +come into it, for no Dane would be going away from the place. +However, the bridge was down; and if it had not been done in too +great haste, any fugitives from the country would have come in. So +that maybe we should meet no one on the road that goes along the +shore of the great haven. + +The fisherman ferried us over to the opposite shore, and then tied +his boat to the staging of the landing place, saying that he was +well known and in no danger. He would sleep now, and bring his boat +back when the wind fell. So we left him, thanking him for his +goodwill. + +Grumbling, as men will, we set out on our long walk in the gale. We +could not miss the road, for it never left the curves of the shore, +and all we had to do was to be heedful of any meetings. There might +be outposts even yet, watching against surprise. + +However, we saw no man in the first mile, and then were feeling +more secure, when we came to a large farmstead which stood a short +bowshot back from the road, with a lane of its own leading to the +great door. What buildings there were seemed to be behind it, and +no man was about; but there was light shining from one of the high +windows, as if some one were inside, and plain to be seen in the +moonlight were two horses tied by the stone mounting block at the +doorway. + +"Here is a chance for us, master," said my comrade, coming to a +stand in the roadway. "I must try to steal these horses for +ourselves. If Danes are in the place, they have doubtless stolen +them; and if Saxons, they will get them back." + +"There will be no Saxon dwelling so near the Danes," I said. "Maybe +the place is full of Danes--some outpost that is careless." + +"Careless enough," said Kolgrim. "If they are careless for three +minutes more, they have lost their horses." + +Then we loosened our swords in their sheaths, and drew our seaxes, +and went swiftly up the grassy lane. The wind howled round the +house so that none would hear the clank of mail, which we could not +altogether prevent. But the horses heard us, and one shifted about +and whinnied as if glad to welcome us. + +At that we ran and each took the bridle of that next him, and cut +the halter that was tied to the rings in the wall, looking to see +the doors thrown open at any moment. Then we leaped to the saddles +and turned to go. The hoofs made a great noise on the paving stones +before the doorway, yet there was no sound from inside the house. + +That seemed strange to me, and I sat still, looking back with the +horse's head turned towards the main road. + +"Stay not, master," Kolgrim said. "'Tis some outpost, and the men +have slept over the farmhouse ale. Maybe the stables behind are +full of horses. Have a care, master; the door opens!" + +He was going; but I waited for a moment, half expecting to see a +spear point come first, and my hand was on my sword hilt. But the +great heavy door swung slowly, as if the one who opened it had +trouble with its weight. So I must needs see who came. Maybe it was +some old man or woman whose terror I could quiet in a few words. + +Then the red firelight from within shone out on me, and in the +doorway, with arms raised to post and door on either hand, stood a +tall maiden, white robed, with gold on neck and arm. The moonlight +on her seemed weird with the glow of the fire shining through the +edges of her hood and sleeves. I could see her face plainly, and it +was fair and troubled, but there was no fear in her looks. + +"Father, is this you?" she said quietly. + +I could make no answer to that, and she looked intently at me; for +the moon was beyond me, and both Kolgrim and I would seem black +against it, as she came from the light within, while the wind, keen +with salt spray, was blowing in her face. + +"Who is it?" she said again. "I can scarcely see for moon and wind +in my eyes." + +"Friends, lady," I said, for that at least was true in a way. + +"Where are my horses? Have you seen aught of our thralls, who +should have left them?" she asked, looking to whence we had just +taken the beasts. + +Now I was ashamed to have taken them, for she was so plainly alone +and helpless, and I could not understand altogether how it could be +so. I was sure that she was Danish, too. + +"How is it that you have not fled, lady?" I asked. "Surely you +should have gone." + +"Ay; but the thralls fled when they heard the news. Has not my +father sent you back for me?" + +This seemed a terrible plight for the maiden, and I knew not what +to say or do. She could not be left in the way of our Saxons if +they came on the morrow, and I could not take her to Poole. And so, +lest I should terrify her altogether, I made up my mind even as she +looked to me for an answer. + +"I think your father is kept in Wareham in some way. Does he look +for you there?" + +"Ay, surely," she answered; but there was a note as of some new +fear in her voice. "Has aught befallen him? Have the Saxons come?" + +"All is well in Wareham yet," I answered. "Now we will take you to +your father. But we are strangers, as you may see." + +Then I called to Kolgrim, who was listening open eyed to all this, +and backed away from the door a little. + +"What is this madness, master?" he whispered hoarsely. + +"No madness at all. Ten minutes' ride to Wareham with the maiden, +give her to the fisherman to take to her friends, and then ride +away--that is all. Then we shall be in Poole long before any look +for us, for we are in luck's way." + +Kolgrim laughed. + +"Strange dangers must I run with you, master; but that is what one +might look for with Ranald of the Sword." + +Then I got off the horse, which was very strong and seemed quiet, +and went to the maiden again. + +"It will be best for you to come with us, lady," I said "we will +see you safely to Wareham." + +The light fell on my arms now, and they were splendid enough, being +Harald Fairhair's gift, which I had put on for the fight, seeing +that the men loved to see their king go bravely, and being, +moreover, nowise loth to do so myself. She seemed to take +heart--for she was well nigh weeping now--when she saw that I was +not some wandering soldier of the great host. + +"My horses, two of them should be here," she said. "I bade the +thralls leave them when they fled." + +So she thought not that we had loosed them, and did not know her +own in the moonlight. Maybe she had no knowledge as to which of +many had been left, and I was glad of that, for so her fear was +less. + +"You must ride with us," I said, "and I would ask you to come +quickly; even now the host is leaving Wareham." + +"Ay, is that so? Then my father is busy," she said, and then she +faltered a little, and looked at me questioningly. "I cannot go +without my nurse, and she is very sick. I think she sleeps now. Men +feared her sickness so that we brought her here from the town. But +indeed there is nought to fear; there is no fever or aught that +another might take from her." + +Then I grew fairly anxious, for this was more than I had looked +for. I knew that it was likely that she would soon be missed and +sought for; yet I could not think of leaving her to that chance, +with the bridge broken moreover. + +I gave the bridle to Kolgrim then to hold. + +"Let me see your nurse," I said gently; "I have some skill in these +troubles." + +She led me into the house without a word. All the lower story was +in one great room, with a hearth and bright fire thereon in the +centre. Beyond that was a low bed, to which the maiden went. A very +old woman, happed in furs and heavy blankets, lay on it, and it +needed but one look to tell me that she needed no care but the +last. Past need of flight was she, for she was dead, though so +peacefully that her watcher had not known it. + +"The sleep is good, is it not?" the maiden said, looking anxiously +into my face. + +"It is good, lady," I answered, taking off my helm. "It is the best +sleep of all--the sleep that heals all things." + +The maiden looked once at the quiet face, and once more at me, with +wide eyes, and then she knew what I meant, and turned quickly from +me and wept silently. + +I stood beside her, not daring to speak, and yet longing to be on +the road. And so still were we that Kolgrim got off his horse and +came to the door and called me, though not loudly. + +I stepped back to him. + +"Come again in a few minutes and say one word--'Saxons'" I +whispered, "then we shall go." + +He nodded and drew back. I think the maiden had not heard me move, +for she was bent over the bed and what lay thereon. It seemed very +long to me before I heard my comrade at the door. + +"Saxons, master!" he said loudly. + +"Say you so?" I answered, and then I touched the maiden's arm +gently. + +"Lady, we must go quickly," I said. "The dame is past all help of +ours, and none can harm her. Come, I pray you." + +She stood up then, still looking away from me, and I drew the +covering over the still face she gazed at. + +"You must leave her, and I know these Saxons will not wrong the +dead," said I gently. "Your father will miss you." + +"I am keeping you also in danger," she answered bravely. "I will +come." + +"Loth to go am I," she said, as she gathered her wrappings to her +and made ready very quickly, "for it seems hard. But hard things +come to many in time of war." + +After that she ceased weeping, and was, as I thought, very brave in +this trouble, which was indeed great to her. And when she was clad +in outdoor gear, she bent once more over the bed as in farewell, +while I turned away to Kolgrim and made ready the horses. Then she +came, and mounted behind me on a skin that I had taken from a chair +before the hearth. + +Then we were away, and I was very glad. The good horse made nothing +of the burden, and we went quickly. Many a time had I ridden +double, with the rough grip of some mail-shirted warrior round my +waist, as we hurried back to the ships after a foray; but this was +the first time I had had charge of a lady, and it was in a strange +time and way enough. I do not know if it was in the hurry of +flight, or because they had none, but the horses had no saddles +such as were for ladies' use. + +So I did not speak till we were half a mile from the house, and +then came a hill, and we walked, because I feared to discomfort my +companion. Then I said: + +"Lady, we are strangers, and know not to whom we speak nor to whom +we must take you." + +There was a touch of surprise in her voice as she answered: + +"I am the Lady Thora, Jarl Osmund's daughter." + +Then I understood how this was the chief to whom the man I spoke +with first had bidden me go for orders. It was plain now that he +was up and down among the host ordering all things, and deeming his +daughter in safety all the while. He had not had time to learn how +his cowardly folk had fled and left their mistress, fearing perhaps +the sickness of the old dame as much as the Saxon levies. + +Now no more was said till we came to the riverside, where the flood +tide was roaring through the broken timbers of the bridge. The +fisher slept soundly despite the noise of wind and water, and +Kolgrim had some trouble in waking him. + +"How goes the flight?" I asked him when he came ashore with the +boat's painter in his hand. + +"Faith, master, I know not. I have slept well," he said. + +Now by this time it seemed to me that I ought to take the lady into +a safe place, and I would go myself rather than leave her to the +fisherman, who was rough, and hated the Danes heartily, as I knew. +Moreover, I had a new plan in my head which pleased me mightily. +Then I thought that if I were to meet any man who suspected me, +which was not likely, the Lady Thora would be pass enough for me. +So I told Kolgrim to bide here for me, and he said at first that he +must be with me. However, I made him stay against his will at last, +telling him what I thought. + +Then the fisher put us across quickly, and went back to the far +side to wait my return. + +I asked Thora where I must take her to find the jarl. + +"To his house, surely," she said. + +"I do not know the way from here," I answered; "I fear you must +lead me." + +"As you will," she said, wondering. "It is across the town +certainly." + +That was bad for me, perhaps, but I should find that out presently. +So we went across the open, and came to the road through the town +along which I had been before. It was clearer, though there were +yet many people about. + +Now when we were in the shadow of the first houses, Thora stopped +suddenly and looked hard at me. + +"Will you tell me if I am heading you into danger?" she said. + +"What danger is possible?" I answered. "There are no Saxons here +yet." + +"Not one?" she said meaningly. "I may be wrong--it does seem +unlikely but I think you do not belong to us. Your speech is not +like ours altogether, and your helm is gold encircled, as if you +were a king." + +"Lady," I said, "why should you think that I am not of your people? +Let us go on to the jarl." + +"Now I know that you are not. Oh, how shall I thank you for this?" + +Then she glanced at my helm again, and drew a sudden little quick +breath. + +"Is it possible that you are Alfred of Wessex? It were like what +they say of him to do as you have done for a friendless maiden." + +Then she caught my hand and held it in both of hers, looking half +fearfully at me. + +"Lady," I said, "I am not King Alfred, nor would I be. Come, let us +hasten." + +"I will take you no further," she said then. "Now I am sure that +you are of the Northmen that were seen with the Saxons. You are not +of us, and I shall lose you your life." + +Then came the quick trot of horses, and I saw a little troop coming +down the street, their arms flashing in the streaks of moonlight +between the houses. + +"I will see you in good hands, Lady Thora," I answered. "Who are +these coming?" + +"It is my father," she said, and drew me back deeper into shadow. + +After the horsemen and beside them ran men who bore planks and +ropes, and it was plain that the jarl had found out his loss, and +hastened to bridge the gap and cross the river. + +I saw that I could keep up the pretence no longer. + +"Let me walk behind you as your servant," I said. "If any heed me, +I pray you make what tale you can for me." + +"What can I say to you in thanks?" she cried quickly, and letting +go my hand which she yet held. "If you are slain, it is my fault. +Tell me your name at least." + +"Ranald Vemundsson, a Northman of King Alfred's," I said. "Now I am +your servant--ever." + +Then Thora left my side suddenly, and ran forward to meet the +foremost horseman--for they were close to us--calling aloud to +Osmund to stay. And he reined up and leaped from his horse with a +cry of joy, and took her in his arms for a moment. + +I got my cloak around me, pulling the hood over my helm, and stood +in the shadow where I was. I saw the jarl lift his daughter into +the saddle, and the whole troop turned to go back. The footmen cast +down their burdens where each happened to be, and went quickly +after them; and I was turning to go my way also, when a man came +riding back towards me. + +"Ho, comrade," he said, "hasten after us. Mind not the things left +in the boat. There is supper ere we go." + +I lifted my hand, and he turned his horse and rode away, paying no +more heed to me. That was a good tale of things left that Thora had +made in case I was seen to be going back to the boat. + +Then I waxed light hearted enough, and thought of my other plan. +Kolgrim saw me coming, and the boat was ready. + +"Have you flint and steel?" I said to the fisher as I got into the +boat. + +"Ay, master, and tinder moreover, dry in my cap." + +"Well, then, take me to those ships we saw. I have a mind to scare +these Danes." + +It was a heavy pull against the sea to where they lay afloat now, +though it was not far. I fired all three in the cabins under the +fore deck, so that, as their bows were towards the town, the light +would not be seen till I was away. + +Then we went swiftly back to Kolgrim, and as I mounted and rode +off, the blaze flared up behind us, for the tarred timbers burned +fiercely in the wind. + +"That will tell Odda that the Danes are flying. And maybe it will +save Wareham town from fire, for they will think we are on them. So +I have spoiled Jarl Osmund's supper for him." + +Then I minded that this would terrify the Lady Thora maybe, and +that put me out of conceit with my doings for a moment. But it was +plain that she was brave enough, for there were many things to fray +her in the whole of this matter, though perhaps it was because +Kolgrim stayed beyond the river that she made so sure that I was a +man of King Alfred's and no friend to the Danes. + +So we rode away, pleased enough with the night's work, and reached +Poole in broad daylight, while the gale was slackening. Well +pleased was Odda to see me back, and to hear my news. + +Then he asked me what I would do next. There seemed to be no more +work at sea, and yet he would have me speak with King Alfred and +take some reward from him. And I told him that the season grew +late, and that I would as soon stay in England for this winter as +anywhere. + +"What will you do next in the matter of these Danes, however?" was +my question. + +Then he said: + +"I must chase them through the country till they are within the +king's reach. He has the rest pent in Exeter, and there will be +trouble if they sail out to join these. I must follow them, +therefore, end send men to Alfred to warn him. Then he will know +what to do. Now I would ask you to take the ships back into the +river Exe and join us there." + +I would do that willingly, and thought that if the wind held fair +after the gale ended, I might be there before he joined the king by +land. But I should have to wait for a shift to the eastward before +sailing. + +So Odda brought his men ashore, and marched on Wareham and thence +after the Danes, not meaning to fight unless some advantage showed +itself, for they were too many, but to keep them from harming the +country. And I waited for wind to take me westward. + +Then the strange Norsemen left us. They had gained much booty in +the Danish ships, for they carried what had been won from the +Saxons, and what plunder should be taken was to be their share in +due for their services. They were little loss, for they were +masterless vikings who might have given trouble at any time if no +plunder was to be had, and I was not sorry to see them sail away to +join Rolf Ganger in France. + +Now these men would have followed me readily, and so I should have +been very powerful at sea, or on any shore where I cared to land. +But Odda had made me feel so much that I was one in his counsel, +and a friend whom he valued and trusted, that I had made this +warfare against the Danes my own quarrel, as it were in his +company. Already I had a great liking for him, and the more I heard +of Alfred the king, the more I wished to see him. At the least, a +man who could build ships like these, having every good point of +the best I knew, and better than any ever heard of before, was +worth speaking with. I thought I knew somewhat of the shipwright's +craft, and one thinks much of the wisdom of the man who is easily +one's master in anything wherein one has pride. + +Moreover, Alfred's men were wont to speak of him with little fear, +but as if longing for his praise. And I thought that wonderful, +knowing only Harald Fairhair and the dread of him. + + + +Chapter V. Two Meetings in England. + + +It was not long before the shift of wind that I looked for came, +and at once I took all the ships round to the river Exe. Odda had +left me all the seamen he had, and they were enough for the short, +fair passage. We came to the haven in the river, and there heard +what news there was, and it was good enough. Odda had sent +well-mounted men to reach the king by roads away from the +retreating Danes, and he had been ready for them. He drew off his +levies from before the walls of the town, and let his enemies pass +him; then he and Odda fell on their rear and drove them into +Exeter, and there was holding them. It was well done; for though +the host sallied from the town to meet the newcomers, they gained +nothing but a share in the rout that followed when Odda closed on +the rear guard and the king charged the flank. + +Now we heard that as soon as we landed. And then I had my first +knowledge of the ways of a Saxon levy. For no sooner were the ships +berthed than their crews began to leave them, making for their +homes. + +One or two men I caught in the act of leaving in the early morning, +and spoke sharply to them, for it seemed that soon there would be +ships enough and not a man to tend them. Whereon they answered: + +"We have done what we were called up for, and more also. Now may +others take our places. What more would you have? We have won our +victory, and the ships are not needed for a while." + +So they went, and nothing I could say would stay them. I waxed +angry on that, and I thought I might as well sail for Ireland as +not. There seemed no chance of doing aught here, where men would +throw away what they had won of advantage. + +So I went back to my own ship and sat under the after awning, in no +good temper. Thord and Kolgrim were yet busy in and about the +vessels, making all secure, and setting men to work on what needed +repairing. Presently Harek the scald came and sat with me, and I +grumbled to my heart's content about this Saxon carelessness and +throwing away of good luck. + +Many Saxons--men from camp, and freemen of the place, and some +thanes--came, as one might expect, to stare at the ships and their +prizes. I paid no heed to them as the day went on, only wishing +that Odda would come and speak to me about his doings, for I had +sent word to him that we were in the river. Sometimes a thane would +stay and speak with me from the wharf alongside which my own ship +was with one or two others, and they were pleasant enough, though +they troubled me with over many thanks, which was Odda's fault. +However, I will say this, that if every man made as little of his +own doings and as much of those of his friends as did the honest +ealdorman, it were well in some ways. + +By and by, while we were talking, having got through my grumble, +Kolgrim came along the shore with some Saxon noble whom he had met; +and this stranger was asking questions about each ship that he +passed. I suppose that Kolgrim had answered many such curious folk +already; for when he came near and we could hear what he was +saying, I was fain to laugh, for, as sailors will, he was telling +the landsman strange things. + +"What do we pull up the anchor with?" he was saying. "Why, with +yonder big rope that goes from masthead to bows." and he pointed to +the great mainstay of our ship. "One must have a long purchase, if +you know what that is." + +"Ah, 'tis wonderful," said the Saxon. + +Then he caught my eye, and saw that I was smiling. He paid no heed +to me, however, but looked long at the ship that lay astern of +ours--one of the captured Danes. Thord had set a gang of shore folk +to bend the sail afresh to a new yard, for the old one had been +strained in the gale that came before the fight. + +"What are those men doing, friend?" he asked Kolgrim directly. + +"Bending a sail," answered my comrade listlessly, trusting, as it +would seem, to the sea language for puzzlement enough to the +landsman. + +"So," said the Saxon, quite quietly. "It was in my mind that when a +sail was bent to the yard it was bent with the luff to the fore end +thereof." + +At which words Kolgrim started, in a way, and looked first at the +riggers and then back at the Saxon, who moved no muscle of his +face, though one might see that his eyes twinkled. And I looked at +the riggers also, and saw that the Saxon was right, and that the +men had the square-cut sail turned over with the leech forward and +the luff aft. The sail was half laced to the yard, and none but a +man who knew much of ships would have seen that aught was wrong. + +Then Kolgrim's face was so red, and angry, and full of shame all at +once, that I had the best laugh at him that had come to me for many +a day. And he did not bide with the Saxon any longer, but went on +board the ship hastily, and said what he had to say to the riggers. +The Saxon stood, and looked after him with a smile breaking over +his pleasant face, and I thought that maybe I owed him some amends +for my comrade's rough jesting, though indeed he had his revenge. + +So I came ashore and spoke to him. He was a slight, brown-haired +man of about thirty, bearded and long-haired after the Saxon +fashion, and I thought he seemed to be recovering from some wound +or sickness that had made him white and thin. He wore his beard +long and forked, which may have made him look thinner; but he +seemed active and wiry in his movements--one of those men who make +up for want of strength by quickness and mastery of their weapons. +Soberly dressed enough he was, but the cloth of his short cloak and +jerkin was very rich, and he had a gold bracelet and brooch that +seemed to mark him as high in rank. + +"My comrade has been well caught, thane," I said; "he will be more +careful what tales he tells the next comer. But I think he was +tired of giving the same answers to the same questions to all who +come to see us." + +"Likely enough," the Saxon answered, laughing a little. "I asked to +see the prizes and the vikings' ships, and he showed me more than I +expected." + +Then he looked along the line of vessels that he had not yet +passed, and added: + +"I thought there were more Norse ships with Odda." + +I told him how the other vikings had left us with their plunder at +Wareham, saying that I thought they could well be spared at that +time. + +"However," I said, "I did not count on the Saxons leaving their +vessels so soon." + +"Then I take it that I am speaking with King Ranald, of whom Odda +has so much to say," he said, without answering my last words. + +"I am Ranald Vemundsson," I said; "but this ship is all my kingdom +now. Harald Fairhair has the land that should have been mine. I am +but a sea king." + +Then he held out his hand, saying that there was much for which +every Saxon should thank me, and I passed that by as well as I +could, though I was pleased with the hearty grip he gave me. + +"So long as Odda is satisfied it is enough," I said. "If I have +helped him a little, I have helped a man who is worth it." + +"Well," said the thane, "you seem to be pleased with one another. +Now I should like to see this ship of yours, of which he has so +much to say." + +We went over her, and it was plain that this thane knew what he was +talking about. I wondered that the king had not set him in command +instead of Odda, who frankly said what was true--that he was no +sailor. I supposed that this man, however, was not of high rank +enough to lead so great a gathering of Saxons, and so I said +nothing to him about it. + +By and by we sat on the after deck with Harek, and I had ale +brought to us, and we talked of ship craft of all sorts. Presently, +however, he said: + +"What shall you do now--if one may ask?" + +"I know not. When I sailed from Wareham, I thought to have seen +more sea service with Alfred your king. But now his men are going +home, and in a day or two, at this rate, there will be none left to +man the ships." + +"We can call them up again when need is," he answered. + +"They should not go home till the king sends them," I said. "This +is not the way in which Harald Fairhair made himself master of +Norway. Once his men are called out they know that they must bide +with him till he gives them rest and sends them home with rewards. +It is his saying that one sets not down the hammer till the nail is +driven home, and clinched moreover." + +"That is where the Danes are our masters," the Saxon said, very +gravely. "Our levies fight and disperse. It was not so in the time +of the great battles round Reading that brought us peace, for they +never had time to do so. Then we won. Now the harvest wants +gathering. Our people know they are needed at home and in the +fields." + +"They must learn to know that home and fields will be better served +by their biding in arms while there is a foe left in the land. What +says Alfred the king?" I said. + +"Alfred sees this as well as you, or as any one but our freemen," +he answered; "but not yet can he make things go as he knows they +should. This is the end at which he ever aims, and I think he will +teach his people how to fight in time. I know this, that we shall +have no peace until he does." + +"Your king can build a grand ship, but she is of no use without men +in her day by day, till they know every plank of her." + +"Ay," said the Saxon; "but that will come in time. It is hard to +know how to manage all things." + +"Why," I said, "if the care of a ship is a man's business, for that +he will care. You cannot expect him to care for farm and ship at +once, when the farm is his living, and the ship but a thing that +calls him away from it." + +"What then?" + +"Pay the shipman to mind the sea, that is all. Make his ship his +living, and the thing is done." + +"It seems to me," the thane said, "that this can be done. I shall +tell the king your words." + +"As you will," I answered; "they are plain enough. I would say also +that Harald our king has about him paid warriors whose living is to +serve him, and more who hold lands on condition that they bear arms +for him at any time." + +Now Harek had listened to all this, and could tell the thane more +of Harald's ordering of things than I; so he took up the talk for a +time, and presently asked about the war and its beginning. + +"Faith," answered the Saxon, with a grim smile, "I cannot tell when +the war began, for that was when the first Danes came to the +English shores. But if you mean the trouble that is on hand now, it +is easily told. Ten years has this host been in England--coming +first with Ingvar and Halfden and Hubba, the three sons of Lodbrok. +Ingvar has gone away, and Guthrum takes his place. Halfden is in +Northumbria, Hubba is in Wales, and Guthrum is king over East +Anglia and overlord of Mercia. It is Guthrum against whom we are +fighting." + +"He is minded to be overlord of all England," said Harek. + +"That is to be seen if a Dane shall be so," the Saxon answered, +flushing. "We beat them at first, as I have said, and have had +peace till last year. Then they came to Wareham from East Anglia. +There they were forced to make peace, and they swore on the holy +ring {v} to depart from Wessex; and we, on our part, swore +peace on the relics of the holy saints. Whereon, before the king, +Alfred, was ware of their treachery, they fell on our camp, slew +all our horsemen, and marched here. Then we gathered the levies +again--ay, I know why you look so impatiently, King Ranald--and +came here after them. As for the rest, you have taken your part. +Now we have them all inside these walls, and I think we have done." + +Then his face grew dark, and he added: + +"But I cannot tell. What can one do with oath breakers of this +sort?" + +Then I said: + +"Surely you do not look for the men of one chief to be bound by +what another promises?" + +He looked wonderingly at me for a moment, and then said: + +"How should it be that the oath of their king should not bind the +people?" + +"Why," said I, "you have spoken of several chiefs. If Guthrum +chooses to make peace, that is not Halfden's business, or Hubba's, +or that of any chief who likes it not. One is as free as the +other." + +"What mean you? I say that Guthrum and his chiefs swore by the +greatest oath they knew to return to Mercia." + +"If they swore by the holy ring, there is no doubt that they who +swore would keep the oath. But that does not bind those who were +against the peace making. So I suppose that they who held not with +the peace made by the rest fell on you, when your levies went home +after their wont. One might have known they would do so." + +Thereat the thane was silent for a while, and I saw that he was +troubled. It seemed to be a new thought to him at this time that +the Danish hosts in England were many, and each free to act in the +way its own chief thought best, uniting now and then, and again +separating. This he must needs have learned sooner or later, but +the knowledge came first to him there before Exeter walls. + +Presently he said: + +"I have believed that all the Danes were as much one under Guthrum +their king as are my folk under theirs. I cannot see the end of +this war." + +"It will end when Alfred the king is strong enough always to have +men in the field to face every leader that will fall on him," Harek +said. "What King Ranald says is true. It is as if his own father +had minded what Harald had sworn in the old days." + +"Wherefore Harald brought all Norway under him, that every man +should mind what he said," the Saxon answered. + +Then came three or four more thanes along the shore, and he rose up +and waved his hand to them. + +"Here are more butts for Kolgrim," he said, laughing. "Now, King +Ranald, I must go to my friends. But I have learned much. I think +you must speak with the king before you go, and I will tell him all +you have said." + +"Maybe we shall meet again," said I, taking his offered hand. "I +think I would see Alfred; but he is over wise, from all accounts, +to learn aught from me." + +"King Alfred says that wisdom comes little by little, and by +learning from every one. I belong to the court, and so shall surely +meet you if you do come to speak to him." + +Then I asked the thane's name. + +"Godred {vi} men say it is," he answered, laughing; "but that +means better counsel than belongs to me." + +So he went ashore and joined the thanes, who had gone slowly along +the road, and we lost sight of him. + +"Yonder goes a pleasant comrade enough," I said to Harek. + +"Ay," the scald answered; "but if that is not Alfred the king +himself, I am much in error." + +"It is not likely. I think he is a bigger man and older, from all +accounts," I said carelessly. "Moreover, he would not have put up +with Kolgrim's jests as he did." + +"One knows not; but I thought he spoke of 'my folk' once. And he +seemed to ask more than would a simple thane, and in a different +way." + +However, it seemed to me that Harek had found a marvel for himself, +and I laughed at him for supposing that Alfred the king would come +there to speak to any man. + +Now towards evening Odda came, and with him many servants and a +train of wagons. He would make a feast for us in the best house of +the village, by the king's order. Every one of us was called, and +all the leading Saxon shipmen, when all was ready, and it was a +kingly feast enough. + +While they were making it ready, the ealdorman came to me on board +the ship, and welcomed me in most friendly wise. + +"I have a message for you, King Ranald," he said presently. "Some +thanes have been to me from the king, and he bids me ask you to +come and speak with him." + +"I saw a thane here this morning who was anxious for me to see the +king," I said. "A pleasant man enough--one Godred." + +"Ay, Godred is pleasant enough," Odda said, smiling, "but he is a +terrible man for asking questions." + +He laughed again, as if he knew the man well, and was pleased to +think of him and his ways. + +"None of his questions are foolish, however," I said. "I was +pleased with him." + +"It is well if you pleased him, for he is a powerful man at court," +said Odda. + +"I do not know if I pleased him, or if it makes any difference to +me what power he has," I said carelessly. "If I want any man to +speak for me to the king--which is not likely--I should come to you +first." + +"Speak for yourself," laughed Odda, "that is the best way with +Alfred." + +So we planned to go to Exeter with the next morning's light. Odda +would bide here for the night, after the feast. + +Now after we had finished eating, and the ale and mead and the wine +the king had sent in our honour were going round, and the gleemen +were singing at times, there came a messenger into the house, and +brought me a written message from the king himself, as he said. + +"Much good are these scratches to me," said I to Odda. "Can you +read them?" + +"I can read nought but what is written in a man's face," he said. + +So I gave the scroll to Harek, who sat next me, thinking that maybe +the scald could read it. He pored over it for a while. + +"It is of no use, king," he said. "It is in my mind that I know +which is the right way up of the writing, but I am not sure." + +So I laughed, and asked aloud if any man present could read. There +were a good many thanes and franklins present to feast in our +honour. + +Then rose up a man, in a long brown hooded habit girt with a cord, +from below the salt where he sat among the servants. He had a long +beard, but was very bald. His hair grew in a thick ring round his +head; which was strange, for he seemed young. + +"I am here, ealdorman," he said to Odda; "I will read for King +Ranald." + +Now all eyes turned to see who spoke, and in a moment Odda rose up +hastily and went down the long room till he came to where the man +stood. Then I was amazed, for the ealdorman went on one knee before +him, and said: + +"Good my lord, I knew not that you were here among the crowd. I +pray you come to the high seat." + +"When will you remember that titles and high places are no longer +pleasing to me?" the man said wearily. "I tire of them all. Rise +up, Odda, my friend, and let me be." + +"I will not rise without your blessing, nevertheless," said the +ealdorman. + +Whereon the man spoke a few words to him softly and quickly, +signing with his hand crosswise over him. + +Then I said to those about me, who were watching all this in +silence: + +"Who is this strange man?" + +"It is Neot the holy, King Alfred's cousin," one answered, +whispering. + +"That is a strange dress for an atheling," I said; but they hushed +me. + +Now it seemed that Odda tried again to draw this Neot to the high +table, but he would not come. + +Then I said to old Thord, who sat over against me beyond Odda's +empty chair: + +"This is foolishness; or will he not honour the king's guests?" + +But a thane shook his head at me, whispering behind his hand: + +"It is humbleness. He has put his rank from him, and will not be +held as being above any man." + +Then spoke old Thord: + +"Maybe he can put his rank away among men who know him not, and +that is a good humbleness in a way. But where all know what his +birth is, he has but to be humble and kind in ways and speech, and +then men will think more thereof than they will if they see him +pretending to be a churl." + +Now Thord's voice was rough with long years of speaking against the +wash of the waves, and the thunder of wind in sail and rigging, and +the roll and creak of oars; and as he said this, every one turned +towards him, for a silence had fallen on the crowd of folk who +watched Neot the king's cousin and his strife with Odda. + +So Neot heard, and his face flushed a little, and he looked hard at +Thord and smiled curiously, saying: + +"In good truth the old warrior is right, and I am foolish to hide +here now I am known. Let me go and sit by him." + +Then Odda led him to the upper end of the room, and every one rose +as he passed by. I drew myself nearer to the ealdorman's place, and +made room for him where only the table was between him and Thord, +for that bench was full. + +So he put his hand on my shoulder and sat down, looking over to +Thord, and saying with a quiet smile: + +"Thanks for that word in season, friend." + +But the old warrior was somewhat ashamed, and did but shift in his +seat uneasily. + +"Ay, ay," he growled; "I cannot keep my voice quiet." + +Neot laughed, and then turned to me and held out his hand for the +king's letter, which I gave him. + +He ran his eyes over the writing very quickly, and then said: + +"Here is nothing private; shall I read aloud?" + +But the thanes fell to talking quickly, and I nodded. + +"Alfred the king to his cousin Ranald Vemundsson, greeting. Odda +the ealdorman of Devon, and one Godred, have spoken to me of +yourself--one telling of help given freely and without question of +reward or bargain made, and the other of certain plain words spoken +this morning. Now I would fain see you, and since the said Godred +seems to doubt if you will come to me, I ask it under my own hand +thus. For I have thanks to give both to you and your men, and also +would ask you somewhat which it is my hope that you will not refuse +me. Therefore, my cousin, I would ask you to come with our +ealdorman tomorrow and hear all I would say." + +Then Neot said, + +"That is all. I think you will not refuse so kindly an invitation. +The writing is the king's own, and here is his name at the end." + +So he showed it me. The letter was better written than the name, as +it seemed to me. + +"I will take your word for it," I said, laughing as I looked; "but +it is a kindly letter, and I will surely come." + +"Ay; he has written to you as to an equal," Odda said. + +"That is so. Now I would have the good king know that I am not +that; I am but a sea king. Maybe he thinks that I shall be a good +ally, and makes more of my power than should be. I told Godred the +thane as plainly as I could what I was, this morning." + +"Why, then," said Neot, smiling, "Godred has told the king, no +doubt." + +"I hope he has," I answered, "but I doubt it. Nevertheless it is +easy to tell the king myself when I see him." + +After that we talked about other matters, and it became plain that +this Neot was a wonderfully wise man, and, as I thought, a holy one +in truth, as they called him. There is that about such an one that +cannot be mistaken. + +Harek sang for us, and pleased all, and into his song came, as one +might suppose, a good deal about the Asir. And then Neot began to +ask me a good deal about the old gods, as he called them. I told +him what I knew, which was little enough maybe, and so said that +Harek knew all about them, and that he should rather ask him. + +He did not care to do that, but asked me plainly if I were a +Christian. + +"How should I be?" I said. "Odda is the first Christian man I have +spoken with, to my knowledge. So, if I were likely to leave my own +faith, I have not so much as heard of another." + +"So you are no hater of Christians?" he said. + +"Surely not. Why should I be? I never thought of the matter." + +Then he said: + +"Herein you Norsemen are not like the Danes, who hate our faith, +and slay our priests because of their hatred." + +"More likely because Christian means Saxon to them, or else because +you have slain them as heathens. Northmen do not trouble about +another nation's faith so long as their own is not interfered with. +Why should they? Each country has its own ways in this as in other +matters." + +Thereat Neot was silent, and asked me no more. Hereafter I learned +that hatred of race had made the hatred of religion bitter, until +the last seemed to be the greatest hatred of all, adding terror and +bitterest cruelty to the struggle for mastery. + +Presently, before it was very late, Neot rose up and spoke to Odda, +bidding him farewell. Then he came to me, and said: + +"Tell the king that we have spoken together, and give him this +message if you will that I go to my place in Cornwall, and shall be +there for a while." + +Then he passed to Thord, and took his hard hand and said: + +"Good are words that come from an honest heart. I have learned a +lesson tonight where I thought to have learned none." + +"I marvel that you needed to learn that," Thord said gruffly. + +"So do I, friend," answered Neot; "but one is apt to go too far in +a matter which one has at heart, sometimes before one is aware. +Then is a word in season welcome." + +Then he thanked Harek for his songs, and went, the Saxons bowing as +he passed down the long table with Odda. + +"That is a wise man and a holy," said Thord. + +"Ay, truly," answered the thane who had told me about him. "I mind +when he and Alfred the king were the haughtiest and most +overbearing of princes. But when Neot found out that his pride and +wrath and strength were getting the mastery in his heart, he thrust +himself down there to overcome them. So he grows more saintlike +every day, and has wrought a wondrous change in the king himself. +He is the only man to whom Alfred will listen in reproof." + +"That is likely," I said, not knowing aught of the holy bishops who +were the king's counsellors; "kings brook little of that sort. But +why does he wear yon strange dress?" + +"He has taken vows on him, and is a hermit," the thane said; but I +did not know what he meant at the time. + +It was some Saxon way, I supposed, and cared not to ask more. + +So it came to pass that I met one of the two most wonderful men in +England, and I was to see the other on the morrow. Yet I had no +thought that I should care to stay in the land, for it seemed +certain from what Odda told me that peace would be made, and peace +was not my business nor that of my men. + +So in a way I was sorry that the war was at an end, seeing that we +came for fighting and should have none. + +Then came a thought to me that made me laugh at myself. I was glad, +after all, that we were not going sword foremost into Exeter town, +because of the Lady Thora, who was there. I suppose it would not +have been reasonable had I not had that much thought for the brave +maiden whom I had helped out of danger once. + + + +Chapter VI. Alfred the King. + + +Odda the ealdorman and I rode gaily into the king's camp in the +bright August morning, with Harek and Kolgrim and Thord beside us, +and after us fifty of my men in their best array; which was saying +much, for Einar the jarl was generous, and we had spoiled Halfdan, +the king's son, moreover. So there was a shouting when we came to +the camp, and men ran together to stare at the vikings and their +king. + +In the midst of the camp, which was strong enough, and looked out +on the old city, flew a banner whereon was a golden dragon--the +banner of Wessex. And it stood before a great pavilion, which was +the court for the time, and where we should find the king waiting +for us. There were several other tents joined to this great one, so +that into them the king might retire; and there was a wide space, +round which walked spearmen as sentries, between it and any other +tent. + +Some Devon thanes met us, and our men dismounted at the same time +as we. Then Odda led us four to the door of the pavilion, and we +were ushered in with much ceremony. + +Inside the great tent was like a round hall, carpeted, and +tapestry-hung in a way I had never seen before. There were many +richly-dressed nobles present, and most of these were grouped round +a high place over against the door, where I saw at once that the +king sat on a throne in all state. + +Now, coming from bright sunshine into the cool shadow of the place, +I was dazzled at first; but Kolgrim's eyes were quick, and we had +hardly crossed the threshold, if I might call it so, when he +plucked at my cloak. + +"Master," he whispered, "let me bide with the men; this is no place +for me." + +"Hush," I whispered; "the king is yonder." + +"Ay, master--let me go--the king is Godred whom I jested with." + +Harek was smiling, and he pulled Kolgrim forward. + +"Have no fear," he said; "those who play bowls expect rubs." + +Then the king came down from his throne and towards us. He had on +gilded armour beneath his long, ermine-trimmed blue cloak, and that +pleased me. He had sword and seax, but no helm, though that was on +a table by the throne--for he wore a crown. + +Then I too saw that Godred, as he called himself, was, as the scald +had guessed rightly, the king, and I was a little angry that he had +tricked me thus. But he was laughing at Kolgrim as he came, and my +anger passed at once. King or thane, here was a pleasant greeting +enough. + +He held out his hand to Odda first and then to me. The Saxon kissed +it, bending one knee, which was doubtless right for him, as owning +allegiance thereto. But I shook hands in our own way, saying: + +"Skoal to Alfred the king." + +Which seemed to please him, for he answered: + +"Welcome to King Ranald. I am glad my letter brought you. My +counsellor, Godred, feared you might not care to come." + +"The letter turned the scale, lord king," I said. "Yet I would have +you remember what I said yesterday about my kingship." + +"Ay, cousin, I mind it," he answered, laughing. "Also I mind that a +king's son is a king's son, whatever else he may be called." + +Then he shook hands with Harek, and after that turned to Kolgrim, +holding out his hand also to him. + +"Concerning sails," he said gravely, "I have many questions to ask +you. Is it to the starboard hand that the bolt rope goes, or to the +other board?" + +"I pray you to forget my foolishness, lord king," cried Kolgrim, +growing very red and shame faced. + +"That I shall not," the king answered, laughing. "I owe you thanks +for such a jest as I have not played on a man for many a long day. +Truly I have been more light hearted for my laugh ever since." + +"Ay, lord, you had the laugh of me," Kolgrim said, grinning +uneasily. + +Then the king nodded gaily to him and asked who Thord was. + +"This is my master in sea craft," said Odda. "Verily I fear him as +I have feared no man since I was at school. But he cured the +seasickness of me." + +"Maybe I forgot the sickness when I sent landsmen to sea in all +haste," said the king. "Nevertheless, Thord, how fought they when +blows were going?" + +"Well enough, king. And I will say that what I tried to teach them +they tried to learn," answered Thord. + +"Wherein is hope. You think that I may have good seamen in time, +therefore?" + +"Ay, lord. It is in the blood of every man of our kin to take to +the sea. They are like hen-bred ducklings now, and they do but want +a duck to lead them pondwards. Then may hen cackle in vain for +them." + +The king laughed. + +"Faith," he said, "I--the hen--drove Odda into the pond. He is, +according to his own account, a poor duckling." + +"Let him splash about a little longer, lord king," said Thord. + +But Odda spoke with a long face. + +"Not so, King Alfred, if you love me. Landsman am I, and +chicken-hearted at sea. Keep the gamecock to mind the farmyard; +there be more birds than ducks needed." + +"Make a song hereof, Harek," said the king. "Here is word play +enough for any scald." + +Then sang Harek, laughing, and ever ready with verses: + +"The gamecock croweth bravely, +And guardeth hawk-scared hen roost; +But when the sea swan swimmeth +Against the shoreward nestings, +There mighty mallard flappeth, +And frayeth him from foray; +Yet shoreward if he winneth, +The gamecock waits to meet him." + +"That is in my favour," said Odda. "Mind you the scald's words, I +pray you, lord king, and send me to my right place, even with hawk +on one side and swan on the other." + +So a pleasant laugh went round, and then the king went back to his +throne, and spoke words of open thanks to us of the fleet who had +gained him such victory. Good words they were, neither too few nor +too many, such as would make every man who heard them long to hear +the like of himself again. + +Now, while he was speaking, men came to the tent door and waited +for his words to end; and then one came forward and told a noble, +who seemed to be ordering the state which was kept, that Danish +lords had come to speak with the king. + +It seemed that this was expected, for when he heard it, Alfred bade +that they should be brought in. + +There were six of them in all, and they were in handsome dresses, +but without mail, though not unarmed. The leader of them was Jarl +Osmund, whom I had seen for a moment in Wareham street. I thought +that his handsome face was careworn, as though peace would be +welcome to him. But he and all his comrades carried themselves +bravely. + +Now there was long converse between the king and these chiefs, and +it seemed that peace would be made. + +Yet Alfred's face was hard as he spoke to them--not like the bright +looks with which he had jested with us just now, or the earnest +kingly regard which had gone with his words of thanks. + +Presently the Danes said that the whole force would retire into +Mercia beyond Thames, harming none by the way, and keeping peace +thereafter, if the conditions were honourable. + +Then the king flashed out into scorn: + +"What honour is to be looked for by oath breakers?" + +"We are not oath breakers, King Alfred," Osmund said, looking him +in the face. + +"Once did the Danes swear to me on their holy ring, which seems to +me to be their greatest oath, and they broke the peace so made. +What is that but that they are forsworn?" + +"We swore nought to you, lord king," Osmund said. "Half of the men +with us came newly from across the sea but a week or so since. +Guthrum and those who swore are in their own land." + +Then the king glanced at me, suddenly, as it would seem, +remembering what I had told him of the freedom of the chiefs. + +"Ha! now I mind me of a word spoken in time," he said. "It has +seemed to me that there was oath breaking; maybe I was wrong. I +will take your words that you have not done so. Is that amends +enough?" + +"It is well said, lord king," Osmund answered gravely. + +"But," Alfred went on, "I must have the word of every chief who is +in Exeter, and they must speak for every man. Tell me in all truth +if there are those who would not make peace with me?" + +Then said Osmund: + +"Some will not, but they are few." + +"What if you make peace and they do not? what shall you do with +them?" + +"They must go their own way; we have no power over them." + +"Has not Guthrum?" + +"No more than we. A free Dane cannot be hound, unless he chooses, +by another man's word." + +Then Alfred said plainly: + +"I cannot treat for peace till I have the word of every chief in +Exeter. Go your ways and let that be known." + +So Osmund bowed, and went out with his fellows. And when he had +gone, the king turned to me. + +"Have I spoken aright, King Ranald?" + +"In the best way possible, lord king," I answered. + +"Go after those Danish lords," the king said to one of his thanes, +"and bid them to feast with me tonight, for I think that I have +said too much to them." + +So they were bidden to the king's feast presently, and I suppose +they could do nought but come, for it was plain that he meant to +honour them. After they had gone back into the town, Alfred spoke +with my men, and what he said pleased them well. + +Then he went to his resting tent, and I walked with Odda to his +quarters, and sat there, waiting for the king to send for me to +speak with him, as I expected. But word came that he would wait +till he had heard more of the Danish answer to his message before +we spoke together of that he had written of to me. So he prayed me +to wait in the camp till he had seen the Danes again, and told Odda +to find quarters for us. + +"So we shall have a good talk together," the ealdorman said. "I am +glad you are not going back to the ships yet." + +So was I, for all this fresh life that I had not seen before +pleased me. Most of all I wished to see more of Alfred and the +state in which he lived. + +Now, just when I was ready for the feast, and was sitting with +Odda, there came a guard to the tent and said that the chief of the +Danes was seeking King Ranald. + +Then Odda said: + +"What wills he? we have no traffic with Danes." + +"He would speak with King Ranald," the man said. + +Then said I: + +"If it is Osmund the jarl, I think I know why he comes.--Let him +come in here and speak before you, ealdorman." + +"Why, do you know him?" + +"I cannot rightly say that I do, but I nearly came to do so." + +Then Odda wondered, and answered: + +"Forgive me; one grows suspicious about these Danes. I will go +hence, and you shall speak with him alone. Maybe he wants your word +with the king, because you know the ways of the viking hosts." + +"No," said I; "stay here. Whatever it is he has to say cannot be +private; nor would I hear anything from him that you might not." + +"As you will. Let him come here," Odda said; and the man went out. + +Then entered Jarl Osmund, richly dressed for the king's feast, and +he looked from one of us to the other as we rose to greet him. +Suddenly he smiled grimly. + +"I looked to find strangers, and was about to ask for King Ranald. +However, Odda the ealdorman and I have met before, as I am +certain." + +"Faith, we have," said Odda. "Nor am I likely to forget it. It was +at Ashdown fight." + +"And elsewhere," said the jarl. "But it was ever fair fighting +between us." + +"Else had you slain me when I was down," said Odda frankly, and +with a smile coming into his face. + +"The score is even on that count," said Osmund, and with that, with +one accord their hands met, and they laughed at each other. + +That was good to see, and ever should things be so between brave +foes and honest. + +Then Osmund looked at me. + +"Now have I met with two men whom I have longed to see," he said, +"for you must be King Ranald Vemundsson. Two foes I have--if it +must be so said--of whom I have nought but good to say." + +"So," laughed Odda. "When fought you twain, and which let the other +go?" + +"We have not fought," the jarl answered. "But I have deeper reason +for thanking Ranald than for sparing my own life, or for staying a +blow in time out of sheer love of fair play." + +Then he took my hand and looked me in the face. + +"It was a good deed and noble that you wrought for me but the other +day," he said earnestly. "I do not know how to thank you enough. My +daughter laid command on me that I should seek you and tell you +this; but indeed I needed no bidding when I heard how she escaped." + +"I had been nidring had I not helped a lady in need," I said, being +in want of better words. + +"What is all this?" said Odda; for I had told him nought of the +matter, not seeing any reason to do so. + +Then Osmund must needs tell him of what Kolgrim and I had done; and +the ealdorman laughed at me, though one might see that the affair +pleased him. + +"This king," he said, "having no kingdom of his own, as he says, +goes about helping seasick ealdormen and lonely damsels, whereby he +will end with more trouble on his hands than any kingdom would give +him." + +"I am only one," I said; "Kolgrim and Thord are in this also." + +Then Osmund took a heavy gold bracelet from his arm. + +"This is for Kolgrim, your comrade," he said, half doubtfully, "if +I may give it him in remembrance of a brave deed well done. Will he +be too proud to accept it?" + +"I may give it him, certainly," I said, taking the gift. + +Then Odda would not be behindhand, and he pulled off his own +armlet. + +"If Kolgrim is to be remembered, Thord will never be forgotten. +Give this to him in sheer gratitude for swearing at me in such wise +that he overcame the sore sickness that comes of the swaying of the +deck that will not cease." + +"Give it him yourself, ealdorman," I said. "You know him over well +to send it by another. It would not be so good a gift." + +"As you will," he answered. "But I fear that viking terribly. Black +grows his face, and into his beard he blows, and the hard Norse +words grumble like thunder from his lips. Then know I that Odda the +ealdorman has been playing the land lubber again, and wonder what +is wrong. Nor is it long ere I find out, and I and my luckless crew +are flying to mind what orders are howled at us. In good truth, if +Alfred ever needs me to hurry in aught, let him send Thord the +viking to see that I do so. One may know how I fear him, since I +chose rather to risk battle with Jarl Osmund on shore than to bide +near him in my own ship any longer." + +Then the jarl and I laughed till our sides ached, and Odda joined +us when he could not help it, so doleful was his face and solemn +were his words when he told his tale. But I knew that he and Thord +were the best of friends after those few days in the ship together, +and that the rough old viking had given every man of the crew +confidence. Nevertheless he was apt to rage somewhat when things +went in slovenly wise. + +So Odda helped me through with Osmund's thanks, and I was glad. I +was glad also that the horns blew for the feast, so that no more +could be said about the Wareham doings. + +Now I sat close to King Alfred at the feast, and saw much of his +ways with men. I thought it plain that he had trouble at times in +keeping back the pride and haughtiness which I had heard had been +the fault in both Neot and himself, for now and then they showed +plainly. Then he made haste to make amends if one was hurt by what +he had said in haste. But altogether I thought him even more kingly +than the mighty Harald Fairhair in some ways. + +Truly he had not the vast strength and stature of Norway's king, +but Alfred's was the kingliness of wisdom and statecraft. + +Once I said to Odda: + +"Can your king fight?" + +"Ay, with head as well as with hand," he answered. "His skill in +weapon play makes up for lack of weight and strength. He is maybe +the best swordsman and spearman in England." + +I looked again at him, and I saw that since last I turned my eyes +on him he had grown pale, and now his face was drawn, and was +whitening under some pain, as it would seem; and I gripped Odda's +arm. + +"See!" I said, "the king dies! he is poisoned!" + +And I was starting up, but the ealdorman held me back. + +"I pray you pay no heed," he said urgently. "It is the king's dark +hour; he will be well anon." + +But nevertheless Alfred swayed in his seat, and two young thanes +who stood waiting on him came to either side and helped him up, and +together they took him, tottering, into the smaller tent that +opened behind the throne; while all the guests were silent, some in +fear, like myself, but others looking pityingly only. + +Then a tall man in a dress strange to me--a bishop, as I knew +presently--rose up, and said to those who knew not what was the +matter: + +"Doubtless all know that our good king is troubled with a strange +illness that falls on him from time to time. This is such a time. +Have no fear therefore, for the pain he suffers will pass. He does +not will that any should be less merry because of him." + +So the feast went on, though the great empty chair seemed to damp +the merriment sadly. I asked Odda if this trouble often befell the +king. + +"Ay, over often," he said, "and one knows not when it will come. No +leech knows what it is, and all one can say is that it seems to +harm him not at all when it has gone." + +I asked no more, but the king did not come back to the feast, as he +would at times when things happened thus. It seemed that often the +trouble fell on him when feasting, and some have said that it was +sent to prevent him becoming over proud, at his own prayer +{vii}. + +Soon the Danes rose up, and would go. Some of the great thanes set +them forth with all honour, and the feast ended. There was no long +sitting over the wine cup at Alfred's board, though none could +complain that he stinted them. + +Then the tall bishop who had spoken just now came to me. + +"The king will speak with you now, King Ranald, if you will come," +he said. + +So I went with him, and Odda came also. The king was lying on a +couch without his heavy state robes, and when we entered the small +tent the attendants left him. He was very pale, but the pain seemed +to have gone, and he looked up pleasantly at me. + +"My people are used to this, cousin," he said, "but I fear I put +you out sorely." + +"I thought you poisoned," I said; "but Odda told me not to fear." + +"Ay, that has been the thought of others before this," he said. +"Have you ever seen the like in any man? I ask every stranger, in +hopes that I may hear of relief." + +"No, I have not, lord king," I answered; "but I can grave runes +that will, as I think, keep away such pain if you bear them on you. +Thord, whom you know, taught me them. Maybe it would be better for +him to grave them, for runes wrongly written are worse than none, +and these are very powerful." + +"That is a kindly thought, cousin," Alfred answered; "but I am sure +that no runes will avail when the prayers of my people, from holy +Neot to the little village children, do not. And I fear that even +would they heal me, I must sooner bear the pain than seek to magic +spells." + +"Nay, but try them, King Alfred," I said; "there is no ill magic in +them." + +Now he saw that I was in earnest, and put me by very kindly. + +"I must ask Sigehelm, our bishop here, who is my best leech next to +Neot. + +"What say you, father?" + +"Even as you have said, my king." + +"Maybe, bishop," said I, "you have never tried the might of runes?" + +Whereat the good man held up his hands in horror, making no answer, +and I laughed a little at him. + +"Well, then," said the king, "we will ask Neot, for mostly he seems +to say exactly what I do not." + +"Neot has gone to Cornwall, and I had forgotten to give you that +message from him. He says he will be there for a time," I said, +rather ashamed at having let slip the message from my mind. + +"So you saw him?" said Alfred. + +"I knew he went to the ships yesterday after Godred came back," he +added, laughing. + +"He read my letter for me, and after that I had a good deal of talk +with him," I said. + +"Then," said Sigehelm, "you have spoken with the best man in all +our land." + +Now the king said that he would let the question of the runes, for +which he thanked me, stand over thus; and then he asked me to sit +down and hear what he would ask me to do for him, if I had no plans +already made for myself. + +I said that I had nothing so certainly planned but that I and my +men would gladly serve him. + +"Then," he said, "I would ask you to winter with me, and set my +ships in order. There will be work for you and all your men, for +you shall give them such command in any ship of mine as you know +they are best fitted for. I would ask you to help me carry out that +plan of which you spoke to me when I was Godred." + +When Odda heard that, he rubbed his hands together, saying: + +"Ay, lord king, you have found the right man at last." + +"Then in the spring you shall take full command of the fleet we +will build and the men we shall raise; and you shall keep the seas +for me, if by that time we know that we can work well together." + +He looked hard at me, waiting my answer. + +"Lord king," I said at last, "this is a great charge, and they say +that I am always thought older than I am, being given at least five +winters beyond the two-and-twenty that I have seen;" for I thought +it likely that the king held that I had seen more than I had. + +"I was but twenty when I came to the throne," he answered. "I have +no fear for you. More than his best I do not look for from any man; +nor do I wonder if a man makes mistakes, having done so many times +myself." + +Here Sigehelm made some sign to the king, to which he paid no heed +at the time, but went on: + +"As for your men, I will give them the same pay that Harald of +Norway gives to his seamen, each as you may choose to rank them for +me. You may know what that is." + +"Harek the scald knows," I said. "They will be well pleased, for +the pay is good, and places among Harald's courtmen are much sought +for." + +Then Alfred smiled, and spoke of myself. + +"As for King Ranald himself, he will be my guest." + +"I am a wandering viking, and I seem to have found great honour," I +said. "What I can do I will, in this matter. Yet there is one thing +I must say, King Alfred. I would not be where men are jealous of +me." + +"The only man likely to be so is Odda," the king answered. "You +must settle that with him. It is the place that he must have held +that you are taking. No man in all England can be jealous of a +viking whose business is with ships. But Odda put this into my mind +at first, and then Godred found out that he was right." + +"Lord king," said I, "had I known who you were at that time, I +should have spoken no differently. We Northmen are free in speech +as in action." + +"So says Odda," replied Alfred, smiling. "He has piteous tales of +one Thord, whom you sent to teach him things, and the way in which +he was made to learn." + +"Nevertheless," said Odda, "I will not have Thord blamed, for it is +in my mind that we should have learned in no other way so quickly." + +Again the bishop signed to the king, and Alfred became grave. + +"Here is one thing that our good Sigehelm minds me of. It seems +that you are a heathen." + +"Why, no, if that means one who hates Christians," I said. +"Certainly I do not do that, having no cause to do so. Those whom I +know are yourself, and Neot, and Odda, and one or two more only." + +"That is not it," said the king. "What we call a heathen is one who +worships the old gods--the Asir." + +"Certainly I do that--ill enough." + +"Then," said Alfred, while Odda shifted in his seat, seeming +anxious as to how I should take this, "it is our rule that before a +heathen man can serve with us, he shall at least be ready to learn +our faith, and also must be signed with the cross, in token that he +hates it not {viii}." + +"Why should I not learn of your faith?" I said. "Neot asked me of +mine. As for the other, I do not know rightly what it means. I see +your people sign themselves crosswise, and I cannot tell why, +unless it is as we hallow a feast by signing it with Thor's +hammer." + +"It is more than that," Alfred said, motioning to Sigehelm to say +nothing, for he was going to speak. "First you must know what it +means, and then say if you will be signed therewith." + +Then he said to Sigehelm: + +"Here is one who will listen to good words, not already set against +them, as some Danes are, by reason of ill report and the lives of +bad Christians. Have no fear of telling him what you will." + +Now, if I were to serve King Alfred, it seemed to me to be only +reasonable that I should know the beliefs of those with whom I had +to do. Then I minded me of Neot, and his way of asking about my +gods, as if the belief of every man was of interest to him. + +"Here is a deep matter to be talked of, King Alfred," I said. "It +does not do to speak lightly and carelessly of such things. Nor am +I more than your guest as yet, willing to hear what you would have +me know. When winter has gone, and you know if I shall be any good +to you, then will be question if I enter your service altogether, +and by that time I shall know enough. Maybe I shall see Neot again; +he and I began to speak of these things." + +Then Sigehelm said: + +"I think this is right, and Neot can tell you more in a few words +than I in many. Yet whatever you ask me I will try to tell you." + +"I want to speak with Neot," answered the king, "and we will ride +together and seek him when peace is made. I have many things to say +to him and ask him. We will go as soon as it is safe." + +So ended my talk with King Alfred at that time, and I was well +content therewith. So also were my men, for it was certain that +every one of them would find some place of command, were it but +over a watch, when Alfred's new sea levies were to be trained. + +Many noble Saxons I met in the week before peace was made with the +Danes in Exeter, for all the best were gathered there. Most of all +I liked Ethered, the young ealdorman of Mercia, and Ethelnoth, the +Somerset ealdorman, and Heregar, the king's standard bearer, an +older warrior, who had seen every battle south of Thames since the +long ago day when Eahlstan the bishop taught his flock how to fight +for their land against the heathen. + +These were very friendly with me, and I should see more of them if +I were indeed to ward the Wessex coasts, and for that reason they +made the more of me. + +Now I saw no more of Osmund the jarl, for Odda knew that the lesser +folk would mistrust me if I had any doings with the Danes. Maybe I +was sorry not to see the Lady Thora; but if I had seen her, I do +not know what I should have said to her, having had no experience +of ladies' ways at any time, which would have made me seem foolish +perhaps. + + + +Chapter VII. The Pixies' Dance. + + +I do not know that there is anything more pleasant after long weeks +at sea than to have a good horse under one, and to be riding in the +fresh winds of early autumn over new country that is beautiful in +sunlight. So when at last every Danish chief had made submission, +and the whole host had marched back to what they held as their own +land in Mercia, going to Gloucester, as was said, with Odda and +Ethered the ealdormen hanging on their rear with a great levy, I +rode with King Alfred to find Neot his cousin gaily enough. Thord +stayed with the ships, but the scald and Kolgrim were with me, and +the king mounted us well. Ethelnoth of Somerset came also, and some +forty men of the king's household; and all went armed, for the +country we had to cross was of the wildest, though we went by the +great road that runs from west to east of England, made even before +the Romans came. But it crossed the edge of Dartmoor, the most +desolate place in all the land, where outlaws and masterless men +found fastnesses whence none could drive them. + +One could not wish for a more pleasant companion than Alfred, and +the miles went easily. We had both hawks and hounds with us, for +there was game in plenty, and the king said that with the ending of +the war, and the beginning of new hopes for his fleet, he would +cast care aside for a little. So he was joyous and free in speech, +and at times he would sing in lightness of heart, and would bid +Harek sing also, so that it was pleasant to hear them. Ever does +Harek say that no man sings better than Alfred of England. + +In late afternoon we came to the wild fringe of Dartmoor, and here +the king had a guest house in a little village which he was wont to +use on these journeys to see Neot. We should rest there, and so +cross the wastes in full daylight. So he went in, maybe fearing his +sickness, which was indeed a sore burden to him, though he was wont +to make light of it; but Ethelnoth asked me if we should not spend +the hours of evening light in coursing a bustard or two, for many +were about the moorland close at hand. They would be welcome at the +king's table, he said; and I, fresh from the sea and camp, asked +for nothing better than a good gallop over the wide-stretching +hillsides. + +So we took fresh horses from those that were led for us, and rode +away. We took hawks--the king had given me a good one when we +started, for a Saxon noble ever rides with hawk on wrist--and two +leash of greyhounds. + +I was for putting my arms aside, but the ealdorman said it was +better not to do so, by reason of the moor folk, who were wild +enough to fall on a small party at times. It was of little moment, +however; for we rode in the lighter buff jerkins instead of heavy +mail, and were not going far. + +Ethelnoth took two men with him, and my two comrades were with +me--Kolgrim leading the hounds in leash beside his horse. We went +across the first hillside, and from its top looked northward and +westward as far as one could see over the strange grey wastes of +the moorland. + +Then from the heather almost under our feet rose a great bustard +that ran down wind with outstretched wings before us, seeking the +lonelier country. Kolgrim whooped, and slipped the leash, and the +hounds sprang after it, and we followed cheering. It was good to +feel the rush of hillside air in our faces, and the spring and +stretch of the horses under us, and to see the long-reached hounds +straining after the great bird that might well be able to escape +them. + +I suppose that Ethelnoth started a second bird. I did not look +behind me to see what any man was doing, but followed the chase +round the spur of a granite-topped hillside, and forgot him. For +when the bustard took wing for a heavy flight, and lit and ran +again, and again flew with wings that failed each time more and +more, while the strong legs were the stronger for the short rest, +and when the good hounds were straining after it, one could not +expect me to care for aught but that. + +It had been strange if I thought of anything but the sport. I knew +there were two horsemen close by, a little wide on either flank, +but behind me. So we took the bird after a good chase, and then I +knew that we had in some way shaken off the Saxons, and that we +three vikings were together. It did not trouble us, for one looks +for such partings, and Ethelnoth had his own bounds. So we went on, +and found another bustard, and took it. + +"Now we must go back," I said; "one must have a thought for the +king's horses." + +So we turned, and then a heron rose from a boggy stream below us, +and that was a quarry not to be let go. I unhooded the falcon and +cast her off, and straightway forgot everything but the most +wonderful sight that the field and forest can give us--the dizzy +upward climbing circles of hawk and heron, who strive to gain the +highest place cloudwards, one for attack, the other for safety. + +The evening sunlight flashed red from the bright under feathers of +the strong wings as the birds swung into it from the shadow of the +westward hill, and still they soared, drifting westward with the +wind over our heads. Then with a great rushing sound the heron gave +up, and fell, stone-like, from the falcon that had won to air above +him at last. At once the long wings of his enemy closed halfway, +and she swooped after him. + +Then back and up, like a sword drawn at need, went the heron's +sharp beak; and the falcon saw it, and swerved and shot past her +nearly-taken prey. Again the heron began to tower up and up with a +harsh croak that seemed like a cry of mockery; then the wondrous +swing and sweep of the long, tireless wings of the passage hawk, +and the cry of another heron far off, scared by its fellow's note; +and again for us a canter over the moorland, eye and hand and knee +together wary for both hawk above and good horse below, till the +falcon bound to the heron, and both came to the ground, and there +was an end in the grey shadow of the Dartmoor tors. Ay, but King +Alfred's hawk was a good one! + +"Now, where shall we seek Ethelnoth?" I said. + +"No good seeking him," said Harek. "We had better make our way back +to the village." + +We coupled up the greyhounds again and hooded the falcon, and rode +leisurely back over our tracks for some way. The sun set about that +time into a purple bank of mist beyond the farther hills. One does +not note how the miles go when one finds sport such as this, and +presently we began to be sure that we had ridden farther than we +had thought. We knew, as we thought, the direction from which we +had come, and steered, sailor-wise, by the sunset. But we could +take no straight course because of the hills, and we were as often +off the line as on. + +Then crept up the mist from the valleys, and we had nought to steer +by, for the wind dropped. Then I said: + +"Let the horses take us home; they know better than we." + +So we rode on slowly until darkness came, but never saw so much as +a light that might guide us. And presently we let the dogs loose, +thinking that they would go homewards. But a greyhound is not like +a mastiff, and they hung round us, careless, or helpless, in the +mists and darkness. + +Presently we came to a place where the horses stopped of their own +accord. There was a sheer rock on one side, and the hill was steep +below us, and a stream brawled somewhere before us. + +"Well," I said, "here we stay for the night. It is of no use +wandering any longer, and the night is warm." + +We thought nothing of this, for any hunter knows that such a chance +may befall him in a strange and wild country. So we laughed +together and off-saddled and hobbled the horses, and so sat down +supperless to wait for morning under the rock. The mist was clammy +round us, thinning and then thickening again as the breaths of wind +took it; but the moon would rise soon, and then maybe it would go. + +We had no means of making a fire, and no cloaks; so sleep came +hardly, and we talked long. Then the dogs grew uneasy, and +presently wandered away into the fog and darkness. I thought that +perhaps they heard some game stirring, and did not wonder at them. + +Now I was just sleeping, when I heard the sharp yelp of a dog in +pain, and sat up suddenly. Then came a second, and after that the +distant sound of voices that rose for a moment and hushed again. + +"We must be close to the village after all," I said, for my +comrades were listening also; "but why did the hounds yell like +that?" + +"Some old dame has taken the broomstick to them," said Kolgrim. +"They are hungry, and have put their noses into her milk pails." + +"It is too late for open doors," I said; "unless they have found +our own lodging, where some are waiting for us. But there they +would not be beaten." + +"Ho!" said Kolgrim, in another minute or so, "yonder is a fire." + +The wind had come round the hillside and swept the mist away for a +moment, and below us in the valley was a speck of red light that +made a wide glow in the denser fog that hung there. One could +hardly say how far off it was, for fog of any sort confuses +distance; but the brook seemed to run in the direction of the fire, +and it was likely that any house stood near its banks. + +"Let us follow the brook and see what we can find," I said +therefore. "These mists are chill, and I will confess that I am +hungry. We cannot lose our way if we keep to the water, and the +horses will be safe enough." + +Anything was better, as it seemed to us, than trying to think that +we slept comfortably here, and so we rose up and went down the +banks of the stream at once; and the way proved to be easy enough, +if rocky. The bank on this side was higher, and dry therefore, so +that we had no bogs to fear. We knew enough of them in the Orkneys +and on the Sutherland coast. + +The white mist grew very thick, but the firelight glow grew redder +as we went on, and at last we came near enough to hear many voices +plainly; but presently, when one shouted, we found that the tongue +was not known to us. + +"Now it is plain whom we have come across," I said. "This is a camp +of the Cornish tin traders, of whom the king told us. They are +honest folk enough, and will put us on the great road. They must be +close to it." + +That seemed so likely that we left the brook and began to draw +nearer to the fire, the voices growing plainer every moment, though +we could see no man as yet. + +Now, all of a sudden, every voice was silent, and we stopped, +thinking we were heard perhaps; though it did seem strange to me +that no dogs were about a camp of traders. I was just about to call +out that we were friends, when there began a low, even beating, as +of a drum of some sort, and then suddenly a wild howl that sounded +like a war cry of maddened men, and after that a measured tramping +of feet that went swiftly and in time to a chant, the like of which +I had never heard before, and which made me grasp Harek by the arm. + +"What, in Odin's name, is this?" r said, whispering. + +"Somewhat uncanny," answered the scald. "Let us get back to the +horses and leave this place." + +Then we turned back, and Kolgrim's foot lit on a stone that rolled +from under it, and he fell heavily with a clatter of weapons on the +scattered rocks of the stream bank. + +There was a howl from the firelight, and the chanting stopped, and +voices cried in the uncouth tongue angrily, and there came a +pattering of unshod feet round us in the thickness, with a word or +two that seemed as if of command, and then silence, but for +stealthy footfalls drawing nearer to us. And I liked it not. + +We pulled Kolgrim up, and went on upstream, drawing our swords, +though I yet thought of nothing but tin merchants whom we had +disturbed in some strange play of their own. Doubtless they would +take us for outlaws. + +Now through the fog, dark against the flickering glow of the fire, +and only seen against it, came creeping figures; and I suppose that +some dull glitter of steel from helms or sword hilts betrayed us to +them, for word was muttered among them, and the rattle of stones +shifted by bare feet seemed to be all round us. I thought it time +to speak to them. + +"We are friends, good people," I said. "We mean no harm, and have +but lost our way." + +There was a whistle, and in a moment the leaping shadows were on +us. Kolgrim went down under a heavy blow on his helm, and lay +motionless; and Harek was whirled by a dozen pairs of hands off his +feet, and fell heavily with his foes upon him. I slew one, or +thought I slew him, and I stood over Kolgrim and kept them back +with long sword sweeps, crying to them to hold, for we were +friends--King Alfred's guests. + +Now they were yelling to one another, and one threw a long-noosed +line over me from behind. It fell over my arms, and at once they +drew it tight, jerking me off my feet. As I went down, a howling +crowd fell on me and took the good sword from me, and bound me hand +and foot, having overpowered me by sheer numbers. + +Then they looked at Kolgrim, and laughed, and left him. I was sure +he was dead then, and I fell into a great dumb rage that seemed +like to choke me. + +They dragged the scald and me to the fire, and I saw into what +hands we had fallen, and I will say that I was fairly afraid. For +these were no thrifty Cornish folk, but wild-looking men, black +haired and bearded, clad in skins of wolf, and badger, and deer, +and sheep, with savage-eyed faces, and rough weapons of rusted iron +and bronze and stone. So strange were their looks and terrible in +the red light of the great fire, that I cried to Harek: + +"These be trolls, scald! Sing the verses that have power to scare +them." + +Now it says much for Harek's courage that at once he lifted up no +trembling voice and sang lustily, roaring verses old as Odin +himself, such as no troll can abide within hearing of, so that +those who bore him fell back amazed, and stared at him. Then I saw +that on the arms and necks of one or two of these weird folk were +golden rings flashing, and I saw, too, that our poor greyhounds lay +dead near where I was, and I feared the more for ourselves. + +But they did not melt away or fly before the spells that Harek +hurled at them. + +"These be mortal men," he said at last, "else had they fled ere +now." + +By this time they had left me, helpless as a log, and were standing +round us in a sort of ring, talking together of slaying us, as I +thought. I mind that the flint-tipped spears seemed cruel weapons. +At last one of them said somewhat that pleased the rest, for they +broke into a great laugh and clapped their hands. + +"Here is a word I can understand," said Harek, "and that is +'pixies.'" + +But I was looking to see where our swords were, and I saw a man +take them beyond the fire and set them on what seemed a bank, some +yards from it. Then they went to the scald and began to loosen his +bonds, laughing the while. + +"Have a care, Harek," I cried. "Make a rush for the swords beyond +the fire so soon as you are free." + +"I am likely to be hove into the said fire," said the scald, very +coolly. "Howbeit I see the place where they are." + +Then he gave a great bound and shout: but the numbers round him +were too great, and they had him down again, and yet he struggled. +This was sport to these savages, and those who were not wrestling +with him leaped and yelled with delight to see it. And I wrestled +and tore at my bonds; but they were of rawhide, and I could do +nothing. + +Then Harek said, breathing heavily: + +"No good; their arms are like steel about me." + +Then some came and dragged me back a little, and set me up sitting +against a great stone, so I could see all that went on. Now I +counted fifty men, and there were no women that I could see +anywhere. Half of these were making a great ring with joined hands +round the fire, and some piled more fuel on it--turf and branches +of dwarf oak trees--and others sat round, watching the dozen or so +that minded Harek. One sat cross-legged near me, with a great pot +covered tightly with skin held between his knees. + +Next they set Harek on his feet, and led him to the ring round the +fire. Two of the men--and they were among the strongest of +all--loosened their hands, and each gripped the scald by the wrist +and yelled aloud, and at once the man beat on the great pot's cover +drum-wise, and the ring of men whirled away round the fire in the +wild dance whose foot beats we had heard as we came. Then those who +sat round raised the chant we heard also. + +I saw Harek struggle and try to break away; but at that they +whirled yet more quickly, and he lost his footing, and fell, and +was dragged up; and then he too must dance, or be haled along the +ground. My eyes grew dizzy with watching, while the drum and the +chant dulled into a humming in my brain. + +"This cannot go on for long," I thought. + +But then, from among those who sat round and chanted, I saw now one +and now another dart to the ring and take the place of a dancer who +seemed to tire; and so at last one came and gripped Harek's wrist +and swung into the place of his first holder before he knew that +any change was coming, and so with the one on the other side of +him. + +Then it was plain that my comrade must needs fall worn out before +long, and I knew what I was looking on at. It was the dance of the +pixies, in truth--the dance that ends but with the death of him who +has broken in on their revels--and I would that I and Harek had +been slain rather with Kolgrim by the stream yonder. + +At last the scald fell, and then with a great howl they let him go, +flinging him out of the circle like a stone, and he lay in a heap +where they tossed him, and was quite still. + +Then the dancers raised a shout, and came and sat down, and some +brought earthen vessels of drink to refresh them, while they began +to turn their eyes to me, whose turn came next. + +Whereon a thought came into my mind, and I almost laughed, for a +hope seemed to lie in a simple trick enough. That I would try +presently. + +Now I looked, and hoped to see Harek come to himself; but he did +not stir. He lay near the swords, and for the first time now, +because of some thinning of the mist, I saw what was on the bank +where these had been placed. There was a great stone dolmen, as +they call it--a giant house, as it were, made of three flat stones +for walls, and a fourth for a roof, so heavy that none know how +such are raised nowadays. They might have served for a table, or +maybe a stool, for a Jotun. The two side walls came together from +the back, so that the doorway was narrow; and a man might stand and +keep it against a dozen, for it was ten feet high, and there was +room for sword play. One minds all these things when they are of no +use to him, and only the wish that they could be used is left. +Nevertheless, as I say, I had one little hope. + +It was not long before the savage folk were ready for my dance, and +they made the ring again, refreshed. The drum was taken up once +more, and a dozen men came and unbound me. I also struggled as +Harek had struggled, unavailingly. When I was quiet they led me to +the circle, and I watched for my plan to work. + +When I was within reach of the two who should hold me, I held out +my hands to grasp theirs, without waiting for them to seize me. The +man on my right took my wrist in a grasp like steel; but the other +was tricked, and took my hand naturally enough. Whereat my heart +leaped. + +"Now will one know what a grip on the mainsheet is like!" I +thought; and even as the hand closed there came the yell, and the +thud of the earthen drum, and I was whirled away. + +Now I kept going, for my great fear was that I should grow dizzy +quickly. I was taller than any man in the ring, and once I found +out the measure of the chant I went on easily, keeping my eyes on +the man ahead of me. That was the one to my right; for they went +against the sun, which is an unlucky thing to do at any time. + +Once we went round, and I saw the great dolmen and the gleam of +sword Helmbiter beneath it. Then it was across the fire, and again +I passed it. I could not choose my place, as it seemed, and +suddenly with all my force I gripped the hand I held and around the +hones of it together, so that no answering grip could come. In a +moment the man let go of his fellow with the other hand, and +screamed aloud, and cast himself on the ground, staying the dance, +so that those after him fell over us. I let go, and swung round and +smote my other holder across the face; and he too let go, and I was +free, and in the uproar the dancers knew not what had happened. +Smiting and kicking, I got clear of them, and saw that the dolmen +towered across the fire, and straightway I knew that through the +smoke was the only way. I leaped at it, and cleared it fairly, +felling a man on the other side as I did so. + +Then I had Helmbiter in my hand, and I shouted, and stepped back to +the narrow door of the dolmen, and there stood, while the wild men +gathered in a ring and howled at me. One ran and brought the long +line that had noosed me before, but the stone doorway protected me +from that; and one or two hurled spears at me, clumsily enough for +me to ward them off. + +So we stood and watched each other, and I thought they would make a +rush on me. Harek lay within sweep of my sword, and his weapon was +nearer them than me, and one of them picked it up and went to +plunge it in him. + +Then I stepped out and cut that man down, and the rest huddled back +a little at my onslaught. Whereon I drew my comrade back to my +feet, lest they should bring me out again and noose me. + +As I did that, the one who seemed to be the chief leaped at me, +club in air; but I was watching for him, and he too fell, and I +shouted, to scare back the rest. + +There was an answering shout, and Kolgrim, with the Berserker fury +on him, was among the wild crowd from out of the darkness, and his +great sword was cutting a way to my side. + +Then they did not stay for my sword to be upon them also, but they +fled yelling and terror stricken, seeming to melt into the mist. In +two minutes the firelit circle was quiet and deserted, save for +those who had fallen; and my comrade and I stared in each other's +faces in the firelight. + +"Comrade," I cried in gladness, "I thought you were slain." + +"The good helm saved me," he answered; "but I came round in time. +What are these whom we have fought?" + +I suppose the fury kept him up so far, for now I saw that his face +was ashy pale, and his knees shook under him. + +"Are you badly hurt?" I asked. + +"My head swims yet--that is all. Where is the scald?" + +I turned to him and pointed. Kolgrim sat down beside him and bent +over him, leaning against the stone of the great dolmen. + +"I do not think he is dead, master," he said. "Let us draw him +inside this house, and then he will be safe till daylight--unless +the trolls come back and we cannot hold this doorway till the sun +rises." + +"They are men, not trolls," I said, pointing to the slain who lay +between us and the fire in a lane where Kolgrim had charged through +them, "else had we not slain them thus." + +"One knows not what Sigurd's sword will not bite," he said. + +"Why, most of that is your doing," I said, laughing a little. + +But he looked puzzled, and shook his head. + +"I mind leaping among them, but not that I slew any." + +Now I thought that he would be the better for food. There had been +plenty of both food and drink going among these wild people, +whatever they were, and they had not waited to take anything. So I +said I would walk round the fire and see what I could find, and +went before he could stay me. + +I had not far to go either, for there were plentiful remains of a +roasted sheep or two set aside with the skins, and alongside them a +pot of heather ale; so that we had a good meal, sitting in the door +of the dolmen, while the moon rose. But first we tried to make +Harek drink of the strong ale. He was beginning to breathe heavily +now, and I thought he would come round presently. Whether he had +been hurt by the whirling of the dance or by the fall when they +cast him aside, I could not tell, and we could do no more for him. + +"Sleep, master," said Kolgrim, when we had supped well; "I will +watch for a time." + +And he would have it so, and I, seeing that he was refreshed, was +glad to lie down and sleep inside the dolmen, bidding him wake me +in two hours and rest in turn. + +But he did not. It was daylight when I woke, and the first ray of +the sun came straight into the narrow doorway and woke me. And it +waked Harek also. Kolgrim sat yet in the door with his sword across +his knees. + +"Ho, scald!" I said, "you have had a great sleep." + +"Ay, and a bad dream also," he answered, "if dream it was." + +For now he saw before us the burnt-out fire, and the slain, and the +strangely-trampled circle of the dance. + +"No dream, therefore," he said. "Is it true that I was made to +dance round yon fire till I was nigh dead?" + +"True enough. I danced also in turn," I said. + +And then I told him how things had gone after his fall. + +"Kolgrim has fought, therefore, a matter of fifty trolls," I said; +"which is more than most folk can say for themselves." + +Whereat he growled from the doorway: + +"Maybe I was too much feared to know what I was doing." + +We laughed at him, but he would have it so; and then we ate and +drank, and spoke of going to where we had left the horses, being +none so sure that we should find them at all. + +Now the sun drank up the mists, and they cleared suddenly; and when +the last wreaths fled up the hillsides and passed, we saw that the +horses yet fed quietly where we had left them, full half a mile +away up the steep rise down which the stream came. + +And it was strange to see what manner of place this was in +daylight, for until the mist lifted we could not tell in the least, +and it was confused to us. Now all the hillsides glowed purple with +heather in a great cup round us, and we were on a little rise in +the midst of them whereon stood the dolmen, and the same hands +doubtless that raised it had set up a wide circle of standing +stones round about it, such as I have seen in the Orkneys. It was +not a place where one would choose to spend the night. + +There was no sign of the wild folk anywhere outside the stone +circle. They had gone, and there seemed no cover for them anywhere, +unless they dwelt in clefts and caves of the bare tors around us. +So we feared no longer lest there should be any ambush set for us, +and went about to see what they had left. + +There were the long line that had noosed me, the earthen drum with +its dry skin head, the raw hide thongs we had been bound with, and +the food and drink; and that was all save what weapons lay round +the slain, and the bodies of the two good greyhounds. + +"These are but men, and not trolls as one might well think," I +said, looking on those who lay before us. + +One whom I had slain had a heavy gold torque round his neck, and +twisted gold armlets, being the chief, as I think. Kolgrim took +these off and gave them to me, and then he went to the drum and +dashed it on a stone and broke it, saying nothing. + +"Let us be going," I said. "These folk will come back and see to +their dead." + +But Kolgrim looked at the drumhead and took it, and then coiled the +long line on his arm. + +"Trust a sailor for never losing a chance of getting a new bit of +rigging," said Harek, laughing; for he seemed none the worse for +the things of last night, which indeed began to seem ghostly and +dreamlike to us all. "But what good is the bit of skin?" + +"Here be strange charms wrought into it," Kolgrim said. "It will +make a sword scabbard that will avail somewhat against such like +folk if ever we meet them again." + +Truly there were marks as of branded signs on the bit of skin, and +so he kept it; and I hung the gold trophies in my belt, and Harek +took some of the remains of our supper: and so we went to the +horses, seeing nothing of the wild men anywhere. + +Very glad were the good steeds to see us come, and the falcon, who +still sat on the saddle where I had perched her, spread her wings +and ruffled her feathers to hear us. I unhooded and fed her; and we +washed in the stream, and set out gaily enough, making southward, +for so we thought we should strike the great road. And at last, +when we saw its white line far off from a steep hillside, I was +glad enough. + +I cannot tell how we had reached our halting place through the +hills in the dark, nor could I find it again directly. It was +midday before we reached the road, riding easily; so that, what +with the swift gallop of the hunting and the long hours of riding +in mist and darkness, we had covered many miles. We saw no house +till we were close to the road, and then lit on one made of stones +and turf hard by it, where an old woman told us that no party had +been by since daylight. + +So we turned eastward and rode to meet the king, and did so before +long. He had left men at his village to wait for us in case we came +back there; but he laughed at us for losing ourselves, though he +said he had no fear for sailors adrift in the wilds when Ethelnoth +came in without us. + +But when, as we rode on, I told him what had befallen us, he +listened gravely, and at last said: + +"I have heard the like of this before. Men say that the pixies +dwell in the moorland, and will dance to death those who disturb +them. What think you of those you have seen?" + +I said that, having slain them, one could not doubt that they were +men, if strange ones. + +"That is what I think," he answered. "They are men who would be +thought pixies. Maybe they are the pixies. I believe they are the +last of the old Welsh folk who have dwelt in these wilds since the +coming of the Romans or before. There were the like in the great +fens of East Anglia and Mercia when Guthlac the Holy went there, +and he thought them devils. None can reach these men or know where +they dwell. Maybe they are heathen, and their dance in that stone +ring was some unholy rite that you have seen. But you have been +very far into the wastes, and I have never seen those stones." + +And when he handled the gold rings, he showed me that they were +very old; but when he handled the drumhead and looked at the marks +thereon, he laughed. + +"Here is the magic of an honest franklin's cattle brand. I have +seen it on beasts about the hills before now. The pixies have made +a raid on the farmer's herds at some time." + +Now I think that King Alfred was right, and that we had fallen into +the hands of wild Welsh or Cornish moor folk. But one should hear +Kolgrim's tale of the matter as he shows his sword sheath that he +made of the drumhead; for nothing would persuade him that it was +not of more than mortal work. + +"Had the good king been in that place with us, he would have told a +different tale altogether," he says. + +So we went on our journey quietly, and ever as we went and spoke +with Alfred, I began to be sure that this pale and troubled king +was the most wondrous man that I had ever seen. And now, as I look +back and remember, I know that in many ways he was showing me that +the faith he held shaped his life to that which seemed best in him +to my eyes. + +I know this, that had he scoffed at the Asir, I had listened to +Neot not at all. But when we came to his place, I was ready, and +more than ready, to hear what he had to tell me. + + + +Chapter VIII. The Black Twelfth-Night. + + +When we came to the little out of the way village among the Cornish +hills near which Neot, the king's cousin, had his dwelling, I +thought it strange that any one should be willing to give up the +stirring life at court for such a place as this. Here was only one +fair-sized house in the place, and that was built not long before +by the king for his own use when he came here, which was often. And +Neot's own dwelling was but a little stone-walled and turf-roofed +hut, apart from all others, on the hillside, and he dwelt there +with one companion--another holy man, named Guerir, a Welshman by +birth--content with the simple food that the villagers could give +him, and spending his days in prayer and thought for the king and +people and land that he loved. + +But presently, as I came to know more of Neot, it seemed good that +some should live thus in quiet while war and unrest were over the +country, else had all learning and deeper thought passed away. It +is certain from all that I have heard, from the king himself and +from others, that without Neot's steady counsel and gathered wisdom +Alfred had remained haughty and proud, well-nigh hated by his +people, as he had been when first he came to the throne. + +At one time he would drive away any who came to him with plaints or +tales of wrong and trouble; but Neot spoke to him in such wise that +he framed his ways differently. And now I used to wonder to see him +stay and listen patiently to some rambling words of trifling want, +told by a wayside thrall, to which it seemed below his rank to +hearken, and next I would know that it was thus he made his people +love him as no other king has been loved maybe. There was no man +who could not win hearing from him now. + +It is said of him that when Neot showed him the faults in his ways, +he asked that some sickness, one that might not make him useless or +loathsome to his people, might be sent him to mind him against his +pride, and that so he had at first one manner of pain, and now this +which I had seen. It may be so, for I know well that so he made it +good for him, and he bore it most patiently. Moreover, I have never +heard that it troubled him in the times of direst need, though the +fear of it was with him always. + +Now what Alfred and Neot spoke of at this time I cannot say, except +that it was certainly some plan for the good of the land. I and my +comrades hunted and hawked day by day until the evening came, and +then would sup plainly with the king, and then sit at Neot's door +in the warm evening, and talk together till the stars came out. + +Many things we spoke of, and Neot told me what I would. I cannot +write down those talks, though I mind every word of them. But there +was never any talk of the runes I had offered. + +Neot spoke mostly, but Alfred put in words now and then that ever +seemed to make things plainer; and I mind how Ethelnoth the +ealdorman sat silent, listening to questions and answers that maybe +he had never needed to put or hear concerning his own faith. + +At first I was only asking because the king wished it, then because +I grew curious, and because I thought it well to know what a +Saxon's faith was if I was to bide among Alfred's folk. Kolgrim +listened, saying nought. But presently Harek the scald would ask +more than I, and his questions were very deep, and I thought that +as days went on he grew thoughtful and silent. + +Then one evening the song woke within the scald's breast, and he +said to Neot: + +"Many and wise words have you spoken, Father Neot. Hear now the +song of Odin--the Havamal--and tell me if you have aught to equal +it." + +"Sing, my son," the good man answered. "Wisdom is from above, and +is taught in many ways." + +Then Harek sang, and his voice went over the hillsides, echoing +wonderfully; while we who heard him were very still, unwilling to +lose one word or note of the song. Many verses and sayings of the +"Havamal" I knew, but I had not heard it all before. Now it seemed +to me that no more wisdom than is therein could be found {ix}. + +So when Harek ended Neot smiled on him, and said: + +"That is a wondrous song, and I could have listened longer. There +is little therein that one may not be wiser in remembering." + +"There is nought wiser; it is Odin's wisdom," said Harek. + +Now the old hermit, Guerir, Neot's friend, sat on the stone bench +beside the king, and he said: + +"Hear the words of the bards, the wondrous 'triads' of old time." + +And he chanted them in a strange melody, unlike aught I had ever +heard. And they, the old savings, were wise as the "Havamal" +itself. But he stopped ere long, saying: + +"The English words will not frame the meaning rightly. I do no +justice to the wisdom that is hidden." + +Then Neot turned to the king, and said: + +"Sing to Harek words from the book of Wisdom that we know. I think +you can remember it well." + +"I have not rhymed it," the king answered; "but sometimes the song +shapes itself when it is needed." + +He took Guerir's little harp and tuned it afresh and sang. And in +the words were more wisdom than in the Havamal or in the song of +the bards, so that I wondered; and Harek was silent, looking out to +the sunset with wide eyes. + +Not long did the king sing, as it seemed to us; and when he ceased, +Harek made no sign. + +"Sing now, my cousin, words that are wiser than those; even sing +from the songs of David the king." + +So said Neot; and Alfred sang again very wondrously, and as with +some strange awe of the words he said. Then to me it seemed that +beside these the words of Odin were as nought. They became as words +of the wisdom of daily life, wrung from the lips of men forced to +learn by hardness and defeat and loss; and then the words that +Alfred had first sung were as those of one who knew more than Odin, +and yet spoke of daily troubles and the wisdom that grows thereout. +But now the things that he sang must needs have come from wisdom +beyond that of men--wisdom beyond thought of mine. And if so it +seemed to me, I know not how the heart of the scald, who was more +thoughtful and knew more than I, was stirred. + +He rose up when Alfred ceased, and walked away down the hillside +slowly, as in a dream, not looking at us; and the kindly Saxons +smiled gently, and said nothing to rouse him. + +It is in my mind that Harek's eyes were wet, for he had lost +somewhat--his belief in things he held dearest and first of +all--and had as yet found nothing that should take its place. There +is nought harder than that to a man. + +When he had passed out of hearing, I said: + +"Are there wiser things yet that you may sing?" + +"Ay, and that you may learn, my son," answered Neot. "Listen." + +Then he spoke words from Holy Writ that I know now--the words that +speak of where wisdom may be found. And he said thereafter, and +truly, that it was not all. + +Then I seemed to fear greatly. + +"Not now, my king, not now," I said; "it is enough." + +Then those two spoke to me out of their kind hearts. Yet to me the +old gods were very dear, and I clung to them. Neither Neot nor the +king said aught against them, being very wise, at that time. + +Presently Harek came back, and his eyes were shining. + +"Tell me more of this learning," he said, casting himself down on +the grass at Alfred's feet. "Scald have I been since I could sing, +and nought have I heard like this." + +"Some day," Neot said; "it is enough now that you should know what +you have heard." + +So ended that strange song strife on Neot's quiet hillside. The sun +set, and the fleecy mists came up from the little river below, and +we sat silent till Alfred rose and said farewell, and we went to +the guest house in the village. + +Now I think that none will wonder that after we had been with Neot +for those ten days, we were ready and willing to take on us the +"prime signing," as they called it, gladly and honestly. So we were +signed with the cross by Neot, and Alfred and Ethelnoth and Guerir +were our witnesses. + +I know that many scoff at this, because there are heathen who take +this on them for gain, that they may trade more openly, or find +profit among Christian folk, never meaning or caring to seek +further into the faith that lies open, as it were, before them. But +it was not so with us, nor with many others. We were free to serve +our old gods if we would, but free also to learn the new faith; and +to learn more of it for its own sake seemed good to us. + +So we went back to Exeter with the king, and Neot came for a few +miles with us, on foot as was his wont, parting from us with many +good words. And after he was gone the king was cheerful, and spoke +with me about the ordering of the fleet we were to build, as though +he were certain that I should take command of it in the spring. + +And, indeed, after that time there was never any question among us +three vikings about it. It seemed to us that if we had lost Norway +as a home, we had gained what would make as good a country; and, +moreover, Alfred won us to him in such wise that it seemed we could +do nought but serve him. There can be few who have such power over +men's hearts as he. + +Exeter seemed very quiet when we came back; for the Danes were +gone, and the king's levies had dispersed, and only the court +remained, though that was enough to make all the old city seem very +gay to those who had known it only in the quiet of peace. + +One man was there whom I had hardly thought to meet again, and that +was Osmund the Danish jarl. For he was a hostage in the king's +hands, to make more sure that the peace would be kept. I knew there +were hostages to be given by the beaten host; but I had not asked +who they were, and had been at the ships when they were given up, +ten of them in all, and of the best men among the Danes. + +Alfred treated his captives very well, giving them good lodgings, +and bating them often at his own table, so that I saw much of +Osmund. And more than that, I saw much of the Lady Thora, his +daughter, who would not leave him. I do not think that there could +be more certain manner of beginning a close friendship between a +warrior and the lady whom he shall learn to hold first in his +heart, than that in which I first met this fair maiden. + +Now one will say that straightway I must fall in love with her, but +it was not so: first of all, because I had not time, since every +day Alfred planned new ships with me and Thord; and next, because I +was his guest, and Osmund was his hostage. Maybe I thought not much +of that, however, not having the thoughts of a Saxon towards a +Dane. But I will say this, that among all the fair ladies of the +queen's household there was none of whom I thought at all; while of +what Thora would say I thought often, and it pleased me that the +Lady Etheldreda, Odda's fair eldest daughter, took pity on the +lonely maiden, and made much of her after a time. + +Three weeks I was in Exeter, and then the king went eastward +through his country to repair what damage had been done. Then I +took up my work for him, and got out my ship and sailed westward, +putting into every harbour where a ship might be built, and set the +shipwrights to work, having with me royal letters to sheriffs and +port reeves everywhere that they should do what I ordered them. In +each yard I left two or three of my men, that they should oversee +all things; because if one Saxon thinks he knows better than his +fellow, he will not be ruled by him, whereas no man can dispute +what a born viking has to say about ship craft. It seemed that all +were glad of our coming, and the work began very cheerfully. + +All this took long, but at last I came up the Severn, and so into +the river Parret--for the weather would serve me no longer and laid +up the ship in a creek there is at Bridgwater, where Heregar, the +king's standard bearer, was sheriff. He made me very welcome at his +great house near by, at Cannington, and then rode with me to +Bristol; and there I set two ships in frame, and so ended all I +could do for the winter. King Alfred would have a fleet when the +spring came. + +Then Heregar and I would go to Chippenham, to spend the time of the +Yule feast with King Alfred; and we rode there with Harek and +Kolgrim, and were made most welcome. Many friends whom I had made +at Exeter were there, and among them, quiet and yet hopeful of +release, were the hostages. + +That was a wonderful Yule to me; but I will say little of it, for +the tale of the most terrible Twelfth Night that England has ever +known overshadows it all, though there were things that I learned +at that time, sitting in the church with Harek, at the west end, +and listening, that are bright to me. But they are things by +themselves, and apart from all else. + +Now peace was on all the land, and the frost and snow were bright +and sharp everywhere; so that men said that it was a hard winter, +and complained of the cold which seemed nothing to us Northmen. +Maybe there was a foot of snow in deep places, and the ice was six +inches thick on the waters; and the Saxons wondered thereat, saying +that they minded the like in such and such years before. Then I +would tell them tales of the cold north to warm them, but I think +they hardly believed me. + +The town was full of thanes and their families who had been called +to Alfred's Yule keeping, and it was very bright and pleasant among +them all, though here and there burnt ruins made gaps between the +houses, minding one that the Danes had held the place not so long +since. + +So they kept high feasting for Yule and the New Year, and the last +great feast was for Twelfth Night, and all were bidden for that, +and there was much pleasant talk of what revels should be in the +evening. + +The day broke very bright and fair, with a keen, windless frost +that made the snow crisp and pleasant to ride over, hindering one +in no way. And there was the sun shining over all in a way that +made the cold seem nought to me, so that I had known nothing more +pleasant than this English winter, having seen as yet nothing of +the wet and cold times that come more often than such as this. +Then, too, the clear ringing of the bells from every village near +and far was new to me, and I thought I had heard nothing sweeter +than the English call to the church for high festival {x}. + +So I went to the king, and asked him if I might take with me the +Danish jarl for a ride beyond the town; for the hostages were only +free inside the walls, and I knew this would please Osmund and +Thora well. I said that I would see to his safety and be answerable +for him. + +"This must be Osmund, I suppose," the king said, smiling. "I have +heard how you came to know him and his fair daughter at Wareham. It +was well done, though maybe I should blame you for running +over-much risk." + +"I think I ran little, lord king," I said; "and I could have done +no less for the poor maiden." + +"Surely; but I meant that to go at all was over dangerous." + +"I am ready to do the same again for you, my king," I said. "And +after all I was in no danger." + +Then said the king, smiling gravely at me: + +"Greater often are the dangers one sees not than those which one +has to meet. I have my own thoughts of what risk you ran. + +"Well, take your fair lady and the jarl also where you will. But +the feast is set for two hours after noon, and all must be there." + +So I thanked him, and he bade me ask his steward for horses if I +would, and I went straight to Osmund from his presence. + +"I think it will be a more pleasant ride than our last," said +Thora. "Yet that is one that I shall not forget." + +Then I tried to say that I hoped she did not regret it either, but +I minded me of the loved nurse she had to leave, and was silent in +time. Yet I thought that she meant nothing of sorrow in the +remembrance as she spoke. + +We called out my two comrades, for Osmund liked them well, and rode +away northward, that the keen air might be behind us as we +returned. That was all the chance that led us that way, and it was +well that we were so led, as things turned out. + +The white downs and woodlands sparkling with frost were very +beautiful as we rode, and we went fast and joyously in the fresh +air; but the countryside was almost deserted, for the farmsteads +were burned when the Danes broke in on the land last spring, and +few were built up as yet. The poor folk were in the town now, for +the most part, finding empty houses enough to shelter them, and +none left to whom they belonged. + +Now we rode for twelve miles or so, and then won to a hilltop which +we had set as our turning place. I longed to stand there and look +out over all this country, that seemed so fair after the rugged +northern lands I had known all my life. But when we were there we +saw a farmstead just below us, on the far slope of the gentle hill; +and we thought it well to go there and dismount, and maybe find +some food for ourselves and the horses before turning back. + +So we went on. It was but a couple of furlongs distant, and the +buildings lay to the right of the road, up a tree-shaded lane of +their own. + +We turned into this, and before we had gone ten yards along it I +halted suddenly. I had seen somewhat that seemed strange, and +unmeet for the lady to set eyes on. + +"Bide here, jarl," I said, "and let us go on and see what is here; +the place looks deserted." + +And I looked meaningly at him, glancing at Thora. + +But he had seen what had caught my eye, and he stayed at once, +turning back into the main road, and beckoning Harek to come with +him and Thora, for some reason of his own. + +Then Kolgrim and I went on. What we had seen was a man lying +motionless by the farm gate, in a way that was plain enough to me. +And when we came near, we knew that the man had been slain. He was +a farm thrall, and he had a pitchfork in his hand, the shaft of +which was half cut through, as with a sword stroke that he had +warded from him, though he had not stayed a second cut, for so he +was killed. + +"Here is somewhat strangely wrong," I said. + +"Outlaws' work," answered Kolgrim; for the wartime had made the +masterless folk very bold everywhere, and the farm was lonely +enough. + +We rode through the swinging gate, and then we saw three horses by +the stable yard paling, and with them was an armed man, who saw us +as we came round the house, and whistled shrilly. Whereon two +others came running from the building, and asked in the Danish +tongue what he called for. The first man pointed to us, and all +three mounted at once. They were in mail and helm, fully armed. + +Now we were not, for we had thought of no meeting such as this, and +rode in woollen jerkins and the like, and had only our swords and +seaxes, as usual; but for the moment I did not think that we should +need either. Outlaws such as I took them for do not make any stand +unless forced. + +Presently one of the men, having mounted leisurely enough, called +to us. + +"There is no plunder to be had," he said, "even if you were not too +late; our folk cleared out the place over well last time." + +Then a fourth man, one who seemed of some rank, rode from beyond +the house, passing behind us without paying any heed to us, except +that he called to the men to follow him, and so went down the lane +towards where Osmund was waiting with Harek. + +All this puzzled me, and so I cried to the three men: + +"What do you here? Whose men are you?" + +At that they looked at one another--they were not more than ten +yards from us now--and halted. + +"You should know that," one said; and then he put his hand to his +sword suddenly, adding in a sharp voice: + +"These be Saxons; cut them down." + +When hand goes to sword hilt one knows what is coming, and even as +the man said his last words I was on them, and Kolgrim was not a +pace behind me. The Dane's sword was out first; but I was upon him +in time. His horse swerved as mine plunged forward, and I rode him +down, horse and man rolling together in the roadway. Then the man +to my right cut at me, and I parried the blow and returned it. Then +that horse was riderless, and I heard Kolgrim laugh as his man went +down with a clatter and howl. + +My horse plunged on for a few steps, and then I turned. Kolgrim had +one horse by the bridle, and was catching that which had fallen. I +caught the other, and so we looked at each other. + +"This is your luck, master," said Kolgrim. + +"Well," said I, "these are Danes, and I do not think they are +wanderers either. Here are forage bags behind the saddles. One +would say that they were on the march if this were not mid-winter +and time of peace. The horsemen in advance of a host, or the like." + +Then Kolgrim said: + +"Where has the other man gone? I had forgotten him for the moment." + +"Bide here and see if any poor farm folk are yet alive," I said. "I +will ride after him." + +So I gave the horse I was holding to my comrade, and went back +quickly down the lane to where Osmund and the other two were. The +man I sought was speaking with the jarl, whose face was white and +troubled. Harek was looking red and angry, but on Thora's face was +written what I could not understand--as it were some fear of a new +terror. + +Now it was plain that all three were very glad of my coming; but +the stranger looked round for a single glance, and then went on +speaking to Osmund. + +"Be not a fool, jarl," he said angrily. "Here is your chance; let +it not slip." + +"I tell you that my word shall not be broken," Osmund replied, very +coldly and sternly. + +"What say you, girl?" the man said then, turning to Thora. "Short +shrift will be the jarl's when Alfred finds that we are on him." + +But Thora turned away without a word, and then the Dane spoke to +me: + +"Here! you are another hostage, I suppose." + +"I am not," I answered. + +"Well, then, here is Jarl Osmund, if you know him not, and he is +one. Tell him that what I say is true, and that Chippenham town +will be burned out tonight king and all." + +I saw that the Dane, seeing that I was armed, and not clad in the +Saxon manner altogether, took me for one of his own people. And +from his words it was plain that some of the Danish chiefs had +broken away from Guthrum, and were making this unheard-of +mid-winter march to surprise Alfred. Most likely they were +newcomers into Mercia, and had nought to do with the Exeter host. + +"Maybe it is true," I answered; "but I am no Dane." + +He laughed loudly. + +"Why, then, you are one of Alfred's Norsemen! Now I warn you to get +away from Chippenham, for it is unsafe, and there will be no king +to pay you tomorrow. I think that you will say with me that it were +better for Osmund to come with me to meet the host than to go back +to Alfred and be hung before he flies--if he gets news of us in +time to do so." + +Herein the man was right, for Alfred had warned the chiefs at +Exeter that he held the hostages in surety for peace on the part of +all and any Danes. But I thought I might learn more, so I said: + +"Guthrum thinks little of his friends' lives." + +"Guthrum!" the Dane answered sneeringly; "what have we to do with +him and his peace making?" + +"What then are you Hubba's men?" + +"He is in Wales. Think you that we are all tied to the sons of +Lodbrok?" + +"You might have worse leaders," I said. + +And just then Kolgrim came along the lane, leading the three +horses, and on them were the armour and weapons of the slain. It +was not my comrade's way to leave for other folk aught that was +worth having. + +At once the Dane knew what had happened, and he swung his horse +round and spurred it fiercely, making for flight. Then Harek looked +at me and touched his sword hilt, and I nodded. It was well to let +no tidings of our knowledge go back to the host. After the Dane +therefore went Harek, and I looked at Osmund. + +"Jarl," I said, "I am in a strait here. If you go back, your life +is in Alfred's hands." + +"I know it," he said, smiling faintly. "It is a hard place maybe +for us both, but there is only one way. You must get back to the +king, and I with you; for you have to answer for me, and my word is +passed not to escape." + +Then Thora said: + +"The king is just, as all men know. How should he slay you for what +you cannot help?" + +"Ay," he answered, smiling at her, "that is right." + +So she was satisfied, knowing nought perhaps of what the place of a +hostage is. + +So we started back to Chippenham quickly, and after us I heard +Harek coming. He had a led horse when he joined us, and I knew that +none would take word to the Danish host that the king was warned. + +When we came to the hilltop over which we had ridden so blithely an +hour ago or less, we looked back, and at first saw nothing. Then +over the white brow of a rolling down that shone in the level +sunlight came a black speck that grew and lengthened, sliding, as +it were, like a snake down the hillside. And that line sparkled +like ice in the sunlight from end to end; for it was the Danish +host on the march, and in two hours they would be where we stood, +and in two more they who were mounted would be in Chippenham +streets, where Alfred had not enough men even to guard the gates +against such a force as was coming. + +Then we rode hard for the lives of all who were in the town, and as +I went I thought also that we rode to the death of the brave, +honest jarl who was beside me, saying nothing, but never letting +his horse falter. Just as bravely rode Thora. + +In an hour we were at the gates, and I rode straight to the king's +house, and sought him on urgent business. + +Ethered of Mercia came out to me. + +"What is it, Ranald?" he said. "The Witan is set now." + +I told him in few words, and his face changed. + +"It seems impossible in frost and snow," he said. + +"Ay; but there are proofs," I said, pointing through the great +doorway. + +There was my party, and Kolgrim was binding a wound on Harek's arm +of which I knew nought till that moment, and the led horses and +spoils were plain enough to say all. + +Then Ethered made haste and took me to the great hall, where Alfred +sat with some thirty thanes of his Witan {xi}, and many clergy. +I knew they were to meet on some business that I had nought to do +with. Ethered went to the king without any ceremony, and speaking +low told him my message. Whereon the king's face grew white and +then red, and he flashed out into terrible wrath: + +"Forsworn and treacherous!" he cried, in a thick voice that shook +with passion. "The hostages--chain them and bring them here. Their +friends shall find somewhat waiting them here that shall make them +wish they had kept their oaths!" + +Then he said to me: + +"Speak out, Ranald, and tell these thanes your news." + +I spoke plainly, and they listened with whitening faces and +muttered oaths. And when I ceased, one cried, hardly knowing what +he said, as I think: + +"This outlander rode with Osmund the Dane to bring them on us even +now." + +"Silence!" Alfred said; and then in a cold voice he asked me: + +"Where is this Osmund? I suppose he has fled to his people." + +"That he has not, though he could have done so," I answered. +"Moreover, the Dane I spoke with said in so many words that this is +no host of Guthrum's." + +At that Alfred frowned fiercely. + +"Whose then? What good is a king if he cannot make his people keep +their oaths?" + +There was a stir at the door, and the eyes of all turned that way. +And when the thanes saw that the hostages were being led in, with +Osmund at their head, a great sullen growl of wrath broke from +them, and I thought all hope was gone for the lives of those +captives. + +"Hear you this?" the king said, in a terrible voice, when the noise +ceased. "By the deed of your own people your lives are forfeit. +They have broken the peace, and even now are marching on us. Your +leader, Osmund himself, has seen them." + +"It is true," Osmund said. "We are in the king's hands." + +Then Alfred turned to the Witan, who were in disorder, and in +haste, as one might see, to be gone to their houses and fly. + +"You heard the Danish oath taken at Exeter; what is your word on +this?" + +They answered in one voice: + +"Slay them. What else?" + +"You hear," said the king to the Danes. "Is not the sentence just?" + +"It is what one might look for," Osmund answered, "but I will say +this, that this is some new band of Danes, with whom we have nought +to do." + +"What!" said Alfred coldly; "will you tell me that any Dane in the +country did not know that I held hostages for the peace? Go to. + +"See to this matter, sheriff." + +Then the sheriff of Chippenham came forward, and it seemed to me +that it was of no use for me to say aught; yet I would try what I +could do, so I spoke loudly, for a talk had risen among the thanes. + +"What is this, lord king? Will you slay Osmund the jarl, who has +kept his troth, even to coming back to what he knew would be his +death? You cannot slay such a man for the oath breaking of others." + +Then the king looked long at me, and the sheriff stayed, and at +first I expected passionate words; but the king's rage was cold and +dreadful now. + +"His friends slay him--not I," he answered. + +Then of a sudden I minded somewhat, and clear before me stood a +test by which I might know certainly if it were good that I should +leave the Asir and follow the way of the white Christ. + +"King Alfred," I said, "I have heard the bishop tell, in the great +church here, of a king who slew the guiltless at Christmastide. +There was nought too hard for any to say of that man. Moreover, I +have heard strange and sweet words of peace at this time, of +forgiveness of enemies and of letting go of vengeance. Are these +things nought, or are they indeed those by which you guide +yourselves, as Neot says?" + +He was silent, gazing fixedly on me; and all the Witan were +speechless, listening. + +"These men are enemies maybe, but they at least have done nought. +Shall you avenge yourself on them for the wrongdoing of others?" + +Then the king's face changed, and he looked past me, and in his +eyes grew and shone a wondrous light, and slowly he lifted up his +hand, and cried, in a great voice that seemed full of joy: + +"Hear this, O ye Danes and foes of the Cross. For the love of +Christ, and in His name, I bid you go in peace!" + +And then, as they stared at him in wonder and awe at his look and +words, Alfred said to me: + +"Unbind them, my brother, and let them go--nay, see them safely to +some strong house; for the poor folk may slay them in their blind +anger, even as would I have done." + +Then no man hindered me--for it seemed as if a great fear, as of +the might of the holy name, had fallen on all--and I went and cut +the bonds of the captives. And as I did so, Osmund said in a low +voice to me: + +"First daughter and then father. We owe our lives to you." + +"Nay," I answered, "but to the Christians' faith." + +Then I hurried them out before news of what was on hand could get +among the townsfolk, and we went quickly to my lodgings; for that +was a strong house enough, and could be barred in such wise that +even if any tried to attack the place in the flight that would +begin directly, it would take too long to break the doors down to +be safe with the host at hand. + +Then came Heregar, armed and mounted, with a single man behind him, +and he called for me. + +"Ride out with me, King Ranald, for we must count these Danes, and +see that we are not overrating their number. After that we will +join the king, who goes to Glastonbury." + +So I bade farewell to Osmund and to Thora, who said nought, but +looked very wistfully, as if she would say words of thanks but +could not; and at that I went quickly, for it seemed hard to leave +her, in some way that was not clear to me, amid all the turmoil of +the place. + +But when we were on the road, Heregar said to me: + +"It is in my mind that Osmund, your friend, will fare ill among +these Danes. They will hear how he rode back, and will hold that by +his means the king escaped." + +"What can be done?" + +"The man is one of a thousand, as it seems to me. Let us bid him +leave the town and get back to Guthrum as he can." + +"He can have the Danish horses," I said. + +Now before sunset we had seen the Danish force, and our hearts +sank. There were full ten thousand men, many of whom were mounted. + +Then we rode back, and found the town in such tumult as it is not +good to think on. There is nothing more terrible to see than such a +flight, and in midwinter. + +When we came to my lodging, Heregar went in to find Osmund. I would +not see him again, lest Thora should weep. But in a few minutes he +came out with the jarl. + +"Here is a wise man," said Heregar. "He says that he swore to keep +the peace with Alfred, and he will do it. He and the Lady Thora +will go with us. There are one or two also of the other hostages +who blame him for returning. He cannot stay among the Danes here." + +Then I was very glad, and we made haste to have all ready for +Thora's comfort on the ride that might be so long. And so we rode +out after the king along the road to Glastonbury, and I think that +the Danes were in the town half an hour after we left it. + +Next we knew that Danes were on the road before us, and that more +were hard after us. Some had skirted the town in order to cut off +the king, and were pursuing him. So we struck off the road into +by-lanes that Heregar knew, resting at lonely houses as we went on. +And when we came to Glastonbury at last, the king was not there, +nor did any know of his fate. + +Then we rode, with the Danes swarming everywhere, through the +Sedgemoor wastes to Bridgwater, and found rest at Cannington, +Heregar's great house not far off. + + + +Chapter IX. The Sign of St. Cuthberht. + + +I suppose that in our flight from Glastonbury to Bridgwater we +passed through more dangers than we knew of; for Danes were hard +after us, riding even into sight from the town that evening, and +next day coming even to the eastern end of the old bridge, and +bandying words with the townsfolk who guarded it. Across it they +dared not come, for there is a strong earthwork on the little rise +from the river, which guards both bridge and town, and in it were +my Norsemen with the townsfolk. + +So we were in safety for a time; and it seemed likely that we might +be so for long if but a few men could be gathered, for here was a +stretch of country that was, as it were, a natural fastness. Three +hundred years ago the defeated Welsh had turned to bay here while +Kenwalch of Wessex and his men could not follow them; and now it +seemed likely that here in turn would Wessex stand her ground. + +It is a great square-sided patch of rolling, forest-covered +country, maybe twelve miles long from north to south, and half as +much across. None can enter it from the north, because there is the +sea, and a wild coast that is not safe for a landing; on the west +the great, steep, fort-crested Quantock Hills keep the border; on +the eastern side is the river Parret, and on the north the Tone, +which joins it. Except at Bridgwater, at the eastern inland corner, +and Taunton, at the western--one at the head of the tidal waters of +the Parret, and the other guarding the place where the Quantocks +end--there is no crossing the great and wide-stretching fens of +Sedgemoor and Stanmoor and the rest that lie on either bank of the +rivers. Paths there are that the fenmen know, winding through mere +and peat bog and swamp, but no host can win through them; and +perhaps those marches are safer borders than even the sea. + +If one came from the sea, one must land at Watchet, and then win a +path across the Quantocks, and there is the ancient camp of +Dowsborough to block the way; or else put into the Parret, and +there, at the first landing place, where they say that Joseph of +Arimathaea landed, bearing the holy thorn staff in his hand, is the +strong hill fort of Combwich, old as the days of that Joseph, or +maybe older. + +So with walled towns and hill forts the corners of Heregar's land +were kept; and with sea and marsh and hill the sides were strong, +and we thought to find Alfred the king here before us. But he was +not; and next day we rode on to Taunton to seek him there, for that +was the strongest fortress in that part of the west. And again he +was not to be heard of. Then fear for his life began to creep into +our minds, and we came back to Cannington sorely downcast. + +Then Heregar spoke to me very kindly of what he thought I could +best do, and it was nothing more or less than that I should leave +this land, which seemed to have no hope of honour for me now. + +"Go rather to Rolf, your countryman," he said. "There is great talk +of his doings in Neustria {xii} beyond the Channel. It is your +kindness only that holds you here, King Ranald, and there wait +glory and wealth for you and your men." + +So he urged me for a little while, not giving me time to answer him +as I would; but when I said nothing he stayed his words, and then I +spoke plainly, and it was good to see his face light up as I did +so. + +"It shall not be said of me that I left King Alfred, who has been +my good friend, in time of trouble; rather will I stay here and do +what I can to help him out of it. Why, there are ships that I have +put in frame for him in the western ports that the Danes will not +reach yet, if at all. When spring comes we will man them and make a +landing somewhere, and so divide the Danish host at least." + +"Now I will say no more," answered the thane, putting his hand on +mine. "Speak thus to the king when we find him, and it will do him +good, for I think that when he left Chippenham he was well-nigh +despairing." + +"It is hard to think that of Alfred," I said. + +"Ay; but I saw his face as he rode away just before I sought you. +Never saw I such a look on a man's face before, and I pray that I +may not see it again. It was terrible to look on him, for I think +he had lost all hope." + +"For the time, maybe," I said; "but I cannot believe that when the +first weight of the blow passed he was not himself again." + +Presently there came a shift of wind and a quick thaw with driving +rain, and floods grew and spread rapidly in the low-lying lands. +One good thing can be said of this weather, and that was that +because of it the Danes burned neither town nor farmstead, needing +all the shelter they could find. + +Three days that gale lasted, and then the wind flew round again to +the north, with return of the frost in even greater strength than +before; and the weather-wise fishers and shepherds said that this +betokened long continuance thereof, and so it seemed likely to be. + +But through it all we heard no tidings of the king; and in one way +that was good, for had he been taken by the Danes, they would have +let all men know thereof soon enough. But we feared that he might +have been slain by some party who knew not who he was, and that +fear hung heavily over us all. + +Next we had a messenger from Odda, who was at Exeter, asking for +sure word of what had befallen; and the one hope we had yet was +gone, for he too knew nothing. + +Very sad and silent was Osmund the jarl, though he and Thora were +most kindly received as honoured guests by the Lady Alswythe and +the household of the thane. + +Once I asked him what his plans were, for we were both strangers, +and I knew him best. + +"Presently," he said, "I shall try to get back to Guthrum. While I +am here I will be held as if I were no one--as a harmless ghost who +walks the house, neither seeing nor hearing aught. If there were +Welsh to be fought, I would fight beside you all, gladly, for +Alfred; but as the war is against my own folk, I can do nothing. I +will neither fight for them nor fight against them; for King Alfred +and you, my friend, gave me life, and it is yours. I think that +some day I may be of use to Alfred in helping to bring about a +lasting peace." + +"If we find him," I said. + +"Ay, you will find him. He is hiding now for some wise reason that +we shall know. I think it is not known how his plans are feared by +our folk. I am sure that of this midwinter march the Danes will say +that it is worthy of Alfred himself." + +Nevertheless we heard nothing of him, though the thane had men out +everywhere trying to gain news. All that they heard was the same +tale of dismay from whoever they might meet, and I think that but +for a chance we should not have found him until he chose to come +forth from his refuge. + +Heregar the thane had a strange serving man, the same who had +ridden with him and me to meet the Danish forces; and this man was +a fenman from Sedgemoor, who knew all the paths through the wastes. +Lean and loose-limbed he was, and somewhat wild looking, mostly +silent; but where his lord went he went also. They said that he had +saved the thane's life more than once in the great battles about +Reading, when the Danish host first came. + +This man was out daily, seeking news with the rest; and one day, +just a week after we had come to Cannington, when the frost had +bound everything fast again, he came home and sought his master. + +Heregar and I and Osmund sat together silently before the fire, and +he looked from one to the other of us outlanders. + +"Speak out, Dudda," said Heregar, who knew his ways; "here are none +but friends." + +"Ay, friends of ours sure enough; but are they the king's?" + +"Most truly so. Have you news of him?" + +"I have not; but I have heard some fenmen talking." + +Then Osmund rose up and went his way silently, as was his wont; and +Dudda grinned at us. + +"He is a good Dane," he said; "now I can speak. They say there is +some great lord hiding in the fens beyond the round hill where Tone +and Parret join, that we call the Stane--somewhere by Long Hill, +they say. Now I mind that one day when the king rode with you +across the Petherton heights, he looked out over all the fens, and +called me and asked much of them. And when I told him what he +would, he said, 'Here is a place where a man might lie hid from all +the world if he chose.' So he laughed, and we rode on." + +"I mind it," said Heregar; "but it was many years ago." + +"I think he may be there, for our king weighs his words, and does +not forget. I held his horse at your door in Chippenham the other +day, and he spoke to me by name, and put me in mind of little +things for which he had laughed at me in those same old days. He is +a good king." + +So said Dudda, the rough housecarl; and it is in my mind that the +kindly remembrance would have wiped out many a thought of wrong, +had there been any. That is a kingly gift to remember all, and no +king has ever been great who has not had it; for it binds every man +to his prince when he knows that aught he has done is not +forgotten, so it be good to recall. + +So it came to pass that next day, very early, we rode away, taking +Harek and Kolgrim and this man Dudda with us, well armed and +mounted and full of hope, across the southward ridge that looks +down over the fens of the meeting of Tone and Parret, where they +are widest and wildest. No Danes had crossed them yet, and when I +saw what they were like I thought that they never could do so. + +And as I looked at the long chains of ice-bound meres and pools +that ran among dense thickets of alder and wide snow-covered +stretches of peat bogs, it seemed that we might search in vain for +one who would hide among them. Only the strange round hill on +Stanmoor seemed to be a point that might be noted on all the level, +though Dudda told us that there were many islets hidden in the +wooded parts. + +We went to the lower hills and then to the very edge of the +fenland, skirting along it, and asking here and there of the +cottagers if they knew of any folk in hiding in the islets. But +though we heard of poor people in one or two places, none of them +knew of any thane; and the day wore on, and hope began to grow dim, +save for Dudda's certainty that what he had heard was true. + +At last we came to a long spur of high ground that runs out into +the fen, about midway between Bridgwater and Taunton; and there is +the village they call Lyng, where we most hoped to hear good news. +The day was drawing to sunset, and we would hasten; so Heregar went +one way and I another, each to distant cottages that we saw. The +lane down which I and my two comrades rode seemed to lead fenwards, +and it was little more than a track, deep in snow and tree +bordered. The cottage we sought was a quarter mile away when we +left the thane, and as we drew near it we saw an old woman walking +away from it, and from us also. She did not seem to hear us when we +called to her; and, indeed, such was the fear of Danes that often +folk would fly when they saw us, and the faster because we called, +not waiting to find out who we were. + +Then from out of the cottage came another old woman, who hobbled +into the track and looked after the first, shaking her fist after +her, and then following her slowly, looking on the ground. She +never glanced our way at all, and our horses made no noise to speak +of in the snow. + +We drew up to her, and then I saw that she had a hammer in her +right hand and a broad-headed nail in her left. I wondered idly +what she was about with these things, when she stooped and began to +hammer the nail into the iron-hard ground, and I could hear her +muttering some words quickly. + +I reined up to watch her, puzzled, and said to Harek: + +"Here is wizardry; or else what is the old dame about?" + +"It is somewhat new to me," the scald said, looking on with much +interest; for if he could learn a new spell or charm, he was +pleased as if he had found a treasure. + +Then I saw that she was driving the nail into a footprint. There +were three tracks only along the snow--two going away from the +cottage and one returning. That which went and returned was made by +this old woman, as one might see from her last steps, which made a +fourth track from the door. + +"She is hammering the nail into her own footprint," I said, noting +this. + +Now she sang in a cracked voice, hammering savagely the while; and +now and then she shook her fist or hammer, or both, towards where +the other old dame had gone out of sight round a bend of the lane. + +Then she put her hand to her back and straightened herself with a +sort of groan, as old dames will, and slowly turned round and saw +us. + +Whereat she screamed, and hurled the hammer at Kolgrim, who was +laughing at her, cursing us valiantly for Danes and thieves, and +nearly hitting him. + +"Peace, good mother," I said; "we are not Danes. Here is earnest +thereof," and I threw her a sceatta from my pouch. + +She clutched it from the ice pool where it fell, and stared at us, +muttering yet. Then Harek spoke to her. + +"Mother, I have much skill in spells, but I know not what is +wrought with hammer and nail and footprint. I would fain learn." + +"Little know you of spells if you know not that," she said, having +lost all fear of us, as it seemed. + +"I am only a northerner," Harek said. "Maybe 'tis a spell against a +sprained ankle, which seems likely. I only know one for that." + +"Which know you?" she said scornfully; "you are over young to +meddle with such like." + +"This," said Harek. "It works well if the sprain be bathed with +spring-cold water, while one says it twice daily: + +"'Baldur and Woden +Went to the woodland; +There Baldur's foal fell, +Wrenching its foot.' + +"That is how it begins." + +Then the old woman's eyes sparkled. + +"Ay; that is good. Learn it me, I pray you. Now I know that you +have wizardry, for you name the old gods." + +"Tell me first what hammer and nail work in footprint." + +"Why, yon old hag has overlooked me," she said savagely. "Now, if +one does as I have done, one nails her witchcraft to herself +{xiii}." + +"Whose footprint does the nail go into?" Harek asked. + +"Why, hers surely. Now this is the spell," and she chanted somewhat +in broad Wessex, and save that Baldur's name and Thor's hammer also +came into it, I do not know what it all was. I waxed impatient now, +for I thought that Heregar might be waiting for us. + +But she and Harek exchanged spells, and then I said: + +"Now, dame, know you of any thane in hiding hereabouts?" + +Thereat she looked sharply at me. + +"I know nothing. Here be I, lamed, in the cottage all day." + +"There is a close friend of mine in hiding from the Danes somewhere +here," I said, doubting, from her manner, if she spoke the truth. +"I would take him to a safer place." + +"None safer," she answered. "What is his name?" + +Then I doubted for a moment; but Harek's quick wit helped me. + +"Godred," he said; for the name by which the king had called +himself once it was likely that he would use again. + +"I know of no thanes," she said, though not at once, so that I was +sure she knew somewhat more than she thought safe to tell. + +Then she was going, but Harek stayed her. + +"Yours is a good spell against the evil eye, mother," he said, "but +I can tell you a better." + +"What is it?" she said eagerly. + +"News for news," he answered carelessly. "Tell us if you know aught +of this thane, and I will tell you." + +"I said not that there was a thane." she said at once. + +"Nay, mother; but you denied it not. Come now; I think what I can +tell you will save you trouble." + +She thought for a little, weighing somewhat in her mind, as it +seemed, and then she chose to add to her store of witchcraft. + +"Yonder, then," she said, nodding to the dense alder thickets that +hid the river Tone from us, across a stretch of frozen mere or +flooded land. "I wot well that he who bides in Denewulf's cottage +is a thane, for he wears a gold ring, and wipes his hands in the +middle of the towel, and sits all day studying and troubling in his +mind in such wise that he is no good to any one--not even turning a +loaf that burns on the hearth before his eyes. Ay, they call him +Godred." + +Then my heart leaped up with gladness, and I turned to seek +Heregar; but he was coming, and so I waited. Then the dame +clamoured for her reward, which Harek had as nearly forgotten as +had I. + +"Mother," the scald said gravely, "when I work a spell with hammer +and nail, the footprint into which the nail is driven is of her who +cast the evil eye on me." + +"Why, so it should be." + +"Nay, but you drive it into your own," he said. + +She looked, and then looked again. Then she stamped a new print +alongside the nailed one, and it was true. She had paid no heed to +the matter in her fury, and when she knew that she turned pale. + +"Man," she cried, "help me out of this. I fear that I have even +nailed the evil overlooking fast to myself." + +"Ay, so you have," said Harek; "but it is you who know little of +spells if you cannot tell what to do. Draw the nail out while +saying the spell backwards, and then put it into the right place +carefully. Then you will surely draw away also any ill that she has +already sent you, and fasten it to her." + +"Then I think she will shrivel up," said the old witch, with much +content. "You are a great wizard, lord; and I thank you." + +"Here is a true saying of a friend of mine," said Heregar, coming +up in time to hear this. "But what has come to you, king? have you +heard aught?" + +Now when the old woman heard the thane name the king, before I +could answer she cried out and came and clung to my stirrup, taking +my hand and kissing it, and weeping over it till I was ashamed. + +"What is this?" I said. + +"O my lord the king!" she cried. "I thought that yon sad-faced man +in Denewulf's house was our king maybe, so wondrous proud are his +ways, and so strange things they hear him speak when he sleeps. But +now I am glad, for I have seen the king and kissed his hand, and, +lo, the sight of him is good. Ay, but glad will all the countryside +be to know that you live." + +Then I knew not what to say; but Heregar beckoned to me, saying: + +"Come, leave her her joy; it were cruel to spoil it, and maybe she +will never know her mistake." + +So we rode on, and Heregar called Dudda, asking him if he knew +Denewulf's cottage; while in the track stood the witch, blessing +her king as eagerly as she had cursed her gossip just now. + +"I know not the path, though I have heard of the cottage," Dudda +said; "but it will be strange if I cannot find a way to the place." + +He took us carefully into the fen for some way until we passed +through a thicket and came to the edge of a mere, and there were +five men who bore fishing nets and eel spears, which had not been +used, as one might suppose, seeing that the ice was nigh a foot +thick after the thaw and heavy frost again. + +And those two men who came first were Ethelnoth, the Somerset +ealdorman, and young Ethered of Mercia. It was strange to see those +nobles bearing such burdens; but we knew that we had found the +king. + +They saw us, and halted; but Heregar waved his hand, and they came +on, for they knew him. It would be hard to say which party was the +more pleased to meet the other. + +"Where is the king?" we asked. + +"Come with us, and we will take you to him," Ethered said. "But +supperless you must be tonight. We have nought in the house, and +nothing can we catch." + +Then I was surprised, and said: + +"Is it so bad as that here? In our land, when the ice is at its +thickest we can take as much fish as we will easily." + +"Save us from starvation, Ranald," said Ethered, laughing ruefully, +"and we will raise a big stone heap here in your honour." + +"Kolgrim will show you," I said; "let me go to the king." + +"I am a great ice fisherman," said Harek; "let me go also." + +Then Heregar laughed in lightness of heart. + +"Ay, wizard, go also. There will be charms of some sort needed +before Ethered sees so much as a scale." + +Whereon they dismounted, and Kolgrim took his axe from his saddle +bow, asking where the river was, while he wondered that such a +simple matter as breaking a hole in the ice and dropping a line +among the hungry fish, who would swarm to the air, had not been +thought of. We had not yet learned that such a winter as this comes +but seldom to the west of England, and the thanes knew nothing of +our northern ways. + +Then Ethelnoth led Heregar and me across twisting and almost unseen +paths, safer now because of the frost, though one knew that in some +places a step to right or left would plunge him through the crust +of hard snow into a bottomless peat bog. The alder thickets grew +everywhere round dark, ice-bound pools of peat-stained water, and +we could nowhere see more than a few yards before us; and it was +hard to say how far we had gone from the upland edge of the swamp +when the ground began to rise from the fen, and grew harder among +better timber. But for the great frost, one would have needed a +boat in many places. + +Then we came to a clearing, in which stood a house that was hardly +more than a cottage, and round it were huts and cattle sheds. And +this was where the king was--the house of Denewulf the herdsman, +the king's own thrall. There was a rough-wattled stockade round the +place, and quick-set fences within which to pen the cattle and +swine outside that, and all around were the thickets. None could +have known that such an island was here, for not even the house +overtopped the low trees; and though all the higher ground was +cleared, there were barely two acres above the watery level--a +long, narrow patch of land that lay southeast and northwest, with +its southerly end close to the banks of the river Tone. Men call +the place Athelney now, since the king and his nobles lay there. It +had no name until he came, but I think that it will bear ever +hereafter that which it earned thus. + +Two shaggy grey sheepdogs came out to meet us, changing their angry +bark for welcome when they saw Ethelnoth; and a man came to the +door to see what roused them, and he had a hunting spear in his +hand. I took him for some thane, as he spoke to us in courtly wise; +but he was only Denewulf the herdsman himself. + +"How fares the king?" asked Ethelnoth. + +"His dark hour came on him after you went," Denewulf answered; "and +then the pain passed, and he slept well, and now has just wakened +wonderfully cheerful. I have not seen him so bright since he came +here; and he is looking eagerly for your return, seeming to expect +some news." + +"It may be that our coming has been foretold him beforehand," said +Heregar. "Our king has warnings given him in his dreams at times." + +Then from out of the house Alfred's voice hailed us: + +"Surely that is the voice of my standard bearer. + +"Come in quickly, Heregar, for all men know that hope comes with +you." + +We went in; and it was a poor place enough for a king's lodging, +though it was warm and neat. Alfred sat over the fire in the middle +of the larger room of the two which the house had, and a strew of +chips and shreds of feathers and the like was round him; for he was +arrow making--an art in which he was skilful, and he had all the +care and patience which it needs. When we came in he rose up, +shaking the litter from his dress into the fire; and we bent our +knees to him and kissed his hand. + +"O my king," said Heregar, "why have you thus hidden yourself +from us? All the land is mourning for you." + +Then Alfred looked sadly at him and wistfully, answering: + +"First, because I must hide; lastly, because I would be hidden: but +between these two reasons is one of which I repent--because I +despaired." + +"Nay," said Denewulf, "it was not despair; it was grief and +anxiousness and thought and waiting for hope. Never have you spoken +of despair, my king." + +"But I have felt it," he answered, "and I was wrong. Hope should +not leave a man while he has life, and friends like these, and +counsellors like yourself. Now have I been rebuked, and hope is +given me afresh." + +Then he smiled and turned to me. + +"Why, Ranald my cousin, this is kindness indeed. I had not thought +that you would bide with a lost cause, nor should I have thought of +blame for you had you gone from this poor England; you are not +bound to her as are her sons." + +"My king," I said truly, "there are things that bind more closely +even than birth." + +I think he was pleased, for he smiled, and shook his head at me as +though to say that he could not take my saying to himself, as I +meant it. And then, before we could ask him more, he began to think +of our needs. + +"Here we have been pressed for food, friends, for the last few +days, and I fear you must fast with us. The deer have fled from our +daily hunting, and the wild fowl have sought open water. Unless our +fishers have luck, which seems unlikely, we must do as well as we +can on oaten bread." + +Then Ethelnoth said: + +"There have been no fish caught today, my king." + +"Why, then, we will wait till the others return; and meanwhile I +will hear all the news, for Ranald and Heregar will have much to +tell me." + +So we told him all that we knew, and he asked many questions, until +darkness fell. + +"Why are you here, lord king?" asked Heregar; "my hall is safe." + +"Your hall and countryside are safe yet because I am not there," +Alfred answered, fixing his bright eyes on the thane. "The Danes +are hunting for me, and were I in any known place, thither would +they come. Therefore I said that now I choose to bide hidden. +Moreover, in this quiet and loneliness there comes to me a plan +that I think will work out well; for this afternoon, as I slept, I +was bidden to look for a sign that out of hopelessness should come +help and victory." + +Just then the dogs rose up and whined at the door, as if friends +came; and there were cheerful voices outside. The door opened, and +in stumbled Ethered, bearing a heavy basket of great fish, which he +cast on the floor--lean green and golden pike, and red-finned +roach, in a glittering, flapping heap. + +"Here is supper!" he cried joyfully, "and more than supper, for +each of us is thus laden. Fish enough for an army could we have +taken had we not held our hands. I could not have thought it +possible." + +Whereat Alfred rose up and stared, crossing himself. + +"Deo gratias," he said under his breath, and then said aloud, "Lo, +this is the sign of which I spoke even now--that my fishers should +return laden with spoil, even for an army, although frost and snow +have prevented them from taking fish for many days, and today was +less likelihood of their doing so than ever." + +"Ranald knew well how this would cheer you, King Alfred," said +Ethered, thinking that I had spoken of this as a proof that all was +not lost, in some way. + +"Ranald said nought; but the sign came from above, thus," the king +said gravely. "In my dream the holy Saint Cuthberht stood by my +side, and reproved me sharply for my downheartedness and despair, +and for my doubt of help against the heathen; and when he knew that +I was sorry, he foretold to me that all would yet be well, and that +I should obtain the kingdom once more with even greater honour than +I have had--with many more wondrous promises. And then he gave me +this sign, as I have told you and, behold, it has come, and my +heart is full of thankfulness. Now I know that all will be well +with England." + +Then said Denewulf, who it was plain took no mean place with the +king and thanes: + +"Say how this miracle was wrought, I pray you, for it is surely +such." + +"Hither came King Ranald and his two friends and bade us make holes +in the ice and fish through them. So we did, and this is what came +thereof," said Ethered. + +"Therefore King Ranald and his coming are by the hand of God," said +Denewulf. "Therein lies the miracle." + +Then I was feared, for all were silent in wonder at the coming to +pass of the sign; and it seemed to me that I was most truly under a +power stronger than that of the old gods, who never wrought the +like of this. + +Then came Harek's voice outside, where he hung up fish to freeze +against the morrow; and he sang softly some old saga of the fishing +for the Midgard snake by Asa Thor. And that grated on me, though I +ever waited to hear what song the blithe scald had to fit what was +on hand, after his custom. Alfred heard too, and he glanced at me, +and I was fain to hang my head. + +"Ranald, who brought to pass the sign, shall surely share in its +bodings of good," he said, quickly and kindly. "I think that he is +highly favoured." + +Then in came my comrades, and they bent to the king, and he thanked +them; and after that was supper and much cheerfulness. Harek sang, +and Alfred, and after them Denewulf. Much I marvelled at the wisdom +of this strange man, but I never knew how he gained it. King Alfred +was ever wont to say that in him he had found his veriest +counsellor against despair in that dark time; and when in after +days he took him from the fen and made him a bishop, he filled the +place well and wisely, being ever the same humble-minded man that I +had known in Athelney {xiv}. + + + +Chapter X. Athelney and Combwich. + + +In the morning King Alfred took us to the southern end of his +island, and there told us what his plans were. And as we listened +they seemed to us to be wiser than mortal mind could have made, so +simple and yet so sure were they, as most great plans will be. It +is no wonder that his people hold that he was taught them from +above. + +He bade us look across the fens to the wooded heights of Selwood +Forest, to south and east, and to the bold spur of the Polden Hills +beyond the Parret that they call Edington. There was nought but fen +and river and marsh between them and us--"impassable by the Danes +who prowled there. Only at the place where the two rivers join was +a steep, rounded hill, that stood up strangely from the level--the +hill that they call the Stane, on Stanmoor; and there were other +islands like this on which we stood, unseen among the thickets, or +so low that one might not know of them until upon them. + +"Now," he said, "sooner or later the Danes will know I am here, +where they cannot reach me. Therefore I will keep them watching +this place until I can strike them a blow that will end the trouble +once for all. They will be sure that we gather men on the Quantock +side, whence Heregar can keep them; and so, while they watch for us +to attack them thence, we will gather beyond Selwood, calling all +the thanes from Hants and Wilts and Dorset and Somerset to meet me +on a fixed day, and so fall on them. Now we will build a fort +yonder on Stane hill that will make them wonder, and so the plan +will begin to work. For I have only told you the main lines +thereof; the rest must go as can be planned from day to day." + +Then he looked steadfastly at the Selwood heights, and added: + +"And if the plan fails, and the battle I look for goes against us, +there remain Heregar's places yet. Petherton, Combwich, and +Dowsborough are good places, where a king may die in a ring of +foes, looking out over the land for which his life is given." + +"We shall not fail, my king," said Heregar. "Devon will gather to +you across the Quantocks also." + +"Ay," he said; "and you will need them with you." + +Then said I: + +"Hubba is in Wales, and is likely to come here when he hears that +his fellows are gathering against us. Then will Devon be needed at +Combwich in Parret mouth, or at Watchet." + +"That will be Devon's work," the king said. "If Hubba comes before +your ships are ready to meet him, he must at least be driven to +land elsewhere, or our stronghold is taken behind us." + +Now I was so sure that Hubba would come, that this seemed to me to +be the weakest part of the king's plan. But Alfred thought little +of it. + +"My stronghold seems to be on Quantock side; it is rather beyond +Selwood, in the hearts of my brave thanes and freemen. Fear not, +cousin. Hubba will come, and you and Heregar will meet him; and +whether you win or not, my plan holds." + +Then I knew that the king saw far beyond what was plain to me, and +I was very confident in him. And I am sure that I was the only man +who had the least doubt from the beginning. + +Now, after all was planned, Heregar and I rode back to his place, +and sent word everywhere that the king was safe, though he +commanded us to tell no man where he lay as yet. None but thanes +were to be in the island with him; and from that time the name we +knew it by began, as one by one the athelings crossed the fen paths +thereto, and were lost, as it were, in the hiding place. + +Then we wrought there at felling timber and hewing, until we had +bridged the river and made a causeway through the peat to Stanmoor +hill, and then began to make a triple line of earthworks around its +summit. No carelessly-built fort was this, for the king said: "If +the nobles build badly, there will be excuse for every churl to do +the like hereafter. Therefore this must needs be the most +handsomely-wrought fort in all Wessex." + +There came to us at this fort many faithful workmen, sent from the +towns and countryside, until we had a camp there. But every night, +after working with us and cheering all with his voice and example, +Alfred went back to Athelney with us; and none would seek to +disturb him there, so that for long none quite knew, among the +lesser folk, where he bided. Presently the queen and athelings came +there to him, and were safe. + +That time in the fens was not altogether unpleasant, though the +life was hard. Ever was Alfred most cheerful, singing and laughing +as we wrought, and a word of praise from him was worth more than +gold to every man. And then there were the hunting, the fishing, +and the snaring of wild fowl, that were always on hand to supply +our wants, though now we had plenty of food from the Quantock side. +I know this, that many a man who was in Athelney with Alfred was +the better therefor all the days of his after life. Men say that +there is a steadfast look in the faces of the Athelney thanes, by +which they can be well known by those who note the ways of men. + +The frost lasted till February went out in rain and south winds. +And then the Danes began to gather along the southern hills, +watching us. By that time we had made causeways to other islets +from the fort, and the best of these was to Othery, a long, flat +island that lay to the east, nearer to the Polden Hills and +Edington. + +So one day the king sent for me as we wrought at the fort, and both +he and I were horny handed and clay stained from the work. I came +with spade in hand, and he leaned on a pick. Whereat he laughed. + +"Faith, brother king, now can I speak in comrade's wise to my +churls as you speak to your seamen. Nor do I think that I shall be +the worse ruler for that." + +Then he took my arm, and pointed to Edington hill. + +"For many nights past I have seen watch fires yonder," he said; +"and that is a place where I might strike the Danes well. So I +would draw them thither in force. Do you feel as if a fight would +be cheerful after this spade work?" + +Now I could wish for nothing better, and I said so. + +"Well, then," he went on, laughing at my eagerness, "go to +Ethelnoth, and take twenty men, and do you and he fall on that post +from Othery by night; and when you have scattered it, come back +into the fen. I would have you lose no men, but I would make the +Danes mass together by attack on some one point, and that as soon +as may be, before Hubba comes. I do not want to hold their place." + +Now that was the first of daily attacks on the Danish posts, at +different places along the Selwood and Polden hills, until they +thought that we wished to win Edington height, where we began and +annoyed them most often. So I will tell how such a raid fared. + +Good it was to lay aside pick and spade and take sword Helmbiter +again, and don mail and helm; and I made Harek fence with me, lest +I should have lost my sword craft through use of the weapons +whereby the churl conquers mother earth. But once the good sword +was in my hand I forgot all but the warrior's trade. + +So Ethelnoth and I and twenty young thanes went in the evening to +Othery island, and there found a fenman to guide us, and so went to +the foot of Edington hill just as darkness fell. The watch-fire +lights, that were our guide, twinkled above us through the trees +that were on the hillside; and we made at once for them, sending on +the fenman to spy out the post before we were near it. It was very +dark, and it rained now and then. + +When he came back to where we had halted, he said that there were +about twenty tents, pitched in four lines, with a fire between each +line; and that the men were mostly under cover, drinking before +setting watch, if they set any at all. + +So we drew nearer, skirting round into cover of some trees that +came up to the tents, for the hilltop was bare for some way. The +lighted tents looked very cheerful, and sounds of song and laughter +came from them, and now and then a man crossed from one to another, +or fed the fires with fresh wood, that hissed and sputtered as he +cast it on. + +"How shall we attack?" said Ethelnoth. + +"Why, run through the camp in silence first and cut the tent lines, +and then raise a war shout and come back on them. Then we may slay +a few, and the rest will be scared badly enough." + +Thereat we both laughed under our breath, for it seemed like a +schoolboy's prank. Well, after the long toil in the fen, we were +like boys just freed from school, though our game was the greatest +of all--that of war--the game of Hodur's playground, as we Norse +say. + +Then I said: + +"After we come through for the second time, we must take to this +cover, and so get together at some place by the hill foot. There is +a shed by a big tree that can be found easily." + +So we passed the wood, and our comrades chuckled. It was good sport +to see the shadows of the careless Danes on the tent walls, and to +know that they dreamed of nothing less than that Saxons were on +them. Four rows of tents there were, and there were twenty-two of +us; so we told off men to each row, and then made for them at a +moment when no man was about--hacking at the ropes, and laughing to +see the tents fall. It was strange to watch the shadows start up +and stand motionless, as the first patter of feet came and the +first blows fell, and then bustle, helpless and confused, with +savage shouts and curses, as the heavy canvas and skins fell in +upon them. + +Now we were through the camp, and the outcries were loud behind us. +Two or three tents did not fall, and from them the men swarmed, +half armed and startled, not knowing if this was not some sorry +jest at first; and then rang our war cry from the dark, and we were +back upon them. We were but two-and-twenty to a hundred, but they +knew not what was on hand, while we did; and so we cut through them +without meeting with any hurt. Two tents were on fire and blazing +high, and blackened men cut and tore their way out of them howling; +and I think that more than one Dane was cut down by his comrades in +the panic that fell on all. + +Yet even as we passed into the cover and went our way back towards +the fen, some bolder spirits began to rally, and a horn was blown. +But we were gone, leaving six slain and many more wounded among +them, while not one of us was scratched. + +They did not follow us, and we heard the clamour we had caused +going on for some time after we had gained the fen. Presently, too, +when we reached Othery, we saw a fire signal lit to call for help, +and we were well content. Doubtless those Danes waked under arms +all that night through. + +After that these attacks were seldom so easy, for the Danes kept +good watch enough; but they were ever the same in most ways. +Suddenly in the night would come the war cry and the wild rush of +desperate men on some Danish outpost, and before they knew what to +do we were away and into the fen again. We grew to know every path +well before long, and sometimes we would fall on small parties of +our foes when they were on the march or raiding the cattle, and cut +through them, and get back to our fastness. + +Once or twice we were followed in the grey of early morning; but +few Danes ever got back from that pursuit. We would cut them off +amid the peat bogs, or they would founder therein, and sink under +the weight of armour. + +Then they tried to force some fenmen they caught to guide them to +us at Othery. Once the brave fenman led them to where they dared +not move till daylight came, while the blue fen lights flitted +round them like ghosts in the dark; and then the fen people swarmed +round them, and ended them with arrows and sling stones from a +distance. They tried no more night attacks on us after that. But +again they came in some force by daylight, and we had a strange +fight on a narrow strip of hard land in Sedgemoor, with all +advantage on our side. No Danes won back to the Polden Hills. + +Then they dared not try the fens any more, and daily we kept their +sentries watching, and nightly we fell on outposts, until at last +they thought our force grew very great, and began to gather on +Edington hill, even as Alfred wished. And this saved many a village +and farm and town from plunder, for the fear of Alfred the king +began to grow among his foes. + +Then the king made his next move; for, now that the way was open, +he sent to Odda at Exeter, bidding him move up to Taunton by some +northerly road, gathering what Devon men he could on the way. There +is hardly a stronger town in Wessex than the great fortress that +Ine the king made. + +At this time I began to be full of thoughts about my ships. But +they could hardly be built as yet; and most of them were in +southern havens, whence, even were they ready, one could not bring +them round the stormy Land's End in early March. Yet the weather +was mild and open, and I began to think that at any time Hubba +might bring his Danes across the narrow Severn sea to join his +kinsmen at Edington. We heard, too, that Guthrum, the king of East +Anglia, was there now, and that he had summoned every warrior who +would leave the land he had won to come to him. + +Men have blamed Guthrum for treachery in this; but seeing that the +peace was broken, and that he must needs fight for the peace at +least of his kingdom, I hold that this is not right. At all events, +Alfred blamed him not in the time to come. Nevertheless, I suppose +that in men's minds he always will be held answerable for what the +other chiefs wrought of ill, because he bore the name of king from +the first, and ruled East Anglia. No Saxon, who is used to hold his +king as over all, will understand how little power a host-king of +the north has. + +Now all this while my good ship lay at Bridgwater, and with her +were fifty of my men, who were well quartered among the townsfolk, +and helped to guard the bridge. And, as I have said, two ships were +being built there. So one day in the third week in March I rode +away with Kolgrim from Athelney, to see how all things were going +on there, meaning also to go to Heregar's place for a time, having +messages to give him from the king. + +Harek was coming with me; but Alfred asked me to spare him for this +time. + +"I have to learn somewhat from the scald," he said. + +"Wizardry, my king?" I asked, laughing, for that was ever a jest at +the scald's expense after it was known how we found out that Alfred +was at Denewulf's house. + +"Nay, but song," he answered. "Now I see not why I should not tell +you who put the thought into my mind; but I am going, as you did, +to spy out the Danish camp. And I will go as a gleeman, and be +welcome enough as a Saxon who has enough love of Danes to learn +some northern sagas for them!" + +"My king," I cried, "this is too perilous altogether." + +He looked quaintly at me. + +"Go to, cousin; are you to have all the glory? If you went, why not +I? Maybe I too may find a chance of helping some fair maiden on the +way back." + +Then I prayed him to do nothing rash, for that he was the one hope +of England. + +"And maybe the one man in England who can do any good by going, +therefore," he answered. "And neither you nor I would ask any man +to do for us what we durst not do ourselves." + +"You will be known, my king," I said. + +Whereon he held out his hands, which were hard and horny now with +hard work, and he laughed as he did so. + +"Look at those," he said, "and at my unkempt hair and beard! Verily +I may be like Alfred the king in some ways, but not in these. They +will pass me anywhere." + +So I could not dissuade him, and ever as I tried to do so he waxed +more cheerful, and made sport of me, throwing my own doings in my +teeth, and laughing about Thora. So I was fain to get away from his +presence, lest I should grow angry at last. And when I was going he +said: + +"Have no fear, cousin; I will not go unless I am well prepared." + +So I went, and next day was back in Athelney, riding hard; for +Hubba's ships had been sighted from the Quantocks, and they were +heading for the Parret. What I looked for and feared was coming. + +Then Alfred sent messengers to Odda, who had come to Taunton two +days before this. And he gathered every man from the fen, and we +went to Bridgwater, leaving our little force there, and so rode on +the way to Combwich, thinking to see the sails of the ships in +Bridgwater Bay. But a shift of wind had come, and they were yet +over on the Welsh coast, waiting for the tide to enable them to +come down on us. + +By that time a fire burned on the highest spur of the Quantocks to +tell us that Odda was there, and at once another was lit on the +Combwich fort to bring him to us, for it seemed certain that here +we must fight the first battle of Alfred's great struggle. + +"Here you must meet this newcomer and drive him away, if it can be +done, or if not, hinder him from coming further; or if that is +impossible, do your best. I would have you remember that defeat +here is not loss of all hope, for beyond Selwood lies our real +gathering. But victory, even if dearly bought, will almost win the +day for us." + +So Alfred said, and we, who began to see what his great plan was, +were cheered. + +In the evening Odda came with eight hundred men of Devon. Alfred +had two hundred maybe, and my few men and the townsfolk made +another two hundred. But Hubba had twenty-three longships, whose +crews, if up to fighting strength, would not be less than a hundred +in each. + +So we watched till the tide fell, when he could not come into the +Parret, and then I went back to Heregar's hall. It seemed very +bare, for all goods had been sent up to the great refuge camp of +Dowsborough, to which all day long the poor folk had been flying, +driving with them their sheep and cattle and swine, that they might +save what they could. But with Odda had come his daughter, the Lady +Etheldreda, who would not leave him; and she and the Lady Alswythe +and Thora were yet in the house, and Osmund the jarl sat in the +hall, listless and anxious of face. It was an ill time for him; but +there were none of us who did not like him well, and feel for him +in his helplessness. + +"What news?" he said, when he saw me come into the hall. + +"Hubba will be here on the next tide--with early morning," I said. + +He sighed, and rising up went to the doorway and looked out to the +hills. + +"I would that I could make these two noble ladies seek refuge +yonder," he said; "but one will not leave her father, nor the other +her husband." + +Then I said: + +"At least I think you should take Thora there. This is a difficult +place for you." + +"I know Hubba," he said, "and if I abide here I may be of use. I +need not tell you that you are fighting the best warrior of our +time, and that with too small a force." + +"Well," I said, "you and I can speak plainly, neither of us being +Saxons. We shall be beaten by numbers, and you mean that you will +be able to save these ladies by staying?" + +"Ay," he said. "And if by any chance Alfred wins, I may be able to +ask for mercy for the conquered." + +Then came in Thora, and her face was troubled. She had been trying +to make Etheldreda go to the hill fort, where all the women and +children of the countryside had been sent. + +"It is of no use," she said; "they will bide here." + +"Well," said Osmund, "then we will stay also. I and our friend have +spoken thereof, and it seems well that we do so." + +I suppose they had talked of this before, for she made no answer, +but sat down wearily enough before the fire; and Osmund and I went +out to the courtyard, for we were both restless. + +Then Heregar came in on his white horse, and saw Osmund, and called +to him, asking of the same business, for he had asked the jarl to +speak about it as a friend. So I went in again, and Thora sat by +herself yet, looking up to see who came now. I went and stood by +her, staring into the fire, and feeling as if I wanted to go out +again. Restlessness was in the very air while we waited for the +coming fight. + +"King Ranald," she said, after a little silence, "I wonder if ever +a maiden was in such sad doubt as I. I cannot wish that these dear +ladies, who have made a friend of me, should see their folk beaten, +and maybe slain; and cannot wish that my own kin should be beaten +either. It seems that in either way I must find heavy sorrow." + +That was true; but it was certain that her own people were the +cause of all the trouble, though I could not say so. I put it this +way: + +"I think that if your people are driven off there will be peace the +sooner, and maybe they will not land when they find us waiting. I +know, too, that those who have loved ones in the battle that may be +are in a harder case than yours, dear lady." + +Then she looked up at me once, and a flush came slowly over her +pale face, and she answered nothing. I thought that she felt some +shame that a warrior like her father should bide here, without +moving hand or foot, when the war horns were blowing. So I said: + +"Harder yet would it be if the jarl were in the battle against our +friends. Then would the fear of his loss be a terror to you also." + +Now came in Osmund, and straightway Thora rose up, turning away +from us both, and went from the hall. The jarl looked after her +curiously and sadly. + +"This is a strange business for the girl," he said. + +"She seems almost as troubled because you are not fighting as if +you were in danger by doing so," I answered, with that thought +still in my mind. + +Thereat the jarl stared at me. + +"What has put that into your head?" he asked. + +I told him what she and I had said, adding that I feared I had +seemed to hint somewhat discomforting. + +Then said Osmund, looking in my face with a half smile: + +"She is glad I am honourably out of this business, and the trouble +is not that. There are one or two, maybe, whom she would like to +see as safe in the same way." + +Then it flashed through my dull mind that perhaps I was one of +these, and the thought was pleasant to me. + +"Well," I said, "there are the thane, and his young son, the king's +page, who is here. They have been very kind to her." + +"Also a wandering king who took her out of danger," he said then. + +"Ay; I shall be glad if she thinks of me." + +There were a little laugh and a rustling behind us, and one said: + +"Either you are the least conceited of men or the blindest, King +Ranald, or you would know what is amiss." + +I turned, and saw the Lady Etheldreda herself, and I bowed to her +in much confusion. + +"O you men!" she said. "Here you will let the poor girl break her +heart in silence, while you fight for glory, or somewhat you think +is glory, without a word to say that you care that she shall see +what you win. Of course she thinks of you, even night and day. How +else should it be, when you have been as a fairy prince to her?" + +Then I knew for myself that among all the wild life of Athelney and +the troubles of the king the thought of Thora had been pleasant to +me; but now I was confused, having the matter brought home to me +suddenly, and, as it were, before I was ready to shape all my +thoughts towards her. So all that I could say was foolish enough. + +"I am a poor sort of fairy prince, lady." + +"Ay," she said; "I am as good a fairy godmother, maybe. And perhaps +I should have said nothing--at this time. But, Ranald, the maiden +weeps for your danger, for, at the very least, she owes you much." + +Then I said, humbly as I felt: + +"That is more honour to me than I deserve." + +"That is for her to say," answered the fair lady, turning to where +Osmund had been. + +But he was now in the doorway, looking out again to the hills. So +she was silent, and I thought of somewhat. + +"There is none in this land or in any other--of whom I think as I +do of Thora," I said; "but my mind has been full of warfare and +trouble with the king. Now, if I may, I will ask for somewhat that +I may wear for her sake in the fight, and so she will know that I +think of her." + +"Now that is well said," answered Etheldreda. "But you must ask it +for yourself." + +Thereat I thought for a moment, and at last I said that I would not +do so. + +"If I might, I would ask you to gain this favour for me," I said; +"for I think that a parting would be very hard, as things have come +about." + +"You are a wiser man than I thought you, Ranald," she said; and so +she went from me, and I stayed by the fire, thinking thoughts that +were sweet and yet troublous, for beyond tomorrow's fight I could +not see. + +Then the lady came back, and with her she brought a little glove, +worn and shapely from the hand that it belonged to. + +"She bids me give this to her king and warrior," Etheldreda said. +"I did but tell her that you asked a token that she minded you." + +"It was well," I answered. "What said she?" + +"Nought at once. But her sadness went, and her face changed--ay, +but she is beyond any of us in beauty when her eyes light up in +that way--and she fetched this, and then said 'Say, if you think +that he will care to know it, that this is the glove wherein I rode +to Wareham.' + +"Do you care to know it, Ranald?" + +"Ay, with all my heart," I said. + +And so I put it very carefully under the broad, golden-studded +baldric of Sigurd's sword. And it would not stay there, and +Etheldreda laughed at me, and took a little golden brooch like a +cross that she wore, and pinned it through glove and baldric, +making all safe. + +"There," she said, "is a token from me also, though it was unasked. +Bear yourself well, Ranald, for our eyes are on you. If Hubba comes +indeed, we women folk will be in the fort." + +Then I said, being at a loss for words enough: + +"I would I had the tongue of Harek the scald, that I might thank +you for gift and words, my fairy princess." + +"I have half a mind to take it back for that fine saying," she +answered. + +And then she gave me her hand, and I kissed it; and she went from +me with her eyes full of tears for all the trouble that was on us, +though she had tried bravely to carry it off lightly. + +Then I would stay in the house no longer, but went out to the fort, +and sat down by the great Dragon banner of Wessex, Heregar's +charge, that floated there, and ate and drank with the other +chiefs, and waited. But my mind was full of what I had heard, and +the war talk went on round me without reaching my ears. + + + +Chapter XI. The Winning of "The Raven." + + +Now we none of us like much to speak of the fight that came next +morning, for it went ill enough. Yet we were outnumbered by twice +our force, for some more of the host beyond the fens made Alfred +send many of his men back to watch the crossing at Bridgwater. + +Hubba brought his ships up on the tide, and when he saw that we +were waiting for him, he made as if to go on up the river; and we +began to move from our position, thinking that he would go and fall +on the town. Then, very suddenly, he turned his ships' bows to the +bank at the one place where he saw that the land was high almost to +the river's edge; and before we knew that we must be there to stay +him, his men were ashore, and had passed the strip of marsh, and +were on a long, gentle rise that ends in Cannington hill and the +Combwich fort, half a mile away. + +We fought well for an hour, and then our men began to give on +either wing, for they were, as I would have it remembered, raw +levies that Odda had brought with him--valiant men and strong, but +with no knowledge of how to fight in line or how to hold together. +And when a force like that begins to go, it is ended. + +Hard fought we in the centre after that. There were the Athelney +thanes, and my fifty men, and Odda's Exeter and Taunton townsfolk, +who had fought before; but when the wings broke, Hubba's great +force of veterans lapped round us, and we had nought left us but to +cut our way out, and make the best retreat we could. My men shouted +as they struck, in our Norse way; but a deadly silence fell on the +Saxons, and I thought that, as they grew quiet, their blows became +ever more stern and fell, until at last even Hubba's vikings gave +way before the hard-set faces and steadfast eyes of the +west-country spearmen, whom no numbers seemed to daunt, and they +drew back from us for a space. + +Then we were clear of them, and at once Ethelnoth closed in on the +king, taking his horse's rein, and praying him to fly to +Bridgwater, where a stand could be made. And at last he persuaded +him, and they turned. Then fearing that this might set the example +for general flight, I spoke to Odda, and we shouted to the men to +stand fast and hold back pursuit; and so a guard of some fifty +thanes went with Alfred, and we faced the Danes even yet. + +They saw what was done, and roared, and charged on us; and we began +to retreat slowly, fighting all the way, up the long slope of land +towards the fort. But I saw Heregar's horse rear and fall, and the +banner went down, and I thought him slain in that attack. + +Presently they let us go. We won ever to better ground, and they +had to fight uphill; and then we gained the fort, and there they +durst not come. + +Then rode towards me a man in silver armour that was dinted and +hacked--shieldless, and with a notched sword in his hand. It was +Heregar. + +"I thought you slain, friend," I said gladly. + +"Would that I were! for my charge is lost; they have my banner," he +answered. + +"That may be won back yet," I said. "But there is no shame to you; +we were outnumbered by more than two to one." + +"I have borne it through ten battles," he said, and that was all; +but he put his face in his hands and groaned. + +Now I looked out over the field we had left, and saw the Danes +scattering in many ways. Some were going in a long line up the +steep hill beyond which the village lay, and over this line swayed +and danced the lost banner. There was a crowd of our men from the +broken wings gathered there--drawn together by the king as he fled, +as I knew afterwards; and I think the Danes bore our banner with +them in order to deceive them. I knew that the lane was deep and +hollow up which they must go, and there were woods on either side. + +Whereat I sprang up. + +"Thane," I said, "here is a chance for us to win back the banner, +as I think." + +He looked up sharply, and I pointed. + +"Let us ride at once into the wood, and wait for them to pass us. +Then, if we dare, we can surely dash through them." + +Kolgrim sat close to me, and our horses were tethered to a spear. +He rose up when he heard me speak, saying: + +"Here is more madness. But trust to Ranald's luck, thane." + +Then in a few more minutes we were riding our hardest towards the +wood. I heard Odda shout after us from the entrance to the fort as +we went, but we heeded him not. + +We edged up to the deep lane through the trees until we were so +near that we could almost see into it. The banner was at the head +of the column, and there were no mounted men with it. Hubba had +brought no horses with him from across the sea. + +Then we waited for a long minute, hearing the tramp of the coming +men, and their loud talk and laughter as they boasted of their +prize. They were going very carelessly. + +"If we get it," I whispered to the thane, whose eyes were shining, +"ride hard up the hill to our folk who are there." + +He nodded and then before us fluttered the folds of his treasure. +Instantly he spurred his great white horse, and leaped straight at +it into the lane, and after him on either side came Kolgrim and I. + +A great howl rose from the startled Danes, and I saw Heregar wheel +his horse and tear the banner from the man who held it, cutting +down another warrior who tried to catch his bridle. Then Helmbiter +was hard at work for a moment, and Kolgrim's axe rattled on a helm +or two; and we were away up the lane before the shouting and +confusion were over, none of the Danes knowing but that more of us +would follow from out the cover. + +One or two arrows, shot by men who found their wits sooner than the +rest, pattered after us, and we gained the hilltop and the great +cheer that went up from our few men who were there made the Danes +halt and waver, and at last turn back to the open again. + +We stayed on that hilltop for an hour. Then the Danes were coming +up in force, and there was no hope in staying, so we got back to +the fort before they could cut us off. + +Soon after this there was a general movement on the part of our +foes, and before evening we were surrounded on all sides by strong +posts, and it was plain that we were not to move from the fort. + +Now this is not very large, but it is very strong--the hill which +has been fortified being some two hundred feet high, and steep +sided as a house roof on all sides but the east, where the entrance +must needs be. But this again has outworks; and the road into the +ramparts from the long slope of Cannington hill to the southward +runs slantwise through them, so that the gap it makes in the first +line is covered by the second. And both upper and lower rampart go +right round the circle of the hilltop, and are very strong, having +been made by the British folk, who well understood such matters, +and had such fighters as the old Romans and our own forefathers to +deal with. Some parts of the works were of piled stones, and the +rest of earth, as the ground required. + +There is but one way in which that fort could be taken by force, as +I think, and that is by attacking on all sides at once, which needs +a greater force than would ever be likely to come against it. +Moreover, on one side the marshy course of the Combwich stream +would hinder any heavy onslaught. + +So inside these ramparts were we with some six hundred men, and +there we were watched by three times our number. There was a strong +post on Cannington hill, between us and Bridgwater; another--and +that the main body--between us and the ships, on a little, sharp +hill crest across a stony valley two bowshots wide that lay between +it and the fort; and so we were well guarded. + +At first this seemed of little moment, for we were to stay Hubba +before the place; and for a while there was nothing but rejoicing +over the return of the banner. Then I found there was no water in +the place, and that we had but what food each man happened to carry +with him. Presently that want of water became terrible, for our +wounded began to cry for it piteously. Maybe it was as well that we +had few with us, because the field was left in the hands of the +Danes. + +Up and down among those few went Etheldreda and Alswythe and Thora, +tending them and comforting them, where we had sent them--to the +highest point of the hilltop, inside the upper rampart; and I could +see the flutter of their dresses now and then from where I watched +beside Odda on the lower works. I had spoken to neither since we +came here. + +Towards dusk I spoke to Odda, and he gave me twenty men; and +gathering all the vessels of any sort that would hold water, we +climbed over the rampart next the marsh, and stole down to the +nearest pool and brought back all we could, using helms and +leathern cloaks and the like, for want of buckets. We got back +safely that time, and I sent the same men again, thinking that +there was no danger, and so not going myself. + +They got back, indeed, but with a party of Danes after them; and +but for our arrow flights from the earthworks, they would have had +to fight, and lose what they brought. After that Hubba knew what we +needed, and sent a strong picket to keep us from the marsh. + +So the night passed and we had some hopes that a force might come +to our help from Bridgwater in the morning, for it was possible +that the king would be able to gather men there. It was a slender +hope, though, for the host on Polden Hills had to be watched. + +All day we waited, and no help came; and with evening the last food +had gone. It had rained heavily, however, and the want of water was +past for the time. The Danes never moved from their places, waiting +to starve us out; and in the last light of evening a small party +came across the little valley from the main body, bearing a white +flag in token of parley. Hubba bid us yield, and our lives should +be spared. + +"It is good of Hubba to give us the chance of living a little +longer," answered Odda; "but we will wait here a while, so please +him." + +The Danes threatened us, and mocked, and so went back. We had no +more messages from their chief after that. + +That night we slept round the standard where it flapped on the +hilltop. The men watched, turn by turn, along the lower ramparts; +and the Danes were not so near that we could be surprised by them, +for there was no cover to hide their coming. Nestled under the +northwest rampart was a little hut--some shepherd's shelter where +the three poor ladies were bestowed. Osmund the jarl sat a little +apart from us, but all day and night he had been tending the +wounded well. Harek who, as befitted a scald, was a good leech, +said that the jarl knew almost as much of the craft as he. + +Now, in the early morning, when the light was grey, I woke, hearing +the rattle of arms and the quiet passing of the word as the men +changed guard, and I thought I would go round the ramparts; and +then Odda woke also. The rest slept on, for they had taken their +turns on watch--Heregar with his arm round the pole of the +standard, and his sword beneath his head. + +Odda looked at me as we sat up stiffly, and spoke what was in his +mind and mine also. + +"I have a mind to send Osmund to Hubba, and ask him to let the +women go hence. There is nought to eat today." + +"There is enough kept for them," I said; for Heregar had seen to +that, and none had grudged a share. + +"Ay," he answered; "but what are we to do? Are we to be starved +like rats here?" + +"There are the half-dozen horses," I said. + +"And nought to cook them withal. I would that the king would come." + +"It is in my mind that he cannot," I answered; "there has been some +move of the other host." + +Now that was true, for Guthrum's great following had suddenly swept +down towards Bridgwater, and that could not be left. They were +camped now at the foot of the hill, watching there as Hubba watched +us. + +Then some one came, stepping lightly, but with clank of mail, +towards us; and I glanced round, thinking that some message was +brought from the ramparts. Odda turned idly at the same time, and +he started up. + +"Ah!" he said, under his breath, "what is this?" + +A tall maiden, mail clad and bearing a broad-bladed spear, stood +beside us; and I thought her one of the Valkyrias--Odin's +messengers--come to us, to fight for us in some strife to which she +would lead us. I rose too, saluting. + +"Skoal to the shield maiden!" I said. + +"Skoal to the heroes!" she answered; and then I knew the voice, +though, under the helm and in the grey light, the face of the +ealdorman's daughter Etheldreda had been strange to me. And Odda +knew also. + +"What would you in this guise, my daughter?" he cried. + +"I think that I have come as Ranald thought--as a Valkyria to lead +you to battle," she answered, speaking low, that she might not wake +the tired warriors around her. "There is but one thing for us to +do, and that is to die sword in hand, rather than to perish for +want of food and water here." + +I know that this had been in my mind, and most likely in Odda's +also; but Alfred might come. + +"We wait the king," the ealdorman said. + +"No use," she answered. "One may see all the Polden Hills from this +place, and tonight there are no fires on Edington height, where we +have been wont to see them." + +Odda groaned. "My Etheldreda, you are the best captain of us all," +he said. + +Then suddenly Heregar rose up on his elbow from beside the +standard, crying strangely: + +"Ay, Father Eahlstan--when the tide is low. Somerset and Dorset +side by side. What say you, father--Somerset and Devon? Even so." + +The other sleepers stirred, and the lady turned and looked on the +thane, but he slept even yet. + +"Heregar dreams of the bishop he loved, and of the great fight they +fought yonder and won thirty rears ago," she said {xv}. + +"Worn out is the brave thane," said I. "Strange dreams come to one +when that is so." + +Then Heregar woke, and saw the maiden, and rose up at her side. + +"Dear lady," he asked, "what is this?" + +"Ranald thought me a Valkyria, friend; and I come on a Valkyria's +errand." + +"I had a strange dream but now," Heregar said, as if it dwelt in +his mind, so that he hardly heeded what Etheldreda answered him. "I +thought that Bishop Eahlstan stood by me as in the old days, and +minded me of words that I spoke long ago, words that were taught me +by a wise woman, who showed me how to trap the Danes, when the tide +left their ships aground, so that they had no retreat. Then he +said, 'Even again at this time shall victory be when the tide is +low.' And I said that Somerset and Dorset would fail not at this +time. Then said he, 'Somerset and Devon.' Then it seemed that he +blessed me and passed. Surely I think that he would tell us that +victory is before us." + +Now the other sleepers woke, and listened wondering. The light was +strong, and I looked away towards the Danes between us and the +river. Their fires were burning up one by one as they roused also; +but I thought there was some bustle down at the shore of the river, +where the ships were now afloat on the rising tide. + +Then Etheldreda spoke to us in words that were brave and good to +hear--words to make a man long to give his life for country and for +friends--telling us that, since we must needs die, it was well that +we should fall sword in hand, ridding England of her foes man to +man, rather than perish in this place for nought. + +And when she ended the chiefs were silent, looking on the Danes +with eyes that gleamed; and Kolgrim put the thoughts of all into +words when he said: + +"Once or twice has the Berserker fury come on me when my master has +been in peril. Berserker again will you drive me, lady, so that I +care not for six foemen against me or sixty." + +Then Odda cried: + +"What goes on yonder? Do they leave us?" and he shaded his eyes +against the rising sun, and pointed. Certainly the Danes were +drawing towards the ships in parties of twenty and thirty at a +time, but their sentries went on their beats without heeding them. +There was no movement, either, among those on the other hill, and +the Raven banner that told of Hubba's presence was not borne away. + +Now we forgot all but that here was a new hope for us, and we +watched for half an hour. Then it was plain that full half the +force was drawn off, and that the Danes were crossing the river in +the ships. We saw them land on the opposite shore, where the road +comes down to the Combwich crossing, that can only be used at +lowest tides; and they marched eastward, doubtless in search of +cattle and plunder. + +Then Heregar's eyes shone, and he said: + +"Now has our time come, even as Eahlstan foretold to me. In two +hours or three none of that force can return, and we have but half +as many again as ourselves left here for us to deal with." + +"Let me lead you on them," said Etheldreda. + +Then with one voice we prayed her to bide in the fort, and for long +she would not be persuaded. But we told her that the men would +fight as well under her eye as if they were led by her--if, indeed, +her presence did not weaken them, in fear for her safety--and so at +last she gave way. + +After that there was no more doubt as to what should be done; but +Odda went round among the men, and spoke to them in such wise that +he stirred their hearts to die bravely hand to hand with the Danes. +And I thought that some of us might live to see a great if +dearly-bought victory; for it was certain that not one of these +Saxons but meant to die before he left the field. + +Then Heregar and Osmund went with Etheldreda to the other two +ladies, and they bade them take the horses and fly to Dowsborough +camp as soon as the fighting drew every Dane to the eastward side +of the fort and left the way clear. Osmund would go with them, and +so no fear for them was on our minds. + +Then we got the soundest of the wounded down to the lower rampart, +and drew off the men there towards the gateway, so that the Danes +might think our movement was but a changing of guard; then we +waited until we saw that the ships on the far bank had taken the +ground. + +Then we sallied out, and as I went I looked back once. Three women +stood alone on the hilltop, and one waved to us. That was the +Valkyria, for her mail sparkled in the sun; but I had eyes only for +that one whom I thought I should not see again, whose little glove +was on my heart. + +Now, if we were desperate, Odda was not the man to waste any chance +of victory that there might be. We went swiftly up the long slope +of Cannington hill, and fell on the post there before they on the +main guard could reach them. There was no withstanding the terrible +onset of our Saxons; half that force was slain, and the rest were +in full flight in a few minutes. + +Then we went steadily down the hill to where Hubba himself waited +for us. His war horns were blowing, to call in every man who was +within hearing; and his men were formed in line four deep at the +foot of the spur on which their camp had been. + +Now, when I saw this I looked on our men, who were in column again; +and it seemed to me that the old Norse plan would be good, for it +was certain that on this field we meant to stay. + +"Ealdorman," I said, "while there is yet time let us form up in a +wedge and go through that line. Then shall we fight back to back, +and shall have some advantage. I and my men, who have axes, will go +first." + +Then my few vikings cried, "Ay, king!" and shouted; whereat Odda +laughed grimly. + +"Go on, Berserker--axes must needs lead--we will do it." + +Then we changed the ranks quickly, and I and Kolgrim and Harek made +the point of that wedge. Heregar and the banner were in the midst, +and Odda himself was not far behind me, putting his best men along +the two foremost faces of the wedge. + +"We shall not be foremost long," I said; "we shall be surrounded +when once we are through the line." + +But as we came on, Hubba closed up his men into a dense, square +mass. + +"Ho!" said Harek to me; "you are wrong, my king." + +Now we were close at hand, and the Danish arrows flew among us, and +the javelins fell pretty thickly. I think that a wedge bears this +better than any other formation, for it is easy to stop the weapons +that reach it. + +Our men were silent now, and I was glad, having known already what +that meant; but the Danes began to yell their war cries. Then we +were within ten paces of them, and I gripped shield and axe and +gave the word to charge, and Odda answered it. + +Then was such a terrible roar from the Saxons as I had never +heard--the roar of desperate men who have their foes before them, +more awful than any war shout. And at that even the vikings shrank +a little, closing their ranks, and then, with all the weight of the +close-ranked wedge behind me, we were among them, and our axes were +at work where men were driven on one another before us; and the +press thinned and scattered at last, while the Danes howled, and +for a moment we three and a few lines behind us stood with no +foemen before us, while all down the sides of the wedge the fight +raged. Then we halted, and the Danes lapped round us. I do not know +that we lost more than two men in this first onset, so heavy was +it; but the Danes fell everywhere. + +Now began fighting such as I had heard of, but had never seen +before. The scalds sing of men who fought as fights a boar at bay +in a ring of hounds, unfearing and silent; and so fought we. My axe +broke, and I took to sword Helmbiter, and once Kolgrim went +Berserker, and howled, and leaped from my side into a throng which +fell on us, and drove them back, slaying three outright, and +meeting with no hurt. + +Our wedge held steady. Men fell, but we closed up; and there grew a +barrier of slain before us. I had not seen Hubba since we first +closed in, and then he had been a little to the right of where we +struck his line, under a golden banner, whereon was a raven +broidered, that hung motionless in the still morning air. + +Presently the Danish onslaught slackened. Men were getting away +from their line to the rear, worn out or wounded, and the hill +beyond them was covered with those who had fallen out. They had +beaten against our lines as one beats on a wall--hewing out stones, +indeed, but without stirring it. They had more hurt than we. + +Odda pushed to my side, and said to me: + +"What if we advance towards the hill crest?" + +"Slowly, then," I said. + +He passed the word, and we began to move, and the Danes tried to +stay us. Then their attack on the rear face of the wedge slackened +and ceased, and they got round before us to fight from the higher +ground. At once Odda saw that an attack in line as they wavered +thus would do all for us, so he swung his hard Devon levies to +right and left on us Norsemen as the centre--maybe there were +twenty of us left at that time--and as the wings swung forward with +a rolling cheer, the Danes crumbled away before them, and we drove +them up the little hill and over the brow, fighting among the +half-burnt watch fires and over heaps of plunder, even to where the +tall "Raven" drooped from its staff. + +Then I saw the mighty Hubba before me; and had I not known it +already, one might see defeat written in his face as he looked +across to his ships. His men were back now, and stood on the far +shore, helpless. Then was a cheer from our left, and he looked +there, and I looked also. + +Out of the fort came our wounded--every one who could put one foot +before another--a strange and ghastly crowd of fifty or sixty men +who would yet do what they might for England. And with them was a +mixed crowd of thralls and village folk, bearing what arms they +could find on the place whence we drove the first Danes, and forks, +and bill hooks, and heavy staves. + +I do not know if the Danes saw what manner of force came to our +help; but I think they did not. Many broke and fled to the ships; +but Hubba's face grew hard and desperate, and he cried to his men +to stand, and they gathered round him and the Raven banner. + +Once again our great wedge formed up, and again charged into the +thick of the Danes. Then I faced the great chief, and men fell back +from us to see what fight should be. But from beside me came Odda. + +"My fight, Ranald," he said, and strode before the Dane. + +His sword was gone--the hilt and three inches of blade hung from +his wrist--and his shield was notched and gashed. His only weapon +was the broad-bladed Saxon spear, ashen shafted, with iron studs +along its length below the head. He was a head shorter than the +Dane, who was, in truth, the most splendid warrior I had ever seen; +and he bore a broad axe, wedge beaten and gold inlaid. There was +not much to choose between his shield and Odda's, but I thought the +spear the weaker weapon. + +"Axe against spear," said Harek; "here is somewhat of which to +sing." + +Once Odda feinted, lunging at Hubba's face; and the Dane raised his +shield a little, but did not move else, nor did his eyelids so much +as flinch, and his steady look never left his foe's face. Then, as +Odda recovered, the great axe flashed suddenly, and fell harmless +as its mark sprang back from its sweep; while like light the spear +point went forward over the fallen axe, that recovered too slowly +to turn it, and rang true on the round shield that met it. + +I had not thought much of spear play until now, for we think little +of the weapon. + +Again the Saxon lunged, and Hubba hewed at the spear shaft, +splintering it a little as the quick-eyed spearman swung it away +from the blow. Then the butt was over Odda's left shoulder, and +before one could tell that its swing aside had ended, forward flew +the point, darting from left to right over Hubba's arm that had not +yet recovered from the lost axe blow, and behind the shield's rim. +That blow went home, and the mighty Dane reeled and fell. + +One moment's silence, and then a howl from the Danes who watched, +and they flew on us, bearing us back a pace or two. Odda went down +under the rush that was made on him, and I called to my comrades, +and stood over him, and beat them back. But Hubba's fall was the +end. + +Even as I stood there, there came a rash of men from our ranks past +me; and I cheered, for I saw Heregar's silver mail driving straight +for the Raven standard, at the head of the young thanes who were +the shield wall of the Dragon of Wessex. Then, too, closed in the +wounded men and the country folk; and the Danes broke and fled +towards the ships in disorder. We followed for a little way, and +then the thralls ended matters. They say that not one Dane reached +the river's bank, beyond which their comrades watched and raged, +powerless to help them. + +I went back to where Odda had fallen, and at that time there rose a +thundering cheer of victory from our wearied line, and helms were +cast into the air, and weapons waved in wild joy. That roused one +who lay before me, and white and shaking, up rose Odda from among +the slain. I went to him, and got my arm round him; and again the +men cheered, and little by little the colour came back to his face. + +"I thought you slain outright," I said; "are you much hurt?" + +"I cannot tell," he said. "I believe I am sound in limb, but my +wind is gone. It is ill for a stout man to have mail-clad Danes +hurled on him by heavy-handed vikings." + +So he said, gasping, but trying to laugh. And, indeed, he was +unwounded, save for a cut or two, and he still grasped his red +spear in his right hand. + +Now I looked on our men, and saw that we might not bide for another +fight. Already some whom the wild joy of battle had kept strong in +spite of wounds were falling among their comrades, and it seemed to +me that wounds were being bound up everywhere. + +But there was a token of victory that made these seem as nothing. +In the midst of all Heregar stood with the Dragon banner, and by +his side his son-in-law, Turkil the thane of Watchet, bore the +captured "Raven." + +Harek the scald looked at it once, and then went to its heavy +folds, and scanned carefully the runes that were thereon. + +"Ho, comrades!" he cried joyfully, "here is a winning that will be +sung of long after our names are forgotten. This is the magic Raven +that was wrought with wizardry and spells by the daughters of +Ragnar Lodbrok. Ill will this news fall on Danish ears from end to +end of England. This is worth two victories." + +"I have seen it many times before," said Heregar; "nor is this the +only time that I have tried to win it. But never before have I seen +it hanging motionless as it hung today. There seems to be somewhat +in the tale they tell of its flapping foreboding victory." + +"Ay," said Odda. "Today they despised us, and bore it not forward; +therefore it flapped not, seeing that there was no wind where it +hung." + +The ealdorman called us together then, and pointed to the Danes who +were massed beyond the river. + +"Now it is time for us to go. We have won a good fight, and some of +us are yet alive. It will not be well to lose all by biding here to +be slain to the last man now. Shall we go to Bridgwater or to the +Quantocks, and so to Taunton?" + +Then Heregar said: + +"To the hills; for we should be penned in Bridgwater between this +force and the other. I think that while we are yonder they will not +do much on this side the Parret; and men will ever gather to us." + +Then we took our wounded and went back to the fort--four hundred +men out of six hundred who sallied out, where we thought that none +would return. But how many Danes we left on the field it is hard to +say. Some say six hundred, and some more; and it may be so. Their +graves are everywhere over the hill where they fell. When the tide +rose we were gone; and Hubba's men sought the body of their chief, +and raised a mound over it. But they had no mind to stay on our +side of the river, and they went to the Polden Hills, and laid the +land waste far and wide, even to holy Glastonbury, until they +joined Guthrum's force at Edington. + +Now one may know in what wise Etheldreda the brave shield maiden +met us, as we came back from that hard-won field, with words of +praise and thanks. But Thora stood not with her as we passed +through the fort gates, where she waited on the rampart with the +Lady Alswythe. Nor had she watched the fight at all, being torn +with sorrow and fear alike. + +I found her presently, while the men made litters whereon to bear +our wounded to safety, having cleansed the stains of war from my +armour. King Harald's mail had kept me from wound worth +notice--though, indeed, I hardly know how it was that I was unhurt +thus. Kolgrim would not use his arm for many days, and Harek was +gashed in arm and thigh also. + +When Osmund heard my tread, he started up from where he sat beside +Thora, looking away towards the hills to which we were going, and +greeted me warmly. + +"It was a good fight, Ranald, and well won," he said. + +Then Thora turned slowly, and looked at me fearfully, as if she +feared me. I was grieved, and would have gone away; but she drew +nearer, and the fear went from her eyes when she saw that I was +safe, knowing little of what I had been through. And at last she +smiled faintly, saying: + +"King Ranald, they say my warrior has fought well." + +"It had been strange had I not, Thora," I said. + +"I think I should have hated my own kin had you fallen," she said +then. + +"Ay," said Osmund, "war sees strange chances, and a man's thoughts +are pulled in many ways. Many a time have I seen Dane fight with +Dane on the old shores; and I can welcome a victor heartily, even +if it is my own kin who have been beaten. Presently we Danes will +fight for our new homes in England against such a landing from +beyond seas as you have met." + +There was some scratch on my shield arm that drew Thora's eyes at +this time, and as the jarl spoke she came quickly to me, taking +some light scarf she had from her dress at the same moment. + +"You are hurt," she said; "though it is little. Let me bind it for +you." + +I suffered her to do so, saying nothing, but smiling at her, while +the colour came brightly into her face as she wrought. The jarl +smiled also, turning away presently as some new shouting came up +from the fort gateway, where men welcomed those who bore back the +spoils from the slain. + +Then Thora had finished, and I put my arm round her and kissed her +once. + +"My lady," I said, "it was worth the wound that you should tend +it." + +And so she looked up at me frankly, and we knew well what had grown +up between us since the day when we had ridden together into +Wareham streets. + + + +Chapter XII. Edington Fight. + + +Now after this we held the great Dowsborough fort on Quantocks for +a few days, looking out over the land that should see the greatest +deeds of Alfred, the wise king, from Glastonbury in the east to the +wide stretches of the great wood, Selwood Forest, beyond the +Stanmoor fens; and there, in the clear air, and with plenty of good +provender from the smiling Taunton vale behind us, we grew strong +again. + +The Danes marched on Bridgwater, and the garrison must needs leave +the place and retreat to the heights at Petherton, and there hide. +I was grieved that my good ship was in Danish hands, but at least I +knew that they would not harm her; and such was our faith in Alfred +the king, that I believed that I should have her back. Old Thord +came up to us when his charge was thus lost. + +"Maybe they will finish painting her, and we shall be able to +launch her, when we go back, without more trouble," he said. "Two +of Hubba's ships, moreover, are worth having." + +Then the king rode up to us, and told us that we had done well, and +that the great plan yet held. Already he had messengers out +throughout all the southern counties, and already men were +gathering through the land and filling the towns that the Danes +were leaving. + +"When I know that the Danes have their eyes fixed on Quantock side +again, I shall strike," he said. + +So began again the life in Athelney and at Stanmoor fort; but now +the Devon men gathered openly on our hills, and every day the +Danish force grew also. When the last fight came, there would be an +end to either one side or the other, and Guthrum knew it. + +Once in that time I rode with Alfred, and saw Neot again; and if it +were but for a few hours that we might stay with him, he found time +to speak with me, asking if I had learned aught of his faith as +yet. + +"I have been in Athelney," I answered, "and I saw what might the +holy Name has at Chippenham. The old gods have passed from me." + +Little have I said of this, for one cannot speak of inmost +thoughts; but so it was. Yet I think that, had I been older, the +old faith would have died more slowly from my mind. So it was also +with Harek the scald, but I think that he was Christian in heart +before I had bent my mind to the matter in earnest. Long talks had +he with Denewulf, the wise herdsman, while I listened. + +So holy Neot rejoiced greatly over us, bidding me seek baptism at +once. + +"Nay, father," I said; "I fear it, knowing what it is. Let me bide +for a time till I am stronger in these deep things." + +He tried to persuade me gently, but at last let me be, knowing that +I spoke in earnest and with all wish to seek it rightly. + +So we left him on the day after we came, and went back to Athelney, +and Alfred was very silent all the way. + +"What ails you, my king?" I asked him at last, fearing that his +pain, which had left him of late altogether, might return. + +"I will tell you, cousin," he said. "Plainly has Neot shown me that +all these troubles have come from my own pride and self will when +first I was king. It is a long chain of happenings, of which you +would know nought were I to try to tell you. But so it has been, +and I weep therefor in my very heart." + +Then said I: + +"What is past is past, King Alfred, and best friend. Look on to the +days to come, for I think that there shall rise a new and happier +England before the winter comes again. There is no man whom I have +met in all the hosts in whose heart is not love and best thoughts +of you. Old days are forgotten as if they had never been, save that +you led and conquered in the great battles beyond the Thames." + +He held out his hand to me, and took mine and gripped it, saying no +word, and riding on in silence for a mile and more. And after that +he was of good cheer again till we came to Exeter, and there I +stayed to see how fared my ships, for it was time they were in the +water again. + +Well had my men and the Saxon wrights wrought at building. If all +went like this, King Alfred would have a fleet that could sweep the +seas from Dover to Orme's Head, and keep his land from new +plunderers at least. + +In a week I came back to Athelney, and there was good cheer, and +all were in the best of heart, for things went well. Messengers +came and went across the winding paths from the southern hills, and +Ethered met me laughing, and said: + +"The king has robbed you of your glory, Ranald. He has been into +the Danish camp--even to the presence of Guthrum himself." + +Then I would hear of this from Alfred himself. + +"Ay," he said, when he had greeted me and heard that the ships were +almost ready, "I have outdone you; for I have played the gleeman as +I planned, and have been in the midst of them yonder on Edington +hill." + +"It was an awesome risk to run, my king," I said. + +"Which you taught me yourself, cousin. Howbeit I met no damsel, and I +had no companion to return with but him with whom I went--Heregar's +young son, my page. Thane is he now by right of unfearing service. +Once, when I climbed the hill, I began to fear greatly, and I stayed, +and asked the boy if he was afraid to go on. Tell me truly, Ranald, +did you fear when you were in Wareham?" + +"Truly I feared at first," I answered; "but since I was there when +it came on me, I must even go through with the business. So it +passed." + +"Well, I am glad you confess it," he answered, "for I was minded to +turn and run when the first lights of the great camp showed through +the trees. Then the boy answered me, 'My king, why should I fear +when you are with me?' I was ashamed, and took Harek's harp from +him--for he carried it--and went forward boldly, singing the song +of Gunnar in the snake pit. And it seemed to me that Harek would +have chosen that song as fitting my case; for, putting Danes for +snakes, I was in a close place enough. The warriors came out when +they heard me; and I was well treated, and listened as I drank. +Many things I learned." + +Now I cannot believe that Alfred feared at all. He was surely but +anxious, and took that feeling for fear. So think all his people. + +"It seems that they thought I sang well," he went on; "so they took +me to Guthrum. He indeed looked sharply at me once, and maybe +twice; but I went on singing Harek's songs, and paid no heed to +him. Presently he gave me a great horn of ale from his own table, +and this gold bracelet that I wear also, and sent me away. Then I +went about the camp and heard the talk. One man asked me if I had +seen Alfred, and what he was like. 'Faith,' said I, 'men say I am +like him.' Whereat they laughed long at me and at the king also. +Then heard I the truth about my own looks for once. I had some +trouble in getting away, but at last I seemed to wax hoarse, and so +made as if I would go to Bridgwater, and left them, promising to +come again. Ay, and I will keep my promise," he said; "but as +Harek's heathen songs say, it is the sword's mass that I will sing +to them." + +Then his eyes glowed, and he was silent, and I wondered at the +courage and resource in the slight figure that was before me. + +"All goes well, and the plan is good," he went on directly. "They +look for some easily-beaten attack from this side of the Parret, +and at the first sign thereof will leave Edington height for the +level ground below, as they did when Hubba came. Then when they +turn, on Edington hill will be our levy suddenly--a levy of which +they have not dreamed. And there will be the greatest fight that +England has seen yet, and after that there will be a Saxon overlord +of England against whom none will dare rise." + +"May it be so, my king," I answered. + +"It will be so," he said. "Here in this cottage have I had the word +that tells me thereof; and you, Ranald, brought the sign that made +the word sure to me." + +I minded it, and I knew that for all my life my ways were bound to +the service of Alfred the king; for my fate was linked with his, as +it seemed, from my first coming. + +It was not long now before the day came that will never be +forgotten; for word was brought in from every quarter that thanes +and freemen and churls alike would not be behind when Alfred gave +the word, and he sent back to bid them meet him at Ecgbryht's +Stone, beyond Selwood, on Whitsunday. There is a great and strong +camp there on a rocky hill that looks out far and wide, near the +two great roads, British and Roman, that cross in the vale beneath; +and to that all were to gather, for there would the Golden Dragon +be set up. Men call it White Sheet Castle. + +On the day before I rode to Odda, who had already drawn his men to +the Petherton ridge above Bridgwater, and told him what the king's +word was. Then I went on up the long side of the Quantocks, and +spoke in the Maytime woods with Thora, telling her--for she was a +warrior's daughter, and was worthy of a warrior's love--that I must +be at the king's side. And so she bade me fight bravely, speaking +many noble and loving words to me, until I must go. Then I led her +back to Osmund in his place among the rough huts within the wide +circle of the camp ramparts, that now held but a few poor folk from +the Parretside lands. + +"King Alfred makes some new move," I said to him, "and it is +possible that we may not meet again. I think that what is coming +will end all the trouble between Saxon and Dane." + +He shook his head. + +"Some day it will end," he said, "but not in my time or yours--not +until the Danes have grown to know that England is their home, and +that they are English by birth and right of time--maybe not till +Denmark has ceased to send forth the sons for whom she has no place +in her own borders." + +Then I answered that perhaps he was right. I did not see into +things as far as he, and I was a stranger in the land. + +"But this at last will give a strong overlord to England," I said. + +"Ay, for the time. So long as a strong king rules, there will be +less trouble indeed; but if Alfred's sons are weak, it will begin +afresh. England will no longer bear two kings; and while there is a +Saxon kingdom alongside a Danish, there cannot be lasting peace." + +Then I said: + +"What of yourself? Shall you go back to Guthrum when this is over?" + +"I cannot tell," he answered. "What my fate is I know not yet. What +mean you to do if all goes well for Alfred? Shall you bide in +England?" + +We had walked apart now, and were looking over all the fair +Quantock vale beneath us. I think there is no fairer lookout in all +England: land and river and hills and sea, and beyond the sea the +blue mountains of the Welsh coast--ever changing and ever beautiful +under sun and cloud and flying shadows. + +"I have found the fairest land under the northern sun," I said; +"and I have found the best king, as I think. I shall bide here. One +other thing I have found of which I hardly dare to think, so many +are the chances of wartime. Yet, jarl, but for them I should not +have met with Thora, though in my heart I believe that I should not +have spoken to her yet." + +"I would not have had it otherwise," he said, kindly taking my arm. +"I have seen what was coming long before Etheldreda spoke. It has +been good for Thora that she did so, whatever befalls." + +Then we spoke of my promised place with the king, as if his victory +were certain. Indeed, I believe that we both had no thought of its +being otherwise. + +"I do not know, however," said Osmund, "if your taking a Danish +wife will be well received. It may be likely that Alfred will wish +you to be bound to him by some tie of that nearness which shall be +of his making." + +I had not thought of that, but it was a thing that was common +enough. Harald Fairhair was wont to give a rich wife to some chief +whom he would keep at his side. + +"If that is so, I shall go hence," I said. "There are things that +come before friendship." + +"Well," he answered, "we shall see. There is always a place for us +both at Rolf's side in his new-won land." + +"Yet I should be loth to leave Alfred," I said most truly. "I think +that this is the only thing that would make me do so." + +"Thora would not stand in your way to honour with him, nor would +I," said Osmund. + +"Honour with Alfred shall not stand in my way, rather," I answered. +"But we speak of chances, as I think." + +We said no more, and he bade me farewell. + +I went back to Alfred somewhat sad, and yet with many thoughts that +were good and full of hope; and soon I had little time to do aught +but look on at the way in which the king's plans worked out most +wonderfully. + +On the eve of the great Whitsunday festival we set out through the +fen paths southward to the hills and the first woodlands of Selwood +Forest, and when the morning came we were far in its depths, +passing eastward towards the place where we were to meet the levy. + +Presently we turned aside to a little woodland chapel that had +escaped the sight of the Danes, and from a hut beside it came out +an old priest, white-bearded and bent with age and scanty fare. At +first he feared that the heathen had found him at last; yet he +looked bravely at us, catching up the crucifix that hung at his +side and clasping it in both his hands as he stood in the open +doorway of his church, as if to stay us from it. + +Alfred rode forward to him when he saw his fear. + +"Father, I am Alfred the king," he said. "Far have I ridden on this +holy day. Now I would fain hear mass and have your blessing before +we go on." + +Thereat the old priest gave thanks openly to the King of kings, who +had brought Alfred again into the land, and hastened to make ready. +So that was the king's Whitsuntide mass, and we three heathen and +our few men must bide outside while the others went into the holy +place and returned with bright faces and happy; for this was a +service to which we might not be admitted, though all knew that we +would be Christians indeed ere long. + +So at last we came to the ancient castle, and saw the valley to +north and east beneath its height, bright everywhere with sparkling +arms that gleamed from lane and field and forest glade, as all +Wessex gathered to meet their king. + +Then the Golden Dragon that we had lost and won was unfurled; and +the war horns blew bravely enough to wake the mighty dead whose +mounds were round about us; and soon the hillside was full of men +who crowded upwards and filled the camp and ramparts and fosse, so +that before sunset Alfred had a host that any king might be proud +to call his own. Yet he would call it not Alfred's force, but +England's. + +Standing on the old ramparts, he spoke to them, while all the great +gathering was silent. And the words he said sank into the heart of +every man who heard, so that he felt as if on his arm alone it +rested to free England, and that his arm could not fail. Not long +did the king speak, but when he ended there rose a cheering that +was good to hear, for it came from hearts that had been made strong +to dare aught that might come. + +After that he spoke to the thanes, giving each one his place, and +telling them all that he had planned, so that each knew what was +looked for from him. It seemed that he had forgotten nothing, and +that the day must go as he said he thought it would. + +Men slept on their arms that night, without watch fires, lest any +prowling Danes should see that somewhat was on hand, although +Guthrum had drawn to him every man from out of Wessex, as was said, +and as seemed true. I have heard tales from some that in the night +the warriors who lie resting in the mounds around their old +stronghold came forth and wandered restless along the ramparts, +longing to take their part again in the mighty struggle they knew +was coming. I saw nothing, but Harek the scald says he saw. + +Next day we marched towards our foes. Eighteen miles we went, and +then came to the holy place Glastonbury, where the burnt ruins +spoke again, as it were, to the warriors of wrong and cruelty to be +avenged. + +There we were, but eight miles from the foe, and that night we lay +in a great meadow they called Iglea, deep down in the folds of the +hills, where even so great a host might be hidden for many days if +no chance betrayed them. Alfred took a few of us when night came, +and climbed the steep tor above Glastonbury town. Thence we could +see the long line of fires on Polden Hills that marked where the +Danes slept, all unknowing that any host could be gathered in their +rear. + +In the grey of morning we set our ranks in order. I was with +Alfred, with Ethered of Mercia and Ethelnoth, and more nobles whom +I knew; and my few men were in the shield wall, among the best +warriors of the Saxon levies. None grudged that honour to those who +had made the point of the wedge that broke Hubba's ranks and won +the Raven banner. + +Now, in our Norse land there is ever sacrifice to the Asir when one +leads a host to battle, that luck may be on the right side; and now +I was to see a more wondrous thing than even that. I knew by this +time the meaning of what I saw, and there crept into my heart a +wish that I might take full part therein with Alfred, who had +taught me. + +When all the ranks were ordered, and the deep columns were drawn up +on Iglea meadows in three sides of a square, there came a little +train of robed monks, at whose head was Bishop Sigehelm of +Sherborne, before whom went a tall gilded cross. Careworn and +anxious looked the good fathers, for there was not one of them who +had not a tale of Danish cruelty and destruction to tell, and more +than one had hardly escaped with his life; but now their faces were +brighter with new hope as they came into the open side of the armed +square and waited for a moment. + +Alfred and we stood before them, and the bishop raised his hand. At +that we all knelt, with a strange clash and rattle of arms that +went round the great host and ceased suddenly, so that the +stillness was very great. + +Then was only the voice of the bishop, who in a clear tone spoke +the words of peace to those who should pass hence in the coming +battle, that they might fight bravely, and even rejoice in death. + +So he shrived the host, and at the end they said "Amen" in one +voice. + +Thereafter the bishop prayed to the Lord of hosts--not such a +prayer as I had been wont to hear, but more wonderful, and with no +boasting therein, nor, as it were, any hate of the foe, but rather +the wish that the strife should make for peace, and even blessing +to them. + +Then he lifted his hand and blessed all the host as they bared +their heads, and again the last word rolled deep and strong round +the ranks, and that was all; then Alfred cried cheerily to his men, +and we began our march that must needs end in battle. + +There is a great road that climbs up the slope of the Polden Hills +from Glastonbury and then runs along their top to Edington and +beyond, and by this way we went, among pleasant woodlands. +Guthrum's own place was on the spur of Edington, because thence one +looks out on all the land that Alfred held, from the fort at Stane +hill to Bridgwater and Combwich and the sea beyond. That was only +eight miles from us, and was the point which we would win. Thence +to Bridgwater is five miles, and the town was now held in force by +the Danes; and where the road leaves the hills to cross the marsh +to the bridge and town, two miles away, was a camp that guarded the +causeway through the level. + +We went quickly as a great host may, and Alfred had so ordered +matters that even as we set out from Iglea, Odda and his force were +moving in battle array from the Petherton heights on the Quantock +side of the town, as if to attack it. That was what Guthrum had +looked for since the time we had beaten Hubba, and the only attack +which could have seemed possible in any way. + +It is likely that he overrated the number which Odda had with him; +for those who escaped us at Combwich had not been near enough to +see from the far side of the river how small our force was, and +would make much of those who had been able to overcome their +mightiest chief. Moreover, since that time seven weeks had gone by, +and the gathering of Devon might be greater yet. So it was, indeed; +but Odda had not a thousand men. Perhaps, too, the Danes feared +some sally from the fens; but however it was, they made not the +mistake which destroyed Hubba by despising us rashly, for Guthrum +drew his whole force together, and left the hills for a march +towards the town which he heard was threatened. + +So when we came to Edington, Guthrum's hill fort was empty, save +for a camp guard to keep the country folk who lurked in wood and +fen from pillaging it. These men fled, and we stood on the ridge +without striking one blow; and King Alfred turned to us, and cried +that surely his plan was working out well. + +Then our host lined the ridge, and a mighty Saxon cheer from ten +thousand throats went pealing across the valley below us, and they +say that shout was heard even in Bridgwater. Guthrum heard it as he +rode with his host across the long causeway, and his men heard it +and halted, and saw in their rear the blaze of war gear that shone +from their own lines, and knew that they were pent in between fens +and hills, with an unknown force ready to fall on them. + +Whereon a panic very nearly seized them. Hubba's end was fresh in +their minds, and it needed all that Guthrum could say to prevent +them making for the town. But he minded them of old victories, and +bade them not fear to face the despised Saxons once again, and they +rallied. But it was noon before he could lead them to attack us, +and by that time he learned that Odda had halted above the town, +and need not be feared. But by that time also every post of vantage +along the hills was in our hands, and if Edington height was to be +held by Danes again, it must be won by hard fighting. That is a +thing that no Dane shrinks from, and now for Guthrum there was +nought else to be done, for he was surrounded, as it were. + +No man saw the whole of that fight, for it began at noon, as I have +said, when Guthrum turned to find the hillward road blocked behind +him. And from that time on it raged from spur to spur and point to +point, as step by step the Danes won back to the hillsides. But the +crest of the hill they never gained, save where for a time they +might set foot and be driven headlong in turn by those who had +given way before them at first. And so the fight swept on to the +base of Edington hill and along its sides, for there Alfred had +held his best men in reserve. Already the Danes had made for +themselves some shallow lines of earthworks along the crest, and +now these were manned against their own attack. + +Men who looked on from afar tell strange tales of the shouts and +cries that rang among the quiet Polden hills and woodlands that day +for long hours. It was very still, as it chanced, and the noise of +battle went far and wide from the place where Saxon and Dane fought +their greatest fight for mastery. + +Ever rode Alfred with the light of battle on his face, confident +and joyous, among his men from post to post. Ever where the tide of +battle seemed to set against us his arm brought victory again, +until at last Guthrum drew his men together for one final attack +that should end the day. + +On Edington hillside he massed them, and steadily they came on +under shield in a dense column to where, in their own camp, we +waited under the Dragon banner. Half our men, the best spearmen of +the force, were lying down resting, but along the little ridges of +the earthworks the archers stood, each knowing that he fought under +the eye of the king he loved. + +"This is the end," said Alfred, as the Danes came on. "Be ready, +spearmen, when I give the word." + +And they lay clutching their weapons, with their eyes fixed on him +as he stood on the hilltop, surrounded by his thanes, gazing on the +last assault of the Danes, whose archers from the wings were +already at work, so that the men of the shield wall closed in +around him. + +I think that the Danes had no knowledge of what force was hidden by +the hill brow. For when they were within half arrow shot, and +Alfred gave the word, and the long ranks of spearmen leaped from +the ground and closed up for their charge, a waver went along the +shielded line, and they almost halted, though it passed, and they +came on even more swiftly. + +Then Alfred lifted his sword and shouted, and, with that awful roar +that I had heard before on the Combwich meadows, over the hill +crest and down upon the Danes the spearmen rushed. The lines met +with a mighty crash of steel on steel, and while one might count +two score they swayed in deadly hand-to-hand strife. Then Guthrum's +men gave back one pace, and howled, and won their place again, and +again lost it. + +Then forward went Alfred and his shield wall, and I was on one side +of him and Ethered of Mercia on the other, while after him came +Heregar, bearing the banner. The Danes in the centre closed up as +they saw us come, and there were shouts in which Guthrum's name was +plain to be heard, and I saw him across a four-deep rank of his +men. + +Straight for him went Alfred, and the Danish line grew thin before +us. But as their king went forward our Saxons cheered again and +pressed their attack home, and right and left the Danish line fell +back and broke. At that a wild shout and charge with levelled +spears swept them down the hillside in full rout, and the end had +come. His courtmen closed round Guthrum and bore him from before +us, and the full tide of pursuit swept him away before we reached +him. + +Alfred stayed his horse and let the men go on. His face was good to +see as he glanced round at the hills to our right; but when it fell +on the slain, who lay thickly where the lines had met, he bared his +head and looked silently on them for a space, while his lips moved +as if he prayed. + +Then he said: + +"These have given their lives not in vain, for they have helped to +bring peace, and have died to set an English king over the English +land." + +He put on his crown-circled helm again, and as he did so, among the +fallen there was a stir and movement, and the wounded rose up on +arms and knees and turned on their sides, and raised their hands, +waving broken weapons, and crying in a strange, wearied voice that +yet had a ring of victory in it: + +"Waeshael to Alfred the king!" + +For the silence that had fallen, and the lessening shouts of the +pursuers, told them that they had won, and they were content. + +Thereat Alfred flushed red, and I think that he almost wept, for he +turned from us. And then he spoke to the men who yet stood round +him, and said: + +"Let every man who has any knowledge of care for the wounded, or +who has known a wound of his own and the way it was cared for, go +among these brave ones and help them." + +Nor would he leave the place till he saw men going up and down +among the hurt, tending them as well as they could; and he was the +more content when he saw Bishop Sigehelm and many other clergy come +on the field from the rear, where he had bidden them stay. The +bishop had mail under his robes, having been eager to join in the +fight, as would Eahlstan, his great forerunner, have certainly +joined; but Alfred would not suffer him to do so. + +Once more Guthrum tried to rally his men, when the flight bore him +to his camp at the hill foot, on the way across the fens to the +town. There was a sharp fight there, and Ethelnoth was wounded as +he led on his men; and thence the Danes fled to Bridgwater, making +no more delay. So close on them were our men that Guthrum's +housecarls closed the gates after their king on many of their +comrades, who fell under the Saxon spear in sight of safety. Nor +did we give them time to drive in the cattle that were gathered +from all the countryside to the meadows round the place. + +Then came Thord to me and put me in mind of somewhat. + +"Now is our work to be done, king. These Danes will take Hubba's +ships and be gone down the river next. We must stop them in some +way, for the king's plan is to starve them out, as it seems." + +We had left the king at that time, for we would not suffer him to +join in pursuit, which has its dangers, if men turn desperate and +make a stand, as many did, dying like brave warriors that they +were. So I rode on quickly with my followers, and came to the river +bank below the bridge. The Danes were swarming on the ramparts of +the fortress like angry bees, and in the ships, which lay beneath +the walls, men were busy, even as Thord had guessed they would be, +making ready to sail when tide served. We could not reach them by +any means, for every boat had been taken from this side long ago, +when the first news of defeat was brought back by flying horsemen. + +Then Thord's face glowered under his helm, and he pointed to the +ship that was farthest from the bridge, and therefore likely to be +the first to start away when the tide was full. It was my own ship, +which they had got afloat. + +"Thor's hammer smite them!" he growled; "they have launched the old +keel without finishing her painting--just as I left her. How are we +to stay their going off with her?" + +"Is there a chain cable anywhere?" I asked. + +"Not one in the place," he said; "and if we did get one across the +river, we should have to fight to keep the far end of it." + +The tide was rising fast, and I thought we should surely lose every +ship, while Guthrum and his chiefs would escape us at the same +time. One might line the banks with archers, certainly, but that +would not stay the going. Evening was closing in, moreover. By +midnight they would be gone, and I was in a difficulty out of which +I could not see my way. + +Suddenly Thord smote his hands together, and his face grew +brighter. + +"I have it," he cried. "There is an old vessel that lies in a creek +a mile down the river. A great buss {xvi} she is, and worth +nothing; but she will float, and maybe will be afloat now. If we +can sink her across the channel in a place that I know, not one of +these ships will get away till she is raised." + +Then I called every man to me whom I could see, and we went quickly +to the place where this buss was, and she was just afloat. Thord +knew where her tackle was kept, and he had the oars out--what there +were of them at least, for they were old and rotten enough. Then we +had to shove her off and get her boat into the water, and the +vessel itself floated up on the tide towards the narrow place where +she might best be sunk to block the channel against ships that came +from the town. + +We had not gone far when there came a sound at which I started, for +it was nothing more or less than the quick beat of oars coming down +the river against the tide. Thord and I and eight men of my own +crew were in the buss, while I had maybe thirty men ashore who were +keeping pace with us along the bank. The rest of my own men were +with these, and one shouted that he could see the ship, and that it +was our own, crammed with men too. + +Now at first it seemed as if the only thing for us to do was to go +ashore in the boat as quickly as we could and get away; but Thord +cried to me: + +"Then will the Danes take our ship to sea, and we have lost her for +good. It should not be said of us that we let her go without a blow +struck to save her." + +"Sink this hulk straightway, then," I said, falling to work, with +the axe I had in thy hand, on the lowest strakes. My men leaped to +work as well, and in two minutes the seams began to gape, and then +was a rush of water from broken planking that sent us over the side +and into the boat in hot haste. + +Then we pulled for shore, towing the bows of the fast-sinking buss +with us till they grounded in the mud, and even as her stern swung +with the tide across the channel she lurched and sank. + +"We should have bided in her and fought," growled Thord. "Now in +five minutes we shall see the bottom ripped out of our own ship by +our own deed." + +But a foot of the bows and the mast of the buss stood out of the +water, and I thought the Danes would see these marks. + +Even as we gained the shore our dragon stem swept round the bend +that had hidden us, and came on swiftly. Then the Danes saw us, and +those on the fore deck shouted, and the oars plashed wildly, and +many on the side next to us stopped altogether; and at the same +time the steersman saw the stem of the wreck, and, as I think, lost +his head between fear of it and the sudden appearance of the foe +whom he thought he had escaped. The larboard oars were going yet, +and the starboard had almost stopped. He paid no heed to it, and +the ship swung over. Then the tide caught her bows, and in a moment +she ran hard and fast on our bank, and the men in her fell right +and left with the shock. + +I had seen what was coming, and so had Thord, and we ran our best +to meet her as she struck. The tide was a good one, and she came +well on the hard bank, and there was no need to tell my men what to +do. Before the Danes knew what had happened we were climbing over +the bows on board, and the Danes aft were leaping into the river to +get away from us. + +Some few tried to fight; but there must have been two hundred men +packed along the gangways, and they could do nothing. They threw +themselves into the water like the rats that had left the old buss +even now, and we slew many, and the good ship was our own again. +Some of the Danes got ashore on the far bank, some were met by our +Saxons on this side, and but few got back to Bridgwater, for the +river had most of them. + +Another ship was coming at this time, but those in her heard the +shouting and the cries; and it would seem that their hearts failed +them, for they went back before we could see more than the tall +mast above the banks from our decks. + +Then we thought we might rest, for we were wearied out; but Thord +would not suffer us to do so till he had got the ship carefully +below the wreck, so that she was free. Had we waited for the next +tide we could not have done it, as it turned out; for the rise of +flood shortened quickly to the neap tides, and a bank of mud grew +round the sunken hull, making the channel impassable altogether for +the time, and so the last way of escape for Guthrum and his men was +barred. + +So I thought we had done well, and left Thord and my men to guard +the ship and take her back to Combwich, where she would lie safely +in the creek, while I rode to Alfred, almost sleeping on my wearied +horse as I went. + +There were two wrecks in that place in the morning; for they +brought down one of Hubba's ships in the dark on the next tide, and +she ran on the sunken stem of the buss, and went down almost at +once. After that no more attempt was made to fly by water. + +Then began a siege that lasted for a fortnight, without anything +happening that is worth telling; for the fear of Alfred was on the +Danes, and they had not heart so much as to make one sally from the +gates. + + + +Chapter XIII. The Greatest Victory. + + +Now in a few days it was plain that Alfred held the Danes in the +hollow of his hand as it were, and could do what he would with +them. At first we looked for messengers from the place, to treat +with him for peace; but none came. From the town at times we could +hear shoutings and the noise of men who quarrelled, as if there +were divided counsels among them that led to blows. They were very +short of food also, because all their stores of cattle were left +outside the walls, as I have said, so that we fared the better for +their plundering while we waited. + +At the end of the first week, therefore, Alfred sent a message +under flag of truce, and told the chiefs that he was willing to +hear what they would say; and next day Guthrum asked that some +chiefs might come and speak with him. But Alfred would not trust +the Danes enough to send any of his nobles into the town, and bade +Guthrum come out to the camp and say what he had to say. But he +would not. Then one day, when Alfred held counsel as to what was +best to be done to ensure lasting peace, I said that I thought Jarl +Osmund might be of use, for he could go between the two camps in +safety. + +That seemed good to the king, and Heregar and I rode to find him, +crossing the tidal ford at Combwich, where we heard from village +folk who had returned that the Danish lord bided in Heregar's house +beyond the fort. + +There I thought I should find Thora, and we went quickly. The place +looked very deserted, and when we came to the courtyard gates it +seemed more so, for the Maytime had sprinkled the gay-patterned +paving of grey and white shore pebbles with blades of grass and +weeds that sprang up between them everywhere for want of tendance. + +Only the Lady Alswythe and a few of her servants were there now, +for the Lady Etheldreda had taken Thora with her to Taunton when +she left the hills. It had not been so safe here, though there was +little plunder to bring the Danes to the place now. So I need not +say that I was grievously disappointed, though in the dismantled +hall sat Osmund, listlessly shaping a bow stave, and waiting for +what turn of fortune should take him next. + +Very glad, as one might think, were both the lady and the jarl for +our coming, and we had to tell them all the tale of the working of +Alfred's plan, and of the great fight. And when that was heard, we +told the jarl of Alfred's wish to treat with Guthrum and the other +chiefs through him. + +That Osmund would gladly do; indeed, he said that, in hopes of +being thus useful, he had stayed so near at hand. + +So he and the thane talked long of the matter--for Alfred had sent +messages--while I spoke with the lady, of Thora mostly. + +It did not seem to me that I had any part in the king's business +with the Danes, and so presently I thought that I could do no +better than ride to Taunton to see Thora, who I feared might be in +trouble or doubt as to my safety. + +So I rode there with Kolgrim. At that time the scald was laid up +with a wound in the camp, and the king seemed to miss his presence, +and to care for his welfare as if he were his brother; but, indeed, +he made every man with whom he had to do feel as if his king were +his best friend. + +There is not much need for me to tell what manner of welcome I had +at Taunton from Thora. As for Etheldreda, she would have me tell +her everything, and I sat with those two, until night came and +rest, talking of all the time past. But of the time to come Thora +said nothing, and once or twice when Etheldreda left us and we were +alone for a little while, so that I could try to plan out somewhat, +she would but turn the talk again. + +In the morning I found out how this was. She had gathered from +Osmund somewhat of his thoughts about what Alfred's plan for me +might be, and was unhappy therefore, not wishing to stand in my way +to honour with the king. So she told me when I pressed her a little +to speak of what I would do; and when I said that there should be +nothing that I would let stand between us, she was the more +troubled yet. + +So at last I went and found Etheldreda, and prayed her to come and +speak with Thora. + +"Falling out already?" she said, laughing. + +"Not so, but a greater trouble than that," I said, "one that will +need your help before it is mended." + +"Ay, I suppose you could patch up a quarrel for yourselves," she +said. "What is this mighty trouble?" + +So she came and sat by Thora, taking her hand and kissing her, and +we told her what Osmund's thoughts were. + +"There is such enmity between Saxon and Dane," Thora said, "that it +is not likely that the king will trust one who will wed one of his +foe's daughters." + +It was plain that Etheldreda thought the same; but she cheered us +both, saying that she would do all that she could to help us, and +that Odda would not be behind in the matter. After all, if we were +to wait for a while, things might be very different after a little +time of peace. And so we were content. + +So I went back to Alfred next day, and when he heard where I had +been he smiled a little, and said: + +"One thing I must tell you, my Norseman, and that is that our +thanes who know little of you will be jealous that you should have +much dealing with any Dane as yet." + +Which made me the more uneasy; for though I might think that the +king, at all events, was not displeased with me, others, and the +wishes of others, might be too strong for him to go against. + +But my affairs are little things compared with what was on hand at +this time, and on the same day Alfred spoke to me about somewhat +that he would have me do for him. + +In the town the Danes were in the greatest straits by this time, +for by no means could they get stores of any sort to them, so close +was the watch round the place. Osmund had been in and out once or +twice, and Guthrum had received him well enough, and it was thought +that there would be no long delay now before the siege was at an +end by the submission of the Danes to any terms they might gain, +and the more so that an assault on the fortress would surely have +been successful, ending in the fall of all its defenders. + +But Alfred was most willing to be merciful, and he had bidden +Osmund tell Guthrum and his chiefs that if he might name twelve +hostages for himself the rest should go free, while Guthrum should +hold the East Anglian kingdom for him as under-king. + +But this was what Alfred would have me do. + +"One other thing there is," he said. "If there is to be any +brotherhood between us, it must be as between Christians. The ways +of persecution must be forgotten and that cannot come to pass until +the chiefs at least have accepted the faith." + +"It is strange to me, my king," I said, "that Guthrum, who has been +in England for ten years, is not Christian by this time." + +"Ay, but his hosts are heathen," the king answered. "Now I think I +can speak to you as if no longer a heathen at least?" + +"As a Christian, my king," I answered. + +"Well, then," he said, smiling on me, "go and speak to Guthrum and +tell him what I have said. I think that he will listen to you +better than if I sent a priest or even Bishop Sigehelm. Warrior may +speak to warrior plainly." + +Now this was a hard thing for me to do, as it seemed. Maybe it was +the hardest thing he could have asked me. But it was in my mind +that I could not but go to Guthrum and give the message, else would +I seem to deny the faith that I loved. Alfred saw at once that I +was troubled in some way, and I believe that he knew well what the +seeming doubt was. + +"Once you brought a token of good to me," he said. "Now that was +all unknowing. Go now and take a message of good to Guthrum openly, +and have no fear." + +"What shall I say?" + +"Mind not that at all," he answered; "what is needed will come to +you." + +So I said that I would go if Harek might come with me, for his +words were ever ready. But Alfred would not suffer that. I must go +without help from a scald, taking only my own words; and at last I +consented, though indeed my only fear was that I might not succeed +by reason of my slowness of speech. + +Then I went to Osmund, and told him that I was to go into the town +with him next day, for that is how Alfred planned for me; and I +told him also what my part in the business was to be. Whereon he +surprised me. + +"I do not know that your errand is so hopeless as you seem to +think," he said. "Guthrum has harmed no Christians in East Anglia +since he was king there." + +"Well," I answered, "I hope it may be easy, though I doubt it." + +I would not say more then, but, being anxious, went and spoke long +with Harek. The brave scald's wounds were deep, though he had said +little of them. Some say that he saved the life of Ethelnoth at the +time when that ealdorman was struck down, and that also is +Ethelnoth's story; though the scald says that if so it was by +accident, and less worth speaking of than many braver deeds that +were wrought and went untold that day. + +"Here have I been in England but six months or so, and I have more +to sing of than ever I learned with Harald Fairhair," he said one +day, as he made songs on his bed while his wounds were healing. + +And he spoke the truth. Never was a winter so full of deeds wrought +by a king and a valiant people that were worth a scald's +remembrance. + +Now Osmund had a last message from Alfred that day, and in the +morning we went together to the bridge. There Guthrum's own +courtmen met us, and they took us into the fortress, beyond which +lies the town, so that we saw little of what straits the host might +be in by this time. In the fortress itself all seemed in order at +least; and there was a guard set at the door of the well-built hut +where the Danish king was, as if some state were yet kept up. + +There Guthrum welcomed us, and with him were many chiefs, on whose +faces was the same care-worn look that Osmund had borne when I saw +him at Exeter before Alfred. + +"Two messages come to you today," Osmund said; "one by my mouth, +and the other by that of King Ranald Vemundsson, who is with me. I +think you may hear both, and answer them both favourably." + +Guthrum made no reply, but took his seat at the upper end of the +one room the hut had; and all the chiefs sat also, leaving us +messengers standing. + +Then said Osmund: + +"I think it right that I should stand in the presence of my king, +but the son of King Vemund should not do so in any less presence +than that of his overlord." + +Thereat Guthrum smiled a little. + +"I have heard that Harald of Norway came to blows with his brother +kings because they would not stand before him, and that others have +left that kingdom because they did not choose to do so. Sit down, +King Ranald. Your father's name was well known to all of us in the +old days. I am glad to see his son, though maybe I should not say +so." + +"We would rather that he were on our side," said one of the other +chiefs. + +Then they set places for both of us, and we waited for Guthrum's +word. + +"Well," he said, wearily enough, "let us hear what King Alfred +says." + +"Few are his words," said Osmund: + +"'Let Guthrum suffer me to choose any hostages that I will for +myself, let him swear to keep the peace hereafter as my under-king +beyond Thames, doing homage to me, and he shall go hence with his +host in honour.' There is also the message of Ranald to add +hereto." + +Now I thought that the faces of the chiefs showed that they thought +these terms very light; but they said nothing as yet. + +Guthrum turned to me. + +"Well, King Ranald?" + +"Alfred the king bids me say that he would fain treat with you +hereafter as a brother altogether. And that can only be if the +great trouble between Dane and Saxon is removed--that is, if +Guthrum becomes a Christian." + +Now I expected some outburst of scorn and wrath on this, but +instead of that a silence fell, in which the chiefs looked at one +another; and Guthrum gazed at me steadfastly, so that I felt my +face growing hot under his eyes, because I knew I must say more, +and that of myself and my own wishes most likely. + +Then Guthrum said slowly: + +"Why has he not sent some priest to say this?" + +"Because he thought that a warrior would listen best to a brother +warrior," I answered. + +"Ay, that is true," said the king. "Are you a Christian, +therefore?" + +"I am as yet unbaptized," I said. "I have taken the prime signing +on me, as have many others; but I shall certainly seek baptism +shortly." + +"You came here as a heathen, then?" + +"As a heathen altogether, except that I had no hatred of +Christians," I answered, not quite seeing what the king would know. + +"What turned your mind so far from the old gods that you should be +a fit messenger on such a matter to us?" + +"I have learned from Alfred and Neot," I answered, "and I know that +I have found what is true." + +Then Guthrum turned to Osmund. + +"What say you, jarl? you have been with Alfred also." + +"When Ranald is baptized, I shall be so with him," the jarl +answered simply. + +And that was the first word thereof that I had heard from him. + +Then an older chief spoke sharply to us. + +"What profit do you look to make thereout--either of you?" + +"Certainty of better things both in this life and in that to come," +I answered. + +"Ay, so they always say," the chief growled; "but what place with +Alfred in return?" + +"It is likely that I shall gain no place with him," I said. "Jarl +Osmund knows that I do not count on that." + +"Ay," said Osmund, "I know it. Nor will any man think that I seek +honour at Alfred's hands." + +Then Guthrum rose up, and spoke gravely and yet very determinedly, +as if this was no new matter to him. + +"Here, chiefs, are two good and tried warriors who willingly choose +Alfred's faith. You and I have heard thereof since we were in +England; and many a man have we seen die, since we have been here, +because he would not give it up. I mind me of Edmund, the martyred +king, whom Ingvar, our great chief, slew, and of Humbert the +bishop, and many more lesser folk. Tell me truly how much you have +thought of the Asir in these last years?" + +But none answered. It was with them as with me: the Asir were not +of England. + +"One thing," said Guthrum, "has gone against our taking up the +English faith--we have thought the words of peace have made men +cowardly. Now we know that is not so. Here is one who withstood +Hubba, and round the walls watch Christian men who have beaten us +sturdily." + +Then he stayed his words for a little, and his voice sank, and he +looked round and added: + +"Moreover, the words of the new faith are good. I will accept King +Alfred's brotherhood altogether." + +Then one or two more of the younger chiefs spoke, and said that +they would do so also; but again the elder warrior spoke fiercely. + +"Is this forced on us as part of the peace making?" + +"It is not," I answered. "It is, as I have said, the wish for +brotherhood altogether." + +Then said Guthrum: + +"That is enough. I do not think that we need be ashamed to be +conquered altogether by King Alfred." + +"One more word," said the old chief. "Are we to have no hostages?" + +"There can be no exchange of hostages," said Osmund. + +"Things are all on the side of the Saxon," he growled. + +"Ay, they are, in more ways than that," said Guthrum. "We have no +power to say a word. It is in my mind that we could not have looked +for such mildness at the king's hands. For there is no denying that +we are at his mercy. + +"What say you, as a stranger, Ranald?" + +"I have known the ways of Harald of Norway," I answered. "I think +that he would not have left a man of this host alive." + +Whereon the old warrior laughed shortly, and was silent while +Guthrum bade us go back to Alfred and thank the king for his word, +saying that an answer should be given as soon as the word of the +host had been taken in open Thing. + +So Alfred won Guthrum to the faith, and greatly did he rejoice when +he heard what the Danish king had said. I think he was more glad +yet when he knew that Osmund would become Christian also, and he +urged us both to be baptized at once. + +"Let us be so with Guthrum," I asked. + +"That will be fitting," he answered, "for I think you have won him +over." + +But I hold that Guthrum and more of his chiefs had been won by the +deaths of those martyrs of whom he spoke long before the choice was +set before him. One cannot tell how this was wrought in the mind of +the Danes altogether by the hand of God. Some will ever say, no +doubt, that they took the Cross on them by necessity; but I know +that it was not so. Nor have their lives since that time given any +reason for the thought. + +Then Alfred asked the name of that old warrior who withstood us, +and Osmund told him. + +"I will have that chief as a hostage," the king said, "for I think +that he is worth taming." + +"I think that King Alfred's hostages are not in any way to be +pitied," Osmund said. + +"Save that they are kept from home and friends, I would have them +as happy as may be," the king answered; "but I would have none +presume on what mercy came to you, Jarl Osmund, for the sake of the +Christmastide message." + +"I think that none will do so," Osmund said. "There is full +knowledge among my kin that you showed mercy when justice was about +to be done, and well they know that your kindness was not weakness. +It is likely that the mercy shown here also will do more for peace +than would even destruction of your enemies." + +So it seemed at last, for on the fourteenth day of the siege the +Danes accepted the king's terms with one consent. And more than +that, Guthrum and thirty of his chiefs asked that they might be +baptized; which was a wonder to all of our host. + +Now I have said nothing about the life in the great camp before +Bridgwater, for it had nothing of much note to me, though it was +pleasant enough. I think there was some jealousy of me among the +younger thanes at one time; but it passed because I would not +notice it, and also because I took no sort of authority on me, +being only the king's guest and warrior as yet. But I did find a +few young thanes of Odda's following who knew somewhat of the sea, +and I was wont to talk with them often of the ships and the like, +until I knew they would be glad to take to the viking's path with +me in the king's ships, bringing their men with them. And often +Alfred spoke with me of the matter, until I was sure that he would +have me stay. + +It was but a few days after the peace had been made when Alfred +went to a great house he had at Aller, which lies right amidst the +marshes south of Athelney. We had saved that house and the church +by our constant annoyance of the Danes, with many another house and +village along the fen to which they dared not come for fear of us +at last. Guthrum was to come to him there, and I think that he +chose the place because there at least was nought to bring thoughts +of defeat to the Danes, and there they could be treated as guests, +apart from the great camp and fortress. Great were the preparations +there for the high festival that should be when Alfred himself +should take Guthrum to the font. + +Then came Neot on foot, with Guerir his fellow hermit, from +Cornwall, to be present; and Harek and I rejoiced as much as the +king that he had come. + +"I think I must answer for you two at the font," he said. + +"For Kolgrim also, I pray you, Father Neot," said I; "for he will +be baptized with us." + +"Ay, for honest Kolgrim also," he answered; "but what of old Thord, +my reprover?" + +"He will have nought to do with the new faith," I said. "But at +least he does not blame us for leaving the old gods. He says he is +too old to learn what we younger men think good." + +"I will seek him and speak with him again," Neot said. "I think I +owe him somewhat." + +Then we thanked the holy man for the honour that he was showing us; +but he put thanks aside, saying that we were his sons in the truth, +and that the honour was his rather. + +Now in the seven weeks that we waited for Guthrum at Aller, while +the priests whom Alfred sent taught him and his chiefs what they +should know rightly before baptism, Osmund and I were wont to go to +Taunton, across the well-known fens, and bide for days at a time in +Odda's house there, and we told Thora for what we waited. + +She had come to England, when she was quite a child, with the first +women who came into East Anglia, and already she knew much of +Christianity from the Anglian thralls who had tended her. And when +she had heard more of late from Etheldreda and Alswythe, she had +longed to be of the same faith as these friends of hers, and now +rejoiced openly. + +"Ranald," she said, "I had not dared to speak of this to my father, +but I was wont to fear the old gods terribly. They have no place +for a maiden in their wild heaven. There are many more Danish +ladies who long for this change, even as I have longed. Yet I still +fear the wrath of Odin for you and my father." + +"The old gods are nought--they have no power at all," I said, +bravely enough; though even yet I had a little fear in thus defying +them, as it seemed. + +"Then I will dread them no more," she answered. "Nor do I think +that you need fear them." + +So I comforted her, and bade her ask more of Etheldreda, who would +gladly teach her; and the matter passed by in gladness, as a +trouble put away, for she and I were at one in this. I will say +that I had half feared that she whom I loved would have been angry +with me. + +Now on that night Osmund and I and Harek would ride to Heregar's +house over the shoulder of the Quantocks, with some message we had +to take to him from Alfred; and we went without any attendants, for +the twelve miles or so would have no risk to any one, and the +summer evening was long and bright. + +Yet we were later in starting away than we should have been, and so +when we were among the wilder folds of the hills, where the bare +summits rise from wooded slopes and combes, we were overtaken by a +heavy thunderstorm that came up swiftly from the west behind us, +darkening the last sunset light with black clouds through which the +lightning flickered ceaselessly. + +We rode on steadily, looking for some place of shelter; but it grew +very dark, and the narrow track was rough, and full of loose stones +that made the going slow. Presently the clouds settled down on the +hill crest and wrapped us round, and the storm broke afresh on us, +with thunder that came even as the darkness was changed to blue +brightness with the lightning flashes that played around us almost +unceasing. There was no rain yet and no wind, and the heat grew +with the storm. + +Soon the nearness of the flashes scared our horses, and we had to +dismount and lead them, and in the darkness we lost the little +track among the heavy heather. And then there seemed to me to be a +new sound rising among the thunder, and I called to Harek, bidding +him hearken. + +It came from seaward, and swelled up louder and louder and nearer, +until it passed over our heads--the yelp and bay of Odin's wild +hounds, and the trample and scream of his horses and their dead +riders. A great fear fell on me, so that the cold sweat stood on my +forehead, while the hunt seemed everywhere above us for a moment, +and then passed inland among the thunder that hardly drowned its +noises. + +Then Osmund the jarl cried out: + +"That was Odin's hunt. I have heard it before, and ill came +thereof. He hunts us who forsake him." + +And out of the darkness Harek answered, without one shake in his +brave voice: + +"Odin's hunt in truth it was, and the ill comes to Odin, who must +leave this land before the might of the Cross. We who bear the sign +of might he cannot touch." + +Then I remembered myself, and the fear passed from me, and I was +ashamed. I had no doubt now that there was need for Odin's wrath, +seeing that he was surely defeated. And Osmund was silent also, +thinking doubtless the same things; for he had taken on him the +prime signing long ago, and had forgotten it maybe. + +Then we went on, and the storm grew wilder. Harek sang now, but +what the words were I cannot tell. I think they were some that he +had learned from Alfred. + +Now we began to go down the southern slope of the highest neck of +the hill, as it seemed, though we could not rightly say where we +were, and in a little silence that came between the thunderclaps I +heard the rattle of hoofs as of another rider coming after us, +going faster than we dared. + +"Here is one who knows the hill well," I said; "maybe he will guide +us." + +And then the lightning showed the horseman close to us. He reined +up, and cried in a great voice: + +"Ho, strangers! are you wandering here?" + +"Ay; we are lost till the storm passes. Can you guide us to shelter +before the rain comes?" I said. + +"Whence come you?" he asked. + +"We are Alfred's men from Taunton--going to the thane's house at +Cannington." + +"Ay, is that so? Then I will guide you. Follow," he said, and he +rode on. + +One could see him plainly when the lightning came, and it showed a +tall man, grey bearded, and clad in a long hooded horseman's cloak, +under which gleamed golden-shining mail. Well mounted on a great +horse he was also, and its sides were white with foam on the dark +skin, as though he had ridden hard. + +We mounted and went after him, with the lightning playing round us +and glancing from the mail of our leader as his arm threw the cloak +back over his shoulder from time to time. He led us along the hill +crest northward, crossing the places where the fire beacons had +been; and we wondered whither he was taking us, for shelter here +was none. And now the storm grew wilder, with the wind and chill of +coming rain. + +Then he turned downhill, riding fast until we came to a place where +rocks lay loose and scattered everywhere, and our horses stumbled +among them. There he reined up suddenly, holding up his hand, and +shouting through the uproar of wind and thunder: + +"Hold, for your lives! Hearken!" + +We stayed motionless, listening, and again we heard the cry and +clang of Odin's hunt, coming now from inland over us, and I made +the sign of the Cross on my breast, in fear thereof. + +"Ho for Odin's hunt!" the strange man cried, in his mighty voice. +"Hear it, Alfred's men, for you shall join it and ride the wind +with him if you defy him." + +"We fear him not," said Harek; "he has no power over us." + +"Has he not?" the man roared, facing full upon us; and as he did so +the lightning glared on him, and I saw that his drawn sword was +aloft, and that from its point glowed a blue flame, and that blue +flames also seemed to start from his horse's ears. One-eyed the man +was also, and he glowered on us under shaggy eyebrows. + +Harek saw also, and he raised his hand towards the man and signed +the holy sign, crying: + +"Speak! who are you?" + +Thereat the man gave a hoarse roar as of rage, and his horse +reared, trampling wildly on the loose rocks, and, lo, he was gone +from before our eyes as if he had never been, while the thunder +crashed above us and below us everywhere! + +"Odin! the Cross has conquered!" Harek cried again, in a voice that +was full of triumph; and the blood rushed wildly through me at the +thought of what I had seen. + +Then Harek's horse shifted, and his hoof struck a great stone that +rolled as if going far down the hill, and then stopped, and maybe +after one could count five came a crash and rattle underneath us +that died away far down somewhere in the bowels of the hill. And at +that Osmund shouted suddenly: + +"Back to the hill; we are on the brink of the old mine shaft! Back, +and stay not!" + +Nor did we wait, but we won back to the higher ground before we +drew rein. + +"We have met with Odin himself," Osmund said when we stopped and +the thunder let him speak. + +"Ay, and have driven him hellwards by the might of the holy sign," +said Harek. "Nearly had he lured us to death, unbaptized as we are, +in that place." + +"Come," said Osmund; "I know where we are now. We are well-nigh +under the great fort, and there is a farm near at hand." + +We found that soon and the rain came, and the storm spent its fury +and passed as we sat under cover in the stables waiting. Then came +the moonlight and calm, and the sweetness of rain-soaked earth and +flowers refreshed, and we went on our way wondering, and came to +the thane's with the first daylight. And I thought that our faces +were pale and marked with the terror of the things through which we +had gone, and maybe also with a new light of victory {xvii}. + + + +Chapter XIV. King Alfred's Will. + + +When we came back to Aller, the first thing that I did was to tell +Neot of our meeting with Odin while his wild hunt went on through +the tempest, telling him how that I had feared unwisely, and also +of Harek's brave withstanding of the danger. + +"It is said that our forefathers met Odin in like wise in the days +of the first christening of our race," he said. "I do not know what +to make thereof, seeing that I hold Odin as nought; but I think +this, that in some way Satan tried to destroy you before you were +baptized. Wherefore, whether Odin or mortal man drew you to that +place, I have no doubt what power saved you." + +But Sigehelm thought that we had met with Satan himself in the +shape of the old god, and so also thought Guerir the hermit, who +told strange tales of like appearings among the Welsh hills where +he was born. + +As for Alfred the king, he marvelled, and said even as Neot. But he +added this: + +"I know the mine shaft well, and it is in my mind that some day +Odin's bones will be found at the bottom thereof. Nevertheless +there is more than mortal in what has happened to you by way of +trial." + +Now came the time when Guthrum and his thirty comrades should seek +the king, and I have no words to tell of that time when in the +peaceful church we heathen stood white-robed and unarmed altogether +at the font, while Sigehelm, with a wonderful gathering of priests, +enlisted us as warriors of the Cross. It was, as all men think, the +most mighty victory that Alfred had ever gained. + +At that time he chose Guthrum as his own son in the faith, and +named him Athelstan {xviii}, as the first and most noble stone +of the new building up of the church among the Danes. Neot would +not have our names changed, for he said we had wronged the faith in +them not at all. Odda stood for Osmund, as Neot for us. + +After that was joyous feasting, and the loosing of the chrism bands +at Alfred's royal town of Wedmore, whither we went in bright +procession through the long summer day. Four days we bided there, +till we knew that the great Danish host was on its march homewards, +and then Guthrum and his comrades must join it. But before he went +he accepted from Alfred the gifts that an under-king should take +from his overlord, and they were most splendid. All men knew by +those tokens given and taken that Alfred was king indeed, and that +Guthrum did but hold place by his sufferance. Those two parted in +wondrous friendship with the new bond of the faith woven round +them, and the host passed from Wessex and was gone. + +Yet, as ever, many a long year must pass by before the track of the +Danes should be blotted out from the fair land they had laid waste. +Everywhere was work to hand on burnt hall and homestead, ruined +church, and wasted monastery. There was nought that men grieved +over more than the burning of King Ine's church at Glastonbury, for +that had been the pride of all the land. Once, after the Chippenham +flight, the monks had dared to go out in sad procession to meet the +fierce raiders at the long dike that bars the way to Avalon, and +for that time they had won safety for the place--maybe by the loss +of their treasures given as ransom, or, as some say, by the power +of fearless and unarmed men; for there were men in the Danish host +whose minds were noble, and might well be touched thereby. But +Hubba's men could not be withheld after they had lost their mighty +leader, and the place must feel their fury of revenge. + +Now after the host was gone we went back to Taunton, and there +Alfred called together his Witan, that he might set all things in +order with their help; and at that time, before the levies were +dismissed, he bade me seek out such men as would take to the ships +as his paid seamen. Therein I had no hard task, for from the ruined +coast towns came seafarers, homeless and lonely, asking nought +better than to find a place in the king's fleet, and first of all +were the Parret-mouth men and my fisher of Wareham. Presently, with +one consent, the Witan made me leader of the king's Wessex sea +levies, offering me the rank and fee of an English ealdorman, with +power to demand help in the king's name from all sea-coast sheriffs +and port reeves in whatever was needed for the ships, being +answerable to the throne only for what I should do. And that I +accepted willingly for love of Alfred, who was my friend, and for +the sake of comradeship with those valiant men who had fought +beside me when Hubba fell, and at Edington. + +Then must I set myself to my new charge, having nought to do with +all the inland work that was before the king; and when the next +day's business was over, I went to tell him of this wish of mine, +and of some other matters that were on my mind whereof one may +easily guess. + +Alfred sat in his private chamber in the great house that King Ine +built, and on the table before him were a great ink horn and other +writing gear, and beside him sat on a low stool his chaplain, +reading to him out of a great book while the king wrote. The rough +horn cage wherein was a candle, that he had planned in wind-swept +Athelney, stood close at hand, against the time of dusk that was +near. Ever was Alfred planning things like this, even in his +greatest troubles; and therein he was wise, for it is not good to +keep the mind full of heavy things alone. Moreover, as we wondered +at his skilful devices in these little things, we took heart from +his cheerful pleasure in them. + +When the chamberlain brought me in, the great book was put aside, +and the pen set down, and the king looked up at me with his bright +smile. + +"Welcome, my ship thane," he said. "Come and sit here beside me. I +have somewhat to read to you." + +So I sat down wondering, and he turned back to some place in his +writing, and took the little knife that lay by him--for he had lost +his jewelled book staff in Athelney--and running its point along +the words, read to me from the writings of some old Roman what he +had been busy putting into good Saxon: + +"Now when the Roman folk would make a fleet hastily, and had no +rowers, nor time to train them rightly, they built stages like to +the oar benches of a ship in a certain lake, and so taught the men +the swing and catch of the long oars." + +"Will not that plan serve us, Ranald?" he said. + +"Ay, lord," I answered, laughing. "In good truth, if a man can +learn to keep time, and swing rightly, and back water, and the +like, on such a staging, it is somewhat. But it will be hard work +pulling against dead water from a stage that moves not. Nor will +there be the roll and plunge of waves that must be met." + +"Nor the sore sickness whereof Odda speaks," Alfred said, with his +eyes twinkling. "But I think that if the Romans found the plan +good, it will be so for us." + +So we talked of this for a while, and I will say now that in after +days we tried it, and the plan worked well enough, at least in the +saving of time. Alfred's book learning was ever used for the good +of his people, and this was but one way in which he found ready +counsel for them. + +This was pleasant talk enough, and neither I nor the king grew +weary thereof, but the good monk slept at last, and presently the +darkness fell, and Alfred dismissed him. + +One came and lit the torches on the wall, and still we spoke of my +work, until at last Alfred said: + +"So you must be busy, and I am glad. When will you set out, and +where will you go first?" + +Now what I wanted to ask him was where Osmund the jarl had gone. He +had ridden to Taunton from Aller, that he might be present at +Thora's christening, and that their chrism loosing {xix} might +be held at the same time; and I had looked to find both here, but +they were gone. Nor had they left any word for me, and I was +troubled about that. So I was about to tell the king what was in my +mind concerning Thora first of all, and my heart began to beat +strangely. But he waited not for me to answer him. + +"Stay," he said, smiling a little. "Before you go I must have a +hostage from my wild viking, lest he be, as it were, let loose on +the high seas where I cannot reach him." + +Then he laughed, at my puzzled face, I suppose, and I saw that he +had some jest that pleased him. + +"What hostage can I give, lord king?" I said. "Shall I leave Harek +and his harp with you?" + +"Harek would charm our ears, and would escape," Alfred answered. +"Nay, but I must give you house and lands for a home, and therein +you shall leave a fair wife, whose loneliness will bring you ashore +now and then." + +I thought there was more to come, and I liked not this at all, for +it went too closely with my fears of what might be. So I bowed, and +answered nothing as yet, while he looked laughingly at me. + +"Why," he cried, "half my thanes would have gone wild with joy if I +had promised them either half of what I have said I would give to +you. Are you so fond of the longships and the restless waves that +you will not be bound to the shore?" + +"Nay, my king," I said; "but I cannot yet rightly understand all +that you mean for me." + +"Well, it means that I must find you a rich wife, as I think I can. +What say you to that fair lady of Exeter town and Taunton--Odda's +daughter, Etheldreda?" + +"My king," I answered, somewhat over-gladly maybe, "Ethelnoth of +Somerset, my good comrade, might have some grudge against me if I +cast favouring eyes in that direction. Let this bide for a little +while, I pray you, King Alfred. Yet I would not have you think me +ungrateful, for indeed I know well what kindness is in your thought +for me." + +"Nay, but I have it in my mind that you were fond of going to +Taunton not so long since, and one might well think that a maiden's +hair drew you. Well, if Ethelnoth has outdone you there, I am sorry +for your sake, not his. Cheer up, nevertheless. There are more +maidens and well dowered in our broad Wessex coasts, and I am +minded to see how far you will obey your new overlord." + +"This is great kindness, King Alfred," I answered; "but we Northmen +are apt to keep some matters wherein to prove our freedom. I pray +you not to press this on me." + +"Faith," he said, as if to himself, "this viking might be in love +already, so wrathful grows he-- + +"Now, Ranald, it is true that I have set my mind on your wedding a +maiden who is rich, and dowered with a coast town, and a good +harbour, moreover, where you might keep all your ships under your +own eye. I would not have you disappoint me so soon." + +Then I said plainly, + +"King Alfred, I am loth to do so. But from the very first day that +I set foot in England there has been one maiden whose ways have +seemed to be bound up with my own, and I can wed none but her. If +it does not seem good to you that I should do so now, let me wait +till times have grown easier between Saxon and Dane. I think that +you may know well that I shall fight none the worse for you if I +must strive to win your consent." + +"That is straightforward," he said, smiling as if he would seem +content. "Let it be so. But it is only fair that before we close +this bargain you should see the well-dowered fair lady of whom I +speak." + +"I will do so if this matter is unknown to her," I answered, "else +would be trouble, perhaps, and discomfort. But it is of no use. I +have eyes and heart but for that one. Do I know the lady already, +perhaps?" + +"I believe that you may do so," Alfred said, looking grieved, in a +strange way, as if he were half minded to laugh at me for all his +seeming vexation. "Odda says that you do, and so also says +Etheldreda. Her name is Thora, daughter of Jarl Osmund, and she +will have Wareham town and Poole in right of her marriage, as dower +to her and to my sea captain." + +So spoke the king quickly, and then he could make pretence no +longer, but laughed joyously, putting his hands on my shoulders and +shaking me a little, while he cried: + +"Ay, Ranald; I did but play with you. True lover you are indeed, as +I thought. If you are faithful to the king as to the maiden of your +choice, both she and I are happy, and it is well." + +Then I knew not how to thank him; but he said that Etheldreda and +Odda, Heregar and the Lady Alswythe, and maybe Guthrum also, as +Thora's guardian, were to be thanked as well. + +"You have found many friends here in England already, Ranald my +cousin," Alfred said. "Wait until you meet some gathering of them +all at Wareham, presently perhaps, where Osmund and Thora are +preparing for a wedding--and then make a great thanking if you +will, and save words. But I wonder that I have never heard of this +matter from you before, for we have been close comrades." + +"You must have heard thereof today, my king," I answered; "and you +were but beforehand with me. I could speak of such things now that +peace has come. Yet I feared that you would be against my wedding a +Danish lady." + +"It was a natural thought," answered Alfred; "but Thora and Osmund +are ours, surely. Perhaps I should have doubted were your mind set +on any other. But I have no fears for you." + +Then he pondered a little, and went on: + +"You say that peace has come. So it has--for a time; and had we to +do only with the force that is in England now, I think it would +grow and strengthen. We cannot drive out the Danes, and there is +room in England for both them and us, and in the days to come the +difference of race will be forgotten--not in our time, Ranald, but +hereafter, as long years go by. Some day one of my line, if God +will, shall reign alone over a united England, stronger for the new +blood that has come among us. But it is a great charge that I give +to you, Ranald. What we have to fear are the new hosts that come +from Denmark, and only a strong fleet can stay them from our +shores. I can deal with those who are here, and these in time will +help me against fresh comers to the land. There is that in English +soil that makes every settler an Englishman in heart. But there is +warfare before us yet, and the fleet must break the force of the +storm, if it cannot altogether turn it aside." + +Then his grave voice changed, and he laughed. + +"Heavy things are these to speak in the ears of a bridegroom, but +you know all I mean. Now go your ways, and seek Odda, who will +rejoice to see you; for word comes from him that his master, Thord +the viking, is saying hard things to him because the men do not +come in readily to man the ships. At the summer's end I shall be in +Winchester, and thence I will come to Wareham to see the fleet, and +your wedding also. Go now, and all good go with you." + +So Alfred the king set me forth in brotherly wise, speaking on the +morrow to my men to bid them serve him and England well under me. +And after that all came to pass as the king had planned, and at the +summer's end there was a bright wedding for us in Wareham town, +while in the wide haven rode at anchor the best fleet that England +had ever seen. + +So that is how I came to be called "King Alfred's Viking," and made +this land my home. What this Wessex fleet of mine has done since +those days has been written by others in better words than I can +compass; and Harek, whom they call "King Alfred's Scald" nowadays, +has made song of what he has seen at my side in English waters; and +more he may have to make yet, for the North has not yet sent forth +all her hosts. Only I will say this, that if we have not been +altogether able to stay the coming of new Danish fleets to the long +seaboard that must needs lie open to them here and there till our +own fleets are greater, at least they know that the host may no +longer come and go as they will, for Alfred's ships have to be +reckoned with. + +Now of ourselves I will add that Thora and I have many friends, but +the best and closest are those whom we made in the days when Hubba +came and fell under the shadow of the Quantock Hills, and they do +not forget us. + +Into our house sometimes come Heregar and Ethered, Denewulf the +wise and humble, Odda, and many more, sure of welcome. Only the +loved presence of Neot the holy is wanting, for he died in Cornwall +in that year of the end of the troubles, and I think that in him I +lost more than any save Alfred himself. + +Osmund went back to East Anglia for a time, but there he grew +wearied with the wrangling of the Danish chiefs as they shared out +the new land between them; so he bides with us, finding all his +pleasure in the life of farm and field, which is ever near to the +heart of a Dane. With him goes old Thord, grumbling at the thralls +in strange sea language, and yet well loved. Not until he was +wounded sorely in a sea fight we had and won under the Isle of +Wight would he leave the war deck; but even now he is the first on +board when the ships come home, and he is the one who orders all +for winter quarters or for sailing. + +Now for long I would that I might look once more on Einar of the +Orkneys, my kind foster father, who still bided there in peace, +hearing of him now and then as some Norse ship, on her way to join +Rolf's fleet in the new land of the Northmen beyond our narrow +seas, put into our haven for repair, perhaps after the long voyage, +or to see if King Alfred would hire her men for a cruise against +the common foe--the Danes. And it was not until the news of his +death came thus to me that the home longing for the old lands +altogether left me; but since that day my thoughts have been, and +will be, for England only. I have no thought or wish that I were +sharer in Rolf's victories, nor have my comrades, Harek and Kolgrim +and Thord; for we have with Alfred more than the viking could have +given us. + +I suppose that in days to come out of this long strife shall be +wrought new strength and oneness for England, even as Alfred in his +wisdom foresees; but as yet sword Helmbiter must be kept sharp, and +the ships must be ever ready. But unless the wisdom of Alfred is +forgotten, there will never again be wanting a ship captain of +English race, as when I, a stranger, was called to the charge of +the king's ships in Wessex. The old love of the sea is waking in +the hearts of the sons of Hengist. + +Therefore I am content, for here have I found the sweetest wife, +and the noblest master, and the fairest land that man could wish. +And the fear of the old gods is taken from me, and to me has come +honour, and somewhat of the joy of victory in a good cause--the +cause of freedom and of peace. + +Now I write these things as springtime grows apace, and at any +time--today, or tomorrow, or next day--into our hall may come +Kolgrim my comrade, his scarred face bright with the light of +coming battle, to say that Danish ships are once more on the +gannet's path; and the sword of Sigurd will rattle in the golden +scabbard, and a great English cheer will come from the haven, for +King Alfred's ships are ready. + +The End. + + + +Notes. + + +i A Norse homestead consisted of several buildings--the great +hall standing alone and apart from the domestic arrangements. + +ii The Norse assembly, corresponding to a Saxon "Folkmote," or +representative council for a district. + +iii Unearthly. The trolls were the demons of the Northern +mythology. + +iv Byrnie, the close-fitting mail shirt. + +v The consecrated silver ring kept in the temple of the +district, and worn by the godar, or priest, at all assemblies where +it might be necessary to administer an oath. Odin, Frey, and Niord +were always called to witness an oath on this ring. + +vi God-rede = "good counsel," or "God's counsel," as Alfred +means "elves' counsel." + +vii Asser's "Life of Alfred." This illness never left the king +from his twentieth year to his death. Probably it was neuralgic, as +it seems to have been violent pain without lasting effect. + +viii This was called "prime signing," and was practically the +admission of the heathen as a catechumen. + +ix The "Havamal" was the Northern poem which practically +embodied the ancient code of morals and behaviour. + +x The use of bells was popular early in England, and not less +so because a freeman who could afford to build a church with a bell +tower became a thane in consequence. + +xi The national representative assembly, and origin of our +parliament. + +xii Now Normandy, and so called after Rolf's Northmen. + +xiii This charm against the "evil eye" was used in the west of +England until quite lately, and may still linger. The charm against +sprains is one yet recorded in the original tongue. + +xiv Alfred had Denewulf instructed, and made him Bishop of +Winchester. + +xv In 845 A.D. Bishop Eahlstan and the levies of Somerset and +Dorset defeated the first Danes who landed in Wessex, at the mouth +of the Parret. + +xvi Trading vessel, more heavily built than the swift +longships. + +xvii The "wild hunt" is still believed to pass over Cannington +and the Quantock Hills, the sounds of the migration of flocks of +sea fowl probably keeping the tradition alive. + +xviii Athelstan = "noble stone." + +xix Confirmation. + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's King Alfred's Viking, by Charles W. Whistler + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 14034 *** diff --git a/14034-h/14034-h.htm b/14034-h/14034-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..16b7ff7 --- /dev/null +++ b/14034-h/14034-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7376 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="CONTENT-TYPE" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8" /> +<title>King Alfred's Viking</title> + +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-top:70px; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + hr {height: 5px} + pre.toc { + margin-left: 4%; + font-size: 16pt; + font-weight: bold; + text-transform: uppercase + } + pre.verse {text-align: center; font-size: 10pt;} + p {text-indent: 4% } +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> +<div>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 14034 ***</div> + +<h1>King Alfred's Viking</h1> +<h2>A Story of the First English Fleet</h2> +<h2>by<br /> +Charles W. Whistler.</h2> +<hr /> +<h2>Contents</h2> +<pre class="toc"> + <a href="#Preface">Preface</a>. + <a href= +"#Chapter_I">Chapter I</a>. The Seeking of Sword Helmbiter. + <a href="#Chapter_II">Chapter II</a>. The Gifts of Two Heroes. + <a href= +"#Chapter_III">Chapter III</a>. Odda, the Ealdorman of Devon. + <a href="#Chapter_IV">Chapter IV</a>. Jarl Osmund's Daughter. + <a href="#Chapter_V">Chapter V</a>. Two Meetings in England. + <a href="#Chapter_VI">Chapter VI</a>. Alfred the King. + <a href="#Chapter_VII">Chapter VII</a>. The Pixies' Dance. +<a href="#Chapter_VIII">Chapter VIII</a>. The Black Twelfth-Night. + <a href="#Chapter_IX">Chapter IX</a>. The Sign of St. Cuthberht. + <a href="#Chapter_X">Chapter X</a>. Athelney and Combwich. + <a href="#Chapter_XI">Chapter XI</a>. The Winning of "The Raven." + <a href="#Chapter_XII">Chapter XII</a>. Edington Fight. +<a href="#Chapter_XIII">Chapter XIII</a>. The Greatest Victory. + <a href="#Chapter_XIV">Chapter XIV</a>. King Alfred's Will. + <a href="#Notes">Notes</a>. +</pre> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Preface" id="Preface">Preface</a>.</h2> +<p>The general details and course of events given in this story +are, so far as regards the private life and doings of King Alfred, +from his life as written by his chaplain, Asser. One or two further +incidents of the Athelney period are from the later +chroniclers--notably the sign given by St. Cuthberht--as are also +the names of the herdsman and the nobles in hiding in the fen.</p> +<p>That Alfred put his first fleet into the charge of "certain +Vikings" is well known, though the name of their chief is not +given. These Vikings would certainly be Norse, either detached from +the following of Rolf Ganger, who wintered in England in 875 A.D. +the year before his descent on Normandy; or else independent rovers +who, like Rolf, had been driven from Norway by the high-handed +methods of Harald Fairhair. Indeed, the time when a Norse +contingent was not present with the English forces, from this +period till at least that of the battle of Brunanburh in 947 A.D. +would probably be an exception.</p> +<p>There are, therefore, good historic grounds for the position +given to the hero of the story as leader of the newly-formed fleet. +The details of the burning of his supposed father's hall, and of +the Orkney period, are from the Sagas.</p> +<p>Much controversy has raged over the sites of Ethandune and the +landing place of Hubba at Kynwith Castle, owing probably to the +duplication of names in the district where the last campaign took +place. The story, therefore, follows the identifications given by +the late Bishop Clifford in "The Transactions of the Somerset +Archaeological Society" for 1875 and other years, as, both from +topographic and strategic points of view, no other coherent +identification seems possible.</p> +<p>The earthworks of the Danish position still remain on Edington +hill, that looks out from the Polden range over all the country of +Alfred's last refuge, and the bones of Hubba's men lie everywhere +under the turf where they made their last stand under the old walls +and earthworks of Combwich fort; and a lingering tradition yet +records the extermination of a Danish force in the neighbourhood. +Athelney needs but the cessation of today's drainage to revert in a +very few years to what it was in Alfred's time--an island, alder +covered, barely rising from fen and mere, and it needs but little +imagination to reproduce what Alfred saw when, from the same point +where one must needs be standing, he planned the final stroke that +his people believed was inspired directly from above.</p> +<p>It would seem evident from Alfred's method with Guthrum that he +realized that this king was but one among many leaders, and not +directly responsible for the breaking of the solemn peace sworn at +Exeter and Wareham. His position as King of East Anglia has gained +him an ill reputation in the pages of the later chronicles; but +neither Asser nor the <i>Anglo-Saxon Chronicle</i>--our best +authorities--blames him as they, for his contemporaries knew him to +be but a "host king," with no authority over newcomers or those who +did not choose to own allegiance to him.</p> +<p>Save in a few cases, where the original spelling preserves a +lost pronunciation, as in the first syllable of "Eadmund," the +modern and familiar forms of the names have been used in preference +to the constantly-varying forms given by the chroniclers. +Bridgwater has no Saxon equivalent, the town being known only as +"The Bridge" since the time when the Romans first fortified this +one crossing place of the Parret; and the name of the castle before +which Hubba fell varies from Cynuit through Kynwith to Kynwich, +whose equivalent the Combwich of today is. Guthrum's name is given +in many forms, from Gytro to Godramnus. Nor has it been thought +worth while to retain the original spelling AElfred, the ae +diphthong having been appropriated by us to an entirely new sound; +while our own pronunciation of the name slightly broadened as yet +in Wessex, is correct enough.</p> +<p>The exact relationship of St. Neot to Alfred, beyond that he was +a close kinsman, is very doubtful. He has been identified with a +brother, Athelstan of East Anglia, who is known to have retired to +Glastonbury; but there is no more than conjecture, and I have been +content with "cousinship."</p> +<p>C. W. Whistler</p> +<p>Stockland, 1898.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_I" id="Chapter_I">Chapter I</a>. The Seeking +of Sword Helmbiter.</h2> +<p>Men call me "King Alfred's Viking," and I think that I may be +proud of that name; for surely to be trusted by such a king is +honour enough for any man, whether freeman or thrall, noble or +churl. Maybe I had rather be called by that name than by that which +was mine when I came to England, though it was a good title enough +that men gave me, if it meant less than it seemed. For being the +son of Vemund, king of Southmereland in Norway, I was hailed as +king when first I took command of a ship of my own. Sea king, +therefore, was I, Ranald Vemundsson, but my kingdom was but over +ship and men, the circle of wide sea round me was nought that I +could rule over, if I might seem to conquer the waves by the +kingship of good seaman's craft.</p> +<p>One may ask how I came to lose my father's kingdom, which should +have been mine, and at last to be content with a simple English +earldom; or how it was that a viking could be useful to Alfred, the +wise king. So I will tell the first at once, and the rest may be +learned from what comes after.</p> +<p>If one speaks to me of Norway, straightway into my mind comes +the remembrance of the glare of a burning hall, of the shouts of +savage warriors, and of the cries of the womenfolk, among whom I, a +ten-year-old boy, was when Harald Fairhair sent the great Jarl +Rognvald and his men to make an end of Vemund, my father. For +Harald had sworn a great oath to subdue all the lesser kings in the +land and rule there alone, like Gorm in Denmark and Eirik in +Sweden. So my father's turn came, and as he feasted with his ninety +stout courtmen, the jarl landed under cover of the dark and fell on +him, surrounding the house and firing it. Then was fierce fighting +as my father and his men sallied again and again from the doors and +were driven back, until the high roof fell in and there was a +sudden silence, and an end.</p> +<p>Then in the silence came my mother's voice from where she stood +on the balcony of the living house across the garth <a name= +"EndNote1anc" href="#EndNote1sym" id= +"EndNote1anc"><sup>{i}</sup></a>. I mind that she neither wept nor +shrieked as did the women round her, and her voice was clear and +strong over the roaring of the flames. I mind, too, the flash of +helms and armour as every man turned to look on her who spoke.</p> +<p>"Coward and nidring art thou, Rognvald, who dared not meet +Vemund, my husband, in open field, but must slay him thus. Ill may +all things go with thee, till thou knowest what a burning hall is +like for thyself. I rede thee to the open hillside ever, rather +than come beneath a roof; for as thou hast wrought this night, so +shall others do to thee."</p> +<p>Then rose a growl of wrath from Rognvald's men, but the great +Jarl bade them cease, and harm none in all the place. So he went +down to his ships with no more words and men said that he was ill +at ease and little content, for he had lost as many men as he had +slain, so stoutly fought my father and our courtmen, and had earned +a curse, moreover, which would make his nights uneasy for long +enough.</p> +<p>Then as he went my mother bade me look well at him, that in days +to come I might know on whom to avenge my father's death. After +that she went to her own lands in the south, for she was a jarl's +daughter, and very rich.</p> +<p>Not long thereafter Harald Fairhair won all the land, and then +began the trouble of ruling it; and men began to leave Norway +because of the new laws, which seemed hard on them, though they +were good enough.</p> +<p>Now two of Jarl Rognvald's sons had been good friends of my +father before these troubles began, and one, Sigurd, had been lord +over the Orkney Islands, and had died there. The other, Jarl Einar, +fell out with Rognvald, his father, and we heard that he would take +to the viking path, and go to the Orkneys, to win back the jarldom +that Sigurd's death had left as a prey to masterless men and +pirates of all sorts. So my mother took me to him, and asked him +for the sake of old friendship to give me a place in his ship; for +I was fourteen now, and well able to handle weapons, being strong +and tall for my age, as were many of the sons of the old kingly +stocks.</p> +<p>So Einar took me, having had no part in his father's doings +towards us, and hating them moreover. He promised to do all that he +might towards making a good warrior and seaman of me; and he was +ever thereafter as a foster father to me, for my own had died in +the hall with Vemund. It was his wish to make amends thus, if he +could, for the loss his folk had caused me.</p> +<p>Of the next five years I need speak little, for in them I +learned the viking's craft well. We won the Orkneys from those who +held them, and my first fight was in Einar's ship, against two of +the viking's vessels. After that we dwelt in Sigurd's great house +in Kirkwall, and made many raids on the Sutherland and Caithness +shores. I saw some hard fighting there, for the Scots are no babes +at weapon play.</p> +<p>Then when I was nineteen, and a good leader, as they said, the +words that my mother spoke to Jarl Rognvald came true, and he died +even as he had slain my father.</p> +<p>For Halfdan and Gudrod, Harald Fairhair's sons, deeming that the +Jarl stood in their way to power in Norway, burned him in his hall +by night, and so my feud was at an end. But the king would in +nowise forgive his sons for the slaying of his friend, and outlawed +them. Whereon Halfdan came and fell on us in the Orkneys; and that +was unlucky for him, for we beat him, and Jarl Einar avenged on him +his father's death.</p> +<p>Now through this it came to pass that I saw Norway for the last +time, for I went thither in Einar's best ship to learn if Harald +meant to make the Orkneys pay for the death of his son--which was +likely, for a son is a son even though he be an outlaw.</p> +<p>So I came to my mother's place first of all, and full of joy and +pleasant thoughts was I as we sailed into the well-remembered fiord +to seek the little town at its head. And when we came there, nought +but bitterest sorrow and wrath was ours; for the town was a black +heap of ruin, and the few men who were left showed me where the +kindly hands of the hill folk had laid my mother, the queen, in a +little mound, after the Danish vikings, who had fallen suddenly on +the place with fire and sword, had gone. They had grown thus bold +because the great jarl was dead, and the king's sons had left the +land without defence.</p> +<p>There I swore vengeance for this on every viking of Danish race +that I might fall in with; for I was wild with grief and rage, as +one might suppose. I set up a stone over the grave of my mother, +graving runes thereon that should tell who she was and also who +raised it; for I was skilled in the runic lore, having learned much +from one of Einar's older men who had known my father.</p> +<p>Thereafter we cruised among the islands northwards until we +learned that Harald was indeed upon us, and then I saw my last of +Norway as we headed south again, and the last hilltop sank beneath +the sea's rim astern of us. I did not know that so it would be at +that time--it is well that one sees not far into things to +come--but even now all my home seemed to be with Einar; and that +also was not to last long, as things went. How that came about I +must tell, for the end was that I came to Alfred the king.</p> +<p>When we came back to Kirkwall, I told the jarl all that I had +done and learned; and grieved for me he was when he heard of my +mother's death. Many things he said to me at that time which made +him dearer to me. Then after a while he spoke of Harald, who, as it +seemed, might come at any time.</p> +<p>"We cannot fight Norway," he said, "so we must even flit hence +to the mainland and wait until Harald is tired of seeking us. It is +in my mind that he seeks not so much for revenge as for payment of +scatt from our islands. Now he has a reason for taking it by force. +He will seek to fine us, and then make plans by which I shall hold +the jarldom from him for yearly dues."</p> +<p>So he straightway called the Thing <a class="EndNoteanc" +name="EndNote2anc" href="#EndNote2sym" id= +"EndNote2anc"><sup>{ii}</sup></a> of all the Orkney folk, who +loved him well, and put the matter before them; and they set to +work and did his bidding, driving the cattle inland and scattering +them, and making the town look as poor as they might.</p> +<p>Then in three days' time we sailed away laughing; for none but +poor-looking traders were left, and no man would think that never +had the Orkneys been so rich as in Einar's time. And he bade them +make peace with the king when he came, and told them that so all +would be well, for Harald would lay no heavy weregild on so poor a +place for his son's slaying.</p> +<p>Southward we went to Caithness, and so westward along the +Sutherland coast; for we had taken no scatt there for this year, +and Einar would use this cruise to do so, seeing that we must put +to sea. We were not the first who had laid these shores under rule +from the Orkneys, for Jarl Sigurd had conquered them, meeting his +death at last in a Sutherland firth, after victory, in a strange +way.</p> +<p>He fought with a Scottish chief named Melbrigda of the Tusks, +and slew him, and bore back his head to the ships at his saddle +bow. Then the great teeth of the chief swung against the jarl's leg +and wounded it, and of that he died, and so was laid in a great +mound at the head of the firth where his ships lay. After that, the +Orkneys were a nest of evil vikings till we came.</p> +<p>So it had happened that, from the time when it was made over +him, Jarl Sigurd's mound had been untended, for we ourselves had +never been so far south as this firth before. Indeed, it had been +so laid waste by Sigurd's men after his death that there was nought +to go there for. But at this time we had reason for getting into +some quiet, unsought place where we should not be likely to be +heard of, for the king had over-many ships and men for us to meet. +So after a week's cruising we put into that firth, and anchored in +the shelter of its hills.</p> +<p>There is no man of all our following who will forget that day, +because of what happened almost as soon as the anchor held. It was +very hot that morning, and what breeze had been out in the open sea +was kept from us now by the hills, so that for some miles we had +rowed the ships up the winding reaches of the firth; and then, as +we laid in the oars and the anchorage was reached, there crept from +inland a dim haze over the sun, dimming the light, and making all +things look strange among the mountains. Then the sounds of the +ships seemed to echo loudly over the still water and when all the +bustle of anchoring was over, the stillness seemed yet greater, for +the men went to their meals, and for a while spoke little.</p> +<p>Einar and I sat on his after deck under the awning, and spoke in +low voices, as if afraid to raise our tones.</p> +<p>"There is a thunderstorm about," I said.</p> +<p>"Ay--listen," the jarl answered.</p> +<p>Then I heard among the hills, far up the firth beyond us, a +strange sound that seemed to draw nearer, like and yet unlike +thunder, roaring and jarring ever closer to us, till it was all +around us and beneath us everywhere, and our very hearts seemed to +stop beating in wonder.</p> +<p>Then of a sudden the ship was smitten from under the keel with a +heavy, soundless blow, and the waters of the firth ebbed and flowed +fiercely about us; and then the sound passed on and down the firth +swiftly and strangely as it had come, and left us rocking on the +troubled waters that plashed and broke along the rocks of the +shore, while the still, thick air seemed full of the screams of the +terrified eagles and sea birds that had left them.</p> +<p>"Odin defend us!" the jarl said; "what is this?"</p> +<p>I shook my head, looking at him, and wondering if my face was +white and scared as his and that of every man whom I could see.</p> +<p>Now we waited breathless for more to come, but all was quiet +again. The birds went back to their eyries, and the troubled water +was still. Then presently our fears passed enough to let us speak +with one another; and then there were voices enough, for every man +wished to hear his own again, that courage might return.</p> +<p>Then a man from the Orkneys who had been with Jarl Sigurd came +aft to us, and stood at the break of the deck to speak with +Einar.</p> +<p>"Jarl," he said, almost under his breath, "it is in my mind that +Sigurd, your brother, is wroth because his mound has been untended +since we made it."</p> +<p>Then Einar said:</p> +<p>"Was it so ill made that it needs tending?"</p> +<p>"It was well made, jarl; but rain and frost and sun on a +new-made mound may have wrought harm to it. Or maybe he thinks that +enough honour has not been paid him. He was a great warrior, jarl, +and perhaps would have more sacrifice, and a remembrance cup drunk +by his own brother at his grave."</p> +<p>Now this man's name was Thord, the same who taught me runes--a +good seaman and leader of men, and one who was held to be wise in +more matters than most folk. So his word was to be listened to.</p> +<p>"You know more of these matters than I, Thord," Einar answered. +"Is it possible that Sigurd could work this?"</p> +<p>"Who knows what a dead chief of might cannot work?" Thord said. +"I think it certain that Sigurd is angry for some reason; and +little luck shall we have if we do not appease his spirit."</p> +<p>Then the jarl looked troubled, as well he might, for to go near +the mound that held an angry ghost was no light matter. It lay far +up the firth, Thord said, and the ships could not go so far. But +Einar was very brave, and when he had thought for a little while he +said:</p> +<p>"Well, then, I will take boat and go to Sigurd's mound and see +if he ails aught. Will any man come with me, however?"</p> +<p>I liked not the errand, as may be supposed, but I could not +leave my foster father to go alone.</p> +<p>"I will be with you," I said. "Will not Thord come also?"</p> +<p>"Ay," the grim Orkney man answered.</p> +<p>Now all our crew were listening to us, and I looked down the +long gangways by chance, and when I did so no man would meet my +eye. They feared lest they should be made to go to this haunted +place, as it seemed--all but one man, who sat on the mast step +swinging his feet. This was Kolgrim the Tall, the captain of the +fore deck, a young man and of few words, but a terrible swordsman, +and knowing much of sea craft. And when this man saw that I looked +at him, he nodded a little and smiled, for he had been a friend of +mine since I had first come to Einar.</p> +<p>"Two men to row the boat will be enough, jarl," I said. "Kolgrim +yonder will come with us."</p> +<p>"Well," the jarl answered, "maybe four of us are enough. We +shall not fright Sigurd with more, and maybe would find it hard to +get them to come."</p> +<p>So he called Kolgrim, and he said that he would go with us, and +went to get the boat alongside without more words.</p> +<p>Then the jarl and I and Thord armed ourselves--for a warrior +should be met by warriors. The men were very silent, whispering +among themselves, until the jarl was ready and spoke to them.</p> +<p>"Have no fear for us," he said. "Doubtless my brother needs +somewhat, and calls me. I am going to find out what it is and +return."</p> +<p>So we pushed off, Thord and Kolgrim rowing. It was strange to +look back, as we went, on the ships, for not a soul stirred on +board them, as it seemed, so intently were we watched; and the +water was like a sheet of steel under them, so that they were +doubled.</p> +<p>Presently they were hidden as we rounded a turn in the firth, +and we were alone among the hills, and the lonesomeness was very +great. There was no dwelling anywhere along the shores, nor in the +deep glens that came down to them, each with its noisy burn falling +along it. Once I saw deer feeding far up at the head of a valley +that opened out, but they and the eagles were the only living +things we could see beside the loons that swam and dived silently +as we neared them.</p> +<p>The silence and the heat weighed on us, and we went for a mile +or more without a word. Then we turned into the last reach of the +water, and saw Sigurd's mound beside its edge at the very head of +the firth, where the hills came round in a circle that was broken +only by the narrow waters and the valley that went beyond them +among the mountains. It was a fitting resting place for one who +would sleep in loneliness; but I thought that I had rather lie +where I could look out on the sea I loved, and see the long ships +pass and the white waves break beneath me.</p> +<p>Now all seemed very peaceful here in the hot haze that brooded +over the still mountains, and there seemed to be nought to fear. We +drew swiftly up to the mound, with the plash of oars only to break +the silence, and there was nought amiss that we could see. They had +made it on a little flat tongue of land that jutted from the +mountain's foot into the deep water, so that on two sides the mound +was close to its edge. So we pulled on softly round the tongue of +land, being maybe about fifty paces from the mound across the +water. And when we saw the other side of Sigurd's resting place, +the oars stayed suddenly, and the jarl, who held the tiller, swung +the boat away from the shore, and I think I knew then what fear +was.</p> +<p>The mound was open. There was a wide, brown scar, as of +freshly-moved earth, across its base, reaching from the level to +six or eight feet of its height, as though half the grass-grown +side had been shorn away by a sword cut; and in the midst of that +scar was a doorway, open to the grave's heart, low and stone built. +Some of the earth that had fallen lay before it on the water's +edge, but the rest was doubtless in the water, for there was but a +narrow path between bank and mound.</p> +<p>At that sight we stared, thinking we should surely see the grim +form of Sigurd loom gigantic and troll-like <a name= +"EndNote3anc" href="#EndNote3sym" id= +"EndNote3anc"><sup>{iii}</sup></a> across the doorway; and the +jarl half rose from his seat beside me, and cried out with a great +voice:</p> +<p>"Sigurd--my brother!"</p> +<p>I think he knew not what or why he cried thus, for he sank back +into his place and swayed against me, while his cry rang loud among +the hills, and the eagles answered it.</p> +<p>And I grasped my sword hilt, as one does in some sudden terror, +staring at the open mound; while old Thord muttered spells against +I know not what, and Kolgrim looked at me, pale and motionless.</p> +<p>Then came the sharp, mocking cry of a diver, that rang +strangely; and at once, without order. Thord dug his oar blade into +the water and swung the boat round, and when once Kolgrim's back +was towards that he feared, he held water strongly and then the +boat was about, and we were flying from the place towards the +ships, before we knew what was being done, panic stricken.</p> +<p>But Einar said never a word, and the two rowers slackened their +pace only when the bend of the firth hid the mound from our +sight.</p> +<p>Then said I, finding that Einar spoke not:</p> +<p>"What are we flying from? there was nought to harm us."</p> +<p>For I began to be ashamed. Thereat Kolgrim stopped rowing, and +Thord must needs do likewise, though he said:</p> +<p>"It is ill for us to stay here. The dead jarl is very +wroth."</p> +<p>"I saw nought to fray us; the cry we heard was but that of a +loon."</p> +<p>But Thord shook his head. The silence of the place had made all +things seem strange, with the dull light that was over us, and the +great heat among the towering hills.</p> +<p>"The mound was freshly opened," he said. "I saw earth crumbling +even yet from the broken side. The blow we felt was that which +Sigurd struck when he broke free."</p> +<p>Then at last Einar spoke, and his voice was strange:</p> +<p>"I have left my brother unhonoured, and he is angry. What must +be done?"</p> +<p>Now I cannot tell what hardiness took hold of me, but it seemed +that I must needs go back and see more of this. I was drawn to do +so, as a thing they fear will make some men long to face it and +know its worst, not as if they dared so much as when they must.</p> +<p>"I think we should have waited to ask Sigurd that," I said; and +Einar looked strangely at me.</p> +<p>"Would you have us return?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Why not?" said I. "If the great jarl has called us as it seems, +needs must that we know what he wills."</p> +<p>Then said Thord:</p> +<p>"I helped to lay him in that place, and I mind how he looked at +that time. Somewhat we left undone, doubtless. I dare not go +back."</p> +<p>Einar looked at the hills, leaning his chin on his hand, and +said slowly, when Thord had done:</p> +<p>"That is the first time Thord has said 'I dare not.' Now I would +that I had stayed to fight Harald and fall under his sword before. +I too must say the same. I have left my brother unhonoured, and I +dare not go back."</p> +<p>Pale and drawn the jarl's face was, and I knew he meant what he +said. Nevertheless it seemed to me that some one must know what +Sigurd willed.</p> +<p>"Jarl Einar," I said, "this is a strange business, and one +cannot tell what it means. Now Sigurd was my father's close friend, +and I have had nought to do with him. I will go back, therefore, +and learn what I can of him. I think he will not harm me, for he +has no reason to do so. Moreover if he does, none will learn what +he needs."</p> +<p>"I have heard," said Thord, "that a good warrior may ask what he +will of a dead hero, so that he shows no fear and is a friend. If +his courage fails, however, then he will be surely destroyed."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"I have no cause to fear Sigurd, save that he is a ghost. I do +not know if I fear him as such; that is to be seen."</p> +<p>Now Einar laid his hand on mine and spoke gravely:</p> +<p>"I think it is a hero's part to do what you say. If you go back +and return in safety, the scalds will sing of you for many a long +day. Go, therefore, boldly; this is not a matter from which you +should be held back, as it has come into your mind."</p> +<p>Then said Thord:</p> +<p>"It will be well to ask Sigurd for a token whereby we may know +that he sends messages by you."</p> +<p>And Einar said on that:</p> +<p>"In Sigurd's hand is his sword Helmbiter. I think he will give +that to the man who dares speak to him, for he will know that it +goes into brave hands. Ask him for it bravely."</p> +<p>"Put me ashore, therefore, before my courage goes," I said; and +they pulled the boat to the bank where I could step on a rock and +so to shore. And when I was there, Kolgrim rose up and followed me +without a word.</p> +<p>"Bide here for two hours, jarl, and maybe I will return in that +time," I said. "Farewell."</p> +<p>So I turned away as they answered me, thinking that Kolgrim held +the boat's painter. But he came after me, and I spoke to him:</p> +<p>"Why, Kolgrim, will you come also?"</p> +<p>"You shall not go alone, Ranald the king's son; I will come with +you as far as I dare."</p> +<p>"That is well," I answered, and with that wasted no more words, +but climbed the hillside a little, and then went steadily towards +where the mound was, with Kolgrim close at my shoulder, and the +jarl and Thord looking fixedly after us till we were out of +sight.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_II" id="Chapter_II">Chapter II</a>. The Gifts +of Two Heroes.</h2> +<p>I will not say that my steps did not falter when we came to +whence we could see the mound. But it was lonely and still and +silent; no shape of warrior waited our coming.</p> +<p>"Almost do I fear to go nearer," said Kolgrim.</p> +<p>"Put fear away, comrade," said I; "we shall fare ill if we turn +our backs now."</p> +<p>"Where you go I go," he answered, "though I am afraid."</p> +<p>"The next best thing to not being afraid is to be afraid and not +to show it," I said then, comforting myself also with a show of +wisdom at least. "Maybe fear is the worst thing we have to face."</p> +<p>So we went on more swiftly, and at last were on the tongue of +land on the tip of which the mound stood. Still, since we could not +see the open doorway, which was towards the water, the place seemed +not so terrible. Yet I thought that by this time we should have +seen Sigurd, or maybe heard his voice from the tomb. So now I dared +to call softly:</p> +<p>"Jarl Sigurd, here is one, a friend's son, who will learn what +you will."</p> +<p>My voice seemed to fill all the ring of mountains with echoes, +but there was no answer. All was still again when the last voice +came back from the hillsides.</p> +<p>Then I went nearer yet, and passed to the waterside, where I +could look slantwise across the doorway. And again I called, and +waited for an answer that did not come.</p> +<p>"It seems that I must go even to the door, and maybe into the +mound," I said, whispering.</p> +<p>"Not inside," said Kolgrim, taking hold of my arm.</p> +<p>But I had grown bolder with the thought that the hero seemed not +angry, and now I had set my heart on winning the sword of which the +jarl had told me, and I thought that I dared go even inside the +tomb to speak with Sigurd.</p> +<p>"Bide here, and I will go at least to the door," said I.</p> +<p>So I stepped boldly before it, standing on the heap of +newly-fallen earth that had slipped from across it. The posts and +lintel of the door were of stone slabs such as lay everywhere on +the hillsides, and I stood so close that I could touch them. The +doorway was not so high that I could see into it without stooping, +for it was partly choked with the fallen earth, and I bent to look +in. But I could only see for a few feet into the passage, as I +looked from light to darkness.</p> +<p>"Ho, Jarl Sigurd! what would you? Why have you opened your door +thus?"</p> +<p>Very hollow my voice sounded, and that was all.</p> +<p>"Sigurd of Orkney--Sigurd, son of Rognvald--I am the son of +Vemund your friend. Speak to me!"</p> +<p>There was no answer. A bit of earth crumbled from the broken +side of the mound and made me start, but I saw nothing. So I +stepped away from the door and back to my comrade, who had edged +nearer the place, though his face showed that he feared +greatly.</p> +<p>"I think that the mound has been rifled," I said. "Sigurd would +have us know it and take revenge."</p> +<p>"No man has dared to go near that doorway till you came, Ranald +Vemundsson," Kolgrim answered. "Now I fear that he plans to lure +you into the mound, and slay you there without light to help you. +Go no further, maybe you will be closed up with the ghost."</p> +<p>That was not pleasant to think of, but I had seen nought to make +me fear to go in. There was no such unearthly light shining within +the mound as I had heard of in many tales of those who sought to +speak with dead chiefs.</p> +<p>"Well, I am going in," I said stoutly; "but do you hide here, +and make some noise that I may know you are near me. It is the +silence that frays me.</p> +<p>"What can I do?" he said. "I know no runes that are of avail. It +would be ill to disturb this place with idle sounds."</p> +<p>That seemed right, but I thought I could not bear the +silence--silence of the grave. I must know that he was close at +hand. Then a thought came to me, and I unfastened the +silver-mounted whetstone that hung from my belt and gave it +him.</p> +<p>"Whet your sword edge sharply," I said. "That is a sound a hero +loves, for it speaks of deeds to be done."</p> +<p>"Ay, that is no idle sound," he said, and drew his sword gladly. +The haft of the well-known blade brought the light into his eyes +again. I drew my own sword also.</p> +<p>"If you need me, call, and I think I shall not fail you," he +whispered. "It shall not be said that I failed you in peril."</p> +<p>"I know it," I answered, putting my hand on his shoulder.</p> +<p>Then I went boldly, and stepped into the passage. The whetstone +sang shrill on the sword edge as it kissed the steel behind me, and +the sound was good to hear as I went into darkness with my weapon +ready.</p> +<p>I half feared that my first step would be my last, but it was +made in safety. Very black seemed the low stone-walled passage +before me, and I had to stoop as I went on, feeling with my left +hand along the wall. The way was so narrow that little light could +pass my body, and therefore it seemed to grow darker as I went +deeper into the mound's heart.</p> +<p>Five steps I took, and then my outstretched hand was on the post +that ended the passage, and beyond that I felt nothing. I had come +to the inner doorway, and before me was the place where Sigurd lay. +Yet no fiery eyes glared on me, and nothing stirred. The air was +heavy with a scent as of peat, and the sound of the whetstone +seemed loud as I stood peering into the darkness.</p> +<p>I moved forward, and somewhat rattled under my foot, and I +started. Then my fear left me altogether, for I had trodden on dry +bones, and shuddered at the first touch of them in that place. I +had faced fear, and had overcome it; maybe it was desperation that +made me cool then, for it was certain now that I must be slain or +else victor over I knew not what.</p> +<p>So I took one pace forward into the chamber, and stood aside +from the doorway; and the grey light from the passage came in and +filled all the place, so that it fell first on him whom I had come +to seek--Jarl Sigurd of Orkney.</p> +<p>And when I saw, a great awe fell upon me, and a sadness, but no +terror; and in my heart I would that hereafter I might rest as +slept the hero where the hands that had loved him had placed +him.</p> +<p>Into the silent place came once more with me the clank of mail +and weapons that he had loved, and from without the song of the +keen sword edge whispered to him; but these could not wake him. +Peacefully he seemed to sleep as I stood by his side, and I thought +that I should take back no word of his to the jarl, his brother, +whom both he and I loved.</p> +<p>They had brought the great carven chair on which he was wont to +sit on his ship's quarterdeck, and thereon had set the jarl, as +though he yet lived, and did but sleep as he sat from weariness +after fight, with helm and mail upon him. Shield and axe rested on +either side of him, ready to hand, against the chair; and behind +him, along the wall, were his spears, ashen shafted and rune +graven.</p> +<p>His blue, fur-trimmed cloak was round him, and before him was a +little table, heavy and carved, whereon were vessels for food, +empty now save for dust that showed that they had been full. And +across his knees was his sword, golden hilted, with a great yellow +cairngorm in the pommel, and with gold-wrought patterns from end to +end of the scabbard--such a sword as I had never seen before. His +right hand held the hilt, and his left rested on the shield's rim +beside him; and so Sigurd slept with his head bowed on his breast, +waiting for Ragnaroek and the last great fight of all.</p> +<p>The light seemed to grow stronger as I looked, or my eyes grew +used to it, and then I saw that the narrow chamber was full of +things, though I minded them afterwards, for now I was as in a +dream, noting only the jarl himself. Costly stuffs were on the +floor, and mail and helms and more weapons. Gold work there was +also, and in one corner lay the dried-up body of a great wolf +hound, coiled as in sleep where it had been chained. Another had +been tied by the passage doorway, where I had stepped on it; and +below a spar that stood across a corner lay a tumbled heap of +feathers that had been a falcon.</p> +<p>Many more things there were maybe, but this I saw at last--that +the jarl's right foot rested on the skull of a man whose teeth had +been long and tusk-like. It was the head of the Scot whose teeth +had been his death.</p> +<p>Now the sword drew my eyes, for Einar bade me ask for it, else I +think I had gone softly hence without a word, so peaceful seemed +the dead. And as I looked again, I saw that the hand holding the +hilt was dry and brown and shrunken, so that one might see all the +bones through the skin, and at first I was afraid to ask.</p> +<p>At last I said, and my mouth was dry:</p> +<p>"Jarl Einar, your brother, bids me ask for sword Helmbiter, +great Sigurd. Let me take it, that he may know how you rest in +peace."</p> +<p>But Sigurd stirred not nor spoke; and slowly I put out my hand +on the sword to take it very gently, but his grasp was yet firm on +it. Then, as I bent to see if it had tightened when I would draw +the sword away, I could see beneath the helm the face of the dead, +shrunken indeed and brown, but as of one at rest and beyond +anger.</p> +<p>Once more then I took the jarl's sword in my right hand, and +raised his hand with my left, putting my own weapon by against the +wall. And then the hilt slipped from the half-open fingers, and the +sword was mine, and my hand held the jarl's. And it seemed to me +that he gave it me, and that I must thank him for such a gift. The +sword though it was sheathed, was not girt to him, and its +golden-studded belt was twisted about it, and it was no imperfect +giving.</p> +<p>So I spoke in a low voice:</p> +<p>"Jarl Sigurd, I thank you. If my might is aught, the sword will +be used as you would have used it. Surely I will say to Einar that +you rest in peace, and we will come here and close your mound again +in all honour."</p> +<p>I set back his hand then, and it seemed empty and helpless, not +as a warrior's should be. So I ungirt my own weapon--a good plain +sword that I had won from a viking in Caithness--and laid it in the +place of that he had given me. And as I put the thin fingers on its +hilt, almost thinking that they would chose around it, a ring +slipped from them into my hand, as if he would give that also, and +I kept it therefore.</p> +<p>Then for a minute I stood before Jarl Sigurd, waiting to see if +he had any word; but when he spoke not, I lifted the sword and +saluted him.</p> +<p>"Skoal to Jarl Sigurd; rest in peace, and farewell."</p> +<p>Then I went forth softly, and came out into sunshine; for the +wind was singing round the hilltops, and the dun mist had gone. +Then I was ware that the sound of the stone on the sword edge had +long ceased, and I looked for Kolgrim.</p> +<p>He was lying on the grass in the place where I had left him, but +he was on his face, and the sword and whetstone were flung aside +from him. At first I feared that he had been in some way slain +because of his terror; but when I came near, I saw that his +shoulders heaved as if he wept. Then I stood over him, treading +softly.</p> +<p>"Kolgrim," I said.</p> +<p>At that he looked up, and a great light came into his face, and +he sprang to his feet and threw his arms round me, weeping, yet +with a strong man's weeping that does but come from bitter +grief.</p> +<p>"Master," he cried, "O master I thought you lost--and I dared +not follow you."</p> +<p>"I have met with no peril," I said, "nor have I been long +gone."</p> +<p>"More than two hours, master, have you been in that place--two +long hours. See how the sun has sunk since you left me!"</p> +<p>So indeed it seemed, though I knew not that I had been so long. +I had stayed still and gazed on that strange sight without stirring +for what seemed but a little while. Yet I had thought long thoughts +in that time, and I mind every single thing in that dim chamber, +even to the markings on the stones that made its walls and roof and +floor.</p> +<p>"See," I said, "Jarl Sigurd has given me the sword!"</p> +<p>Kolgrim gazed in wonder. There was no speck of dust on the broad +blade as I drew it, and the waving lines of the dwarf-wrought steel +and gold-inlaid runes were clear and bright along its middle for +half its length. For the mound was very dry, and they had covered +all the chamber with peat before piling the earth over it.</p> +<p>"Let us go back to Jarl Einar; he will fear for us," I said, +sheathing the sword and girding it to me.</p> +<p>So we went across the meadow, and even as we went a blast of +cold wind came from, over the mountains, and with it whirled the +black thunderclouds of the storm that had been gathering all day. +We ran to an overhanging rock on the hillside and crept beneath it, +while the thunder crashed and the lightning struck from side to +side of the firth, and smote the wind-swept water that was white +with foam.</p> +<p>"Master," said Kolgrim, "the Jarl Sigurd is wroth; he repents +the sword gift."</p> +<p>But I did not think that he had aught to do with this. For, as +any hill-bred man could tell, the storm had been brewing in the +heat, and was bound to come, and would pass to and fro among the +hills till it was worn out.</p> +<p>Nevertheless, when it passed away in pouring rain that swept +like a hanging sheet of moving mist down the glens from the +half-hidden mountains, and the sun shone out brightly again over +the clear-cut purple hillsides and rippling water, I looked at the +mound in wonder. For it was closed. We had sought shelter in a +place near that whence we saw the mound in coming, and could see +the fallen side, though not the doorway, looking across its front. +And now the slope of the bank seemed to have been made afresh, as +on the day when Sigurd had been closed in, years ago. None could +say, save those who had seen it, where the opening into the +grave-chamber might be.</p> +<p>Now both the opening and closing of Sigurd's grave mound seem +very strange to me. Thord and the scalds will have it that he +himself wrought both. As for me, I know not. In after days I told +this to Alfred the king when he wondered at my sword, and he said +that he thought an earthquake opened and washing rain closed the +mound, but that it happened strangely for me. I cannot gainsay his +wise words, and I will leave the matter so.</p> +<p>Thereafter Kolgrim and I went back to Einar, who yet waited for +us. Glad was he to see us return in safety; but both he and Thord +were speechless when they saw the jarl's sword girt to me and the +jarl's golden ring on my hand. Neither they nor any one else will +believe that I met with no peril; and the tale that the scalds made +hereafter of the matter is over wonderful, in spite of all I may +say. For they think it but right that I should not be over boastful +of my deeds.</p> +<p>But Jarl Einar looked on sword and ring, and said:</p> +<p>"Well have you won these gifts. My brother is in peace in his +resting place now. I hold that he called for you."</p> +<p>So we went back to the ships, and there for many days the men +stared at Kolgrim and me strangely. They say I was very silent for +long, and it is likely enough. Moreover, Einar was wont to say that +I seemed five years older from that day forward.</p> +<p>We went no more to the place of the mound, for it seemed to need +no care of earthly hands. Nor were any wishing to go to so awesome +a place, and we left the firth next day, for the men waxed uneasy +there.</p> +<p>But on that day Einar gave me the great ship that we had taken +from Halfdan, the king's son, saying that he would add to Sigurd's +giving. Also he bade me choose what men I would for her crew, +bidding me thank him not at all, for I was his foster son, and a +king by birth moreover.</p> +<p>So when I knew that this would please him, I chose Thord for my +shipmaster, and Kolgrim for marshal, as we call the one who has +charge of the ordering of the crew. And I chose a hundred good men +whom I knew well, so that indeed I had the best ship and following +in Norway, as I thought. At least there were none better, unless +Harald Fairhair might match me.</p> +<p>Now there was one thing that pleased me not at this time, and +that was that Kolgrim, my comrade, never called me aught but +"master" since I came from Sigurd's presence--which is not the wont +of our free Norsemen with any man. Nor would he change it, though I +was angry, until I grew used to it in time.</p> +<p>"Call me not 'master,' Kolgrim, my comrade," I said; "it is +unfittinq for you."</p> +<p>At last he answered me in such wise that I knew it was of no +more use to speak of it.</p> +<p>"Master of mine you are, Ranald the king, since the day when you +dared more than I thought man might, while I lay like a beaten +hound outside, and dared not go within that place to see what had +become of you. Little comradeship was mine to you on that day, and +I am minded to make amends if I can. I think I may dare aught +against living men for you, though I failed at that mound. I will +give life for you, if I may."</p> +<p>I told him that what he had done was well done, and indeed he +had had courage to go where none else had dared; for I had ties of +friendship that made me bold to meet Jarl Sigurd, and might go +therefore where he might not. It was well that he did not come into +the presence of the dead.</p> +<p>"Therefore we are comrades, not master and man," I said.</p> +<p>"Nay, but master and man--lord and thrall," he answered.</p> +<p>So I must let him have his way, but he could not make me think +of him as aught but a good and brave comrade whom I loved well.</p> +<p>They hailed me as king when I went on board my ship for the +first time with my own men, as I have said. Then our best weapon +smith asked for gold from the men, and they gave what they had--it +was in plenty with us of Einar's following--and made a golden +circlet round my helm, that they might see it and follow it in +battle.</p> +<p>It was good to wear the crown thus given willingly, but in the +end it sent me from north to south, as will be seen. That, however, +is a matter with which I will not quarrel, for it sent me to Alfred +the king.</p> +<p>We had left the firth two days, cruising slowly northward, when +one ship came from the north and met us, not flying from our fleet, +but bearing up to join us. And when she was close, there came a +hail to tell Einar that she bore a messenger from Harald the king +in peace, and presently we hove to while this messenger went on +board the Jarl's ship.</p> +<p>Then it seemed that Einar had been right, and that Harald would +lay a fine on the islands for Halfdan's slaying, and so give them +back to Einar to hold for him. The messenger was Thiodolf, Harald's +own scald, and he put the matter very plainly before the jarl, so +that he thought well of the offer, but would nevertheless not trust +himself in the king's power before all was certain, and confirmed +by oath. Whereon Thiodolf said that one must see the king on the +Jarl's part, and so I seemed the right man to go, as the jarl's +foster son and next in command to him.</p> +<p>"Nevertheless," said Thiodolf, "I would not advise you to sail +in Halfdan's ship, for that might wake angry thoughts, and trouble +would come especially as Halfdan took her without leave when he was +outlawed."</p> +<p>So I took the Jarl's cutter, manning her with enough men of my +own crew; and Kolgrim came with me, and we sailed to Kirkwall in +company with Thiodolf the scald.</p> +<p>Then when Thiodolf took me into his presence, I saw Harald +Fairhair for the first time, as he sat to receive Einar's messenger +in the great hall that Sigurd had built and which we had dwelt in. +Then I thought that never before could have been one more like a +king. Hereafter, when sagamen will sing of a king in some fancied +story, they will surely make him like King Harald of Norway. I +myself have little skill to say what he was like beyond this--that +never had I seen a more handsome man, nor bigger, nor stronger. +King-like he was in all ways, and his face was bright and pleasant, +though it was plain that it would be terrible if he was angry, or +with the light of battle upon it.</p> +<p>The hair, whence he had his name, was golden bright and shining, +and beard and eyebrows were of the same colour. But his eyes were +neither grey nor blue altogether, most piercing, seeming to look +straight into a man's heart, so that none dared lie to him.</p> +<p>I think that it is saying much for King Harald that, though his +arms and dress were wonderfully rich and splendid, one cared only +to look on his face; and that though many men of worth were on the +high place with him, there seemed to be none but he present.</p> +<p>When the scald told the king who I was, and what was my errand, +with all ceremony, he looked fixedly at me, so that I was ashamed, +and grew red under his gaze. Then he smiled pleasantly, and spoke +to me. His voice was as I thought to hear it--clear and steady, and +yet deep.</p> +<p>"So, Ranald Vemundsson, you are worthy of your father. It may be +that you bear me ill will on his account, but I would have you +forget the deeds done that Norway might be one, and the happier +therefor."</p> +<p>"Had my father been slain in fair fight, lord king," I said, "no +ill will had been thought of. It has not been in my mind that you +bade Rognvald slay him as he did. And that Jarl is dead, and the +feud is done with therefore. Jarl Einar is my foster father, +moreover."</p> +<p>"That is well said," answered Harald. "But I thought Sigurd must +have fostered you; he was ever a close friend of Vemund's."</p> +<p>I did not know why the king thought this, though the reason was +at my side; so I only said that my mother had given me to Einar's +keeping, and the king said no more at that time about it.</p> +<p>After that I gave the Jarl's messages, and the king heard them +well enough, though it seemed to Einar that the weregild to be paid +was over heavy, and he had bidden me tell Harald that it was so. +Therefore the king said that he would give me an answer on the +morrow, and I went away into the town well pleased with his kindly +way with me.</p> +<p>There was a feast made for me that night, and after it I must +sit still and hear the scalds sing of the deeds of Harald the king, +which was well enough. But then Thiodolf rose up and sang a great +saga about the winning of Sigurd's sword, wherein it seemed that I +had fought the dead jarl, and bale fires, and I know not what. He +had heard strange tales from Einar's men, if they told him all that +he sang.</p> +<p>Some men may be pleased to hear their own deeds sung of, with +more added thus; but I was not used to it, and the turning of all +eyes to me made me uncomfortable. But Harald had paid no sort of +heed to what they sang of him, and so I tried to look at my ease, +and gave the scald a bracelet when he ended.</p> +<p>"Overmuch make you of that matter, scald," said I quietly.</p> +<p>He laughed a little, and answered:</p> +<p>"One has to fill in what a warrior will not tell of +himself."</p> +<p>Now the men shouted when I gave Thiodolf the bracelet, and +Harald looked quickly at me. Then I thought that maybe I had +overdone the gift, though Einar had ever told me that a good scald +deserved good reward, and Thiodolf was well known as the best in +Norway. It was a heavy ring, silver gilt, and of good design, that +I took from the same viking whose sword I gave to Sigurd.</p> +<p>"Overpaid am I," the scald said, putting it on his arm.</p> +<p>"You are the first who has ever sung of me," I answered; "and +the voice and tune were wonderful, if the saga was too strong for +me."</p> +<p>Then Harald smiled again, and praised Thiodolf also, and I +thought no more of the matter. The feast was pleasant enough in the +hall, full of Harald's best men and chiefs, though it seemed +strange to sit as a guest in Einar's house.</p> +<p>Now on the next morning I was to speak with the king about +Einar's business, and I went to him unarmed, as was right, save for +helm and Sigurd's sword. He was in the jarl's own chamber, and with +him were Thiodolf and a young scald named Harek, who sat with +things for writing before him, which was what I had never seen +before.</p> +<p>We talked for some time, and all went well for peace; but one +more message was to go and come between the king and Einar, and so +I said I would sail at once.</p> +<p>"Not so much need for haste but that you can bide here for a day +or two," Harald said. "I will not have you complain of my +hospitality hereafter. And Thiodolf and Harek here want to learn +more about Sigurd's sword and its winning."</p> +<p>"If I tell them the truth, I shall spoil their saga, lord king!" +I said, laughing.</p> +<p>"Trust the scalds to mind you do not," he answered. "There are +times when I have to ask them which of my own doings they are +singing about now. But is there no wonder in the tale?"</p> +<p>So I told him just how the matter was. And when he heard of the +noise, and the stroke with which the ships were smitten, he said, +looking troubled, as I thought:</p> +<p>"Sigurd is stronger now that he is dead than when he lived. We +felt that stroke even here."</p> +<p>But when I told how I had seen the dead jarl, his face grew +thoughtful, and at last he said:</p> +<p>"So shall I lie some day in a grave mound. It is passing strange +to think on. I would that if one comes to my side he may step +gently as you, Ranald Vemundsson."</p> +<p>"Else will that comer fare ill," said Thiodolf.</p> +<p>The king glanced up at him, and his face changed, and he said, +smiling grimly:</p> +<p>"Maybe. I think none will win my sword from me."</p> +<p>Then he had Kolgrim sent for, and Thord, and they told him truly +what they had seen, and how they had fared in the matter.</p> +<p>"You are a truth teller, Kolgrim the Tall," Harald said. "Now if +you will leave Einar's service and come and be of my courtmen, I +will speak to the jarl and make matters right with him, and it +shall be worth your while."</p> +<p>Then my comrade answered plainly:</p> +<p>"I am no jarl's man now, King Harald; I belong to King Ranald +here, and I will not leave him."</p> +<p>"So," said Harald, knitting his brows suddenly, "we have two +kings in the room, as it seems; and you dare choose another instead +of me."</p> +<p>"Not so, King Harald," Kolgrim answered, with all respect; "I +chose between the jarl and my king. If there is peace between you +and the jarl, I suppose we are all your men."</p> +<p>Now Harald's face was growing black, and I could see that his +anger was rising. But he stayed what words he was about to speak, +and only said:</p> +<p>"Jarl Einar is well served when he has a king in his train."</p> +<p>Then he rose up and turned to Thiodolf, who was looking +anxious.</p> +<p>"Bid King Ranald to the feast tonight. He knows my words to +Einar his foster father, and I have no more to say."</p> +<p>So I was dismissed, and was not sorry to be outside the +hall.</p> +<p>"Let us get down to the ship," said Thord. "Here is trouble +brewing, as I think."</p> +<p>So we went on board, and I wished that we might go. Yet the king +had bidden me stay, and I had no reason for what would be +discourteous at least, if it did not look like flight. What the +trouble was we could hardly understand.</p> +<p>In an hour's time or so I saw Thiodolf and the young scald Harek +coming along the wharf and towards our ship, which lay clear of +Harald's vessels, and next the harbour mouth. They came over the +gang plank, and I welcomed them, but I saw that they had somewhat +special to say to me.</p> +<p>They sat down under the after awning with me, and at once +Thiodolf said:</p> +<p>"That was an unlucky speech of your comrade's just now. No man +dares name himself king in Harald's presence--not even his own +sons. It is the one thing that he will not bear."</p> +<p>"So it seemed," said I; "and, in truth, he had enough trouble +with under kings not long since. But he knows what a sea king +is--no king at all, so to speak. He need not grudge the old +title."</p> +<p>"That is not all," Thiodolf said. "It is in his mind that he has +to guard yet against risings of men of the old families of the +kings, and thinks you are likely to give him trouble. Maybe the +portent of the blow that spread from Sigurd's tomb to us has seemed +much to him. 'Here,' he says, 'is one who will gather masterless +men to him in crowds because he wears Sigurd's sword and ring, and +has gained with them the name of a hero. Already he has two of +Einar's best men at his heels. Yet I like him well enough, and I +have no fault to find with him, save that he puts a gold circle +round his helm and is called king--as he would have been but for +me. Go to him, therefore, and tell him to keep out of my way. I +will not have two kings in Norway.'"</p> +<p>"Well," I said, "that is plain speaking. But I cannot help what +the men call me. The king makes overmuch of the business. I am not +foolish enough to try to overturn Harald Fairhair."</p> +<p>"Maybe," said Thiodolf, "but those are his words. I rede you get +away quickly on the next tide."</p> +<p>"Ay," said Harek. "Harald is mild of mood now, because you made +no secret of what men call you. Five years ago you would not have +escaped hence at all."</p> +<p>"Then," said I, "I will go. I think you are right. Vemund's son +troubles Harald;" and I laughed, and added, "I have to thank you +for kindly counsel, scalds, as I think. Farewell. Tide serves at +any time now, and I will get my men and be gone."</p> +<p>"That is wise," they answered. "Einar must find some other +messenger, if he comes not himself, after you return."</p> +<p>They went, and I called two or three men and sent them into the +town for their comrades who were at friends' houses and in the +guest house where we were lodged, while Kolgrim made ready for +instant sailing.</p> +<p>The next thing that I was ware of was that there was a fight on +the wharf end next the town, and men were running to it. Then I +heard my own name shouted on one part, and that of Eric, the king's +young son, on the other. So I was going to lead down twenty men to +quiet the scuffle, when my people had the best of the matter, and +broke through the throng, cheering, and came on to me. The rest did +not follow them, for they saw that I was coming, and the wharf was +clear behind them but for three of their foes who stayed where they +had fallen.</p> +<p>Then another man broke away from the crowd, and came running +after my folk. It was Harek the scald, with his head broken.</p> +<p>"Here are fine doings," said Kolgrim, as the men swarmed on +board. "What is on hand now?"</p> +<p>"It is not done with yet," said a man: "look at yon ship."</p> +<p>Then came Harek, out of breath, and pale.</p> +<p>"Let me on board, King Ranald, or I am a dead man," he +cried.</p> +<p>"Come, then!" I answered; and he ran across the plank, and +Kolgrim pulled it in after him. All my men were come.</p> +<p>Then I looked at the ship spoken of. Men were swarming into her, +and were making ready to sail. But if she meant to stay our going, +she was too far up the harbour, and we were already casting off the +shore ropes.</p> +<p>"Hold on," said Thord; "here come the other scald and two +men."</p> +<p>The crowd that was yet round the fallen men had parted to let +Thiodolf pass, and he came quickly. One of the men bore a chest, +and the other a bale of somewhat. They gave these over the gunwale +to my people, and Thiodolf spoke to me from the wharf.</p> +<p>"These are gifts from Harald to Einar's foster son," he said. +"He bids me say that you have done your errand well, and that this +is to prove it. Also he says that Ranald, son of Vemund, may need +mail to keep his kingship withal, and so he has sent you a +suit."</p> +<p>"That is a hard saying," I answered; "is it insult?"</p> +<p>"Nay, but a broad hint only. The gift is most goodly."</p> +<p>"Well," said I, "it is plain that he will warn me from Norway. I +will leave you, good friend, to say for me what should be said. +Maybe if I sent a message it would go wrongly from my lips."</p> +<p>Thiodolf laughed, and bade me farewell. He paid no heed to +Harek, who sat on the deck with his back to him.</p> +<p>Then Kolgrim whistled shrill to his men, and we began to move +down to the harbour mouth. I heard a sharp voice hurrying the men +in the other ship; but they could not be ready in time to catch +us.</p> +<p>When we were well out to sea, I asked Harek what all this was +about.</p> +<p>"Your going has spoiled a plan that Eric, the king's son, had +made. He wanted your sword, and thought also that to rid himself +now of Vemund's son might save him trouble when the crown came to +him, as it will. You were to be set on as you came from the feast +tonight to the guest quarters, as if in a common broil between your +men and his. Then he found you were going, and tried to stay your +men, and next to take these gifts from Thiodolf and me, being very +angry, even to trying to cut me down. Lucky for me that his sword +turned in his hand. But he would have had me slain tonight, +certainly, for he says that it was our fault that you are getting +away. He fears Thiodolf, however. Now I must take service with you, +if you will have me."</p> +<p>It seemed to me that I was making friends with one hand and +enemies with the other, and that last rather more quickly than was +well. So I laughed, and answered:</p> +<p>"I suppose that if I have a scald of my own, King Harald will +blame me for overmuch kingship. However, he is angry enough +already, and maybe a good friend will balance that to me. So if you +will indeed cast in your lot with me, I am glad!"</p> +<p>So I took his hand, and more than friends have he and I been +from that day forward.</p> +<p>Now, when I looked at Harald's strangely-given gifts, I had +reason to say that he was open handed. The chest held two mail +shirts, one of steel rings, gold ornamented and fastened, and the +other of scales on deerskin, both fit for a king. There were two +helms also, one to match either byrnie <a name="EndNote4anc" +href="#EndNote4sym" id="EndNote4anc"><sup>{iv}</sup></a>, and a +seax that was fit to hang with Sigurd's sword. As for the bale, +that held furs of the best, and blue cloth and scarlet. If Harald +banished me, it was for no ill will; and it was handsomely done, as +though he would fit me out for the viking's path in all honour, +that men might not deem me outlawed for wrongdoing. So I have no +ill word to say against him. Five years later he would have +troubled about me and my kingship not at all; now he must be +careful, for his power was not at its full.</p> +<p>As for young Eric, I suppose that he boasted ever after that he +had put me to flight; but I do not know that it matters if he +did.</p> +<p>So I came back to Durness, where I was to meet with Einar; and +peace was made between him and the king, and he thought it well to +go and speak with him. Then he and I must part, and that was +hard.</p> +<p>"Now must you go your own way, son Ranald, for Harald is too +strong for us. Maybe that is best for you, for here shall I bide in +peace in Orkney; and that is not a life for a king's son--to sit at +a jarl's table in idleness, or fight petty fights for scatt +withholden and the like. Better for you the wide seas and the lands +where you may make a name, and maybe a kingdom, for yourself. Yet I +shall miss you sorely."</p> +<p>So he said, and I knew that he was right. Maybe the spirit of +the sword I had won got hold of me, as they say will happen; for I +had waxed restless of late, and I had tried to keep it from Einar. +Now I hated myself for it, seeing at hand what I had longed +for.</p> +<p>So he went north to meet Harald, and of our parting I will not +say more. I could not then tell that I should not see him again, +and that was well: but I know that when I saw the last flicker of +his sails against the sky, I felt more lonely even than at the +graveside in Southmere.</p> +<p>Yet I was in no worse case than were many nobly-born men at that +time; for whosoever would not bow to Harald and his new laws must +leave Norway, and her bravest were seeking new homes everywhere. +Some had gone to far-off Iceland, and some to East Anglia; some to +the Greek emperor, or Gardariki, and more yet to Ireland. But the +greatest viking of all, Rolf, the son of Rognvald, Einar's young +brother, had gone to France or England, with a mighty following; +for Harald had outlawed him among the first who broke his law by +plundering on the Norway coasts. A good law it was, but it was new, +and so went against the grain at first. Rolf had sworn to make a +new kingdom for himself, and why should not I do the same?</p> +<p>So when I was in the open sea again, with all the world before +me, as the long sea-miles passed I grew lighthearted, and many were +the thoughts of great deeds to come that filled my mind.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_III" id="Chapter_III">Chapter III</a>. Odda, +the Ealdorman of Devon.</h2> +<p>Now I steered eastward from Sutherland, and sailed down the east +coasts of Scotland and England; and there is nothing to say about +such a cruise, that had nought more wonderful in it than the +scaring of the folk when we put in for food. I had made up my mind +to go to Ireland for the winter, where, as every Northman knew, +there were kingdoms to be won--having no wish to be Rolf's +follower, seeing he was but a jarl's son; and finding that England +had no overlord, seeing that even now Alfred of Wessex and Guthrum +of East Anglia were fighting for mastery, so that the whole land +was racked and torn with strife.</p> +<p>Maybe I thought too much of myself at that time, but I was in no +haste to do aught but cruise about and find where I might best make +a name. I had but my one ship and crew, and I would not throw them +away on some useless business for want of care in choosing.</p> +<p>Now, when we came into the English Channel, a gale began to blow +up from the southwest; and we held over to the French shore, and +there put into a haven that was sheltered enough. The gale +strengthened, and lasted three days; but the people were kindly +enough, being of Saxon kin, who had settled there under the +headland they call Greynose, since Hengist's times of the winning +of England across the water. And when the gale was over, we waited +for the sea to go down, and then came a fair wind from the +eastward, as we expected. So we got provisions on board, and sailed +westward again, taking a long slant over to the English coast, +until we sighted the great rock of Portland; and then the wind came +off the land, and in the early morning veered to the northwest.</p> +<p>The tide was still with us as the light strengthened; then as +the day broke, with the haze of late summer over the land, we found +that we were right in the track of a strange fleet that was coming +up fast from the westward--great ships and small, in a strange +medley and in no sort of order, so that we wondered what they would +be.</p> +<p>"Here comes Rolf Ganger back from Valland," said Kolgrim. "He +has gathered any vessels he could get together, and is going to +land in England."</p> +<p>"We will even head out to sea from across their course," I said. +"Maybe they are Danes from Exeter, flying from the Saxons."</p> +<p>So we headed away for the open channel until at least we knew +more. The fleet drew up steadily, bringing the tide with them; and +presently we fell to wondering at the gathering. For there were +some half-dozen ships that were plainly Norse like ourselves, maybe +twenty Danish-built longships, and about the same number of heavy +trading vessels. There were a few large fishing boats also; but +leading the crowd were five great vessels the like of which none of +us had ever seen or heard of before. And even as we spoke of them, +two of these shook out reefs in their sails, and drew away from the +rest across channel, as if to cut us off.</p> +<p>"Ho, men," I said, when I saw that, "get to arms; for here they +come to speak with us. Maybe we shall have to fight--and these are +no easy nuts to crack!"</p> +<p>Whereat the men laughed; and straightway there was the pleasant +hustle and talk of those who donned mail shirt and helm and set the +throwing weapons to hand with all good will.</p> +<p>"Let us keep on our course," I said to Kolgrim. "We will see if +we cannot weather on these ships, and anyway shall fight them +better apart from the rest. It is a fine breeze for a sailing +match."</p> +<p>So we held on; and the two great ships to windward of us began +to gain on us slowly, which was a thing that had never been done by +any ship before. I do not know that even Harald Fairhair had any +swifter ship than this that Halfdan had taken in his flight from +home. Kolgrim waxed very wroth when it became plain that these +could outsail us.</p> +<p>"There is witchcraft about those great hulks," he growled. "They +are neither Norse, nor Frisian, nor Danish, but better than all +three put together."</p> +<p>"I have sailed in ships, and talked of ships, and dreamed of +them moreover, since I could stand alone," said Thord, "but I never +so much as thought of the like of these. If they belong to some new +kind of viking, there are hard times in store for some of us."</p> +<p>"Faith," said I, "I believe they have swept up and made prizes +of all that medley astern of them."</p> +<p>So we held on for half an hour, and all that time they gained +steadily on us; and we neared them quickly at last, for we tried to +hold across their bows and weather on them. That was no good, for +they were as weatherly as we.</p> +<p>Now we could see that their decks were covered with armed men, +and it seemed certain that they meant to make prize of us. The +leading ship was maybe half a mile ahead of the other, and that a +mile from us--all three close-hauled as we strove to gain a weather +berth. Then the leading ship put her helm up and stood across our +course, and the second followed her.</p> +<p>"We must out oars now if we are to weather on them," said +Kolgrim at last.</p> +<p>Then the men shouted; and I looked at the second ship, to which +they were pointing. Her great sail was overboard, for the halliards +had gone--chafed through maybe, or snapped with the strain as she +paid off quickly. Then a new hope came to me.</p> +<p>"Men," I said, "let us take the other vessel, and then come back +on this; they are worth winning."</p> +<p>They cheered. And now the fight seemed to be even--ship to ship +at least, if our foe was larger and higher and swifter than ours; +for I thought that he would hardly have a crew like mine.</p> +<p>We up helm and stood away on the new course the foe had taken, +leaving the crippled ship astern very fast. And now we began to +edge up towards the other vessel, meaning to go about under her +stern, and so shoot to windward of her on the other tack. But then +I thought of a plan which might help us in the fighting. There had +seemed little order and much shouting on board the ship we had left +when her sail fell, and maybe there was the same want of discipline +here.</p> +<p>"Out oars, men! Keep them swinging, but put no weight on them. +Let them pull after us and tire themselves. I have a mind to see +how our dragon looks on yonder high stem head."</p> +<p>The men laughed grimly, and the oars were run out. One called to +me:</p> +<p>"Maybe they beat us in sailing, king; we can teach them somewhat +in weapon play."</p> +<p>"See how they get their oars out," said Kolgrim, with a sour +grin; "a set of lubbers they are."</p> +<p>One by one, and in no order, the long oars were being got to +work. The great ship was half as long again as ours, pulling +twenty-eight oars a side to our twenty. But while ours rose and +fell as if worked by one man, theirs were pulled anyhow, as one +might say.</p> +<p>"Better are they at sailing than rowing," said Thord.</p> +<p>Nevertheless they flew down on us, and that because we only made +a show of rowing.</p> +<p>Then we laid on the oars, and came head to wind. The sail +rattled down, and was stowed on deck; and silently we waited, +arrows on string, for the fight that was now close at hand.</p> +<p>Then the great ship hove up, head to wind, right ahead of us, +and a loud hail came from her.</p> +<p>"Who knows what tongue he talks?" I said. "I cannot make him out +rightly."</p> +<p>"'Tis West Saxon," said an old warrior from the waist. "He asks +who we are and what is our business."</p> +<p>"Tell him therefore, if you can speak in his way," I answered; +"and ask the same of him."</p> +<p>So a hail or two went backwards and forwards, and then:</p> +<p>"Says he is Odda, jarl or somewhat of Devon in Wessex, and bids +us yield to Alfred the king."</p> +<p>"In truth," said I, "if he had not spoken of yielding, I had had +more to say to a king who can build ships like these. Now we will +speak with him on his own deck. Tell him he will have to fight us +first."</p> +<p>The old warrior sent a mighty curt hail back in answer to Odda's +summons; then our war horns blew, and the oars rose and fell, and +we were grinding our bows alongside the great ship's quarter before +they knew we were there. Alfred's men had yet somewhat to learn of +fighting in a sea way, as it seemed, for we were on their deck aft +before they had risen from their oar benches. There were but one or +two men on the quarter deck, besides the steersman, to oppose us. +Odda thought we should lay our ship alongside his towering sides if +we fought, as I suppose, for he was amidships.</p> +<p>So we swept the decks from aft forward without any hurt to +ourselves: for the Saxons were hampered with the oars, and fell +backward over them, and hindered one another. It was strange to +hear my men laughing in what seemed most terrible slaughter; for +their foes fell before they were smitten, and lay helpless under +the oars, while their comrades fell over them.</p> +<p>So we won to the foot of the mast, and then found that there +were some on board who were none so helpless: for as we came they +swung the great yard athwart ships, and that stayed us; while over +the heap of canvas glared those who would make it hard for us to +win the ship altogether.</p> +<p>But before we came to stern fighting, I had a word to say; so I +called for Odda.</p> +<p>A square built, brown-bearded man with a red, angry face pushed +his way to the front of his men, and frowned at me.</p> +<p>"What will you? here am I," he said shortly.</p> +<p>One could understand his words well enough when face to face, +for he spoke in the mixed tongue that any Northman understands, the +plain words of which all our kin have in common.</p> +<p>"I am no foe of Alfred's," I said; "I do not know, therefore, +why I should fight you."</p> +<p>"Are you not for the Danes?" he said.</p> +<p>"I hate them more or less, and I have no traffic with them."</p> +<p>"Well, then, what will you?"</p> +<p>"You bade me yield, and therefore I am here. Now I think it is a +matter to be seen whether of us does so."</p> +<p>"It seems that you have slain about half my men," he said. +"Nevertheless, I do not give up without fighting for the rest of my +ship that you have not won."</p> +<p>"That is well said," I answered.</p> +<p>But the men were laughing, for Kolgrim had stooped, and, +reaching under an oar bench, had dragged out a rower by the neck. +The man swore and struggled; but Kolgrim hove him up, and lifted +him over the yard to Odda's feet.</p> +<p>"They are all like that, Saxon," he said cheerfully. "Maybe +there is a head or two broken; 'tis mostly what we call +seasickness, however."</p> +<p>Odda looked at the man, who seemed wretched enough, but had no +hurt; then he stared at our laughing faces, and his own brow began +to clear.</p> +<p>"It comes into my mind," he said, "that maybe you would listen +to me if I owned first that you have the best of us, and then asked +you to fight for Alfred of Wessex. We need the help of such men as +you just now; and if you hate Danes, we have work enough for +you."</p> +<p>"One may certainly listen to that," I answered, laughing.</p> +<p>"What say you, men? Shall we cast in our lot with Alfred for a +while?"</p> +<p>"We follow you, Ranald the king," Kolgrim answered for all. "If +it seems good to you, it is good for us. There will be fighting +enough, I trow, if all we have heard is true."</p> +<p>Then said Odda:</p> +<p>"And that before long. There is a Danish fleet in Poole Harbour +that is to bring Danes from Wareham to the help of those whom +Alfred holds in Exeter. We have to meet this fleet and scatter +it."</p> +<p>"Then," said old Thord, "your men must be better handled, for +Danes are no new swordsmen or seamen either."</p> +<p>Now the men stood listening to our talk, and this sort of saying +was not good for them to hear, if they were to meet the foe soon +with a good hope of victory. So Odda said quickly:</p> +<p>"If you will indeed fight for us, you must trust to Alfred to +give you fitting reward. I do not know what I might say about that, +having thought of no such chance as this. But there is no man who +can complain of him."</p> +<p>I had heard that the king was ever open handed, but also that at +this time he had little to give. Maybe, however, we might help him +to riches again. I had the men to think of, but I will say for +myself that I had not thought of asking what reward or pay should +be given.</p> +<p>I sheathed my sword, and held out my hand to Odda across the +yard that was between us; and he grasped it honestly, while the men +on either side cheered.</p> +<p>"Stay here and speak with me," Odda said. "Now we must get back +to the fleet."</p> +<p>Then went back to our ship, all but Thord and half a dozen +warriors, whom he kept as guard for me, I suppose; and the +grappling lines were cast off. Then we made sail again, and headed +to rejoin the rest of the Saxon vessels. Odda's crippled ship had +repaired her damage at this time, and went with us. But first it +was plain that she thought we had taken her consort, for she +prepared to fight us, and Odda had to hail her once or twice before +she was sure of what had happened. Then her crew cheered also.</p> +<p>Now Odda took me aft, and we sat together on his quarter deck. +Thord came also, and leaned on the rail beside us, looking with +much disfavour at the crew, who were plainly landsmen at sea for +the first time, if they were stout fighting men enough. Maybe there +were ten seamen among the hundred and fifty, but these had handled +the ship well under canvas, as we knew.</p> +<p>"You have come in good time, King Ranald," Odda said. "You see +what state we are in; can you better it for us?"</p> +<p>"Many things I can see that need strengthening," I answered. +"But you seem to take me into your counsels over soon, seeing that +I have just fallen on you sword in hand."</p> +<p>"Why," said Odda frankly, "it is just your way of speaking to me +sword in hand that makes me sure that I can trust you. I cannot +deny that you had this ship at your mercy, and that the other would +have been yours next; and you knew it, and yet spoke me fair. So it +is plain that you mean well by us."</p> +<p>"Ay," said I, "but for your bidding me to yield, there would +have been no fighting at all, when I knew to whom the ships +belonged."</p> +<p>"You have put a thought in my mind, and I am glad you did board +us, seeing there is no harm done," Odda answered. "I will tell you +what it is. Send me some of your men to order my people and tell +them how to prepare for battle. Here am I sent to sea for the first +time, with good warriors enough who are in like case, and a few +seamen who can sail the ship and know nought else."</p> +<p>"You have some Norsemen yonder, if I mistake not," I said, +looking at the fleet which we were nearing.</p> +<p>"Ay--wandering vikings who care nought for what I say. They were +going to Rolf, and the king persuaded them to take this cruise +first. If you can make them follow you, there will be another +matter for which I shall be more than thankful."</p> +<p>Thereat Thord growled: "They will follow Ranald Vemundsson well +enough; have no care about that."</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"These are the finest ships I have ever seen. Where did they +come from?"</p> +<p>"Alfred, our king, planned them," said Odda, with much pride; +"and they were built by our own men, working under Frisian +shipwrights, in Plymouth."</p> +<p>"How will you like to command one of these, Thord?" I asked +then.</p> +<p>"I like the ship well enough. The crew is bad. And then, whose +command is the fleet under?"</p> +<p>"Take the ship, Thord, and lick my crew into shape; and Ranald, +your king, shall command the fleet," Odda said plainly.</p> +<p>"Fair and softly," said Thord bluntly. "I can do the two things +you ask me; but will your men follow Ranald?"</p> +<p>"Faith," said Odda, "if I say they are to do so, they must."</p> +<p>So in the end I left Thord and my seamen with Odda; but I would +not take his place, only saying that I would lead the Norsemen, and +that he could follow our plans. I would put more good men into each +of his five ships, and they should do what they could. At least +they could teach the Saxons how to board a ship, and how to man +their own sides against boarders from a foe.</p> +<p>Those Norsemen said they would gladly follow the son of King +Vemund and foster son of Einar the jarl; and so we led the strange +fleet, and held on eastward with a light breeze all that day, +making little way when the tide turned, and held back by the slower +vessels. Men in plenty there were, but ill fitted for aught but +hand fighting; though I had more Norsemen sent into the larger +ships, such as those that had been taken from the Danes and the +better trading vessels. One might soon see the difference in the +trim and order on board as the vikings got to work and the Saxons +overcame their sickness.</p> +<p>Now we might meet the Danes at any time, and I could not tell +how matters would go. One thing was certain, however, and that was +that they looked for no gathering of ships by Alfred. We should +certainly take them by surprise, and I hoped, therefore, that they +would be in no trim for fighting.</p> +<p>There was a very swift cutter belonging to the Norsemen, and as +night fell I sent her on to keep watch along the shore for the +first coming of the Danes, while we shortened sail; for the mouth +of Poole Harbour was not far distant, and if we passed that we +should be seen, and perhaps it would be guessed that we were not a +friendly fleet. Towards evening, too, the wind shifted, and blew +more off the shore, and that might bring them out from their haven. +Kolgrim, who was weather wise, said that a shift of wind to the +southward was coming presently.</p> +<p>When morning came, the high cliffs of Swanage were on our bow, +the wind was yet steady from off shore, and beyond the headland lay +Poole Harbour, at whose head is Wareham, where the Danes were. It +is a great sea inlet with a narrow mouth, and one must have water +enough on a rising tide to enter it. Now the ebb was running, and +if the Danes came this morning, it would be soon.</p> +<p>They came, as it seemed, for the cutter was flying back to us +under sail and oars; and before she reached us, the first Danish +ships were clear of the Swanage headlands, making for the offing. +Then I got my ships into line abreast, and Thord worked up Odda's +five alongside us to seaward; and all the while the Danish sails +hove into sight in no sort of order, and seeming so sure that none +but friends could be afloat that they paid no heed to us.</p> +<p>Soon there were full a hundred vessels of all sorts off Swanage +point, and the cutter brought word that there were but twenty more. +Then I ran up my fighting flag, and everywhere along our line rose +a great cheering as we hoisted sail and sped down on the foe. It +was long since the seas had borne a fleet whence the Saxon war cry +rang.</p> +<p>The leading Danes were ahead of us as we gathered way, and their +long line straggled right athwart our course. We should strike +their midmost ships; and at last they saw what was coming, and +heard the din of war horns and men's voices that came down wind to +them, and there were confusion and clamour on their decks, and +voices seemed to call for order that did not come.</p> +<p>Then one or two longships from among them struck sail and +cleared for action, and on these swooped Alfred's great ships. +Odda's crashed upon and sank the first she met, and plunged and +shook herself free from the wreck, and sought another. And beyond +her the same was being wrought; and cheers and cries were strangely +mixed where those high bows went forward unfaltering.</p> +<p>Now a ship crowded with men was before me. As we boarded, her +crew were yet half armed, and struggling to reach the weapon chests +through the press, even while our dragon head was splintering the +gunwale; and I leaped on board her, with my men after me and Harek +beside me.</p> +<p>Then sword Helmbiter was let loose for the first time since +Sigurd wielded her; and though a great and terrible cry came from +over the water as one of Alfred's ships sank another Dane, I could +look no more, for there was stern fighting before me.</p> +<p>What a sword that was! Hardly could my arm feel the weight of it +as it swung in perfect balance, and yet I knew the weight it had as +it fell. Helm and mail seemed as nought before the keen edge, and +the shields flew in twain as it touched them.</p> +<p>Forward I went, and aft went Harek the scald, and there was soon +an end. The Danes went overboard, swimming or sinking, as their +fate might be, and only the slain bided before us. The ship was +ours, and I looked round to see what should be next. No other ship +had come to help our prey.</p> +<p>Then I saw a wonderful sight. Panic terror had fallen on the +Danes, and not one ship of all that great fleet was not flying down +the wind without thought of fighting. Among them went our vessels, +great and small, each doing her work well; and the Saxon shouts +were full of victory.</p> +<p>So we must after them, and once more we boarded a longship, and +had the victory; and then we were off the haven mouth, and with the +flood tide the wind was coming up in gusts from the southeast that +seemed to bode angry weather. By that time no two Danish ships were +in company, and the tide was setting them out to sea.</p> +<p>"Here is a gale coming," said Kolgrim, looking at the sky and +the whitening wave crests. "We had best get our ships into this +haven while we can."</p> +<p>It seemed that Thord was of the same mind, for now he was +heading homeward, and the other Saxons were putting about and +following him. So I got men into the best of the ships we had +taken, and waited till Thord in Odda's ship led the way, and so +followed into Poole Harbour.</p> +<p>Well it was for us that we had refuge so handy. For by noonday +the gale was blowing from the southwest, and two Danish ships were +wrecked in trying to gain the harbour--preferring to yield to us +rather than face the sea, with a lee shore, rocky and hopeless, +waiting for them.</p> +<p>We went into the Poole inlet, which is on the eastern side of +the wide waters of the haven, and there found good berths enough. +The village was empty, save for a few Saxon fishermen, who hailed +us joyfully. And then Odda made for us as good a feast as he might +in the best house that was there, bidding every shipmaster to it. +Merry enough were all, though we had but ship fare; for the Saxons +had great hopes from this victory.</p> +<p>Now Odda made much of what I had done--though it was little +enough--saying that I and my men deserved well of Alfred, and that +he hoped that we should stay with him for this winter, which would +perhaps see the end of the war.</p> +<p>"Why," said I, "things would have been much the same if I had +not been here."</p> +<p>"That they would not," he answered. "I should have blundered +past this place in the night, and so lost the Danes altogether; or +if I had not done that, they would soon have found out what state +my men were in. You should have heard old Thord rate them into +order; it is in my mind that he even called me--Odda the +ealdorman--hard names in his broad Norse tongue. But at least he +gave us somewhat more to think of than the sickness that comes of +heaving planks that will by no means keep steady for a moment."</p> +<p>He laughed heartily at himself, and then added:</p> +<p>"Good King Alfred thought not at all of that matter. Now I can +shift the whole credit of this victory to your shoulders, and then +he will not believe that I am the born sea captain that he would +have me think myself."</p> +<p>"I will not have that," I said, "for I have not deserved +it."</p> +<p>"Ay; but, I pray you, let me put it from myself, else shall I be +sent to sea again without any one to look to for advice," he said +earnestly, and half laughing at the same time. "I did but take +command of this fleet because the king could find no one else at a +pinch. Heaven defend me from such a charge again!"</p> +<p>"Now you have only the Exeter Danes to deal with," I said.</p> +<p>"How many men might these ships have held?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Maybe five thousand," I answered.</p> +<p>Thereat his face changed, and he rose up from his seat at the +high table, and said that he would go down to see that the ships +were safe, for the gale was blowing heavily as the night fell.</p> +<p>So we went outside the house, and called a man, telling him to +find one of the Poole fishermen and bring him to speak to us.</p> +<p>"There were twelve thousand Danes in Wareham," he said, "for +more have come lately. I thought they would all have been in the +ships."</p> +<p>"If that had been possible, not one would have seen the +morning's light," I answered, "for their ships are lost in this +gale certainly."</p> +<p>Now I will say that I was right. The wrecks strewed the shore of +Dorset and Hants next morning; and if any men won to land, there +waited for them the fishers and churls, who hated them. No Danish +fleet was left in the channel after that gale was spent.</p> +<p>When the fisher came, he told us that as many more Danes were +left in Wareham, and that those from Poole had fled thither when +they saw what had happened to the fleet.</p> +<p>"Shall you march on Wareham and scatter them, or will they fall +on us here?" I asked; for we had no more than two thousand men at +most.</p> +<p>"I would that I knew what they thought of this business," he +answered; "but I shall not move tonight. It is far by land, and I +suppose we could not get the ships up in the dark."</p> +<p>So he posted pickets along the road to Wareham, and we went back +to the house for a while. And presently, as it grew dark, a wild +thought came into my mind. I would go to Wareham with a guide, and +see what I could find out of the Danish plans. Maybe there were +fewer men than was thought, or they might be panic-stricken at our +coming in this wise; or, again, they might march on us, and if so, +we should have to get to sea again, to escape from double our +numbers.</p> +<p>Now the more I thought of this, the more I grew bent on going, +for I was sure that we must know what was going on. And at last I +took Odda aside while Harek sang among the men, and told him what I +would do.</p> +<p>At first he was against my running the risk; but I told him that +a Norseman might go safely where a Saxon could not among the Danes, +and at last I persuaded him. Then I called Kolgrim, and we went out +together into the moonlight and the wind, to find the fisherman we +had spoken with already and get him to act as guide. I think that +Odda did not expect to see either of us again; and when I came to +know more of Saxons, I learned that he trusted me most fully, for +many thanes would have thought it likely that I went on some +treacherous errand.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_IV" id="Chapter_IV">Chapter IV</a>. Jarl +Osmund's Daughter.</h2> +<p>To my mind, no gale seems so wild as one that comes at the time +of full moon, when the clouds break up and fly in great masses of +black and silver against the deeper sky beyond, while bright light +and deepest shadow chase each other across land and sea beneath +them. Kolgrim and I stood under the lee of a shed, waiting for the +fisher to get his boat afloat, and looked out on bending trees and +whitened water, while beyond the harbour we could see the great +downs, clear cut and dark, almost as well as by day, so bright it +was.</p> +<p>It was low water now, which was good for us, for the winding +channels that lead up to Wareham were sheltered under their bare +banks. We could hear the thunder of the surf along the rocky coast +outside, when the wind ceased its howling for a moment; and at high +water the haven had been well nigh too stormy for a small boat. Now +we should do best to go by water, for wind was with us; though, +unless the gale dropped very quickly, we could not return in her, +for there would be a heavy sea and tide against us if we could get +away before it turned, while if we were long wind against tide +would be worse yet.</p> +<p>The fisherman was eager to help us against the Danes, who had +made him work for nought; and so in half an hour we were flying up +the haven on the first rise of tide, and the lights of Wareham town +grew plainer every moment. From the number of twinkling sparks that +flitted here and there, it would seem that many folk were waking, +even if some movement were not on hand.</p> +<p>Presently we turned into the channel that bends to the southwest +from the more open water, and the town was before us. The fisher +took to his oars now, lowering the scrap of sail that had been +enough to drive us very swiftly before the gale so far.</p> +<p>Wareham stands on the tongue of land between two rivers' mouths, +and the tide was setting us into the northward of these. That was +the river one would have to cross in coming to or from Poole, and +maybe we should learn as much there as anywhere.</p> +<p>There were three ships on the mud, but even in the moonlight it +was plain that they were not seaworthy. There were wide gaps in +their bulwarks, which none had tried to mend, and the stem head of +one was gone.</p> +<p>"These ships were hurt in the storm of lest week," the fisher +said, as we drifted past them; "there was hardly one that came in +unhurt. But the Danes were eager to go, and mended them as they +could."</p> +<p>Perhaps that was partly the reason why we gained so easy a +victory, I thought at the time, and afterwards knew that I was +right. They had suffered very much, while we lay across channel in +safety.</p> +<p>There loomed before us the timbers of a strong bridge that had +been over the north river, when we were fairly in it and under the +nearer houses of the town. But now it was broken down, and the gap +in its middle was too wide for hasty repair.</p> +<p>"When was this done?" I asked the fisherman.</p> +<p>"Since yesterday," he answered.</p> +<p>Now this seemed to me to indicate that the Danes meant to guard +against attack by land from Poole; also that they overrated our +numbers, which was probable in any case, seeing that a fleet had +fled from before us.</p> +<p>There were wharves on the seaward side of the bridge, but none +were beyond; and the houses stood back from the water, so that +there was a sort of open green between it and them. There were no +people about, but we could hear shouts from the town now and +then.</p> +<p>"Let us go ashore and speak with some one," I said; "it is of no +use our biding here on the water."</p> +<p>Kolgrim and I were fully armed, and had boat cloaks with us +which covered us well, and we thought none would question who we +were if we mixed among the men in some inn or other gathering +place. So we bade the fisher wait for us, and found the stairs, and +went to the wide green along the waterside, and across it to the +houses, which were mostly poor enough here.</p> +<p>Many of them stood open, and in one a fire burned on the hearth, +but all were empty. So we turned into a street that led seemingly +from one bridge to the other across the town. Here men were going +hither and thither with torches, and groups were outside some of +the houses. To the nearest of these I went, as if I had all right +to be in the place.</p> +<p>They were bringing goods out of the house, and loading a cart +with them.</p> +<p>"Here is a flitting," said Kolgrim, "and another or two are on +hand yonder."</p> +<p>I stayed a man who came past me from out of a house.</p> +<p>"I have fled from Poole," I said. "What is in the wind here? Are +we to leave Wareham also?"</p> +<p>"If you come from Poole, you should know that it is time we did +so," he answered shortly. "I suppose you saw the whole +business."</p> +<p>"So I did," I answered. "What are the orders?"</p> +<p>"Pack up and quit with all haste," said he. "You had better get +to work if you have aught to save."</p> +<p>"Shall we go to Exeter, or back to Mercia?" I said.</p> +<p>"Exeter they say; but I know not. Why not go and ask Jarl Osmund +himself--or follow the crowd and hinder no one with questions?"</p> +<p>He hurried on; but then some men began to question us about the +doings off Swanage, and Kolgrim told them such tales that they +shivered, and soon we had a crowd round us listening. Nor did I +like to hurry away, for I heard a man say that we were Northmen, by +our voices. But there were plenty of our folk among the Danes.</p> +<p>Then came a patrol of horsemen down the street, and they bade +the loiterers hurry. I drew Kolgrim into an open doorway, and stood +there till they passed, hearing them rate their fellows for +delay.</p> +<p>"Wareham will be empty tomorrow," I said. "Now we can go; we +have learned enough."</p> +<p>Still I would see more, for there seemed no danger. Every man +was thinking of himself. So we went across the town, and as we came +near the western bridge the crowd grew very thick.</p> +<p>We heard before long that the army was as great as Odda had +thought, and that they were going to Exeter. Already the advance +guard had gone forward, but this train of followers would hardly +get clear of the town before daylight. They had heard great +accounts of our numbers, and I wished we had brought the ships up +here at once. There would have been a rout of the Danes.</p> +<p>But the place was strange to me, and to Odda also, so that we +could not be blamed.</p> +<p>We got back by the way we came, and then knew that we could in +no way take the boat to Poole. The gale was raging at its highest, +and thatch was flying from the exposed roofs. It would be dead +against us; and the sea was white with foam, even in the haven. So +we must go by road, and that was a long way. But we must get back +to Odda, for he should be in Wareham before the Danes learned, +maybe, that their flight was too hurried.</p> +<p>Now it seemed to me that to leave Wareham was not so safe as to +come into it, for no Dane would be going away from the place. +However, the bridge was down; and if it had not been done in too +great haste, any fugitives from the country would have come in. So +that maybe we should meet no one on the road that goes along the +shore of the great haven.</p> +<p>The fisherman ferried us over to the opposite shore, and then +tied his boat to the staging of the landing place, saying that he +was well known and in no danger. He would sleep now, and bring his +boat back when the wind fell. So we left him, thanking him for his +goodwill.</p> +<p>Grumbling, as men will, we set out on our long walk in the gale. +We could not miss the road, for it never left the curves of the +shore, and all we had to do was to be heedful of any meetings. +There might be outposts even yet, watching against surprise.</p> +<p>However, we saw no man in the first mile, and then were feeling +more secure, when we came to a large farmstead which stood a short +bowshot back from the road, with a lane of its own leading to the +great door. What buildings there were seemed to be behind it, and +no man was about; but there was light shining from one of the high +windows, as if some one were inside, and plain to be seen in the +moonlight were two horses tied by the stone mounting block at the +doorway.</p> +<p>"Here is a chance for us, master," said my comrade, coming to a +stand in the roadway. "I must try to steal these horses for +ourselves. If Danes are in the place, they have doubtless stolen +them; and if Saxons, they will get them back."</p> +<p>"There will be no Saxon dwelling so near the Danes," I said. +"Maybe the place is full of Danes--some outpost that is +careless."</p> +<p>"Careless enough," said Kolgrim. "If they are careless for three +minutes more, they have lost their horses."</p> +<p>Then we loosened our swords in their sheaths, and drew our +seaxes, and went swiftly up the grassy lane. The wind howled round +the house so that none would hear the clank of mail, which we could +not altogether prevent. But the horses heard us, and one shifted +about and whinnied as if glad to welcome us.</p> +<p>At that we ran and each took the bridle of that next him, and +cut the halter that was tied to the rings in the wall, looking to +see the doors thrown open at any moment. Then we leaped to the +saddles and turned to go. The hoofs made a great noise on the +paving stones before the doorway, yet there was no sound from +inside the house.</p> +<p>That seemed strange to me, and I sat still, looking back with +the horse's head turned towards the main road.</p> +<p>"Stay not, master," Kolgrim said. "'Tis some outpost, and the +men have slept over the farmhouse ale. Maybe the stables behind are +full of horses. Have a care, master; the door opens!"</p> +<p>He was going; but I waited for a moment, half expecting to see a +spear point come first, and my hand was on my sword hilt. But the +great heavy door swung slowly, as if the one who opened it had +trouble with its weight. So I must needs see who came. Maybe it was +some old man or woman whose terror I could quiet in a few +words.</p> +<p>Then the red firelight from within shone out on me, and in the +doorway, with arms raised to post and door on either hand, stood a +tall maiden, white robed, with gold on neck and arm. The moonlight +on her seemed weird with the glow of the fire shining through the +edges of her hood and sleeves. I could see her face plainly, and it +was fair and troubled, but there was no fear in her looks.</p> +<p>"Father, is this you?" she said quietly.</p> +<p>I could make no answer to that, and she looked intently at me; +for the moon was beyond me, and both Kolgrim and I would seem black +against it, as she came from the light within, while the wind, keen +with salt spray, was blowing in her face.</p> +<p>"Who is it?" she said again. "I can scarcely see for moon and +wind in my eyes."</p> +<p>"Friends, lady," I said, for that at least was true in a +way.</p> +<p>"Where are my horses? Have you seen aught of our thralls, who +should have left them?" she asked, looking to whence we had just +taken the beasts.</p> +<p>Now I was ashamed to have taken them, for she was so plainly +alone and helpless, and I could not understand altogether how it +could be so. I was sure that she was Danish, too.</p> +<p>"How is it that you have not fled, lady?" I asked. "Surely you +should have gone."</p> +<p>"Ay; but the thralls fled when they heard the news. Has not my +father sent you back for me?"</p> +<p>This seemed a terrible plight for the maiden, and I knew not +what to say or do. She could not be left in the way of our Saxons +if they came on the morrow, and I could not take her to Poole. And +so, lest I should terrify her altogether, I made up my mind even as +she looked to me for an answer.</p> +<p>"I think your father is kept in Wareham in some way. Does he +look for you there?"</p> +<p>"Ay, surely," she answered; but there was a note as of some new +fear in her voice. "Has aught befallen him? Have the Saxons +come?"</p> +<p>"All is well in Wareham yet," I answered. "Now we will take you +to your father. But we are strangers, as you may see."</p> +<p>Then I called to Kolgrim, who was listening open eyed to all +this, and backed away from the door a little.</p> +<p>"What is this madness, master?" he whispered hoarsely.</p> +<p>"No madness at all. Ten minutes' ride to Wareham with the +maiden, give her to the fisherman to take to her friends, and then +ride away--that is all. Then we shall be in Poole long before any +look for us, for we are in luck's way."</p> +<p>Kolgrim laughed.</p> +<p>"Strange dangers must I run with you, master; but that is what +one might look for with Ranald of the Sword."</p> +<p>Then I got off the horse, which was very strong and seemed +quiet, and went to the maiden again.</p> +<p>"It will be best for you to come with us, lady," I said "we will +see you safely to Wareham."</p> +<p>The light fell on my arms now, and they were splendid enough, +being Harald Fairhair's gift, which I had put on for the fight, +seeing that the men loved to see their king go bravely, and being, +moreover, nowise loth to do so myself. She seemed to take +heart--for she was well nigh weeping now--when she saw that I was +not some wandering soldier of the great host.</p> +<p>"My horses, two of them should be here," she said. "I bade the +thralls leave them when they fled."</p> +<p>So she thought not that we had loosed them, and did not know her +own in the moonlight. Maybe she had no knowledge as to which of +many had been left, and I was glad of that, for so her fear was +less.</p> +<p>"You must ride with us," I said, "and I would ask you to come +quickly; even now the host is leaving Wareham."</p> +<p>"Ay, is that so? Then my father is busy," she said, and then she +faltered a little, and looked at me questioningly. "I cannot go +without my nurse, and she is very sick. I think she sleeps now. Men +feared her sickness so that we brought her here from the town. But +indeed there is nought to fear; there is no fever or aught that +another might take from her."</p> +<p>Then I grew fairly anxious, for this was more than I had looked +for. I knew that it was likely that she would soon be missed and +sought for; yet I could not think of leaving her to that chance, +with the bridge broken moreover.</p> +<p>I gave the bridle to Kolgrim then to hold.</p> +<p>"Let me see your nurse," I said gently; "I have some skill in +these troubles."</p> +<p>She led me into the house without a word. All the lower story +was in one great room, with a hearth and bright fire thereon in the +centre. Beyond that was a low bed, to which the maiden went. A very +old woman, happed in furs and heavy blankets, lay on it, and it +needed but one look to tell me that she needed no care but the +last. Past need of flight was she, for she was dead, though so +peacefully that her watcher had not known it.</p> +<p>"The sleep is good, is it not?" the maiden said, looking +anxiously into my face.</p> +<p>"It is good, lady," I answered, taking off my helm. "It is the +best sleep of all--the sleep that heals all things."</p> +<p>The maiden looked once at the quiet face, and once more at me, +with wide eyes, and then she knew what I meant, and turned quickly +from me and wept silently.</p> +<p>I stood beside her, not daring to speak, and yet longing to be +on the road. And so still were we that Kolgrim got off his horse +and came to the door and called me, though not loudly.</p> +<p>I stepped back to him.</p> +<p>"Come again in a few minutes and say one word--'Saxons'" I +whispered, "then we shall go."</p> +<p>He nodded and drew back. I think the maiden had not heard me +move, for she was bent over the bed and what lay thereon. It seemed +very long to me before I heard my comrade at the door.</p> +<p>"Saxons, master!" he said loudly.</p> +<p>"Say you so?" I answered, and then I touched the maiden's arm +gently.</p> +<p>"Lady, we must go quickly," I said. "The dame is past all help +of ours, and none can harm her. Come, I pray you."</p> +<p>She stood up then, still looking away from me, and I drew the +covering over the still face she gazed at.</p> +<p>"You must leave her, and I know these Saxons will not wrong the +dead," said I gently. "Your father will miss you."</p> +<p>"I am keeping you also in danger," she answered bravely. "I will +come."</p> +<p>"Loth to go am I," she said, as she gathered her wrappings to +her and made ready very quickly, "for it seems hard. But hard +things come to many in time of war."</p> +<p>After that she ceased weeping, and was, as I thought, very brave +in this trouble, which was indeed great to her. And when she was +clad in outdoor gear, she bent once more over the bed as in +farewell, while I turned away to Kolgrim and made ready the horses. +Then she came, and mounted behind me on a skin that I had taken +from a chair before the hearth.</p> +<p>Then we were away, and I was very glad. The good horse made +nothing of the burden, and we went quickly. Many a time had I +ridden double, with the rough grip of some mail-shirted warrior +round my waist, as we hurried back to the ships after a foray; but +this was the first time I had had charge of a lady, and it was in a +strange time and way enough. I do not know if it was in the hurry +of flight, or because they had none, but the horses had no saddles +such as were for ladies' use.</p> +<p>So I did not speak till we were half a mile from the house, and +then came a hill, and we walked, because I feared to discomfort my +companion. Then I said:</p> +<p>"Lady, we are strangers, and know not to whom we speak nor to +whom we must take you."</p> +<p>There was a touch of surprise in her voice as she answered:</p> +<p>"I am the Lady Thora, Jarl Osmund's daughter."</p> +<p>Then I understood how this was the chief to whom the man I spoke +with first had bidden me go for orders. It was plain now that he +was up and down among the host ordering all things, and deeming his +daughter in safety all the while. He had not had time to learn how +his cowardly folk had fled and left their mistress, fearing perhaps +the sickness of the old dame as much as the Saxon levies.</p> +<p>Now no more was said till we came to the riverside, where the +flood tide was roaring through the broken timbers of the bridge. +The fisher slept soundly despite the noise of wind and water, and +Kolgrim had some trouble in waking him.</p> +<p>"How goes the flight?" I asked him when he came ashore with the +boat's painter in his hand.</p> +<p>"Faith, master, I know not. I have slept well," he said.</p> +<p>Now by this time it seemed to me that I ought to take the lady +into a safe place, and I would go myself rather than leave her to +the fisherman, who was rough, and hated the Danes heartily, as I +knew. Moreover, I had a new plan in my head which pleased me +mightily. Then I thought that if I were to meet any man who +suspected me, which was not likely, the Lady Thora would be pass +enough for me. So I told Kolgrim to bide here for me, and he said +at first that he must be with me. However, I made him stay against +his will at last, telling him what I thought.</p> +<p>Then the fisher put us across quickly, and went back to the far +side to wait my return.</p> +<p>I asked Thora where I must take her to find the jarl.</p> +<p>"To his house, surely," she said.</p> +<p>"I do not know the way from here," I answered; "I fear you must +lead me."</p> +<p>"As you will," she said, wondering. "It is across the town +certainly."</p> +<p>That was bad for me, perhaps, but I should find that out +presently. So we went across the open, and came to the road through +the town along which I had been before. It was clearer, though +there were yet many people about.</p> +<p>Now when we were in the shadow of the first houses, Thora +stopped suddenly and looked hard at me.</p> +<p>"Will you tell me if I am heading you into danger?" she +said.</p> +<p>"What danger is possible?" I answered. "There are no Saxons here +yet."</p> +<p>"Not one?" she said meaningly. "I may be wrong--it does seem +unlikely but I think you do not belong to us. Your speech is not +like ours altogether, and your helm is gold encircled, as if you +were a king."</p> +<p>"Lady," I said, "why should you think that I am not of your +people? Let us go on to the jarl."</p> +<p>"Now I know that you are not. Oh, how shall I thank you for +this?"</p> +<p>Then she glanced at my helm again, and drew a sudden little +quick breath.</p> +<p>"Is it possible that you are Alfred of Wessex? It were like what +they say of him to do as you have done for a friendless +maiden."</p> +<p>Then she caught my hand and held it in both of hers, looking +half fearfully at me.</p> +<p>"Lady," I said, "I am not King Alfred, nor would I be. Come, let +us hasten."</p> +<p>"I will take you no further," she said then. "Now I am sure that +you are of the Northmen that were seen with the Saxons. You are not +of us, and I shall lose you your life."</p> +<p>Then came the quick trot of horses, and I saw a little troop +coming down the street, their arms flashing in the streaks of +moonlight between the houses.</p> +<p>"I will see you in good hands, Lady Thora," I answered. "Who are +these coming?"</p> +<p>"It is my father," she said, and drew me back deeper into +shadow.</p> +<p>After the horsemen and beside them ran men who bore planks and +ropes, and it was plain that the jarl had found out his loss, and +hastened to bridge the gap and cross the river.</p> +<p>I saw that I could keep up the pretence no longer.</p> +<p>"Let me walk behind you as your servant," I said. "If any heed +me, I pray you make what tale you can for me."</p> +<p>"What can I say to you in thanks?" she cried quickly, and +letting go my hand which she yet held. "If you are slain, it is my +fault. Tell me your name at least."</p> +<p>"Ranald Vemundsson, a Northman of King Alfred's," I said. "Now I +am your servant--ever."</p> +<p>Then Thora left my side suddenly, and ran forward to meet the +foremost horseman--for they were close to us--calling aloud to +Osmund to stay. And he reined up and leaped from his horse with a +cry of joy, and took her in his arms for a moment.</p> +<p>I got my cloak around me, pulling the hood over my helm, and +stood in the shadow where I was. I saw the jarl lift his daughter +into the saddle, and the whole troop turned to go back. The footmen +cast down their burdens where each happened to be, and went quickly +after them; and I was turning to go my way also, when a man came +riding back towards me.</p> +<p>"Ho, comrade," he said, "hasten after us. Mind not the things +left in the boat. There is supper ere we go."</p> +<p>I lifted my hand, and he turned his horse and rode away, paying +no more heed to me. That was a good tale of things left that Thora +had made in case I was seen to be going back to the boat.</p> +<p>Then I waxed light hearted enough, and thought of my other plan. +Kolgrim saw me coming, and the boat was ready.</p> +<p>"Have you flint and steel?" I said to the fisher as I got into +the boat.</p> +<p>"Ay, master, and tinder moreover, dry in my cap."</p> +<p>"Well, then, take me to those ships we saw. I have a mind to +scare these Danes."</p> +<p>It was a heavy pull against the sea to where they lay afloat +now, though it was not far. I fired all three in the cabins under +the fore deck, so that, as their bows were towards the town, the +light would not be seen till I was away.</p> +<p>Then we went swiftly back to Kolgrim, and as I mounted and rode +off, the blaze flared up behind us, for the tarred timbers burned +fiercely in the wind.</p> +<p>"That will tell Odda that the Danes are flying. And maybe it +will save Wareham town from fire, for they will think we are on +them. So I have spoiled Jarl Osmund's supper for him."</p> +<p>Then I minded that this would terrify the Lady Thora maybe, and +that put me out of conceit with my doings for a moment. But it was +plain that she was brave enough, for there were many things to fray +her in the whole of this matter, though perhaps it was because +Kolgrim stayed beyond the river that she made so sure that I was a +man of King Alfred's and no friend to the Danes.</p> +<p>So we rode away, pleased enough with the night's work, and +reached Poole in broad daylight, while the gale was slackening. +Well pleased was Odda to see me back, and to hear my news.</p> +<p>Then he asked me what I would do next. There seemed to be no +more work at sea, and yet he would have me speak with King Alfred +and take some reward from him. And I told him that the season grew +late, and that I would as soon stay in England for this winter as +anywhere.</p> +<p>"What will you do next in the matter of these Danes, however?" +was my question.</p> +<p>Then he said:</p> +<p>"I must chase them through the country till they are within the +king's reach. He has the rest pent in Exeter, and there will be +trouble if they sail out to join these. I must follow them, +therefore, end send men to Alfred to warn him. Then he will know +what to do. Now I would ask you to take the ships back into the +river Exe and join us there."</p> +<p>I would do that willingly, and thought that if the wind held +fair after the gale ended, I might be there before he joined the +king by land. But I should have to wait for a shift to the eastward +before sailing.</p> +<p>So Odda brought his men ashore, and marched on Wareham and +thence after the Danes, not meaning to fight unless some advantage +showed itself, for they were too many, but to keep them from +harming the country. And I waited for wind to take me westward.</p> +<p>Then the strange Norsemen left us. They had gained much booty in +the Danish ships, for they carried what had been won from the +Saxons, and what plunder should be taken was to be their share in +due for their services. They were little loss, for they were +masterless vikings who might have given trouble at any time if no +plunder was to be had, and I was not sorry to see them sail away to +join Rolf Ganger in France.</p> +<p>Now these men would have followed me readily, and so I should +have been very powerful at sea, or on any shore where I cared to +land. But Odda had made me feel so much that I was one in his +counsel, and a friend whom he valued and trusted, that I had made +this warfare against the Danes my own quarrel, as it were in his +company. Already I had a great liking for him, and the more I heard +of Alfred the king, the more I wished to see him. At the least, a +man who could build ships like these, having every good point of +the best I knew, and better than any ever heard of before, was +worth speaking with. I thought I knew somewhat of the shipwright's +craft, and one thinks much of the wisdom of the man who is easily +one's master in anything wherein one has pride.</p> +<p>Moreover, Alfred's men were wont to speak of him with little +fear, but as if longing for his praise. And I thought that +wonderful, knowing only Harald Fairhair and the dread of him.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_V" id="Chapter_V">Chapter V</a>. Two Meetings +in England.</h2> +<p>It was not long before the shift of wind that I looked for came, +and at once I took all the ships round to the river Exe. Odda had +left me all the seamen he had, and they were enough for the short, +fair passage. We came to the haven in the river, and there heard +what news there was, and it was good enough. Odda had sent +well-mounted men to reach the king by roads away from the +retreating Danes, and he had been ready for them. He drew off his +levies from before the walls of the town, and let his enemies pass +him; then he and Odda fell on their rear and drove them into +Exeter, and there was holding them. It was well done; for though +the host sallied from the town to meet the newcomers, they gained +nothing but a share in the rout that followed when Odda closed on +the rear guard and the king charged the flank.</p> +<p>Now we heard that as soon as we landed. And then I had my first +knowledge of the ways of a Saxon levy. For no sooner were the ships +berthed than their crews began to leave them, making for their +homes.</p> +<p>One or two men I caught in the act of leaving in the early +morning, and spoke sharply to them, for it seemed that soon there +would be ships enough and not a man to tend them. Whereon they +answered:</p> +<p>"We have done what we were called up for, and more also. Now may +others take our places. What more would you have? We have won our +victory, and the ships are not needed for a while."</p> +<p>So they went, and nothing I could say would stay them. I waxed +angry on that, and I thought I might as well sail for Ireland as +not. There seemed no chance of doing aught here, where men would +throw away what they had won of advantage.</p> +<p>So I went back to my own ship and sat under the after awning, in +no good temper. Thord and Kolgrim were yet busy in and about the +vessels, making all secure, and setting men to work on what needed +repairing. Presently Harek the scald came and sat with me, and I +grumbled to my heart's content about this Saxon carelessness and +throwing away of good luck.</p> +<p>Many Saxons--men from camp, and freemen of the place, and some +thanes--came, as one might expect, to stare at the ships and their +prizes. I paid no heed to them as the day went on, only wishing +that Odda would come and speak to me about his doings, for I had +sent word to him that we were in the river. Sometimes a thane would +stay and speak with me from the wharf alongside which my own ship +was with one or two others, and they were pleasant enough, though +they troubled me with over many thanks, which was Odda's fault. +However, I will say this, that if every man made as little of his +own doings and as much of those of his friends as did the honest +ealdorman, it were well in some ways.</p> +<p>By and by, while we were talking, having got through my grumble, +Kolgrim came along the shore with some Saxon noble whom he had met; +and this stranger was asking questions about each ship that he +passed. I suppose that Kolgrim had answered many such curious folk +already; for when he came near and we could hear what he was +saying, I was fain to laugh, for, as sailors will, he was telling +the landsman strange things.</p> +<p>"What do we pull up the anchor with?" he was saying. "Why, with +yonder big rope that goes from masthead to bows." and he pointed to +the great mainstay of our ship. "One must have a long purchase, if +you know what that is."</p> +<p>"Ah, 'tis wonderful," said the Saxon.</p> +<p>Then he caught my eye, and saw that I was smiling. He paid no +heed to me, however, but looked long at the ship that lay astern of +ours--one of the captured Danes. Thord had set a gang of shore folk +to bend the sail afresh to a new yard, for the old one had been +strained in the gale that came before the fight.</p> +<p>"What are those men doing, friend?" he asked Kolgrim +directly.</p> +<p>"Bending a sail," answered my comrade listlessly, trusting, as +it would seem, to the sea language for puzzlement enough to the +landsman.</p> +<p>"So," said the Saxon, quite quietly. "It was in my mind that +when a sail was bent to the yard it was bent with the luff to the +fore end thereof."</p> +<p>At which words Kolgrim started, in a way, and looked first at +the riggers and then back at the Saxon, who moved no muscle of his +face, though one might see that his eyes twinkled. And I looked at +the riggers also, and saw that the Saxon was right, and that the +men had the square-cut sail turned over with the leech forward and +the luff aft. The sail was half laced to the yard, and none but a +man who knew much of ships would have seen that aught was +wrong.</p> +<p>Then Kolgrim's face was so red, and angry, and full of shame all +at once, that I had the best laugh at him that had come to me for +many a day. And he did not bide with the Saxon any longer, but went +on board the ship hastily, and said what he had to say to the +riggers. The Saxon stood, and looked after him with a smile +breaking over his pleasant face, and I thought that maybe I owed +him some amends for my comrade's rough jesting, though indeed he +had his revenge.</p> +<p>So I came ashore and spoke to him. He was a slight, brown-haired +man of about thirty, bearded and long-haired after the Saxon +fashion, and I thought he seemed to be recovering from some wound +or sickness that had made him white and thin. He wore his beard +long and forked, which may have made him look thinner; but he +seemed active and wiry in his movements--one of those men who make +up for want of strength by quickness and mastery of their weapons. +Soberly dressed enough he was, but the cloth of his short cloak and +jerkin was very rich, and he had a gold bracelet and brooch that +seemed to mark him as high in rank.</p> +<p>"My comrade has been well caught, thane," I said; "he will be +more careful what tales he tells the next comer. But I think he was +tired of giving the same answers to the same questions to all who +come to see us."</p> +<p>"Likely enough," the Saxon answered, laughing a little. "I asked +to see the prizes and the vikings' ships, and he showed me more +than I expected."</p> +<p>Then he looked along the line of vessels that he had not yet +passed, and added:</p> +<p>"I thought there were more Norse ships with Odda."</p> +<p>I told him how the other vikings had left us with their plunder +at Wareham, saying that I thought they could well be spared at that +time.</p> +<p>"However," I said, "I did not count on the Saxons leaving their +vessels so soon."</p> +<p>"Then I take it that I am speaking with King Ranald, of whom +Odda has so much to say," he said, without answering my last +words.</p> +<p>"I am Ranald Vemundsson," I said; "but this ship is all my +kingdom now. Harald Fairhair has the land that should have been +mine. I am but a sea king."</p> +<p>Then he held out his hand, saying that there was much for which +every Saxon should thank me, and I passed that by as well as I +could, though I was pleased with the hearty grip he gave me.</p> +<p>"So long as Odda is satisfied it is enough," I said. "If I have +helped him a little, I have helped a man who is worth it."</p> +<p>"Well," said the thane, "you seem to be pleased with one +another. Now I should like to see this ship of yours, of which he +has so much to say."</p> +<p>We went over her, and it was plain that this thane knew what he +was talking about. I wondered that the king had not set him in +command instead of Odda, who frankly said what was true--that he +was no sailor. I supposed that this man, however, was not of high +rank enough to lead so great a gathering of Saxons, and so I said +nothing to him about it.</p> +<p>By and by we sat on the after deck with Harek, and I had ale +brought to us, and we talked of ship craft of all sorts. Presently, +however, he said:</p> +<p>"What shall you do now--if one may ask?"</p> +<p>"I know not. When I sailed from Wareham, I thought to have seen +more sea service with Alfred your king. But now his men are going +home, and in a day or two, at this rate, there will be none left to +man the ships."</p> +<p>"We can call them up again when need is," he answered.</p> +<p>"They should not go home till the king sends them," I said. +"This is not the way in which Harald Fairhair made himself master +of Norway. Once his men are called out they know that they must +bide with him till he gives them rest and sends them home with +rewards. It is his saying that one sets not down the hammer till +the nail is driven home, and clinched moreover."</p> +<p>"That is where the Danes are our masters," the Saxon said, very +gravely. "Our levies fight and disperse. It was not so in the time +of the great battles round Reading that brought us peace, for they +never had time to do so. Then we won. Now the harvest wants +gathering. Our people know they are needed at home and in the +fields."</p> +<p>"They must learn to know that home and fields will be better +served by their biding in arms while there is a foe left in the +land. What says Alfred the king?" I said.</p> +<p>"Alfred sees this as well as you, or as any one but our +freemen," he answered; "but not yet can he make things go as he +knows they should. This is the end at which he ever aims, and I +think he will teach his people how to fight in time. I know this, +that we shall have no peace until he does."</p> +<p>"Your king can build a grand ship, but she is of no use without +men in her day by day, till they know every plank of her."</p> +<p>"Ay," said the Saxon; "but that will come in time. It is hard to +know how to manage all things."</p> +<p>"Why," I said, "if the care of a ship is a man's business, for +that he will care. You cannot expect him to care for farm and ship +at once, when the farm is his living, and the ship but a thing that +calls him away from it."</p> +<p>"What then?"</p> +<p>"Pay the shipman to mind the sea, that is all. Make his ship his +living, and the thing is done."</p> +<p>"It seems to me," the thane said, "that this can be done. I +shall tell the king your words."</p> +<p>"As you will," I answered; "they are plain enough. I would say +also that Harald our king has about him paid warriors whose living +is to serve him, and more who hold lands on condition that they +bear arms for him at any time."</p> +<p>Now Harek had listened to all this, and could tell the thane +more of Harald's ordering of things than I; so he took up the talk +for a time, and presently asked about the war and its +beginning.</p> +<p>"Faith," answered the Saxon, with a grim smile, "I cannot tell +when the war began, for that was when the first Danes came to the +English shores. But if you mean the trouble that is on hand now, it +is easily told. Ten years has this host been in England--coming +first with Ingvar and Halfden and Hubba, the three sons of Lodbrok. +Ingvar has gone away, and Guthrum takes his place. Halfden is in +Northumbria, Hubba is in Wales, and Guthrum is king over East +Anglia and overlord of Mercia. It is Guthrum against whom we are +fighting."</p> +<p>"He is minded to be overlord of all England," said Harek.</p> +<p>"That is to be seen if a Dane shall be so," the Saxon answered, +flushing. "We beat them at first, as I have said, and have had +peace till last year. Then they came to Wareham from East Anglia. +There they were forced to make peace, and they swore on the holy +ring <a name="EndNote5anc" href="#EndNote5sym" id= +"EndNote5anc"><sup>{v}</sup></a> to depart from Wessex; and we, on +our part, swore peace on the relics of the holy saints. Whereon, +before the king, Alfred, was ware of their treachery, they fell on +our camp, slew all our horsemen, and marched here. Then we gathered +the levies again--ay, I know why you look so impatiently, King +Ranald--and came here after them. As for the rest, you have taken +your part. Now we have them all inside these walls, and I think we +have done."</p> +<p>Then his face grew dark, and he added:</p> +<p>"But I cannot tell. What can one do with oath breakers of this +sort?"</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"Surely you do not look for the men of one chief to be bound by +what another promises?"</p> +<p>He looked wonderingly at me for a moment, and then said:</p> +<p>"How should it be that the oath of their king should not bind +the people?"</p> +<p>"Why," said I, "you have spoken of several chiefs. If Guthrum +chooses to make peace, that is not Halfden's business, or Hubba's, +or that of any chief who likes it not. One is as free as the +other."</p> +<p>"What mean you? I say that Guthrum and his chiefs swore by the +greatest oath they knew to return to Mercia."</p> +<p>"If they swore by the holy ring, there is no doubt that they who +swore would keep the oath. But that does not bind those who were +against the peace making. So I suppose that they who held not with +the peace made by the rest fell on you, when your levies went home +after their wont. One might have known they would do so."</p> +<p>Thereat the thane was silent for a while, and I saw that he was +troubled. It seemed to be a new thought to him at this time that +the Danish hosts in England were many, and each free to act in the +way its own chief thought best, uniting now and then, and again +separating. This he must needs have learned sooner or later, but +the knowledge came first to him there before Exeter walls.</p> +<p>Presently he said:</p> +<p>"I have believed that all the Danes were as much one under +Guthrum their king as are my folk under theirs. I cannot see the +end of this war."</p> +<p>"It will end when Alfred the king is strong enough always to +have men in the field to face every leader that will fall on him," +Harek said. "What King Ranald says is true. It is as if his own +father had minded what Harald had sworn in the old days."</p> +<p>"Wherefore Harald brought all Norway under him, that every man +should mind what he said," the Saxon answered.</p> +<p>Then came three or four more thanes along the shore, and he rose +up and waved his hand to them.</p> +<p>"Here are more butts for Kolgrim," he said, laughing. "Now, King +Ranald, I must go to my friends. But I have learned much. I think +you must speak with the king before you go, and I will tell him all +you have said."</p> +<p>"Maybe we shall meet again," said I, taking his offered hand. "I +think I would see Alfred; but he is over wise, from all accounts, +to learn aught from me."</p> +<p>"King Alfred says that wisdom comes little by little, and by +learning from every one. I belong to the court, and so shall surely +meet you if you do come to speak to him."</p> +<p>Then I asked the thane's name.</p> +<p>"Godred <a class="EndNoteanc" name="EndNote6anc" href= +"#EndNote6sym" id="EndNote6anc"><sup>{vi}</sup></a> men say it +is," he answered, laughing; "but that means better counsel than +belongs to me."</p> +<p>So he went ashore and joined the thanes, who had gone slowly +along the road, and we lost sight of him.</p> +<p>"Yonder goes a pleasant comrade enough," I said to Harek.</p> +<p>"Ay," the scald answered; "but if that is not Alfred the king +himself, I am much in error."</p> +<p>"It is not likely. I think he is a bigger man and older, from +all accounts," I said carelessly. "Moreover, he would not have put +up with Kolgrim's jests as he did."</p> +<p>"One knows not; but I thought he spoke of 'my folk' once. And he +seemed to ask more than would a simple thane, and in a different +way."</p> +<p>However, it seemed to me that Harek had found a marvel for +himself, and I laughed at him for supposing that Alfred the king +would come there to speak to any man.</p> +<p>Now towards evening Odda came, and with him many servants and a +train of wagons. He would make a feast for us in the best house of +the village, by the king's order. Every one of us was called, and +all the leading Saxon shipmen, when all was ready, and it was a +kingly feast enough.</p> +<p>While they were making it ready, the ealdorman came to me on +board the ship, and welcomed me in most friendly wise.</p> +<p>"I have a message for you, King Ranald," he said presently. +"Some thanes have been to me from the king, and he bids me ask you +to come and speak with him."</p> +<p>"I saw a thane here this morning who was anxious for me to see +the king," I said. "A pleasant man enough--one Godred."</p> +<p>"Ay, Godred is pleasant enough," Odda said, smiling, "but he is +a terrible man for asking questions."</p> +<p>He laughed again, as if he knew the man well, and was pleased to +think of him and his ways.</p> +<p>"None of his questions are foolish, however," I said. "I was +pleased with him."</p> +<p>"It is well if you pleased him, for he is a powerful man at +court," said Odda.</p> +<p>"I do not know if I pleased him, or if it makes any difference +to me what power he has," I said carelessly. "If I want any man to +speak for me to the king--which is not likely--I should come to you +first."</p> +<p>"Speak for yourself," laughed Odda, "that is the best way with +Alfred."</p> +<p>So we planned to go to Exeter with the next morning's light. +Odda would bide here for the night, after the feast.</p> +<p>Now after we had finished eating, and the ale and mead and the +wine the king had sent in our honour were going round, and the +gleemen were singing at times, there came a messenger into the +house, and brought me a written message from the king himself, as +he said.</p> +<p>"Much good are these scratches to me," said I to Odda. "Can you +read them?"</p> +<p>"I can read nought but what is written in a man's face," he +said.</p> +<p>So I gave the scroll to Harek, who sat next me, thinking that +maybe the scald could read it. He pored over it for a while.</p> +<p>"It is of no use, king," he said. "It is in my mind that I know +which is the right way up of the writing, but I am not sure."</p> +<p>So I laughed, and asked aloud if any man present could read. +There were a good many thanes and franklins present to feast in our +honour.</p> +<p>Then rose up a man, in a long brown hooded habit girt with a +cord, from below the salt where he sat among the servants. He had a +long beard, but was very bald. His hair grew in a thick ring round +his head; which was strange, for he seemed young.</p> +<p>"I am here, ealdorman," he said to Odda; "I will read for King +Ranald."</p> +<p>Now all eyes turned to see who spoke, and in a moment Odda rose +up hastily and went down the long room till he came to where the +man stood. Then I was amazed, for the ealdorman went on one knee +before him, and said:</p> +<p>"Good my lord, I knew not that you were here among the crowd. I +pray you come to the high seat."</p> +<p>"When will you remember that titles and high places are no +longer pleasing to me?" the man said wearily. "I tire of them all. +Rise up, Odda, my friend, and let me be."</p> +<p>"I will not rise without your blessing, nevertheless," said the +ealdorman.</p> +<p>Whereon the man spoke a few words to him softly and quickly, +signing with his hand crosswise over him.</p> +<p>Then I said to those about me, who were watching all this in +silence:</p> +<p>"Who is this strange man?"</p> +<p>"It is Neot the holy, King Alfred's cousin," one answered, +whispering.</p> +<p>"That is a strange dress for an atheling," I said; but they +hushed me.</p> +<p>Now it seemed that Odda tried again to draw this Neot to the +high table, but he would not come.</p> +<p>Then I said to old Thord, who sat over against me beyond Odda's +empty chair:</p> +<p>"This is foolishness; or will he not honour the king's +guests?"</p> +<p>But a thane shook his head at me, whispering behind his +hand:</p> +<p>"It is humbleness. He has put his rank from him, and will not be +held as being above any man."</p> +<p>Then spoke old Thord:</p> +<p>"Maybe he can put his rank away among men who know him not, and +that is a good humbleness in a way. But where all know what his +birth is, he has but to be humble and kind in ways and speech, and +then men will think more thereof than they will if they see him +pretending to be a churl."</p> +<p>Now Thord's voice was rough with long years of speaking against +the wash of the waves, and the thunder of wind in sail and rigging, +and the roll and creak of oars; and as he said this, every one +turned towards him, for a silence had fallen on the crowd of folk +who watched Neot the king's cousin and his strife with Odda.</p> +<p>So Neot heard, and his face flushed a little, and he looked hard +at Thord and smiled curiously, saying:</p> +<p>"In good truth the old warrior is right, and I am foolish to +hide here now I am known. Let me go and sit by him."</p> +<p>Then Odda led him to the upper end of the room, and every one +rose as he passed by. I drew myself nearer to the ealdorman's +place, and made room for him where only the table was between him +and Thord, for that bench was full.</p> +<p>So he put his hand on my shoulder and sat down, looking over to +Thord, and saying with a quiet smile:</p> +<p>"Thanks for that word in season, friend."</p> +<p>But the old warrior was somewhat ashamed, and did but shift in +his seat uneasily.</p> +<p>"Ay, ay," he growled; "I cannot keep my voice quiet."</p> +<p>Neot laughed, and then turned to me and held out his hand for +the king's letter, which I gave him.</p> +<p>He ran his eyes over the writing very quickly, and then +said:</p> +<p>"Here is nothing private; shall I read aloud?"</p> +<p>But the thanes fell to talking quickly, and I nodded.</p> +<p>"Alfred the king to his cousin Ranald Vemundsson, greeting. Odda +the ealdorman of Devon, and one Godred, have spoken to me of +yourself--one telling of help given freely and without question of +reward or bargain made, and the other of certain plain words spoken +this morning. Now I would fain see you, and since the said Godred +seems to doubt if you will come to me, I ask it under my own hand +thus. For I have thanks to give both to you and your men, and also +would ask you somewhat which it is my hope that you will not refuse +me. Therefore, my cousin, I would ask you to come with our +ealdorman tomorrow and hear all I would say."</p> +<p>Then Neot said,</p> +<p>"That is all. I think you will not refuse so kindly an +invitation. The writing is the king's own, and here is his name at +the end."</p> +<p>So he showed it me. The letter was better written than the name, +as it seemed to me.</p> +<p>"I will take your word for it," I said, laughing as I looked; +"but it is a kindly letter, and I will surely come."</p> +<p>"Ay; he has written to you as to an equal," Odda said.</p> +<p>"That is so. Now I would have the good king know that I am not +that; I am but a sea king. Maybe he thinks that I shall be a good +ally, and makes more of my power than should be. I told Godred the +thane as plainly as I could what I was, this morning."</p> +<p>"Why, then," said Neot, smiling, "Godred has told the king, no +doubt."</p> +<p>"I hope he has," I answered, "but I doubt it. Nevertheless it is +easy to tell the king myself when I see him."</p> +<p>After that we talked about other matters, and it became plain +that this Neot was a wonderfully wise man, and, as I thought, a +holy one in truth, as they called him. There is that about such an +one that cannot be mistaken.</p> +<p>Harek sang for us, and pleased all, and into his song came, as +one might suppose, a good deal about the Asir. And then Neot began +to ask me a good deal about the old gods, as he called them. I told +him what I knew, which was little enough maybe, and so said that +Harek knew all about them, and that he should rather ask him.</p> +<p>He did not care to do that, but asked me plainly if I were a +Christian.</p> +<p>"How should I be?" I said. "Odda is the first Christian man I +have spoken with, to my knowledge. So, if I were likely to leave my +own faith, I have not so much as heard of another."</p> +<p>"So you are no hater of Christians?" he said.</p> +<p>"Surely not. Why should I be? I never thought of the +matter."</p> +<p>Then he said:</p> +<p>"Herein you Norsemen are not like the Danes, who hate our faith, +and slay our priests because of their hatred."</p> +<p>"More likely because Christian means Saxon to them, or else +because you have slain them as heathens. Northmen do not trouble +about another nation's faith so long as their own is not interfered +with. Why should they? Each country has its own ways in this as in +other matters."</p> +<p>Thereat Neot was silent, and asked me no more. Hereafter I +learned that hatred of race had made the hatred of religion bitter, +until the last seemed to be the greatest hatred of all, adding +terror and bitterest cruelty to the struggle for mastery.</p> +<p>Presently, before it was very late, Neot rose up and spoke to +Odda, bidding him farewell. Then he came to me, and said:</p> +<p>"Tell the king that we have spoken together, and give him this +message if you will that I go to my place in Cornwall, and shall be +there for a while."</p> +<p>Then he passed to Thord, and took his hard hand and said:</p> +<p>"Good are words that come from an honest heart. I have learned a +lesson tonight where I thought to have learned none."</p> +<p>"I marvel that you needed to learn that," Thord said +gruffly.</p> +<p>"So do I, friend," answered Neot; "but one is apt to go too far +in a matter which one has at heart, sometimes before one is aware. +Then is a word in season welcome."</p> +<p>Then he thanked Harek for his songs, and went, the Saxons bowing +as he passed down the long table with Odda.</p> +<p>"That is a wise man and a holy," said Thord.</p> +<p>"Ay, truly," answered the thane who had told me about him. "I +mind when he and Alfred the king were the haughtiest and most +overbearing of princes. But when Neot found out that his pride and +wrath and strength were getting the mastery in his heart, he thrust +himself down there to overcome them. So he grows more saintlike +every day, and has wrought a wondrous change in the king himself. +He is the only man to whom Alfred will listen in reproof."</p> +<p>"That is likely," I said, not knowing aught of the holy bishops +who were the king's counsellors; "kings brook little of that sort. +But why does he wear yon strange dress?"</p> +<p>"He has taken vows on him, and is a hermit," the thane said; but +I did not know what he meant at the time.</p> +<p>It was some Saxon way, I supposed, and cared not to ask +more.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that I met one of the two most wonderful men +in England, and I was to see the other on the morrow. Yet I had no +thought that I should care to stay in the land, for it seemed +certain from what Odda told me that peace would be made, and peace +was not my business nor that of my men.</p> +<p>So in a way I was sorry that the war was at an end, seeing that +we came for fighting and should have none.</p> +<p>Then came a thought to me that made me laugh at myself. I was +glad, after all, that we were not going sword foremost into Exeter +town, because of the Lady Thora, who was there. I suppose it would +not have been reasonable had I not had that much thought for the +brave maiden whom I had helped out of danger once.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_VI" id="Chapter_VI">Chapter VI</a>. Alfred the +King.</h2> +<p>Odda the ealdorman and I rode gaily into the king's camp in the +bright August morning, with Harek and Kolgrim and Thord beside us, +and after us fifty of my men in their best array; which was saying +much, for Einar the jarl was generous, and we had spoiled Halfdan, +the king's son, moreover. So there was a shouting when we came to +the camp, and men ran together to stare at the vikings and their +king.</p> +<p>In the midst of the camp, which was strong enough, and looked +out on the old city, flew a banner whereon was a golden dragon--the +banner of Wessex. And it stood before a great pavilion, which was +the court for the time, and where we should find the king waiting +for us. There were several other tents joined to this great one, so +that into them the king might retire; and there was a wide space, +round which walked spearmen as sentries, between it and any other +tent.</p> +<p>Some Devon thanes met us, and our men dismounted at the same +time as we. Then Odda led us four to the door of the pavilion, and +we were ushered in with much ceremony.</p> +<p>Inside the great tent was like a round hall, carpeted, and +tapestry-hung in a way I had never seen before. There were many +richly-dressed nobles present, and most of these were grouped round +a high place over against the door, where I saw at once that the +king sat on a throne in all state.</p> +<p>Now, coming from bright sunshine into the cool shadow of the +place, I was dazzled at first; but Kolgrim's eyes were quick, and +we had hardly crossed the threshold, if I might call it so, when he +plucked at my cloak.</p> +<p>"Master," he whispered, "let me bide with the men; this is no +place for me."</p> +<p>"Hush," I whispered; "the king is yonder."</p> +<p>"Ay, master--let me go--the king is Godred whom I jested +with."</p> +<p>Harek was smiling, and he pulled Kolgrim forward.</p> +<p>"Have no fear," he said; "those who play bowls expect rubs."</p> +<p>Then the king came down from his throne and towards us. He had +on gilded armour beneath his long, ermine-trimmed blue cloak, and +that pleased me. He had sword and seax, but no helm, though that +was on a table by the throne--for he wore a crown.</p> +<p>Then I too saw that Godred, as he called himself, was, as the +scald had guessed rightly, the king, and I was a little angry that +he had tricked me thus. But he was laughing at Kolgrim as he came, +and my anger passed at once. King or thane, here was a pleasant +greeting enough.</p> +<p>He held out his hand to Odda first and then to me. The Saxon +kissed it, bending one knee, which was doubtless right for him, as +owning allegiance thereto. But I shook hands in our own way, +saying:</p> +<p>"Skoal to Alfred the king."</p> +<p>Which seemed to please him, for he answered:</p> +<p>"Welcome to King Ranald. I am glad my letter brought you. My +counsellor, Godred, feared you might not care to come."</p> +<p>"The letter turned the scale, lord king," I said. "Yet I would +have you remember what I said yesterday about my kingship."</p> +<p>"Ay, cousin, I mind it," he answered, laughing. "Also I mind +that a king's son is a king's son, whatever else he may be +called."</p> +<p>Then he shook hands with Harek, and after that turned to +Kolgrim, holding out his hand also to him.</p> +<p>"Concerning sails," he said gravely, "I have many questions to +ask you. Is it to the starboard hand that the bolt rope goes, or to +the other board?"</p> +<p>"I pray you to forget my foolishness, lord king," cried Kolgrim, +growing very red and shame faced.</p> +<p>"That I shall not," the king answered, laughing. "I owe you +thanks for such a jest as I have not played on a man for many a +long day. Truly I have been more light hearted for my laugh ever +since."</p> +<p>"Ay, lord, you had the laugh of me," Kolgrim said, grinning +uneasily.</p> +<p>Then the king nodded gaily to him and asked who Thord was.</p> +<p>"This is my master in sea craft," said Odda. "Verily I fear him +as I have feared no man since I was at school. But he cured the +seasickness of me."</p> +<p>"Maybe I forgot the sickness when I sent landsmen to sea in all +haste," said the king. "Nevertheless, Thord, how fought they when +blows were going?"</p> +<p>"Well enough, king. And I will say that what I tried to teach +them they tried to learn," answered Thord.</p> +<p>"Wherein is hope. You think that I may have good seamen in time, +therefore?"</p> +<p>"Ay, lord. It is in the blood of every man of our kin to take to +the sea. They are like hen-bred ducklings now, and they do but want +a duck to lead them pondwards. Then may hen cackle in vain for +them."</p> +<p>The king laughed.</p> +<p>"Faith," he said, "I--the hen--drove Odda into the pond. He is, +according to his own account, a poor duckling."</p> +<p>"Let him splash about a little longer, lord king," said +Thord.</p> +<p>But Odda spoke with a long face.</p> +<p>"Not so, King Alfred, if you love me. Landsman am I, and +chicken-hearted at sea. Keep the gamecock to mind the farmyard; +there be more birds than ducks needed."</p> +<p>"Make a song hereof, Harek," said the king. "Here is word play +enough for any scald."</p> +<p>Then sang Harek, laughing, and ever ready with verses:</p> +<pre class="verse"> +"The gamecock croweth bravely, +And guardeth hawk-scared hen roost; +But when the sea swan swimmeth +Against the shoreward nestings, +There mighty mallard flappeth, +And frayeth him from foray; +Yet shoreward if he winneth, +The gamecock waits to meet him." +</pre> +<p>"That is in my favour," said Odda. "Mind you the scald's words, +I pray you, lord king, and send me to my right place, even with +hawk on one side and swan on the other."</p> +<p>So a pleasant laugh went round, and then the king went back to +his throne, and spoke words of open thanks to us of the fleet who +had gained him such victory. Good words they were, neither too few +nor too many, such as would make every man who heard them long to +hear the like of himself again.</p> +<p>Now, while he was speaking, men came to the tent door and waited +for his words to end; and then one came forward and told a noble, +who seemed to be ordering the state which was kept, that Danish +lords had come to speak with the king.</p> +<p>It seemed that this was expected, for when he heard it, Alfred +bade that they should be brought in.</p> +<p>There were six of them in all, and they were in handsome +dresses, but without mail, though not unarmed. The leader of them +was Jarl Osmund, whom I had seen for a moment in Wareham street. I +thought that his handsome face was careworn, as though peace would +be welcome to him. But he and all his comrades carried themselves +bravely.</p> +<p>Now there was long converse between the king and these chiefs, +and it seemed that peace would be made.</p> +<p>Yet Alfred's face was hard as he spoke to them--not like the +bright looks with which he had jested with us just now, or the +earnest kingly regard which had gone with his words of thanks.</p> +<p>Presently the Danes said that the whole force would retire into +Mercia beyond Thames, harming none by the way, and keeping peace +thereafter, if the conditions were honourable.</p> +<p>Then the king flashed out into scorn:</p> +<p>"What honour is to be looked for by oath breakers?"</p> +<p>"We are not oath breakers, King Alfred," Osmund said, looking +him in the face.</p> +<p>"Once did the Danes swear to me on their holy ring, which seems +to me to be their greatest oath, and they broke the peace so made. +What is that but that they are forsworn?"</p> +<p>"We swore nought to you, lord king," Osmund said. "Half of the +men with us came newly from across the sea but a week or so since. +Guthrum and those who swore are in their own land."</p> +<p>Then the king glanced at me, suddenly, as it would seem, +remembering what I had told him of the freedom of the chiefs.</p> +<p>"Ha! now I mind me of a word spoken in time," he said. "It has +seemed to me that there was oath breaking; maybe I was wrong. I +will take your words that you have not done so. Is that amends +enough?"</p> +<p>"It is well said, lord king," Osmund answered gravely.</p> +<p>"But," Alfred went on, "I must have the word of every chief who +is in Exeter, and they must speak for every man. Tell me in all +truth if there are those who would not make peace with me?"</p> +<p>Then said Osmund:</p> +<p>"Some will not, but they are few."</p> +<p>"What if you make peace and they do not? what shall you do with +them?"</p> +<p>"They must go their own way; we have no power over them."</p> +<p>"Has not Guthrum?"</p> +<p>"No more than we. A free Dane cannot be hound, unless he +chooses, by another man's word."</p> +<p>Then Alfred said plainly:</p> +<p>"I cannot treat for peace till I have the word of every chief in +Exeter. Go your ways and let that be known."</p> +<p>So Osmund bowed, and went out with his fellows. And when he had +gone, the king turned to me.</p> +<p>"Have I spoken aright, King Ranald?"</p> +<p>"In the best way possible, lord king," I answered.</p> +<p>"Go after those Danish lords," the king said to one of his +thanes, "and bid them to feast with me tonight, for I think that I +have said too much to them."</p> +<p>So they were bidden to the king's feast presently, and I suppose +they could do nought but come, for it was plain that he meant to +honour them. After they had gone back into the town, Alfred spoke +with my men, and what he said pleased them well.</p> +<p>Then he went to his resting tent, and I walked with Odda to his +quarters, and sat there, waiting for the king to send for me to +speak with him, as I expected. But word came that he would wait +till he had heard more of the Danish answer to his message before +we spoke together of that he had written of to me. So he prayed me +to wait in the camp till he had seen the Danes again, and told Odda +to find quarters for us.</p> +<p>"So we shall have a good talk together," the ealdorman said. "I +am glad you are not going back to the ships yet."</p> +<p>So was I, for all this fresh life that I had not seen before +pleased me. Most of all I wished to see more of Alfred and the +state in which he lived.</p> +<p>Now, just when I was ready for the feast, and was sitting with +Odda, there came a guard to the tent and said that the chief of the +Danes was seeking King Ranald.</p> +<p>Then Odda said:</p> +<p>"What wills he? we have no traffic with Danes."</p> +<p>"He would speak with King Ranald," the man said.</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"If it is Osmund the jarl, I think I know why he comes.--Let him +come in here and speak before you, ealdorman."</p> +<p>"Why, do you know him?"</p> +<p>"I cannot rightly say that I do, but I nearly came to do +so."</p> +<p>Then Odda wondered, and answered:</p> +<p>"Forgive me; one grows suspicious about these Danes. I will go +hence, and you shall speak with him alone. Maybe he wants your word +with the king, because you know the ways of the viking hosts."</p> +<p>"No," said I; "stay here. Whatever it is he has to say cannot be +private; nor would I hear anything from him that you might +not."</p> +<p>"As you will. Let him come here," Odda said; and the man went +out.</p> +<p>Then entered Jarl Osmund, richly dressed for the king's feast, +and he looked from one of us to the other as we rose to greet him. +Suddenly he smiled grimly.</p> +<p>"I looked to find strangers, and was about to ask for King +Ranald. However, Odda the ealdorman and I have met before, as I am +certain."</p> +<p>"Faith, we have," said Odda. "Nor am I likely to forget it. It +was at Ashdown fight."</p> +<p>"And elsewhere," said the jarl. "But it was ever fair fighting +between us."</p> +<p>"Else had you slain me when I was down," said Odda frankly, and +with a smile coming into his face.</p> +<p>"The score is even on that count," said Osmund, and with that, +with one accord their hands met, and they laughed at each +other.</p> +<p>That was good to see, and ever should things be so between brave +foes and honest.</p> +<p>Then Osmund looked at me.</p> +<p>"Now have I met with two men whom I have longed to see," he +said, "for you must be King Ranald Vemundsson. Two foes I have--if +it must be so said--of whom I have nought but good to say."</p> +<p>"So," laughed Odda. "When fought you twain, and which let the +other go?"</p> +<p>"We have not fought," the jarl answered. "But I have deeper +reason for thanking Ranald than for sparing my own life, or for +staying a blow in time out of sheer love of fair play."</p> +<p>Then he took my hand and looked me in the face.</p> +<p>"It was a good deed and noble that you wrought for me but the +other day," he said earnestly. "I do not know how to thank you +enough. My daughter laid command on me that I should seek you and +tell you this; but indeed I needed no bidding when I heard how she +escaped."</p> +<p>"I had been nidring had I not helped a lady in need," I said, +being in want of better words.</p> +<p>"What is all this?" said Odda; for I had told him nought of the +matter, not seeing any reason to do so.</p> +<p>Then Osmund must needs tell him of what Kolgrim and I had done; +and the ealdorman laughed at me, though one might see that the +affair pleased him.</p> +<p>"This king," he said, "having no kingdom of his own, as he says, +goes about helping seasick ealdormen and lonely damsels, whereby he +will end with more trouble on his hands than any kingdom would give +him."</p> +<p>"I am only one," I said; "Kolgrim and Thord are in this +also."</p> +<p>Then Osmund took a heavy gold bracelet from his arm.</p> +<p>"This is for Kolgrim, your comrade," he said, half doubtfully, +"if I may give it him in remembrance of a brave deed well done. +Will he be too proud to accept it?"</p> +<p>"I may give it him, certainly," I said, taking the gift.</p> +<p>Then Odda would not be behindhand, and he pulled off his own +armlet.</p> +<p>"If Kolgrim is to be remembered, Thord will never be forgotten. +Give this to him in sheer gratitude for swearing at me in such wise +that he overcame the sore sickness that comes of the swaying of the +deck that will not cease."</p> +<p>"Give it him yourself, ealdorman," I said. "You know him over +well to send it by another. It would not be so good a gift."</p> +<p>"As you will," he answered. "But I fear that viking terribly. +Black grows his face, and into his beard he blows, and the hard +Norse words grumble like thunder from his lips. Then know I that +Odda the ealdorman has been playing the land lubber again, and +wonder what is wrong. Nor is it long ere I find out, and I and my +luckless crew are flying to mind what orders are howled at us. In +good truth, if Alfred ever needs me to hurry in aught, let him send +Thord the viking to see that I do so. One may know how I fear him, +since I chose rather to risk battle with Jarl Osmund on shore than +to bide near him in my own ship any longer."</p> +<p>Then the jarl and I laughed till our sides ached, and Odda +joined us when he could not help it, so doleful was his face and +solemn were his words when he told his tale. But I knew that he and +Thord were the best of friends after those few days in the ship +together, and that the rough old viking had given every man of the +crew confidence. Nevertheless he was apt to rage somewhat when +things went in slovenly wise.</p> +<p>So Odda helped me through with Osmund's thanks, and I was glad. +I was glad also that the horns blew for the feast, so that no more +could be said about the Wareham doings.</p> +<p>Now I sat close to King Alfred at the feast, and saw much of his +ways with men. I thought it plain that he had trouble at times in +keeping back the pride and haughtiness which I had heard had been +the fault in both Neot and himself, for now and then they showed +plainly. Then he made haste to make amends if one was hurt by what +he had said in haste. But altogether I thought him even more kingly +than the mighty Harald Fairhair in some ways.</p> +<p>Truly he had not the vast strength and stature of Norway's king, +but Alfred's was the kingliness of wisdom and statecraft.</p> +<p>Once I said to Odda:</p> +<p>"Can your king fight?"</p> +<p>"Ay, with head as well as with hand," he answered. "His skill in +weapon play makes up for lack of weight and strength. He is maybe +the best swordsman and spearman in England."</p> +<p>I looked again at him, and I saw that since last I turned my +eyes on him he had grown pale, and now his face was drawn, and was +whitening under some pain, as it would seem; and I gripped Odda's +arm.</p> +<p>"See!" I said, "the king dies! he is poisoned!"</p> +<p>And I was starting up, but the ealdorman held me back.</p> +<p>"I pray you pay no heed," he said urgently. "It is the king's +dark hour; he will be well anon."</p> +<p>But nevertheless Alfred swayed in his seat, and two young thanes +who stood waiting on him came to either side and helped him up, and +together they took him, tottering, into the smaller tent that +opened behind the throne; while all the guests were silent, some in +fear, like myself, but others looking pityingly only.</p> +<p>Then a tall man in a dress strange to me--a bishop, as I knew +presently--rose up, and said to those who knew not what was the +matter:</p> +<p>"Doubtless all know that our good king is troubled with a +strange illness that falls on him from time to time. This is such a +time. Have no fear therefore, for the pain he suffers will pass. He +does not will that any should be less merry because of him."</p> +<p>So the feast went on, though the great empty chair seemed to +damp the merriment sadly. I asked Odda if this trouble often befell +the king.</p> +<p>"Ay, over often," he said, "and one knows not when it will come. +No leech knows what it is, and all one can say is that it seems to +harm him not at all when it has gone."</p> +<p>I asked no more, but the king did not come back to the feast, as +he would at times when things happened thus. It seemed that often +the trouble fell on him when feasting, and some have said that it +was sent to prevent him becoming over proud, at his own prayer +<a name="EndNote7anc" href="#EndNote7sym" id= +"EndNote7anc"><sup>{vii}</sup></a>.</p> +<p>Soon the Danes rose up, and would go. Some of the great thanes +set them forth with all honour, and the feast ended. There was no +long sitting over the wine cup at Alfred's board, though none could +complain that he stinted them.</p> +<p>Then the tall bishop who had spoken just now came to me.</p> +<p>"The king will speak with you now, King Ranald, if you will +come," he said.</p> +<p>So I went with him, and Odda came also. The king was lying on a +couch without his heavy state robes, and when we entered the small +tent the attendants left him. He was very pale, but the pain seemed +to have gone, and he looked up pleasantly at me.</p> +<p>"My people are used to this, cousin," he said, "but I fear I put +you out sorely."</p> +<p>"I thought you poisoned," I said; "but Odda told me not to +fear."</p> +<p>"Ay, that has been the thought of others before this," he said. +"Have you ever seen the like in any man? I ask every stranger, in +hopes that I may hear of relief."</p> +<p>"No, I have not, lord king," I answered; "but I can grave runes +that will, as I think, keep away such pain if you bear them on you. +Thord, whom you know, taught me them. Maybe it would be better for +him to grave them, for runes wrongly written are worse than none, +and these are very powerful."</p> +<p>"That is a kindly thought, cousin," Alfred answered; "but I am +sure that no runes will avail when the prayers of my people, from +holy Neot to the little village children, do not. And I fear that +even would they heal me, I must sooner bear the pain than seek to +magic spells."</p> +<p>"Nay, but try them, King Alfred," I said; "there is no ill magic +in them."</p> +<p>Now he saw that I was in earnest, and put me by very kindly.</p> +<p>"I must ask Sigehelm, our bishop here, who is my best leech next +to Neot.</p> +<p>"What say you, father?"</p> +<p>"Even as you have said, my king."</p> +<p>"Maybe, bishop," said I, "you have never tried the might of +runes?"</p> +<p>Whereat the good man held up his hands in horror, making no +answer, and I laughed a little at him.</p> +<p>"Well, then," said the king, "we will ask Neot, for mostly he +seems to say exactly what I do not."</p> +<p>"Neot has gone to Cornwall, and I had forgotten to give you that +message from him. He says he will be there for a time," I said, +rather ashamed at having let slip the message from my mind.</p> +<p>"So you saw him?" said Alfred.</p> +<p>"I knew he went to the ships yesterday after Godred came back," +he added, laughing.</p> +<p>"He read my letter for me, and after that I had a good deal of +talk with him," I said.</p> +<p>"Then," said Sigehelm, "you have spoken with the best man in all +our land."</p> +<p>Now the king said that he would let the question of the runes, +for which he thanked me, stand over thus; and then he asked me to +sit down and hear what he would ask me to do for him, if I had no +plans already made for myself.</p> +<p>I said that I had nothing so certainly planned but that I and my +men would gladly serve him.</p> +<p>"Then," he said, "I would ask you to winter with me, and set my +ships in order. There will be work for you and all your men, for +you shall give them such command in any ship of mine as you know +they are best fitted for. I would ask you to help me carry out that +plan of which you spoke to me when I was Godred."</p> +<p>When Odda heard that, he rubbed his hands together, saying:</p> +<p>"Ay, lord king, you have found the right man at last."</p> +<p>"Then in the spring you shall take full command of the fleet we +will build and the men we shall raise; and you shall keep the seas +for me, if by that time we know that we can work well +together."</p> +<p>He looked hard at me, waiting my answer.</p> +<p>"Lord king," I said at last, "this is a great charge, and they +say that I am always thought older than I am, being given at least +five winters beyond the two-and-twenty that I have seen;" for I +thought it likely that the king held that I had seen more than I +had.</p> +<p>"I was but twenty when I came to the throne," he answered. "I +have no fear for you. More than his best I do not look for from any +man; nor do I wonder if a man makes mistakes, having done so many +times myself."</p> +<p>Here Sigehelm made some sign to the king, to which he paid no +heed at the time, but went on:</p> +<p>"As for your men, I will give them the same pay that Harald of +Norway gives to his seamen, each as you may choose to rank them for +me. You may know what that is."</p> +<p>"Harek the scald knows," I said. "They will be well pleased, for +the pay is good, and places among Harald's courtmen are much sought +for."</p> +<p>Then Alfred smiled, and spoke of myself.</p> +<p>"As for King Ranald himself, he will be my guest."</p> +<p>"I am a wandering viking, and I seem to have found great +honour," I said. "What I can do I will, in this matter. Yet there +is one thing I must say, King Alfred. I would not be where men are +jealous of me."</p> +<p>"The only man likely to be so is Odda," the king answered. "You +must settle that with him. It is the place that he must have held +that you are taking. No man in all England can be jealous of a +viking whose business is with ships. But Odda put this into my mind +at first, and then Godred found out that he was right."</p> +<p>"Lord king," said I, "had I known who you were at that time, I +should have spoken no differently. We Northmen are free in speech +as in action."</p> +<p>"So says Odda," replied Alfred, smiling. "He has piteous tales +of one Thord, whom you sent to teach him things, and the way in +which he was made to learn."</p> +<p>"Nevertheless," said Odda, "I will not have Thord blamed, for it +is in my mind that we should have learned in no other way so +quickly."</p> +<p>Again the bishop signed to the king, and Alfred became +grave.</p> +<p>"Here is one thing that our good Sigehelm minds me of. It seems +that you are a heathen."</p> +<p>"Why, no, if that means one who hates Christians," I said. +"Certainly I do not do that, having no cause to do so. Those whom I +know are yourself, and Neot, and Odda, and one or two more +only."</p> +<p>"That is not it," said the king. "What we call a heathen is one +who worships the old gods--the Asir."</p> +<p>"Certainly I do that--ill enough."</p> +<p>"Then," said Alfred, while Odda shifted in his seat, seeming +anxious as to how I should take this, "it is our rule that before a +heathen man can serve with us, he shall at least be ready to learn +our faith, and also must be signed with the cross, in token that he +hates it not <a name="EndNote8anc" href="#EndNote8sym" id= +"EndNote8anc"><sup>{viii}</sup></a>."</p> +<p>"Why should I not learn of your faith?" I said. "Neot asked me +of mine. As for the other, I do not know rightly what it means. I +see your people sign themselves crosswise, and I cannot tell why, +unless it is as we hallow a feast by signing it with Thor's +hammer."</p> +<p>"It is more than that," Alfred said, motioning to Sigehelm to +say nothing, for he was going to speak. "First you must know what +it means, and then say if you will be signed therewith."</p> +<p>Then he said to Sigehelm:</p> +<p>"Here is one who will listen to good words, not already set +against them, as some Danes are, by reason of ill report and the +lives of bad Christians. Have no fear of telling him what you +will."</p> +<p>Now, if I were to serve King Alfred, it seemed to me to be only +reasonable that I should know the beliefs of those with whom I had +to do. Then I minded me of Neot, and his way of asking about my +gods, as if the belief of every man was of interest to him.</p> +<p>"Here is a deep matter to be talked of, King Alfred," I said. +"It does not do to speak lightly and carelessly of such things. Nor +am I more than your guest as yet, willing to hear what you would +have me know. When winter has gone, and you know if I shall be any +good to you, then will be question if I enter your service +altogether, and by that time I shall know enough. Maybe I shall see +Neot again; he and I began to speak of these things."</p> +<p>Then Sigehelm said:</p> +<p>"I think this is right, and Neot can tell you more in a few +words than I in many. Yet whatever you ask me I will try to tell +you."</p> +<p>"I want to speak with Neot," answered the king, "and we will +ride together and seek him when peace is made. I have many things +to say to him and ask him. We will go as soon as it is safe."</p> +<p>So ended my talk with King Alfred at that time, and I was well +content therewith. So also were my men, for it was certain that +every one of them would find some place of command, were it but +over a watch, when Alfred's new sea levies were to be trained.</p> +<p>Many noble Saxons I met in the week before peace was made with +the Danes in Exeter, for all the best were gathered there. Most of +all I liked Ethered, the young ealdorman of Mercia, and Ethelnoth, +the Somerset ealdorman, and Heregar, the king's standard bearer, an +older warrior, who had seen every battle south of Thames since the +long ago day when Eahlstan the bishop taught his flock how to fight +for their land against the heathen.</p> +<p>These were very friendly with me, and I should see more of them +if I were indeed to ward the Wessex coasts, and for that reason +they made the more of me.</p> +<p>Now I saw no more of Osmund the jarl, for Odda knew that the +lesser folk would mistrust me if I had any doings with the Danes. +Maybe I was sorry not to see the Lady Thora; but if I had seen her, +I do not know what I should have said to her, having had no +experience of ladies' ways at any time, which would have made me +seem foolish perhaps.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_VII" id="Chapter_VII">Chapter VII</a>. The +Pixies' Dance.</h2> +<p>I do not know that there is anything more pleasant after long +weeks at sea than to have a good horse under one, and to be riding +in the fresh winds of early autumn over new country that is +beautiful in sunlight. So when at last every Danish chief had made +submission, and the whole host had marched back to what they held +as their own land in Mercia, going to Gloucester, as was said, with +Odda and Ethered the ealdormen hanging on their rear with a great +levy, I rode with King Alfred to find Neot his cousin gaily enough. +Thord stayed with the ships, but the scald and Kolgrim were with +me, and the king mounted us well. Ethelnoth of Somerset came also, +and some forty men of the king's household; and all went armed, for +the country we had to cross was of the wildest, though we went by +the great road that runs from west to east of England, made even +before the Romans came. But it crossed the edge of Dartmoor, the +most desolate place in all the land, where outlaws and masterless +men found fastnesses whence none could drive them.</p> +<p>One could not wish for a more pleasant companion than Alfred, +and the miles went easily. We had both hawks and hounds with us, +for there was game in plenty, and the king said that with the +ending of the war, and the beginning of new hopes for his fleet, he +would cast care aside for a little. So he was joyous and free in +speech, and at times he would sing in lightness of heart, and would +bid Harek sing also, so that it was pleasant to hear them. Ever +does Harek say that no man sings better than Alfred of England.</p> +<p>In late afternoon we came to the wild fringe of Dartmoor, and +here the king had a guest house in a little village which he was +wont to use on these journeys to see Neot. We should rest there, +and so cross the wastes in full daylight. So he went in, maybe +fearing his sickness, which was indeed a sore burden to him, though +he was wont to make light of it; but Ethelnoth asked me if we +should not spend the hours of evening light in coursing a bustard +or two, for many were about the moorland close at hand. They would +be welcome at the king's table, he said; and I, fresh from the sea +and camp, asked for nothing better than a good gallop over the +wide-stretching hillsides.</p> +<p>So we took fresh horses from those that were led for us, and +rode away. We took hawks--the king had given me a good one when we +started, for a Saxon noble ever rides with hawk on wrist--and two +leash of greyhounds.</p> +<p>I was for putting my arms aside, but the ealdorman said it was +better not to do so, by reason of the moor folk, who were wild +enough to fall on a small party at times. It was of little moment, +however; for we rode in the lighter buff jerkins instead of heavy +mail, and were not going far.</p> +<p>Ethelnoth took two men with him, and my two comrades were with +me--Kolgrim leading the hounds in leash beside his horse. We went +across the first hillside, and from its top looked northward and +westward as far as one could see over the strange grey wastes of +the moorland.</p> +<p>Then from the heather almost under our feet rose a great bustard +that ran down wind with outstretched wings before us, seeking the +lonelier country. Kolgrim whooped, and slipped the leash, and the +hounds sprang after it, and we followed cheering. It was good to +feel the rush of hillside air in our faces, and the spring and +stretch of the horses under us, and to see the long-reached hounds +straining after the great bird that might well be able to escape +them.</p> +<p>I suppose that Ethelnoth started a second bird. I did not look +behind me to see what any man was doing, but followed the chase +round the spur of a granite-topped hillside, and forgot him. For +when the bustard took wing for a heavy flight, and lit and ran +again, and again flew with wings that failed each time more and +more, while the strong legs were the stronger for the short rest, +and when the good hounds were straining after it, one could not +expect me to care for aught but that.</p> +<p>It had been strange if I thought of anything but the sport. I +knew there were two horsemen close by, a little wide on either +flank, but behind me. So we took the bird after a good chase, and +then I knew that we had in some way shaken off the Saxons, and that +we three vikings were together. It did not trouble us, for one +looks for such partings, and Ethelnoth had his own bounds. So we +went on, and found another bustard, and took it.</p> +<p>"Now we must go back," I said; "one must have a thought for the +king's horses."</p> +<p>So we turned, and then a heron rose from a boggy stream below +us, and that was a quarry not to be let go. I unhooded the falcon +and cast her off, and straightway forgot everything but the most +wonderful sight that the field and forest can give us--the dizzy +upward climbing circles of hawk and heron, who strive to gain the +highest place cloudwards, one for attack, the other for safety.</p> +<p>The evening sunlight flashed red from the bright under feathers +of the strong wings as the birds swung into it from the shadow of +the westward hill, and still they soared, drifting westward with +the wind over our heads. Then with a great rushing sound the heron +gave up, and fell, stone-like, from the falcon that had won to air +above him at last. At once the long wings of his enemy closed +halfway, and she swooped after him.</p> +<p>Then back and up, like a sword drawn at need, went the heron's +sharp beak; and the falcon saw it, and swerved and shot past her +nearly-taken prey. Again the heron began to tower up and up with a +harsh croak that seemed like a cry of mockery; then the wondrous +swing and sweep of the long, tireless wings of the passage hawk, +and the cry of another heron far off, scared by its fellow's note; +and again for us a canter over the moorland, eye and hand and knee +together wary for both hawk above and good horse below, till the +falcon bound to the heron, and both came to the ground, and there +was an end in the grey shadow of the Dartmoor tors. Ay, but King +Alfred's hawk was a good one!</p> +<p>"Now, where shall we seek Ethelnoth?" I said.</p> +<p>"No good seeking him," said Harek. "We had better make our way +back to the village."</p> +<p>We coupled up the greyhounds again and hooded the falcon, and +rode leisurely back over our tracks for some way. The sun set about +that time into a purple bank of mist beyond the farther hills. One +does not note how the miles go when one finds sport such as this, +and presently we began to be sure that we had ridden farther than +we had thought. We knew, as we thought, the direction from which we +had come, and steered, sailor-wise, by the sunset. But we could +take no straight course because of the hills, and we were as often +off the line as on.</p> +<p>Then crept up the mist from the valleys, and we had nought to +steer by, for the wind dropped. Then I said:</p> +<p>"Let the horses take us home; they know better than we."</p> +<p>So we rode on slowly until darkness came, but never saw so much +as a light that might guide us. And presently we let the dogs +loose, thinking that they would go homewards. But a greyhound is +not like a mastiff, and they hung round us, careless, or helpless, +in the mists and darkness.</p> +<p>Presently we came to a place where the horses stopped of their +own accord. There was a sheer rock on one side, and the hill was +steep below us, and a stream brawled somewhere before us.</p> +<p>"Well," I said, "here we stay for the night. It is of no use +wandering any longer, and the night is warm."</p> +<p>We thought nothing of this, for any hunter knows that such a +chance may befall him in a strange and wild country. So we laughed +together and off-saddled and hobbled the horses, and so sat down +supperless to wait for morning under the rock. The mist was clammy +round us, thinning and then thickening again as the breaths of wind +took it; but the moon would rise soon, and then maybe it would +go.</p> +<p>We had no means of making a fire, and no cloaks; so sleep came +hardly, and we talked long. Then the dogs grew uneasy, and +presently wandered away into the fog and darkness. I thought that +perhaps they heard some game stirring, and did not wonder at +them.</p> +<p>Now I was just sleeping, when I heard the sharp yelp of a dog in +pain, and sat up suddenly. Then came a second, and after that the +distant sound of voices that rose for a moment and hushed +again.</p> +<p>"We must be close to the village after all," I said, for my +comrades were listening also; "but why did the hounds yell like +that?"</p> +<p>"Some old dame has taken the broomstick to them," said Kolgrim. +"They are hungry, and have put their noses into her milk +pails."</p> +<p>"It is too late for open doors," I said; "unless they have found +our own lodging, where some are waiting for us. But there they +would not be beaten."</p> +<p>"Ho!" said Kolgrim, in another minute or so, "yonder is a +fire."</p> +<p>The wind had come round the hillside and swept the mist away for +a moment, and below us in the valley was a speck of red light that +made a wide glow in the denser fog that hung there. One could +hardly say how far off it was, for fog of any sort confuses +distance; but the brook seemed to run in the direction of the fire, +and it was likely that any house stood near its banks.</p> +<p>"Let us follow the brook and see what we can find," I said +therefore. "These mists are chill, and I will confess that I am +hungry. We cannot lose our way if we keep to the water, and the +horses will be safe enough."</p> +<p>Anything was better, as it seemed to us, than trying to think +that we slept comfortably here, and so we rose up and went down the +banks of the stream at once; and the way proved to be easy enough, +if rocky. The bank on this side was higher, and dry therefore, so +that we had no bogs to fear. We knew enough of them in the Orkneys +and on the Sutherland coast.</p> +<p>The white mist grew very thick, but the firelight glow grew +redder as we went on, and at last we came near enough to hear many +voices plainly; but presently, when one shouted, we found that the +tongue was not known to us.</p> +<p>"Now it is plain whom we have come across," I said. "This is a +camp of the Cornish tin traders, of whom the king told us. They are +honest folk enough, and will put us on the great road. They must be +close to it."</p> +<p>That seemed so likely that we left the brook and began to draw +nearer to the fire, the voices growing plainer every moment, though +we could see no man as yet.</p> +<p>Now, all of a sudden, every voice was silent, and we stopped, +thinking we were heard perhaps; though it did seem strange to me +that no dogs were about a camp of traders. I was just about to call +out that we were friends, when there began a low, even beating, as +of a drum of some sort, and then suddenly a wild howl that sounded +like a war cry of maddened men, and after that a measured tramping +of feet that went swiftly and in time to a chant, the like of which +I had never heard before, and which made me grasp Harek by the +arm.</p> +<p>"What, in Odin's name, is this?" r said, whispering.</p> +<p>"Somewhat uncanny," answered the scald. "Let us get back to the +horses and leave this place."</p> +<p>Then we turned back, and Kolgrim's foot lit on a stone that +rolled from under it, and he fell heavily with a clatter of weapons +on the scattered rocks of the stream bank.</p> +<p>There was a howl from the firelight, and the chanting stopped, +and voices cried in the uncouth tongue angrily, and there came a +pattering of unshod feet round us in the thickness, with a word or +two that seemed as if of command, and then silence, but for +stealthy footfalls drawing nearer to us. And I liked it not.</p> +<p>We pulled Kolgrim up, and went on upstream, drawing our swords, +though I yet thought of nothing but tin merchants whom we had +disturbed in some strange play of their own. Doubtless they would +take us for outlaws.</p> +<p>Now through the fog, dark against the flickering glow of the +fire, and only seen against it, came creeping figures; and I +suppose that some dull glitter of steel from helms or sword hilts +betrayed us to them, for word was muttered among them, and the +rattle of stones shifted by bare feet seemed to be all round us. I +thought it time to speak to them.</p> +<p>"We are friends, good people," I said. "We mean no harm, and +have but lost our way."</p> +<p>There was a whistle, and in a moment the leaping shadows were on +us. Kolgrim went down under a heavy blow on his helm, and lay +motionless; and Harek was whirled by a dozen pairs of hands off his +feet, and fell heavily with his foes upon him. I slew one, or +thought I slew him, and I stood over Kolgrim and kept them back +with long sword sweeps, crying to them to hold, for we were +friends--King Alfred's guests.</p> +<p>Now they were yelling to one another, and one threw a +long-noosed line over me from behind. It fell over my arms, and at +once they drew it tight, jerking me off my feet. As I went down, a +howling crowd fell on me and took the good sword from me, and bound +me hand and foot, having overpowered me by sheer numbers.</p> +<p>Then they looked at Kolgrim, and laughed, and left him. I was +sure he was dead then, and I fell into a great dumb rage that +seemed like to choke me.</p> +<p>They dragged the scald and me to the fire, and I saw into what +hands we had fallen, and I will say that I was fairly afraid. For +these were no thrifty Cornish folk, but wild-looking men, black +haired and bearded, clad in skins of wolf, and badger, and deer, +and sheep, with savage-eyed faces, and rough weapons of rusted +iron and bronze and stone. So strange were their looks and terrible +in the red light of the great fire, that I cried to Harek:</p> +<p>"These be trolls, scald! Sing the verses that have power to +scare them."</p> +<p>Now it says much for Harek's courage that at once he lifted up +no trembling voice and sang lustily, roaring verses old as Odin +himself, such as no troll can abide within hearing of, so that +those who bore him fell back amazed, and stared at him. Then I saw +that on the arms and necks of one or two of these weird folk were +golden rings flashing, and I saw, too, that our poor greyhounds lay +dead near where I was, and I feared the more for ourselves.</p> +<p>But they did not melt away or fly before the spells that Harek +hurled at them.</p> +<p>"These be mortal men," he said at last, "else had they fled ere +now."</p> +<p>By this time they had left me, helpless as a log, and were +standing round us in a sort of ring, talking together of slaying +us, as I thought. I mind that the flint-tipped spears seemed cruel +weapons. At last one of them said somewhat that pleased the rest, +for they broke into a great laugh and clapped their hands.</p> +<p>"Here is a word I can understand," said Harek, "and that is +'pixies.'"</p> +<p>But I was looking to see where our swords were, and I saw a man +take them beyond the fire and set them on what seemed a bank, some +yards from it. Then they went to the scald and began to loosen his +bonds, laughing the while.</p> +<p>"Have a care, Harek," I cried. "Make a rush for the swords +beyond the fire so soon as you are free."</p> +<p>"I am likely to be hove into the said fire," said the scald, +very coolly. "Howbeit I see the place where they are."</p> +<p>Then he gave a great bound and shout: but the numbers round him +were too great, and they had him down again, and yet he struggled. +This was sport to these savages, and those who were not wrestling +with him leaped and yelled with delight to see it. And I wrestled +and tore at my bonds; but they were of rawhide, and I could do +nothing.</p> +<p>Then Harek said, breathing heavily:</p> +<p>"No good; their arms are like steel about me."</p> +<p>Then some came and dragged me back a little, and set me up +sitting against a great stone, so I could see all that went on. Now +I counted fifty men, and there were no women that I could see +anywhere. Half of these were making a great ring with joined hands +round the fire, and some piled more fuel on it--turf and branches +of dwarf oak trees--and others sat round, watching the dozen or so +that minded Harek. One sat cross-legged near me, with a great pot +covered tightly with skin held between his knees.</p> +<p>Next they set Harek on his feet, and led him to the ring round +the fire. Two of the men--and they were among the strongest of +all--loosened their hands, and each gripped the scald by the wrist +and yelled aloud, and at once the man beat on the great pot's cover +drum-wise, and the ring of men whirled away round the fire in the +wild dance whose foot beats we had heard as we came. Then those who +sat round raised the chant we heard also.</p> +<p>I saw Harek struggle and try to break away; but at that they +whirled yet more quickly, and he lost his footing, and fell, and +was dragged up; and then he too must dance, or be haled along the +ground. My eyes grew dizzy with watching, while the drum and the +chant dulled into a humming in my brain.</p> +<p>"This cannot go on for long," I thought.</p> +<p>But then, from among those who sat round and chanted, I saw now +one and now another dart to the ring and take the place of a dancer +who seemed to tire; and so at last one came and gripped Harek's +wrist and swung into the place of his first holder before he knew +that any change was coming, and so with the one on the other side +of him.</p> +<p>Then it was plain that my comrade must needs fall worn out +before long, and I knew what I was looking on at. It was the dance +of the pixies, in truth--the dance that ends but with the death of +him who has broken in on their revels--and I would that I and Harek +had been slain rather with Kolgrim by the stream yonder.</p> +<p>At last the scald fell, and then with a great howl they let him +go, flinging him out of the circle like a stone, and he lay in a +heap where they tossed him, and was quite still.</p> +<p>Then the dancers raised a shout, and came and sat down, and some +brought earthen vessels of drink to refresh them, while they began +to turn their eyes to me, whose turn came next.</p> +<p>Whereon a thought came into my mind, and I almost laughed, for a +hope seemed to lie in a simple trick enough. That I would try +presently.</p> +<p>Now I looked, and hoped to see Harek come to himself; but he did +not stir. He lay near the swords, and for the first time now, +because of some thinning of the mist, I saw what was on the bank +where these had been placed. There was a great stone dolmen, as +they call it--a giant house, as it were, made of three flat stones +for walls, and a fourth for a roof, so heavy that none know how +such are raised nowadays. They might have served for a table, or +maybe a stool, for a Jotun. The two side walls came together from +the back, so that the doorway was narrow; and a man might stand and +keep it against a dozen, for it was ten feet high, and there was +room for sword play. One minds all these things when they are of no +use to him, and only the wish that they could be used is left. +Nevertheless, as I say, I had one little hope.</p> +<p>It was not long before the savage folk were ready for my dance, +and they made the ring again, refreshed. The drum was taken up once +more, and a dozen men came and unbound me. I also struggled as +Harek had struggled, unavailingly. When I was quiet they led me to +the circle, and I watched for my plan to work.</p> +<p>When I was within reach of the two who should hold me, I held +out my hands to grasp theirs, without waiting for them to seize me. +The man on my right took my wrist in a grasp like steel; but the +other was tricked, and took my hand naturally enough. Whereat my +heart leaped.</p> +<p>"Now will one know what a grip on the mainsheet is like!" I +thought; and even as the hand closed there came the yell, and the +thud of the earthen drum, and I was whirled away.</p> +<p>Now I kept going, for my great fear was that I should grow dizzy +quickly. I was taller than any man in the ring, and once I found +out the measure of the chant I went on easily, keeping my eyes on +the man ahead of me. That was the one to my right; for they went +against the sun, which is an unlucky thing to do at any time.</p> +<p>Once we went round, and I saw the great dolmen and the gleam of +sword Helmbiter beneath it. Then it was across the fire, and again +I passed it. I could not choose my place, as it seemed, and +suddenly with all my force I gripped the hand I held and around the +hones of it together, so that no answering grip could come. In a +moment the man let go of his fellow with the other hand, and +screamed aloud, and cast himself on the ground, staying the dance, +so that those after him fell over us. I let go, and swung round and +smote my other holder across the face; and he too let go, and I was +free, and in the uproar the dancers knew not what had happened. +Smiting and kicking, I got clear of them, and saw that the dolmen +towered across the fire, and straightway I knew that through the +smoke was the only way. I leaped at it, and cleared it fairly, +felling a man on the other side as I did so.</p> +<p>Then I had Helmbiter in my hand, and I shouted, and stepped back +to the narrow door of the dolmen, and there stood, while the wild +men gathered in a ring and howled at me. One ran and brought the +long line that had noosed me before, but the stone doorway +protected me from that; and one or two hurled spears at me, +clumsily enough for me to ward them off.</p> +<p>So we stood and watched each other, and I thought they would +make a rush on me. Harek lay within sweep of my sword, and his +weapon was nearer them than me, and one of them picked it up and +went to plunge it in him.</p> +<p>Then I stepped out and cut that man down, and the rest huddled +back a little at my onslaught. Whereon I drew my comrade back to my +feet, lest they should bring me out again and noose me.</p> +<p>As I did that, the one who seemed to be the chief leaped at me, +club in air; but I was watching for him, and he too fell, and I +shouted, to scare back the rest.</p> +<p>There was an answering shout, and Kolgrim, with the Berserker +fury on him, was among the wild crowd from out of the darkness, and +his great sword was cutting a way to my side.</p> +<p>Then they did not stay for my sword to be upon them also, but +they fled yelling and terror stricken, seeming to melt into the +mist. In two minutes the firelit circle was quiet and deserted, +save for those who had fallen; and my comrade and I stared in each +other's faces in the firelight.</p> +<p>"Comrade," I cried in gladness, "I thought you were slain."</p> +<p>"The good helm saved me," he answered; "but I came round in +time. What are these whom we have fought?"</p> +<p>I suppose the fury kept him up so far, for now I saw that his +face was ashy pale, and his knees shook under him.</p> +<p>"Are you badly hurt?" I asked.</p> +<p>"My head swims yet--that is all. Where is the scald?"</p> +<p>I turned to him and pointed. Kolgrim sat down beside him and +bent over him, leaning against the stone of the great dolmen.</p> +<p>"I do not think he is dead, master," he said. "Let us draw him +inside this house, and then he will be safe till daylight--unless +the trolls come back and we cannot hold this doorway till the sun +rises."</p> +<p>"They are men, not trolls," I said, pointing to the slain who +lay between us and the fire in a lane where Kolgrim had charged +through them, "else had we not slain them thus."</p> +<p>"One knows not what Sigurd's sword will not bite," he said.</p> +<p>"Why, most of that is your doing," I said, laughing a +little.</p> +<p>But he looked puzzled, and shook his head.</p> +<p>"I mind leaping among them, but not that I slew any."</p> +<p>Now I thought that he would be the better for food. There had +been plenty of both food and drink going among these wild people, +whatever they were, and they had not waited to take anything. So I +said I would walk round the fire and see what I could find, and +went before he could stay me.</p> +<p>I had not far to go either, for there were plentiful remains of +a roasted sheep or two set aside with the skins, and alongside them +a pot of heather ale; so that we had a good meal, sitting in the +door of the dolmen, while the moon rose. But first we tried to make +Harek drink of the strong ale. He was beginning to breathe heavily +now, and I thought he would come round presently. Whether he had +been hurt by the whirling of the dance or by the fall when they +cast him aside, I could not tell, and we could do no more for +him.</p> +<p>"Sleep, master," said Kolgrim, when we had supped well; "I will +watch for a time."</p> +<p>And he would have it so, and I, seeing that he was refreshed, +was glad to lie down and sleep inside the dolmen, bidding him wake +me in two hours and rest in turn.</p> +<p>But he did not. It was daylight when I woke, and the first ray +of the sun came straight into the narrow doorway and woke me. And +it waked Harek also. Kolgrim sat yet in the door with his sword +across his knees.</p> +<p>"Ho, scald!" I said, "you have had a great sleep."</p> +<p>"Ay, and a bad dream also," he answered, "if dream it was."</p> +<p>For now he saw before us the burnt-out fire, and the slain, and +the strangely-trampled circle of the dance.</p> +<p>"No dream, therefore," he said. "Is it true that I was made to +dance round yon fire till I was nigh dead?"</p> +<p>"True enough. I danced also in turn," I said.</p> +<p>And then I told him how things had gone after his fall.</p> +<p>"Kolgrim has fought, therefore, a matter of fifty trolls," I +said; "which is more than most folk can say for themselves."</p> +<p>Whereat he growled from the doorway:</p> +<p>"Maybe I was too much feared to know what I was doing."</p> +<p>We laughed at him, but he would have it so; and then we ate and +drank, and spoke of going to where we had left the horses, being +none so sure that we should find them at all.</p> +<p>Now the sun drank up the mists, and they cleared suddenly; and +when the last wreaths fled up the hillsides and passed, we saw that +the horses yet fed quietly where we had left them, full half a mile +away up the steep rise down which the stream came.</p> +<p>And it was strange to see what manner of place this was in +daylight, for until the mist lifted we could not tell in the least, +and it was confused to us. Now all the hillsides glowed purple with +heather in a great cup round us, and we were on a little rise in +the midst of them whereon stood the dolmen, and the same hands +doubtless that raised it had set up a wide circle of standing +stones round about it, such as I have seen in the Orkneys. It was +not a place where one would choose to spend the night.</p> +<p>There was no sign of the wild folk anywhere outside the stone +circle. They had gone, and there seemed no cover for them anywhere, +unless they dwelt in clefts and caves of the bare tors around us. +So we feared no longer lest there should be any ambush set for us, +and went about to see what they had left.</p> +<p>There were the long line that had noosed me, the earthen drum +with its dry skin head, the raw hide thongs we had been bound with, +and the food and drink; and that was all save what weapons lay +round the slain, and the bodies of the two good greyhounds.</p> +<p>"These are but men, and not trolls as one might well think," I +said, looking on those who lay before us.</p> +<p>One whom I had slain had a heavy gold torque round his neck, and +twisted gold armlets, being the chief, as I think. Kolgrim took +these off and gave them to me, and then he went to the drum and +dashed it on a stone and broke it, saying nothing.</p> +<p>"Let us be going," I said. "These folk will come back and see to +their dead."</p> +<p>But Kolgrim looked at the drumhead and took it, and then coiled +the long line on his arm.</p> +<p>"Trust a sailor for never losing a chance of getting a new bit +of rigging," said Harek, laughing; for he seemed none the worse for +the things of last night, which indeed began to seem ghostly and +dreamlike to us all. "But what good is the bit of skin?"</p> +<p>"Here be strange charms wrought into it," Kolgrim said. "It will +make a sword scabbard that will avail somewhat against such like +folk if ever we meet them again."</p> +<p>Truly there were marks as of branded signs on the bit of skin, +and so he kept it; and I hung the gold trophies in my belt, and +Harek took some of the remains of our supper: and so we went to the +horses, seeing nothing of the wild men anywhere.</p> +<p>Very glad were the good steeds to see us come, and the falcon, +who still sat on the saddle where I had perched her, spread her +wings and ruffled her feathers to hear us. I unhooded and fed her; +and we washed in the stream, and set out gaily enough, making +southward, for so we thought we should strike the great road. And +at last, when we saw its white line far off from a steep hillside, +I was glad enough.</p> +<p>I cannot tell how we had reached our halting place through the +hills in the dark, nor could I find it again directly. It was +midday before we reached the road, riding easily; so that, what +with the swift gallop of the hunting and the long hours of riding +in mist and darkness, we had covered many miles. We saw no house +till we were close to the road, and then lit on one made of stones +and turf hard by it, where an old woman told us that no party had +been by since daylight.</p> +<p>So we turned eastward and rode to meet the king, and did so +before long. He had left men at his village to wait for us in case +we came back there; but he laughed at us for losing ourselves, +though he said he had no fear for sailors adrift in the wilds when +Ethelnoth came in without us.</p> +<p>But when, as we rode on, I told him what had befallen us, he +listened gravely, and at last said:</p> +<p>"I have heard the like of this before. Men say that the pixies +dwell in the moorland, and will dance to death those who disturb +them. What think you of those you have seen?"</p> +<p>I said that, having slain them, one could not doubt that they +were men, if strange ones.</p> +<p>"That is what I think," he answered. "They are men who would be +thought pixies. Maybe they are the pixies. I believe they are the +last of the old Welsh folk who have dwelt in these wilds since the +coming of the Romans or before. There were the like in the great +fens of East Anglia and Mercia when Guthlac the Holy went there, +and he thought them devils. None can reach these men or know where +they dwell. Maybe they are heathen, and their dance in that stone +ring was some unholy rite that you have seen. But you have been +very far into the wastes, and I have never seen those stones."</p> +<p>And when he handled the gold rings, he showed me that they were +very old; but when he handled the drumhead and looked at the marks +thereon, he laughed.</p> +<p>"Here is the magic of an honest franklin's cattle brand. I have +seen it on beasts about the hills before now. The pixies have made +a raid on the farmer's herds at some time."</p> +<p>Now I think that King Alfred was right, and that we had fallen +into the hands of wild Welsh or Cornish moor folk. But one should +hear Kolgrim's tale of the matter as he shows his sword sheath that +he made of the drumhead; for nothing would persuade him that it was +not of more than mortal work.</p> +<p>"Had the good king been in that place with us, he would have +told a different tale altogether," he says.</p> +<p>So we went on our journey quietly, and ever as we went and spoke +with Alfred, I began to be sure that this pale and troubled king +was the most wondrous man that I had ever seen. And now, as I look +back and remember, I know that in many ways he was showing me that +the faith he held shaped his life to that which seemed best in him +to my eyes.</p> +<p>I know this, that had he scoffed at the Asir, I had listened to +Neot not at all. But when we came to his place, I was ready, and +more than ready, to hear what he had to tell me.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_VIII" id="Chapter_VIII">Chapter VIII</a>. The +Black Twelfth-Night.</h2> +<p>When we came to the little out of the way village among the +Cornish hills near which Neot, the king's cousin, had his dwelling, +I thought it strange that any one should be willing to give up the +stirring life at court for such a place as this. Here was only one +fair-sized house in the place, and that was built not long before +by the king for his own use when he came here, which was often. And +Neot's own dwelling was but a little stone-walled and turf-roofed +hut, apart from all others, on the hillside, and he dwelt there +with one companion--another holy man, named Guerir, a Welshman by +birth--content with the simple food that the villagers could give +him, and spending his days in prayer and thought for the king and +people and land that he loved.</p> +<p>But presently, as I came to know more of Neot, it seemed good +that some should live thus in quiet while war and unrest were over +the country, else had all learning and deeper thought passed away. +It is certain from all that I have heard, from the king himself and +from others, that without Neot's steady counsel and gathered wisdom +Alfred had remained haughty and proud, well-nigh hated by his +people, as he had been when first he came to the throne.</p> +<p>At one time he would drive away any who came to him with plaints +or tales of wrong and trouble; but Neot spoke to him in such wise +that he framed his ways differently. And now I used to wonder to +see him stay and listen patiently to some rambling words of +trifling want, told by a wayside thrall, to which it seemed below +his rank to hearken, and next I would know that it was thus he made +his people love him as no other king has been loved maybe. There +was no man who could not win hearing from him now.</p> +<p>It is said of him that when Neot showed him the faults in his +ways, he asked that some sickness, one that might not make him +useless or loathsome to his people, might be sent him to mind him +against his pride, and that so he had at first one manner of pain, +and now this which I had seen. It may be so, for I know well that +so he made it good for him, and he bore it most patiently. +Moreover, I have never heard that it troubled him in the times of +direst need, though the fear of it was with him always.</p> +<p>Now what Alfred and Neot spoke of at this time I cannot say, +except that it was certainly some plan for the good of the land. I +and my comrades hunted and hawked day by day until the evening +came, and then would sup plainly with the king, and then sit at +Neot's door in the warm evening, and talk together till the stars +came out.</p> +<p>Many things we spoke of, and Neot told me what I would. I cannot +write down those talks, though I mind every word of them. But there +was never any talk of the runes I had offered.</p> +<p>Neot spoke mostly, but Alfred put in words now and then that +ever seemed to make things plainer; and I mind how Ethelnoth the +ealdorman sat silent, listening to questions and answers that maybe +he had never needed to put or hear concerning his own faith.</p> +<p>At first I was only asking because the king wished it, then +because I grew curious, and because I thought it well to know what +a Saxon's faith was if I was to bide among Alfred's folk. Kolgrim +listened, saying nought. But presently Harek the scald would ask +more than I, and his questions were very deep, and I thought that +as days went on he grew thoughtful and silent.</p> +<p>Then one evening the song woke within the scald's breast, and he +said to Neot:</p> +<p>"Many and wise words have you spoken, Father Neot. Hear now the +song of Odin--the Havamal--and tell me if you have aught to equal +it."</p> +<p>"Sing, my son," the good man answered. "Wisdom is from above, +and is taught in many ways."</p> +<p>Then Harek sang, and his voice went over the hillsides, echoing +wonderfully; while we who heard him were very still, unwilling to +lose one word or note of the song. Many verses and sayings of the +"Havamal" I knew, but I had not heard it all before. Now it seemed +to me that no more wisdom than is therein could be found <a name= +"EndNote9anc" href="#EndNote9sym" id= +"EndNote9anc"><sup>{ix}</sup></a>.</p> +<p>So when Harek ended Neot smiled on him, and said:</p> +<p>"That is a wondrous song, and I could have listened longer. +There is little therein that one may not be wiser in +remembering."</p> +<p>"There is nought wiser; it is Odin's wisdom," said Harek.</p> +<p>Now the old hermit, Guerir, Neot's friend, sat on the stone +bench beside the king, and he said:</p> +<p>"Hear the words of the bards, the wondrous 'triads' of old +time."</p> +<p>And he chanted them in a strange melody, unlike aught I had ever +heard. And they, the old savings, were wise as the "Havamal" +itself. But he stopped ere long, saying:</p> +<p>"The English words will not frame the meaning rightly. I do no +justice to the wisdom that is hidden."</p> +<p>Then Neot turned to the king, and said:</p> +<p>"Sing to Harek words from the book of Wisdom that we know. I +think you can remember it well."</p> +<p>"I have not rhymed it," the king answered; "but sometimes the +song shapes itself when it is needed."</p> +<p>He took Guerir's little harp and tuned it afresh and sang. And +in the words were more wisdom than in the Havamal or in the song of +the bards, so that I wondered; and Harek was silent, looking out to +the sunset with wide eyes.</p> +<p>Not long did the king sing, as it seemed to us; and when he +ceased, Harek made no sign.</p> +<p>"Sing now, my cousin, words that are wiser than those; even sing +from the songs of David the king."</p> +<p>So said Neot; and Alfred sang again very wondrously, and as with +some strange awe of the words he said. Then to me it seemed that +beside these the words of Odin were as nought. They became as words +of the wisdom of daily life, wrung from the lips of men forced to +learn by hardness and defeat and loss; and then the words that +Alfred had first sung were as those of one who knew more than Odin, +and yet spoke of daily troubles and the wisdom that grows thereout. +But now the things that he sang must needs have come from wisdom +beyond that of men--wisdom beyond thought of mine. And if so it +seemed to me, I know not how the heart of the scald, who was more +thoughtful and knew more than I, was stirred.</p> +<p>He rose up when Alfred ceased, and walked away down the hillside +slowly, as in a dream, not looking at us; and the kindly Saxons +smiled gently, and said nothing to rouse him.</p> +<p>It is in my mind that Harek's eyes were wet, for he had lost +somewhat--his belief in things he held dearest and first of +all--and had as yet found nothing that should take its place. There +is nought harder than that to a man.</p> +<p>When he had passed out of hearing, I said:</p> +<p>"Are there wiser things yet that you may sing?"</p> +<p>"Ay, and that you may learn, my son," answered Neot. +"Listen."</p> +<p>Then he spoke words from Holy Writ that I know now--the words +that speak of where wisdom may be found. And he said thereafter, +and truly, that it was not all.</p> +<p>Then I seemed to fear greatly.</p> +<p>"Not now, my king, not now," I said; "it is enough."</p> +<p>Then those two spoke to me out of their kind hearts. Yet to me +the old gods were very dear, and I clung to them. Neither Neot nor +the king said aught against them, being very wise, at that +time.</p> +<p>Presently Harek came back, and his eyes were shining.</p> +<p>"Tell me more of this learning," he said, casting himself down +on the grass at Alfred's feet. "Scald have I been since I could +sing, and nought have I heard like this."</p> +<p>"Some day," Neot said; "it is enough now that you should know +what you have heard."</p> +<p>So ended that strange song strife on Neot's quiet hillside. The +sun set, and the fleecy mists came up from the little river below, +and we sat silent till Alfred rose and said farewell, and we went +to the guest house in the village.</p> +<p>Now I think that none will wonder that after we had been with +Neot for those ten days, we were ready and willing to take on us +the "prime signing," as they called it, gladly and honestly. So we +were signed with the cross by Neot, and Alfred and Ethelnoth and +Guerir were our witnesses.</p> +<p>I know that many scoff at this, because there are heathen who +take this on them for gain, that they may trade more openly, or +find profit among Christian folk, never meaning or caring to seek +further into the faith that lies open, as it were, before them. But +it was not so with us, nor with many others. We were free to serve +our old gods if we would, but free also to learn the new faith; and +to learn more of it for its own sake seemed good to us.</p> +<p>So we went back to Exeter with the king, and Neot came for a few +miles with us, on foot as was his wont, parting from us with many +good words. And after he was gone the king was cheerful, and spoke +with me about the ordering of the fleet we were to build, as though +he were certain that I should take command of it in the spring.</p> +<p>And, indeed, after that time there was never any question among +us three vikings about it. It seemed to us that if we had lost +Norway as a home, we had gained what would make as good a country; +and, moreover, Alfred won us to him in such wise that it seemed we +could do nought but serve him. There can be few who have such power +over men's hearts as he.</p> +<p>Exeter seemed very quiet when we came back; for the Danes were +gone, and the king's levies had dispersed, and only the court +remained, though that was enough to make all the old city seem very +gay to those who had known it only in the quiet of peace.</p> +<p>One man was there whom I had hardly thought to meet again, and +that was Osmund the Danish jarl. For he was a hostage in the king's +hands, to make more sure that the peace would be kept. I knew there +were hostages to be given by the beaten host; but I had not asked +who they were, and had been at the ships when they were given up, +ten of them in all, and of the best men among the Danes.</p> +<p>Alfred treated his captives very well, giving them good +lodgings, and bating them often at his own table, so that I saw +much of Osmund. And more than that, I saw much of the Lady Thora, +his daughter, who would not leave him. I do not think that there +could be more certain manner of beginning a close friendship +between a warrior and the lady whom he shall learn to hold first in +his heart, than that in which I first met this fair maiden.</p> +<p>Now one will say that straightway I must fall in love with her, +but it was not so: first of all, because I had not time, since +every day Alfred planned new ships with me and Thord; and next, +because I was his guest, and Osmund was his hostage. Maybe I +thought not much of that, however, not having the thoughts of a +Saxon towards a Dane. But I will say this, that among all the fair +ladies of the queen's household there was none of whom I thought at +all; while of what Thora would say I thought often, and it pleased +me that the Lady Etheldreda, Odda's fair eldest daughter, took pity +on the lonely maiden, and made much of her after a time.</p> +<p>Three weeks I was in Exeter, and then the king went eastward +through his country to repair what damage had been done. Then I +took up my work for him, and got out my ship and sailed westward, +putting into every harbour where a ship might be built, and set the +shipwrights to work, having with me royal letters to sheriffs and +port reeves everywhere that they should do what I ordered them. In +each yard I left two or three of my men, that they should oversee +all things; because if one Saxon thinks he knows better than his +fellow, he will not be ruled by him, whereas no man can dispute +what a born viking has to say about ship craft. It seemed that all +were glad of our coming, and the work began very cheerfully.</p> +<p>All this took long, but at last I came up the Severn, and so +into the river Parret--for the weather would serve me no longer and +laid up the ship in a creek there is at Bridgwater, where Heregar, +the king's standard bearer, was sheriff. He made me very welcome at +his great house near by, at Cannington, and then rode with me to +Bristol; and there I set two ships in frame, and so ended all I +could do for the winter. King Alfred would have a fleet when the +spring came.</p> +<p>Then Heregar and I would go to Chippenham, to spend the time of +the Yule feast with King Alfred; and we rode there with Harek and +Kolgrim, and were made most welcome. Many friends whom I had made +at Exeter were there, and among them, quiet and yet hopeful of +release, were the hostages.</p> +<p>That was a wonderful Yule to me; but I will say little of it, +for the tale of the most terrible Twelfth Night that England has +ever known overshadows it all, though there were things that I +learned at that time, sitting in the church with Harek, at the west +end, and listening, that are bright to me. But they are things by +themselves, and apart from all else.</p> +<p>Now peace was on all the land, and the frost and snow were +bright and sharp everywhere; so that men said that it was a hard +winter, and complained of the cold which seemed nothing to us +Northmen. Maybe there was a foot of snow in deep places, and the +ice was six inches thick on the waters; and the Saxons wondered +thereat, saying that they minded the like in such and such years +before. Then I would tell them tales of the cold north to warm +them, but I think they hardly believed me.</p> +<p>The town was full of thanes and their families who had been +called to Alfred's Yule keeping, and it was very bright and +pleasant among them all, though here and there burnt ruins made +gaps between the houses, minding one that the Danes had held the +place not so long since.</p> +<p>So they kept high feasting for Yule and the New Year, and the +last great feast was for Twelfth Night, and all were bidden for +that, and there was much pleasant talk of what revels should be in +the evening.</p> +<p>The day broke very bright and fair, with a keen, windless frost +that made the snow crisp and pleasant to ride over, hindering one +in no way. And there was the sun shining over all in a way that +made the cold seem nought to me, so that I had known nothing more +pleasant than this English winter, having seen as yet nothing of +the wet and cold times that come more often than such as this. +Then, too, the clear ringing of the bells from every village near +and far was new to me, and I thought I had heard nothing sweeter +than the English call to the church for high festival <a name= +"EndNote10anc" href="#EndNote10sym" id= +"EndNote10anc"><sup>{x}</sup></a>.</p> +<p>So I went to the king, and asked him if I might take with me the +Danish jarl for a ride beyond the town; for the hostages were only +free inside the walls, and I knew this would please Osmund and +Thora well. I said that I would see to his safety and be answerable +for him.</p> +<p>"This must be Osmund, I suppose," the king said, smiling. "I +have heard how you came to know him and his fair daughter at +Wareham. It was well done, though maybe I should blame you for +running over-much risk."</p> +<p>"I think I ran little, lord king," I said; "and I could have +done no less for the poor maiden."</p> +<p>"Surely; but I meant that to go at all was over dangerous."</p> +<p>"I am ready to do the same again for you, my king," I said. "And +after all I was in no danger."</p> +<p>Then said the king, smiling gravely at me:</p> +<p>"Greater often are the dangers one sees not than those which one +has to meet. I have my own thoughts of what risk you ran.</p> +<p>"Well, take your fair lady and the jarl also where you will. But +the feast is set for two hours after noon, and all must be +there."</p> +<p>So I thanked him, and he bade me ask his steward for horses if I +would, and I went straight to Osmund from his presence.</p> +<p>"I think it will be a more pleasant ride than our last," said +Thora. "Yet that is one that I shall not forget."</p> +<p>Then I tried to say that I hoped she did not regret it either, +but I minded me of the loved nurse she had to leave, and was silent +in time. Yet I thought that she meant nothing of sorrow in the +remembrance as she spoke.</p> +<p>We called out my two comrades, for Osmund liked them well, and +rode away northward, that the keen air might be behind us as we +returned. That was all the chance that led us that way, and it was +well that we were so led, as things turned out.</p> +<p>The white downs and woodlands sparkling with frost were very +beautiful as we rode, and we went fast and joyously in the fresh +air; but the countryside was almost deserted, for the farmsteads +were burned when the Danes broke in on the land last spring, and +few were built up as yet. The poor folk were in the town now, for +the most part, finding empty houses enough to shelter them, and +none left to whom they belonged.</p> +<p>Now we rode for twelve miles or so, and then won to a hilltop +which we had set as our turning place. I longed to stand there and +look out over all this country, that seemed so fair after the +rugged northern lands I had known all my life. But when we were +there we saw a farmstead just below us, on the far slope of the +gentle hill; and we thought it well to go there and dismount, and +maybe find some food for ourselves and the horses before turning +back.</p> +<p>So we went on. It was but a couple of furlongs distant, and the +buildings lay to the right of the road, up a tree-shaded lane of +their own.</p> +<p>We turned into this, and before we had gone ten yards along it I +halted suddenly. I had seen somewhat that seemed strange, and +unmeet for the lady to set eyes on.</p> +<p>"Bide here, jarl," I said, "and let us go on and see what is +here; the place looks deserted."</p> +<p>And I looked meaningly at him, glancing at Thora.</p> +<p>But he had seen what had caught my eye, and he stayed at once, +turning back into the main road, and beckoning Harek to come with +him and Thora, for some reason of his own.</p> +<p>Then Kolgrim and I went on. What we had seen was a man lying +motionless by the farm gate, in a way that was plain enough to me. +And when we came near, we knew that the man had been slain. He was +a farm thrall, and he had a pitchfork in his hand, the shaft of +which was half cut through, as with a sword stroke that he had +warded from him, though he had not stayed a second cut, for so he +was killed.</p> +<p>"Here is somewhat strangely wrong," I said.</p> +<p>"Outlaws' work," answered Kolgrim; for the wartime had made the +masterless folk very bold everywhere, and the farm was lonely +enough.</p> +<p>We rode through the swinging gate, and then we saw three horses +by the stable yard paling, and with them was an armed man, who saw +us as we came round the house, and whistled shrilly. Whereon two +others came running from the building, and asked in the Danish +tongue what he called for. The first man pointed to us, and all +three mounted at once. They were in mail and helm, fully armed.</p> +<p>Now we were not, for we had thought of no meeting such as this, +and rode in woollen jerkins and the like, and had only our swords +and seaxes, as usual; but for the moment I did not think that we +should need either. Outlaws such as I took them for do not make any +stand unless forced.</p> +<p>Presently one of the men, having mounted leisurely enough, +called to us.</p> +<p>"There is no plunder to be had," he said, "even if you were not +too late; our folk cleared out the place over well last time."</p> +<p>Then a fourth man, one who seemed of some rank, rode from beyond +the house, passing behind us without paying any heed to us, except +that he called to the men to follow him, and so went down the lane +towards where Osmund was waiting with Harek.</p> +<p>All this puzzled me, and so I cried to the three men:</p> +<p>"What do you here? Whose men are you?"</p> +<p>At that they looked at one another--they were not more than ten +yards from us now--and halted.</p> +<p>"You should know that," one said; and then he put his hand to +his sword suddenly, adding in a sharp voice:</p> +<p>"These be Saxons; cut them down."</p> +<p>When hand goes to sword hilt one knows what is coming, and even +as the man said his last words I was on them, and Kolgrim was not a +pace behind me. The Dane's sword was out first; but I was upon him +in time. His horse swerved as mine plunged forward, and I rode him +down, horse and man rolling together in the roadway. Then the man +to my right cut at me, and I parried the blow and returned it. Then +that horse was riderless, and I heard Kolgrim laugh as his man went +down with a clatter and howl.</p> +<p>My horse plunged on for a few steps, and then I turned. Kolgrim +had one horse by the bridle, and was catching that which had +fallen. I caught the other, and so we looked at each other.</p> +<p>"This is your luck, master," said Kolgrim.</p> +<p>"Well," said I, "these are Danes, and I do not think they are +wanderers either. Here are forage bags behind the saddles. One +would say that they were on the march if this were not mid-winter +and time of peace. The horsemen in advance of a host, or the +like."</p> +<p>Then Kolgrim said:</p> +<p>"Where has the other man gone? I had forgotten him for the +moment."</p> +<p>"Bide here and see if any poor farm folk are yet alive," I said. +"I will ride after him."</p> +<p>So I gave the horse I was holding to my comrade, and went back +quickly down the lane to where Osmund and the other two were. The +man I sought was speaking with the jarl, whose face was white and +troubled. Harek was looking red and angry, but on Thora's face was +written what I could not understand--as it were some fear of a new +terror.</p> +<p>Now it was plain that all three were very glad of my coming; but +the stranger looked round for a single glance, and then went on +speaking to Osmund.</p> +<p>"Be not a fool, jarl," he said angrily. "Here is your chance; +let it not slip."</p> +<p>"I tell you that my word shall not be broken," Osmund replied, +very coldly and sternly.</p> +<p>"What say you, girl?" the man said then, turning to Thora. +"Short shrift will be the jarl's when Alfred finds that we are on +him."</p> +<p>But Thora turned away without a word, and then the Dane spoke to +me:</p> +<p>"Here! you are another hostage, I suppose."</p> +<p>"I am not," I answered.</p> +<p>"Well, then, here is Jarl Osmund, if you know him not, and he is +one. Tell him that what I say is true, and that Chippenham town +will be burned out tonight king and all."</p> +<p>I saw that the Dane, seeing that I was armed, and not clad in +the Saxon manner altogether, took me for one of his own people. And +from his words it was plain that some of the Danish chiefs had +broken away from Guthrum, and were making this unheard-of +mid-winter march to surprise Alfred. Most likely they were +newcomers into Mercia, and had nought to do with the Exeter +host.</p> +<p>"Maybe it is true," I answered; "but I am no Dane."</p> +<p>He laughed loudly.</p> +<p>"Why, then, you are one of Alfred's Norsemen! Now I warn you to +get away from Chippenham, for it is unsafe, and there will be no +king to pay you tomorrow. I think that you will say with me that it +were better for Osmund to come with me to meet the host than to go +back to Alfred and be hung before he flies--if he gets news of us +in time to do so."</p> +<p>Herein the man was right, for Alfred had warned the chiefs at +Exeter that he held the hostages in surety for peace on the part of +all and any Danes. But I thought I might learn more, so I said:</p> +<p>"Guthrum thinks little of his friends' lives."</p> +<p>"Guthrum!" the Dane answered sneeringly; "what have we to do +with him and his peace making?"</p> +<p>"What then are you Hubba's men?"</p> +<p>"He is in Wales. Think you that we are all tied to the sons of +Lodbrok?"</p> +<p>"You might have worse leaders," I said.</p> +<p>And just then Kolgrim came along the lane, leading the three +horses, and on them were the armour and weapons of the slain. It +was not my comrade's way to leave for other folk aught that was +worth having.</p> +<p>At once the Dane knew what had happened, and he swung his horse +round and spurred it fiercely, making for flight. Then Harek looked +at me and touched his sword hilt, and I nodded. It was well to let +no tidings of our knowledge go back to the host. After the Dane +therefore went Harek, and I looked at Osmund.</p> +<p>"Jarl," I said, "I am in a strait here. If you go back, your +life is in Alfred's hands."</p> +<p>"I know it," he said, smiling faintly. "It is a hard place maybe +for us both, but there is only one way. You must get back to the +king, and I with you; for you have to answer for me, and my word is +passed not to escape."</p> +<p>Then Thora said:</p> +<p>"The king is just, as all men know. How should he slay you for +what you cannot help?"</p> +<p>"Ay," he answered, smiling at her, "that is right."</p> +<p>So she was satisfied, knowing nought perhaps of what the place +of a hostage is.</p> +<p>So we started back to Chippenham quickly, and after us I heard +Harek coming. He had a led horse when he joined us, and I knew that +none would take word to the Danish host that the king was +warned.</p> +<p>When we came to the hilltop over which we had ridden so blithely +an hour ago or less, we looked back, and at first saw nothing. Then +over the white brow of a rolling down that shone in the level +sunlight came a black speck that grew and lengthened, sliding, as +it were, like a snake down the hillside. And that line sparkled +like ice in the sunlight from end to end; for it was the Danish +host on the march, and in two hours they would be where we stood, +and in two more they who were mounted would be in Chippenham +streets, where Alfred had not enough men even to guard the gates +against such a force as was coming.</p> +<p>Then we rode hard for the lives of all who were in the town, and +as I went I thought also that we rode to the death of the brave, +honest jarl who was beside me, saying nothing, but never letting +his horse falter. Just as bravely rode Thora.</p> +<p>In an hour we were at the gates, and I rode straight to the +king's house, and sought him on urgent business.</p> +<p>Ethered of Mercia came out to me.</p> +<p>"What is it, Ranald?" he said. "The Witan is set now."</p> +<p>I told him in few words, and his face changed.</p> +<p>"It seems impossible in frost and snow," he said.</p> +<p>"Ay; but there are proofs," I said, pointing through the great +doorway.</p> +<p>There was my party, and Kolgrim was binding a wound on Harek's +arm of which I knew nought till that moment, and the led horses and +spoils were plain enough to say all.</p> +<p>Then Ethered made haste and took me to the great hall, where +Alfred sat with some thirty thanes of his Witan <a name= +"EndNote11anc" href="#EndNote11sym" id= +"EndNote11anc"><sup>{xi}</sup></a>, and many clergy. I knew they +were to meet on some business that I had nought to do with. Ethered +went to the king without any ceremony, and speaking low told him my +message. Whereon the king's face grew white and then red, and he +flashed out into terrible wrath:</p> +<p>"Forsworn and treacherous!" he cried, in a thick voice that +shook with passion. "The hostages--chain them and bring them here. +Their friends shall find somewhat waiting them here that shall make +them wish they had kept their oaths!"</p> +<p>Then he said to me:</p> +<p>"Speak out, Ranald, and tell these thanes your news."</p> +<p>I spoke plainly, and they listened with whitening faces and +muttered oaths. And when I ceased, one cried, hardly knowing what +he said, as I think:</p> +<p>"This outlander rode with Osmund the Dane to bring them on us +even now."</p> +<p>"Silence!" Alfred said; and then in a cold voice he asked +me:</p> +<p>"Where is this Osmund? I suppose he has fled to his people."</p> +<p>"That he has not, though he could have done so," I answered. +"Moreover, the Dane I spoke with said in so many words that this is +no host of Guthrum's."</p> +<p>At that Alfred frowned fiercely.</p> +<p>"Whose then? What good is a king if he cannot make his people +keep their oaths?"</p> +<p>There was a stir at the door, and the eyes of all turned that +way. And when the thanes saw that the hostages were being led in, +with Osmund at their head, a great sullen growl of wrath broke from +them, and I thought all hope was gone for the lives of those +captives.</p> +<p>"Hear you this?" the king said, in a terrible voice, when the +noise ceased. "By the deed of your own people your lives are +forfeit. They have broken the peace, and even now are marching on +us. Your leader, Osmund himself, has seen them."</p> +<p>"It is true," Osmund said. "We are in the king's hands."</p> +<p>Then Alfred turned to the Witan, who were in disorder, and in +haste, as one might see, to be gone to their houses and fly.</p> +<p>"You heard the Danish oath taken at Exeter; what is your word on +this?"</p> +<p>They answered in one voice:</p> +<p>"Slay them. What else?"</p> +<p>"You hear," said the king to the Danes. "Is not the sentence +just?"</p> +<p>"It is what one might look for," Osmund answered, "but I will +say this, that this is some new band of Danes, with whom we have +nought to do."</p> +<p>"What!" said Alfred coldly; "will you tell me that any Dane in +the country did not know that I held hostages for the peace? Go +to.</p> +<p>"See to this matter, sheriff."</p> +<p>Then the sheriff of Chippenham came forward, and it seemed to me +that it was of no use for me to say aught; yet I would try what I +could do, so I spoke loudly, for a talk had risen among the +thanes.</p> +<p>"What is this, lord king? Will you slay Osmund the jarl, who has +kept his troth, even to coming back to what he knew would be his +death? You cannot slay such a man for the oath breaking of +others."</p> +<p>Then the king looked long at me, and the sheriff stayed, and at +first I expected passionate words; but the king's rage was cold and +dreadful now.</p> +<p>"His friends slay him--not I," he answered.</p> +<p>Then of a sudden I minded somewhat, and clear before me stood a +test by which I might know certainly if it were good that I should +leave the Asir and follow the way of the white Christ.</p> +<p>"King Alfred," I said, "I have heard the bishop tell, in the +great church here, of a king who slew the guiltless at +Christmastide. There was nought too hard for any to say of that +man. Moreover, I have heard strange and sweet words of peace at +this time, of forgiveness of enemies and of letting go of +vengeance. Are these things nought, or are they indeed those by +which you guide yourselves, as Neot says?"</p> +<p>He was silent, gazing fixedly on me; and all the Witan were +speechless, listening.</p> +<p>"These men are enemies maybe, but they at least have done +nought. Shall you avenge yourself on them for the wrongdoing of +others?"</p> +<p>Then the king's face changed, and he looked past me, and in his +eyes grew and shone a wondrous light, and slowly he lifted up his +hand, and cried, in a great voice that seemed full of joy:</p> +<p>"Hear this, O ye Danes and foes of the Cross. For the love of +Christ, and in His name, I bid you go in peace!"</p> +<p>And then, as they stared at him in wonder and awe at his look +and words, Alfred said to me:</p> +<p>"Unbind them, my brother, and let them go--nay, see them safely +to some strong house; for the poor folk may slay them in their +blind anger, even as would I have done."</p> +<p>Then no man hindered me--for it seemed as if a great fear, as of +the might of the holy name, had fallen on all--and I went and cut +the bonds of the captives. And as I did so, Osmund said in a low +voice to me:</p> +<p>"First daughter and then father. We owe our lives to you."</p> +<p>"Nay," I answered, "but to the Christians' faith."</p> +<p>Then I hurried them out before news of what was on hand could +get among the townsfolk, and we went quickly to my lodgings; for +that was a strong house enough, and could be barred in such wise +that even if any tried to attack the place in the flight that would +begin directly, it would take too long to break the doors down to +be safe with the host at hand.</p> +<p>Then came Heregar, armed and mounted, with a single man behind +him, and he called for me.</p> +<p>"Ride out with me, King Ranald, for we must count these Danes, +and see that we are not overrating their number. After that we will +join the king, who goes to Glastonbury."</p> +<p>So I bade farewell to Osmund and to Thora, who said nought, but +looked very wistfully, as if she would say words of thanks but +could not; and at that I went quickly, for it seemed hard to leave +her, in some way that was not clear to me, amid all the turmoil of +the place.</p> +<p>But when we were on the road, Heregar said to me:</p> +<p>"It is in my mind that Osmund, your friend, will fare ill among +these Danes. They will hear how he rode back, and will hold that by +his means the king escaped."</p> +<p>"What can be done?"</p> +<p>"The man is one of a thousand, as it seems to me. Let us bid him +leave the town and get back to Guthrum as he can."</p> +<p>"He can have the Danish horses," I said.</p> +<p>Now before sunset we had seen the Danish force, and our hearts +sank. There were full ten thousand men, many of whom were +mounted.</p> +<p>Then we rode back, and found the town in such tumult as it is +not good to think on. There is nothing more terrible to see than +such a flight, and in midwinter.</p> +<p>When we came to my lodging, Heregar went in to find Osmund. I +would not see him again, lest Thora should weep. But in a few +minutes he came out with the jarl.</p> +<p>"Here is a wise man," said Heregar. "He says that he swore to +keep the peace with Alfred, and he will do it. He and the Lady +Thora will go with us. There are one or two also of the other +hostages who blame him for returning. He cannot stay among the +Danes here."</p> +<p>Then I was very glad, and we made haste to have all ready for +Thora's comfort on the ride that might be so long. And so we rode +out after the king along the road to Glastonbury, and I think that +the Danes were in the town half an hour after we left it.</p> +<p>Next we knew that Danes were on the road before us, and that +more were hard after us. Some had skirted the town in order to cut +off the king, and were pursuing him. So we struck off the road into +by-lanes that Heregar knew, resting at lonely houses as we went on. +And when we came to Glastonbury at last, the king was not there, +nor did any know of his fate.</p> +<p>Then we rode, with the Danes swarming everywhere, through the +Sedgemoor wastes to Bridgwater, and found rest at Cannington, +Heregar's great house not far off.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_IX" id="Chapter_IX">Chapter IX</a>. The Sign +of St. Cuthberht.</h2> +<p>I suppose that in our flight from Glastonbury to Bridgwater we +passed through more dangers than we knew of; for Danes were hard +after us, riding even into sight from the town that evening, and +next day coming even to the eastern end of the old bridge, and +bandying words with the townsfolk who guarded it. Across it they +dared not come, for there is a strong earthwork on the little rise +from the river, which guards both bridge and town, and in it were +my Norsemen with the townsfolk.</p> +<p>So we were in safety for a time; and it seemed likely that we +might be so for long if but a few men could be gathered, for here +was a stretch of country that was, as it were, a natural fastness. +Three hundred years ago the defeated Welsh had turned to bay here +while Kenwalch of Wessex and his men could not follow them; and now +it seemed likely that here in turn would Wessex stand her +ground.</p> +<p>It is a great square-sided patch of rolling, forest-covered +country, maybe twelve miles long from north to south, and half as +much across. None can enter it from the north, because there is the +sea, and a wild coast that is not safe for a landing; on the west +the great, steep, fort-crested Quantock Hills keep the border; on +the eastern side is the river Parret, and on the north the Tone, +which joins it. Except at Bridgwater, at the eastern inland corner, +and Taunton, at the western--one at the head of the tidal waters of +the Parret, and the other guarding the place where the Quantocks +end--there is no crossing the great and wide-stretching fens of +Sedgemoor and Stanmoor and the rest that lie on either bank of the +rivers. Paths there are that the fenmen know, winding through mere +and peat bog and swamp, but no host can win through them; and +perhaps those marches are safer borders than even the sea.</p> +<p>If one came from the sea, one must land at Watchet, and then win +a path across the Quantocks, and there is the ancient camp of +Dowsborough to block the way; or else put into the Parret, and +there, at the first landing place, where they say that Joseph of +Arimathaea landed, bearing the holy thorn staff in his hand, is the +strong hill fort of Combwich, old as the days of that Joseph, or +maybe older.</p> +<p>So with walled towns and hill forts the corners of Heregar's +land were kept; and with sea and marsh and hill the sides were +strong, and we thought to find Alfred the king here before us. But +he was not; and next day we rode on to Taunton to seek him there, +for that was the strongest fortress in that part of the west. And +again he was not to be heard of. Then fear for his life began to +creep into our minds, and we came back to Cannington sorely +downcast.</p> +<p>Then Heregar spoke to me very kindly of what he thought I could +best do, and it was nothing more or less than that I should leave +this land, which seemed to have no hope of honour for me now.</p> +<p>"Go rather to Rolf, your countryman," he said. "There is great +talk of his doings in Neustria <a class="EndNoteanc" name= +"EndNote12anc" href="#EndNote12sym" id= +"EndNote12anc"><sup>{xii}</sup></a> beyond the Channel. It is your +kindness only that holds you here, King Ranald, and there wait +glory and wealth for you and your men."</p> +<p>So he urged me for a little while, not giving me time to answer +him as I would; but when I said nothing he stayed his words, and +then I spoke plainly, and it was good to see his face light up as I +did so.</p> +<p>"It shall not be said of me that I left King Alfred, who has +been my good friend, in time of trouble; rather will I stay here +and do what I can to help him out of it. Why, there are ships that +I have put in frame for him in the western ports that the Danes +will not reach yet, if at all. When spring comes we will man them +and make a landing somewhere, and so divide the Danish host at +least."</p> +<p>"Now I will say no more," answered the thane, putting his hand +on mine. "Speak thus to the king when we find him, and it will do +him good, for I think that when he left Chippenham he was well-nigh +despairing."</p> +<p>"It is hard to think that of Alfred," I said.</p> +<p>"Ay; but I saw his face as he rode away just before I sought +you. Never saw I such a look on a man's face before, and I pray +that I may not see it again. It was terrible to look on him, for I +think he had lost all hope."</p> +<p>"For the time, maybe," I said; "but I cannot believe that when +the first weight of the blow passed he was not himself again."</p> +<p>Presently there came a shift of wind and a quick thaw with +driving rain, and floods grew and spread rapidly in the low-lying +lands. One good thing can be said of this weather, and that was +that because of it the Danes burned neither town nor farmstead, +needing all the shelter they could find.</p> +<p>Three days that gale lasted, and then the wind flew round again +to the north, with return of the frost in even greater strength +than before; and the weather-wise fishers and shepherds said that +this betokened long continuance thereof, and so it seemed likely to +be.</p> +<p>But through it all we heard no tidings of the king; and in one +way that was good, for had he been taken by the Danes, they would +have let all men know thereof soon enough. But we feared that he +might have been slain by some party who knew not who he was, and +that fear hung heavily over us all.</p> +<p>Next we had a messenger from Odda, who was at Exeter, asking for +sure word of what had befallen; and the one hope we had yet was +gone, for he too knew nothing.</p> +<p>Very sad and silent was Osmund the jarl, though he and Thora +were most kindly received as honoured guests by the Lady Alswythe +and the household of the thane.</p> +<p>Once I asked him what his plans were, for we were both +strangers, and I knew him best.</p> +<p>"Presently," he said, "I shall try to get back to Guthrum. While +I am here I will be held as if I were no one--as a harmless ghost +who walks the house, neither seeing nor hearing aught. If there +were Welsh to be fought, I would fight beside you all, gladly, for +Alfred; but as the war is against my own folk, I can do nothing. I +will neither fight for them nor fight against them; for King Alfred +and you, my friend, gave me life, and it is yours. I think that +some day I may be of use to Alfred in helping to bring about a +lasting peace."</p> +<p>"If we find him," I said.</p> +<p>"Ay, you will find him. He is hiding now for some wise reason +that we shall know. I think it is not known how his plans are +feared by our folk. I am sure that of this midwinter march the +Danes will say that it is worthy of Alfred himself."</p> +<p>Nevertheless we heard nothing of him, though the thane had men +out everywhere trying to gain news. All that they heard was the +same tale of dismay from whoever they might meet, and I think that +but for a chance we should not have found him until he chose to +come forth from his refuge.</p> +<p>Heregar the thane had a strange serving man, the same who had +ridden with him and me to meet the Danish forces; and this man was +a fenman from Sedgemoor, who knew all the paths through the wastes. +Lean and loose-limbed he was, and somewhat wild looking, mostly +silent; but where his lord went he went also. They said that he had +saved the thane's life more than once in the great battles about +Reading, when the Danish host first came.</p> +<p>This man was out daily, seeking news with the rest; and one day, +just a week after we had come to Cannington, when the frost had +bound everything fast again, he came home and sought his +master.</p> +<p>Heregar and I and Osmund sat together silently before the fire, +and he looked from one to the other of us outlanders.</p> +<p>"Speak out, Dudda," said Heregar, who knew his ways; "here are +none but friends."</p> +<p>"Ay, friends of ours sure enough; but are they the king's?"</p> +<p>"Most truly so. Have you news of him?"</p> +<p>"I have not; but I have heard some fenmen talking."</p> +<p>Then Osmund rose up and went his way silently, as was his wont; +and Dudda grinned at us.</p> +<p>"He is a good Dane," he said; "now I can speak. They say there +is some great lord hiding in the fens beyond the round hill where +Tone and Parret join, that we call the Stane--somewhere by Long +Hill, they say. Now I mind that one day when the king rode with you +across the Petherton heights, he looked out over all the fens, and +called me and asked much of them. And when I told him what he +would, he said, 'Here is a place where a man might lie hid from all +the world if he chose.' So he laughed, and we rode on."</p> +<p>"I mind it," said Heregar; "but it was many years ago."</p> +<p>"I think he may be there, for our king weighs his words, and +does not forget. I held his horse at your door in Chippenham the +other day, and he spoke to me by name, and put me in mind of little +things for which he had laughed at me in those same old days. He is +a good king."</p> +<p>So said Dudda, the rough housecarl; and it is in my mind that +the kindly remembrance would have wiped out many a thought of +wrong, had there been any. That is a kingly gift to remember all, +and no king has ever been great who has not had it; for it binds +every man to his prince when he knows that aught he has done is not +forgotten, so it be good to recall.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that next day, very early, we rode away, +taking Harek and Kolgrim and this man Dudda with us, well armed and +mounted and full of hope, across the southward ridge that looks +down over the fens of the meeting of Tone and Parret, where they +are widest and wildest. No Danes had crossed them yet, and when I +saw what they were like I thought that they never could do so.</p> +<p>And as I looked at the long chains of ice-bound meres and pools +that ran among dense thickets of alder and wide snow-covered +stretches of peat bogs, it seemed that we might search in vain for +one who would hide among them. Only the strange round hill on +Stanmoor seemed to be a point that might be noted on all the level, +though Dudda told us that there were many islets hidden in the +wooded parts.</p> +<p>We went to the lower hills and then to the very edge of the +fenland, skirting along it, and asking here and there of the +cottagers if they knew of any folk in hiding in the islets. But +though we heard of poor people in one or two places, none of them +knew of any thane; and the day wore on, and hope began to grow dim, +save for Dudda's certainty that what he had heard was true.</p> +<p>At last we came to a long spur of high ground that runs out into +the fen, about midway between Bridgwater and Taunton; and there is +the village they call Lyng, where we most hoped to hear good news. +The day was drawing to sunset, and we would hasten; so Heregar went +one way and I another, each to distant cottages that we saw. The +lane down which I and my two comrades rode seemed to lead fenwards, +and it was little more than a track, deep in snow and tree +bordered. The cottage we sought was a quarter mile away when we +left the thane, and as we drew near it we saw an old woman walking +away from it, and from us also. She did not seem to hear us when we +called to her; and, indeed, such was the fear of Danes that often +folk would fly when they saw us, and the faster because we called, +not waiting to find out who we were.</p> +<p>Then from out of the cottage came another old woman, who hobbled +into the track and looked after the first, shaking her fist after +her, and then following her slowly, looking on the ground. She +never glanced our way at all, and our horses made no noise to speak +of in the snow.</p> +<p>We drew up to her, and then I saw that she had a hammer in her +right hand and a broad-headed nail in her left. I wondered idly +what she was about with these things, when she stooped and began to +hammer the nail into the iron-hard ground, and I could hear her +muttering some words quickly.</p> +<p>I reined up to watch her, puzzled, and said to Harek:</p> +<p>"Here is wizardry; or else what is the old dame about?"</p> +<p>"It is somewhat new to me," the scald said, looking on with much +interest; for if he could learn a new spell or charm, he was +pleased as if he had found a treasure.</p> +<p>Then I saw that she was driving the nail into a footprint. There +were three tracks only along the snow--two going away from the +cottage and one returning. That which went and returned was made by +this old woman, as one might see from her last steps, which made a +fourth track from the door.</p> +<p>"She is hammering the nail into her own footprint," I said, +noting this.</p> +<p>Now she sang in a cracked voice, hammering savagely the while; +and now and then she shook her fist or hammer, or both, towards +where the other old dame had gone out of sight round a bend of the +lane.</p> +<p>Then she put her hand to her back and straightened herself with +a sort of groan, as old dames will, and slowly turned round and saw +us.</p> +<p>Whereat she screamed, and hurled the hammer at Kolgrim, who was +laughing at her, cursing us valiantly for Danes and thieves, and +nearly hitting him.</p> +<p>"Peace, good mother," I said; "we are not Danes. Here is earnest +thereof," and I threw her a sceatta from my pouch.</p> +<p>She clutched it from the ice pool where it fell, and stared at +us, muttering yet. Then Harek spoke to her.</p> +<p>"Mother, I have much skill in spells, but I know not what is +wrought with hammer and nail and footprint. I would fain +learn."</p> +<p>"Little know you of spells if you know not that," she said, +having lost all fear of us, as it seemed.</p> +<p>"I am only a northerner," Harek said. "Maybe 'tis a spell +against a sprained ankle, which seems likely. I only know one for +that."</p> +<p>"Which know you?" she said scornfully; "you are over young to +meddle with such like."</p> +<p>"This," said Harek. "It works well if the sprain be bathed with +spring-cold water, while one says it twice daily:</p> +<pre class="verse"> +"'Baldur and Woden +Went to the woodland; +There Baldur's foal fell, +Wrenching its foot.' +</pre> +<p>"That is how it begins."</p> +<p>Then the old woman's eyes sparkled.</p> +<p>"Ay; that is good. Learn it me, I pray you. Now I know that you +have wizardry, for you name the old gods."</p> +<p>"Tell me first what hammer and nail work in footprint."</p> +<p>"Why, yon old hag has overlooked me," she said savagely. "Now, +if one does as I have done, one nails her witchcraft to herself +<a name="EndNote13anc" href="#EndNote13sym" id= +"EndNote13anc"><sup>{xiii}</sup></a>."</p> +<p>"Whose footprint does the nail go into?" Harek asked.</p> +<p>"Why, hers surely. Now this is the spell," and she chanted +somewhat in broad Wessex, and save that Baldur's name and Thor's +hammer also came into it, I do not know what it all was. I waxed +impatient now, for I thought that Heregar might be waiting for +us.</p> +<p>But she and Harek exchanged spells, and then I said:</p> +<p>"Now, dame, know you of any thane in hiding hereabouts?"</p> +<p>Thereat she looked sharply at me.</p> +<p>"I know nothing. Here be I, lamed, in the cottage all day."</p> +<p>"There is a close friend of mine in hiding from the Danes +somewhere here," I said, doubting, from her manner, if she spoke +the truth. "I would take him to a safer place."</p> +<p>"None safer," she answered. "What is his name?"</p> +<p>Then I doubted for a moment; but Harek's quick wit helped +me.</p> +<p>"Godred," he said; for the name by which the king had called +himself once it was likely that he would use again.</p> +<p>"I know of no thanes," she said, though not at once, so that I +was sure she knew somewhat more than she thought safe to tell.</p> +<p>Then she was going, but Harek stayed her.</p> +<p>"Yours is a good spell against the evil eye, mother," he said, +"but I can tell you a better."</p> +<p>"What is it?" she said eagerly.</p> +<p>"News for news," he answered carelessly. "Tell us if you know +aught of this thane, and I will tell you."</p> +<p>"I said not that there was a thane." she said at once.</p> +<p>"Nay, mother; but you denied it not. Come now; I think what I +can tell you will save you trouble."</p> +<p>She thought for a little, weighing somewhat in her mind, as it +seemed, and then she chose to add to her store of witchcraft.</p> +<p>"Yonder, then," she said, nodding to the dense alder thickets +that hid the river Tone from us, across a stretch of frozen mere or +flooded land. "I wot well that he who bides in Denewulf's cottage +is a thane, for he wears a gold ring, and wipes his hands in the +middle of the towel, and sits all day studying and troubling in his +mind in such wise that he is no good to any one--not even turning a +loaf that burns on the hearth before his eyes. Ay, they call him +Godred."</p> +<p>Then my heart leaped up with gladness, and I turned to seek +Heregar; but he was coming, and so I waited. Then the dame +clamoured for her reward, which Harek had as nearly forgotten as +had I.</p> +<p>"Mother," the scald said gravely, "when I work a spell with +hammer and nail, the footprint into which the nail is driven is of +her who cast the evil eye on me."</p> +<p>"Why, so it should be."</p> +<p>"Nay, but you drive it into your own," he said.</p> +<p>She looked, and then looked again. Then she stamped a new print +alongside the nailed one, and it was true. She had paid no heed to +the matter in her fury, and when she knew that she turned pale.</p> +<p>"Man," she cried, "help me out of this. I fear that I have even +nailed the evil overlooking fast to myself."</p> +<p>"Ay, so you have," said Harek; "but it is you who know little of +spells if you cannot tell what to do. Draw the nail out while +saying the spell backwards, and then put it into the right place +carefully. Then you will surely draw away also any ill that she has +already sent you, and fasten it to her."</p> +<p>"Then I think she will shrivel up," said the old witch, with +much content. "You are a great wizard, lord; and I thank you."</p> +<p>"Here is a true saying of a friend of mine," said Heregar, +coming up in time to hear this. "But what has come to you, king? +have you heard aught?"</p> +<p>Now when the old woman heard the thane name the king, before I +could answer she cried out and came and clung to my stirrup, taking +my hand and kissing it, and weeping over it till I was ashamed.</p> +<p>"What is this?" I said.</p> +<p>"O my lord the king!" she cried. "I thought that yon sad-faced +man in Denewulf's house was our king maybe, so wondrous proud are +his ways, and so strange things they hear him speak when he sleeps. +But now I am glad, for I have seen the king and kissed his hand, +and, lo, the sight of him is good. Ay, but glad will all the +countryside be to know that you live."</p> +<p>Then I knew not what to say; but Heregar beckoned to me, +saying:</p> +<p>"Come, leave her her joy; it were cruel to spoil it, and maybe +she will never know her mistake."</p> +<p>So we rode on, and Heregar called Dudda, asking him if he knew +Denewulf's cottage; while in the track stood the witch, blessing +her king as eagerly as she had cursed her gossip just now.</p> +<p>"I know not the path, though I have heard of the cottage," Dudda +said; "but it will be strange if I cannot find a way to the +place."</p> +<p>He took us carefully into the fen for some way until we passed +through a thicket and came to the edge of a mere, and there were +five men who bore fishing nets and eel spears, which had not been +used, as one might suppose, seeing that the ice was nigh a foot +thick after the thaw and heavy frost again.</p> +<p>And those two men who came first were Ethelnoth, the Somerset +ealdorman, and young Ethered of Mercia. It was strange to see those +nobles bearing such burdens; but we knew that we had found the +king.</p> +<p>They saw us, and halted; but Heregar waved his hand, and they +came on, for they knew him. It would be hard to say which party was +the more pleased to meet the other.</p> +<p>"Where is the king?" we asked.</p> +<p>"Come with us, and we will take you to him," Ethered said. "But +supperless you must be tonight. We have nought in the house, and +nothing can we catch."</p> +<p>Then I was surprised, and said:</p> +<p>"Is it so bad as that here? In our land, when the ice is at its +thickest we can take as much fish as we will easily."</p> +<p>"Save us from starvation, Ranald," said Ethered, laughing +ruefully, "and we will raise a big stone heap here in your +honour."</p> +<p>"Kolgrim will show you," I said; "let me go to the king."</p> +<p>"I am a great ice fisherman," said Harek; "let me go also."</p> +<p>Then Heregar laughed in lightness of heart.</p> +<p>"Ay, wizard, go also. There will be charms of some sort needed +before Ethered sees so much as a scale."</p> +<p>Whereon they dismounted, and Kolgrim took his axe from his +saddle bow, asking where the river was, while he wondered that such +a simple matter as breaking a hole in the ice and dropping a line +among the hungry fish, who would swarm to the air, had not been +thought of. We had not yet learned that such a winter as this comes +but seldom to the west of England, and the thanes knew nothing of +our northern ways.</p> +<p>Then Ethelnoth led Heregar and me across twisting and almost +unseen paths, safer now because of the frost, though one knew that +in some places a step to right or left would plunge him through the +crust of hard snow into a bottomless peat bog. The alder thickets +grew everywhere round dark, ice-bound pools of peat-stained water, +and we could nowhere see more than a few yards before us; and it +was hard to say how far we had gone from the upland edge of the +swamp when the ground began to rise from the fen, and grew harder +among better timber. But for the great frost, one would have needed +a boat in many places.</p> +<p>Then we came to a clearing, in which stood a house that was +hardly more than a cottage, and round it were huts and cattle +sheds. And this was where the king was--the house of Denewulf the +herdsman, the king's own thrall. There was a rough-wattled stockade +round the place, and quick-set fences within which to pen the +cattle and swine outside that, and all around were the thickets. +None could have known that such an island was here, for not even +the house overtopped the low trees; and though all the higher +ground was cleared, there were barely two acres above the watery +level--a long, narrow patch of land that lay southeast and +northwest, with its southerly end close to the banks of the river +Tone. Men call the place Athelney now, since the king and his +nobles lay there. It had no name until he came, but I think that it +will bear ever hereafter that which it earned thus.</p> +<p>Two shaggy grey sheepdogs came out to meet us, changing their +angry bark for welcome when they saw Ethelnoth; and a man came to +the door to see what roused them, and he had a hunting spear in his +hand. I took him for some thane, as he spoke to us in courtly wise; +but he was only Denewulf the herdsman himself.</p> +<p>"How fares the king?" asked Ethelnoth.</p> +<p>"His dark hour came on him after you went," Denewulf answered; +"and then the pain passed, and he slept well, and now has just +wakened wonderfully cheerful. I have not seen him so bright since +he came here; and he is looking eagerly for your return, seeming to +expect some news."</p> +<p>"It may be that our coming has been foretold him beforehand," +said Heregar. "Our king has warnings given him in his dreams at +times."</p> +<p>Then from out of the house Alfred's voice hailed us:</p> +<p>"Surely that is the voice of my standard bearer.</p> +<p>"Come in quickly, Heregar, for all men know that hope comes with +you."</p> +<p>We went in; and it was a poor place enough for a king's lodging, +though it was warm and neat. Alfred sat over the fire in the middle +of the larger room of the two which the house had, and a strew of +chips and shreds of feathers and the like was round him; for he was +arrow making--an art in which he was skilful, and he had all the +care and patience which it needs. When we came in he rose up, +shaking the litter from his dress into the fire; and we bent our +knees to him and kissed his hand.</p> +<p>"O my king," said Heregar, "why have you thus hidden +yourself from us? All the land is mourning for you."</p> +<p>Then Alfred looked sadly at him and wistfully, answering:</p> +<p>"First, because I must hide; lastly, because I would be hidden: +but between these two reasons is one of which I repent--because I +despaired."</p> +<p>"Nay," said Denewulf, "it was not despair; it was grief and +anxiousness and thought and waiting for hope. Never have you spoken +of despair, my king."</p> +<p>"But I have felt it," he answered, "and I was wrong. Hope should +not leave a man while he has life, and friends like these, and +counsellors like yourself. Now have I been rebuked, and hope is +given me afresh."</p> +<p>Then he smiled and turned to me.</p> +<p>"Why, Ranald my cousin, this is kindness indeed. I had not +thought that you would bide with a lost cause, nor should I have +thought of blame for you had you gone from this poor England; you +are not bound to her as are her sons."</p> +<p>"My king," I said truly, "there are things that bind more +closely even than birth."</p> +<p>I think he was pleased, for he smiled, and shook his head at me +as though to say that he could not take my saying to himself, as I +meant it. And then, before we could ask him more, he began to think +of our needs.</p> +<p>"Here we have been pressed for food, friends, for the last few +days, and I fear you must fast with us. The deer have fled from our +daily hunting, and the wild fowl have sought open water. Unless our +fishers have luck, which seems unlikely, we must do as well as we +can on oaten bread."</p> +<p>Then Ethelnoth said:</p> +<p>"There have been no fish caught today, my king."</p> +<p>"Why, then, we will wait till the others return; and meanwhile I +will hear all the news, for Ranald and Heregar will have much to +tell me."</p> +<p>So we told him all that we knew, and he asked many questions, +until darkness fell.</p> +<p>"Why are you here, lord king?" asked Heregar; "my hall is +safe."</p> +<p>"Your hall and countryside are safe yet because I am not there," +Alfred answered, fixing his bright eyes on the thane. "The Danes +are hunting for me, and were I in any known place, thither would +they come. Therefore I said that now I choose to bide hidden. +Moreover, in this quiet and loneliness there comes to me a plan +that I think will work out well; for this afternoon, as I slept, I +was bidden to look for a sign that out of hopelessness should come +help and victory."</p> +<p>Just then the dogs rose up and whined at the door, as if friends +came; and there were cheerful voices outside. The door opened, and +in stumbled Ethered, bearing a heavy basket of great fish, which he +cast on the floor--lean green and golden pike, and red-finned +roach, in a glittering, flapping heap.</p> +<p>"Here is supper!" he cried joyfully, "and more than supper, for +each of us is thus laden. Fish enough for an army could we have +taken had we not held our hands. I could not have thought it +possible."</p> +<p>Whereat Alfred rose up and stared, crossing himself.</p> +<p>"<i>Deo gratias</i>," he said under his breath, and then said +aloud, "Lo, this is the sign of which I spoke even now--that my +fishers should return laden with spoil, even for an army, although +frost and snow have prevented them from taking fish for many days, +and today was less likelihood of their doing so than ever."</p> +<p>"Ranald knew well how this would cheer you, King Alfred," said +Ethered, thinking that I had spoken of this as a proof that all was +not lost, in some way.</p> +<p>"Ranald said nought; but the sign came from above, thus," the +king said gravely. "In my dream the holy Saint Cuthberht stood by +my side, and reproved me sharply for my downheartedness and +despair, and for my doubt of help against the heathen; and when he +knew that I was sorry, he foretold to me that all would yet be +well, and that I should obtain the kingdom once more with even +greater honour than I have had--with many more wondrous promises. +And then he gave me this sign, as I have told you and, behold, it +has come, and my heart is full of thankfulness. Now I know that all +will be well with England."</p> +<p>Then said Denewulf, who it was plain took no mean place with the +king and thanes:</p> +<p>"Say how this miracle was wrought, I pray you, for it is surely +such."</p> +<p>"Hither came King Ranald and his two friends and bade us make +holes in the ice and fish through them. So we did, and this is what +came thereof," said Ethered.</p> +<p>"Therefore King Ranald and his coming are by the hand of God," +said Denewulf. "Therein lies the miracle."</p> +<p>Then I was feared, for all were silent in wonder at the coming +to pass of the sign; and it seemed to me that I was most truly +under a power stronger than that of the old gods, who never wrought +the like of this.</p> +<p>Then came Harek's voice outside, where he hung up fish to freeze +against the morrow; and he sang softly some old saga of the fishing +for the Midgard snake by Asa Thor. And that grated on me, though I +ever waited to hear what song the blithe scald had to fit what was +on hand, after his custom. Alfred heard too, and he glanced at me, +and I was fain to hang my head.</p> +<p>"Ranald, who brought to pass the sign, shall surely share in its +bodings of good," he said, quickly and kindly. "I think that he is +highly favoured."</p> +<p>Then in came my comrades, and they bent to the king, and he +thanked them; and after that was supper and much cheerfulness. +Harek sang, and Alfred, and after them Denewulf. Much I marvelled +at the wisdom of this strange man, but I never knew how he gained +it. King Alfred was ever wont to say that in him he had found his +veriest counsellor against despair in that dark time; and when in +after days he took him from the fen and made him a bishop, he +filled the place well and wisely, being ever the same humble-minded +man that I had known in Athelney <a class="EndNoteanc" name= +"EndNote14anc" href="#EndNote14sym" id= +"EndNote14anc"><sup>{xiv}</sup></a>.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_X" id="Chapter_X">Chapter X</a>. Athelney and +Combwich.</h2> +<p>In the morning King Alfred took us to the southern end of his +island, and there told us what his plans were. And as we listened +they seemed to us to be wiser than mortal mind could have made, so +simple and yet so sure were they, as most great plans will be. It +is no wonder that his people hold that he was taught them from +above.</p> +<p>He bade us look across the fens to the wooded heights of Selwood +Forest, to south and east, and to the bold spur of the Polden Hills +beyond the Parret that they call Edington. There was nought but fen +and river and marsh between them and us--"impassable by +the Danes who prowled there. Only at the place where the two rivers +join was a steep, rounded hill, that stood up strangely from the +level--the hill that they call the Stane, on Stanmoor; and there +were other islands like this on which we stood, unseen among the +thickets, or so low that one might not know of them until upon +them.</p> +<p>"Now," he said, "sooner or later the Danes will know I am here, +where they cannot reach me. Therefore I will keep them watching +this place until I can strike them a blow that will end the trouble +once for all. They will be sure that we gather men on the Quantock +side, whence Heregar can keep them; and so, while they watch for us +to attack them thence, we will gather beyond Selwood, calling all +the thanes from Hants and Wilts and Dorset and Somerset to meet me +on a fixed day, and so fall on them. Now we will build a fort +yonder on Stane hill that will make them wonder, and so the plan +will begin to work. For I have only told you the main lines +thereof; the rest must go as can be planned from day to day."</p> +<p>Then he looked steadfastly at the Selwood heights, and +added:</p> +<p>"And if the plan fails, and the battle I look for goes against +us, there remain Heregar's places yet. Petherton, Combwich, and +Dowsborough are good places, where a king may die in a ring of +foes, looking out over the land for which his life is given."</p> +<p>"We shall not fail, my king," said Heregar. "Devon will gather +to you across the Quantocks also."</p> +<p>"Ay," he said; "and you will need them with you."</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"Hubba is in Wales, and is likely to come here when he hears +that his fellows are gathering against us. Then will Devon be +needed at Combwich in Parret mouth, or at Watchet."</p> +<p>"That will be Devon's work," the king said. "If Hubba comes +before your ships are ready to meet him, he must at least be driven +to land elsewhere, or our stronghold is taken behind us."</p> +<p>Now I was so sure that Hubba would come, that this seemed to me +to be the weakest part of the king's plan. But Alfred thought +little of it.</p> +<p>"My stronghold seems to be on Quantock side; it is rather beyond +Selwood, in the hearts of my brave thanes and freemen. Fear not, +cousin. Hubba will come, and you and Heregar will meet him; and +whether you win or not, my plan holds."</p> +<p>Then I knew that the king saw far beyond what was plain to me, +and I was very confident in him. And I am sure that I was the only +man who had the least doubt from the beginning.</p> +<p>Now, after all was planned, Heregar and I rode back to his +place, and sent word everywhere that the king was safe, though he +commanded us to tell no man where he lay as yet. None but thanes +were to be in the island with him; and from that time the name we +knew it by began, as one by one the athelings crossed the fen paths +thereto, and were lost, as it were, in the hiding place.</p> +<p>Then we wrought there at felling timber and hewing, until we had +bridged the river and made a causeway through the peat to Stanmoor +hill, and then began to make a triple line of earthworks around its +summit. No carelessly-built fort was this, for the king said: "If +the nobles build badly, there will be excuse for every churl to do +the like hereafter. Therefore this must needs be the most +handsomely-wrought fort in all Wessex."</p> +<p>There came to us at this fort many faithful workmen, sent from +the towns and countryside, until we had a camp there. But every +night, after working with us and cheering all with his voice and +example, Alfred went back to Athelney with us; and none would seek +to disturb him there, so that for long none quite knew, among the +lesser folk, where he bided. Presently the queen and athelings came +there to him, and were safe.</p> +<p>That time in the fens was not altogether unpleasant, though the +life was hard. Ever was Alfred most cheerful, singing and laughing +as we wrought, and a word of praise from him was worth more than +gold to every man. And then there were the hunting, the fishing, +and the snaring of wild fowl, that were always on hand to supply +our wants, though now we had plenty of food from the Quantock side. +I know this, that many a man who was in Athelney with Alfred was +the better therefor all the days of his after life. Men say that +there is a steadfast look in the faces of the Athelney thanes, by +which they can be well known by those who note the ways of men.</p> +<p>The frost lasted till February went out in rain and south winds. +And then the Danes began to gather along the southern hills, +watching us. By that time we had made causeways to other islets +from the fort, and the best of these was to Othery, a long, flat +island that lay to the east, nearer to the Polden Hills and +Edington.</p> +<p>So one day the king sent for me as we wrought at the fort, and +both he and I were horny handed and clay stained from the work. I +came with spade in hand, and he leaned on a pick. Whereat he +laughed.</p> +<p>"Faith, brother king, now can I speak in comrade's wise to my +churls as you speak to your seamen. Nor do I think that I shall be +the worse ruler for that."</p> +<p>Then he took my arm, and pointed to Edington hill.</p> +<p>"For many nights past I have seen watch fires yonder," he said; +"and that is a place where I might strike the Danes well. So I +would draw them thither in force. Do you feel as if a fight would +be cheerful after this spade work?"</p> +<p>Now I could wish for nothing better, and I said so.</p> +<p>"Well, then," he went on, laughing at my eagerness, "go to +Ethelnoth, and take twenty men, and do you and he fall on that post +from Othery by night; and when you have scattered it, come back +into the fen. I would have you lose no men, but I would make the +Danes mass together by attack on some one point, and that as soon +as may be, before Hubba comes. I do not want to hold their +place."</p> +<p>Now that was the first of daily attacks on the Danish posts, at +different places along the Selwood and Polden hills, until they +thought that we wished to win Edington height, where we began and +annoyed them most often. So I will tell how such a raid fared.</p> +<p>Good it was to lay aside pick and spade and take sword Helmbiter +again, and don mail and helm; and I made Harek fence with me, lest +I should have lost my sword craft through use of the weapons +whereby the churl conquers mother earth. But once the good sword +was in my hand I forgot all but the warrior's trade.</p> +<p>So Ethelnoth and I and twenty young thanes went in the evening +to Othery island, and there found a fenman to guide us, and so went +to the foot of Edington hill just as darkness fell. The watch-fire +lights, that were our guide, twinkled above us through the trees +that were on the hillside; and we made at once for them, sending on +the fenman to spy out the post before we were near it. It was very +dark, and it rained now and then.</p> +<p>When he came back to where we had halted, he said that there +were about twenty tents, pitched in four lines, with a fire between +each line; and that the men were mostly under cover, drinking +before setting watch, if they set any at all.</p> +<p>So we drew nearer, skirting round into cover of some trees that +came up to the tents, for the hilltop was bare for some way. The +lighted tents looked very cheerful, and sounds of song and laughter +came from them, and now and then a man crossed from one to another, +or fed the fires with fresh wood, that hissed and sputtered as he +cast it on.</p> +<p>"How shall we attack?" said Ethelnoth.</p> +<p>"Why, run through the camp in silence first and cut the tent +lines, and then raise a war shout and come back on them. Then we +may slay a few, and the rest will be scared badly enough."</p> +<p>Thereat we both laughed under our breath, for it seemed like a +schoolboy's prank. Well, after the long toil in the fen, we were +like boys just freed from school, though our game was the greatest +of all--that of war--the game of Hodur's playground, as we Norse +say.</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"After we come through for the second time, we must take to this +cover, and so get together at some place by the hill foot. There is +a shed by a big tree that can be found easily."</p> +<p>So we passed the wood, and our comrades chuckled. It was good +sport to see the shadows of the careless Danes on the tent walls, +and to know that they dreamed of nothing less than that Saxons were +on them. Four rows of tents there were, and there were twenty-two +of us; so we told off men to each row, and then made for them at a +moment when no man was about--hacking at the ropes, and laughing to +see the tents fall. It was strange to watch the shadows start up +and stand motionless, as the first patter of feet came and the +first blows fell, and then bustle, helpless and confused, with +savage shouts and curses, as the heavy canvas and skins fell in +upon them.</p> +<p>Now we were through the camp, and the outcries were loud behind +us. Two or three tents did not fall, and from them the men swarmed, +half armed and startled, not knowing if this was not some sorry +jest at first; and then rang our war cry from the dark, and we were +back upon them. We were but two-and-twenty to a hundred, but they +knew not what was on hand, while we did; and so we cut through them +without meeting with any hurt. Two tents were on fire and blazing +high, and blackened men cut and tore their way out of them howling; +and I think that more than one Dane was cut down by his comrades in +the panic that fell on all.</p> +<p>Yet even as we passed into the cover and went our way back +towards the fen, some bolder spirits began to rally, and a horn was +blown. But we were gone, leaving six slain and many more wounded +among them, while not one of us was scratched.</p> +<p>They did not follow us, and we heard the clamour we had caused +going on for some time after we had gained the fen. Presently, too, +when we reached Othery, we saw a fire signal lit to call for help, +and we were well content. Doubtless those Danes waked under arms +all that night through.</p> +<p>After that these attacks were seldom so easy, for the Danes kept +good watch enough; but they were ever the same in most ways. +Suddenly in the night would come the war cry and the wild rush of +desperate men on some Danish outpost, and before they knew what to +do we were away and into the fen again. We grew to know every path +well before long, and sometimes we would fall on small parties of +our foes when they were on the march or raiding the cattle, and cut +through them, and get back to our fastness.</p> +<p>Once or twice we were followed in the grey of early morning; but +few Danes ever got back from that pursuit. We would cut them off +amid the peat bogs, or they would founder therein, and sink under +the weight of armour.</p> +<p>Then they tried to force some fenmen they caught to guide them +to us at Othery. Once the brave fenman led them to where they dared +not move till daylight came, while the blue fen lights flitted +round them like ghosts in the dark; and then the fen people swarmed +round them, and ended them with arrows and sling stones from a +distance. They tried no more night attacks on us after that. But +again they came in some force by daylight, and we had a strange +fight on a narrow strip of hard land in Sedgemoor, with all +advantage on our side. No Danes won back to the Polden Hills.</p> +<p>Then they dared not try the fens any more, and daily we kept +their sentries watching, and nightly we fell on outposts, until at +last they thought our force grew very great, and began to gather on +Edington hill, even as Alfred wished. And this saved many a village +and farm and town from plunder, for the fear of Alfred the king +began to grow among his foes.</p> +<p>Then the king made his next move; for, now that the way was +open, he sent to Odda at Exeter, bidding him move up to Taunton by +some northerly road, gathering what Devon men he could on the way. +There is hardly a stronger town in Wessex than the great fortress +that Ine the king made.</p> +<p>At this time I began to be full of thoughts about my ships. But +they could hardly be built as yet; and most of them were in +southern havens, whence, even were they ready, one could not bring +them round the stormy Land's End in early March. Yet the weather +was mild and open, and I began to think that at any time Hubba +might bring his Danes across the narrow Severn sea to join his +kinsmen at Edington. We heard, too, that Guthrum, the king of East +Anglia, was there now, and that he had summoned every warrior who +would leave the land he had won to come to him.</p> +<p>Men have blamed Guthrum for treachery in this; but seeing that +the peace was broken, and that he must needs fight for the peace at +least of his kingdom, I hold that this is not right. At all events, +Alfred blamed him not in the time to come. Nevertheless, I suppose +that in men's minds he always will be held answerable for what the +other chiefs wrought of ill, because he bore the name of king from +the first, and ruled East Anglia. No Saxon, who is used to hold his +king as over all, will understand how little power a host-king of +the north has.</p> +<p>Now all this while my good ship lay at Bridgwater, and with her +were fifty of my men, who were well quartered among the townsfolk, +and helped to guard the bridge. And, as I have said, two ships were +being built there. So one day in the third week in March I rode +away with Kolgrim from Athelney, to see how all things were going +on there, meaning also to go to Heregar's place for a time, having +messages to give him from the king.</p> +<p>Harek was coming with me; but Alfred asked me to spare him for +this time.</p> +<p>"I have to learn somewhat from the scald," he said.</p> +<p>"Wizardry, my king?" I asked, laughing, for that was ever a jest +at the scald's expense after it was known how we found out that +Alfred was at Denewulf's house.</p> +<p>"Nay, but song," he answered. "Now I see not why I should not +tell you who put the thought into my mind; but I am going, as you +did, to spy out the Danish camp. And I will go as a gleeman, and be +welcome enough as a Saxon who has enough love of Danes to learn +some northern sagas for them!"</p> +<p>"My king," I cried, "this is too perilous altogether."</p> +<p>He looked quaintly at me.</p> +<p>"Go to, cousin; are you to have all the glory? If you went, why +not I? Maybe I too may find a chance of helping some fair maiden on +the way back."</p> +<p>Then I prayed him to do nothing rash, for that he was the one +hope of England.</p> +<p>"And maybe the one man in England who can do any good by going, +therefore," he answered. "And neither you nor I would ask any man +to do for us what we durst not do ourselves."</p> +<p>"You will be known, my king," I said.</p> +<p>Whereon he held out his hands, which were hard and horny now +with hard work, and he laughed as he did so.</p> +<p>"Look at those," he said, "and at my unkempt hair and beard! +Verily I may be like Alfred the king in some ways, but not in +these. They will pass me anywhere."</p> +<p>So I could not dissuade him, and ever as I tried to do so he +waxed more cheerful, and made sport of me, throwing my own doings +in my teeth, and laughing about Thora. So I was fain to get away +from his presence, lest I should grow angry at last. And when I was +going he said:</p> +<p>"Have no fear, cousin; I will not go unless I am well +prepared."</p> +<p>So I went, and next day was back in Athelney, riding hard; for +Hubba's ships had been sighted from the Quantocks, and they were +heading for the Parret. What I looked for and feared was +coming.</p> +<p>Then Alfred sent messengers to Odda, who had come to Taunton two +days before this. And he gathered every man from the fen, and we +went to Bridgwater, leaving our little force there, and so rode on +the way to Combwich, thinking to see the sails of the ships in +Bridgwater Bay. But a shift of wind had come, and they were yet +over on the Welsh coast, waiting for the tide to enable them to +come down on us.</p> +<p>By that time a fire burned on the highest spur of the Quantocks +to tell us that Odda was there, and at once another was lit on the +Combwich fort to bring him to us, for it seemed certain that here +we must fight the first battle of Alfred's great struggle.</p> +<p>"Here you must meet this newcomer and drive him away, if it can +be done, or if not, hinder him from coming further; or if that is +impossible, do your best. I would have you remember that defeat +here is not loss of all hope, for beyond Selwood lies our real +gathering. But victory, even if dearly bought, will almost win the +day for us."</p> +<p>So Alfred said, and we, who began to see what his great plan +was, were cheered.</p> +<p>In the evening Odda came with eight hundred men of Devon. Alfred +had two hundred maybe, and my few men and the townsfolk made +another two hundred. But Hubba had twenty-three longships, whose +crews, if up to fighting strength, would not be less than a hundred +in each.</p> +<p>So we watched till the tide fell, when he could not come into +the Parret, and then I went back to Heregar's hall. It seemed very +bare, for all goods had been sent up to the great refuge camp of +Dowsborough, to which all day long the poor folk had been flying, +driving with them their sheep and cattle and swine, that they might +save what they could. But with Odda had come his daughter, the Lady +Etheldreda, who would not leave him; and she and the Lady Alswythe +and Thora were yet in the house, and Osmund the jarl sat in the +hall, listless and anxious of face. It was an ill time for him; but +there were none of us who did not like him well, and feel for him +in his helplessness.</p> +<p>"What news?" he said, when he saw me come into the hall.</p> +<p>"Hubba will be here on the next tide--with early morning," I +said.</p> +<p>He sighed, and rising up went to the doorway and looked out to +the hills.</p> +<p>"I would that I could make these two noble ladies seek refuge +yonder," he said; "but one will not leave her father, nor the other +her husband."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"At least I think you should take Thora there. This is a +difficult place for you."</p> +<p>"I know Hubba," he said, "and if I abide here I may be of use. I +need not tell you that you are fighting the best warrior of our +time, and that with too small a force."</p> +<p>"Well," I said, "you and I can speak plainly, neither of us +being Saxons. We shall be beaten by numbers, and you mean that you +will be able to save these ladies by staying?"</p> +<p>"Ay," he said. "And if by any chance Alfred wins, I may be able +to ask for mercy for the conquered."</p> +<p>Then came in Thora, and her face was troubled. She had been +trying to make Etheldreda go to the hill fort, where all the women +and children of the countryside had been sent.</p> +<p>"It is of no use," she said; "they will bide here."</p> +<p>"Well," said Osmund, "then we will stay also. I and our friend +have spoken thereof, and it seems well that we do so."</p> +<p>I suppose they had talked of this before, for she made no +answer, but sat down wearily enough before the fire; and Osmund and +I went out to the courtyard, for we were both restless.</p> +<p>Then Heregar came in on his white horse, and saw Osmund, and +called to him, asking of the same business, for he had asked the +jarl to speak about it as a friend. So I went in again, and Thora +sat by herself yet, looking up to see who came now. I went and +stood by her, staring into the fire, and feeling as if I wanted to +go out again. Restlessness was in the very air while we waited for +the coming fight.</p> +<p>"King Ranald," she said, after a little silence, "I wonder if +ever a maiden was in such sad doubt as I. I cannot wish that these +dear ladies, who have made a friend of me, should see their folk +beaten, and maybe slain; and cannot wish that my own kin should be +beaten either. It seems that in either way I must find heavy +sorrow."</p> +<p>That was true; but it was certain that her own people were the +cause of all the trouble, though I could not say so. I put it this +way:</p> +<p>"I think that if your people are driven off there will be peace +the sooner, and maybe they will not land when they find us waiting. +I know, too, that those who have loved ones in the battle that may +be are in a harder case than yours, dear lady."</p> +<p>Then she looked up at me once, and a flush came slowly over her +pale face, and she answered nothing. I thought that she felt some +shame that a warrior like her father should bide here, without +moving hand or foot, when the war horns were blowing. So I +said:</p> +<p>"Harder yet would it be if the jarl were in the battle against +our friends. Then would the fear of his loss be a terror to you +also."</p> +<p>Now came in Osmund, and straightway Thora rose up, turning away +from us both, and went from the hall. The jarl looked after her +curiously and sadly.</p> +<p>"This is a strange business for the girl," he said.</p> +<p>"She seems almost as troubled because you are not fighting as if +you were in danger by doing so," I answered, with that thought +still in my mind.</p> +<p>Thereat the jarl stared at me.</p> +<p>"What has put that into your head?" he asked.</p> +<p>I told him what she and I had said, adding that I feared I had +seemed to hint somewhat discomforting.</p> +<p>Then said Osmund, looking in my face with a half smile:</p> +<p>"She is glad I am honourably out of this business, and the +trouble is not that. There are one or two, maybe, whom she would +like to see as safe in the same way."</p> +<p>Then it flashed through my dull mind that perhaps I was one of +these, and the thought was pleasant to me.</p> +<p>"Well," I said, "there are the thane, and his young son, the +king's page, who is here. They have been very kind to her."</p> +<p>"Also a wandering king who took her out of danger," he said +then.</p> +<p>"Ay; I shall be glad if she thinks of me."</p> +<p>There were a little laugh and a rustling behind us, and one +said:</p> +<p>"Either you are the least conceited of men or the blindest, King +Ranald, or you would know what is amiss."</p> +<p>I turned, and saw the Lady Etheldreda herself, and I bowed to +her in much confusion.</p> +<p>"O you men!" she said. "Here you will let the poor girl break +her heart in silence, while you fight for glory, or somewhat you +think is glory, without a word to say that you care that she shall +see what you win. Of course she thinks of you, even night and day. +How else should it be, when you have been as a fairy prince to +her?"</p> +<p>Then I knew for myself that among all the wild life of Athelney +and the troubles of the king the thought of Thora had been pleasant +to me; but now I was confused, having the matter brought home to me +suddenly, and, as it were, before I was ready to shape all my +thoughts towards her. So all that I could say was foolish +enough.</p> +<p>"I am a poor sort of fairy prince, lady."</p> +<p>"Ay," she said; "I am as good a fairy godmother, maybe. And +perhaps I should have said nothing--at this time. But, Ranald, the +maiden weeps for your danger, for, at the very least, she owes you +much."</p> +<p>Then I said, humbly as I felt:</p> +<p>"That is more honour to me than I deserve."</p> +<p>"That is for her to say," answered the fair lady, turning to +where Osmund had been.</p> +<p>But he was now in the doorway, looking out again to the hills. +So she was silent, and I thought of somewhat.</p> +<p>"There is none in this land or in any other--of whom I think as +I do of Thora," I said; "but my mind has been full of warfare and +trouble with the king. Now, if I may, I will ask for somewhat that +I may wear for her sake in the fight, and so she will know that I +think of her."</p> +<p>"Now that is well said," answered Etheldreda. "But you must ask +it for yourself."</p> +<p>Thereat I thought for a moment, and at last I said that I would +not do so.</p> +<p>"If I might, I would ask you to gain this favour for me," I +said; "for I think that a parting would be very hard, as things +have come about."</p> +<p>"You are a wiser man than I thought you, Ranald," she said; and +so she went from me, and I stayed by the fire, thinking thoughts +that were sweet and yet troublous, for beyond tomorrow's fight I +could not see.</p> +<p>Then the lady came back, and with her she brought a little +glove, worn and shapely from the hand that it belonged to.</p> +<p>"She bids me give this to her king and warrior," Etheldreda +said. "I did but tell her that you asked a token that she minded +you."</p> +<p>"It was well," I answered. "What said she?"</p> +<p>"Nought at once. But her sadness went, and her face changed--ay, +but she is beyond any of us in beauty when her eyes light up in +that way--and she fetched this, and then said 'Say, if you think +that he will care to know it, that this is the glove wherein I rode +to Wareham.'</p> +<p>"Do you care to know it, Ranald?"</p> +<p>"Ay, with all my heart," I said.</p> +<p>And so I put it very carefully under the broad, golden-studded +baldric of Sigurd's sword. And it would not stay there, and +Etheldreda laughed at me, and took a little golden brooch like a +cross that she wore, and pinned it through glove and baldric, +making all safe.</p> +<p>"There," she said, "is a token from me also, though it was +unasked. Bear yourself well, Ranald, for our eyes are on you. If +Hubba comes indeed, we women folk will be in the fort."</p> +<p>Then I said, being at a loss for words enough:</p> +<p>"I would I had the tongue of Harek the scald, that I might thank +you for gift and words, my fairy princess."</p> +<p>"I have half a mind to take it back for that fine saying," she +answered.</p> +<p>And then she gave me her hand, and I kissed it; and she went +from me with her eyes full of tears for all the trouble that was on +us, though she had tried bravely to carry it off lightly.</p> +<p>Then I would stay in the house no longer, but went out to the +fort, and sat down by the great Dragon banner of Wessex, Heregar's +charge, that floated there, and ate and drank with the other +chiefs, and waited. But my mind was full of what I had heard, and +the war talk went on round me without reaching my ears.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_XI" id="Chapter_XI">Chapter XI</a>. The +Winning of "The Raven."</h2> +<p>Now we none of us like much to speak of the fight that came next +morning, for it went ill enough. Yet we were outnumbered by twice +our force, for some more of the host beyond the fens made Alfred +send many of his men back to watch the crossing at Bridgwater.</p> +<p>Hubba brought his ships up on the tide, and when he saw that we +were waiting for him, he made as if to go on up the river; and we +began to move from our position, thinking that he would go and fall +on the town. Then, very suddenly, he turned his ships' bows to the +bank at the one place where he saw that the land was high almost to +the river's edge; and before we knew that we must be there to stay +him, his men were ashore, and had passed the strip of marsh, and +were on a long, gentle rise that ends in Cannington hill and the +Combwich fort, half a mile away.</p> +<p>We fought well for an hour, and then our men began to give on +either wing, for they were, as I would have it remembered, raw +levies that Odda had brought with him--valiant men and strong, but +with no knowledge of how to fight in line or how to hold together. +And when a force like that begins to go, it is ended.</p> +<p>Hard fought we in the centre after that. There were the Athelney +thanes, and my fifty men, and Odda's Exeter and Taunton townsfolk, +who had fought before; but when the wings broke, Hubba's great +force of veterans lapped round us, and we had nought left us but to +cut our way out, and make the best retreat we could. My men shouted +as they struck, in our Norse way; but a deadly silence fell on the +Saxons, and I thought that, as they grew quiet, their blows became +ever more stern and fell, until at last even Hubba's vikings gave +way before the hard-set faces and steadfast eyes of the +west-country spearmen, whom no numbers seemed to daunt, and they +drew back from us for a space.</p> +<p>Then we were clear of them, and at once Ethelnoth closed in on +the king, taking his horse's rein, and praying him to fly to +Bridgwater, where a stand could be made. And at last he persuaded +him, and they turned. Then fearing that this might set the example +for general flight, I spoke to Odda, and we shouted to the men to +stand fast and hold back pursuit; and so a guard of some fifty +thanes went with Alfred, and we faced the Danes even yet.</p> +<p>They saw what was done, and roared, and charged on us; and we +began to retreat slowly, fighting all the way, up the long slope of +land towards the fort. But I saw Heregar's horse rear and fall, and +the banner went down, and I thought him slain in that attack.</p> +<p>Presently they let us go. We won ever to better ground, and they +had to fight uphill; and then we gained the fort, and there they +durst not come.</p> +<p>Then rode towards me a man in silver armour that was dinted and +hacked--shieldless, and with a notched sword in his hand. It was +Heregar.</p> +<p>"I thought you slain, friend," I said gladly.</p> +<p>"Would that I were! for my charge is lost; they have my banner," +he answered.</p> +<p>"That may be won back yet," I said. "But there is no shame to +you; we were outnumbered by more than two to one."</p> +<p>"I have borne it through ten battles," he said, and that was +all; but he put his face in his hands and groaned.</p> +<p>Now I looked out over the field we had left, and saw the Danes +scattering in many ways. Some were going in a long line up the +steep hill beyond which the village lay, and over this line swayed +and danced the lost banner. There was a crowd of our men from the +broken wings gathered there--drawn together by the king as he fled, +as I knew afterwards; and I think the Danes bore our banner with +them in order to deceive them. I knew that the lane was deep and +hollow up which they must go, and there were woods on either +side.</p> +<p>Whereat I sprang up.</p> +<p>"Thane," I said, "here is a chance for us to win back the +banner, as I think."</p> +<p>He looked up sharply, and I pointed.</p> +<p>"Let us ride at once into the wood, and wait for them to pass +us. Then, if we dare, we can surely dash through them."</p> +<p>Kolgrim sat close to me, and our horses were tethered to a +spear. He rose up when he heard me speak, saying:</p> +<p>"Here is more madness. But trust to Ranald's luck, thane."</p> +<p>Then in a few more minutes we were riding our hardest towards +the wood. I heard Odda shout after us from the entrance to the fort +as we went, but we heeded him not.</p> +<p>We edged up to the deep lane through the trees until we were so +near that we could almost see into it. The banner was at the head +of the column, and there were no mounted men with it. Hubba had +brought no horses with him from across the sea.</p> +<p>Then we waited for a long minute, hearing the tramp of the +coming men, and their loud talk and laughter as they boasted of +their prize. They were going very carelessly.</p> +<p>"If we get it," I whispered to the thane, whose eyes were +shining, "ride hard up the hill to our folk who are there."</p> +<p>He nodded and then before us fluttered the folds of his +treasure. Instantly he spurred his great white horse, and leaped +straight at it into the lane, and after him on either side came +Kolgrim and I.</p> +<p>A great howl rose from the startled Danes, and I saw Heregar +wheel his horse and tear the banner from the man who held it, +cutting down another warrior who tried to catch his bridle. Then +Helmbiter was hard at work for a moment, and Kolgrim's axe rattled +on a helm or two; and we were away up the lane before the shouting +and confusion were over, none of the Danes knowing but that more of +us would follow from out the cover.</p> +<p>One or two arrows, shot by men who found their wits sooner than +the rest, pattered after us, and we gained the hilltop and the +great cheer that went up from our few men who were there made the +Danes halt and waver, and at last turn back to the open again.</p> +<p>We stayed on that hilltop for an hour. Then the Danes were +coming up in force, and there was no hope in staying, so we got +back to the fort before they could cut us off.</p> +<p>Soon after this there was a general movement on the part of our +foes, and before evening we were surrounded on all sides by strong +posts, and it was plain that we were not to move from the fort.</p> +<p>Now this is not very large, but it is very strong--the hill +which has been fortified being some two hundred feet high, and +steep sided as a house roof on all sides but the east, where the +entrance must needs be. But this again has outworks; and the road +into the ramparts from the long slope of Cannington hill to the +southward runs slantwise through them, so that the gap it makes in +the first line is covered by the second. And both upper and lower +rampart go right round the circle of the hilltop, and are very +strong, having been made by the British folk, who well understood +such matters, and had such fighters as the old Romans and our own +forefathers to deal with. Some parts of the works were of piled +stones, and the rest of earth, as the ground required.</p> +<p>There is but one way in which that fort could be taken by force, +as I think, and that is by attacking on all sides at once, which +needs a greater force than would ever be likely to come against it. +Moreover, on one side the marshy course of the Combwich stream +would hinder any heavy onslaught.</p> +<p>So inside these ramparts were we with some six hundred men, and +there we were watched by three times our number. There was a strong +post on Cannington hill, between us and Bridgwater; another--and +that the main body--between us and the ships, on a little, sharp +hill crest across a stony valley two bowshots wide that lay between +it and the fort; and so we were well guarded.</p> +<p>At first this seemed of little moment, for we were to stay Hubba +before the place; and for a while there was nothing but rejoicing +over the return of the banner. Then I found there was no water in +the place, and that we had but what food each man happened to carry +with him. Presently that want of water became terrible, for our +wounded began to cry for it piteously. Maybe it was as well that we +had few with us, because the field was left in the hands of the +Danes.</p> +<p>Up and down among those few went Etheldreda and Alswythe and +Thora, tending them and comforting them, where we had sent them--to +the highest point of the hilltop, inside the upper rampart; and I +could see the flutter of their dresses now and then from where I +watched beside Odda on the lower works. I had spoken to neither +since we came here.</p> +<p>Towards dusk I spoke to Odda, and he gave me twenty men; and +gathering all the vessels of any sort that would hold water, we +climbed over the rampart next the marsh, and stole down to the +nearest pool and brought back all we could, using helms and +leathern cloaks and the like, for want of buckets. We got back +safely that time, and I sent the same men again, thinking that +there was no danger, and so not going myself.</p> +<p>They got back, indeed, but with a party of Danes after them; and +but for our arrow flights from the earthworks, they would have had +to fight, and lose what they brought. After that Hubba knew what we +needed, and sent a strong picket to keep us from the marsh.</p> +<p>So the night passed and we had some hopes that a force might +come to our help from Bridgwater in the morning, for it was +possible that the king would be able to gather men there. It was a +slender hope, though, for the host on Polden Hills had to be +watched.</p> +<p>All day we waited, and no help came; and with evening the last +food had gone. It had rained heavily, however, and the want of +water was past for the time. The Danes never moved from their +places, waiting to starve us out; and in the last light of evening +a small party came across the little valley from the main body, +bearing a white flag in token of parley. Hubba bid us yield, and +our lives should be spared.</p> +<p>"It is good of Hubba to give us the chance of living a little +longer," answered Odda; "but we will wait here a while, so please +him."</p> +<p>The Danes threatened us, and mocked, and so went back. We had no +more messages from their chief after that.</p> +<p>That night we slept round the standard where it flapped on the +hilltop. The men watched, turn by turn, along the lower ramparts; +and the Danes were not so near that we could be surprised by them, +for there was no cover to hide their coming. Nestled under the +northwest rampart was a little hut--some shepherd's shelter where +the three poor ladies were bestowed. Osmund the jarl sat a little +apart from us, but all day and night he had been tending the +wounded well. Harek who, as befitted a scald, was a good leech, +said that the jarl knew almost as much of the craft as he.</p> +<p>Now, in the early morning, when the light was grey, I woke, +hearing the rattle of arms and the quiet passing of the word as the +men changed guard, and I thought I would go round the ramparts; and +then Odda woke also. The rest slept on, for they had taken their +turns on watch--Heregar with his arm round the pole of the +standard, and his sword beneath his head.</p> +<p>Odda looked at me as we sat up stiffly, and spoke what was in +his mind and mine also.</p> +<p>"I have a mind to send Osmund to Hubba, and ask him to let the +women go hence. There is nought to eat today."</p> +<p>"There is enough kept for them," I said; for Heregar had seen to +that, and none had grudged a share.</p> +<p>"Ay," he answered; "but what are we to do? Are we to be starved +like rats here?"</p> +<p>"There are the half-dozen horses," I said.</p> +<p>"And nought to cook them withal. I would that the king would +come."</p> +<p>"It is in my mind that he cannot," I answered; "there has been +some move of the other host."</p> +<p>Now that was true, for Guthrum's great following had suddenly +swept down towards Bridgwater, and that could not be left. They +were camped now at the foot of the hill, watching there as Hubba +watched us.</p> +<p>Then some one came, stepping lightly, but with clank of mail, +towards us; and I glanced round, thinking that some message was +brought from the ramparts. Odda turned idly at the same time, and +he started up.</p> +<p>"Ah!" he said, under his breath, "what is this?"</p> +<p>A tall maiden, mail clad and bearing a broad-bladed spear, stood +beside us; and I thought her one of the Valkyrias--Odin's +messengers--come to us, to fight for us in some strife to which she +would lead us. I rose too, saluting.</p> +<p>"Skoal to the shield maiden!" I said.</p> +<p>"Skoal to the heroes!" she answered; and then I knew the voice, +though, under the helm and in the grey light, the face of the +ealdorman's daughter Etheldreda had been strange to me. And Odda +knew also.</p> +<p>"What would you in this guise, my daughter?" he cried.</p> +<p>"I think that I have come as Ranald thought--as a Valkyria to +lead you to battle," she answered, speaking low, that she might not +wake the tired warriors around her. "There is but one thing for us +to do, and that is to die sword in hand, rather than to perish for +want of food and water here."</p> +<p>I know that this had been in my mind, and most likely in Odda's +also; but Alfred might come.</p> +<p>"We wait the king," the ealdorman said.</p> +<p>"No use," she answered. "One may see all the Polden Hills from +this place, and tonight there are no fires on Edington height, +where we have been wont to see them."</p> +<p>Odda groaned. "My Etheldreda, you are the best captain of us +all," he said.</p> +<p>Then suddenly Heregar rose up on his elbow from beside the +standard, crying strangely:</p> +<p>"Ay, Father Eahlstan--when the tide is low. Somerset and Dorset +side by side. What say you, father--Somerset and Devon? Even +so."</p> +<p>The other sleepers stirred, and the lady turned and looked on +the thane, but he slept even yet.</p> +<p>"Heregar dreams of the bishop he loved, and of the great fight +they fought yonder and won thirty rears ago," she said <a name= +"EndNote15anc" href="#EndNote15sym" id= +"EndNote15anc"><sup>{xv}</sup></a>.</p> +<p>"Worn out is the brave thane," said I. "Strange dreams come to +one when that is so."</p> +<p>Then Heregar woke, and saw the maiden, and rose up at her +side.</p> +<p>"Dear lady," he asked, "what is this?"</p> +<p>"Ranald thought me a Valkyria, friend; and I come on a +Valkyria's errand."</p> +<p>"I had a strange dream but now," Heregar said, as if it dwelt in +his mind, so that he hardly heeded what Etheldreda answered him. "I +thought that Bishop Eahlstan stood by me as in the old days, and +minded me of words that I spoke long ago, words that were taught me +by a wise woman, who showed me how to trap the Danes, when the tide +left their ships aground, so that they had no retreat. Then he +said, 'Even again at this time shall victory be when the tide is +low.' And I said that Somerset and Dorset would fail not at this +time. Then said he, 'Somerset and Devon.' Then it seemed that he +blessed me and passed. Surely I think that he would tell us that +victory is before us."</p> +<p>Now the other sleepers woke, and listened wondering. The light +was strong, and I looked away towards the Danes between us and the +river. Their fires were burning up one by one as they roused also; +but I thought there was some bustle down at the shore of the river, +where the ships were now afloat on the rising tide.</p> +<p>Then Etheldreda spoke to us in words that were brave and good to +hear--words to make a man long to give his life for country and for +friends--telling us that, since we must needs die, it was well that +we should fall sword in hand, ridding England of her foes man to +man, rather than perish in this place for nought.</p> +<p>And when she ended the chiefs were silent, looking on the Danes +with eyes that gleamed; and Kolgrim put the thoughts of all into +words when he said:</p> +<p>"Once or twice has the Berserker fury come on me when my master +has been in peril. Berserker again will you drive me, lady, so that +I care not for six foemen against me or sixty."</p> +<p>Then Odda cried:</p> +<p>"What goes on yonder? Do they leave us?" and he shaded his eyes +against the rising sun, and pointed. Certainly the Danes were +drawing towards the ships in parties of twenty and thirty at a +time, but their sentries went on their beats without heeding them. +There was no movement, either, among those on the other hill, and +the Raven banner that told of Hubba's presence was not borne +away.</p> +<p>Now we forgot all but that here was a new hope for us, and we +watched for half an hour. Then it was plain that full half the +force was drawn off, and that the Danes were crossing the river in +the ships. We saw them land on the opposite shore, where the road +comes down to the Combwich crossing, that can only be used at +lowest tides; and they marched eastward, doubtless in search of +cattle and plunder.</p> +<p>Then Heregar's eyes shone, and he said:</p> +<p>"Now has our time come, even as Eahlstan foretold to me. In two +hours or three none of that force can return, and we have but half +as many again as ourselves left here for us to deal with."</p> +<p>"Let me lead you on them," said Etheldreda.</p> +<p>Then with one voice we prayed her to bide in the fort, and for +long she would not be persuaded. But we told her that the men would +fight as well under her eye as if they were led by her--if, indeed, +her presence did not weaken them, in fear for her safety--and so at +last she gave way.</p> +<p>After that there was no more doubt as to what should be done; +but Odda went round among the men, and spoke to them in such wise +that he stirred their hearts to die bravely hand to hand with the +Danes. And I thought that some of us might live to see a great if +dearly-bought victory; for it was certain that not one of these +Saxons but meant to die before he left the field.</p> +<p>Then Heregar and Osmund went with Etheldreda to the other two +ladies, and they bade them take the horses and fly to Dowsborough +camp as soon as the fighting drew every Dane to the eastward side +of the fort and left the way clear. Osmund would go with them, and +so no fear for them was on our minds.</p> +<p>Then we got the soundest of the wounded down to the lower +rampart, and drew off the men there towards the gateway, so that +the Danes might think our movement was but a changing of guard; +then we waited until we saw that the ships on the far bank had +taken the ground.</p> +<p>Then we sallied out, and as I went I looked back once. Three +women stood alone on the hilltop, and one waved to us. That was the +Valkyria, for her mail sparkled in the sun; but I had eyes only for +that one whom I thought I should not see again, whose little glove +was on my heart.</p> +<p>Now, if we were desperate, Odda was not the man to waste any +chance of victory that there might be. We went swiftly up the long +slope of Cannington hill, and fell on the post there before they on +the main guard could reach them. There was no withstanding the +terrible onset of our Saxons; half that force was slain, and the +rest were in full flight in a few minutes.</p> +<p>Then we went steadily down the hill to where Hubba himself +waited for us. His war horns were blowing, to call in every man who +was within hearing; and his men were formed in line four deep at +the foot of the spur on which their camp had been.</p> +<p>Now, when I saw this I looked on our men, who were in column +again; and it seemed to me that the old Norse plan would be good, +for it was certain that on this field we meant to stay.</p> +<p>"Ealdorman," I said, "while there is yet time let us form up in +a wedge and go through that line. Then shall we fight back to back, +and shall have some advantage. I and my men, who have axes, will go +first."</p> +<p>Then my few vikings cried, "Ay, king!" and shouted; whereat Odda +laughed grimly.</p> +<p>"Go on, Berserker--axes must needs lead--we will do it."</p> +<p>Then we changed the ranks quickly, and I and Kolgrim and Harek +made the point of that wedge. Heregar and the banner were in the +midst, and Odda himself was not far behind me, putting his best men +along the two foremost faces of the wedge.</p> +<p>"We shall not be foremost long," I said; "we shall be surrounded +when once we are through the line."</p> +<p>But as we came on, Hubba closed up his men into a dense, square +mass.</p> +<p>"Ho!" said Harek to me; "you are wrong, my king."</p> +<p>Now we were close at hand, and the Danish arrows flew among us, +and the javelins fell pretty thickly. I think that a wedge bears +this better than any other formation, for it is easy to stop the +weapons that reach it.</p> +<p>Our men were silent now, and I was glad, having known already +what that meant; but the Danes began to yell their war cries. Then +we were within ten paces of them, and I gripped shield and axe and +gave the word to charge, and Odda answered it.</p> +<p>Then was such a terrible roar from the Saxons as I had never +heard--the roar of desperate men who have their foes before them, +more awful than any war shout. And at that even the vikings shrank +a little, closing their ranks, and then, with all the weight of the +close-ranked wedge behind me, we were among them, and our axes were +at work where men were driven on one another before us; and the +press thinned and scattered at last, while the Danes howled, and +for a moment we three and a few lines behind us stood with no +foemen before us, while all down the sides of the wedge the fight +raged. Then we halted, and the Danes lapped round us. I do not know +that we lost more than two men in this first onset, so heavy was +it; but the Danes fell everywhere.</p> +<p>Now began fighting such as I had heard of, but had never seen +before. The scalds sing of men who fought as fights a boar at bay +in a ring of hounds, unfearing and silent; and so fought we. My axe +broke, and I took to sword Helmbiter, and once Kolgrim went +Berserker, and howled, and leaped from my side into a throng which +fell on us, and drove them back, slaying three outright, and +meeting with no hurt.</p> +<p>Our wedge held steady. Men fell, but we closed up; and there +grew a barrier of slain before us. I had not seen Hubba since we +first closed in, and then he had been a little to the right of +where we struck his line, under a golden banner, whereon was a +raven broidered, that hung motionless in the still morning air.</p> +<p>Presently the Danish onslaught slackened. Men were getting away +from their line to the rear, worn out or wounded, and the hill +beyond them was covered with those who had fallen out. They had +beaten against our lines as one beats on a wall--hewing out stones, +indeed, but without stirring it. They had more hurt than we.</p> +<p>Odda pushed to my side, and said to me:</p> +<p>"What if we advance towards the hill crest?"</p> +<p>"Slowly, then," I said.</p> +<p>He passed the word, and we began to move, and the Danes tried to +stay us. Then their attack on the rear face of the wedge slackened +and ceased, and they got round before us to fight from the higher +ground. At once Odda saw that an attack in line as they wavered +thus would do all for us, so he swung his hard Devon levies to +right and left on us Norsemen as the centre--maybe there were +twenty of us left at that time--and as the wings swung forward with +a rolling cheer, the Danes crumbled away before them, and we drove +them up the little hill and over the brow, fighting among the +half-burnt watch fires and over heaps of plunder, even to where the +tall "Raven" drooped from its staff.</p> +<p>Then I saw the mighty Hubba before me; and had I not known it +already, one might see defeat written in his face as he looked +across to his ships. His men were back now, and stood on the far +shore, helpless. Then was a cheer from our left, and he looked +there, and I looked also.</p> +<p>Out of the fort came our wounded--every one who could put one +foot before another--a strange and ghastly crowd of fifty or sixty +men who would yet do what they might for England. And with them was +a mixed crowd of thralls and village folk, bearing what arms they +could find on the place whence we drove the first Danes, and forks, +and bill hooks, and heavy staves.</p> +<p>I do not know if the Danes saw what manner of force came to our +help; but I think they did not. Many broke and fled to the ships; +but Hubba's face grew hard and desperate, and he cried to his men +to stand, and they gathered round him and the Raven banner.</p> +<p>Once again our great wedge formed up, and again charged into the +thick of the Danes. Then I faced the great chief, and men fell back +from us to see what fight should be. But from beside me came +Odda.</p> +<p>"My fight, Ranald," he said, and strode before the Dane.</p> +<p>His sword was gone--the hilt and three inches of blade hung from +his wrist--and his shield was notched and gashed. His only weapon +was the broad-bladed Saxon spear, ashen shafted, with iron studs +along its length below the head. He was a head shorter than the +Dane, who was, in truth, the most splendid warrior I had ever seen; +and he bore a broad axe, wedge beaten and gold inlaid. There was +not much to choose between his shield and Odda's, but I thought the +spear the weaker weapon.</p> +<p>"Axe against spear," said Harek; "here is somewhat of which to +sing."</p> +<p>Once Odda feinted, lunging at Hubba's face; and the Dane raised +his shield a little, but did not move else, nor did his eyelids so +much as flinch, and his steady look never left his foe's face. +Then, as Odda recovered, the great axe flashed suddenly, and fell +harmless as its mark sprang back from its sweep; while like light +the spear point went forward over the fallen axe, that recovered +too slowly to turn it, and rang true on the round shield that met +it.</p> +<p>I had not thought much of spear play until now, for we think +little of the weapon.</p> +<p>Again the Saxon lunged, and Hubba hewed at the spear shaft, +splintering it a little as the quick-eyed spearman swung it away +from the blow. Then the butt was over Odda's left shoulder, and +before one could tell that its swing aside had ended, forward flew +the point, darting from left to right over Hubba's arm that had not +yet recovered from the lost axe blow, and behind the shield's rim. +That blow went home, and the mighty Dane reeled and fell.</p> +<p>One moment's silence, and then a howl from the Danes who +watched, and they flew on us, bearing us back a pace or two. Odda +went down under the rush that was made on him, and I called to my +comrades, and stood over him, and beat them back. But Hubba's fall +was the end.</p> +<p>Even as I stood there, there came a rash of men from our ranks +past me; and I cheered, for I saw Heregar's silver mail driving +straight for the Raven standard, at the head of the young thanes +who were the shield wall of the Dragon of Wessex. Then, too, closed +in the wounded men and the country folk; and the Danes broke and +fled towards the ships in disorder. We followed for a little way, +and then the thralls ended matters. They say that not one Dane +reached the river's bank, beyond which their comrades watched and +raged, powerless to help them.</p> +<p>I went back to where Odda had fallen, and at that time there +rose a thundering cheer of victory from our wearied line, and helms +were cast into the air, and weapons waved in wild joy. That roused +one who lay before me, and white and shaking, up rose Odda from +among the slain. I went to him, and got my arm round him; and again +the men cheered, and little by little the colour came back to his +face.</p> +<p>"I thought you slain outright," I said; "are you much hurt?"</p> +<p>"I cannot tell," he said. "I believe I am sound in limb, but my +wind is gone. It is ill for a stout man to have mail-clad Danes +hurled on him by heavy-handed vikings."</p> +<p>So he said, gasping, but trying to laugh. And, indeed, he was +unwounded, save for a cut or two, and he still grasped his red +spear in his right hand.</p> +<p>Now I looked on our men, and saw that we might not bide for +another fight. Already some whom the wild joy of battle had kept +strong in spite of wounds were falling among their comrades, and it +seemed to me that wounds were being bound up everywhere.</p> +<p>But there was a token of victory that made these seem as +nothing. In the midst of all Heregar stood with the Dragon banner, +and by his side his son-in-law, Turkil the thane of Watchet, bore +the captured "Raven."</p> +<p>Harek the scald looked at it once, and then went to its heavy +folds, and scanned carefully the runes that were thereon.</p> +<p>"Ho, comrades!" he cried joyfully, "here is a winning that will +be sung of long after our names are forgotten. This is the magic +Raven that was wrought with wizardry and spells by the daughters of +Ragnar Lodbrok. Ill will this news fall on Danish ears from end to +end of England. This is worth two victories."</p> +<p>"I have seen it many times before," said Heregar; "nor is this +the only time that I have tried to win it. But never before have I +seen it hanging motionless as it hung today. There seems to be +somewhat in the tale they tell of its flapping foreboding +victory."</p> +<p>"Ay," said Odda. "Today they despised us, and bore it not +forward; therefore it flapped not, seeing that there was no wind +where it hung."</p> +<p>The ealdorman called us together then, and pointed to the Danes +who were massed beyond the river.</p> +<p>"Now it is time for us to go. We have won a good fight, and some +of us are yet alive. It will not be well to lose all by biding here +to be slain to the last man now. Shall we go to Bridgwater or to +the Quantocks, and so to Taunton?"</p> +<p>Then Heregar said:</p> +<p>"To the hills; for we should be penned in Bridgwater between +this force and the other. I think that while we are yonder they +will not do much on this side the Parret; and men will ever gather +to us."</p> +<p>Then we took our wounded and went back to the fort--four hundred +men out of six hundred who sallied out, where we thought that none +would return. But how many Danes we left on the field it is hard to +say. Some say six hundred, and some more; and it may be so. Their +graves are everywhere over the hill where they fell. When the tide +rose we were gone; and Hubba's men sought the body of their chief, +and raised a mound over it. But they had no mind to stay on our +side of the river, and they went to the Polden Hills, and laid the +land waste far and wide, even to holy Glastonbury, until they +joined Guthrum's force at Edington.</p> +<p>Now one may know in what wise Etheldreda the brave shield maiden +met us, as we came back from that hard-won field, with words of +praise and thanks. But Thora stood not with her as we passed +through the fort gates, where she waited on the rampart with the +Lady Alswythe. Nor had she watched the fight at all, being torn +with sorrow and fear alike.</p> +<p>I found her presently, while the men made litters whereon to +bear our wounded to safety, having cleansed the stains of war from +my armour. King Harald's mail had kept me from wound worth +notice--though, indeed, I hardly know how it was that I was unhurt +thus. Kolgrim would not use his arm for many days, and Harek was +gashed in arm and thigh also.</p> +<p>When Osmund heard my tread, he started up from where he sat +beside Thora, looking away towards the hills to which we were +going, and greeted me warmly.</p> +<p>"It was a good fight, Ranald, and well won," he said.</p> +<p>Then Thora turned slowly, and looked at me fearfully, as if she +feared me. I was grieved, and would have gone away; but she drew +nearer, and the fear went from her eyes when she saw that I was +safe, knowing little of what I had been through. And at last she +smiled faintly, saying:</p> +<p>"King Ranald, they say my warrior has fought well."</p> +<p>"It had been strange had I not, Thora," I said.</p> +<p>"I think I should have hated my own kin had you fallen," she +said then.</p> +<p>"Ay," said Osmund, "war sees strange chances, and a man's +thoughts are pulled in many ways. Many a time have I seen Dane +fight with Dane on the old shores; and I can welcome a victor +heartily, even if it is my own kin who have been beaten. Presently +we Danes will fight for our new homes in England against such a +landing from beyond seas as you have met."</p> +<p>There was some scratch on my shield arm that drew Thora's eyes +at this time, and as the jarl spoke she came quickly to me, taking +some light scarf she had from her dress at the same moment.</p> +<p>"You are hurt," she said; "though it is little. Let me bind it +for you."</p> +<p>I suffered her to do so, saying nothing, but smiling at her, +while the colour came brightly into her face as she wrought. The +jarl smiled also, turning away presently as some new shouting came +up from the fort gateway, where men welcomed those who bore back +the spoils from the slain.</p> +<p>Then Thora had finished, and I put my arm round her and kissed +her once.</p> +<p>"My lady," I said, "it was worth the wound that you should tend +it."</p> +<p>And so she looked up at me frankly, and we knew well what had +grown up between us since the day when we had ridden together into +Wareham streets.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_XII" id="Chapter_XII">Chapter XII</a>. +Edington Fight.</h2> +<p>Now after this we held the great Dowsborough fort on Quantocks +for a few days, looking out over the land that should see the +greatest deeds of Alfred, the wise king, from Glastonbury in the +east to the wide stretches of the great wood, Selwood Forest, +beyond the Stanmoor fens; and there, in the clear air, and with +plenty of good provender from the smiling Taunton vale behind us, +we grew strong again.</p> +<p>The Danes marched on Bridgwater, and the garrison must needs +leave the place and retreat to the heights at Petherton, and there +hide. I was grieved that my good ship was in Danish hands, but at +least I knew that they would not harm her; and such was our faith +in Alfred the king, that I believed that I should have her back. +Old Thord came up to us when his charge was thus lost.</p> +<p>"Maybe they will finish painting her, and we shall be able to +launch her, when we go back, without more trouble," he said. "Two +of Hubba's ships, moreover, are worth having."</p> +<p>Then the king rode up to us, and told us that we had done well, +and that the great plan yet held. Already he had messengers out +throughout all the southern counties, and already men were +gathering through the land and filling the towns that the Danes +were leaving.</p> +<p>"When I know that the Danes have their eyes fixed on Quantock +side again, I shall strike," he said.</p> +<p>So began again the life in Athelney and at Stanmoor fort; but +now the Devon men gathered openly on our hills, and every day the +Danish force grew also. When the last fight came, there would be an +end to either one side or the other, and Guthrum knew it.</p> +<p>Once in that time I rode with Alfred, and saw Neot again; and if +it were but for a few hours that we might stay with him, he found +time to speak with me, asking if I had learned aught of his faith +as yet.</p> +<p>"I have been in Athelney," I answered, "and I saw what might the +holy Name has at Chippenham. The old gods have passed from me."</p> +<p>Little have I said of this, for one cannot speak of inmost +thoughts; but so it was. Yet I think that, had I been older, the +old faith would have died more slowly from my mind. So it was also +with Harek the scald, but I think that he was Christian in heart +before I had bent my mind to the matter in earnest. Long talks had +he with Denewulf, the wise herdsman, while I listened.</p> +<p>So holy Neot rejoiced greatly over us, bidding me seek baptism +at once.</p> +<p>"Nay, father," I said; "I fear it, knowing what it is. Let me +bide for a time till I am stronger in these deep things."</p> +<p>He tried to persuade me gently, but at last let me be, knowing +that I spoke in earnest and with all wish to seek it rightly.</p> +<p>So we left him on the day after we came, and went back to +Athelney, and Alfred was very silent all the way.</p> +<p>"What ails you, my king?" I asked him at last, fearing that his +pain, which had left him of late altogether, might return.</p> +<p>"I will tell you, cousin," he said. "Plainly has Neot shown me +that all these troubles have come from my own pride and self will +when first I was king. It is a long chain of happenings, of which +you would know nought were I to try to tell you. But so it has +been, and I weep therefor in my very heart."</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"What is past is past, King Alfred, and best friend. Look on to +the days to come, for I think that there shall rise a new and +happier England before the winter comes again. There is no man whom +I have met in all the hosts in whose heart is not love and best +thoughts of you. Old days are forgotten as if they had never been, +save that you led and conquered in the great battles beyond the +Thames."</p> +<p>He held out his hand to me, and took mine and gripped it, saying +no word, and riding on in silence for a mile and more. And after +that he was of good cheer again till we came to Exeter, and there I +stayed to see how fared my ships, for it was time they were in the +water again.</p> +<p>Well had my men and the Saxon wrights wrought at building. If +all went like this, King Alfred would have a fleet that could sweep +the seas from Dover to Orme's Head, and keep his land from new +plunderers at least.</p> +<p>In a week I came back to Athelney, and there was good cheer, and +all were in the best of heart, for things went well. Messengers +came and went across the winding paths from the southern hills, and +Ethered met me laughing, and said:</p> +<p>"The king has robbed you of your glory, Ranald. He has been into +the Danish camp--even to the presence of Guthrum himself."</p> +<p>Then I would hear of this from Alfred himself.</p> +<p>"Ay," he said, when he had greeted me and heard that the ships +were almost ready, "I have outdone you; for I have played the +gleeman as I planned, and have been in the midst of them yonder on +Edington hill."</p> +<p>"It was an awesome risk to run, my king," I said.</p> +<p>"Which you taught me yourself, cousin. Howbeit I met no damsel, +and I had no companion to return with but him with whom I +went--Heregar's young son, my page. Thane is he now by right of +unfearing service. Once, when I climbed the hill, I began to fear +greatly, and I stayed, and asked the boy if he was afraid to go on. +Tell me truly, Ranald, did you fear when you were in Wareham?"</p> +<p>"Truly I feared at first," I answered; "but since I was there +when it came on me, I must even go through with the business. So it +passed."</p> +<p>"Well, I am glad you confess it," he answered, "for I was minded +to turn and run when the first lights of the great camp showed +through the trees. Then the boy answered me, 'My king, why should I +fear when you are with me?' I was ashamed, and took Harek's harp +from him--for he carried it--and went forward boldly, singing the +song of Gunnar in the snake pit. And it seemed to me that Harek +would have chosen that song as fitting my case; for, putting Danes +for snakes, I was in a close place enough. The warriors came out +when they heard me; and I was well treated, and listened as I +drank. Many things I learned."</p> +<p>Now I cannot believe that Alfred feared at all. He was surely +but anxious, and took that feeling for fear. So think all his +people.</p> +<p>"It seems that they thought I sang well," he went on; "so they +took me to Guthrum. He indeed looked sharply at me once, and maybe +twice; but I went on singing Harek's songs, and paid no heed to +him. Presently he gave me a great horn of ale from his own table, +and this gold bracelet that I wear also, and sent me away. Then I +went about the camp and heard the talk. One man asked me if I had +seen Alfred, and what he was like. 'Faith,' said I, 'men say I am +like him.' Whereat they laughed long at me and at the king also. +Then heard I the truth about my own looks for once. I had some +trouble in getting away, but at last I seemed to wax hoarse, and so +made as if I would go to Bridgwater, and left them, promising to +come again. Ay, and I will keep my promise," he said; "but as +Harek's heathen songs say, it is the sword's mass that I will sing +to them."</p> +<p>Then his eyes glowed, and he was silent, and I wondered at the +courage and resource in the slight figure that was before me.</p> +<p>"All goes well, and the plan is good," he went on directly. +"They look for some easily-beaten attack from this side of the +Parret, and at the first sign thereof will leave Edington height +for the level ground below, as they did when Hubba came. Then when +they turn, on Edington hill will be our levy suddenly--a levy of +which they have not dreamed. And there will be the greatest fight +that England has seen yet, and after that there will be a Saxon +overlord of England against whom none will dare rise."</p> +<p>"May it be so, my king," I answered.</p> +<p>"It will be so," he said. "Here in this cottage have I had the +word that tells me thereof; and you, Ranald, brought the sign that +made the word sure to me."</p> +<p>I minded it, and I knew that for all my life my ways were bound +to the service of Alfred the king; for my fate was linked with his, +as it seemed, from my first coming.</p> +<p>It was not long now before the day came that will never be +forgotten; for word was brought in from every quarter that thanes +and freemen and churls alike would not be behind when Alfred gave +the word, and he sent back to bid them meet him at Ecgbryht's +Stone, beyond Selwood, on Whitsunday. There is a great and strong +camp there on a rocky hill that looks out far and wide, near the +two great roads, British and Roman, that cross in the vale beneath; +and to that all were to gather, for there would the Golden Dragon +be set up. Men call it White Sheet Castle.</p> +<p>On the day before I rode to Odda, who had already drawn his men +to the Petherton ridge above Bridgwater, and told him what the +king's word was. Then I went on up the long side of the Quantocks, +and spoke in the Maytime woods with Thora, telling her--for she was +a warrior's daughter, and was worthy of a warrior's love--that I +must be at the king's side. And so she bade me fight bravely, +speaking many noble and loving words to me, until I must go. Then I +led her back to Osmund in his place among the rough huts within the +wide circle of the camp ramparts, that now held but a few poor folk +from the Parretside lands.</p> +<p>"King Alfred makes some new move," I said to him, "and it is +possible that we may not meet again. I think that what is coming +will end all the trouble between Saxon and Dane."</p> +<p>He shook his head.</p> +<p>"Some day it will end," he said, "but not in my time or +yours--not until the Danes have grown to know that England is their +home, and that they are English by birth and right of time--maybe +not till Denmark has ceased to send forth the sons for whom she has +no place in her own borders."</p> +<p>Then I answered that perhaps he was right. I did not see into +things as far as he, and I was a stranger in the land.</p> +<p>"But this at last will give a strong overlord to England," I +said.</p> +<p>"Ay, for the time. So long as a strong king rules, there will be +less trouble indeed; but if Alfred's sons are weak, it will begin +afresh. England will no longer bear two kings; and while there is a +Saxon kingdom alongside a Danish, there cannot be lasting +peace."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"What of yourself? Shall you go back to Guthrum when this is +over?"</p> +<p>"I cannot tell," he answered. "What my fate is I know not yet. +What mean you to do if all goes well for Alfred? Shall you bide in +England?"</p> +<p>We had walked apart now, and were looking over all the fair +Quantock vale beneath us. I think there is no fairer lookout in all +England: land and river and hills and sea, and beyond the sea the +blue mountains of the Welsh coast--ever changing and ever beautiful +under sun and cloud and flying shadows.</p> +<p>"I have found the fairest land under the northern sun," I said; +"and I have found the best king, as I think. I shall bide here. One +other thing I have found of which I hardly dare to think, so many +are the chances of wartime. Yet, jarl, but for them I should not +have met with Thora, though in my heart I believe that I should not +have spoken to her yet."</p> +<p>"I would not have had it otherwise," he said, kindly taking my +arm. "I have seen what was coming long before Etheldreda spoke. It +has been good for Thora that she did so, whatever befalls."</p> +<p>Then we spoke of my promised place with the king, as if his +victory were certain. Indeed, I believe that we both had no thought +of its being otherwise.</p> +<p>"I do not know, however," said Osmund, "if your taking a Danish +wife will be well received. It may be likely that Alfred will wish +you to be bound to him by some tie of that nearness which shall be +of his making."</p> +<p>I had not thought of that, but it was a thing that was common +enough. Harald Fairhair was wont to give a rich wife to some chief +whom he would keep at his side.</p> +<p>"If that is so, I shall go hence," I said. "There are things +that come before friendship."</p> +<p>"Well," he answered, "we shall see. There is always a place for +us both at Rolf's side in his new-won land."</p> +<p>"Yet I should be loth to leave Alfred," I said most truly. "I +think that this is the only thing that would make me do so."</p> +<p>"Thora would not stand in your way to honour with him, nor would +I," said Osmund.</p> +<p>"Honour with Alfred shall not stand in my way, rather," I +answered. "But we speak of chances, as I think."</p> +<p>We said no more, and he bade me farewell.</p> +<p>I went back to Alfred somewhat sad, and yet with many thoughts +that were good and full of hope; and soon I had little time to do +aught but look on at the way in which the king's plans worked out +most wonderfully.</p> +<p>On the eve of the great Whitsunday festival we set out through +the fen paths southward to the hills and the first woodlands of +Selwood Forest, and when the morning came we were far in its +depths, passing eastward towards the place where we were to meet +the levy.</p> +<p>Presently we turned aside to a little woodland chapel that had +escaped the sight of the Danes, and from a hut beside it came out +an old priest, white-bearded and bent with age and scanty fare. At +first he feared that the heathen had found him at last; yet he +looked bravely at us, catching up the crucifix that hung at his +side and clasping it in both his hands as he stood in the open +doorway of his church, as if to stay us from it.</p> +<p>Alfred rode forward to him when he saw his fear.</p> +<p>"Father, I am Alfred the king," he said. "Far have I ridden on +this holy day. Now I would fain hear mass and have your blessing +before we go on."</p> +<p>Thereat the old priest gave thanks openly to the King of kings, +who had brought Alfred again into the land, and hastened to make +ready. So that was the king's Whitsuntide mass, and we three +heathen and our few men must bide outside while the others went +into the holy place and returned with bright faces and happy; for +this was a service to which we might not be admitted, though all +knew that we would be Christians indeed ere long.</p> +<p>So at last we came to the ancient castle, and saw the valley to +north and east beneath its height, bright everywhere with sparkling +arms that gleamed from lane and field and forest glade, as all +Wessex gathered to meet their king.</p> +<p>Then the Golden Dragon that we had lost and won was unfurled; +and the war horns blew bravely enough to wake the mighty dead whose +mounds were round about us; and soon the hillside was full of men +who crowded upwards and filled the camp and ramparts and fosse, so +that before sunset Alfred had a host that any king might be proud +to call his own. Yet he would call it not Alfred's force, but +England's.</p> +<p>Standing on the old ramparts, he spoke to them, while all the +great gathering was silent. And the words he said sank into the +heart of every man who heard, so that he felt as if on his arm +alone it rested to free England, and that his arm could not fail. +Not long did the king speak, but when he ended there rose a +cheering that was good to hear, for it came from hearts that had +been made strong to dare aught that might come.</p> +<p>After that he spoke to the thanes, giving each one his place, +and telling them all that he had planned, so that each knew what +was looked for from him. It seemed that he had forgotten nothing, +and that the day must go as he said he thought it would.</p> +<p>Men slept on their arms that night, without watch fires, lest +any prowling Danes should see that somewhat was on hand, although +Guthrum had drawn to him every man from out of Wessex, as was said, +and as seemed true. I have heard tales from some that in the night +the warriors who lie resting in the mounds around their old +stronghold came forth and wandered restless along the ramparts, +longing to take their part again in the mighty struggle they knew +was coming. I saw nothing, but Harek the scald says he saw.</p> +<p>Next day we marched towards our foes. Eighteen miles we went, +and then came to the holy place Glastonbury, where the burnt ruins +spoke again, as it were, to the warriors of wrong and cruelty to be +avenged.</p> +<p>There we were, but eight miles from the foe, and that night we +lay in a great meadow they called Iglea, deep down in the folds of +the hills, where even so great a host might be hidden for many days +if no chance betrayed them. Alfred took a few of us when night +came, and climbed the steep tor above Glastonbury town. Thence we +could see the long line of fires on Polden Hills that marked where +the Danes slept, all unknowing that any host could be gathered in +their rear.</p> +<p>In the grey of morning we set our ranks in order. I was with +Alfred, with Ethered of Mercia and Ethelnoth, and more nobles whom +I knew; and my few men were in the shield wall, among the best +warriors of the Saxon levies. None grudged that honour to those who +had made the point of the wedge that broke Hubba's ranks and won +the Raven banner.</p> +<p>Now, in our Norse land there is ever sacrifice to the Asir when +one leads a host to battle, that luck may be on the right side; and +now I was to see a more wondrous thing than even that. I knew by +this time the meaning of what I saw, and there crept into my heart +a wish that I might take full part therein with Alfred, who had +taught me.</p> +<p>When all the ranks were ordered, and the deep columns were drawn +up on Iglea meadows in three sides of a square, there came a little +train of robed monks, at whose head was Bishop Sigehelm of +Sherborne, before whom went a tall gilded cross. Careworn and +anxious looked the good fathers, for there was not one of them who +had not a tale of Danish cruelty and destruction to tell, and more +than one had hardly escaped with his life; but now their faces were +brighter with new hope as they came into the open side of the armed +square and waited for a moment.</p> +<p>Alfred and we stood before them, and the bishop raised his hand. +At that we all knelt, with a strange clash and rattle of arms that +went round the great host and ceased suddenly, so that the +stillness was very great.</p> +<p>Then was only the voice of the bishop, who in a clear tone spoke +the words of peace to those who should pass hence in the coming +battle, that they might fight bravely, and even rejoice in +death.</p> +<p>So he shrived the host, and at the end they said "Amen" in one +voice.</p> +<p>Thereafter the bishop prayed to the Lord of hosts--not such a +prayer as I had been wont to hear, but more wonderful, and with no +boasting therein, nor, as it were, any hate of the foe, but rather +the wish that the strife should make for peace, and even blessing +to them.</p> +<p>Then he lifted his hand and blessed all the host as they bared +their heads, and again the last word rolled deep and strong round +the ranks, and that was all; then Alfred cried cheerily to his men, +and we began our march that must needs end in battle.</p> +<p>There is a great road that climbs up the slope of the Polden +Hills from Glastonbury and then runs along their top to Edington +and beyond, and by this way we went, among pleasant woodlands. +Guthrum's own place was on the spur of Edington, because thence one +looks out on all the land that Alfred held, from the fort at Stane +hill to Bridgwater and Combwich and the sea beyond. That was only +eight miles from us, and was the point which we would win. Thence +to Bridgwater is five miles, and the town was now held in force by +the Danes; and where the road leaves the hills to cross the marsh +to the bridge and town, two miles away, was a camp that guarded the +causeway through the level.</p> +<p>We went quickly as a great host may, and Alfred had so ordered +matters that even as we set out from Iglea, Odda and his force were +moving in battle array from the Petherton heights on the Quantock +side of the town, as if to attack it. That was what Guthrum had +looked for since the time we had beaten Hubba, and the only attack +which could have seemed possible in any way.</p> +<p>It is likely that he overrated the number which Odda had with +him; for those who escaped us at Combwich had not been near enough +to see from the far side of the river how small our force was, and +would make much of those who had been able to overcome their +mightiest chief. Moreover, since that time seven weeks had gone by, +and the gathering of Devon might be greater yet. So it was, indeed; +but Odda had not a thousand men. Perhaps, too, the Danes feared +some sally from the fens; but however it was, they made not the +mistake which destroyed Hubba by despising us rashly, for Guthrum +drew his whole force together, and left the hills for a march +towards the town which he heard was threatened.</p> +<p>So when we came to Edington, Guthrum's hill fort was empty, save +for a camp guard to keep the country folk who lurked in wood and +fen from pillaging it. These men fled, and we stood on the ridge +without striking one blow; and King Alfred turned to us, and cried +that surely his plan was working out well.</p> +<p>Then our host lined the ridge, and a mighty Saxon cheer from ten +thousand throats went pealing across the valley below us, and they +say that shout was heard even in Bridgwater. Guthrum heard it as he +rode with his host across the long causeway, and his men heard it +and halted, and saw in their rear the blaze of war gear that shone +from their own lines, and knew that they were pent in between fens +and hills, with an unknown force ready to fall on them.</p> +<p>Whereon a panic very nearly seized them. Hubba's end was fresh +in their minds, and it needed all that Guthrum could say to prevent +them making for the town. But he minded them of old victories, and +bade them not fear to face the despised Saxons once again, and they +rallied. But it was noon before he could lead them to attack us, +and by that time he learned that Odda had halted above the town, +and need not be feared. But by that time also every post of vantage +along the hills was in our hands, and if Edington height was to be +held by Danes again, it must be won by hard fighting. That is a +thing that no Dane shrinks from, and now for Guthrum there was +nought else to be done, for he was surrounded, as it were.</p> +<p>No man saw the whole of that fight, for it began at noon, as I +have said, when Guthrum turned to find the hillward road blocked +behind him. And from that time on it raged from spur to spur and +point to point, as step by step the Danes won back to the +hillsides. But the crest of the hill they never gained, save where +for a time they might set foot and be driven headlong in turn by +those who had given way before them at first. And so the fight +swept on to the base of Edington hill and along its sides, for +there Alfred had held his best men in reserve. Already the Danes +had made for themselves some shallow lines of earthworks along the +crest, and now these were manned against their own attack.</p> +<p>Men who looked on from afar tell strange tales of the shouts and +cries that rang among the quiet Polden hills and woodlands that day +for long hours. It was very still, as it chanced, and the noise of +battle went far and wide from the place where Saxon and Dane fought +their greatest fight for mastery.</p> +<p>Ever rode Alfred with the light of battle on his face, confident +and joyous, among his men from post to post. Ever where the tide of +battle seemed to set against us his arm brought victory again, +until at last Guthrum drew his men together for one final attack +that should end the day.</p> +<p>On Edington hillside he massed them, and steadily they came on +under shield in a dense column to where, in their own camp, we +waited under the Dragon banner. Half our men, the best spearmen of +the force, were lying down resting, but along the little ridges of +the earthworks the archers stood, each knowing that he fought under +the eye of the king he loved.</p> +<p>"This is the end," said Alfred, as the Danes came on. "Be ready, +spearmen, when I give the word."</p> +<p>And they lay clutching their weapons, with their eyes fixed on +him as he stood on the hilltop, surrounded by his thanes, gazing on +the last assault of the Danes, whose archers from the wings were +already at work, so that the men of the shield wall closed in +around him.</p> +<p>I think that the Danes had no knowledge of what force was hidden +by the hill brow. For when they were within half arrow shot, and +Alfred gave the word, and the long ranks of spearmen leaped from +the ground and closed up for their charge, a waver went along the +shielded line, and they almost halted, though it passed, and they +came on even more swiftly.</p> +<p>Then Alfred lifted his sword and shouted, and, with that awful +roar that I had heard before on the Combwich meadows, over the hill +crest and down upon the Danes the spearmen rushed. The lines met +with a mighty crash of steel on steel, and while one might count +two score they swayed in deadly hand-to-hand strife. Then Guthrum's +men gave back one pace, and howled, and won their place again, and +again lost it.</p> +<p>Then forward went Alfred and his shield wall, and I was on one +side of him and Ethered of Mercia on the other, while after him +came Heregar, bearing the banner. The Danes in the centre closed up +as they saw us come, and there were shouts in which Guthrum's name +was plain to be heard, and I saw him across a four-deep rank of his +men.</p> +<p>Straight for him went Alfred, and the Danish line grew thin +before us. But as their king went forward our Saxons cheered again +and pressed their attack home, and right and left the Danish line +fell back and broke. At that a wild shout and charge with levelled +spears swept them down the hillside in full rout, and the end had +come. His courtmen closed round Guthrum and bore him from before +us, and the full tide of pursuit swept him away before we reached +him.</p> +<p>Alfred stayed his horse and let the men go on. His face was good +to see as he glanced round at the hills to our right; but when it +fell on the slain, who lay thickly where the lines had met, he +bared his head and looked silently on them for a space, while his +lips moved as if he prayed.</p> +<p>Then he said:</p> +<p>"These have given their lives not in vain, for they have helped +to bring peace, and have died to set an English king over the +English land."</p> +<p>He put on his crown-circled helm again, and as he did so, among +the fallen there was a stir and movement, and the wounded rose up +on arms and knees and turned on their sides, and raised their +hands, waving broken weapons, and crying in a strange, wearied +voice that yet had a ring of victory in it:</p> +<p>"Waeshael to Alfred the king!"</p> +<p>For the silence that had fallen, and the lessening shouts of the +pursuers, told them that they had won, and they were content.</p> +<p>Thereat Alfred flushed red, and I think that he almost wept, for +he turned from us. And then he spoke to the men who yet stood round +him, and said:</p> +<p>"Let every man who has any knowledge of care for the wounded, or +who has known a wound of his own and the way it was cared for, go +among these brave ones and help them."</p> +<p>Nor would he leave the place till he saw men going up and down +among the hurt, tending them as well as they could; and he was the +more content when he saw Bishop Sigehelm and many other clergy come +on the field from the rear, where he had bidden them stay. The +bishop had mail under his robes, having been eager to join in the +fight, as would Eahlstan, his great forerunner, have certainly +joined; but Alfred would not suffer him to do so.</p> +<p>Once more Guthrum tried to rally his men, when the flight bore +him to his camp at the hill foot, on the way across the fens to the +town. There was a sharp fight there, and Ethelnoth was wounded as +he led on his men; and thence the Danes fled to Bridgwater, making +no more delay. So close on them were our men that Guthrum's +housecarls closed the gates after their king on many of their +comrades, who fell under the Saxon spear in sight of safety. Nor +did we give them time to drive in the cattle that were gathered +from all the countryside to the meadows round the place.</p> +<p>Then came Thord to me and put me in mind of somewhat.</p> +<p>"Now is our work to be done, king. These Danes will take Hubba's +ships and be gone down the river next. We must stop them in some +way, for the king's plan is to starve them out, as it seems."</p> +<p>We had left the king at that time, for we would not suffer him +to join in pursuit, which has its dangers, if men turn desperate +and make a stand, as many did, dying like brave warriors that they +were. So I rode on quickly with my followers, and came to the river +bank below the bridge. The Danes were swarming on the ramparts of +the fortress like angry bees, and in the ships, which lay beneath +the walls, men were busy, even as Thord had guessed they would be, +making ready to sail when tide served. We could not reach them by +any means, for every boat had been taken from this side long ago, +when the first news of defeat was brought back by flying +horsemen.</p> +<p>Then Thord's face glowered under his helm, and he pointed to the +ship that was farthest from the bridge, and therefore likely to be +the first to start away when the tide was full. It was my own ship, +which they had got afloat.</p> +<p>"Thor's hammer smite them!" he growled; "they have launched the +old keel without finishing her painting--just as I left her. How +are we to stay their going off with her?"</p> +<p>"Is there a chain cable anywhere?" I asked.</p> +<p>"Not one in the place," he said; "and if we did get one across +the river, we should have to fight to keep the far end of it."</p> +<p>The tide was rising fast, and I thought we should surely lose +every ship, while Guthrum and his chiefs would escape us at the +same time. One might line the banks with archers, certainly, but +that would not stay the going. Evening was closing in, moreover. By +midnight they would be gone, and I was in a difficulty out of which +I could not see my way.</p> +<p>Suddenly Thord smote his hands together, and his face grew +brighter.</p> +<p>"I have it," he cried. "There is an old vessel that lies in a +creek a mile down the river. A great buss <a name="EndNote16anc" +href="#EndNote16sym" id="EndNote16anc"><sup>{xvi}</sup></a> she +is, and worth nothing; but she will float, and maybe will be afloat +now. If we can sink her across the channel in a place that I know, +not one of these ships will get away till she is raised."</p> +<p>Then I called every man to me whom I could see, and we went +quickly to the place where this buss was, and she was just afloat. +Thord knew where her tackle was kept, and he had the oars out--what +there were of them at least, for they were old and rotten enough. +Then we had to shove her off and get her boat into the water, and +the vessel itself floated up on the tide towards the narrow place +where she might best be sunk to block the channel against ships +that came from the town.</p> +<p>We had not gone far when there came a sound at which I started, +for it was nothing more or less than the quick beat of oars coming +down the river against the tide. Thord and I and eight men of my +own crew were in the buss, while I had maybe thirty men ashore who +were keeping pace with us along the bank. The rest of my own men +were with these, and one shouted that he could see the ship, and +that it was our own, crammed with men too.</p> +<p>Now at first it seemed as if the only thing for us to do was to +go ashore in the boat as quickly as we could and get away; but +Thord cried to me:</p> +<p>"Then will the Danes take our ship to sea, and we have lost her +for good. It should not be said of us that we let her go without a +blow struck to save her."</p> +<p>"Sink this hulk straightway, then," I said, falling to work, +with the axe I had in thy hand, on the lowest strakes. My men +leaped to work as well, and in two minutes the seams began to gape, +and then was a rush of water from broken planking that sent us over +the side and into the boat in hot haste.</p> +<p>Then we pulled for shore, towing the bows of the fast-sinking +buss with us till they grounded in the mud, and even as her stern +swung with the tide across the channel she lurched and sank.</p> +<p>"We should have bided in her and fought," growled Thord. "Now in +five minutes we shall see the bottom ripped out of our own ship by +our own deed."</p> +<p>But a foot of the bows and the mast of the buss stood out of the +water, and I thought the Danes would see these marks.</p> +<p>Even as we gained the shore our dragon stem swept round the bend +that had hidden us, and came on swiftly. Then the Danes saw us, and +those on the fore deck shouted, and the oars plashed wildly, and +many on the side next to us stopped altogether; and at the same +time the steersman saw the stem of the wreck, and, as I think, lost +his head between fear of it and the sudden appearance of the foe +whom he thought he had escaped. The larboard oars were going yet, +and the starboard had almost stopped. He paid no heed to it, and +the ship swung over. Then the tide caught her bows, and in a moment +she ran hard and fast on our bank, and the men in her fell right +and left with the shock.</p> +<p>I had seen what was coming, and so had Thord, and we ran our +best to meet her as she struck. The tide was a good one, and she +came well on the hard bank, and there was no need to tell my men +what to do. Before the Danes knew what had happened we were +climbing over the bows on board, and the Danes aft were leaping +into the river to get away from us.</p> +<p>Some few tried to fight; but there must have been two hundred +men packed along the gangways, and they could do nothing. They +threw themselves into the water like the rats that had left the old +buss even now, and we slew many, and the good ship was our own +again. Some of the Danes got ashore on the far bank, some were met +by our Saxons on this side, and but few got back to Bridgwater, for +the river had most of them.</p> +<p>Another ship was coming at this time, but those in her heard the +shouting and the cries; and it would seem that their hearts failed +them, for they went back before we could see more than the tall +mast above the banks from our decks.</p> +<p>Then we thought we might rest, for we were wearied out; but +Thord would not suffer us to do so till he had got the ship +carefully below the wreck, so that she was free. Had we waited for +the next tide we could not have done it, as it turned out; for the +rise of flood shortened quickly to the neap tides, and a bank of +mud grew round the sunken hull, making the channel impassable +altogether for the time, and so the last way of escape for Guthrum +and his men was barred.</p> +<p>So I thought we had done well, and left Thord and my men to +guard the ship and take her back to Combwich, where she would lie +safely in the creek, while I rode to Alfred, almost sleeping on my +wearied horse as I went.</p> +<p>There were two wrecks in that place in the morning; for they +brought down one of Hubba's ships in the dark on the next tide, and +she ran on the sunken stem of the buss, and went down almost at +once. After that no more attempt was made to fly by water.</p> +<p>Then began a siege that lasted for a fortnight, without anything +happening that is worth telling; for the fear of Alfred was on the +Danes, and they had not heart so much as to make one sally from the +gates.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_XIII" id="Chapter_XIII">Chapter XIII</a>. The +Greatest Victory.</h2> +<p>Now in a few days it was plain that Alfred held the Danes in the +hollow of his hand as it were, and could do what he would with +them. At first we looked for messengers from the place, to treat +with him for peace; but none came. From the town at times we could +hear shoutings and the noise of men who quarrelled, as if there +were divided counsels among them that led to blows. They were very +short of food also, because all their stores of cattle were left +outside the walls, as I have said, so that we fared the better for +their plundering while we waited.</p> +<p>At the end of the first week, therefore, Alfred sent a message +under flag of truce, and told the chiefs that he was willing to +hear what they would say; and next day Guthrum asked that some +chiefs might come and speak with him. But Alfred would not trust +the Danes enough to send any of his nobles into the town, and bade +Guthrum come out to the camp and say what he had to say. But he +would not. Then one day, when Alfred held counsel as to what was +best to be done to ensure lasting peace, I said that I thought Jarl +Osmund might be of use, for he could go between the two camps in +safety.</p> +<p>That seemed good to the king, and Heregar and I rode to find +him, crossing the tidal ford at Combwich, where we heard from +village folk who had returned that the Danish lord bided in +Heregar's house beyond the fort.</p> +<p>There I thought I should find Thora, and we went quickly. The +place looked very deserted, and when we came to the courtyard gates +it seemed more so, for the Maytime had sprinkled the gay-patterned +paving of grey and white shore pebbles with blades of grass and +weeds that sprang up between them everywhere for want of +tendance.</p> +<p>Only the Lady Alswythe and a few of her servants were there now, +for the Lady Etheldreda had taken Thora with her to Taunton when +she left the hills. It had not been so safe here, though there was +little plunder to bring the Danes to the place now. So I need not +say that I was grievously disappointed, though in the dismantled +hall sat Osmund, listlessly shaping a bow stave, and waiting for +what turn of fortune should take him next.</p> +<p>Very glad, as one might think, were both the lady and the jarl +for our coming, and we had to tell them all the tale of the working +of Alfred's plan, and of the great fight. And when that was heard, +we told the jarl of Alfred's wish to treat with Guthrum and the +other chiefs through him.</p> +<p>That Osmund would gladly do; indeed, he said that, in hopes of +being thus useful, he had stayed so near at hand.</p> +<p>So he and the thane talked long of the matter--for Alfred had +sent messages--while I spoke with the lady, of Thora mostly.</p> +<p>It did not seem to me that I had any part in the king's business +with the Danes, and so presently I thought that I could do no +better than ride to Taunton to see Thora, who I feared might be in +trouble or doubt as to my safety.</p> +<p>So I rode there with Kolgrim. At that time the scald was laid up +with a wound in the camp, and the king seemed to miss his presence, +and to care for his welfare as if he were his brother; but, indeed, +he made every man with whom he had to do feel as if his king were +his best friend.</p> +<p>There is not much need for me to tell what manner of welcome I +had at Taunton from Thora. As for Etheldreda, she would have me +tell her everything, and I sat with those two, until night came and +rest, talking of all the time past. But of the time to come Thora +said nothing, and once or twice when Etheldreda left us and we were +alone for a little while, so that I could try to plan out somewhat, +she would but turn the talk again.</p> +<p>In the morning I found out how this was. She had gathered from +Osmund somewhat of his thoughts about what Alfred's plan for me +might be, and was unhappy therefore, not wishing to stand in my way +to honour with the king. So she told me when I pressed her a little +to speak of what I would do; and when I said that there should be +nothing that I would let stand between us, she was the more +troubled yet.</p> +<p>So at last I went and found Etheldreda, and prayed her to come +and speak with Thora.</p> +<p>"Falling out already?" she said, laughing.</p> +<p>"Not so, but a greater trouble than that," I said, "one that +will need your help before it is mended."</p> +<p>"Ay, I suppose you could patch up a quarrel for yourselves," she +said. "What is this mighty trouble?"</p> +<p>So she came and sat by Thora, taking her hand and kissing her, +and we told her what Osmund's thoughts were.</p> +<p>"There is such enmity between Saxon and Dane," Thora said, "that +it is not likely that the king will trust one who will wed one of +his foe's daughters."</p> +<p>It was plain that Etheldreda thought the same; but she cheered +us both, saying that she would do all that she could to help us, +and that Odda would not be behind in the matter. After all, if we +were to wait for a while, things might be very different after a +little time of peace. And so we were content.</p> +<p>So I went back to Alfred next day, and when he heard where I had +been he smiled a little, and said:</p> +<p>"One thing I must tell you, my Norseman, and that is that our +thanes who know little of you will be jealous that you should have +much dealing with any Dane as yet."</p> +<p>Which made me the more uneasy; for though I might think that the +king, at all events, was not displeased with me, others, and the +wishes of others, might be too strong for him to go against.</p> +<p>But my affairs are little things compared with what was on hand +at this time, and on the same day Alfred spoke to me about somewhat +that he would have me do for him.</p> +<p>In the town the Danes were in the greatest straits by this time, +for by no means could they get stores of any sort to them, so close +was the watch round the place. Osmund had been in and out once or +twice, and Guthrum had received him well enough, and it was thought +that there would be no long delay now before the siege was at an +end by the submission of the Danes to any terms they might gain, +and the more so that an assault on the fortress would surely have +been successful, ending in the fall of all its defenders.</p> +<p>But Alfred was most willing to be merciful, and he had bidden +Osmund tell Guthrum and his chiefs that if he might name twelve +hostages for himself the rest should go free, while Guthrum should +hold the East Anglian kingdom for him as under-king.</p> +<p>But this was what Alfred would have me do.</p> +<p>"One other thing there is," he said. "If there is to be any +brotherhood between us, it must be as between Christians. The ways +of persecution must be forgotten and that cannot come to pass until +the chiefs at least have accepted the faith."</p> +<p>"It is strange to me, my king," I said, "that Guthrum, who has +been in England for ten years, is not Christian by this time."</p> +<p>"Ay, but his hosts are heathen," the king answered. "Now I think +I can speak to you as if no longer a heathen at least?"</p> +<p>"As a Christian, my king," I answered.</p> +<p>"Well, then," he said, smiling on me, "go and speak to Guthrum +and tell him what I have said. I think that he will listen to you +better than if I sent a priest or even Bishop Sigehelm. Warrior may +speak to warrior plainly."</p> +<p>Now this was a hard thing for me to do, as it seemed. Maybe it +was the hardest thing he could have asked me. But it was in my mind +that I could not but go to Guthrum and give the message, else would +I seem to deny the faith that I loved. Alfred saw at once that I +was troubled in some way, and I believe that he knew well what the +seeming doubt was.</p> +<p>"Once you brought a token of good to me," he said. "Now that was +all unknowing. Go now and take a message of good to Guthrum openly, +and have no fear."</p> +<p>"What shall I say?"</p> +<p>"Mind not that at all," he answered; "what is needed will come +to you."</p> +<p>So I said that I would go if Harek might come with me, for his +words were ever ready. But Alfred would not suffer that. I must go +without help from a scald, taking only my own words; and at last I +consented, though indeed my only fear was that I might not succeed +by reason of my slowness of speech.</p> +<p>Then I went to Osmund, and told him that I was to go into the +town with him next day, for that is how Alfred planned for me; and +I told him also what my part in the business was to be. Whereon he +surprised me.</p> +<p>"I do not know that your errand is so hopeless as you seem to +think," he said. "Guthrum has harmed no Christians in East Anglia +since he was king there."</p> +<p>"Well," I answered, "I hope it may be easy, though I doubt +it."</p> +<p>I would not say more then, but, being anxious, went and spoke +long with Harek. The brave scald's wounds were deep, though he had +said little of them. Some say that he saved the life of Ethelnoth +at the time when that ealdorman was struck down, and that also is +Ethelnoth's story; though the scald says that if so it was by +accident, and less worth speaking of than many braver deeds that +were wrought and went untold that day.</p> +<p>"Here have I been in England but six months or so, and I have +more to sing of than ever I learned with Harald Fairhair," he said +one day, as he made songs on his bed while his wounds were +healing.</p> +<p>And he spoke the truth. Never was a winter so full of deeds +wrought by a king and a valiant people that were worth a scald's +remembrance.</p> +<p>Now Osmund had a last message from Alfred that day, and in the +morning we went together to the bridge. There Guthrum's own +courtmen met us, and they took us into the fortress, beyond which +lies the town, so that we saw little of what straits the host might +be in by this time. In the fortress itself all seemed in order at +least; and there was a guard set at the door of the well-built hut +where the Danish king was, as if some state were yet kept up.</p> +<p>There Guthrum welcomed us, and with him were many chiefs, on +whose faces was the same care-worn look that Osmund had borne when +I saw him at Exeter before Alfred.</p> +<p>"Two messages come to you today," Osmund said; "one by my mouth, +and the other by that of King Ranald Vemundsson, who is with me. I +think you may hear both, and answer them both favourably."</p> +<p>Guthrum made no reply, but took his seat at the upper end of the +one room the hut had; and all the chiefs sat also, leaving us +messengers standing.</p> +<p>Then said Osmund:</p> +<p>"I think it right that I should stand in the presence of my +king, but the son of King Vemund should not do so in any less +presence than that of his overlord."</p> +<p>Thereat Guthrum smiled a little.</p> +<p>"I have heard that Harald of Norway came to blows with his +brother kings because they would not stand before him, and that +others have left that kingdom because they did not choose to do so. +Sit down, King Ranald. Your father's name was well known to all of +us in the old days. I am glad to see his son, though maybe I should +not say so."</p> +<p>"We would rather that he were on our side," said one of the +other chiefs.</p> +<p>Then they set places for both of us, and we waited for Guthrum's +word.</p> +<p>"Well," he said, wearily enough, "let us hear what King Alfred +says."</p> +<p>"Few are his words," said Osmund:</p> +<p>"'Let Guthrum suffer me to choose any hostages that I will for +myself, let him swear to keep the peace hereafter as my under-king +beyond Thames, doing homage to me, and he shall go hence with his +host in honour.' There is also the message of Ranald to add +hereto."</p> +<p>Now I thought that the faces of the chiefs showed that they +thought these terms very light; but they said nothing as yet.</p> +<p>Guthrum turned to me.</p> +<p>"Well, King Ranald?"</p> +<p>"Alfred the king bids me say that he would fain treat with you +hereafter as a brother altogether. And that can only be if the +great trouble between Dane and Saxon is removed--that is, if +Guthrum becomes a Christian."</p> +<p>Now I expected some outburst of scorn and wrath on this, but +instead of that a silence fell, in which the chiefs looked at one +another; and Guthrum gazed at me steadfastly, so that I felt my +face growing hot under his eyes, because I knew I must say more, +and that of myself and my own wishes most likely.</p> +<p>Then Guthrum said slowly:</p> +<p>"Why has he not sent some priest to say this?"</p> +<p>"Because he thought that a warrior would listen best to a +brother warrior," I answered.</p> +<p>"Ay, that is true," said the king. "Are you a Christian, +therefore?"</p> +<p>"I am as yet unbaptized," I said. "I have taken the prime +signing on me, as have many others; but I shall certainly seek +baptism shortly."</p> +<p>"You came here as a heathen, then?"</p> +<p>"As a heathen altogether, except that I had no hatred of +Christians," I answered, not quite seeing what the king would +know.</p> +<p>"What turned your mind so far from the old gods that you should +be a fit messenger on such a matter to us?"</p> +<p>"I have learned from Alfred and Neot," I answered, "and I know +that I have found what is true."</p> +<p>Then Guthrum turned to Osmund.</p> +<p>"What say you, jarl? you have been with Alfred also."</p> +<p>"When Ranald is baptized, I shall be so with him," the jarl +answered simply.</p> +<p>And that was the first word thereof that I had heard from +him.</p> +<p>Then an older chief spoke sharply to us.</p> +<p>"What profit do you look to make thereout--either of you?"</p> +<p>"Certainty of better things both in this life and in that to +come," I answered.</p> +<p>"Ay, so they always say," the chief growled; "but what place +with Alfred in return?"</p> +<p>"It is likely that I shall gain no place with him," I said. +"Jarl Osmund knows that I do not count on that."</p> +<p>"Ay," said Osmund, "I know it. Nor will any man think that I +seek honour at Alfred's hands."</p> +<p>Then Guthrum rose up, and spoke gravely and yet very +determinedly, as if this was no new matter to him.</p> +<p>"Here, chiefs, are two good and tried warriors who willingly +choose Alfred's faith. You and I have heard thereof since we were +in England; and many a man have we seen die, since we have been +here, because he would not give it up. I mind me of Edmund, the +martyred king, whom Ingvar, our great chief, slew, and of Humbert +the bishop, and many more lesser folk. Tell me truly how much you +have thought of the Asir in these last years?"</p> +<p>But none answered. It was with them as with me: the Asir were +not of England.</p> +<p>"One thing," said Guthrum, "has gone against our taking up the +English faith--we have thought the words of peace have made men +cowardly. Now we know that is not so. Here is one who withstood +Hubba, and round the walls watch Christian men who have beaten us +sturdily."</p> +<p>Then he stayed his words for a little, and his voice sank, and +he looked round and added:</p> +<p>"Moreover, the words of the new faith are good. I will accept +King Alfred's brotherhood altogether."</p> +<p>Then one or two more of the younger chiefs spoke, and said that +they would do so also; but again the elder warrior spoke +fiercely.</p> +<p>"Is this forced on us as part of the peace making?"</p> +<p>"It is not," I answered. "It is, as I have said, the wish for +brotherhood altogether."</p> +<p>Then said Guthrum:</p> +<p>"That is enough. I do not think that we need be ashamed to be +conquered altogether by King Alfred."</p> +<p>"One more word," said the old chief. "Are we to have no +hostages?"</p> +<p>"There can be no exchange of hostages," said Osmund.</p> +<p>"Things are all on the side of the Saxon," he growled.</p> +<p>"Ay, they are, in more ways than that," said Guthrum. "We have +no power to say a word. It is in my mind that we could not have +looked for such mildness at the king's hands. For there is no +denying that we are at his mercy.</p> +<p>"What say you, as a stranger, Ranald?"</p> +<p>"I have known the ways of Harald of Norway," I answered. "I +think that he would not have left a man of this host alive."</p> +<p>Whereon the old warrior laughed shortly, and was silent while +Guthrum bade us go back to Alfred and thank the king for his word, +saying that an answer should be given as soon as the word of the +host had been taken in open Thing.</p> +<p>So Alfred won Guthrum to the faith, and greatly did he rejoice +when he heard what the Danish king had said. I think he was more +glad yet when he knew that Osmund would become Christian also, and +he urged us both to be baptized at once.</p> +<p>"Let us be so with Guthrum," I asked.</p> +<p>"That will be fitting," he answered, "for I think you have won +him over."</p> +<p>But I hold that Guthrum and more of his chiefs had been won by +the deaths of those martyrs of whom he spoke long before the choice +was set before him. One cannot tell how this was wrought in the +mind of the Danes altogether by the hand of God. Some will ever +say, no doubt, that they took the Cross on them by necessity; but I +know that it was not so. Nor have their lives since that time given +any reason for the thought.</p> +<p>Then Alfred asked the name of that old warrior who withstood us, +and Osmund told him.</p> +<p>"I will have that chief as a hostage," the king said, "for I +think that he is worth taming."</p> +<p>"I think that King Alfred's hostages are not in any way to be +pitied," Osmund said.</p> +<p>"Save that they are kept from home and friends, I would have +them as happy as may be," the king answered; "but I would have none +presume on what mercy came to you, Jarl Osmund, for the sake of the +Christmastide message."</p> +<p>"I think that none will do so," Osmund said. "There is full +knowledge among my kin that you showed mercy when justice was about +to be done, and well they know that your kindness was not weakness. +It is likely that the mercy shown here also will do more for peace +than would even destruction of your enemies."</p> +<p>So it seemed at last, for on the fourteenth day of the siege the +Danes accepted the king's terms with one consent. And more than +that, Guthrum and thirty of his chiefs asked that they might be +baptized; which was a wonder to all of our host.</p> +<p>Now I have said nothing about the life in the great camp before +Bridgwater, for it had nothing of much note to me, though it was +pleasant enough. I think there was some jealousy of me among the +younger thanes at one time; but it passed because I would not +notice it, and also because I took no sort of authority on me, +being only the king's guest and warrior as yet. But I did find a +few young thanes of Odda's following who knew somewhat of the sea, +and I was wont to talk with them often of the ships and the like, +until I knew they would be glad to take to the viking's path with +me in the king's ships, bringing their men with them. And often +Alfred spoke with me of the matter, until I was sure that he would +have me stay.</p> +<p>It was but a few days after the peace had been made when Alfred +went to a great house he had at Aller, which lies right amidst the +marshes south of Athelney. We had saved that house and the church +by our constant annoyance of the Danes, with many another house and +village along the fen to which they dared not come for fear of us +at last. Guthrum was to come to him there, and I think that he +chose the place because there at least was nought to bring thoughts +of defeat to the Danes, and there they could be treated as guests, +apart from the great camp and fortress. Great were the preparations +there for the high festival that should be when Alfred himself +should take Guthrum to the font.</p> +<p>Then came Neot on foot, with Guerir his fellow hermit, from +Cornwall, to be present; and Harek and I rejoiced as much as the +king that he had come.</p> +<p>"I think I must answer for you two at the font," he said.</p> +<p>"For Kolgrim also, I pray you, Father Neot," said I; "for he +will be baptized with us."</p> +<p>"Ay, for honest Kolgrim also," he answered; "but what of old +Thord, my reprover?"</p> +<p>"He will have nought to do with the new faith," I said. "But at +least he does not blame us for leaving the old gods. He says he is +too old to learn what we younger men think good."</p> +<p>"I will seek him and speak with him again," Neot said. "I think +I owe him somewhat."</p> +<p>Then we thanked the holy man for the honour that he was showing +us; but he put thanks aside, saying that we were his sons in the +truth, and that the honour was his rather.</p> +<p>Now in the seven weeks that we waited for Guthrum at Aller, +while the priests whom Alfred sent taught him and his chiefs what +they should know rightly before baptism, Osmund and I were wont to +go to Taunton, across the well-known fens, and bide for days at a +time in Odda's house there, and we told Thora for what we +waited.</p> +<p>She had come to England, when she was quite a child, with the +first women who came into East Anglia, and already she knew much of +Christianity from the Anglian thralls who had tended her. And when +she had heard more of late from Etheldreda and Alswythe, she had +longed to be of the same faith as these friends of hers, and now +rejoiced openly.</p> +<p>"Ranald," she said, "I had not dared to speak of this to my +father, but I was wont to fear the old gods terribly. They have no +place for a maiden in their wild heaven. There are many more Danish +ladies who long for this change, even as I have longed. Yet I still +fear the wrath of Odin for you and my father."</p> +<p>"The old gods are nought--they have no power at all," I said, +bravely enough; though even yet I had a little fear in thus defying +them, as it seemed.</p> +<p>"Then I will dread them no more," she answered. "Nor do I think +that you need fear them."</p> +<p>So I comforted her, and bade her ask more of Etheldreda, who +would gladly teach her; and the matter passed by in gladness, as a +trouble put away, for she and I were at one in this. I will say +that I had half feared that she whom I loved would have been angry +with me.</p> +<p>Now on that night Osmund and I and Harek would ride to Heregar's +house over the shoulder of the Quantocks, with some message we had +to take to him from Alfred; and we went without any attendants, for +the twelve miles or so would have no risk to any one, and the +summer evening was long and bright.</p> +<p>Yet we were later in starting away than we should have been, and +so when we were among the wilder folds of the hills, where the bare +summits rise from wooded slopes and combes, we were overtaken by a +heavy thunderstorm that came up swiftly from the west behind us, +darkening the last sunset light with black clouds through which the +lightning flickered ceaselessly.</p> +<p>We rode on steadily, looking for some place of shelter; but it +grew very dark, and the narrow track was rough, and full of loose +stones that made the going slow. Presently the clouds settled down +on the hill crest and wrapped us round, and the storm broke afresh +on us, with thunder that came even as the darkness was changed to +blue brightness with the lightning flashes that played around us +almost unceasing. There was no rain yet and no wind, and the heat +grew with the storm.</p> +<p>Soon the nearness of the flashes scared our horses, and we had +to dismount and lead them, and in the darkness we lost the little +track among the heavy heather. And then there seemed to me to be a +new sound rising among the thunder, and I called to Harek, bidding +him hearken.</p> +<p>It came from seaward, and swelled up louder and louder and +nearer, until it passed over our heads--the yelp and bay of Odin's +wild hounds, and the trample and scream of his horses and their +dead riders. A great fear fell on me, so that the cold sweat stood +on my forehead, while the hunt seemed everywhere above us for a +moment, and then passed inland among the thunder that hardly +drowned its noises.</p> +<p>Then Osmund the jarl cried out:</p> +<p>"That was Odin's hunt. I have heard it before, and ill came +thereof. He hunts us who forsake him."</p> +<p>And out of the darkness Harek answered, without one shake in his +brave voice:</p> +<p>"Odin's hunt in truth it was, and the ill comes to Odin, who +must leave this land before the might of the Cross. We who bear the +sign of might he cannot touch."</p> +<p>Then I remembered myself, and the fear passed from me, and I was +ashamed. I had no doubt now that there was need for Odin's wrath, +seeing that he was surely defeated. And Osmund was silent also, +thinking doubtless the same things; for he had taken on him the +prime signing long ago, and had forgotten it maybe.</p> +<p>Then we went on, and the storm grew wilder. Harek sang now, but +what the words were I cannot tell. I think they were some that he +had learned from Alfred.</p> +<p>Now we began to go down the southern slope of the highest neck +of the hill, as it seemed, though we could not rightly say where we +were, and in a little silence that came between the thunderclaps I +heard the rattle of hoofs as of another rider coming after us, +going faster than we dared.</p> +<p>"Here is one who knows the hill well," I said; "maybe he will +guide us."</p> +<p>And then the lightning showed the horseman close to us. He +reined up, and cried in a great voice:</p> +<p>"Ho, strangers! are you wandering here?"</p> +<p>"Ay; we are lost till the storm passes. Can you guide us to +shelter before the rain comes?" I said.</p> +<p>"Whence come you?" he asked.</p> +<p>"We are Alfred's men from Taunton--going to the thane's house at +Cannington."</p> +<p>"Ay, is that so? Then I will guide you. Follow," he said, and he +rode on.</p> +<p>One could see him plainly when the lightning came, and it showed +a tall man, grey bearded, and clad in a long hooded horseman's +cloak, under which gleamed golden-shining mail. Well mounted on a +great horse he was also, and its sides were white with foam on the +dark skin, as though he had ridden hard.</p> +<p>We mounted and went after him, with the lightning playing round +us and glancing from the mail of our leader as his arm threw the +cloak back over his shoulder from time to time. He led us along the +hill crest northward, crossing the places where the fire beacons +had been; and we wondered whither he was taking us, for shelter +here was none. And now the storm grew wilder, with the wind and +chill of coming rain.</p> +<p>Then he turned downhill, riding fast until we came to a place +where rocks lay loose and scattered everywhere, and our horses +stumbled among them. There he reined up suddenly, holding up his +hand, and shouting through the uproar of wind and thunder:</p> +<p>"Hold, for your lives! Hearken!"</p> +<p>We stayed motionless, listening, and again we heard the cry and +clang of Odin's hunt, coming now from inland over us, and I made +the sign of the Cross on my breast, in fear thereof.</p> +<p>"Ho for Odin's hunt!" the strange man cried, in his mighty +voice. "Hear it, Alfred's men, for you shall join it and ride the +wind with him if you defy him."</p> +<p>"We fear him not," said Harek; "he has no power over us."</p> +<p>"Has he not?" the man roared, facing full upon us; and as he did +so the lightning glared on him, and I saw that his drawn sword was +aloft, and that from its point glowed a blue flame, and that blue +flames also seemed to start from his horse's ears. One-eyed the man +was also, and he glowered on us under shaggy eyebrows.</p> +<p>Harek saw also, and he raised his hand towards the man and +signed the holy sign, crying:</p> +<p>"Speak! who are you?"</p> +<p>Thereat the man gave a hoarse roar as of rage, and his horse +reared, trampling wildly on the loose rocks, and, lo, he was gone +from before our eyes as if he had never been, while the thunder +crashed above us and below us everywhere!</p> +<p>"Odin! the Cross has conquered!" Harek cried again, in a voice +that was full of triumph; and the blood rushed wildly through me at +the thought of what I had seen.</p> +<p>Then Harek's horse shifted, and his hoof struck a great stone +that rolled as if going far down the hill, and then stopped, and +maybe after one could count five came a crash and rattle underneath +us that died away far down somewhere in the bowels of the hill. And +at that Osmund shouted suddenly:</p> +<p>"Back to the hill; we are on the brink of the old mine shaft! +Back, and stay not!"</p> +<p>Nor did we wait, but we won back to the higher ground before we +drew rein.</p> +<p>"We have met with Odin himself," Osmund said when we stopped and +the thunder let him speak.</p> +<p>"Ay, and have driven him hellwards by the might of the holy +sign," said Harek. "Nearly had he lured us to death, unbaptized as +we are, in that place."</p> +<p>"Come," said Osmund; "I know where we are now. We are well-nigh +under the great fort, and there is a farm near at hand."</p> +<p>We found that soon and the rain came, and the storm spent its +fury and passed as we sat under cover in the stables waiting. Then +came the moonlight and calm, and the sweetness of rain-soaked earth +and flowers refreshed, and we went on our way wondering, and came +to the thane's with the first daylight. And I thought that our +faces were pale and marked with the terror of the things through +which we had gone, and maybe also with a new light of victory +<a name="EndNote17anc" href="#EndNote17sym" id= +"EndNote17anc"><sup>{xvii}</sup></a>.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_XIV" id="Chapter_XIV">Chapter XIV</a>. King +Alfred's Will.</h2> +<p>When we came back to Aller, the first thing that I did was to +tell Neot of our meeting with Odin while his wild hunt went on +through the tempest, telling him how that I had feared unwisely, +and also of Harek's brave withstanding of the danger.</p> +<p>"It is said that our forefathers met Odin in like wise in the +days of the first christening of our race," he said. "I do not know +what to make thereof, seeing that I hold Odin as nought; but I +think this, that in some way Satan tried to destroy you before you +were baptized. Wherefore, whether Odin or mortal man drew you to +that place, I have no doubt what power saved you."</p> +<p>But Sigehelm thought that we had met with Satan himself in the +shape of the old god, and so also thought Guerir the hermit, who +told strange tales of like appearings among the Welsh hills where +he was born.</p> +<p>As for Alfred the king, he marvelled, and said even as Neot. But +he added this:</p> +<p>"I know the mine shaft well, and it is in my mind that some day +Odin's bones will be found at the bottom thereof. Nevertheless +there is more than mortal in what has happened to you by way of +trial."</p> +<p>Now came the time when Guthrum and his thirty comrades should +seek the king, and I have no words to tell of that time when in the +peaceful church we heathen stood white-robed and unarmed altogether +at the font, while Sigehelm, with a wonderful gathering of priests, +enlisted us as warriors of the Cross. It was, as all men think, the +most mighty victory that Alfred had ever gained.</p> +<p>At that time he chose Guthrum as his own son in the faith, and +named him Athelstan <a name="EndNote18anc" href= +"#EndNote18sym" id="EndNote18anc"><sup>{xviii}</sup></a>, as the +first and most noble stone of the new building up of the church +among the Danes. Neot would not have our names changed, for he said +we had wronged the faith in them not at all. Odda stood for Osmund, +as Neot for us.</p> +<p>After that was joyous feasting, and the loosing of the chrism +bands at Alfred's royal town of Wedmore, whither we went in bright +procession through the long summer day. Four days we bided there, +till we knew that the great Danish host was on its march homewards, +and then Guthrum and his comrades must join it. But before he went +he accepted from Alfred the gifts that an under-king should take +from his overlord, and they were most splendid. All men knew by +those tokens given and taken that Alfred was king indeed, and that +Guthrum did but hold place by his sufferance. Those two parted in +wondrous friendship with the new bond of the faith woven round +them, and the host passed from Wessex and was gone.</p> +<p>Yet, as ever, many a long year must pass by before the track of +the Danes should be blotted out from the fair land they had laid +waste. Everywhere was work to hand on burnt hall and homestead, +ruined church, and wasted monastery. There was nought that men +grieved over more than the burning of King Ine's church at +Glastonbury, for that had been the pride of all the land. Once, +after the Chippenham flight, the monks had dared to go out in sad +procession to meet the fierce raiders at the long dike that bars +the way to Avalon, and for that time they had won safety for the +place--maybe by the loss of their treasures given as ransom, or, as +some say, by the power of fearless and unarmed men; for there were +men in the Danish host whose minds were noble, and might well be +touched thereby. But Hubba's men could not be withheld after they +had lost their mighty leader, and the place must feel their fury of +revenge.</p> +<p>Now after the host was gone we went back to Taunton, and there +Alfred called together his Witan, that he might set all things in +order with their help; and at that time, before the levies were +dismissed, he bade me seek out such men as would take to the ships +as his paid seamen. Therein I had no hard task, for from the ruined +coast towns came seafarers, homeless and lonely, asking nought +better than to find a place in the king's fleet, and first of all +were the Parret-mouth men and my fisher of Wareham. Presently, with +one consent, the Witan made me leader of the king's Wessex sea +levies, offering me the rank and fee of an English ealdorman, with +power to demand help in the king's name from all sea-coast sheriffs +and port reeves in whatever was needed for the ships, being +answerable to the throne only for what I should do. And that I +accepted willingly for love of Alfred, who was my friend, and for +the sake of comradeship with those valiant men who had fought +beside me when Hubba fell, and at Edington.</p> +<p>Then must I set myself to my new charge, having nought to do +with all the inland work that was before the king; and when the +next day's business was over, I went to tell him of this wish of +mine, and of some other matters that were on my mind whereof one +may easily guess.</p> +<p>Alfred sat in his private chamber in the great house that King +Ine built, and on the table before him were a great ink horn and +other writing gear, and beside him sat on a low stool his chaplain, +reading to him out of a great book while the king wrote. The rough +horn cage wherein was a candle, that he had planned in wind-swept +Athelney, stood close at hand, against the time of dusk that was +near. Ever was Alfred planning things like this, even in his +greatest troubles; and therein he was wise, for it is not good to +keep the mind full of heavy things alone. Moreover, as we wondered +at his skilful devices in these little things, we took heart from +his cheerful pleasure in them.</p> +<p>When the chamberlain brought me in, the great book was put +aside, and the pen set down, and the king looked up at me with his +bright smile.</p> +<p>"Welcome, my ship thane," he said. "Come and sit here beside me. +I have somewhat to read to you."</p> +<p>So I sat down wondering, and he turned back to some place in his +writing, and took the little knife that lay by him--for he had lost +his jewelled book staff in Athelney--and running its point along +the words, read to me from the writings of some old Roman what he +had been busy putting into good Saxon:</p> +<p>"Now when the Roman folk would make a fleet hastily, and had no +rowers, nor time to train them rightly, they built stages like to +the oar benches of a ship in a certain lake, and so taught the men +the swing and catch of the long oars."</p> +<p>"Will not that plan serve us, Ranald?" he said.</p> +<p>"Ay, lord," I answered, laughing. "In good truth, if a man can +learn to keep time, and swing rightly, and back water, and the +like, on such a staging, it is somewhat. But it will be hard work +pulling against dead water from a stage that moves not. Nor will +there be the roll and plunge of waves that must be met."</p> +<p>"Nor the sore sickness whereof Odda speaks," Alfred said, with +his eyes twinkling. "But I think that if the Romans found the plan +good, it will be so for us."</p> +<p>So we talked of this for a while, and I will say now that in +after days we tried it, and the plan worked well enough, at least +in the saving of time. Alfred's book learning was ever used for the +good of his people, and this was but one way in which he found +ready counsel for them.</p> +<p>This was pleasant talk enough, and neither I nor the king grew +weary thereof, but the good monk slept at last, and presently the +darkness fell, and Alfred dismissed him.</p> +<p>One came and lit the torches on the wall, and still we spoke of +my work, until at last Alfred said:</p> +<p>"So you must be busy, and I am glad. When will you set out, and +where will you go first?"</p> +<p>Now what I wanted to ask him was where Osmund the jarl had gone. +He had ridden to Taunton from Aller, that he might be present at +Thora's christening, and that their chrism loosing <a name= +"EndNote19anc" href="#EndNote19sym" id= +"EndNote19anc"><sup>{xix}</sup></a> might be held at the same +time; and I had looked to find both here, but they were gone. Nor +had they left any word for me, and I was troubled about that. So I +was about to tell the king what was in my mind concerning Thora +first of all, and my heart began to beat strangely. But he waited +not for me to answer him.</p> +<p>"Stay," he said, smiling a little. "Before you go I must have a +hostage from my wild viking, lest he be, as it were, let loose on +the high seas where I cannot reach him."</p> +<p>Then he laughed, at my puzzled face, I suppose, and I saw that +he had some jest that pleased him.</p> +<p>"What hostage can I give, lord king?" I said. "Shall I leave +Harek and his harp with you?"</p> +<p>"Harek would charm our ears, and would escape," Alfred answered. +"Nay, but I must give you house and lands for a home, and therein +you shall leave a fair wife, whose loneliness will bring you ashore +now and then."</p> +<p>I thought there was more to come, and I liked not this at all, +for it went too closely with my fears of what might be. So I bowed, +and answered nothing as yet, while he looked laughingly at me.</p> +<p>"Why," he cried, "half my thanes would have gone wild with joy +if I had promised them either half of what I have said I would give +to you. Are you so fond of the longships and the restless waves +that you will not be bound to the shore?"</p> +<p>"Nay, my king," I said; "but I cannot yet rightly understand all +that you mean for me."</p> +<p>"Well, it means that I must find you a rich wife, as I think I +can. What say you to that fair lady of Exeter town and +Taunton--Odda's daughter, Etheldreda?"</p> +<p>"My king," I answered, somewhat over-gladly maybe, "Ethelnoth of +Somerset, my good comrade, might have some grudge against me if I +cast favouring eyes in that direction. Let this bide for a little +while, I pray you, King Alfred. Yet I would not have you think me +ungrateful, for indeed I know well what kindness is in your thought +for me."</p> +<p>"Nay, but I have it in my mind that you were fond of going to +Taunton not so long since, and one might well think that a maiden's +hair drew you. Well, if Ethelnoth has outdone you there, I am sorry +for your sake, not his. Cheer up, nevertheless. There are more +maidens and well dowered in our broad Wessex coasts, and I am +minded to see how far you will obey your new overlord."</p> +<p>"This is great kindness, King Alfred," I answered; "but we +Northmen are apt to keep some matters wherein to prove our freedom. +I pray you not to press this on me."</p> +<p>"Faith," he said, as if to himself, "this viking might be in +love already, so wrathful grows he--</p> +<p>"Now, Ranald, it is true that I have set my mind on your wedding +a maiden who is rich, and dowered with a coast town, and a good +harbour, moreover, where you might keep all your ships under your +own eye. I would not have you disappoint me so soon."</p> +<p>Then I said plainly,</p> +<p>"King Alfred, I am loth to do so. But from the very first day +that I set foot in England there has been one maiden whose ways +have seemed to be bound up with my own, and I can wed none but her. +If it does not seem good to you that I should do so now, let me +wait till times have grown easier between Saxon and Dane. I think +that you may know well that I shall fight none the worse for you if +I must strive to win your consent."</p> +<p>"That is straightforward," he said, smiling as if he would seem +content. "Let it be so. But it is only fair that before we close +this bargain you should see the well-dowered fair lady of whom I +speak."</p> +<p>"I will do so if this matter is unknown to her," I answered, +"else would be trouble, perhaps, and discomfort. But it is of no +use. I have eyes and heart but for that one. Do I know the lady +already, perhaps?"</p> +<p>"I believe that you may do so," Alfred said, looking grieved, in +a strange way, as if he were half minded to laugh at me for all his +seeming vexation. "Odda says that you do, and so also says +Etheldreda. Her name is Thora, daughter of Jarl Osmund, and she +will have Wareham town and Poole in right of her marriage, as dower +to her and to my sea captain."</p> +<p>So spoke the king quickly, and then he could make pretence no +longer, but laughed joyously, putting his hands on my shoulders and +shaking me a little, while he cried:</p> +<p>"Ay, Ranald; I did but play with you. True lover you are indeed, +as I thought. If you are faithful to the king as to the maiden of +your choice, both she and I are happy, and it is well."</p> +<p>Then I knew not how to thank him; but he said that Etheldreda +and Odda, Heregar and the Lady Alswythe, and maybe Guthrum also, as +Thora's guardian, were to be thanked as well.</p> +<p>"You have found many friends here in England already, Ranald my +cousin," Alfred said. "Wait until you meet some gathering of them +all at Wareham, presently perhaps, where Osmund and Thora are +preparing for a wedding--and then make a great thanking if you +will, and save words. But I wonder that I have never heard of this +matter from you before, for we have been close comrades."</p> +<p>"You must have heard thereof today, my king," I answered; "and +you were but beforehand with me. I could speak of such things now +that peace has come. Yet I feared that you would be against my +wedding a Danish lady."</p> +<p>"It was a natural thought," answered Alfred; "but Thora and +Osmund are ours, surely. Perhaps I should have doubted were your +mind set on any other. But I have no fears for you."</p> +<p>Then he pondered a little, and went on:</p> +<p>"You say that peace has come. So it has--for a time; and had we +to do only with the force that is in England now, I think it would +grow and strengthen. We cannot drive out the Danes, and there is +room in England for both them and us, and in the days to come the +difference of race will be forgotten--not in our time, Ranald, but +hereafter, as long years go by. Some day one of my line, if God +will, shall reign alone over a united England, stronger for the new +blood that has come among us. But it is a great charge that I give +to you, Ranald. What we have to fear are the new hosts that come +from Denmark, and only a strong fleet can stay them from our +shores. I can deal with those who are here, and these in time will +help me against fresh comers to the land. There is that in English +soil that makes every settler an Englishman in heart. But there is +warfare before us yet, and the fleet must break the force of the +storm, if it cannot altogether turn it aside."</p> +<p>Then his grave voice changed, and he laughed.</p> +<p>"Heavy things are these to speak in the ears of a bridegroom, +but you know all I mean. Now go your ways, and seek Odda, who will +rejoice to see you; for word comes from him that his master, Thord +the viking, is saying hard things to him because the men do not +come in readily to man the ships. At the summer's end I shall be in +Winchester, and thence I will come to Wareham to see the fleet, and +your wedding also. Go now, and all good go with you."</p> +<p>So Alfred the king set me forth in brotherly wise, speaking on +the morrow to my men to bid them serve him and England well under +me. And after that all came to pass as the king had planned, and at +the summer's end there was a bright wedding for us in Wareham town, +while in the wide haven rode at anchor the best fleet that England +had ever seen.</p> +<p>So that is how I came to be called "King Alfred's Viking," and +made this land my home. What this Wessex fleet of mine has done +since those days has been written by others in better words than I +can compass; and Harek, whom they call "King Alfred's Scald" +nowadays, has made song of what he has seen at my side in English +waters; and more he may have to make yet, for the North has not yet +sent forth all her hosts. Only I will say this, that if we have not +been altogether able to stay the coming of new Danish fleets to the +long seaboard that must needs lie open to them here and there till +our own fleets are greater, at least they know that the host may no +longer come and go as they will, for Alfred's ships have to be +reckoned with.</p> +<p>Now of ourselves I will add that Thora and I have many friends, +but the best and closest are those whom we made in the days when +Hubba came and fell under the shadow of the Quantock Hills, and +they do not forget us.</p> +<p>Into our house sometimes come Heregar and Ethered, Denewulf the +wise and humble, Odda, and many more, sure of welcome. Only the +loved presence of Neot the holy is wanting, for he died in Cornwall +in that year of the end of the troubles, and I think that in him I +lost more than any save Alfred himself.</p> +<p>Osmund went back to East Anglia for a time, but there he grew +wearied with the wrangling of the Danish chiefs as they shared out +the new land between them; so he bides with us, finding all his +pleasure in the life of farm and field, which is ever near to the +heart of a Dane. With him goes old Thord, grumbling at the thralls +in strange sea language, and yet well loved. Not until he was +wounded sorely in a sea fight we had and won under the Isle of +Wight would he leave the war deck; but even now he is the first on +board when the ships come home, and he is the one who orders all +for winter quarters or for sailing.</p> +<p>Now for long I would that I might look once more on Einar of the +Orkneys, my kind foster father, who still bided there in peace, +hearing of him now and then as some Norse ship, on her way to join +Rolf's fleet in the new land of the Northmen beyond our narrow +seas, put into our haven for repair, perhaps after the long voyage, +or to see if King Alfred would hire her men for a cruise against +the common foe--the Danes. And it was not until the news of his +death came thus to me that the home longing for the old lands +altogether left me; but since that day my thoughts have been, and +will be, for England only. I have no thought or wish that I were +sharer in Rolf's victories, nor have my comrades, Harek and Kolgrim +and Thord; for we have with Alfred more than the viking could have +given us.</p> +<p>I suppose that in days to come out of this long strife shall be +wrought new strength and oneness for England, even as Alfred in his +wisdom foresees; but as yet sword Helmbiter must be kept sharp, and +the ships must be ever ready. But unless the wisdom of Alfred is +forgotten, there will never again be wanting a ship captain of +English race, as when I, a stranger, was called to the charge of +the king's ships in Wessex. The old love of the sea is waking in +the hearts of the sons of Hengist.</p> +<p>Therefore I am content, for here have I found the sweetest wife, +and the noblest master, and the fairest land that man could wish. +And the fear of the old gods is taken from me, and to me has come +honour, and somewhat of the joy of victory in a good cause--the +cause of freedom and of peace.</p> +<p>Now I write these things as springtime grows apace, and at any +time--today, or tomorrow, or next day--into our hall may come +Kolgrim my comrade, his scarred face bright with the light of +coming battle, to say that Danish ships are once more on the +gannet's path; and the sword of Sigurd will rattle in the golden +scabbard, and a great English cheer will come from the haven, for +King Alfred's ships are ready.</p> +<h2>The End.</h2> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Notes" id="Notes">Notes</a>.</h2> +<div id="EndNote1"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote1sym" href= +"#EndNote1anc" id="EndNote1sym">i</a> A Norse homestead +consisted of several buildings--the great hall standing alone and +apart from the domestic arrangements.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote2"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote2sym" href= +"#EndNote2anc" id="EndNote2sym">ii</a> The Norse assembly, +corresponding to a Saxon "Folkmote," or representative council for +a district.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote3"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote3sym" href= +"#EndNote3anc" id="EndNote3sym">iii</a> Unearthly. The trolls +were the demons of the Northern mythology.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote4"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote4sym" href= +"#EndNote4anc" id="EndNote4sym">iv</a> Byrnie, the close-fitting +mail shirt.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote5"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote5sym" href= +"#EndNote5anc" id="EndNote5sym">v</a> The consecrated silver +ring kept in the temple of the district, and worn by the godar, or +priest, at all assemblies where it might be necessary to administer +an oath. Odin, Frey, and Niord were always called to witness an +oath on this ring.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote6"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote6sym" href= +"#EndNote6anc" id="EndNote6sym">vi</a> God-rede = "good +counsel," or "God's counsel," as Alfred means "elves' counsel."</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote7"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote7sym" href= +"#EndNote7anc" id="EndNote7sym">vii</a> Asser's +"Life of Alfred." This illness never left the +king from his twentieth year to his death. Probably it was +neuralgic, as it seems to have been violent pain without lasting +effect.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote8"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote8sym" href= +"#EndNote8anc" id="EndNote8sym">viii</a> This was called "prime +signing," and was practically the admission of the heathen as a +catechumen.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote9"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote9sym" href= +"#EndNote9anc" id="EndNote9sym">ix</a> The "Havamal" was the +Northern poem which practically embodied the ancient code of morals +and behaviour.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote10"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote10sym" href= +"#EndNote10anc" id="EndNote10sym">x</a> The use of bells was +popular early in England, and not less so because a freeman who +could afford to build a church with a bell tower became a thane in +consequence.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote11"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote11sym" href= +"#EndNote11anc" id="EndNote11sym">xi</a> The national +representative assembly, and origin of our parliament.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote12"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote12sym" href= +"#EndNote12anc" id="EndNote12sym">xii</a> Now Normandy, and so +called after Rolf's Northmen.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote13"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote13sym" href= +"#EndNote13anc" id="EndNote13sym">xiii</a> This charm against +the "evil eye" was used in the west of England until quite lately, +and may still linger. The charm against sprains is one yet recorded +in the original tongue.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote14"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote14sym" href= +"#EndNote14anc" id="EndNote14sym">xiv</a> Alfred had Denewulf +instructed, and made him Bishop of Winchester.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote15"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote15sym" href= +"#EndNote15anc" id="EndNote15sym">xv</a> In 845 A.D. Bishop +Eahlstan and the levies of Somerset and Dorset defeated the first +Danes who landed in Wessex, at the mouth of the Parret.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote16"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote16sym" href= +"#EndNote16anc" id="EndNote16sym">xvi</a> Trading vessel, more +heavily built than the swift longships.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote17"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote17sym" href= +"#EndNote17anc" id="EndNote17sym">xvii</a> The "wild hunt" is +still believed to pass over Cannington and the Quantock Hills, the +sounds of the migration of flocks of sea fowl probably keeping the +tradition alive.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote18"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote18sym" href= +"#EndNote18anc" id="EndNote18sym">xviii</a> Athelstan = "noble +stone."</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote19"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote19sym" href= +"#EndNote19anc" id="EndNote19sym">xix</a> Confirmation.</p> +</div> + +<div>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 14034 ***</div> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..477ee07 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #14034 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/14034) diff --git a/old/14034-h.zip b/old/14034-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a16b552 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/14034-h.zip diff --git a/old/14034-h/14034-h.htm b/old/14034-h/14034-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fa877b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/14034-h/14034-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7787 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="CONTENT-TYPE" content="text/html; charset=us-ascii" /> +<title>King Alfred's Viking</title> + +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-top:70px; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + hr {height: 5px} + pre.toc { + margin-left: 4%; + font-size: 16pt; + font-weight: bold; + text-transform: uppercase + } + pre.verse {text-align: center; font-size: 10pt;} + p {text-indent: 4% } +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of King Alfred's Viking, by Charles W. Whistler + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: King Alfred's Viking + A Story of the First English Fleet + +Author: Charles W. Whistler + +Release Date: November 13, 2004 [EBook #14034] +[Date last updated: July 28, 2006] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KING ALFRED'S VIKING *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + + +</pre> + +<h1>King Alfred's Viking</h1> +<h2>A Story of the First English Fleet</h2> +<h2>by<br /> +Charles W. Whistler.</h2> +<hr /> +<h2>Contents</h2> +<pre class="toc"> + <a href="#Preface">Preface</a>. + <a href= +"#Chapter_I">Chapter I</a>. The Seeking of Sword Helmbiter. + <a href="#Chapter_II">Chapter II</a>. The Gifts of Two Heroes. + <a href= +"#Chapter_III">Chapter III</a>. Odda, the Ealdorman of Devon. + <a href="#Chapter_IV">Chapter IV</a>. Jarl Osmund's Daughter. + <a href="#Chapter_V">Chapter V</a>. Two Meetings in England. + <a href="#Chapter_VI">Chapter VI</a>. Alfred the King. + <a href="#Chapter_VII">Chapter VII</a>. The Pixies' Dance. +<a href="#Chapter_VIII">Chapter VIII</a>. The Black Twelfth-Night. + <a href="#Chapter_IX">Chapter IX</a>. The Sign of St. Cuthberht. + <a href="#Chapter_X">Chapter X</a>. Athelney and Combwich. + <a href="#Chapter_XI">Chapter XI</a>. The Winning of "The Raven." + <a href="#Chapter_XII">Chapter XII</a>. Edington Fight. +<a href="#Chapter_XIII">Chapter XIII</a>. The Greatest Victory. + <a href="#Chapter_XIV">Chapter XIV</a>. King Alfred's Will. + <a href="#Notes">Notes</a>. +</pre> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Preface" id="Preface">Preface</a>.</h2> +<p>The general details and course of events given in this story +are, so far as regards the private life and doings of King Alfred, +from his life as written by his chaplain, Asser. One or two further +incidents of the Athelney period are from the later +chroniclers--notably the sign given by St. Cuthberht--as are also +the names of the herdsman and the nobles in hiding in the fen.</p> +<p>That Alfred put his first fleet into the charge of "certain +Vikings" is well known, though the name of their chief is not +given. These Vikings would certainly be Norse, either detached from +the following of Rolf Ganger, who wintered in England in 875 A.D. +the year before his descent on Normandy; or else independent rovers +who, like Rolf, had been driven from Norway by the high-handed +methods of Harald Fairhair. Indeed, the time when a Norse +contingent was not present with the English forces, from this +period till at least that of the battle of Brunanburh in 947 A.D. +would probably be an exception.</p> +<p>There are, therefore, good historic grounds for the position +given to the hero of the story as leader of the newly-formed fleet. +The details of the burning of his supposed father's hall, and of +the Orkney period, are from the Sagas.</p> +<p>Much controversy has raged over the sites of Ethandune and the +landing place of Hubba at Kynwith Castle, owing probably to the +duplication of names in the district where the last campaign took +place. The story, therefore, follows the identifications given by +the late Bishop Clifford in "The Transactions of the Somerset +Archaeological Society" for 1875 and other years, as, both from +topographic and strategic points of view, no other coherent +identification seems possible.</p> +<p>The earthworks of the Danish position still remain on Edington +hill, that looks out from the Polden range over all the country of +Alfred's last refuge, and the bones of Hubba's men lie everywhere +under the turf where they made their last stand under the old walls +and earthworks of Combwich fort; and a lingering tradition yet +records the extermination of a Danish force in the neighbourhood. +Athelney needs but the cessation of today's drainage to revert in a +very few years to what it was in Alfred's time--an island, alder +covered, barely rising from fen and mere, and it needs but little +imagination to reproduce what Alfred saw when, from the same point +where one must needs be standing, he planned the final stroke that +his people believed was inspired directly from above.</p> +<p>It would seem evident from Alfred's method with Guthrum that he +realized that this king was but one among many leaders, and not +directly responsible for the breaking of the solemn peace sworn at +Exeter and Wareham. His position as King of East Anglia has gained +him an ill reputation in the pages of the later chronicles; but +neither Asser nor the <i>Anglo-Saxon Chronicle</i>--our best +authorities--blames him as they, for his contemporaries knew him to +be but a "host king," with no authority over newcomers or those who +did not choose to own allegiance to him.</p> +<p>Save in a few cases, where the original spelling preserves a +lost pronunciation, as in the first syllable of "Eadmund," the +modern and familiar forms of the names have been used in preference +to the constantly-varying forms given by the chroniclers. +Bridgwater has no Saxon equivalent, the town being known only as +"The Bridge" since the time when the Romans first fortified this +one crossing place of the Parret; and the name of the castle before +which Hubba fell varies from Cynuit through Kynwith to Kynwich, +whose equivalent the Combwich of today is. Guthrum's name is given +in many forms, from Gytro to Godramnus. Nor has it been thought +worth while to retain the original spelling AElfred, the ae +diphthong having been appropriated by us to an entirely new sound; +while our own pronunciation of the name slightly broadened as yet +in Wessex, is correct enough.</p> +<p>The exact relationship of St. Neot to Alfred, beyond that he was +a close kinsman, is very doubtful. He has been identified with a +brother, Athelstan of East Anglia, who is known to have retired to +Glastonbury; but there is no more than conjecture, and I have been +content with "cousinship."</p> +<p>C. W. Whistler</p> +<p>Stockland, 1898.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_I" id="Chapter_I">Chapter I</a>. The Seeking +of Sword Helmbiter.</h2> +<p>Men call me "King Alfred's Viking," and I think that I may be +proud of that name; for surely to be trusted by such a king is +honour enough for any man, whether freeman or thrall, noble or +churl. Maybe I had rather be called by that name than by that which +was mine when I came to England, though it was a good title enough +that men gave me, if it meant less than it seemed. For being the +son of Vemund, king of Southmereland in Norway, I was hailed as +king when first I took command of a ship of my own. Sea king, +therefore, was I, Ranald Vemundsson, but my kingdom was but over +ship and men, the circle of wide sea round me was nought that I +could rule over, if I might seem to conquer the waves by the +kingship of good seaman's craft.</p> +<p>One may ask how I came to lose my father's kingdom, which should +have been mine, and at last to be content with a simple English +earldom; or how it was that a viking could be useful to Alfred, the +wise king. So I will tell the first at once, and the rest may be +learned from what comes after.</p> +<p>If one speaks to me of Norway, straightway into my mind comes +the remembrance of the glare of a burning hall, of the shouts of +savage warriors, and of the cries of the womenfolk, among whom I, a +ten-year-old boy, was when Harald Fairhair sent the great Jarl +Rognvald and his men to make an end of Vemund, my father. For +Harald had sworn a great oath to subdue all the lesser kings in the +land and rule there alone, like Gorm in Denmark and Eirik in +Sweden. So my father's turn came, and as he feasted with his ninety +stout courtmen, the jarl landed under cover of the dark and fell on +him, surrounding the house and firing it. Then was fierce fighting +as my father and his men sallied again and again from the doors and +were driven back, until the high roof fell in and there was a +sudden silence, and an end.</p> +<p>Then in the silence came my mother's voice from where she stood +on the balcony of the living house across the garth <a name= +"EndNote1anc" href="#EndNote1sym" id= +"EndNote1anc"><sup>{i}</sup></a>. I mind that she neither wept nor +shrieked as did the women round her, and her voice was clear and +strong over the roaring of the flames. I mind, too, the flash of +helms and armour as every man turned to look on her who spoke.</p> +<p>"Coward and nidring art thou, Rognvald, who dared not meet +Vemund, my husband, in open field, but must slay him thus. Ill may +all things go with thee, till thou knowest what a burning hall is +like for thyself. I rede thee to the open hillside ever, rather +than come beneath a roof; for as thou hast wrought this night, so +shall others do to thee."</p> +<p>Then rose a growl of wrath from Rognvald's men, but the great +Jarl bade them cease, and harm none in all the place. So he went +down to his ships with no more words and men said that he was ill +at ease and little content, for he had lost as many men as he had +slain, so stoutly fought my father and our courtmen, and had earned +a curse, moreover, which would make his nights uneasy for long +enough.</p> +<p>Then as he went my mother bade me look well at him, that in days +to come I might know on whom to avenge my father's death. After +that she went to her own lands in the south, for she was a jarl's +daughter, and very rich.</p> +<p>Not long thereafter Harald Fairhair won all the land, and then +began the trouble of ruling it; and men began to leave Norway +because of the new laws, which seemed hard on them, though they +were good enough.</p> +<p>Now two of Jarl Rognvald's sons had been good friends of my +father before these troubles began, and one, Sigurd, had been lord +over the Orkney Islands, and had died there. The other, Jarl Einar, +fell out with Rognvald, his father, and we heard that he would take +to the viking path, and go to the Orkneys, to win back the jarldom +that Sigurd's death had left as a prey to masterless men and +pirates of all sorts. So my mother took me to him, and asked him +for the sake of old friendship to give me a place in his ship; for +I was fourteen now, and well able to handle weapons, being strong +and tall for my age, as were many of the sons of the old kingly +stocks.</p> +<p>So Einar took me, having had no part in his father's doings +towards us, and hating them moreover. He promised to do all that he +might towards making a good warrior and seaman of me; and he was +ever thereafter as a foster father to me, for my own had died in +the hall with Vemund. It was his wish to make amends thus, if he +could, for the loss his folk had caused me.</p> +<p>Of the next five years I need speak little, for in them I +learned the viking's craft well. We won the Orkneys from those who +held them, and my first fight was in Einar's ship, against two of +the viking's vessels. After that we dwelt in Sigurd's great house +in Kirkwall, and made many raids on the Sutherland and Caithness +shores. I saw some hard fighting there, for the Scots are no babes +at weapon play.</p> +<p>Then when I was nineteen, and a good leader, as they said, the +words that my mother spoke to Jarl Rognvald came true, and he died +even as he had slain my father.</p> +<p>For Halfdan and Gudrod, Harald Fairhair's sons, deeming that the +Jarl stood in their way to power in Norway, burned him in his hall +by night, and so my feud was at an end. But the king would in +nowise forgive his sons for the slaying of his friend, and outlawed +them. Whereon Halfdan came and fell on us in the Orkneys; and that +was unlucky for him, for we beat him, and Jarl Einar avenged on him +his father's death.</p> +<p>Now through this it came to pass that I saw Norway for the last +time, for I went thither in Einar's best ship to learn if Harald +meant to make the Orkneys pay for the death of his son--which was +likely, for a son is a son even though he be an outlaw.</p> +<p>So I came to my mother's place first of all, and full of joy and +pleasant thoughts was I as we sailed into the well-remembered fiord +to seek the little town at its head. And when we came there, nought +but bitterest sorrow and wrath was ours; for the town was a black +heap of ruin, and the few men who were left showed me where the +kindly hands of the hill folk had laid my mother, the queen, in a +little mound, after the Danish vikings, who had fallen suddenly on +the place with fire and sword, had gone. They had grown thus bold +because the great jarl was dead, and the king's sons had left the +land without defence.</p> +<p>There I swore vengeance for this on every viking of Danish race +that I might fall in with; for I was wild with grief and rage, as +one might suppose. I set up a stone over the grave of my mother, +graving runes thereon that should tell who she was and also who +raised it; for I was skilled in the runic lore, having learned much +from one of Einar's older men who had known my father.</p> +<p>Thereafter we cruised among the islands northwards until we +learned that Harald was indeed upon us, and then I saw my last of +Norway as we headed south again, and the last hilltop sank beneath +the sea's rim astern of us. I did not know that so it would be at +that time--it is well that one sees not far into things to +come--but even now all my home seemed to be with Einar; and that +also was not to last long, as things went. How that came about I +must tell, for the end was that I came to Alfred the king.</p> +<p>When we came back to Kirkwall, I told the jarl all that I had +done and learned; and grieved for me he was when he heard of my +mother's death. Many things he said to me at that time which made +him dearer to me. Then after a while he spoke of Harald, who, as it +seemed, might come at any time.</p> +<p>"We cannot fight Norway," he said, "so we must even flit hence +to the mainland and wait until Harald is tired of seeking us. It is +in my mind that he seeks not so much for revenge as for payment of +scatt from our islands. Now he has a reason for taking it by force. +He will seek to fine us, and then make plans by which I shall hold +the jarldom from him for yearly dues."</p> +<p>So he straightway called the Thing <a class="EndNoteanc" +name="EndNote2anc" href="#EndNote2sym" id= +"EndNote2anc"><sup>{ii}</sup></a> of all the Orkney folk, who +loved him well, and put the matter before them; and they set to +work and did his bidding, driving the cattle inland and scattering +them, and making the town look as poor as they might.</p> +<p>Then in three days' time we sailed away laughing; for none but +poor-looking traders were left, and no man would think that never +had the Orkneys been so rich as in Einar's time. And he bade them +make peace with the king when he came, and told them that so all +would be well, for Harald would lay no heavy weregild on so poor a +place for his son's slaying.</p> +<p>Southward we went to Caithness, and so westward along the +Sutherland coast; for we had taken no scatt there for this year, +and Einar would use this cruise to do so, seeing that we must put +to sea. We were not the first who had laid these shores under rule +from the Orkneys, for Jarl Sigurd had conquered them, meeting his +death at last in a Sutherland firth, after victory, in a strange +way.</p> +<p>He fought with a Scottish chief named Melbrigda of the Tusks, +and slew him, and bore back his head to the ships at his saddle +bow. Then the great teeth of the chief swung against the jarl's leg +and wounded it, and of that he died, and so was laid in a great +mound at the head of the firth where his ships lay. After that, the +Orkneys were a nest of evil vikings till we came.</p> +<p>So it had happened that, from the time when it was made over +him, Jarl Sigurd's mound had been untended, for we ourselves had +never been so far south as this firth before. Indeed, it had been +so laid waste by Sigurd's men after his death that there was nought +to go there for. But at this time we had reason for getting into +some quiet, unsought place where we should not be likely to be +heard of, for the king had over-many ships and men for us to meet. +So after a week's cruising we put into that firth, and anchored in +the shelter of its hills.</p> +<p>There is no man of all our following who will forget that day, +because of what happened almost as soon as the anchor held. It was +very hot that morning, and what breeze had been out in the open sea +was kept from us now by the hills, so that for some miles we had +rowed the ships up the winding reaches of the firth; and then, as +we laid in the oars and the anchorage was reached, there crept from +inland a dim haze over the sun, dimming the light, and making all +things look strange among the mountains. Then the sounds of the +ships seemed to echo loudly over the still water and when all the +bustle of anchoring was over, the stillness seemed yet greater, for +the men went to their meals, and for a while spoke little.</p> +<p>Einar and I sat on his after deck under the awning, and spoke in +low voices, as if afraid to raise our tones.</p> +<p>"There is a thunderstorm about," I said.</p> +<p>"Ay--listen," the jarl answered.</p> +<p>Then I heard among the hills, far up the firth beyond us, a +strange sound that seemed to draw nearer, like and yet unlike +thunder, roaring and jarring ever closer to us, till it was all +around us and beneath us everywhere, and our very hearts seemed to +stop beating in wonder.</p> +<p>Then of a sudden the ship was smitten from under the keel with a +heavy, soundless blow, and the waters of the firth ebbed and flowed +fiercely about us; and then the sound passed on and down the firth +swiftly and strangely as it had come, and left us rocking on the +troubled waters that plashed and broke along the rocks of the +shore, while the still, thick air seemed full of the screams of the +terrified eagles and sea birds that had left them.</p> +<p>"Odin defend us!" the jarl said; "what is this?"</p> +<p>I shook my head, looking at him, and wondering if my face was +white and scared as his and that of every man whom I could see.</p> +<p>Now we waited breathless for more to come, but all was quiet +again. The birds went back to their eyries, and the troubled water +was still. Then presently our fears passed enough to let us speak +with one another; and then there were voices enough, for every man +wished to hear his own again, that courage might return.</p> +<p>Then a man from the Orkneys who had been with Jarl Sigurd came +aft to us, and stood at the break of the deck to speak with +Einar.</p> +<p>"Jarl," he said, almost under his breath, "it is in my mind that +Sigurd, your brother, is wroth because his mound has been untended +since we made it."</p> +<p>Then Einar said:</p> +<p>"Was it so ill made that it needs tending?"</p> +<p>"It was well made, jarl; but rain and frost and sun on a +new-made mound may have wrought harm to it. Or maybe he thinks that +enough honour has not been paid him. He was a great warrior, jarl, +and perhaps would have more sacrifice, and a remembrance cup drunk +by his own brother at his grave."</p> +<p>Now this man's name was Thord, the same who taught me runes--a +good seaman and leader of men, and one who was held to be wise in +more matters than most folk. So his word was to be listened to.</p> +<p>"You know more of these matters than I, Thord," Einar answered. +"Is it possible that Sigurd could work this?"</p> +<p>"Who knows what a dead chief of might cannot work?" Thord said. +"I think it certain that Sigurd is angry for some reason; and +little luck shall we have if we do not appease his spirit."</p> +<p>Then the jarl looked troubled, as well he might, for to go near +the mound that held an angry ghost was no light matter. It lay far +up the firth, Thord said, and the ships could not go so far. But +Einar was very brave, and when he had thought for a little while he +said:</p> +<p>"Well, then, I will take boat and go to Sigurd's mound and see +if he ails aught. Will any man come with me, however?"</p> +<p>I liked not the errand, as may be supposed, but I could not +leave my foster father to go alone.</p> +<p>"I will be with you," I said. "Will not Thord come also?"</p> +<p>"Ay," the grim Orkney man answered.</p> +<p>Now all our crew were listening to us, and I looked down the +long gangways by chance, and when I did so no man would meet my +eye. They feared lest they should be made to go to this haunted +place, as it seemed--all but one man, who sat on the mast step +swinging his feet. This was Kolgrim the Tall, the captain of the +fore deck, a young man and of few words, but a terrible swordsman, +and knowing much of sea craft. And when this man saw that I looked +at him, he nodded a little and smiled, for he had been a friend of +mine since I had first come to Einar.</p> +<p>"Two men to row the boat will be enough, jarl," I said. "Kolgrim +yonder will come with us."</p> +<p>"Well," the jarl answered, "maybe four of us are enough. We +shall not fright Sigurd with more, and maybe would find it hard to +get them to come."</p> +<p>So he called Kolgrim, and he said that he would go with us, and +went to get the boat alongside without more words.</p> +<p>Then the jarl and I and Thord armed ourselves--for a warrior +should be met by warriors. The men were very silent, whispering +among themselves, until the jarl was ready and spoke to them.</p> +<p>"Have no fear for us," he said. "Doubtless my brother needs +somewhat, and calls me. I am going to find out what it is and +return."</p> +<p>So we pushed off, Thord and Kolgrim rowing. It was strange to +look back, as we went, on the ships, for not a soul stirred on +board them, as it seemed, so intently were we watched; and the +water was like a sheet of steel under them, so that they were +doubled.</p> +<p>Presently they were hidden as we rounded a turn in the firth, +and we were alone among the hills, and the lonesomeness was very +great. There was no dwelling anywhere along the shores, nor in the +deep glens that came down to them, each with its noisy burn falling +along it. Once I saw deer feeding far up at the head of a valley +that opened out, but they and the eagles were the only living +things we could see beside the loons that swam and dived silently +as we neared them.</p> +<p>The silence and the heat weighed on us, and we went for a mile +or more without a word. Then we turned into the last reach of the +water, and saw Sigurd's mound beside its edge at the very head of +the firth, where the hills came round in a circle that was broken +only by the narrow waters and the valley that went beyond them +among the mountains. It was a fitting resting place for one who +would sleep in loneliness; but I thought that I had rather lie +where I could look out on the sea I loved, and see the long ships +pass and the white waves break beneath me.</p> +<p>Now all seemed very peaceful here in the hot haze that brooded +over the still mountains, and there seemed to be nought to fear. We +drew swiftly up to the mound, with the plash of oars only to break +the silence, and there was nought amiss that we could see. They had +made it on a little flat tongue of land that jutted from the +mountain's foot into the deep water, so that on two sides the mound +was close to its edge. So we pulled on softly round the tongue of +land, being maybe about fifty paces from the mound across the +water. And when we saw the other side of Sigurd's resting place, +the oars stayed suddenly, and the jarl, who held the tiller, swung +the boat away from the shore, and I think I knew then what fear +was.</p> +<p>The mound was open. There was a wide, brown scar, as of +freshly-moved earth, across its base, reaching from the level to +six or eight feet of its height, as though half the grass-grown +side had been shorn away by a sword cut; and in the midst of that +scar was a doorway, open to the grave's heart, low and stone built. +Some of the earth that had fallen lay before it on the water's +edge, but the rest was doubtless in the water, for there was but a +narrow path between bank and mound.</p> +<p>At that sight we stared, thinking we should surely see the grim +form of Sigurd loom gigantic and troll-like <a name= +"EndNote3anc" href="#EndNote3sym" id= +"EndNote3anc"><sup>{iii}</sup></a> across the doorway; and the +jarl half rose from his seat beside me, and cried out with a great +voice:</p> +<p>"Sigurd--my brother!"</p> +<p>I think he knew not what or why he cried thus, for he sank back +into his place and swayed against me, while his cry rang loud among +the hills, and the eagles answered it.</p> +<p>And I grasped my sword hilt, as one does in some sudden terror, +staring at the open mound; while old Thord muttered spells against +I know not what, and Kolgrim looked at me, pale and motionless.</p> +<p>Then came the sharp, mocking cry of a diver, that rang +strangely; and at once, without order. Thord dug his oar blade into +the water and swung the boat round, and when once Kolgrim's back +was towards that he feared, he held water strongly and then the +boat was about, and we were flying from the place towards the +ships, before we knew what was being done, panic stricken.</p> +<p>But Einar said never a word, and the two rowers slackened their +pace only when the bend of the firth hid the mound from our +sight.</p> +<p>Then said I, finding that Einar spoke not:</p> +<p>"What are we flying from? there was nought to harm us."</p> +<p>For I began to be ashamed. Thereat Kolgrim stopped rowing, and +Thord must needs do likewise, though he said:</p> +<p>"It is ill for us to stay here. The dead jarl is very +wroth."</p> +<p>"I saw nought to fray us; the cry we heard was but that of a +loon."</p> +<p>But Thord shook his head. The silence of the place had made all +things seem strange, with the dull light that was over us, and the +great heat among the towering hills.</p> +<p>"The mound was freshly opened," he said. "I saw earth crumbling +even yet from the broken side. The blow we felt was that which +Sigurd struck when he broke free."</p> +<p>Then at last Einar spoke, and his voice was strange:</p> +<p>"I have left my brother unhonoured, and he is angry. What must +be done?"</p> +<p>Now I cannot tell what hardiness took hold of me, but it seemed +that I must needs go back and see more of this. I was drawn to do +so, as a thing they fear will make some men long to face it and +know its worst, not as if they dared so much as when they must.</p> +<p>"I think we should have waited to ask Sigurd that," I said; and +Einar looked strangely at me.</p> +<p>"Would you have us return?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Why not?" said I. "If the great jarl has called us as it seems, +needs must that we know what he wills."</p> +<p>Then said Thord:</p> +<p>"I helped to lay him in that place, and I mind how he looked at +that time. Somewhat we left undone, doubtless. I dare not go +back."</p> +<p>Einar looked at the hills, leaning his chin on his hand, and +said slowly, when Thord had done:</p> +<p>"That is the first time Thord has said 'I dare not.' Now I would +that I had stayed to fight Harald and fall under his sword before. +I too must say the same. I have left my brother unhonoured, and I +dare not go back."</p> +<p>Pale and drawn the jarl's face was, and I knew he meant what he +said. Nevertheless it seemed to me that some one must know what +Sigurd willed.</p> +<p>"Jarl Einar," I said, "this is a strange business, and one +cannot tell what it means. Now Sigurd was my father's close friend, +and I have had nought to do with him. I will go back, therefore, +and learn what I can of him. I think he will not harm me, for he +has no reason to do so. Moreover if he does, none will learn what +he needs."</p> +<p>"I have heard," said Thord, "that a good warrior may ask what he +will of a dead hero, so that he shows no fear and is a friend. If +his courage fails, however, then he will be surely destroyed."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"I have no cause to fear Sigurd, save that he is a ghost. I do +not know if I fear him as such; that is to be seen."</p> +<p>Now Einar laid his hand on mine and spoke gravely:</p> +<p>"I think it is a hero's part to do what you say. If you go back +and return in safety, the scalds will sing of you for many a long +day. Go, therefore, boldly; this is not a matter from which you +should be held back, as it has come into your mind."</p> +<p>Then said Thord:</p> +<p>"It will be well to ask Sigurd for a token whereby we may know +that he sends messages by you."</p> +<p>And Einar said on that:</p> +<p>"In Sigurd's hand is his sword Helmbiter. I think he will give +that to the man who dares speak to him, for he will know that it +goes into brave hands. Ask him for it bravely."</p> +<p>"Put me ashore, therefore, before my courage goes," I said; and +they pulled the boat to the bank where I could step on a rock and +so to shore. And when I was there, Kolgrim rose up and followed me +without a word.</p> +<p>"Bide here for two hours, jarl, and maybe I will return in that +time," I said. "Farewell."</p> +<p>So I turned away as they answered me, thinking that Kolgrim held +the boat's painter. But he came after me, and I spoke to him:</p> +<p>"Why, Kolgrim, will you come also?"</p> +<p>"You shall not go alone, Ranald the king's son; I will come with +you as far as I dare."</p> +<p>"That is well," I answered, and with that wasted no more words, +but climbed the hillside a little, and then went steadily towards +where the mound was, with Kolgrim close at my shoulder, and the +jarl and Thord looking fixedly after us till we were out of +sight.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_II" id="Chapter_II">Chapter II</a>. The Gifts +of Two Heroes.</h2> +<p>I will not say that my steps did not falter when we came to +whence we could see the mound. But it was lonely and still and +silent; no shape of warrior waited our coming.</p> +<p>"Almost do I fear to go nearer," said Kolgrim.</p> +<p>"Put fear away, comrade," said I; "we shall fare ill if we turn +our backs now."</p> +<p>"Where you go I go," he answered, "though I am afraid."</p> +<p>"The next best thing to not being afraid is to be afraid and not +to show it," I said then, comforting myself also with a show of +wisdom at least. "Maybe fear is the worst thing we have to face."</p> +<p>So we went on more swiftly, and at last were on the tongue of +land on the tip of which the mound stood. Still, since we could not +see the open doorway, which was towards the water, the place seemed +not so terrible. Yet I thought that by this time we should have +seen Sigurd, or maybe heard his voice from the tomb. So now I dared +to call softly:</p> +<p>"Jarl Sigurd, here is one, a friend's son, who will learn what +you will."</p> +<p>My voice seemed to fill all the ring of mountains with echoes, +but there was no answer. All was still again when the last voice +came back from the hillsides.</p> +<p>Then I went nearer yet, and passed to the waterside, where I +could look slantwise across the doorway. And again I called, and +waited for an answer that did not come.</p> +<p>"It seems that I must go even to the door, and maybe into the +mound," I said, whispering.</p> +<p>"Not inside," said Kolgrim, taking hold of my arm.</p> +<p>But I had grown bolder with the thought that the hero seemed not +angry, and now I had set my heart on winning the sword of which the +jarl had told me, and I thought that I dared go even inside the +tomb to speak with Sigurd.</p> +<p>"Bide here, and I will go at least to the door," said I.</p> +<p>So I stepped boldly before it, standing on the heap of +newly-fallen earth that had slipped from across it. The posts and +lintel of the door were of stone slabs such as lay everywhere on +the hillsides, and I stood so close that I could touch them. The +doorway was not so high that I could see into it without stooping, +for it was partly choked with the fallen earth, and I bent to look +in. But I could only see for a few feet into the passage, as I +looked from light to darkness.</p> +<p>"Ho, Jarl Sigurd! what would you? Why have you opened your door +thus?"</p> +<p>Very hollow my voice sounded, and that was all.</p> +<p>"Sigurd of Orkney--Sigurd, son of Rognvald--I am the son of +Vemund your friend. Speak to me!"</p> +<p>There was no answer. A bit of earth crumbled from the broken +side of the mound and made me start, but I saw nothing. So I +stepped away from the door and back to my comrade, who had edged +nearer the place, though his face showed that he feared +greatly.</p> +<p>"I think that the mound has been rifled," I said. "Sigurd would +have us know it and take revenge."</p> +<p>"No man has dared to go near that doorway till you came, Ranald +Vemundsson," Kolgrim answered. "Now I fear that he plans to lure +you into the mound, and slay you there without light to help you. +Go no further, maybe you will be closed up with the ghost."</p> +<p>That was not pleasant to think of, but I had seen nought to make +me fear to go in. There was no such unearthly light shining within +the mound as I had heard of in many tales of those who sought to +speak with dead chiefs.</p> +<p>"Well, I am going in," I said stoutly; "but do you hide here, +and make some noise that I may know you are near me. It is the +silence that frays me.</p> +<p>"What can I do?" he said. "I know no runes that are of avail. It +would be ill to disturb this place with idle sounds."</p> +<p>That seemed right, but I thought I could not bear the +silence--silence of the grave. I must know that he was close at +hand. Then a thought came to me, and I unfastened the +silver-mounted whetstone that hung from my belt and gave it +him.</p> +<p>"Whet your sword edge sharply," I said. "That is a sound a hero +loves, for it speaks of deeds to be done."</p> +<p>"Ay, that is no idle sound," he said, and drew his sword gladly. +The haft of the well-known blade brought the light into his eyes +again. I drew my own sword also.</p> +<p>"If you need me, call, and I think I shall not fail you," he +whispered. "It shall not be said that I failed you in peril."</p> +<p>"I know it," I answered, putting my hand on his shoulder.</p> +<p>Then I went boldly, and stepped into the passage. The whetstone +sang shrill on the sword edge as it kissed the steel behind me, and +the sound was good to hear as I went into darkness with my weapon +ready.</p> +<p>I half feared that my first step would be my last, but it was +made in safety. Very black seemed the low stone-walled passage +before me, and I had to stoop as I went on, feeling with my left +hand along the wall. The way was so narrow that little light could +pass my body, and therefore it seemed to grow darker as I went +deeper into the mound's heart.</p> +<p>Five steps I took, and then my outstretched hand was on the post +that ended the passage, and beyond that I felt nothing. I had come +to the inner doorway, and before me was the place where Sigurd lay. +Yet no fiery eyes glared on me, and nothing stirred. The air was +heavy with a scent as of peat, and the sound of the whetstone +seemed loud as I stood peering into the darkness.</p> +<p>I moved forward, and somewhat rattled under my foot, and I +started. Then my fear left me altogether, for I had trodden on dry +bones, and shuddered at the first touch of them in that place. I +had faced fear, and had overcome it; maybe it was desperation that +made me cool then, for it was certain now that I must be slain or +else victor over I knew not what.</p> +<p>So I took one pace forward into the chamber, and stood aside +from the doorway; and the grey light from the passage came in and +filled all the place, so that it fell first on him whom I had come +to seek--Jarl Sigurd of Orkney.</p> +<p>And when I saw, a great awe fell upon me, and a sadness, but no +terror; and in my heart I would that hereafter I might rest as +slept the hero where the hands that had loved him had placed +him.</p> +<p>Into the silent place came once more with me the clank of mail +and weapons that he had loved, and from without the song of the +keen sword edge whispered to him; but these could not wake him. +Peacefully he seemed to sleep as I stood by his side, and I thought +that I should take back no word of his to the jarl, his brother, +whom both he and I loved.</p> +<p>They had brought the great carven chair on which he was wont to +sit on his ship's quarterdeck, and thereon had set the jarl, as +though he yet lived, and did but sleep as he sat from weariness +after fight, with helm and mail upon him. Shield and axe rested on +either side of him, ready to hand, against the chair; and behind +him, along the wall, were his spears, ashen shafted and rune +graven.</p> +<p>His blue, fur-trimmed cloak was round him, and before him was a +little table, heavy and carved, whereon were vessels for food, +empty now save for dust that showed that they had been full. And +across his knees was his sword, golden hilted, with a great yellow +cairngorm in the pommel, and with gold-wrought patterns from end to +end of the scabbard--such a sword as I had never seen before. His +right hand held the hilt, and his left rested on the shield's rim +beside him; and so Sigurd slept with his head bowed on his breast, +waiting for Ragnaroek and the last great fight of all.</p> +<p>The light seemed to grow stronger as I looked, or my eyes grew +used to it, and then I saw that the narrow chamber was full of +things, though I minded them afterwards, for now I was as in a +dream, noting only the jarl himself. Costly stuffs were on the +floor, and mail and helms and more weapons. Gold work there was +also, and in one corner lay the dried-up body of a great wolf +hound, coiled as in sleep where it had been chained. Another had +been tied by the passage doorway, where I had stepped on it; and +below a spar that stood across a corner lay a tumbled heap of +feathers that had been a falcon.</p> +<p>Many more things there were maybe, but this I saw at last--that +the jarl's right foot rested on the skull of a man whose teeth had +been long and tusk-like. It was the head of the Scot whose teeth +had been his death.</p> +<p>Now the sword drew my eyes, for Einar bade me ask for it, else I +think I had gone softly hence without a word, so peaceful seemed +the dead. And as I looked again, I saw that the hand holding the +hilt was dry and brown and shrunken, so that one might see all the +bones through the skin, and at first I was afraid to ask.</p> +<p>At last I said, and my mouth was dry:</p> +<p>"Jarl Einar, your brother, bids me ask for sword Helmbiter, +great Sigurd. Let me take it, that he may know how you rest in +peace."</p> +<p>But Sigurd stirred not nor spoke; and slowly I put out my hand +on the sword to take it very gently, but his grasp was yet firm on +it. Then, as I bent to see if it had tightened when I would draw +the sword away, I could see beneath the helm the face of the dead, +shrunken indeed and brown, but as of one at rest and beyond +anger.</p> +<p>Once more then I took the jarl's sword in my right hand, and +raised his hand with my left, putting my own weapon by against the +wall. And then the hilt slipped from the half-open fingers, and the +sword was mine, and my hand held the jarl's. And it seemed to me +that he gave it me, and that I must thank him for such a gift. The +sword though it was sheathed, was not girt to him, and its +golden-studded belt was twisted about it, and it was no imperfect +giving.</p> +<p>So I spoke in a low voice:</p> +<p>"Jarl Sigurd, I thank you. If my might is aught, the sword will +be used as you would have used it. Surely I will say to Einar that +you rest in peace, and we will come here and close your mound again +in all honour."</p> +<p>I set back his hand then, and it seemed empty and helpless, not +as a warrior's should be. So I ungirt my own weapon--a good plain +sword that I had won from a viking in Caithness--and laid it in the +place of that he had given me. And as I put the thin fingers on its +hilt, almost thinking that they would chose around it, a ring +slipped from them into my hand, as if he would give that also, and +I kept it therefore.</p> +<p>Then for a minute I stood before Jarl Sigurd, waiting to see if +he had any word; but when he spoke not, I lifted the sword and +saluted him.</p> +<p>"Skoal to Jarl Sigurd; rest in peace, and farewell."</p> +<p>Then I went forth softly, and came out into sunshine; for the +wind was singing round the hilltops, and the dun mist had gone. +Then I was ware that the sound of the stone on the sword edge had +long ceased, and I looked for Kolgrim.</p> +<p>He was lying on the grass in the place where I had left him, but +he was on his face, and the sword and whetstone were flung aside +from him. At first I feared that he had been in some way slain +because of his terror; but when I came near, I saw that his +shoulders heaved as if he wept. Then I stood over him, treading +softly.</p> +<p>"Kolgrim," I said.</p> +<p>At that he looked up, and a great light came into his face, and +he sprang to his feet and threw his arms round me, weeping, yet +with a strong man's weeping that does but come from bitter +grief.</p> +<p>"Master," he cried, "O master I thought you lost--and I dared +not follow you."</p> +<p>"I have met with no peril," I said, "nor have I been long +gone."</p> +<p>"More than two hours, master, have you been in that place--two +long hours. See how the sun has sunk since you left me!"</p> +<p>So indeed it seemed, though I knew not that I had been so long. +I had stayed still and gazed on that strange sight without stirring +for what seemed but a little while. Yet I had thought long thoughts +in that time, and I mind every single thing in that dim chamber, +even to the markings on the stones that made its walls and roof and +floor.</p> +<p>"See," I said, "Jarl Sigurd has given me the sword!"</p> +<p>Kolgrim gazed in wonder. There was no speck of dust on the broad +blade as I drew it, and the waving lines of the dwarf-wrought steel +and gold-inlaid runes were clear and bright along its middle for +half its length. For the mound was very dry, and they had covered +all the chamber with peat before piling the earth over it.</p> +<p>"Let us go back to Jarl Einar; he will fear for us," I said, +sheathing the sword and girding it to me.</p> +<p>So we went across the meadow, and even as we went a blast of +cold wind came from, over the mountains, and with it whirled the +black thunderclouds of the storm that had been gathering all day. +We ran to an overhanging rock on the hillside and crept beneath it, +while the thunder crashed and the lightning struck from side to +side of the firth, and smote the wind-swept water that was white +with foam.</p> +<p>"Master," said Kolgrim, "the Jarl Sigurd is wroth; he repents +the sword gift."</p> +<p>But I did not think that he had aught to do with this. For, as +any hill-bred man could tell, the storm had been brewing in the +heat, and was bound to come, and would pass to and fro among the +hills till it was worn out.</p> +<p>Nevertheless, when it passed away in pouring rain that swept +like a hanging sheet of moving mist down the glens from the +half-hidden mountains, and the sun shone out brightly again over +the clear-cut purple hillsides and rippling water, I looked at the +mound in wonder. For it was closed. We had sought shelter in a +place near that whence we saw the mound in coming, and could see +the fallen side, though not the doorway, looking across its front. +And now the slope of the bank seemed to have been made afresh, as +on the day when Sigurd had been closed in, years ago. None could +say, save those who had seen it, where the opening into the +grave-chamber might be.</p> +<p>Now both the opening and closing of Sigurd's grave mound seem +very strange to me. Thord and the scalds will have it that he +himself wrought both. As for me, I know not. In after days I told +this to Alfred the king when he wondered at my sword, and he said +that he thought an earthquake opened and washing rain closed the +mound, but that it happened strangely for me. I cannot gainsay his +wise words, and I will leave the matter so.</p> +<p>Thereafter Kolgrim and I went back to Einar, who yet waited for +us. Glad was he to see us return in safety; but both he and Thord +were speechless when they saw the jarl's sword girt to me and the +jarl's golden ring on my hand. Neither they nor any one else will +believe that I met with no peril; and the tale that the scalds made +hereafter of the matter is over wonderful, in spite of all I may +say. For they think it but right that I should not be over boastful +of my deeds.</p> +<p>But Jarl Einar looked on sword and ring, and said:</p> +<p>"Well have you won these gifts. My brother is in peace in his +resting place now. I hold that he called for you."</p> +<p>So we went back to the ships, and there for many days the men +stared at Kolgrim and me strangely. They say I was very silent for +long, and it is likely enough. Moreover, Einar was wont to say that +I seemed five years older from that day forward.</p> +<p>We went no more to the place of the mound, for it seemed to need +no care of earthly hands. Nor were any wishing to go to so awesome +a place, and we left the firth next day, for the men waxed uneasy +there.</p> +<p>But on that day Einar gave me the great ship that we had taken +from Halfdan, the king's son, saying that he would add to Sigurd's +giving. Also he bade me choose what men I would for her crew, +bidding me thank him not at all, for I was his foster son, and a +king by birth moreover.</p> +<p>So when I knew that this would please him, I chose Thord for my +shipmaster, and Kolgrim for marshal, as we call the one who has +charge of the ordering of the crew. And I chose a hundred good men +whom I knew well, so that indeed I had the best ship and following +in Norway, as I thought. At least there were none better, unless +Harald Fairhair might match me.</p> +<p>Now there was one thing that pleased me not at this time, and +that was that Kolgrim, my comrade, never called me aught but +"master" since I came from Sigurd's presence--which is not the wont +of our free Norsemen with any man. Nor would he change it, though I +was angry, until I grew used to it in time.</p> +<p>"Call me not 'master,' Kolgrim, my comrade," I said; "it is +unfittinq for you."</p> +<p>At last he answered me in such wise that I knew it was of no +more use to speak of it.</p> +<p>"Master of mine you are, Ranald the king, since the day when you +dared more than I thought man might, while I lay like a beaten +hound outside, and dared not go within that place to see what had +become of you. Little comradeship was mine to you on that day, and +I am minded to make amends if I can. I think I may dare aught +against living men for you, though I failed at that mound. I will +give life for you, if I may."</p> +<p>I told him that what he had done was well done, and indeed he +had had courage to go where none else had dared; for I had ties of +friendship that made me bold to meet Jarl Sigurd, and might go +therefore where he might not. It was well that he did not come into +the presence of the dead.</p> +<p>"Therefore we are comrades, not master and man," I said.</p> +<p>"Nay, but master and man--lord and thrall," he answered.</p> +<p>So I must let him have his way, but he could not make me think +of him as aught but a good and brave comrade whom I loved well.</p> +<p>They hailed me as king when I went on board my ship for the +first time with my own men, as I have said. Then our best weapon +smith asked for gold from the men, and they gave what they had--it +was in plenty with us of Einar's following--and made a golden +circlet round my helm, that they might see it and follow it in +battle.</p> +<p>It was good to wear the crown thus given willingly, but in the +end it sent me from north to south, as will be seen. That, however, +is a matter with which I will not quarrel, for it sent me to Alfred +the king.</p> +<p>We had left the firth two days, cruising slowly northward, when +one ship came from the north and met us, not flying from our fleet, +but bearing up to join us. And when she was close, there came a +hail to tell Einar that she bore a messenger from Harald the king +in peace, and presently we hove to while this messenger went on +board the Jarl's ship.</p> +<p>Then it seemed that Einar had been right, and that Harald would +lay a fine on the islands for Halfdan's slaying, and so give them +back to Einar to hold for him. The messenger was Thiodolf, Harald's +own scald, and he put the matter very plainly before the jarl, so +that he thought well of the offer, but would nevertheless not trust +himself in the king's power before all was certain, and confirmed +by oath. Whereon Thiodolf said that one must see the king on the +Jarl's part, and so I seemed the right man to go, as the jarl's +foster son and next in command to him.</p> +<p>"Nevertheless," said Thiodolf, "I would not advise you to sail +in Halfdan's ship, for that might wake angry thoughts, and trouble +would come especially as Halfdan took her without leave when he was +outlawed."</p> +<p>So I took the Jarl's cutter, manning her with enough men of my +own crew; and Kolgrim came with me, and we sailed to Kirkwall in +company with Thiodolf the scald.</p> +<p>Then when Thiodolf took me into his presence, I saw Harald +Fairhair for the first time, as he sat to receive Einar's messenger +in the great hall that Sigurd had built and which we had dwelt in. +Then I thought that never before could have been one more like a +king. Hereafter, when sagamen will sing of a king in some fancied +story, they will surely make him like King Harald of Norway. I +myself have little skill to say what he was like beyond this--that +never had I seen a more handsome man, nor bigger, nor stronger. +King-like he was in all ways, and his face was bright and pleasant, +though it was plain that it would be terrible if he was angry, or +with the light of battle upon it.</p> +<p>The hair, whence he had his name, was golden bright and shining, +and beard and eyebrows were of the same colour. But his eyes were +neither grey nor blue altogether, most piercing, seeming to look +straight into a man's heart, so that none dared lie to him.</p> +<p>I think that it is saying much for King Harald that, though his +arms and dress were wonderfully rich and splendid, one cared only +to look on his face; and that though many men of worth were on the +high place with him, there seemed to be none but he present.</p> +<p>When the scald told the king who I was, and what was my errand, +with all ceremony, he looked fixedly at me, so that I was ashamed, +and grew red under his gaze. Then he smiled pleasantly, and spoke +to me. His voice was as I thought to hear it--clear and steady, and +yet deep.</p> +<p>"So, Ranald Vemundsson, you are worthy of your father. It may be +that you bear me ill will on his account, but I would have you +forget the deeds done that Norway might be one, and the happier +therefor."</p> +<p>"Had my father been slain in fair fight, lord king," I said, "no +ill will had been thought of. It has not been in my mind that you +bade Rognvald slay him as he did. And that Jarl is dead, and the +feud is done with therefore. Jarl Einar is my foster father, +moreover."</p> +<p>"That is well said," answered Harald. "But I thought Sigurd must +have fostered you; he was ever a close friend of Vemund's."</p> +<p>I did not know why the king thought this, though the reason was +at my side; so I only said that my mother had given me to Einar's +keeping, and the king said no more at that time about it.</p> +<p>After that I gave the Jarl's messages, and the king heard them +well enough, though it seemed to Einar that the weregild to be paid +was over heavy, and he had bidden me tell Harald that it was so. +Therefore the king said that he would give me an answer on the +morrow, and I went away into the town well pleased with his kindly +way with me.</p> +<p>There was a feast made for me that night, and after it I must +sit still and hear the scalds sing of the deeds of Harald the king, +which was well enough. But then Thiodolf rose up and sang a great +saga about the winning of Sigurd's sword, wherein it seemed that I +had fought the dead jarl, and bale fires, and I know not what. He +had heard strange tales from Einar's men, if they told him all that +he sang.</p> +<p>Some men may be pleased to hear their own deeds sung of, with +more added thus; but I was not used to it, and the turning of all +eyes to me made me uncomfortable. But Harald had paid no sort of +heed to what they sang of him, and so I tried to look at my ease, +and gave the scald a bracelet when he ended.</p> +<p>"Overmuch make you of that matter, scald," said I quietly.</p> +<p>He laughed a little, and answered:</p> +<p>"One has to fill in what a warrior will not tell of +himself."</p> +<p>Now the men shouted when I gave Thiodolf the bracelet, and +Harald looked quickly at me. Then I thought that maybe I had +overdone the gift, though Einar had ever told me that a good scald +deserved good reward, and Thiodolf was well known as the best in +Norway. It was a heavy ring, silver gilt, and of good design, that +I took from the same viking whose sword I gave to Sigurd.</p> +<p>"Overpaid am I," the scald said, putting it on his arm.</p> +<p>"You are the first who has ever sung of me," I answered; "and +the voice and tune were wonderful, if the saga was too strong for +me."</p> +<p>Then Harald smiled again, and praised Thiodolf also, and I +thought no more of the matter. The feast was pleasant enough in the +hall, full of Harald's best men and chiefs, though it seemed +strange to sit as a guest in Einar's house.</p> +<p>Now on the next morning I was to speak with the king about +Einar's business, and I went to him unarmed, as was right, save for +helm and Sigurd's sword. He was in the jarl's own chamber, and with +him were Thiodolf and a young scald named Harek, who sat with +things for writing before him, which was what I had never seen +before.</p> +<p>We talked for some time, and all went well for peace; but one +more message was to go and come between the king and Einar, and so +I said I would sail at once.</p> +<p>"Not so much need for haste but that you can bide here for a day +or two," Harald said. "I will not have you complain of my +hospitality hereafter. And Thiodolf and Harek here want to learn +more about Sigurd's sword and its winning."</p> +<p>"If I tell them the truth, I shall spoil their saga, lord king!" +I said, laughing.</p> +<p>"Trust the scalds to mind you do not," he answered. "There are +times when I have to ask them which of my own doings they are +singing about now. But is there no wonder in the tale?"</p> +<p>So I told him just how the matter was. And when he heard of the +noise, and the stroke with which the ships were smitten, he said, +looking troubled, as I thought:</p> +<p>"Sigurd is stronger now that he is dead than when he lived. We +felt that stroke even here."</p> +<p>But when I told how I had seen the dead jarl, his face grew +thoughtful, and at last he said:</p> +<p>"So shall I lie some day in a grave mound. It is passing strange +to think on. I would that if one comes to my side he may step +gently as you, Ranald Vemundsson."</p> +<p>"Else will that comer fare ill," said Thiodolf.</p> +<p>The king glanced up at him, and his face changed, and he said, +smiling grimly:</p> +<p>"Maybe. I think none will win my sword from me."</p> +<p>Then he had Kolgrim sent for, and Thord, and they told him truly +what they had seen, and how they had fared in the matter.</p> +<p>"You are a truth teller, Kolgrim the Tall," Harald said. "Now if +you will leave Einar's service and come and be of my courtmen, I +will speak to the jarl and make matters right with him, and it +shall be worth your while."</p> +<p>Then my comrade answered plainly:</p> +<p>"I am no jarl's man now, King Harald; I belong to King Ranald +here, and I will not leave him."</p> +<p>"So," said Harald, knitting his brows suddenly, "we have two +kings in the room, as it seems; and you dare choose another instead +of me."</p> +<p>"Not so, King Harald," Kolgrim answered, with all respect; "I +chose between the jarl and my king. If there is peace between you +and the jarl, I suppose we are all your men."</p> +<p>Now Harald's face was growing black, and I could see that his +anger was rising. But he stayed what words he was about to speak, +and only said:</p> +<p>"Jarl Einar is well served when he has a king in his train."</p> +<p>Then he rose up and turned to Thiodolf, who was looking +anxious.</p> +<p>"Bid King Ranald to the feast tonight. He knows my words to +Einar his foster father, and I have no more to say."</p> +<p>So I was dismissed, and was not sorry to be outside the +hall.</p> +<p>"Let us get down to the ship," said Thord. "Here is trouble +brewing, as I think."</p> +<p>So we went on board, and I wished that we might go. Yet the king +had bidden me stay, and I had no reason for what would be +discourteous at least, if it did not look like flight. What the +trouble was we could hardly understand.</p> +<p>In an hour's time or so I saw Thiodolf and the young scald Harek +coming along the wharf and towards our ship, which lay clear of +Harald's vessels, and next the harbour mouth. They came over the +gang plank, and I welcomed them, but I saw that they had somewhat +special to say to me.</p> +<p>They sat down under the after awning with me, and at once +Thiodolf said:</p> +<p>"That was an unlucky speech of your comrade's just now. No man +dares name himself king in Harald's presence--not even his own +sons. It is the one thing that he will not bear."</p> +<p>"So it seemed," said I; "and, in truth, he had enough trouble +with under kings not long since. But he knows what a sea king +is--no king at all, so to speak. He need not grudge the old +title."</p> +<p>"That is not all," Thiodolf said. "It is in his mind that he has +to guard yet against risings of men of the old families of the +kings, and thinks you are likely to give him trouble. Maybe the +portent of the blow that spread from Sigurd's tomb to us has seemed +much to him. 'Here,' he says, 'is one who will gather masterless +men to him in crowds because he wears Sigurd's sword and ring, and +has gained with them the name of a hero. Already he has two of +Einar's best men at his heels. Yet I like him well enough, and I +have no fault to find with him, save that he puts a gold circle +round his helm and is called king--as he would have been but for +me. Go to him, therefore, and tell him to keep out of my way. I +will not have two kings in Norway.'"</p> +<p>"Well," I said, "that is plain speaking. But I cannot help what +the men call me. The king makes overmuch of the business. I am not +foolish enough to try to overturn Harald Fairhair."</p> +<p>"Maybe," said Thiodolf, "but those are his words. I rede you get +away quickly on the next tide."</p> +<p>"Ay," said Harek. "Harald is mild of mood now, because you made +no secret of what men call you. Five years ago you would not have +escaped hence at all."</p> +<p>"Then," said I, "I will go. I think you are right. Vemund's son +troubles Harald;" and I laughed, and added, "I have to thank you +for kindly counsel, scalds, as I think. Farewell. Tide serves at +any time now, and I will get my men and be gone."</p> +<p>"That is wise," they answered. "Einar must find some other +messenger, if he comes not himself, after you return."</p> +<p>They went, and I called two or three men and sent them into the +town for their comrades who were at friends' houses and in the +guest house where we were lodged, while Kolgrim made ready for +instant sailing.</p> +<p>The next thing that I was ware of was that there was a fight on +the wharf end next the town, and men were running to it. Then I +heard my own name shouted on one part, and that of Eric, the king's +young son, on the other. So I was going to lead down twenty men to +quiet the scuffle, when my people had the best of the matter, and +broke through the throng, cheering, and came on to me. The rest did +not follow them, for they saw that I was coming, and the wharf was +clear behind them but for three of their foes who stayed where they +had fallen.</p> +<p>Then another man broke away from the crowd, and came running +after my folk. It was Harek the scald, with his head broken.</p> +<p>"Here are fine doings," said Kolgrim, as the men swarmed on +board. "What is on hand now?"</p> +<p>"It is not done with yet," said a man: "look at yon ship."</p> +<p>Then came Harek, out of breath, and pale.</p> +<p>"Let me on board, King Ranald, or I am a dead man," he +cried.</p> +<p>"Come, then!" I answered; and he ran across the plank, and +Kolgrim pulled it in after him. All my men were come.</p> +<p>Then I looked at the ship spoken of. Men were swarming into her, +and were making ready to sail. But if she meant to stay our going, +she was too far up the harbour, and we were already casting off the +shore ropes.</p> +<p>"Hold on," said Thord; "here come the other scald and two +men."</p> +<p>The crowd that was yet round the fallen men had parted to let +Thiodolf pass, and he came quickly. One of the men bore a chest, +and the other a bale of somewhat. They gave these over the gunwale +to my people, and Thiodolf spoke to me from the wharf.</p> +<p>"These are gifts from Harald to Einar's foster son," he said. +"He bids me say that you have done your errand well, and that this +is to prove it. Also he says that Ranald, son of Vemund, may need +mail to keep his kingship withal, and so he has sent you a +suit."</p> +<p>"That is a hard saying," I answered; "is it insult?"</p> +<p>"Nay, but a broad hint only. The gift is most goodly."</p> +<p>"Well," said I, "it is plain that he will warn me from Norway. I +will leave you, good friend, to say for me what should be said. +Maybe if I sent a message it would go wrongly from my lips."</p> +<p>Thiodolf laughed, and bade me farewell. He paid no heed to +Harek, who sat on the deck with his back to him.</p> +<p>Then Kolgrim whistled shrill to his men, and we began to move +down to the harbour mouth. I heard a sharp voice hurrying the men +in the other ship; but they could not be ready in time to catch +us.</p> +<p>When we were well out to sea, I asked Harek what all this was +about.</p> +<p>"Your going has spoiled a plan that Eric, the king's son, had +made. He wanted your sword, and thought also that to rid himself +now of Vemund's son might save him trouble when the crown came to +him, as it will. You were to be set on as you came from the feast +tonight to the guest quarters, as if in a common broil between your +men and his. Then he found you were going, and tried to stay your +men, and next to take these gifts from Thiodolf and me, being very +angry, even to trying to cut me down. Lucky for me that his sword +turned in his hand. But he would have had me slain tonight, +certainly, for he says that it was our fault that you are getting +away. He fears Thiodolf, however. Now I must take service with you, +if you will have me."</p> +<p>It seemed to me that I was making friends with one hand and +enemies with the other, and that last rather more quickly than was +well. So I laughed, and answered:</p> +<p>"I suppose that if I have a scald of my own, King Harald will +blame me for overmuch kingship. However, he is angry enough +already, and maybe a good friend will balance that to me. So if you +will indeed cast in your lot with me, I am glad!"</p> +<p>So I took his hand, and more than friends have he and I been +from that day forward.</p> +<p>Now, when I looked at Harald's strangely-given gifts, I had +reason to say that he was open handed. The chest held two mail +shirts, one of steel rings, gold ornamented and fastened, and the +other of scales on deerskin, both fit for a king. There were two +helms also, one to match either byrnie <a name="EndNote4anc" +href="#EndNote4sym" id="EndNote4anc"><sup>{iv}</sup></a>, and a +seax that was fit to hang with Sigurd's sword. As for the bale, +that held furs of the best, and blue cloth and scarlet. If Harald +banished me, it was for no ill will; and it was handsomely done, as +though he would fit me out for the viking's path in all honour, +that men might not deem me outlawed for wrongdoing. So I have no +ill word to say against him. Five years later he would have +troubled about me and my kingship not at all; now he must be +careful, for his power was not at its full.</p> +<p>As for young Eric, I suppose that he boasted ever after that he +had put me to flight; but I do not know that it matters if he +did.</p> +<p>So I came back to Durness, where I was to meet with Einar; and +peace was made between him and the king, and he thought it well to +go and speak with him. Then he and I must part, and that was +hard.</p> +<p>"Now must you go your own way, son Ranald, for Harald is too +strong for us. Maybe that is best for you, for here shall I bide in +peace in Orkney; and that is not a life for a king's son--to sit at +a jarl's table in idleness, or fight petty fights for scatt +withholden and the like. Better for you the wide seas and the lands +where you may make a name, and maybe a kingdom, for yourself. Yet I +shall miss you sorely."</p> +<p>So he said, and I knew that he was right. Maybe the spirit of +the sword I had won got hold of me, as they say will happen; for I +had waxed restless of late, and I had tried to keep it from Einar. +Now I hated myself for it, seeing at hand what I had longed +for.</p> +<p>So he went north to meet Harald, and of our parting I will not +say more. I could not then tell that I should not see him again, +and that was well: but I know that when I saw the last flicker of +his sails against the sky, I felt more lonely even than at the +graveside in Southmere.</p> +<p>Yet I was in no worse case than were many nobly-born men at that +time; for whosoever would not bow to Harald and his new laws must +leave Norway, and her bravest were seeking new homes everywhere. +Some had gone to far-off Iceland, and some to East Anglia; some to +the Greek emperor, or Gardariki, and more yet to Ireland. But the +greatest viking of all, Rolf, the son of Rognvald, Einar's young +brother, had gone to France or England, with a mighty following; +for Harald had outlawed him among the first who broke his law by +plundering on the Norway coasts. A good law it was, but it was new, +and so went against the grain at first. Rolf had sworn to make a +new kingdom for himself, and why should not I do the same?</p> +<p>So when I was in the open sea again, with all the world before +me, as the long sea-miles passed I grew lighthearted, and many were +the thoughts of great deeds to come that filled my mind.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_III" id="Chapter_III">Chapter III</a>. Odda, +the Ealdorman of Devon.</h2> +<p>Now I steered eastward from Sutherland, and sailed down the east +coasts of Scotland and England; and there is nothing to say about +such a cruise, that had nought more wonderful in it than the +scaring of the folk when we put in for food. I had made up my mind +to go to Ireland for the winter, where, as every Northman knew, +there were kingdoms to be won--having no wish to be Rolf's +follower, seeing he was but a jarl's son; and finding that England +had no overlord, seeing that even now Alfred of Wessex and Guthrum +of East Anglia were fighting for mastery, so that the whole land +was racked and torn with strife.</p> +<p>Maybe I thought too much of myself at that time, but I was in no +haste to do aught but cruise about and find where I might best make +a name. I had but my one ship and crew, and I would not throw them +away on some useless business for want of care in choosing.</p> +<p>Now, when we came into the English Channel, a gale began to blow +up from the southwest; and we held over to the French shore, and +there put into a haven that was sheltered enough. The gale +strengthened, and lasted three days; but the people were kindly +enough, being of Saxon kin, who had settled there under the +headland they call Greynose, since Hengist's times of the winning +of England across the water. And when the gale was over, we waited +for the sea to go down, and then came a fair wind from the +eastward, as we expected. So we got provisions on board, and sailed +westward again, taking a long slant over to the English coast, +until we sighted the great rock of Portland; and then the wind came +off the land, and in the early morning veered to the northwest.</p> +<p>The tide was still with us as the light strengthened; then as +the day broke, with the haze of late summer over the land, we found +that we were right in the track of a strange fleet that was coming +up fast from the westward--great ships and small, in a strange +medley and in no sort of order, so that we wondered what they would +be.</p> +<p>"Here comes Rolf Ganger back from Valland," said Kolgrim. "He +has gathered any vessels he could get together, and is going to +land in England."</p> +<p>"We will even head out to sea from across their course," I said. +"Maybe they are Danes from Exeter, flying from the Saxons."</p> +<p>So we headed away for the open channel until at least we knew +more. The fleet drew up steadily, bringing the tide with them; and +presently we fell to wondering at the gathering. For there were +some half-dozen ships that were plainly Norse like ourselves, maybe +twenty Danish-built longships, and about the same number of heavy +trading vessels. There were a few large fishing boats also; but +leading the crowd were five great vessels the like of which none of +us had ever seen or heard of before. And even as we spoke of them, +two of these shook out reefs in their sails, and drew away from the +rest across channel, as if to cut us off.</p> +<p>"Ho, men," I said, when I saw that, "get to arms; for here they +come to speak with us. Maybe we shall have to fight--and these are +no easy nuts to crack!"</p> +<p>Whereat the men laughed; and straightway there was the pleasant +hustle and talk of those who donned mail shirt and helm and set the +throwing weapons to hand with all good will.</p> +<p>"Let us keep on our course," I said to Kolgrim. "We will see if +we cannot weather on these ships, and anyway shall fight them +better apart from the rest. It is a fine breeze for a sailing +match."</p> +<p>So we held on; and the two great ships to windward of us began +to gain on us slowly, which was a thing that had never been done by +any ship before. I do not know that even Harald Fairhair had any +swifter ship than this that Halfdan had taken in his flight from +home. Kolgrim waxed very wroth when it became plain that these +could outsail us.</p> +<p>"There is witchcraft about those great hulks," he growled. "They +are neither Norse, nor Frisian, nor Danish, but better than all +three put together."</p> +<p>"I have sailed in ships, and talked of ships, and dreamed of +them moreover, since I could stand alone," said Thord, "but I never +so much as thought of the like of these. If they belong to some new +kind of viking, there are hard times in store for some of us."</p> +<p>"Faith," said I, "I believe they have swept up and made prizes +of all that medley astern of them."</p> +<p>So we held on for half an hour, and all that time they gained +steadily on us; and we neared them quickly at last, for we tried to +hold across their bows and weather on them. That was no good, for +they were as weatherly as we.</p> +<p>Now we could see that their decks were covered with armed men, +and it seemed certain that they meant to make prize of us. The +leading ship was maybe half a mile ahead of the other, and that a +mile from us--all three close-hauled as we strove to gain a weather +berth. Then the leading ship put her helm up and stood across our +course, and the second followed her.</p> +<p>"We must out oars now if we are to weather on them," said +Kolgrim at last.</p> +<p>Then the men shouted; and I looked at the second ship, to which +they were pointing. Her great sail was overboard, for the halliards +had gone--chafed through maybe, or snapped with the strain as she +paid off quickly. Then a new hope came to me.</p> +<p>"Men," I said, "let us take the other vessel, and then come back +on this; they are worth winning."</p> +<p>They cheered. And now the fight seemed to be even--ship to ship +at least, if our foe was larger and higher and swifter than ours; +for I thought that he would hardly have a crew like mine.</p> +<p>We up helm and stood away on the new course the foe had taken, +leaving the crippled ship astern very fast. And now we began to +edge up towards the other vessel, meaning to go about under her +stern, and so shoot to windward of her on the other tack. But then +I thought of a plan which might help us in the fighting. There had +seemed little order and much shouting on board the ship we had left +when her sail fell, and maybe there was the same want of discipline +here.</p> +<p>"Out oars, men! Keep them swinging, but put no weight on them. +Let them pull after us and tire themselves. I have a mind to see +how our dragon looks on yonder high stem head."</p> +<p>The men laughed grimly, and the oars were run out. One called to +me:</p> +<p>"Maybe they beat us in sailing, king; we can teach them somewhat +in weapon play."</p> +<p>"See how they get their oars out," said Kolgrim, with a sour +grin; "a set of lubbers they are."</p> +<p>One by one, and in no order, the long oars were being got to +work. The great ship was half as long again as ours, pulling +twenty-eight oars a side to our twenty. But while ours rose and +fell as if worked by one man, theirs were pulled anyhow, as one +might say.</p> +<p>"Better are they at sailing than rowing," said Thord.</p> +<p>Nevertheless they flew down on us, and that because we only made +a show of rowing.</p> +<p>Then we laid on the oars, and came head to wind. The sail +rattled down, and was stowed on deck; and silently we waited, +arrows on string, for the fight that was now close at hand.</p> +<p>Then the great ship hove up, head to wind, right ahead of us, +and a loud hail came from her.</p> +<p>"Who knows what tongue he talks?" I said. "I cannot make him out +rightly."</p> +<p>"'Tis West Saxon," said an old warrior from the waist. "He asks +who we are and what is our business."</p> +<p>"Tell him therefore, if you can speak in his way," I answered; +"and ask the same of him."</p> +<p>So a hail or two went backwards and forwards, and then:</p> +<p>"Says he is Odda, jarl or somewhat of Devon in Wessex, and bids +us yield to Alfred the king."</p> +<p>"In truth," said I, "if he had not spoken of yielding, I had had +more to say to a king who can build ships like these. Now we will +speak with him on his own deck. Tell him he will have to fight us +first."</p> +<p>The old warrior sent a mighty curt hail back in answer to Odda's +summons; then our war horns blew, and the oars rose and fell, and +we were grinding our bows alongside the great ship's quarter before +they knew we were there. Alfred's men had yet somewhat to learn of +fighting in a sea way, as it seemed, for we were on their deck aft +before they had risen from their oar benches. There were but one or +two men on the quarter deck, besides the steersman, to oppose us. +Odda thought we should lay our ship alongside his towering sides if +we fought, as I suppose, for he was amidships.</p> +<p>So we swept the decks from aft forward without any hurt to +ourselves: for the Saxons were hampered with the oars, and fell +backward over them, and hindered one another. It was strange to +hear my men laughing in what seemed most terrible slaughter; for +their foes fell before they were smitten, and lay helpless under +the oars, while their comrades fell over them.</p> +<p>So we won to the foot of the mast, and then found that there +were some on board who were none so helpless: for as we came they +swung the great yard athwart ships, and that stayed us; while over +the heap of canvas glared those who would make it hard for us to +win the ship altogether.</p> +<p>But before we came to stern fighting, I had a word to say; so I +called for Odda.</p> +<p>A square built, brown-bearded man with a red, angry face pushed +his way to the front of his men, and frowned at me.</p> +<p>"What will you? here am I," he said shortly.</p> +<p>One could understand his words well enough when face to face, +for he spoke in the mixed tongue that any Northman understands, the +plain words of which all our kin have in common.</p> +<p>"I am no foe of Alfred's," I said; "I do not know, therefore, +why I should fight you."</p> +<p>"Are you not for the Danes?" he said.</p> +<p>"I hate them more or less, and I have no traffic with them."</p> +<p>"Well, then, what will you?"</p> +<p>"You bade me yield, and therefore I am here. Now I think it is a +matter to be seen whether of us does so."</p> +<p>"It seems that you have slain about half my men," he said. +"Nevertheless, I do not give up without fighting for the rest of my +ship that you have not won."</p> +<p>"That is well said," I answered.</p> +<p>But the men were laughing, for Kolgrim had stooped, and, +reaching under an oar bench, had dragged out a rower by the neck. +The man swore and struggled; but Kolgrim hove him up, and lifted +him over the yard to Odda's feet.</p> +<p>"They are all like that, Saxon," he said cheerfully. "Maybe +there is a head or two broken; 'tis mostly what we call +seasickness, however."</p> +<p>Odda looked at the man, who seemed wretched enough, but had no +hurt; then he stared at our laughing faces, and his own brow began +to clear.</p> +<p>"It comes into my mind," he said, "that maybe you would listen +to me if I owned first that you have the best of us, and then asked +you to fight for Alfred of Wessex. We need the help of such men as +you just now; and if you hate Danes, we have work enough for +you."</p> +<p>"One may certainly listen to that," I answered, laughing.</p> +<p>"What say you, men? Shall we cast in our lot with Alfred for a +while?"</p> +<p>"We follow you, Ranald the king," Kolgrim answered for all. "If +it seems good to you, it is good for us. There will be fighting +enough, I trow, if all we have heard is true."</p> +<p>Then said Odda:</p> +<p>"And that before long. There is a Danish fleet in Poole Harbour +that is to bring Danes from Wareham to the help of those whom +Alfred holds in Exeter. We have to meet this fleet and scatter +it."</p> +<p>"Then," said old Thord, "your men must be better handled, for +Danes are no new swordsmen or seamen either."</p> +<p>Now the men stood listening to our talk, and this sort of saying +was not good for them to hear, if they were to meet the foe soon +with a good hope of victory. So Odda said quickly:</p> +<p>"If you will indeed fight for us, you must trust to Alfred to +give you fitting reward. I do not know what I might say about that, +having thought of no such chance as this. But there is no man who +can complain of him."</p> +<p>I had heard that the king was ever open handed, but also that at +this time he had little to give. Maybe, however, we might help him +to riches again. I had the men to think of, but I will say for +myself that I had not thought of asking what reward or pay should +be given.</p> +<p>I sheathed my sword, and held out my hand to Odda across the +yard that was between us; and he grasped it honestly, while the men +on either side cheered.</p> +<p>"Stay here and speak with me," Odda said. "Now we must get back +to the fleet."</p> +<p>Then went back to our ship, all but Thord and half a dozen +warriors, whom he kept as guard for me, I suppose; and the +grappling lines were cast off. Then we made sail again, and headed +to rejoin the rest of the Saxon vessels. Odda's crippled ship had +repaired her damage at this time, and went with us. But first it +was plain that she thought we had taken her consort, for she +prepared to fight us, and Odda had to hail her once or twice before +she was sure of what had happened. Then her crew cheered also.</p> +<p>Now Odda took me aft, and we sat together on his quarter deck. +Thord came also, and leaned on the rail beside us, looking with +much disfavour at the crew, who were plainly landsmen at sea for +the first time, if they were stout fighting men enough. Maybe there +were ten seamen among the hundred and fifty, but these had handled +the ship well under canvas, as we knew.</p> +<p>"You have come in good time, King Ranald," Odda said. "You see +what state we are in; can you better it for us?"</p> +<p>"Many things I can see that need strengthening," I answered. +"But you seem to take me into your counsels over soon, seeing that +I have just fallen on you sword in hand."</p> +<p>"Why," said Odda frankly, "it is just your way of speaking to me +sword in hand that makes me sure that I can trust you. I cannot +deny that you had this ship at your mercy, and that the other would +have been yours next; and you knew it, and yet spoke me fair. So it +is plain that you mean well by us."</p> +<p>"Ay," said I, "but for your bidding me to yield, there would +have been no fighting at all, when I knew to whom the ships +belonged."</p> +<p>"You have put a thought in my mind, and I am glad you did board +us, seeing there is no harm done," Odda answered. "I will tell you +what it is. Send me some of your men to order my people and tell +them how to prepare for battle. Here am I sent to sea for the first +time, with good warriors enough who are in like case, and a few +seamen who can sail the ship and know nought else."</p> +<p>"You have some Norsemen yonder, if I mistake not," I said, +looking at the fleet which we were nearing.</p> +<p>"Ay--wandering vikings who care nought for what I say. They were +going to Rolf, and the king persuaded them to take this cruise +first. If you can make them follow you, there will be another +matter for which I shall be more than thankful."</p> +<p>Thereat Thord growled: "They will follow Ranald Vemundsson well +enough; have no care about that."</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"These are the finest ships I have ever seen. Where did they +come from?"</p> +<p>"Alfred, our king, planned them," said Odda, with much pride; +"and they were built by our own men, working under Frisian +shipwrights, in Plymouth."</p> +<p>"How will you like to command one of these, Thord?" I asked +then.</p> +<p>"I like the ship well enough. The crew is bad. And then, whose +command is the fleet under?"</p> +<p>"Take the ship, Thord, and lick my crew into shape; and Ranald, +your king, shall command the fleet," Odda said plainly.</p> +<p>"Fair and softly," said Thord bluntly. "I can do the two things +you ask me; but will your men follow Ranald?"</p> +<p>"Faith," said Odda, "if I say they are to do so, they must."</p> +<p>So in the end I left Thord and my seamen with Odda; but I would +not take his place, only saying that I would lead the Norsemen, and +that he could follow our plans. I would put more good men into each +of his five ships, and they should do what they could. At least +they could teach the Saxons how to board a ship, and how to man +their own sides against boarders from a foe.</p> +<p>Those Norsemen said they would gladly follow the son of King +Vemund and foster son of Einar the jarl; and so we led the strange +fleet, and held on eastward with a light breeze all that day, +making little way when the tide turned, and held back by the slower +vessels. Men in plenty there were, but ill fitted for aught but +hand fighting; though I had more Norsemen sent into the larger +ships, such as those that had been taken from the Danes and the +better trading vessels. One might soon see the difference in the +trim and order on board as the vikings got to work and the Saxons +overcame their sickness.</p> +<p>Now we might meet the Danes at any time, and I could not tell +how matters would go. One thing was certain, however, and that was +that they looked for no gathering of ships by Alfred. We should +certainly take them by surprise, and I hoped, therefore, that they +would be in no trim for fighting.</p> +<p>There was a very swift cutter belonging to the Norsemen, and as +night fell I sent her on to keep watch along the shore for the +first coming of the Danes, while we shortened sail; for the mouth +of Poole Harbour was not far distant, and if we passed that we +should be seen, and perhaps it would be guessed that we were not a +friendly fleet. Towards evening, too, the wind shifted, and blew +more off the shore, and that might bring them out from their haven. +Kolgrim, who was weather wise, said that a shift of wind to the +southward was coming presently.</p> +<p>When morning came, the high cliffs of Swanage were on our bow, +the wind was yet steady from off shore, and beyond the headland lay +Poole Harbour, at whose head is Wareham, where the Danes were. It +is a great sea inlet with a narrow mouth, and one must have water +enough on a rising tide to enter it. Now the ebb was running, and +if the Danes came this morning, it would be soon.</p> +<p>They came, as it seemed, for the cutter was flying back to us +under sail and oars; and before she reached us, the first Danish +ships were clear of the Swanage headlands, making for the offing. +Then I got my ships into line abreast, and Thord worked up Odda's +five alongside us to seaward; and all the while the Danish sails +hove into sight in no sort of order, and seeming so sure that none +but friends could be afloat that they paid no heed to us.</p> +<p>Soon there were full a hundred vessels of all sorts off Swanage +point, and the cutter brought word that there were but twenty more. +Then I ran up my fighting flag, and everywhere along our line rose +a great cheering as we hoisted sail and sped down on the foe. It +was long since the seas had borne a fleet whence the Saxon war cry +rang.</p> +<p>The leading Danes were ahead of us as we gathered way, and their +long line straggled right athwart our course. We should strike +their midmost ships; and at last they saw what was coming, and +heard the din of war horns and men's voices that came down wind to +them, and there were confusion and clamour on their decks, and +voices seemed to call for order that did not come.</p> +<p>Then one or two longships from among them struck sail and +cleared for action, and on these swooped Alfred's great ships. +Odda's crashed upon and sank the first she met, and plunged and +shook herself free from the wreck, and sought another. And beyond +her the same was being wrought; and cheers and cries were strangely +mixed where those high bows went forward unfaltering.</p> +<p>Now a ship crowded with men was before me. As we boarded, her +crew were yet half armed, and struggling to reach the weapon chests +through the press, even while our dragon head was splintering the +gunwale; and I leaped on board her, with my men after me and Harek +beside me.</p> +<p>Then sword Helmbiter was let loose for the first time since +Sigurd wielded her; and though a great and terrible cry came from +over the water as one of Alfred's ships sank another Dane, I could +look no more, for there was stern fighting before me.</p> +<p>What a sword that was! Hardly could my arm feel the weight of it +as it swung in perfect balance, and yet I knew the weight it had as +it fell. Helm and mail seemed as nought before the keen edge, and +the shields flew in twain as it touched them.</p> +<p>Forward I went, and aft went Harek the scald, and there was soon +an end. The Danes went overboard, swimming or sinking, as their +fate might be, and only the slain bided before us. The ship was +ours, and I looked round to see what should be next. No other ship +had come to help our prey.</p> +<p>Then I saw a wonderful sight. Panic terror had fallen on the +Danes, and not one ship of all that great fleet was not flying down +the wind without thought of fighting. Among them went our vessels, +great and small, each doing her work well; and the Saxon shouts +were full of victory.</p> +<p>So we must after them, and once more we boarded a longship, and +had the victory; and then we were off the haven mouth, and with the +flood tide the wind was coming up in gusts from the southeast that +seemed to bode angry weather. By that time no two Danish ships were +in company, and the tide was setting them out to sea.</p> +<p>"Here is a gale coming," said Kolgrim, looking at the sky and +the whitening wave crests. "We had best get our ships into this +haven while we can."</p> +<p>It seemed that Thord was of the same mind, for now he was +heading homeward, and the other Saxons were putting about and +following him. So I got men into the best of the ships we had +taken, and waited till Thord in Odda's ship led the way, and so +followed into Poole Harbour.</p> +<p>Well it was for us that we had refuge so handy. For by noonday +the gale was blowing from the southwest, and two Danish ships were +wrecked in trying to gain the harbour--preferring to yield to us +rather than face the sea, with a lee shore, rocky and hopeless, +waiting for them.</p> +<p>We went into the Poole inlet, which is on the eastern side of +the wide waters of the haven, and there found good berths enough. +The village was empty, save for a few Saxon fishermen, who hailed +us joyfully. And then Odda made for us as good a feast as he might +in the best house that was there, bidding every shipmaster to it. +Merry enough were all, though we had but ship fare; for the Saxons +had great hopes from this victory.</p> +<p>Now Odda made much of what I had done--though it was little +enough--saying that I and my men deserved well of Alfred, and that +he hoped that we should stay with him for this winter, which would +perhaps see the end of the war.</p> +<p>"Why," said I, "things would have been much the same if I had +not been here."</p> +<p>"That they would not," he answered. "I should have blundered +past this place in the night, and so lost the Danes altogether; or +if I had not done that, they would soon have found out what state +my men were in. You should have heard old Thord rate them into +order; it is in my mind that he even called me--Odda the +ealdorman--hard names in his broad Norse tongue. But at least he +gave us somewhat more to think of than the sickness that comes of +heaving planks that will by no means keep steady for a moment."</p> +<p>He laughed heartily at himself, and then added:</p> +<p>"Good King Alfred thought not at all of that matter. Now I can +shift the whole credit of this victory to your shoulders, and then +he will not believe that I am the born sea captain that he would +have me think myself."</p> +<p>"I will not have that," I said, "for I have not deserved +it."</p> +<p>"Ay; but, I pray you, let me put it from myself, else shall I be +sent to sea again without any one to look to for advice," he said +earnestly, and half laughing at the same time. "I did but take +command of this fleet because the king could find no one else at a +pinch. Heaven defend me from such a charge again!"</p> +<p>"Now you have only the Exeter Danes to deal with," I said.</p> +<p>"How many men might these ships have held?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Maybe five thousand," I answered.</p> +<p>Thereat his face changed, and he rose up from his seat at the +high table, and said that he would go down to see that the ships +were safe, for the gale was blowing heavily as the night fell.</p> +<p>So we went outside the house, and called a man, telling him to +find one of the Poole fishermen and bring him to speak to us.</p> +<p>"There were twelve thousand Danes in Wareham," he said, "for +more have come lately. I thought they would all have been in the +ships."</p> +<p>"If that had been possible, not one would have seen the +morning's light," I answered, "for their ships are lost in this +gale certainly."</p> +<p>Now I will say that I was right. The wrecks strewed the shore of +Dorset and Hants next morning; and if any men won to land, there +waited for them the fishers and churls, who hated them. No Danish +fleet was left in the channel after that gale was spent.</p> +<p>When the fisher came, he told us that as many more Danes were +left in Wareham, and that those from Poole had fled thither when +they saw what had happened to the fleet.</p> +<p>"Shall you march on Wareham and scatter them, or will they fall +on us here?" I asked; for we had no more than two thousand men at +most.</p> +<p>"I would that I knew what they thought of this business," he +answered; "but I shall not move tonight. It is far by land, and I +suppose we could not get the ships up in the dark."</p> +<p>So he posted pickets along the road to Wareham, and we went back +to the house for a while. And presently, as it grew dark, a wild +thought came into my mind. I would go to Wareham with a guide, and +see what I could find out of the Danish plans. Maybe there were +fewer men than was thought, or they might be panic-stricken at our +coming in this wise; or, again, they might march on us, and if so, +we should have to get to sea again, to escape from double our +numbers.</p> +<p>Now the more I thought of this, the more I grew bent on going, +for I was sure that we must know what was going on. And at last I +took Odda aside while Harek sang among the men, and told him what I +would do.</p> +<p>At first he was against my running the risk; but I told him that +a Norseman might go safely where a Saxon could not among the Danes, +and at last I persuaded him. Then I called Kolgrim, and we went out +together into the moonlight and the wind, to find the fisherman we +had spoken with already and get him to act as guide. I think that +Odda did not expect to see either of us again; and when I came to +know more of Saxons, I learned that he trusted me most fully, for +many thanes would have thought it likely that I went on some +treacherous errand.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_IV" id="Chapter_IV">Chapter IV</a>. Jarl +Osmund's Daughter.</h2> +<p>To my mind, no gale seems so wild as one that comes at the time +of full moon, when the clouds break up and fly in great masses of +black and silver against the deeper sky beyond, while bright light +and deepest shadow chase each other across land and sea beneath +them. Kolgrim and I stood under the lee of a shed, waiting for the +fisher to get his boat afloat, and looked out on bending trees and +whitened water, while beyond the harbour we could see the great +downs, clear cut and dark, almost as well as by day, so bright it +was.</p> +<p>It was low water now, which was good for us, for the winding +channels that lead up to Wareham were sheltered under their bare +banks. We could hear the thunder of the surf along the rocky coast +outside, when the wind ceased its howling for a moment; and at high +water the haven had been well nigh too stormy for a small boat. Now +we should do best to go by water, for wind was with us; though, +unless the gale dropped very quickly, we could not return in her, +for there would be a heavy sea and tide against us if we could get +away before it turned, while if we were long wind against tide +would be worse yet.</p> +<p>The fisherman was eager to help us against the Danes, who had +made him work for nought; and so in half an hour we were flying up +the haven on the first rise of tide, and the lights of Wareham town +grew plainer every moment. From the number of twinkling sparks that +flitted here and there, it would seem that many folk were waking, +even if some movement were not on hand.</p> +<p>Presently we turned into the channel that bends to the southwest +from the more open water, and the town was before us. The fisher +took to his oars now, lowering the scrap of sail that had been +enough to drive us very swiftly before the gale so far.</p> +<p>Wareham stands on the tongue of land between two rivers' mouths, +and the tide was setting us into the northward of these. That was +the river one would have to cross in coming to or from Poole, and +maybe we should learn as much there as anywhere.</p> +<p>There were three ships on the mud, but even in the moonlight it +was plain that they were not seaworthy. There were wide gaps in +their bulwarks, which none had tried to mend, and the stem head of +one was gone.</p> +<p>"These ships were hurt in the storm of lest week," the fisher +said, as we drifted past them; "there was hardly one that came in +unhurt. But the Danes were eager to go, and mended them as they +could."</p> +<p>Perhaps that was partly the reason why we gained so easy a +victory, I thought at the time, and afterwards knew that I was +right. They had suffered very much, while we lay across channel in +safety.</p> +<p>There loomed before us the timbers of a strong bridge that had +been over the north river, when we were fairly in it and under the +nearer houses of the town. But now it was broken down, and the gap +in its middle was too wide for hasty repair.</p> +<p>"When was this done?" I asked the fisherman.</p> +<p>"Since yesterday," he answered.</p> +<p>Now this seemed to me to indicate that the Danes meant to guard +against attack by land from Poole; also that they overrated our +numbers, which was probable in any case, seeing that a fleet had +fled from before us.</p> +<p>There were wharves on the seaward side of the bridge, but none +were beyond; and the houses stood back from the water, so that +there was a sort of open green between it and them. There were no +people about, but we could hear shouts from the town now and +then.</p> +<p>"Let us go ashore and speak with some one," I said; "it is of no +use our biding here on the water."</p> +<p>Kolgrim and I were fully armed, and had boat cloaks with us +which covered us well, and we thought none would question who we +were if we mixed among the men in some inn or other gathering +place. So we bade the fisher wait for us, and found the stairs, and +went to the wide green along the waterside, and across it to the +houses, which were mostly poor enough here.</p> +<p>Many of them stood open, and in one a fire burned on the hearth, +but all were empty. So we turned into a street that led seemingly +from one bridge to the other across the town. Here men were going +hither and thither with torches, and groups were outside some of +the houses. To the nearest of these I went, as if I had all right +to be in the place.</p> +<p>They were bringing goods out of the house, and loading a cart +with them.</p> +<p>"Here is a flitting," said Kolgrim, "and another or two are on +hand yonder."</p> +<p>I stayed a man who came past me from out of a house.</p> +<p>"I have fled from Poole," I said. "What is in the wind here? Are +we to leave Wareham also?"</p> +<p>"If you come from Poole, you should know that it is time we did +so," he answered shortly. "I suppose you saw the whole +business."</p> +<p>"So I did," I answered. "What are the orders?"</p> +<p>"Pack up and quit with all haste," said he. "You had better get +to work if you have aught to save."</p> +<p>"Shall we go to Exeter, or back to Mercia?" I said.</p> +<p>"Exeter they say; but I know not. Why not go and ask Jarl Osmund +himself--or follow the crowd and hinder no one with questions?"</p> +<p>He hurried on; but then some men began to question us about the +doings off Swanage, and Kolgrim told them such tales that they +shivered, and soon we had a crowd round us listening. Nor did I +like to hurry away, for I heard a man say that we were Northmen, by +our voices. But there were plenty of our folk among the Danes.</p> +<p>Then came a patrol of horsemen down the street, and they bade +the loiterers hurry. I drew Kolgrim into an open doorway, and stood +there till they passed, hearing them rate their fellows for +delay.</p> +<p>"Wareham will be empty tomorrow," I said. "Now we can go; we +have learned enough."</p> +<p>Still I would see more, for there seemed no danger. Every man +was thinking of himself. So we went across the town, and as we came +near the western bridge the crowd grew very thick.</p> +<p>We heard before long that the army was as great as Odda had +thought, and that they were going to Exeter. Already the advance +guard had gone forward, but this train of followers would hardly +get clear of the town before daylight. They had heard great +accounts of our numbers, and I wished we had brought the ships up +here at once. There would have been a rout of the Danes.</p> +<p>But the place was strange to me, and to Odda also, so that we +could not be blamed.</p> +<p>We got back by the way we came, and then knew that we could in +no way take the boat to Poole. The gale was raging at its highest, +and thatch was flying from the exposed roofs. It would be dead +against us; and the sea was white with foam, even in the haven. So +we must go by road, and that was a long way. But we must get back +to Odda, for he should be in Wareham before the Danes learned, +maybe, that their flight was too hurried.</p> +<p>Now it seemed to me that to leave Wareham was not so safe as to +come into it, for no Dane would be going away from the place. +However, the bridge was down; and if it had not been done in too +great haste, any fugitives from the country would have come in. So +that maybe we should meet no one on the road that goes along the +shore of the great haven.</p> +<p>The fisherman ferried us over to the opposite shore, and then +tied his boat to the staging of the landing place, saying that he +was well known and in no danger. He would sleep now, and bring his +boat back when the wind fell. So we left him, thanking him for his +goodwill.</p> +<p>Grumbling, as men will, we set out on our long walk in the gale. +We could not miss the road, for it never left the curves of the +shore, and all we had to do was to be heedful of any meetings. +There might be outposts even yet, watching against surprise.</p> +<p>However, we saw no man in the first mile, and then were feeling +more secure, when we came to a large farmstead which stood a short +bowshot back from the road, with a lane of its own leading to the +great door. What buildings there were seemed to be behind it, and +no man was about; but there was light shining from one of the high +windows, as if some one were inside, and plain to be seen in the +moonlight were two horses tied by the stone mounting block at the +doorway.</p> +<p>"Here is a chance for us, master," said my comrade, coming to a +stand in the roadway. "I must try to steal these horses for +ourselves. If Danes are in the place, they have doubtless stolen +them; and if Saxons, they will get them back."</p> +<p>"There will be no Saxon dwelling so near the Danes," I said. +"Maybe the place is full of Danes--some outpost that is +careless."</p> +<p>"Careless enough," said Kolgrim. "If they are careless for three +minutes more, they have lost their horses."</p> +<p>Then we loosened our swords in their sheaths, and drew our +seaxes, and went swiftly up the grassy lane. The wind howled round +the house so that none would hear the clank of mail, which we could +not altogether prevent. But the horses heard us, and one shifted +about and whinnied as if glad to welcome us.</p> +<p>At that we ran and each took the bridle of that next him, and +cut the halter that was tied to the rings in the wall, looking to +see the doors thrown open at any moment. Then we leaped to the +saddles and turned to go. The hoofs made a great noise on the +paving stones before the doorway, yet there was no sound from +inside the house.</p> +<p>That seemed strange to me, and I sat still, looking back with +the horse's head turned towards the main road.</p> +<p>"Stay not, master," Kolgrim said. "'Tis some outpost, and the +men have slept over the farmhouse ale. Maybe the stables behind are +full of horses. Have a care, master; the door opens!"</p> +<p>He was going; but I waited for a moment, half expecting to see a +spear point come first, and my hand was on my sword hilt. But the +great heavy door swung slowly, as if the one who opened it had +trouble with its weight. So I must needs see who came. Maybe it was +some old man or woman whose terror I could quiet in a few +words.</p> +<p>Then the red firelight from within shone out on me, and in the +doorway, with arms raised to post and door on either hand, stood a +tall maiden, white robed, with gold on neck and arm. The moonlight +on her seemed weird with the glow of the fire shining through the +edges of her hood and sleeves. I could see her face plainly, and it +was fair and troubled, but there was no fear in her looks.</p> +<p>"Father, is this you?" she said quietly.</p> +<p>I could make no answer to that, and she looked intently at me; +for the moon was beyond me, and both Kolgrim and I would seem black +against it, as she came from the light within, while the wind, keen +with salt spray, was blowing in her face.</p> +<p>"Who is it?" she said again. "I can scarcely see for moon and +wind in my eyes."</p> +<p>"Friends, lady," I said, for that at least was true in a +way.</p> +<p>"Where are my horses? Have you seen aught of our thralls, who +should have left them?" she asked, looking to whence we had just +taken the beasts.</p> +<p>Now I was ashamed to have taken them, for she was so plainly +alone and helpless, and I could not understand altogether how it +could be so. I was sure that she was Danish, too.</p> +<p>"How is it that you have not fled, lady?" I asked. "Surely you +should have gone."</p> +<p>"Ay; but the thralls fled when they heard the news. Has not my +father sent you back for me?"</p> +<p>This seemed a terrible plight for the maiden, and I knew not +what to say or do. She could not be left in the way of our Saxons +if they came on the morrow, and I could not take her to Poole. And +so, lest I should terrify her altogether, I made up my mind even as +she looked to me for an answer.</p> +<p>"I think your father is kept in Wareham in some way. Does he +look for you there?"</p> +<p>"Ay, surely," she answered; but there was a note as of some new +fear in her voice. "Has aught befallen him? Have the Saxons +come?"</p> +<p>"All is well in Wareham yet," I answered. "Now we will take you +to your father. But we are strangers, as you may see."</p> +<p>Then I called to Kolgrim, who was listening open eyed to all +this, and backed away from the door a little.</p> +<p>"What is this madness, master?" he whispered hoarsely.</p> +<p>"No madness at all. Ten minutes' ride to Wareham with the +maiden, give her to the fisherman to take to her friends, and then +ride away--that is all. Then we shall be in Poole long before any +look for us, for we are in luck's way."</p> +<p>Kolgrim laughed.</p> +<p>"Strange dangers must I run with you, master; but that is what +one might look for with Ranald of the Sword."</p> +<p>Then I got off the horse, which was very strong and seemed +quiet, and went to the maiden again.</p> +<p>"It will be best for you to come with us, lady," I said "we will +see you safely to Wareham."</p> +<p>The light fell on my arms now, and they were splendid enough, +being Harald Fairhair's gift, which I had put on for the fight, +seeing that the men loved to see their king go bravely, and being, +moreover, nowise loth to do so myself. She seemed to take +heart--for she was well nigh weeping now--when she saw that I was +not some wandering soldier of the great host.</p> +<p>"My horses, two of them should be here," she said. "I bade the +thralls leave them when they fled."</p> +<p>So she thought not that we had loosed them, and did not know her +own in the moonlight. Maybe she had no knowledge as to which of +many had been left, and I was glad of that, for so her fear was +less.</p> +<p>"You must ride with us," I said, "and I would ask you to come +quickly; even now the host is leaving Wareham."</p> +<p>"Ay, is that so? Then my father is busy," she said, and then she +faltered a little, and looked at me questioningly. "I cannot go +without my nurse, and she is very sick. I think she sleeps now. Men +feared her sickness so that we brought her here from the town. But +indeed there is nought to fear; there is no fever or aught that +another might take from her."</p> +<p>Then I grew fairly anxious, for this was more than I had looked +for. I knew that it was likely that she would soon be missed and +sought for; yet I could not think of leaving her to that chance, +with the bridge broken moreover.</p> +<p>I gave the bridle to Kolgrim then to hold.</p> +<p>"Let me see your nurse," I said gently; "I have some skill in +these troubles."</p> +<p>She led me into the house without a word. All the lower story +was in one great room, with a hearth and bright fire thereon in the +centre. Beyond that was a low bed, to which the maiden went. A very +old woman, happed in furs and heavy blankets, lay on it, and it +needed but one look to tell me that she needed no care but the +last. Past need of flight was she, for she was dead, though so +peacefully that her watcher had not known it.</p> +<p>"The sleep is good, is it not?" the maiden said, looking +anxiously into my face.</p> +<p>"It is good, lady," I answered, taking off my helm. "It is the +best sleep of all--the sleep that heals all things."</p> +<p>The maiden looked once at the quiet face, and once more at me, +with wide eyes, and then she knew what I meant, and turned quickly +from me and wept silently.</p> +<p>I stood beside her, not daring to speak, and yet longing to be +on the road. And so still were we that Kolgrim got off his horse +and came to the door and called me, though not loudly.</p> +<p>I stepped back to him.</p> +<p>"Come again in a few minutes and say one word--'Saxons'" I +whispered, "then we shall go."</p> +<p>He nodded and drew back. I think the maiden had not heard me +move, for she was bent over the bed and what lay thereon. It seemed +very long to me before I heard my comrade at the door.</p> +<p>"Saxons, master!" he said loudly.</p> +<p>"Say you so?" I answered, and then I touched the maiden's arm +gently.</p> +<p>"Lady, we must go quickly," I said. "The dame is past all help +of ours, and none can harm her. Come, I pray you."</p> +<p>She stood up then, still looking away from me, and I drew the +covering over the still face she gazed at.</p> +<p>"You must leave her, and I know these Saxons will not wrong the +dead," said I gently. "Your father will miss you."</p> +<p>"I am keeping you also in danger," she answered bravely. "I will +come."</p> +<p>"Loth to go am I," she said, as she gathered her wrappings to +her and made ready very quickly, "for it seems hard. But hard +things come to many in time of war."</p> +<p>After that she ceased weeping, and was, as I thought, very brave +in this trouble, which was indeed great to her. And when she was +clad in outdoor gear, she bent once more over the bed as in +farewell, while I turned away to Kolgrim and made ready the horses. +Then she came, and mounted behind me on a skin that I had taken +from a chair before the hearth.</p> +<p>Then we were away, and I was very glad. The good horse made +nothing of the burden, and we went quickly. Many a time had I +ridden double, with the rough grip of some mail-shirted warrior +round my waist, as we hurried back to the ships after a foray; but +this was the first time I had had charge of a lady, and it was in a +strange time and way enough. I do not know if it was in the hurry +of flight, or because they had none, but the horses had no saddles +such as were for ladies' use.</p> +<p>So I did not speak till we were half a mile from the house, and +then came a hill, and we walked, because I feared to discomfort my +companion. Then I said:</p> +<p>"Lady, we are strangers, and know not to whom we speak nor to +whom we must take you."</p> +<p>There was a touch of surprise in her voice as she answered:</p> +<p>"I am the Lady Thora, Jarl Osmund's daughter."</p> +<p>Then I understood how this was the chief to whom the man I spoke +with first had bidden me go for orders. It was plain now that he +was up and down among the host ordering all things, and deeming his +daughter in safety all the while. He had not had time to learn how +his cowardly folk had fled and left their mistress, fearing perhaps +the sickness of the old dame as much as the Saxon levies.</p> +<p>Now no more was said till we came to the riverside, where the +flood tide was roaring through the broken timbers of the bridge. +The fisher slept soundly despite the noise of wind and water, and +Kolgrim had some trouble in waking him.</p> +<p>"How goes the flight?" I asked him when he came ashore with the +boat's painter in his hand.</p> +<p>"Faith, master, I know not. I have slept well," he said.</p> +<p>Now by this time it seemed to me that I ought to take the lady +into a safe place, and I would go myself rather than leave her to +the fisherman, who was rough, and hated the Danes heartily, as I +knew. Moreover, I had a new plan in my head which pleased me +mightily. Then I thought that if I were to meet any man who +suspected me, which was not likely, the Lady Thora would be pass +enough for me. So I told Kolgrim to bide here for me, and he said +at first that he must be with me. However, I made him stay against +his will at last, telling him what I thought.</p> +<p>Then the fisher put us across quickly, and went back to the far +side to wait my return.</p> +<p>I asked Thora where I must take her to find the jarl.</p> +<p>"To his house, surely," she said.</p> +<p>"I do not know the way from here," I answered; "I fear you must +lead me."</p> +<p>"As you will," she said, wondering. "It is across the town +certainly."</p> +<p>That was bad for me, perhaps, but I should find that out +presently. So we went across the open, and came to the road through +the town along which I had been before. It was clearer, though +there were yet many people about.</p> +<p>Now when we were in the shadow of the first houses, Thora +stopped suddenly and looked hard at me.</p> +<p>"Will you tell me if I am heading you into danger?" she +said.</p> +<p>"What danger is possible?" I answered. "There are no Saxons here +yet."</p> +<p>"Not one?" she said meaningly. "I may be wrong--it does seem +unlikely but I think you do not belong to us. Your speech is not +like ours altogether, and your helm is gold encircled, as if you +were a king."</p> +<p>"Lady," I said, "why should you think that I am not of your +people? Let us go on to the jarl."</p> +<p>"Now I know that you are not. Oh, how shall I thank you for +this?"</p> +<p>Then she glanced at my helm again, and drew a sudden little +quick breath.</p> +<p>"Is it possible that you are Alfred of Wessex? It were like what +they say of him to do as you have done for a friendless +maiden."</p> +<p>Then she caught my hand and held it in both of hers, looking +half fearfully at me.</p> +<p>"Lady," I said, "I am not King Alfred, nor would I be. Come, let +us hasten."</p> +<p>"I will take you no further," she said then. "Now I am sure that +you are of the Northmen that were seen with the Saxons. You are not +of us, and I shall lose you your life."</p> +<p>Then came the quick trot of horses, and I saw a little troop +coming down the street, their arms flashing in the streaks of +moonlight between the houses.</p> +<p>"I will see you in good hands, Lady Thora," I answered. "Who are +these coming?"</p> +<p>"It is my father," she said, and drew me back deeper into +shadow.</p> +<p>After the horsemen and beside them ran men who bore planks and +ropes, and it was plain that the jarl had found out his loss, and +hastened to bridge the gap and cross the river.</p> +<p>I saw that I could keep up the pretence no longer.</p> +<p>"Let me walk behind you as your servant," I said. "If any heed +me, I pray you make what tale you can for me."</p> +<p>"What can I say to you in thanks?" she cried quickly, and +letting go my hand which she yet held. "If you are slain, it is my +fault. Tell me your name at least."</p> +<p>"Ranald Vemundsson, a Northman of King Alfred's," I said. "Now I +am your servant--ever."</p> +<p>Then Thora left my side suddenly, and ran forward to meet the +foremost horseman--for they were close to us--calling aloud to +Osmund to stay. And he reined up and leaped from his horse with a +cry of joy, and took her in his arms for a moment.</p> +<p>I got my cloak around me, pulling the hood over my helm, and +stood in the shadow where I was. I saw the jarl lift his daughter +into the saddle, and the whole troop turned to go back. The footmen +cast down their burdens where each happened to be, and went quickly +after them; and I was turning to go my way also, when a man came +riding back towards me.</p> +<p>"Ho, comrade," he said, "hasten after us. Mind not the things +left in the boat. There is supper ere we go."</p> +<p>I lifted my hand, and he turned his horse and rode away, paying +no more heed to me. That was a good tale of things left that Thora +had made in case I was seen to be going back to the boat.</p> +<p>Then I waxed light hearted enough, and thought of my other plan. +Kolgrim saw me coming, and the boat was ready.</p> +<p>"Have you flint and steel?" I said to the fisher as I got into +the boat.</p> +<p>"Ay, master, and tinder moreover, dry in my cap."</p> +<p>"Well, then, take me to those ships we saw. I have a mind to +scare these Danes."</p> +<p>It was a heavy pull against the sea to where they lay afloat +now, though it was not far. I fired all three in the cabins under +the fore deck, so that, as their bows were towards the town, the +light would not be seen till I was away.</p> +<p>Then we went swiftly back to Kolgrim, and as I mounted and rode +off, the blaze flared up behind us, for the tarred timbers burned +fiercely in the wind.</p> +<p>"That will tell Odda that the Danes are flying. And maybe it +will save Wareham town from fire, for they will think we are on +them. So I have spoiled Jarl Osmund's supper for him."</p> +<p>Then I minded that this would terrify the Lady Thora maybe, and +that put me out of conceit with my doings for a moment. But it was +plain that she was brave enough, for there were many things to fray +her in the whole of this matter, though perhaps it was because +Kolgrim stayed beyond the river that she made so sure that I was a +man of King Alfred's and no friend to the Danes.</p> +<p>So we rode away, pleased enough with the night's work, and +reached Poole in broad daylight, while the gale was slackening. +Well pleased was Odda to see me back, and to hear my news.</p> +<p>Then he asked me what I would do next. There seemed to be no +more work at sea, and yet he would have me speak with King Alfred +and take some reward from him. And I told him that the season grew +late, and that I would as soon stay in England for this winter as +anywhere.</p> +<p>"What will you do next in the matter of these Danes, however?" +was my question.</p> +<p>Then he said:</p> +<p>"I must chase them through the country till they are within the +king's reach. He has the rest pent in Exeter, and there will be +trouble if they sail out to join these. I must follow them, +therefore, end send men to Alfred to warn him. Then he will know +what to do. Now I would ask you to take the ships back into the +river Exe and join us there."</p> +<p>I would do that willingly, and thought that if the wind held +fair after the gale ended, I might be there before he joined the +king by land. But I should have to wait for a shift to the eastward +before sailing.</p> +<p>So Odda brought his men ashore, and marched on Wareham and +thence after the Danes, not meaning to fight unless some advantage +showed itself, for they were too many, but to keep them from +harming the country. And I waited for wind to take me westward.</p> +<p>Then the strange Norsemen left us. They had gained much booty in +the Danish ships, for they carried what had been won from the +Saxons, and what plunder should be taken was to be their share in +due for their services. They were little loss, for they were +masterless vikings who might have given trouble at any time if no +plunder was to be had, and I was not sorry to see them sail away to +join Rolf Ganger in France.</p> +<p>Now these men would have followed me readily, and so I should +have been very powerful at sea, or on any shore where I cared to +land. But Odda had made me feel so much that I was one in his +counsel, and a friend whom he valued and trusted, that I had made +this warfare against the Danes my own quarrel, as it were in his +company. Already I had a great liking for him, and the more I heard +of Alfred the king, the more I wished to see him. At the least, a +man who could build ships like these, having every good point of +the best I knew, and better than any ever heard of before, was +worth speaking with. I thought I knew somewhat of the shipwright's +craft, and one thinks much of the wisdom of the man who is easily +one's master in anything wherein one has pride.</p> +<p>Moreover, Alfred's men were wont to speak of him with little +fear, but as if longing for his praise. And I thought that +wonderful, knowing only Harald Fairhair and the dread of him.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_V" id="Chapter_V">Chapter V</a>. Two Meetings +in England.</h2> +<p>It was not long before the shift of wind that I looked for came, +and at once I took all the ships round to the river Exe. Odda had +left me all the seamen he had, and they were enough for the short, +fair passage. We came to the haven in the river, and there heard +what news there was, and it was good enough. Odda had sent +well-mounted men to reach the king by roads away from the +retreating Danes, and he had been ready for them. He drew off his +levies from before the walls of the town, and let his enemies pass +him; then he and Odda fell on their rear and drove them into +Exeter, and there was holding them. It was well done; for though +the host sallied from the town to meet the newcomers, they gained +nothing but a share in the rout that followed when Odda closed on +the rear guard and the king charged the flank.</p> +<p>Now we heard that as soon as we landed. And then I had my first +knowledge of the ways of a Saxon levy. For no sooner were the ships +berthed than their crews began to leave them, making for their +homes.</p> +<p>One or two men I caught in the act of leaving in the early +morning, and spoke sharply to them, for it seemed that soon there +would be ships enough and not a man to tend them. Whereon they +answered:</p> +<p>"We have done what we were called up for, and more also. Now may +others take our places. What more would you have? We have won our +victory, and the ships are not needed for a while."</p> +<p>So they went, and nothing I could say would stay them. I waxed +angry on that, and I thought I might as well sail for Ireland as +not. There seemed no chance of doing aught here, where men would +throw away what they had won of advantage.</p> +<p>So I went back to my own ship and sat under the after awning, in +no good temper. Thord and Kolgrim were yet busy in and about the +vessels, making all secure, and setting men to work on what needed +repairing. Presently Harek the scald came and sat with me, and I +grumbled to my heart's content about this Saxon carelessness and +throwing away of good luck.</p> +<p>Many Saxons--men from camp, and freemen of the place, and some +thanes--came, as one might expect, to stare at the ships and their +prizes. I paid no heed to them as the day went on, only wishing +that Odda would come and speak to me about his doings, for I had +sent word to him that we were in the river. Sometimes a thane would +stay and speak with me from the wharf alongside which my own ship +was with one or two others, and they were pleasant enough, though +they troubled me with over many thanks, which was Odda's fault. +However, I will say this, that if every man made as little of his +own doings and as much of those of his friends as did the honest +ealdorman, it were well in some ways.</p> +<p>By and by, while we were talking, having got through my grumble, +Kolgrim came along the shore with some Saxon noble whom he had met; +and this stranger was asking questions about each ship that he +passed. I suppose that Kolgrim had answered many such curious folk +already; for when he came near and we could hear what he was +saying, I was fain to laugh, for, as sailors will, he was telling +the landsman strange things.</p> +<p>"What do we pull up the anchor with?" he was saying. "Why, with +yonder big rope that goes from masthead to bows." and he pointed to +the great mainstay of our ship. "One must have a long purchase, if +you know what that is."</p> +<p>"Ah, 'tis wonderful," said the Saxon.</p> +<p>Then he caught my eye, and saw that I was smiling. He paid no +heed to me, however, but looked long at the ship that lay astern of +ours--one of the captured Danes. Thord had set a gang of shore folk +to bend the sail afresh to a new yard, for the old one had been +strained in the gale that came before the fight.</p> +<p>"What are those men doing, friend?" he asked Kolgrim +directly.</p> +<p>"Bending a sail," answered my comrade listlessly, trusting, as +it would seem, to the sea language for puzzlement enough to the +landsman.</p> +<p>"So," said the Saxon, quite quietly. "It was in my mind that +when a sail was bent to the yard it was bent with the luff to the +fore end thereof."</p> +<p>At which words Kolgrim started, in a way, and looked first at +the riggers and then back at the Saxon, who moved no muscle of his +face, though one might see that his eyes twinkled. And I looked at +the riggers also, and saw that the Saxon was right, and that the +men had the square-cut sail turned over with the leech forward and +the luff aft. The sail was half laced to the yard, and none but a +man who knew much of ships would have seen that aught was +wrong.</p> +<p>Then Kolgrim's face was so red, and angry, and full of shame all +at once, that I had the best laugh at him that had come to me for +many a day. And he did not bide with the Saxon any longer, but went +on board the ship hastily, and said what he had to say to the +riggers. The Saxon stood, and looked after him with a smile +breaking over his pleasant face, and I thought that maybe I owed +him some amends for my comrade's rough jesting, though indeed he +had his revenge.</p> +<p>So I came ashore and spoke to him. He was a slight, brown-haired +man of about thirty, bearded and long-haired after the Saxon +fashion, and I thought he seemed to be recovering from some wound +or sickness that had made him white and thin. He wore his beard +long and forked, which may have made him look thinner; but he +seemed active and wiry in his movements--one of those men who make +up for want of strength by quickness and mastery of their weapons. +Soberly dressed enough he was, but the cloth of his short cloak and +jerkin was very rich, and he had a gold bracelet and brooch that +seemed to mark him as high in rank.</p> +<p>"My comrade has been well caught, thane," I said; "he will be +more careful what tales he tells the next comer. But I think he was +tired of giving the same answers to the same questions to all who +come to see us."</p> +<p>"Likely enough," the Saxon answered, laughing a little. "I asked +to see the prizes and the vikings' ships, and he showed me more +than I expected."</p> +<p>Then he looked along the line of vessels that he had not yet +passed, and added:</p> +<p>"I thought there were more Norse ships with Odda."</p> +<p>I told him how the other vikings had left us with their plunder +at Wareham, saying that I thought they could well be spared at that +time.</p> +<p>"However," I said, "I did not count on the Saxons leaving their +vessels so soon."</p> +<p>"Then I take it that I am speaking with King Ranald, of whom +Odda has so much to say," he said, without answering my last +words.</p> +<p>"I am Ranald Vemundsson," I said; "but this ship is all my +kingdom now. Harald Fairhair has the land that should have been +mine. I am but a sea king."</p> +<p>Then he held out his hand, saying that there was much for which +every Saxon should thank me, and I passed that by as well as I +could, though I was pleased with the hearty grip he gave me.</p> +<p>"So long as Odda is satisfied it is enough," I said. "If I have +helped him a little, I have helped a man who is worth it."</p> +<p>"Well," said the thane, "you seem to be pleased with one +another. Now I should like to see this ship of yours, of which he +has so much to say."</p> +<p>We went over her, and it was plain that this thane knew what he +was talking about. I wondered that the king had not set him in +command instead of Odda, who frankly said what was true--that he +was no sailor. I supposed that this man, however, was not of high +rank enough to lead so great a gathering of Saxons, and so I said +nothing to him about it.</p> +<p>By and by we sat on the after deck with Harek, and I had ale +brought to us, and we talked of ship craft of all sorts. Presently, +however, he said:</p> +<p>"What shall you do now--if one may ask?"</p> +<p>"I know not. When I sailed from Wareham, I thought to have seen +more sea service with Alfred your king. But now his men are going +home, and in a day or two, at this rate, there will be none left to +man the ships."</p> +<p>"We can call them up again when need is," he answered.</p> +<p>"They should not go home till the king sends them," I said. +"This is not the way in which Harald Fairhair made himself master +of Norway. Once his men are called out they know that they must +bide with him till he gives them rest and sends them home with +rewards. It is his saying that one sets not down the hammer till +the nail is driven home, and clinched moreover."</p> +<p>"That is where the Danes are our masters," the Saxon said, very +gravely. "Our levies fight and disperse. It was not so in the time +of the great battles round Reading that brought us peace, for they +never had time to do so. Then we won. Now the harvest wants +gathering. Our people know they are needed at home and in the +fields."</p> +<p>"They must learn to know that home and fields will be better +served by their biding in arms while there is a foe left in the +land. What says Alfred the king?" I said.</p> +<p>"Alfred sees this as well as you, or as any one but our +freemen," he answered; "but not yet can he make things go as he +knows they should. This is the end at which he ever aims, and I +think he will teach his people how to fight in time. I know this, +that we shall have no peace until he does."</p> +<p>"Your king can build a grand ship, but she is of no use without +men in her day by day, till they know every plank of her."</p> +<p>"Ay," said the Saxon; "but that will come in time. It is hard to +know how to manage all things."</p> +<p>"Why," I said, "if the care of a ship is a man's business, for +that he will care. You cannot expect him to care for farm and ship +at once, when the farm is his living, and the ship but a thing that +calls him away from it."</p> +<p>"What then?"</p> +<p>"Pay the shipman to mind the sea, that is all. Make his ship his +living, and the thing is done."</p> +<p>"It seems to me," the thane said, "that this can be done. I +shall tell the king your words."</p> +<p>"As you will," I answered; "they are plain enough. I would say +also that Harald our king has about him paid warriors whose living +is to serve him, and more who hold lands on condition that they +bear arms for him at any time."</p> +<p>Now Harek had listened to all this, and could tell the thane +more of Harald's ordering of things than I; so he took up the talk +for a time, and presently asked about the war and its +beginning.</p> +<p>"Faith," answered the Saxon, with a grim smile, "I cannot tell +when the war began, for that was when the first Danes came to the +English shores. But if you mean the trouble that is on hand now, it +is easily told. Ten years has this host been in England--coming +first with Ingvar and Halfden and Hubba, the three sons of Lodbrok. +Ingvar has gone away, and Guthrum takes his place. Halfden is in +Northumbria, Hubba is in Wales, and Guthrum is king over East +Anglia and overlord of Mercia. It is Guthrum against whom we are +fighting."</p> +<p>"He is minded to be overlord of all England," said Harek.</p> +<p>"That is to be seen if a Dane shall be so," the Saxon answered, +flushing. "We beat them at first, as I have said, and have had +peace till last year. Then they came to Wareham from East Anglia. +There they were forced to make peace, and they swore on the holy +ring <a name="EndNote5anc" href="#EndNote5sym" id= +"EndNote5anc"><sup>{v}</sup></a> to depart from Wessex; and we, on +our part, swore peace on the relics of the holy saints. Whereon, +before the king, Alfred, was ware of their treachery, they fell on +our camp, slew all our horsemen, and marched here. Then we gathered +the levies again--ay, I know why you look so impatiently, King +Ranald--and came here after them. As for the rest, you have taken +your part. Now we have them all inside these walls, and I think we +have done."</p> +<p>Then his face grew dark, and he added:</p> +<p>"But I cannot tell. What can one do with oath breakers of this +sort?"</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"Surely you do not look for the men of one chief to be bound by +what another promises?"</p> +<p>He looked wonderingly at me for a moment, and then said:</p> +<p>"How should it be that the oath of their king should not bind +the people?"</p> +<p>"Why," said I, "you have spoken of several chiefs. If Guthrum +chooses to make peace, that is not Halfden's business, or Hubba's, +or that of any chief who likes it not. One is as free as the +other."</p> +<p>"What mean you? I say that Guthrum and his chiefs swore by the +greatest oath they knew to return to Mercia."</p> +<p>"If they swore by the holy ring, there is no doubt that they who +swore would keep the oath. But that does not bind those who were +against the peace making. So I suppose that they who held not with +the peace made by the rest fell on you, when your levies went home +after their wont. One might have known they would do so."</p> +<p>Thereat the thane was silent for a while, and I saw that he was +troubled. It seemed to be a new thought to him at this time that +the Danish hosts in England were many, and each free to act in the +way its own chief thought best, uniting now and then, and again +separating. This he must needs have learned sooner or later, but +the knowledge came first to him there before Exeter walls.</p> +<p>Presently he said:</p> +<p>"I have believed that all the Danes were as much one under +Guthrum their king as are my folk under theirs. I cannot see the +end of this war."</p> +<p>"It will end when Alfred the king is strong enough always to +have men in the field to face every leader that will fall on him," +Harek said. "What King Ranald says is true. It is as if his own +father had minded what Harald had sworn in the old days."</p> +<p>"Wherefore Harald brought all Norway under him, that every man +should mind what he said," the Saxon answered.</p> +<p>Then came three or four more thanes along the shore, and he rose +up and waved his hand to them.</p> +<p>"Here are more butts for Kolgrim," he said, laughing. "Now, King +Ranald, I must go to my friends. But I have learned much. I think +you must speak with the king before you go, and I will tell him all +you have said."</p> +<p>"Maybe we shall meet again," said I, taking his offered hand. "I +think I would see Alfred; but he is over wise, from all accounts, +to learn aught from me."</p> +<p>"King Alfred says that wisdom comes little by little, and by +learning from every one. I belong to the court, and so shall surely +meet you if you do come to speak to him."</p> +<p>Then I asked the thane's name.</p> +<p>"Godred <a class="EndNoteanc" name="EndNote6anc" href= +"#EndNote6sym" id="EndNote6anc"><sup>{vi}</sup></a> men say it +is," he answered, laughing; "but that means better counsel than +belongs to me."</p> +<p>So he went ashore and joined the thanes, who had gone slowly +along the road, and we lost sight of him.</p> +<p>"Yonder goes a pleasant comrade enough," I said to Harek.</p> +<p>"Ay," the scald answered; "but if that is not Alfred the king +himself, I am much in error."</p> +<p>"It is not likely. I think he is a bigger man and older, from +all accounts," I said carelessly. "Moreover, he would not have put +up with Kolgrim's jests as he did."</p> +<p>"One knows not; but I thought he spoke of 'my folk' once. And he +seemed to ask more than would a simple thane, and in a different +way."</p> +<p>However, it seemed to me that Harek had found a marvel for +himself, and I laughed at him for supposing that Alfred the king +would come there to speak to any man.</p> +<p>Now towards evening Odda came, and with him many servants and a +train of wagons. He would make a feast for us in the best house of +the village, by the king's order. Every one of us was called, and +all the leading Saxon shipmen, when all was ready, and it was a +kingly feast enough.</p> +<p>While they were making it ready, the ealdorman came to me on +board the ship, and welcomed me in most friendly wise.</p> +<p>"I have a message for you, King Ranald," he said presently. +"Some thanes have been to me from the king, and he bids me ask you +to come and speak with him."</p> +<p>"I saw a thane here this morning who was anxious for me to see +the king," I said. "A pleasant man enough--one Godred."</p> +<p>"Ay, Godred is pleasant enough," Odda said, smiling, "but he is +a terrible man for asking questions."</p> +<p>He laughed again, as if he knew the man well, and was pleased to +think of him and his ways.</p> +<p>"None of his questions are foolish, however," I said. "I was +pleased with him."</p> +<p>"It is well if you pleased him, for he is a powerful man at +court," said Odda.</p> +<p>"I do not know if I pleased him, or if it makes any difference +to me what power he has," I said carelessly. "If I want any man to +speak for me to the king--which is not likely--I should come to you +first."</p> +<p>"Speak for yourself," laughed Odda, "that is the best way with +Alfred."</p> +<p>So we planned to go to Exeter with the next morning's light. +Odda would bide here for the night, after the feast.</p> +<p>Now after we had finished eating, and the ale and mead and the +wine the king had sent in our honour were going round, and the +gleemen were singing at times, there came a messenger into the +house, and brought me a written message from the king himself, as +he said.</p> +<p>"Much good are these scratches to me," said I to Odda. "Can you +read them?"</p> +<p>"I can read nought but what is written in a man's face," he +said.</p> +<p>So I gave the scroll to Harek, who sat next me, thinking that +maybe the scald could read it. He pored over it for a while.</p> +<p>"It is of no use, king," he said. "It is in my mind that I know +which is the right way up of the writing, but I am not sure."</p> +<p>So I laughed, and asked aloud if any man present could read. +There were a good many thanes and franklins present to feast in our +honour.</p> +<p>Then rose up a man, in a long brown hooded habit girt with a +cord, from below the salt where he sat among the servants. He had a +long beard, but was very bald. His hair grew in a thick ring round +his head; which was strange, for he seemed young.</p> +<p>"I am here, ealdorman," he said to Odda; "I will read for King +Ranald."</p> +<p>Now all eyes turned to see who spoke, and in a moment Odda rose +up hastily and went down the long room till he came to where the +man stood. Then I was amazed, for the ealdorman went on one knee +before him, and said:</p> +<p>"Good my lord, I knew not that you were here among the crowd. I +pray you come to the high seat."</p> +<p>"When will you remember that titles and high places are no +longer pleasing to me?" the man said wearily. "I tire of them all. +Rise up, Odda, my friend, and let me be."</p> +<p>"I will not rise without your blessing, nevertheless," said the +ealdorman.</p> +<p>Whereon the man spoke a few words to him softly and quickly, +signing with his hand crosswise over him.</p> +<p>Then I said to those about me, who were watching all this in +silence:</p> +<p>"Who is this strange man?"</p> +<p>"It is Neot the holy, King Alfred's cousin," one answered, +whispering.</p> +<p>"That is a strange dress for an atheling," I said; but they +hushed me.</p> +<p>Now it seemed that Odda tried again to draw this Neot to the +high table, but he would not come.</p> +<p>Then I said to old Thord, who sat over against me beyond Odda's +empty chair:</p> +<p>"This is foolishness; or will he not honour the king's +guests?"</p> +<p>But a thane shook his head at me, whispering behind his +hand:</p> +<p>"It is humbleness. He has put his rank from him, and will not be +held as being above any man."</p> +<p>Then spoke old Thord:</p> +<p>"Maybe he can put his rank away among men who know him not, and +that is a good humbleness in a way. But where all know what his +birth is, he has but to be humble and kind in ways and speech, and +then men will think more thereof than they will if they see him +pretending to be a churl."</p> +<p>Now Thord's voice was rough with long years of speaking against +the wash of the waves, and the thunder of wind in sail and rigging, +and the roll and creak of oars; and as he said this, every one +turned towards him, for a silence had fallen on the crowd of folk +who watched Neot the king's cousin and his strife with Odda.</p> +<p>So Neot heard, and his face flushed a little, and he looked hard +at Thord and smiled curiously, saying:</p> +<p>"In good truth the old warrior is right, and I am foolish to +hide here now I am known. Let me go and sit by him."</p> +<p>Then Odda led him to the upper end of the room, and every one +rose as he passed by. I drew myself nearer to the ealdorman's +place, and made room for him where only the table was between him +and Thord, for that bench was full.</p> +<p>So he put his hand on my shoulder and sat down, looking over to +Thord, and saying with a quiet smile:</p> +<p>"Thanks for that word in season, friend."</p> +<p>But the old warrior was somewhat ashamed, and did but shift in +his seat uneasily.</p> +<p>"Ay, ay," he growled; "I cannot keep my voice quiet."</p> +<p>Neot laughed, and then turned to me and held out his hand for +the king's letter, which I gave him.</p> +<p>He ran his eyes over the writing very quickly, and then +said:</p> +<p>"Here is nothing private; shall I read aloud?"</p> +<p>But the thanes fell to talking quickly, and I nodded.</p> +<p>"Alfred the king to his cousin Ranald Vemundsson, greeting. Odda +the ealdorman of Devon, and one Godred, have spoken to me of +yourself--one telling of help given freely and without question of +reward or bargain made, and the other of certain plain words spoken +this morning. Now I would fain see you, and since the said Godred +seems to doubt if you will come to me, I ask it under my own hand +thus. For I have thanks to give both to you and your men, and also +would ask you somewhat which it is my hope that you will not refuse +me. Therefore, my cousin, I would ask you to come with our +ealdorman tomorrow and hear all I would say."</p> +<p>Then Neot said,</p> +<p>"That is all. I think you will not refuse so kindly an +invitation. The writing is the king's own, and here is his name at +the end."</p> +<p>So he showed it me. The letter was better written than the name, +as it seemed to me.</p> +<p>"I will take your word for it," I said, laughing as I looked; +"but it is a kindly letter, and I will surely come."</p> +<p>"Ay; he has written to you as to an equal," Odda said.</p> +<p>"That is so. Now I would have the good king know that I am not +that; I am but a sea king. Maybe he thinks that I shall be a good +ally, and makes more of my power than should be. I told Godred the +thane as plainly as I could what I was, this morning."</p> +<p>"Why, then," said Neot, smiling, "Godred has told the king, no +doubt."</p> +<p>"I hope he has," I answered, "but I doubt it. Nevertheless it is +easy to tell the king myself when I see him."</p> +<p>After that we talked about other matters, and it became plain +that this Neot was a wonderfully wise man, and, as I thought, a +holy one in truth, as they called him. There is that about such an +one that cannot be mistaken.</p> +<p>Harek sang for us, and pleased all, and into his song came, as +one might suppose, a good deal about the Asir. And then Neot began +to ask me a good deal about the old gods, as he called them. I told +him what I knew, which was little enough maybe, and so said that +Harek knew all about them, and that he should rather ask him.</p> +<p>He did not care to do that, but asked me plainly if I were a +Christian.</p> +<p>"How should I be?" I said. "Odda is the first Christian man I +have spoken with, to my knowledge. So, if I were likely to leave my +own faith, I have not so much as heard of another."</p> +<p>"So you are no hater of Christians?" he said.</p> +<p>"Surely not. Why should I be? I never thought of the +matter."</p> +<p>Then he said:</p> +<p>"Herein you Norsemen are not like the Danes, who hate our faith, +and slay our priests because of their hatred."</p> +<p>"More likely because Christian means Saxon to them, or else +because you have slain them as heathens. Northmen do not trouble +about another nation's faith so long as their own is not interfered +with. Why should they? Each country has its own ways in this as in +other matters."</p> +<p>Thereat Neot was silent, and asked me no more. Hereafter I +learned that hatred of race had made the hatred of religion bitter, +until the last seemed to be the greatest hatred of all, adding +terror and bitterest cruelty to the struggle for mastery.</p> +<p>Presently, before it was very late, Neot rose up and spoke to +Odda, bidding him farewell. Then he came to me, and said:</p> +<p>"Tell the king that we have spoken together, and give him this +message if you will that I go to my place in Cornwall, and shall be +there for a while."</p> +<p>Then he passed to Thord, and took his hard hand and said:</p> +<p>"Good are words that come from an honest heart. I have learned a +lesson tonight where I thought to have learned none."</p> +<p>"I marvel that you needed to learn that," Thord said +gruffly.</p> +<p>"So do I, friend," answered Neot; "but one is apt to go too far +in a matter which one has at heart, sometimes before one is aware. +Then is a word in season welcome."</p> +<p>Then he thanked Harek for his songs, and went, the Saxons bowing +as he passed down the long table with Odda.</p> +<p>"That is a wise man and a holy," said Thord.</p> +<p>"Ay, truly," answered the thane who had told me about him. "I +mind when he and Alfred the king were the haughtiest and most +overbearing of princes. But when Neot found out that his pride and +wrath and strength were getting the mastery in his heart, he thrust +himself down there to overcome them. So he grows more saintlike +every day, and has wrought a wondrous change in the king himself. +He is the only man to whom Alfred will listen in reproof."</p> +<p>"That is likely," I said, not knowing aught of the holy bishops +who were the king's counsellors; "kings brook little of that sort. +But why does he wear yon strange dress?"</p> +<p>"He has taken vows on him, and is a hermit," the thane said; but +I did not know what he meant at the time.</p> +<p>It was some Saxon way, I supposed, and cared not to ask +more.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that I met one of the two most wonderful men +in England, and I was to see the other on the morrow. Yet I had no +thought that I should care to stay in the land, for it seemed +certain from what Odda told me that peace would be made, and peace +was not my business nor that of my men.</p> +<p>So in a way I was sorry that the war was at an end, seeing that +we came for fighting and should have none.</p> +<p>Then came a thought to me that made me laugh at myself. I was +glad, after all, that we were not going sword foremost into Exeter +town, because of the Lady Thora, who was there. I suppose it would +not have been reasonable had I not had that much thought for the +brave maiden whom I had helped out of danger once.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_VI" id="Chapter_VI">Chapter VI</a>. Alfred the +King.</h2> +<p>Odda the ealdorman and I rode gaily into the king's camp in the +bright August morning, with Harek and Kolgrim and Thord beside us, +and after us fifty of my men in their best array; which was saying +much, for Einar the jarl was generous, and we had spoiled Halfdan, +the king's son, moreover. So there was a shouting when we came to +the camp, and men ran together to stare at the vikings and their +king.</p> +<p>In the midst of the camp, which was strong enough, and looked +out on the old city, flew a banner whereon was a golden dragon--the +banner of Wessex. And it stood before a great pavilion, which was +the court for the time, and where we should find the king waiting +for us. There were several other tents joined to this great one, so +that into them the king might retire; and there was a wide space, +round which walked spearmen as sentries, between it and any other +tent.</p> +<p>Some Devon thanes met us, and our men dismounted at the same +time as we. Then Odda led us four to the door of the pavilion, and +we were ushered in with much ceremony.</p> +<p>Inside the great tent was like a round hall, carpeted, and +tapestry-hung in a way I had never seen before. There were many +richly-dressed nobles present, and most of these were grouped round +a high place over against the door, where I saw at once that the +king sat on a throne in all state.</p> +<p>Now, coming from bright sunshine into the cool shadow of the +place, I was dazzled at first; but Kolgrim's eyes were quick, and +we had hardly crossed the threshold, if I might call it so, when he +plucked at my cloak.</p> +<p>"Master," he whispered, "let me bide with the men; this is no +place for me."</p> +<p>"Hush," I whispered; "the king is yonder."</p> +<p>"Ay, master--let me go--the king is Godred whom I jested +with."</p> +<p>Harek was smiling, and he pulled Kolgrim forward.</p> +<p>"Have no fear," he said; "those who play bowls expect rubs."</p> +<p>Then the king came down from his throne and towards us. He had +on gilded armour beneath his long, ermine-trimmed blue cloak, and +that pleased me. He had sword and seax, but no helm, though that +was on a table by the throne--for he wore a crown.</p> +<p>Then I too saw that Godred, as he called himself, was, as the +scald had guessed rightly, the king, and I was a little angry that +he had tricked me thus. But he was laughing at Kolgrim as he came, +and my anger passed at once. King or thane, here was a pleasant +greeting enough.</p> +<p>He held out his hand to Odda first and then to me. The Saxon +kissed it, bending one knee, which was doubtless right for him, as +owning allegiance thereto. But I shook hands in our own way, +saying:</p> +<p>"Skoal to Alfred the king."</p> +<p>Which seemed to please him, for he answered:</p> +<p>"Welcome to King Ranald. I am glad my letter brought you. My +counsellor, Godred, feared you might not care to come."</p> +<p>"The letter turned the scale, lord king," I said. "Yet I would +have you remember what I said yesterday about my kingship."</p> +<p>"Ay, cousin, I mind it," he answered, laughing. "Also I mind +that a king's son is a king's son, whatever else he may be +called."</p> +<p>Then he shook hands with Harek, and after that turned to +Kolgrim, holding out his hand also to him.</p> +<p>"Concerning sails," he said gravely, "I have many questions to +ask you. Is it to the starboard hand that the bolt rope goes, or to +the other board?"</p> +<p>"I pray you to forget my foolishness, lord king," cried Kolgrim, +growing very red and shame faced.</p> +<p>"That I shall not," the king answered, laughing. "I owe you +thanks for such a jest as I have not played on a man for many a +long day. Truly I have been more light hearted for my laugh ever +since."</p> +<p>"Ay, lord, you had the laugh of me," Kolgrim said, grinning +uneasily.</p> +<p>Then the king nodded gaily to him and asked who Thord was.</p> +<p>"This is my master in sea craft," said Odda. "Verily I fear him +as I have feared no man since I was at school. But he cured the +seasickness of me."</p> +<p>"Maybe I forgot the sickness when I sent landsmen to sea in all +haste," said the king. "Nevertheless, Thord, how fought they when +blows were going?"</p> +<p>"Well enough, king. And I will say that what I tried to teach +them they tried to learn," answered Thord.</p> +<p>"Wherein is hope. You think that I may have good seamen in time, +therefore?"</p> +<p>"Ay, lord. It is in the blood of every man of our kin to take to +the sea. They are like hen-bred ducklings now, and they do but want +a duck to lead them pondwards. Then may hen cackle in vain for +them."</p> +<p>The king laughed.</p> +<p>"Faith," he said, "I--the hen--drove Odda into the pond. He is, +according to his own account, a poor duckling."</p> +<p>"Let him splash about a little longer, lord king," said +Thord.</p> +<p>But Odda spoke with a long face.</p> +<p>"Not so, King Alfred, if you love me. Landsman am I, and +chicken-hearted at sea. Keep the gamecock to mind the farmyard; +there be more birds than ducks needed."</p> +<p>"Make a song hereof, Harek," said the king. "Here is word play +enough for any scald."</p> +<p>Then sang Harek, laughing, and ever ready with verses:</p> +<pre class="verse"> +"The gamecock croweth bravely, +And guardeth hawk-scared hen roost; +But when the sea swan swimmeth +Against the shoreward nestings, +There mighty mallard flappeth, +And frayeth him from foray; +Yet shoreward if he winneth, +The gamecock waits to meet him." +</pre> +<p>"That is in my favour," said Odda. "Mind you the scald's words, +I pray you, lord king, and send me to my right place, even with +hawk on one side and swan on the other."</p> +<p>So a pleasant laugh went round, and then the king went back to +his throne, and spoke words of open thanks to us of the fleet who +had gained him such victory. Good words they were, neither too few +nor too many, such as would make every man who heard them long to +hear the like of himself again.</p> +<p>Now, while he was speaking, men came to the tent door and waited +for his words to end; and then one came forward and told a noble, +who seemed to be ordering the state which was kept, that Danish +lords had come to speak with the king.</p> +<p>It seemed that this was expected, for when he heard it, Alfred +bade that they should be brought in.</p> +<p>There were six of them in all, and they were in handsome +dresses, but without mail, though not unarmed. The leader of them +was Jarl Osmund, whom I had seen for a moment in Wareham street. I +thought that his handsome face was careworn, as though peace would +be welcome to him. But he and all his comrades carried themselves +bravely.</p> +<p>Now there was long converse between the king and these chiefs, +and it seemed that peace would be made.</p> +<p>Yet Alfred's face was hard as he spoke to them--not like the +bright looks with which he had jested with us just now, or the +earnest kingly regard which had gone with his words of thanks.</p> +<p>Presently the Danes said that the whole force would retire into +Mercia beyond Thames, harming none by the way, and keeping peace +thereafter, if the conditions were honourable.</p> +<p>Then the king flashed out into scorn:</p> +<p>"What honour is to be looked for by oath breakers?"</p> +<p>"We are not oath breakers, King Alfred," Osmund said, looking +him in the face.</p> +<p>"Once did the Danes swear to me on their holy ring, which seems +to me to be their greatest oath, and they broke the peace so made. +What is that but that they are forsworn?"</p> +<p>"We swore nought to you, lord king," Osmund said. "Half of the +men with us came newly from across the sea but a week or so since. +Guthrum and those who swore are in their own land."</p> +<p>Then the king glanced at me, suddenly, as it would seem, +remembering what I had told him of the freedom of the chiefs.</p> +<p>"Ha! now I mind me of a word spoken in time," he said. "It has +seemed to me that there was oath breaking; maybe I was wrong. I +will take your words that you have not done so. Is that amends +enough?"</p> +<p>"It is well said, lord king," Osmund answered gravely.</p> +<p>"But," Alfred went on, "I must have the word of every chief who +is in Exeter, and they must speak for every man. Tell me in all +truth if there are those who would not make peace with me?"</p> +<p>Then said Osmund:</p> +<p>"Some will not, but they are few."</p> +<p>"What if you make peace and they do not? what shall you do with +them?"</p> +<p>"They must go their own way; we have no power over them."</p> +<p>"Has not Guthrum?"</p> +<p>"No more than we. A free Dane cannot be hound, unless he +chooses, by another man's word."</p> +<p>Then Alfred said plainly:</p> +<p>"I cannot treat for peace till I have the word of every chief in +Exeter. Go your ways and let that be known."</p> +<p>So Osmund bowed, and went out with his fellows. And when he had +gone, the king turned to me.</p> +<p>"Have I spoken aright, King Ranald?"</p> +<p>"In the best way possible, lord king," I answered.</p> +<p>"Go after those Danish lords," the king said to one of his +thanes, "and bid them to feast with me tonight, for I think that I +have said too much to them."</p> +<p>So they were bidden to the king's feast presently, and I suppose +they could do nought but come, for it was plain that he meant to +honour them. After they had gone back into the town, Alfred spoke +with my men, and what he said pleased them well.</p> +<p>Then he went to his resting tent, and I walked with Odda to his +quarters, and sat there, waiting for the king to send for me to +speak with him, as I expected. But word came that he would wait +till he had heard more of the Danish answer to his message before +we spoke together of that he had written of to me. So he prayed me +to wait in the camp till he had seen the Danes again, and told Odda +to find quarters for us.</p> +<p>"So we shall have a good talk together," the ealdorman said. "I +am glad you are not going back to the ships yet."</p> +<p>So was I, for all this fresh life that I had not seen before +pleased me. Most of all I wished to see more of Alfred and the +state in which he lived.</p> +<p>Now, just when I was ready for the feast, and was sitting with +Odda, there came a guard to the tent and said that the chief of the +Danes was seeking King Ranald.</p> +<p>Then Odda said:</p> +<p>"What wills he? we have no traffic with Danes."</p> +<p>"He would speak with King Ranald," the man said.</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"If it is Osmund the jarl, I think I know why he comes.--Let him +come in here and speak before you, ealdorman."</p> +<p>"Why, do you know him?"</p> +<p>"I cannot rightly say that I do, but I nearly came to do +so."</p> +<p>Then Odda wondered, and answered:</p> +<p>"Forgive me; one grows suspicious about these Danes. I will go +hence, and you shall speak with him alone. Maybe he wants your word +with the king, because you know the ways of the viking hosts."</p> +<p>"No," said I; "stay here. Whatever it is he has to say cannot be +private; nor would I hear anything from him that you might +not."</p> +<p>"As you will. Let him come here," Odda said; and the man went +out.</p> +<p>Then entered Jarl Osmund, richly dressed for the king's feast, +and he looked from one of us to the other as we rose to greet him. +Suddenly he smiled grimly.</p> +<p>"I looked to find strangers, and was about to ask for King +Ranald. However, Odda the ealdorman and I have met before, as I am +certain."</p> +<p>"Faith, we have," said Odda. "Nor am I likely to forget it. It +was at Ashdown fight."</p> +<p>"And elsewhere," said the jarl. "But it was ever fair fighting +between us."</p> +<p>"Else had you slain me when I was down," said Odda frankly, and +with a smile coming into his face.</p> +<p>"The score is even on that count," said Osmund, and with that, +with one accord their hands met, and they laughed at each +other.</p> +<p>That was good to see, and ever should things be so between brave +foes and honest.</p> +<p>Then Osmund looked at me.</p> +<p>"Now have I met with two men whom I have longed to see," he +said, "for you must be King Ranald Vemundsson. Two foes I have--if +it must be so said--of whom I have nought but good to say."</p> +<p>"So," laughed Odda. "When fought you twain, and which let the +other go?"</p> +<p>"We have not fought," the jarl answered. "But I have deeper +reason for thanking Ranald than for sparing my own life, or for +staying a blow in time out of sheer love of fair play."</p> +<p>Then he took my hand and looked me in the face.</p> +<p>"It was a good deed and noble that you wrought for me but the +other day," he said earnestly. "I do not know how to thank you +enough. My daughter laid command on me that I should seek you and +tell you this; but indeed I needed no bidding when I heard how she +escaped."</p> +<p>"I had been nidring had I not helped a lady in need," I said, +being in want of better words.</p> +<p>"What is all this?" said Odda; for I had told him nought of the +matter, not seeing any reason to do so.</p> +<p>Then Osmund must needs tell him of what Kolgrim and I had done; +and the ealdorman laughed at me, though one might see that the +affair pleased him.</p> +<p>"This king," he said, "having no kingdom of his own, as he says, +goes about helping seasick ealdormen and lonely damsels, whereby he +will end with more trouble on his hands than any kingdom would give +him."</p> +<p>"I am only one," I said; "Kolgrim and Thord are in this +also."</p> +<p>Then Osmund took a heavy gold bracelet from his arm.</p> +<p>"This is for Kolgrim, your comrade," he said, half doubtfully, +"if I may give it him in remembrance of a brave deed well done. +Will he be too proud to accept it?"</p> +<p>"I may give it him, certainly," I said, taking the gift.</p> +<p>Then Odda would not be behindhand, and he pulled off his own +armlet.</p> +<p>"If Kolgrim is to be remembered, Thord will never be forgotten. +Give this to him in sheer gratitude for swearing at me in such wise +that he overcame the sore sickness that comes of the swaying of the +deck that will not cease."</p> +<p>"Give it him yourself, ealdorman," I said. "You know him over +well to send it by another. It would not be so good a gift."</p> +<p>"As you will," he answered. "But I fear that viking terribly. +Black grows his face, and into his beard he blows, and the hard +Norse words grumble like thunder from his lips. Then know I that +Odda the ealdorman has been playing the land lubber again, and +wonder what is wrong. Nor is it long ere I find out, and I and my +luckless crew are flying to mind what orders are howled at us. In +good truth, if Alfred ever needs me to hurry in aught, let him send +Thord the viking to see that I do so. One may know how I fear him, +since I chose rather to risk battle with Jarl Osmund on shore than +to bide near him in my own ship any longer."</p> +<p>Then the jarl and I laughed till our sides ached, and Odda +joined us when he could not help it, so doleful was his face and +solemn were his words when he told his tale. But I knew that he and +Thord were the best of friends after those few days in the ship +together, and that the rough old viking had given every man of the +crew confidence. Nevertheless he was apt to rage somewhat when +things went in slovenly wise.</p> +<p>So Odda helped me through with Osmund's thanks, and I was glad. +I was glad also that the horns blew for the feast, so that no more +could be said about the Wareham doings.</p> +<p>Now I sat close to King Alfred at the feast, and saw much of his +ways with men. I thought it plain that he had trouble at times in +keeping back the pride and haughtiness which I had heard had been +the fault in both Neot and himself, for now and then they showed +plainly. Then he made haste to make amends if one was hurt by what +he had said in haste. But altogether I thought him even more kingly +than the mighty Harald Fairhair in some ways.</p> +<p>Truly he had not the vast strength and stature of Norway's king, +but Alfred's was the kingliness of wisdom and statecraft.</p> +<p>Once I said to Odda:</p> +<p>"Can your king fight?"</p> +<p>"Ay, with head as well as with hand," he answered. "His skill in +weapon play makes up for lack of weight and strength. He is maybe +the best swordsman and spearman in England."</p> +<p>I looked again at him, and I saw that since last I turned my +eyes on him he had grown pale, and now his face was drawn, and was +whitening under some pain, as it would seem; and I gripped Odda's +arm.</p> +<p>"See!" I said, "the king dies! he is poisoned!"</p> +<p>And I was starting up, but the ealdorman held me back.</p> +<p>"I pray you pay no heed," he said urgently. "It is the king's +dark hour; he will be well anon."</p> +<p>But nevertheless Alfred swayed in his seat, and two young thanes +who stood waiting on him came to either side and helped him up, and +together they took him, tottering, into the smaller tent that +opened behind the throne; while all the guests were silent, some in +fear, like myself, but others looking pityingly only.</p> +<p>Then a tall man in a dress strange to me--a bishop, as I knew +presently--rose up, and said to those who knew not what was the +matter:</p> +<p>"Doubtless all know that our good king is troubled with a +strange illness that falls on him from time to time. This is such a +time. Have no fear therefore, for the pain he suffers will pass. He +does not will that any should be less merry because of him."</p> +<p>So the feast went on, though the great empty chair seemed to +damp the merriment sadly. I asked Odda if this trouble often befell +the king.</p> +<p>"Ay, over often," he said, "and one knows not when it will come. +No leech knows what it is, and all one can say is that it seems to +harm him not at all when it has gone."</p> +<p>I asked no more, but the king did not come back to the feast, as +he would at times when things happened thus. It seemed that often +the trouble fell on him when feasting, and some have said that it +was sent to prevent him becoming over proud, at his own prayer +<a name="EndNote7anc" href="#EndNote7sym" id= +"EndNote7anc"><sup>{vii}</sup></a>.</p> +<p>Soon the Danes rose up, and would go. Some of the great thanes +set them forth with all honour, and the feast ended. There was no +long sitting over the wine cup at Alfred's board, though none could +complain that he stinted them.</p> +<p>Then the tall bishop who had spoken just now came to me.</p> +<p>"The king will speak with you now, King Ranald, if you will +come," he said.</p> +<p>So I went with him, and Odda came also. The king was lying on a +couch without his heavy state robes, and when we entered the small +tent the attendants left him. He was very pale, but the pain seemed +to have gone, and he looked up pleasantly at me.</p> +<p>"My people are used to this, cousin," he said, "but I fear I put +you out sorely."</p> +<p>"I thought you poisoned," I said; "but Odda told me not to +fear."</p> +<p>"Ay, that has been the thought of others before this," he said. +"Have you ever seen the like in any man? I ask every stranger, in +hopes that I may hear of relief."</p> +<p>"No, I have not, lord king," I answered; "but I can grave runes +that will, as I think, keep away such pain if you bear them on you. +Thord, whom you know, taught me them. Maybe it would be better for +him to grave them, for runes wrongly written are worse than none, +and these are very powerful."</p> +<p>"That is a kindly thought, cousin," Alfred answered; "but I am +sure that no runes will avail when the prayers of my people, from +holy Neot to the little village children, do not. And I fear that +even would they heal me, I must sooner bear the pain than seek to +magic spells."</p> +<p>"Nay, but try them, King Alfred," I said; "there is no ill magic +in them."</p> +<p>Now he saw that I was in earnest, and put me by very kindly.</p> +<p>"I must ask Sigehelm, our bishop here, who is my best leech next +to Neot.</p> +<p>"What say you, father?"</p> +<p>"Even as you have said, my king."</p> +<p>"Maybe, bishop," said I, "you have never tried the might of +runes?"</p> +<p>Whereat the good man held up his hands in horror, making no +answer, and I laughed a little at him.</p> +<p>"Well, then," said the king, "we will ask Neot, for mostly he +seems to say exactly what I do not."</p> +<p>"Neot has gone to Cornwall, and I had forgotten to give you that +message from him. He says he will be there for a time," I said, +rather ashamed at having let slip the message from my mind.</p> +<p>"So you saw him?" said Alfred.</p> +<p>"I knew he went to the ships yesterday after Godred came back," +he added, laughing.</p> +<p>"He read my letter for me, and after that I had a good deal of +talk with him," I said.</p> +<p>"Then," said Sigehelm, "you have spoken with the best man in all +our land."</p> +<p>Now the king said that he would let the question of the runes, +for which he thanked me, stand over thus; and then he asked me to +sit down and hear what he would ask me to do for him, if I had no +plans already made for myself.</p> +<p>I said that I had nothing so certainly planned but that I and my +men would gladly serve him.</p> +<p>"Then," he said, "I would ask you to winter with me, and set my +ships in order. There will be work for you and all your men, for +you shall give them such command in any ship of mine as you know +they are best fitted for. I would ask you to help me carry out that +plan of which you spoke to me when I was Godred."</p> +<p>When Odda heard that, he rubbed his hands together, saying:</p> +<p>"Ay, lord king, you have found the right man at last."</p> +<p>"Then in the spring you shall take full command of the fleet we +will build and the men we shall raise; and you shall keep the seas +for me, if by that time we know that we can work well +together."</p> +<p>He looked hard at me, waiting my answer.</p> +<p>"Lord king," I said at last, "this is a great charge, and they +say that I am always thought older than I am, being given at least +five winters beyond the two-and-twenty that I have seen;" for I +thought it likely that the king held that I had seen more than I +had.</p> +<p>"I was but twenty when I came to the throne," he answered. "I +have no fear for you. More than his best I do not look for from any +man; nor do I wonder if a man makes mistakes, having done so many +times myself."</p> +<p>Here Sigehelm made some sign to the king, to which he paid no +heed at the time, but went on:</p> +<p>"As for your men, I will give them the same pay that Harald of +Norway gives to his seamen, each as you may choose to rank them for +me. You may know what that is."</p> +<p>"Harek the scald knows," I said. "They will be well pleased, for +the pay is good, and places among Harald's courtmen are much sought +for."</p> +<p>Then Alfred smiled, and spoke of myself.</p> +<p>"As for King Ranald himself, he will be my guest."</p> +<p>"I am a wandering viking, and I seem to have found great +honour," I said. "What I can do I will, in this matter. Yet there +is one thing I must say, King Alfred. I would not be where men are +jealous of me."</p> +<p>"The only man likely to be so is Odda," the king answered. "You +must settle that with him. It is the place that he must have held +that you are taking. No man in all England can be jealous of a +viking whose business is with ships. But Odda put this into my mind +at first, and then Godred found out that he was right."</p> +<p>"Lord king," said I, "had I known who you were at that time, I +should have spoken no differently. We Northmen are free in speech +as in action."</p> +<p>"So says Odda," replied Alfred, smiling. "He has piteous tales +of one Thord, whom you sent to teach him things, and the way in +which he was made to learn."</p> +<p>"Nevertheless," said Odda, "I will not have Thord blamed, for it +is in my mind that we should have learned in no other way so +quickly."</p> +<p>Again the bishop signed to the king, and Alfred became +grave.</p> +<p>"Here is one thing that our good Sigehelm minds me of. It seems +that you are a heathen."</p> +<p>"Why, no, if that means one who hates Christians," I said. +"Certainly I do not do that, having no cause to do so. Those whom I +know are yourself, and Neot, and Odda, and one or two more +only."</p> +<p>"That is not it," said the king. "What we call a heathen is one +who worships the old gods--the Asir."</p> +<p>"Certainly I do that--ill enough."</p> +<p>"Then," said Alfred, while Odda shifted in his seat, seeming +anxious as to how I should take this, "it is our rule that before a +heathen man can serve with us, he shall at least be ready to learn +our faith, and also must be signed with the cross, in token that he +hates it not <a name="EndNote8anc" href="#EndNote8sym" id= +"EndNote8anc"><sup>{viii}</sup></a>."</p> +<p>"Why should I not learn of your faith?" I said. "Neot asked me +of mine. As for the other, I do not know rightly what it means. I +see your people sign themselves crosswise, and I cannot tell why, +unless it is as we hallow a feast by signing it with Thor's +hammer."</p> +<p>"It is more than that," Alfred said, motioning to Sigehelm to +say nothing, for he was going to speak. "First you must know what +it means, and then say if you will be signed therewith."</p> +<p>Then he said to Sigehelm:</p> +<p>"Here is one who will listen to good words, not already set +against them, as some Danes are, by reason of ill report and the +lives of bad Christians. Have no fear of telling him what you +will."</p> +<p>Now, if I were to serve King Alfred, it seemed to me to be only +reasonable that I should know the beliefs of those with whom I had +to do. Then I minded me of Neot, and his way of asking about my +gods, as if the belief of every man was of interest to him.</p> +<p>"Here is a deep matter to be talked of, King Alfred," I said. +"It does not do to speak lightly and carelessly of such things. Nor +am I more than your guest as yet, willing to hear what you would +have me know. When winter has gone, and you know if I shall be any +good to you, then will be question if I enter your service +altogether, and by that time I shall know enough. Maybe I shall see +Neot again; he and I began to speak of these things."</p> +<p>Then Sigehelm said:</p> +<p>"I think this is right, and Neot can tell you more in a few +words than I in many. Yet whatever you ask me I will try to tell +you."</p> +<p>"I want to speak with Neot," answered the king, "and we will +ride together and seek him when peace is made. I have many things +to say to him and ask him. We will go as soon as it is safe."</p> +<p>So ended my talk with King Alfred at that time, and I was well +content therewith. So also were my men, for it was certain that +every one of them would find some place of command, were it but +over a watch, when Alfred's new sea levies were to be trained.</p> +<p>Many noble Saxons I met in the week before peace was made with +the Danes in Exeter, for all the best were gathered there. Most of +all I liked Ethered, the young ealdorman of Mercia, and Ethelnoth, +the Somerset ealdorman, and Heregar, the king's standard bearer, an +older warrior, who had seen every battle south of Thames since the +long ago day when Eahlstan the bishop taught his flock how to fight +for their land against the heathen.</p> +<p>These were very friendly with me, and I should see more of them +if I were indeed to ward the Wessex coasts, and for that reason +they made the more of me.</p> +<p>Now I saw no more of Osmund the jarl, for Odda knew that the +lesser folk would mistrust me if I had any doings with the Danes. +Maybe I was sorry not to see the Lady Thora; but if I had seen her, +I do not know what I should have said to her, having had no +experience of ladies' ways at any time, which would have made me +seem foolish perhaps.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_VII" id="Chapter_VII">Chapter VII</a>. The +Pixies' Dance.</h2> +<p>I do not know that there is anything more pleasant after long +weeks at sea than to have a good horse under one, and to be riding +in the fresh winds of early autumn over new country that is +beautiful in sunlight. So when at last every Danish chief had made +submission, and the whole host had marched back to what they held +as their own land in Mercia, going to Gloucester, as was said, with +Odda and Ethered the ealdormen hanging on their rear with a great +levy, I rode with King Alfred to find Neot his cousin gaily enough. +Thord stayed with the ships, but the scald and Kolgrim were with +me, and the king mounted us well. Ethelnoth of Somerset came also, +and some forty men of the king's household; and all went armed, for +the country we had to cross was of the wildest, though we went by +the great road that runs from west to east of England, made even +before the Romans came. But it crossed the edge of Dartmoor, the +most desolate place in all the land, where outlaws and masterless +men found fastnesses whence none could drive them.</p> +<p>One could not wish for a more pleasant companion than Alfred, +and the miles went easily. We had both hawks and hounds with us, +for there was game in plenty, and the king said that with the +ending of the war, and the beginning of new hopes for his fleet, he +would cast care aside for a little. So he was joyous and free in +speech, and at times he would sing in lightness of heart, and would +bid Harek sing also, so that it was pleasant to hear them. Ever +does Harek say that no man sings better than Alfred of England.</p> +<p>In late afternoon we came to the wild fringe of Dartmoor, and +here the king had a guest house in a little village which he was +wont to use on these journeys to see Neot. We should rest there, +and so cross the wastes in full daylight. So he went in, maybe +fearing his sickness, which was indeed a sore burden to him, though +he was wont to make light of it; but Ethelnoth asked me if we +should not spend the hours of evening light in coursing a bustard +or two, for many were about the moorland close at hand. They would +be welcome at the king's table, he said; and I, fresh from the sea +and camp, asked for nothing better than a good gallop over the +wide-stretching hillsides.</p> +<p>So we took fresh horses from those that were led for us, and +rode away. We took hawks--the king had given me a good one when we +started, for a Saxon noble ever rides with hawk on wrist--and two +leash of greyhounds.</p> +<p>I was for putting my arms aside, but the ealdorman said it was +better not to do so, by reason of the moor folk, who were wild +enough to fall on a small party at times. It was of little moment, +however; for we rode in the lighter buff jerkins instead of heavy +mail, and were not going far.</p> +<p>Ethelnoth took two men with him, and my two comrades were with +me--Kolgrim leading the hounds in leash beside his horse. We went +across the first hillside, and from its top looked northward and +westward as far as one could see over the strange grey wastes of +the moorland.</p> +<p>Then from the heather almost under our feet rose a great bustard +that ran down wind with outstretched wings before us, seeking the +lonelier country. Kolgrim whooped, and slipped the leash, and the +hounds sprang after it, and we followed cheering. It was good to +feel the rush of hillside air in our faces, and the spring and +stretch of the horses under us, and to see the long-reached hounds +straining after the great bird that might well be able to escape +them.</p> +<p>I suppose that Ethelnoth started a second bird. I did not look +behind me to see what any man was doing, but followed the chase +round the spur of a granite-topped hillside, and forgot him. For +when the bustard took wing for a heavy flight, and lit and ran +again, and again flew with wings that failed each time more and +more, while the strong legs were the stronger for the short rest, +and when the good hounds were straining after it, one could not +expect me to care for aught but that.</p> +<p>It had been strange if I thought of anything but the sport. I +knew there were two horsemen close by, a little wide on either +flank, but behind me. So we took the bird after a good chase, and +then I knew that we had in some way shaken off the Saxons, and that +we three vikings were together. It did not trouble us, for one +looks for such partings, and Ethelnoth had his own bounds. So we +went on, and found another bustard, and took it.</p> +<p>"Now we must go back," I said; "one must have a thought for the +king's horses."</p> +<p>So we turned, and then a heron rose from a boggy stream below +us, and that was a quarry not to be let go. I unhooded the falcon +and cast her off, and straightway forgot everything but the most +wonderful sight that the field and forest can give us--the dizzy +upward climbing circles of hawk and heron, who strive to gain the +highest place cloudwards, one for attack, the other for safety.</p> +<p>The evening sunlight flashed red from the bright under feathers +of the strong wings as the birds swung into it from the shadow of +the westward hill, and still they soared, drifting westward with +the wind over our heads. Then with a great rushing sound the heron +gave up, and fell, stone-like, from the falcon that had won to air +above him at last. At once the long wings of his enemy closed +halfway, and she swooped after him.</p> +<p>Then back and up, like a sword drawn at need, went the heron's +sharp beak; and the falcon saw it, and swerved and shot past her +nearly-taken prey. Again the heron began to tower up and up with a +harsh croak that seemed like a cry of mockery; then the wondrous +swing and sweep of the long, tireless wings of the passage hawk, +and the cry of another heron far off, scared by its fellow's note; +and again for us a canter over the moorland, eye and hand and knee +together wary for both hawk above and good horse below, till the +falcon bound to the heron, and both came to the ground, and there +was an end in the grey shadow of the Dartmoor tors. Ay, but King +Alfred's hawk was a good one!</p> +<p>"Now, where shall we seek Ethelnoth?" I said.</p> +<p>"No good seeking him," said Harek. "We had better make our way +back to the village."</p> +<p>We coupled up the greyhounds again and hooded the falcon, and +rode leisurely back over our tracks for some way. The sun set about +that time into a purple bank of mist beyond the farther hills. One +does not note how the miles go when one finds sport such as this, +and presently we began to be sure that we had ridden farther than +we had thought. We knew, as we thought, the direction from which we +had come, and steered, sailor-wise, by the sunset. But we could +take no straight course because of the hills, and we were as often +off the line as on.</p> +<p>Then crept up the mist from the valleys, and we had nought to +steer by, for the wind dropped. Then I said:</p> +<p>"Let the horses take us home; they know better than we."</p> +<p>So we rode on slowly until darkness came, but never saw so much +as a light that might guide us. And presently we let the dogs +loose, thinking that they would go homewards. But a greyhound is +not like a mastiff, and they hung round us, careless, or helpless, +in the mists and darkness.</p> +<p>Presently we came to a place where the horses stopped of their +own accord. There was a sheer rock on one side, and the hill was +steep below us, and a stream brawled somewhere before us.</p> +<p>"Well," I said, "here we stay for the night. It is of no use +wandering any longer, and the night is warm."</p> +<p>We thought nothing of this, for any hunter knows that such a +chance may befall him in a strange and wild country. So we laughed +together and off-saddled and hobbled the horses, and so sat down +supperless to wait for morning under the rock. The mist was clammy +round us, thinning and then thickening again as the breaths of wind +took it; but the moon would rise soon, and then maybe it would +go.</p> +<p>We had no means of making a fire, and no cloaks; so sleep came +hardly, and we talked long. Then the dogs grew uneasy, and +presently wandered away into the fog and darkness. I thought that +perhaps they heard some game stirring, and did not wonder at +them.</p> +<p>Now I was just sleeping, when I heard the sharp yelp of a dog in +pain, and sat up suddenly. Then came a second, and after that the +distant sound of voices that rose for a moment and hushed +again.</p> +<p>"We must be close to the village after all," I said, for my +comrades were listening also; "but why did the hounds yell like +that?"</p> +<p>"Some old dame has taken the broomstick to them," said Kolgrim. +"They are hungry, and have put their noses into her milk +pails."</p> +<p>"It is too late for open doors," I said; "unless they have found +our own lodging, where some are waiting for us. But there they +would not be beaten."</p> +<p>"Ho!" said Kolgrim, in another minute or so, "yonder is a +fire."</p> +<p>The wind had come round the hillside and swept the mist away for +a moment, and below us in the valley was a speck of red light that +made a wide glow in the denser fog that hung there. One could +hardly say how far off it was, for fog of any sort confuses +distance; but the brook seemed to run in the direction of the fire, +and it was likely that any house stood near its banks.</p> +<p>"Let us follow the brook and see what we can find," I said +therefore. "These mists are chill, and I will confess that I am +hungry. We cannot lose our way if we keep to the water, and the +horses will be safe enough."</p> +<p>Anything was better, as it seemed to us, than trying to think +that we slept comfortably here, and so we rose up and went down the +banks of the stream at once; and the way proved to be easy enough, +if rocky. The bank on this side was higher, and dry therefore, so +that we had no bogs to fear. We knew enough of them in the Orkneys +and on the Sutherland coast.</p> +<p>The white mist grew very thick, but the firelight glow grew +redder as we went on, and at last we came near enough to hear many +voices plainly; but presently, when one shouted, we found that the +tongue was not known to us.</p> +<p>"Now it is plain whom we have come across," I said. "This is a +camp of the Cornish tin traders, of whom the king told us. They are +honest folk enough, and will put us on the great road. They must be +close to it."</p> +<p>That seemed so likely that we left the brook and began to draw +nearer to the fire, the voices growing plainer every moment, though +we could see no man as yet.</p> +<p>Now, all of a sudden, every voice was silent, and we stopped, +thinking we were heard perhaps; though it did seem strange to me +that no dogs were about a camp of traders. I was just about to call +out that we were friends, when there began a low, even beating, as +of a drum of some sort, and then suddenly a wild howl that sounded +like a war cry of maddened men, and after that a measured tramping +of feet that went swiftly and in time to a chant, the like of which +I had never heard before, and which made me grasp Harek by the +arm.</p> +<p>"What, in Odin's name, is this?" r said, whispering.</p> +<p>"Somewhat uncanny," answered the scald. "Let us get back to the +horses and leave this place."</p> +<p>Then we turned back, and Kolgrim's foot lit on a stone that +rolled from under it, and he fell heavily with a clatter of weapons +on the scattered rocks of the stream bank.</p> +<p>There was a howl from the firelight, and the chanting stopped, +and voices cried in the uncouth tongue angrily, and there came a +pattering of unshod feet round us in the thickness, with a word or +two that seemed as if of command, and then silence, but for +stealthy footfalls drawing nearer to us. And I liked it not.</p> +<p>We pulled Kolgrim up, and went on upstream, drawing our swords, +though I yet thought of nothing but tin merchants whom we had +disturbed in some strange play of their own. Doubtless they would +take us for outlaws.</p> +<p>Now through the fog, dark against the flickering glow of the +fire, and only seen against it, came creeping figures; and I +suppose that some dull glitter of steel from helms or sword hilts +betrayed us to them, for word was muttered among them, and the +rattle of stones shifted by bare feet seemed to be all round us. I +thought it time to speak to them.</p> +<p>"We are friends, good people," I said. "We mean no harm, and +have but lost our way."</p> +<p>There was a whistle, and in a moment the leaping shadows were on +us. Kolgrim went down under a heavy blow on his helm, and lay +motionless; and Harek was whirled by a dozen pairs of hands off his +feet, and fell heavily with his foes upon him. I slew one, or +thought I slew him, and I stood over Kolgrim and kept them back +with long sword sweeps, crying to them to hold, for we were +friends--King Alfred's guests.</p> +<p>Now they were yelling to one another, and one threw a +long-noosed line over me from behind. It fell over my arms, and at +once they drew it tight, jerking me off my feet. As I went down, a +howling crowd fell on me and took the good sword from me, and bound +me hand and foot, having overpowered me by sheer numbers.</p> +<p>Then they looked at Kolgrim, and laughed, and left him. I was +sure he was dead then, and I fell into a great dumb rage that +seemed like to choke me.</p> +<p>They dragged the scald and me to the fire, and I saw into what +hands we had fallen, and I will say that I was fairly afraid. For +these were no thrifty Cornish folk, but wild-looking men, black +haired and bearded, clad in skins of wolf, and badger, and deer, +and sheep, with savage-eyed faces, and rough weapons of rusted +iron and bronze and stone. So strange were their looks and terrible +in the red light of the great fire, that I cried to Harek:</p> +<p>"These be trolls, scald! Sing the verses that have power to +scare them."</p> +<p>Now it says much for Harek's courage that at once he lifted up +no trembling voice and sang lustily, roaring verses old as Odin +himself, such as no troll can abide within hearing of, so that +those who bore him fell back amazed, and stared at him. Then I saw +that on the arms and necks of one or two of these weird folk were +golden rings flashing, and I saw, too, that our poor greyhounds lay +dead near where I was, and I feared the more for ourselves.</p> +<p>But they did not melt away or fly before the spells that Harek +hurled at them.</p> +<p>"These be mortal men," he said at last, "else had they fled ere +now."</p> +<p>By this time they had left me, helpless as a log, and were +standing round us in a sort of ring, talking together of slaying +us, as I thought. I mind that the flint-tipped spears seemed cruel +weapons. At last one of them said somewhat that pleased the rest, +for they broke into a great laugh and clapped their hands.</p> +<p>"Here is a word I can understand," said Harek, "and that is +'pixies.'"</p> +<p>But I was looking to see where our swords were, and I saw a man +take them beyond the fire and set them on what seemed a bank, some +yards from it. Then they went to the scald and began to loosen his +bonds, laughing the while.</p> +<p>"Have a care, Harek," I cried. "Make a rush for the swords +beyond the fire so soon as you are free."</p> +<p>"I am likely to be hove into the said fire," said the scald, +very coolly. "Howbeit I see the place where they are."</p> +<p>Then he gave a great bound and shout: but the numbers round him +were too great, and they had him down again, and yet he struggled. +This was sport to these savages, and those who were not wrestling +with him leaped and yelled with delight to see it. And I wrestled +and tore at my bonds; but they were of rawhide, and I could do +nothing.</p> +<p>Then Harek said, breathing heavily:</p> +<p>"No good; their arms are like steel about me."</p> +<p>Then some came and dragged me back a little, and set me up +sitting against a great stone, so I could see all that went on. Now +I counted fifty men, and there were no women that I could see +anywhere. Half of these were making a great ring with joined hands +round the fire, and some piled more fuel on it--turf and branches +of dwarf oak trees--and others sat round, watching the dozen or so +that minded Harek. One sat cross-legged near me, with a great pot +covered tightly with skin held between his knees.</p> +<p>Next they set Harek on his feet, and led him to the ring round +the fire. Two of the men--and they were among the strongest of +all--loosened their hands, and each gripped the scald by the wrist +and yelled aloud, and at once the man beat on the great pot's cover +drum-wise, and the ring of men whirled away round the fire in the +wild dance whose foot beats we had heard as we came. Then those who +sat round raised the chant we heard also.</p> +<p>I saw Harek struggle and try to break away; but at that they +whirled yet more quickly, and he lost his footing, and fell, and +was dragged up; and then he too must dance, or be haled along the +ground. My eyes grew dizzy with watching, while the drum and the +chant dulled into a humming in my brain.</p> +<p>"This cannot go on for long," I thought.</p> +<p>But then, from among those who sat round and chanted, I saw now +one and now another dart to the ring and take the place of a dancer +who seemed to tire; and so at last one came and gripped Harek's +wrist and swung into the place of his first holder before he knew +that any change was coming, and so with the one on the other side +of him.</p> +<p>Then it was plain that my comrade must needs fall worn out +before long, and I knew what I was looking on at. It was the dance +of the pixies, in truth--the dance that ends but with the death of +him who has broken in on their revels--and I would that I and Harek +had been slain rather with Kolgrim by the stream yonder.</p> +<p>At last the scald fell, and then with a great howl they let him +go, flinging him out of the circle like a stone, and he lay in a +heap where they tossed him, and was quite still.</p> +<p>Then the dancers raised a shout, and came and sat down, and some +brought earthen vessels of drink to refresh them, while they began +to turn their eyes to me, whose turn came next.</p> +<p>Whereon a thought came into my mind, and I almost laughed, for a +hope seemed to lie in a simple trick enough. That I would try +presently.</p> +<p>Now I looked, and hoped to see Harek come to himself; but he did +not stir. He lay near the swords, and for the first time now, +because of some thinning of the mist, I saw what was on the bank +where these had been placed. There was a great stone dolmen, as +they call it--a giant house, as it were, made of three flat stones +for walls, and a fourth for a roof, so heavy that none know how +such are raised nowadays. They might have served for a table, or +maybe a stool, for a Jotun. The two side walls came together from +the back, so that the doorway was narrow; and a man might stand and +keep it against a dozen, for it was ten feet high, and there was +room for sword play. One minds all these things when they are of no +use to him, and only the wish that they could be used is left. +Nevertheless, as I say, I had one little hope.</p> +<p>It was not long before the savage folk were ready for my dance, +and they made the ring again, refreshed. The drum was taken up once +more, and a dozen men came and unbound me. I also struggled as +Harek had struggled, unavailingly. When I was quiet they led me to +the circle, and I watched for my plan to work.</p> +<p>When I was within reach of the two who should hold me, I held +out my hands to grasp theirs, without waiting for them to seize me. +The man on my right took my wrist in a grasp like steel; but the +other was tricked, and took my hand naturally enough. Whereat my +heart leaped.</p> +<p>"Now will one know what a grip on the mainsheet is like!" I +thought; and even as the hand closed there came the yell, and the +thud of the earthen drum, and I was whirled away.</p> +<p>Now I kept going, for my great fear was that I should grow dizzy +quickly. I was taller than any man in the ring, and once I found +out the measure of the chant I went on easily, keeping my eyes on +the man ahead of me. That was the one to my right; for they went +against the sun, which is an unlucky thing to do at any time.</p> +<p>Once we went round, and I saw the great dolmen and the gleam of +sword Helmbiter beneath it. Then it was across the fire, and again +I passed it. I could not choose my place, as it seemed, and +suddenly with all my force I gripped the hand I held and around the +hones of it together, so that no answering grip could come. In a +moment the man let go of his fellow with the other hand, and +screamed aloud, and cast himself on the ground, staying the dance, +so that those after him fell over us. I let go, and swung round and +smote my other holder across the face; and he too let go, and I was +free, and in the uproar the dancers knew not what had happened. +Smiting and kicking, I got clear of them, and saw that the dolmen +towered across the fire, and straightway I knew that through the +smoke was the only way. I leaped at it, and cleared it fairly, +felling a man on the other side as I did so.</p> +<p>Then I had Helmbiter in my hand, and I shouted, and stepped back +to the narrow door of the dolmen, and there stood, while the wild +men gathered in a ring and howled at me. One ran and brought the +long line that had noosed me before, but the stone doorway +protected me from that; and one or two hurled spears at me, +clumsily enough for me to ward them off.</p> +<p>So we stood and watched each other, and I thought they would +make a rush on me. Harek lay within sweep of my sword, and his +weapon was nearer them than me, and one of them picked it up and +went to plunge it in him.</p> +<p>Then I stepped out and cut that man down, and the rest huddled +back a little at my onslaught. Whereon I drew my comrade back to my +feet, lest they should bring me out again and noose me.</p> +<p>As I did that, the one who seemed to be the chief leaped at me, +club in air; but I was watching for him, and he too fell, and I +shouted, to scare back the rest.</p> +<p>There was an answering shout, and Kolgrim, with the Berserker +fury on him, was among the wild crowd from out of the darkness, and +his great sword was cutting a way to my side.</p> +<p>Then they did not stay for my sword to be upon them also, but +they fled yelling and terror stricken, seeming to melt into the +mist. In two minutes the firelit circle was quiet and deserted, +save for those who had fallen; and my comrade and I stared in each +other's faces in the firelight.</p> +<p>"Comrade," I cried in gladness, "I thought you were slain."</p> +<p>"The good helm saved me," he answered; "but I came round in +time. What are these whom we have fought?"</p> +<p>I suppose the fury kept him up so far, for now I saw that his +face was ashy pale, and his knees shook under him.</p> +<p>"Are you badly hurt?" I asked.</p> +<p>"My head swims yet--that is all. Where is the scald?"</p> +<p>I turned to him and pointed. Kolgrim sat down beside him and +bent over him, leaning against the stone of the great dolmen.</p> +<p>"I do not think he is dead, master," he said. "Let us draw him +inside this house, and then he will be safe till daylight--unless +the trolls come back and we cannot hold this doorway till the sun +rises."</p> +<p>"They are men, not trolls," I said, pointing to the slain who +lay between us and the fire in a lane where Kolgrim had charged +through them, "else had we not slain them thus."</p> +<p>"One knows not what Sigurd's sword will not bite," he said.</p> +<p>"Why, most of that is your doing," I said, laughing a +little.</p> +<p>But he looked puzzled, and shook his head.</p> +<p>"I mind leaping among them, but not that I slew any."</p> +<p>Now I thought that he would be the better for food. There had +been plenty of both food and drink going among these wild people, +whatever they were, and they had not waited to take anything. So I +said I would walk round the fire and see what I could find, and +went before he could stay me.</p> +<p>I had not far to go either, for there were plentiful remains of +a roasted sheep or two set aside with the skins, and alongside them +a pot of heather ale; so that we had a good meal, sitting in the +door of the dolmen, while the moon rose. But first we tried to make +Harek drink of the strong ale. He was beginning to breathe heavily +now, and I thought he would come round presently. Whether he had +been hurt by the whirling of the dance or by the fall when they +cast him aside, I could not tell, and we could do no more for +him.</p> +<p>"Sleep, master," said Kolgrim, when we had supped well; "I will +watch for a time."</p> +<p>And he would have it so, and I, seeing that he was refreshed, +was glad to lie down and sleep inside the dolmen, bidding him wake +me in two hours and rest in turn.</p> +<p>But he did not. It was daylight when I woke, and the first ray +of the sun came straight into the narrow doorway and woke me. And +it waked Harek also. Kolgrim sat yet in the door with his sword +across his knees.</p> +<p>"Ho, scald!" I said, "you have had a great sleep."</p> +<p>"Ay, and a bad dream also," he answered, "if dream it was."</p> +<p>For now he saw before us the burnt-out fire, and the slain, and +the strangely-trampled circle of the dance.</p> +<p>"No dream, therefore," he said. "Is it true that I was made to +dance round yon fire till I was nigh dead?"</p> +<p>"True enough. I danced also in turn," I said.</p> +<p>And then I told him how things had gone after his fall.</p> +<p>"Kolgrim has fought, therefore, a matter of fifty trolls," I +said; "which is more than most folk can say for themselves."</p> +<p>Whereat he growled from the doorway:</p> +<p>"Maybe I was too much feared to know what I was doing."</p> +<p>We laughed at him, but he would have it so; and then we ate and +drank, and spoke of going to where we had left the horses, being +none so sure that we should find them at all.</p> +<p>Now the sun drank up the mists, and they cleared suddenly; and +when the last wreaths fled up the hillsides and passed, we saw that +the horses yet fed quietly where we had left them, full half a mile +away up the steep rise down which the stream came.</p> +<p>And it was strange to see what manner of place this was in +daylight, for until the mist lifted we could not tell in the least, +and it was confused to us. Now all the hillsides glowed purple with +heather in a great cup round us, and we were on a little rise in +the midst of them whereon stood the dolmen, and the same hands +doubtless that raised it had set up a wide circle of standing +stones round about it, such as I have seen in the Orkneys. It was +not a place where one would choose to spend the night.</p> +<p>There was no sign of the wild folk anywhere outside the stone +circle. They had gone, and there seemed no cover for them anywhere, +unless they dwelt in clefts and caves of the bare tors around us. +So we feared no longer lest there should be any ambush set for us, +and went about to see what they had left.</p> +<p>There were the long line that had noosed me, the earthen drum +with its dry skin head, the raw hide thongs we had been bound with, +and the food and drink; and that was all save what weapons lay +round the slain, and the bodies of the two good greyhounds.</p> +<p>"These are but men, and not trolls as one might well think," I +said, looking on those who lay before us.</p> +<p>One whom I had slain had a heavy gold torque round his neck, and +twisted gold armlets, being the chief, as I think. Kolgrim took +these off and gave them to me, and then he went to the drum and +dashed it on a stone and broke it, saying nothing.</p> +<p>"Let us be going," I said. "These folk will come back and see to +their dead."</p> +<p>But Kolgrim looked at the drumhead and took it, and then coiled +the long line on his arm.</p> +<p>"Trust a sailor for never losing a chance of getting a new bit +of rigging," said Harek, laughing; for he seemed none the worse for +the things of last night, which indeed began to seem ghostly and +dreamlike to us all. "But what good is the bit of skin?"</p> +<p>"Here be strange charms wrought into it," Kolgrim said. "It will +make a sword scabbard that will avail somewhat against such like +folk if ever we meet them again."</p> +<p>Truly there were marks as of branded signs on the bit of skin, +and so he kept it; and I hung the gold trophies in my belt, and +Harek took some of the remains of our supper: and so we went to the +horses, seeing nothing of the wild men anywhere.</p> +<p>Very glad were the good steeds to see us come, and the falcon, +who still sat on the saddle where I had perched her, spread her +wings and ruffled her feathers to hear us. I unhooded and fed her; +and we washed in the stream, and set out gaily enough, making +southward, for so we thought we should strike the great road. And +at last, when we saw its white line far off from a steep hillside, +I was glad enough.</p> +<p>I cannot tell how we had reached our halting place through the +hills in the dark, nor could I find it again directly. It was +midday before we reached the road, riding easily; so that, what +with the swift gallop of the hunting and the long hours of riding +in mist and darkness, we had covered many miles. We saw no house +till we were close to the road, and then lit on one made of stones +and turf hard by it, where an old woman told us that no party had +been by since daylight.</p> +<p>So we turned eastward and rode to meet the king, and did so +before long. He had left men at his village to wait for us in case +we came back there; but he laughed at us for losing ourselves, +though he said he had no fear for sailors adrift in the wilds when +Ethelnoth came in without us.</p> +<p>But when, as we rode on, I told him what had befallen us, he +listened gravely, and at last said:</p> +<p>"I have heard the like of this before. Men say that the pixies +dwell in the moorland, and will dance to death those who disturb +them. What think you of those you have seen?"</p> +<p>I said that, having slain them, one could not doubt that they +were men, if strange ones.</p> +<p>"That is what I think," he answered. "They are men who would be +thought pixies. Maybe they are the pixies. I believe they are the +last of the old Welsh folk who have dwelt in these wilds since the +coming of the Romans or before. There were the like in the great +fens of East Anglia and Mercia when Guthlac the Holy went there, +and he thought them devils. None can reach these men or know where +they dwell. Maybe they are heathen, and their dance in that stone +ring was some unholy rite that you have seen. But you have been +very far into the wastes, and I have never seen those stones."</p> +<p>And when he handled the gold rings, he showed me that they were +very old; but when he handled the drumhead and looked at the marks +thereon, he laughed.</p> +<p>"Here is the magic of an honest franklin's cattle brand. I have +seen it on beasts about the hills before now. The pixies have made +a raid on the farmer's herds at some time."</p> +<p>Now I think that King Alfred was right, and that we had fallen +into the hands of wild Welsh or Cornish moor folk. But one should +hear Kolgrim's tale of the matter as he shows his sword sheath that +he made of the drumhead; for nothing would persuade him that it was +not of more than mortal work.</p> +<p>"Had the good king been in that place with us, he would have +told a different tale altogether," he says.</p> +<p>So we went on our journey quietly, and ever as we went and spoke +with Alfred, I began to be sure that this pale and troubled king +was the most wondrous man that I had ever seen. And now, as I look +back and remember, I know that in many ways he was showing me that +the faith he held shaped his life to that which seemed best in him +to my eyes.</p> +<p>I know this, that had he scoffed at the Asir, I had listened to +Neot not at all. But when we came to his place, I was ready, and +more than ready, to hear what he had to tell me.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_VIII" id="Chapter_VIII">Chapter VIII</a>. The +Black Twelfth-Night.</h2> +<p>When we came to the little out of the way village among the +Cornish hills near which Neot, the king's cousin, had his dwelling, +I thought it strange that any one should be willing to give up the +stirring life at court for such a place as this. Here was only one +fair-sized house in the place, and that was built not long before +by the king for his own use when he came here, which was often. And +Neot's own dwelling was but a little stone-walled and turf-roofed +hut, apart from all others, on the hillside, and he dwelt there +with one companion--another holy man, named Guerir, a Welshman by +birth--content with the simple food that the villagers could give +him, and spending his days in prayer and thought for the king and +people and land that he loved.</p> +<p>But presently, as I came to know more of Neot, it seemed good +that some should live thus in quiet while war and unrest were over +the country, else had all learning and deeper thought passed away. +It is certain from all that I have heard, from the king himself and +from others, that without Neot's steady counsel and gathered wisdom +Alfred had remained haughty and proud, well-nigh hated by his +people, as he had been when first he came to the throne.</p> +<p>At one time he would drive away any who came to him with plaints +or tales of wrong and trouble; but Neot spoke to him in such wise +that he framed his ways differently. And now I used to wonder to +see him stay and listen patiently to some rambling words of +trifling want, told by a wayside thrall, to which it seemed below +his rank to hearken, and next I would know that it was thus he made +his people love him as no other king has been loved maybe. There +was no man who could not win hearing from him now.</p> +<p>It is said of him that when Neot showed him the faults in his +ways, he asked that some sickness, one that might not make him +useless or loathsome to his people, might be sent him to mind him +against his pride, and that so he had at first one manner of pain, +and now this which I had seen. It may be so, for I know well that +so he made it good for him, and he bore it most patiently. +Moreover, I have never heard that it troubled him in the times of +direst need, though the fear of it was with him always.</p> +<p>Now what Alfred and Neot spoke of at this time I cannot say, +except that it was certainly some plan for the good of the land. I +and my comrades hunted and hawked day by day until the evening +came, and then would sup plainly with the king, and then sit at +Neot's door in the warm evening, and talk together till the stars +came out.</p> +<p>Many things we spoke of, and Neot told me what I would. I cannot +write down those talks, though I mind every word of them. But there +was never any talk of the runes I had offered.</p> +<p>Neot spoke mostly, but Alfred put in words now and then that +ever seemed to make things plainer; and I mind how Ethelnoth the +ealdorman sat silent, listening to questions and answers that maybe +he had never needed to put or hear concerning his own faith.</p> +<p>At first I was only asking because the king wished it, then +because I grew curious, and because I thought it well to know what +a Saxon's faith was if I was to bide among Alfred's folk. Kolgrim +listened, saying nought. But presently Harek the scald would ask +more than I, and his questions were very deep, and I thought that +as days went on he grew thoughtful and silent.</p> +<p>Then one evening the song woke within the scald's breast, and he +said to Neot:</p> +<p>"Many and wise words have you spoken, Father Neot. Hear now the +song of Odin--the Havamal--and tell me if you have aught to equal +it."</p> +<p>"Sing, my son," the good man answered. "Wisdom is from above, +and is taught in many ways."</p> +<p>Then Harek sang, and his voice went over the hillsides, echoing +wonderfully; while we who heard him were very still, unwilling to +lose one word or note of the song. Many verses and sayings of the +"Havamal" I knew, but I had not heard it all before. Now it seemed +to me that no more wisdom than is therein could be found <a name= +"EndNote9anc" href="#EndNote9sym" id= +"EndNote9anc"><sup>{ix}</sup></a>.</p> +<p>So when Harek ended Neot smiled on him, and said:</p> +<p>"That is a wondrous song, and I could have listened longer. +There is little therein that one may not be wiser in +remembering."</p> +<p>"There is nought wiser; it is Odin's wisdom," said Harek.</p> +<p>Now the old hermit, Guerir, Neot's friend, sat on the stone +bench beside the king, and he said:</p> +<p>"Hear the words of the bards, the wondrous 'triads' of old +time."</p> +<p>And he chanted them in a strange melody, unlike aught I had ever +heard. And they, the old savings, were wise as the "Havamal" +itself. But he stopped ere long, saying:</p> +<p>"The English words will not frame the meaning rightly. I do no +justice to the wisdom that is hidden."</p> +<p>Then Neot turned to the king, and said:</p> +<p>"Sing to Harek words from the book of Wisdom that we know. I +think you can remember it well."</p> +<p>"I have not rhymed it," the king answered; "but sometimes the +song shapes itself when it is needed."</p> +<p>He took Guerir's little harp and tuned it afresh and sang. And +in the words were more wisdom than in the Havamal or in the song of +the bards, so that I wondered; and Harek was silent, looking out to +the sunset with wide eyes.</p> +<p>Not long did the king sing, as it seemed to us; and when he +ceased, Harek made no sign.</p> +<p>"Sing now, my cousin, words that are wiser than those; even sing +from the songs of David the king."</p> +<p>So said Neot; and Alfred sang again very wondrously, and as with +some strange awe of the words he said. Then to me it seemed that +beside these the words of Odin were as nought. They became as words +of the wisdom of daily life, wrung from the lips of men forced to +learn by hardness and defeat and loss; and then the words that +Alfred had first sung were as those of one who knew more than Odin, +and yet spoke of daily troubles and the wisdom that grows thereout. +But now the things that he sang must needs have come from wisdom +beyond that of men--wisdom beyond thought of mine. And if so it +seemed to me, I know not how the heart of the scald, who was more +thoughtful and knew more than I, was stirred.</p> +<p>He rose up when Alfred ceased, and walked away down the hillside +slowly, as in a dream, not looking at us; and the kindly Saxons +smiled gently, and said nothing to rouse him.</p> +<p>It is in my mind that Harek's eyes were wet, for he had lost +somewhat--his belief in things he held dearest and first of +all--and had as yet found nothing that should take its place. There +is nought harder than that to a man.</p> +<p>When he had passed out of hearing, I said:</p> +<p>"Are there wiser things yet that you may sing?"</p> +<p>"Ay, and that you may learn, my son," answered Neot. +"Listen."</p> +<p>Then he spoke words from Holy Writ that I know now--the words +that speak of where wisdom may be found. And he said thereafter, +and truly, that it was not all.</p> +<p>Then I seemed to fear greatly.</p> +<p>"Not now, my king, not now," I said; "it is enough."</p> +<p>Then those two spoke to me out of their kind hearts. Yet to me +the old gods were very dear, and I clung to them. Neither Neot nor +the king said aught against them, being very wise, at that +time.</p> +<p>Presently Harek came back, and his eyes were shining.</p> +<p>"Tell me more of this learning," he said, casting himself down +on the grass at Alfred's feet. "Scald have I been since I could +sing, and nought have I heard like this."</p> +<p>"Some day," Neot said; "it is enough now that you should know +what you have heard."</p> +<p>So ended that strange song strife on Neot's quiet hillside. The +sun set, and the fleecy mists came up from the little river below, +and we sat silent till Alfred rose and said farewell, and we went +to the guest house in the village.</p> +<p>Now I think that none will wonder that after we had been with +Neot for those ten days, we were ready and willing to take on us +the "prime signing," as they called it, gladly and honestly. So we +were signed with the cross by Neot, and Alfred and Ethelnoth and +Guerir were our witnesses.</p> +<p>I know that many scoff at this, because there are heathen who +take this on them for gain, that they may trade more openly, or +find profit among Christian folk, never meaning or caring to seek +further into the faith that lies open, as it were, before them. But +it was not so with us, nor with many others. We were free to serve +our old gods if we would, but free also to learn the new faith; and +to learn more of it for its own sake seemed good to us.</p> +<p>So we went back to Exeter with the king, and Neot came for a few +miles with us, on foot as was his wont, parting from us with many +good words. And after he was gone the king was cheerful, and spoke +with me about the ordering of the fleet we were to build, as though +he were certain that I should take command of it in the spring.</p> +<p>And, indeed, after that time there was never any question among +us three vikings about it. It seemed to us that if we had lost +Norway as a home, we had gained what would make as good a country; +and, moreover, Alfred won us to him in such wise that it seemed we +could do nought but serve him. There can be few who have such power +over men's hearts as he.</p> +<p>Exeter seemed very quiet when we came back; for the Danes were +gone, and the king's levies had dispersed, and only the court +remained, though that was enough to make all the old city seem very +gay to those who had known it only in the quiet of peace.</p> +<p>One man was there whom I had hardly thought to meet again, and +that was Osmund the Danish jarl. For he was a hostage in the king's +hands, to make more sure that the peace would be kept. I knew there +were hostages to be given by the beaten host; but I had not asked +who they were, and had been at the ships when they were given up, +ten of them in all, and of the best men among the Danes.</p> +<p>Alfred treated his captives very well, giving them good +lodgings, and bating them often at his own table, so that I saw +much of Osmund. And more than that, I saw much of the Lady Thora, +his daughter, who would not leave him. I do not think that there +could be more certain manner of beginning a close friendship +between a warrior and the lady whom he shall learn to hold first in +his heart, than that in which I first met this fair maiden.</p> +<p>Now one will say that straightway I must fall in love with her, +but it was not so: first of all, because I had not time, since +every day Alfred planned new ships with me and Thord; and next, +because I was his guest, and Osmund was his hostage. Maybe I +thought not much of that, however, not having the thoughts of a +Saxon towards a Dane. But I will say this, that among all the fair +ladies of the queen's household there was none of whom I thought at +all; while of what Thora would say I thought often, and it pleased +me that the Lady Etheldreda, Odda's fair eldest daughter, took pity +on the lonely maiden, and made much of her after a time.</p> +<p>Three weeks I was in Exeter, and then the king went eastward +through his country to repair what damage had been done. Then I +took up my work for him, and got out my ship and sailed westward, +putting into every harbour where a ship might be built, and set the +shipwrights to work, having with me royal letters to sheriffs and +port reeves everywhere that they should do what I ordered them. In +each yard I left two or three of my men, that they should oversee +all things; because if one Saxon thinks he knows better than his +fellow, he will not be ruled by him, whereas no man can dispute +what a born viking has to say about ship craft. It seemed that all +were glad of our coming, and the work began very cheerfully.</p> +<p>All this took long, but at last I came up the Severn, and so +into the river Parret--for the weather would serve me no longer and +laid up the ship in a creek there is at Bridgwater, where Heregar, +the king's standard bearer, was sheriff. He made me very welcome at +his great house near by, at Cannington, and then rode with me to +Bristol; and there I set two ships in frame, and so ended all I +could do for the winter. King Alfred would have a fleet when the +spring came.</p> +<p>Then Heregar and I would go to Chippenham, to spend the time of +the Yule feast with King Alfred; and we rode there with Harek and +Kolgrim, and were made most welcome. Many friends whom I had made +at Exeter were there, and among them, quiet and yet hopeful of +release, were the hostages.</p> +<p>That was a wonderful Yule to me; but I will say little of it, +for the tale of the most terrible Twelfth Night that England has +ever known overshadows it all, though there were things that I +learned at that time, sitting in the church with Harek, at the west +end, and listening, that are bright to me. But they are things by +themselves, and apart from all else.</p> +<p>Now peace was on all the land, and the frost and snow were +bright and sharp everywhere; so that men said that it was a hard +winter, and complained of the cold which seemed nothing to us +Northmen. Maybe there was a foot of snow in deep places, and the +ice was six inches thick on the waters; and the Saxons wondered +thereat, saying that they minded the like in such and such years +before. Then I would tell them tales of the cold north to warm +them, but I think they hardly believed me.</p> +<p>The town was full of thanes and their families who had been +called to Alfred's Yule keeping, and it was very bright and +pleasant among them all, though here and there burnt ruins made +gaps between the houses, minding one that the Danes had held the +place not so long since.</p> +<p>So they kept high feasting for Yule and the New Year, and the +last great feast was for Twelfth Night, and all were bidden for +that, and there was much pleasant talk of what revels should be in +the evening.</p> +<p>The day broke very bright and fair, with a keen, windless frost +that made the snow crisp and pleasant to ride over, hindering one +in no way. And there was the sun shining over all in a way that +made the cold seem nought to me, so that I had known nothing more +pleasant than this English winter, having seen as yet nothing of +the wet and cold times that come more often than such as this. +Then, too, the clear ringing of the bells from every village near +and far was new to me, and I thought I had heard nothing sweeter +than the English call to the church for high festival <a name= +"EndNote10anc" href="#EndNote10sym" id= +"EndNote10anc"><sup>{x}</sup></a>.</p> +<p>So I went to the king, and asked him if I might take with me the +Danish jarl for a ride beyond the town; for the hostages were only +free inside the walls, and I knew this would please Osmund and +Thora well. I said that I would see to his safety and be answerable +for him.</p> +<p>"This must be Osmund, I suppose," the king said, smiling. "I +have heard how you came to know him and his fair daughter at +Wareham. It was well done, though maybe I should blame you for +running over-much risk."</p> +<p>"I think I ran little, lord king," I said; "and I could have +done no less for the poor maiden."</p> +<p>"Surely; but I meant that to go at all was over dangerous."</p> +<p>"I am ready to do the same again for you, my king," I said. "And +after all I was in no danger."</p> +<p>Then said the king, smiling gravely at me:</p> +<p>"Greater often are the dangers one sees not than those which one +has to meet. I have my own thoughts of what risk you ran.</p> +<p>"Well, take your fair lady and the jarl also where you will. But +the feast is set for two hours after noon, and all must be +there."</p> +<p>So I thanked him, and he bade me ask his steward for horses if I +would, and I went straight to Osmund from his presence.</p> +<p>"I think it will be a more pleasant ride than our last," said +Thora. "Yet that is one that I shall not forget."</p> +<p>Then I tried to say that I hoped she did not regret it either, +but I minded me of the loved nurse she had to leave, and was silent +in time. Yet I thought that she meant nothing of sorrow in the +remembrance as she spoke.</p> +<p>We called out my two comrades, for Osmund liked them well, and +rode away northward, that the keen air might be behind us as we +returned. That was all the chance that led us that way, and it was +well that we were so led, as things turned out.</p> +<p>The white downs and woodlands sparkling with frost were very +beautiful as we rode, and we went fast and joyously in the fresh +air; but the countryside was almost deserted, for the farmsteads +were burned when the Danes broke in on the land last spring, and +few were built up as yet. The poor folk were in the town now, for +the most part, finding empty houses enough to shelter them, and +none left to whom they belonged.</p> +<p>Now we rode for twelve miles or so, and then won to a hilltop +which we had set as our turning place. I longed to stand there and +look out over all this country, that seemed so fair after the +rugged northern lands I had known all my life. But when we were +there we saw a farmstead just below us, on the far slope of the +gentle hill; and we thought it well to go there and dismount, and +maybe find some food for ourselves and the horses before turning +back.</p> +<p>So we went on. It was but a couple of furlongs distant, and the +buildings lay to the right of the road, up a tree-shaded lane of +their own.</p> +<p>We turned into this, and before we had gone ten yards along it I +halted suddenly. I had seen somewhat that seemed strange, and +unmeet for the lady to set eyes on.</p> +<p>"Bide here, jarl," I said, "and let us go on and see what is +here; the place looks deserted."</p> +<p>And I looked meaningly at him, glancing at Thora.</p> +<p>But he had seen what had caught my eye, and he stayed at once, +turning back into the main road, and beckoning Harek to come with +him and Thora, for some reason of his own.</p> +<p>Then Kolgrim and I went on. What we had seen was a man lying +motionless by the farm gate, in a way that was plain enough to me. +And when we came near, we knew that the man had been slain. He was +a farm thrall, and he had a pitchfork in his hand, the shaft of +which was half cut through, as with a sword stroke that he had +warded from him, though he had not stayed a second cut, for so he +was killed.</p> +<p>"Here is somewhat strangely wrong," I said.</p> +<p>"Outlaws' work," answered Kolgrim; for the wartime had made the +masterless folk very bold everywhere, and the farm was lonely +enough.</p> +<p>We rode through the swinging gate, and then we saw three horses +by the stable yard paling, and with them was an armed man, who saw +us as we came round the house, and whistled shrilly. Whereon two +others came running from the building, and asked in the Danish +tongue what he called for. The first man pointed to us, and all +three mounted at once. They were in mail and helm, fully armed.</p> +<p>Now we were not, for we had thought of no meeting such as this, +and rode in woollen jerkins and the like, and had only our swords +and seaxes, as usual; but for the moment I did not think that we +should need either. Outlaws such as I took them for do not make any +stand unless forced.</p> +<p>Presently one of the men, having mounted leisurely enough, +called to us.</p> +<p>"There is no plunder to be had," he said, "even if you were not +too late; our folk cleared out the place over well last time."</p> +<p>Then a fourth man, one who seemed of some rank, rode from beyond +the house, passing behind us without paying any heed to us, except +that he called to the men to follow him, and so went down the lane +towards where Osmund was waiting with Harek.</p> +<p>All this puzzled me, and so I cried to the three men:</p> +<p>"What do you here? Whose men are you?"</p> +<p>At that they looked at one another--they were not more than ten +yards from us now--and halted.</p> +<p>"You should know that," one said; and then he put his hand to +his sword suddenly, adding in a sharp voice:</p> +<p>"These be Saxons; cut them down."</p> +<p>When hand goes to sword hilt one knows what is coming, and even +as the man said his last words I was on them, and Kolgrim was not a +pace behind me. The Dane's sword was out first; but I was upon him +in time. His horse swerved as mine plunged forward, and I rode him +down, horse and man rolling together in the roadway. Then the man +to my right cut at me, and I parried the blow and returned it. Then +that horse was riderless, and I heard Kolgrim laugh as his man went +down with a clatter and howl.</p> +<p>My horse plunged on for a few steps, and then I turned. Kolgrim +had one horse by the bridle, and was catching that which had +fallen. I caught the other, and so we looked at each other.</p> +<p>"This is your luck, master," said Kolgrim.</p> +<p>"Well," said I, "these are Danes, and I do not think they are +wanderers either. Here are forage bags behind the saddles. One +would say that they were on the march if this were not mid-winter +and time of peace. The horsemen in advance of a host, or the +like."</p> +<p>Then Kolgrim said:</p> +<p>"Where has the other man gone? I had forgotten him for the +moment."</p> +<p>"Bide here and see if any poor farm folk are yet alive," I said. +"I will ride after him."</p> +<p>So I gave the horse I was holding to my comrade, and went back +quickly down the lane to where Osmund and the other two were. The +man I sought was speaking with the jarl, whose face was white and +troubled. Harek was looking red and angry, but on Thora's face was +written what I could not understand--as it were some fear of a new +terror.</p> +<p>Now it was plain that all three were very glad of my coming; but +the stranger looked round for a single glance, and then went on +speaking to Osmund.</p> +<p>"Be not a fool, jarl," he said angrily. "Here is your chance; +let it not slip."</p> +<p>"I tell you that my word shall not be broken," Osmund replied, +very coldly and sternly.</p> +<p>"What say you, girl?" the man said then, turning to Thora. +"Short shrift will be the jarl's when Alfred finds that we are on +him."</p> +<p>But Thora turned away without a word, and then the Dane spoke to +me:</p> +<p>"Here! you are another hostage, I suppose."</p> +<p>"I am not," I answered.</p> +<p>"Well, then, here is Jarl Osmund, if you know him not, and he is +one. Tell him that what I say is true, and that Chippenham town +will be burned out tonight king and all."</p> +<p>I saw that the Dane, seeing that I was armed, and not clad in +the Saxon manner altogether, took me for one of his own people. And +from his words it was plain that some of the Danish chiefs had +broken away from Guthrum, and were making this unheard-of +mid-winter march to surprise Alfred. Most likely they were +newcomers into Mercia, and had nought to do with the Exeter +host.</p> +<p>"Maybe it is true," I answered; "but I am no Dane."</p> +<p>He laughed loudly.</p> +<p>"Why, then, you are one of Alfred's Norsemen! Now I warn you to +get away from Chippenham, for it is unsafe, and there will be no +king to pay you tomorrow. I think that you will say with me that it +were better for Osmund to come with me to meet the host than to go +back to Alfred and be hung before he flies--if he gets news of us +in time to do so."</p> +<p>Herein the man was right, for Alfred had warned the chiefs at +Exeter that he held the hostages in surety for peace on the part of +all and any Danes. But I thought I might learn more, so I said:</p> +<p>"Guthrum thinks little of his friends' lives."</p> +<p>"Guthrum!" the Dane answered sneeringly; "what have we to do +with him and his peace making?"</p> +<p>"What then are you Hubba's men?"</p> +<p>"He is in Wales. Think you that we are all tied to the sons of +Lodbrok?"</p> +<p>"You might have worse leaders," I said.</p> +<p>And just then Kolgrim came along the lane, leading the three +horses, and on them were the armour and weapons of the slain. It +was not my comrade's way to leave for other folk aught that was +worth having.</p> +<p>At once the Dane knew what had happened, and he swung his horse +round and spurred it fiercely, making for flight. Then Harek looked +at me and touched his sword hilt, and I nodded. It was well to let +no tidings of our knowledge go back to the host. After the Dane +therefore went Harek, and I looked at Osmund.</p> +<p>"Jarl," I said, "I am in a strait here. If you go back, your +life is in Alfred's hands."</p> +<p>"I know it," he said, smiling faintly. "It is a hard place maybe +for us both, but there is only one way. You must get back to the +king, and I with you; for you have to answer for me, and my word is +passed not to escape."</p> +<p>Then Thora said:</p> +<p>"The king is just, as all men know. How should he slay you for +what you cannot help?"</p> +<p>"Ay," he answered, smiling at her, "that is right."</p> +<p>So she was satisfied, knowing nought perhaps of what the place +of a hostage is.</p> +<p>So we started back to Chippenham quickly, and after us I heard +Harek coming. He had a led horse when he joined us, and I knew that +none would take word to the Danish host that the king was +warned.</p> +<p>When we came to the hilltop over which we had ridden so blithely +an hour ago or less, we looked back, and at first saw nothing. Then +over the white brow of a rolling down that shone in the level +sunlight came a black speck that grew and lengthened, sliding, as +it were, like a snake down the hillside. And that line sparkled +like ice in the sunlight from end to end; for it was the Danish +host on the march, and in two hours they would be where we stood, +and in two more they who were mounted would be in Chippenham +streets, where Alfred had not enough men even to guard the gates +against such a force as was coming.</p> +<p>Then we rode hard for the lives of all who were in the town, and +as I went I thought also that we rode to the death of the brave, +honest jarl who was beside me, saying nothing, but never letting +his horse falter. Just as bravely rode Thora.</p> +<p>In an hour we were at the gates, and I rode straight to the +king's house, and sought him on urgent business.</p> +<p>Ethered of Mercia came out to me.</p> +<p>"What is it, Ranald?" he said. "The Witan is set now."</p> +<p>I told him in few words, and his face changed.</p> +<p>"It seems impossible in frost and snow," he said.</p> +<p>"Ay; but there are proofs," I said, pointing through the great +doorway.</p> +<p>There was my party, and Kolgrim was binding a wound on Harek's +arm of which I knew nought till that moment, and the led horses and +spoils were plain enough to say all.</p> +<p>Then Ethered made haste and took me to the great hall, where +Alfred sat with some thirty thanes of his Witan <a name= +"EndNote11anc" href="#EndNote11sym" id= +"EndNote11anc"><sup>{xi}</sup></a>, and many clergy. I knew they +were to meet on some business that I had nought to do with. Ethered +went to the king without any ceremony, and speaking low told him my +message. Whereon the king's face grew white and then red, and he +flashed out into terrible wrath:</p> +<p>"Forsworn and treacherous!" he cried, in a thick voice that +shook with passion. "The hostages--chain them and bring them here. +Their friends shall find somewhat waiting them here that shall make +them wish they had kept their oaths!"</p> +<p>Then he said to me:</p> +<p>"Speak out, Ranald, and tell these thanes your news."</p> +<p>I spoke plainly, and they listened with whitening faces and +muttered oaths. And when I ceased, one cried, hardly knowing what +he said, as I think:</p> +<p>"This outlander rode with Osmund the Dane to bring them on us +even now."</p> +<p>"Silence!" Alfred said; and then in a cold voice he asked +me:</p> +<p>"Where is this Osmund? I suppose he has fled to his people."</p> +<p>"That he has not, though he could have done so," I answered. +"Moreover, the Dane I spoke with said in so many words that this is +no host of Guthrum's."</p> +<p>At that Alfred frowned fiercely.</p> +<p>"Whose then? What good is a king if he cannot make his people +keep their oaths?"</p> +<p>There was a stir at the door, and the eyes of all turned that +way. And when the thanes saw that the hostages were being led in, +with Osmund at their head, a great sullen growl of wrath broke from +them, and I thought all hope was gone for the lives of those +captives.</p> +<p>"Hear you this?" the king said, in a terrible voice, when the +noise ceased. "By the deed of your own people your lives are +forfeit. They have broken the peace, and even now are marching on +us. Your leader, Osmund himself, has seen them."</p> +<p>"It is true," Osmund said. "We are in the king's hands."</p> +<p>Then Alfred turned to the Witan, who were in disorder, and in +haste, as one might see, to be gone to their houses and fly.</p> +<p>"You heard the Danish oath taken at Exeter; what is your word on +this?"</p> +<p>They answered in one voice:</p> +<p>"Slay them. What else?"</p> +<p>"You hear," said the king to the Danes. "Is not the sentence +just?"</p> +<p>"It is what one might look for," Osmund answered, "but I will +say this, that this is some new band of Danes, with whom we have +nought to do."</p> +<p>"What!" said Alfred coldly; "will you tell me that any Dane in +the country did not know that I held hostages for the peace? Go +to.</p> +<p>"See to this matter, sheriff."</p> +<p>Then the sheriff of Chippenham came forward, and it seemed to me +that it was of no use for me to say aught; yet I would try what I +could do, so I spoke loudly, for a talk had risen among the +thanes.</p> +<p>"What is this, lord king? Will you slay Osmund the jarl, who has +kept his troth, even to coming back to what he knew would be his +death? You cannot slay such a man for the oath breaking of +others."</p> +<p>Then the king looked long at me, and the sheriff stayed, and at +first I expected passionate words; but the king's rage was cold and +dreadful now.</p> +<p>"His friends slay him--not I," he answered.</p> +<p>Then of a sudden I minded somewhat, and clear before me stood a +test by which I might know certainly if it were good that I should +leave the Asir and follow the way of the white Christ.</p> +<p>"King Alfred," I said, "I have heard the bishop tell, in the +great church here, of a king who slew the guiltless at +Christmastide. There was nought too hard for any to say of that +man. Moreover, I have heard strange and sweet words of peace at +this time, of forgiveness of enemies and of letting go of +vengeance. Are these things nought, or are they indeed those by +which you guide yourselves, as Neot says?"</p> +<p>He was silent, gazing fixedly on me; and all the Witan were +speechless, listening.</p> +<p>"These men are enemies maybe, but they at least have done +nought. Shall you avenge yourself on them for the wrongdoing of +others?"</p> +<p>Then the king's face changed, and he looked past me, and in his +eyes grew and shone a wondrous light, and slowly he lifted up his +hand, and cried, in a great voice that seemed full of joy:</p> +<p>"Hear this, O ye Danes and foes of the Cross. For the love of +Christ, and in His name, I bid you go in peace!"</p> +<p>And then, as they stared at him in wonder and awe at his look +and words, Alfred said to me:</p> +<p>"Unbind them, my brother, and let them go--nay, see them safely +to some strong house; for the poor folk may slay them in their +blind anger, even as would I have done."</p> +<p>Then no man hindered me--for it seemed as if a great fear, as of +the might of the holy name, had fallen on all--and I went and cut +the bonds of the captives. And as I did so, Osmund said in a low +voice to me:</p> +<p>"First daughter and then father. We owe our lives to you."</p> +<p>"Nay," I answered, "but to the Christians' faith."</p> +<p>Then I hurried them out before news of what was on hand could +get among the townsfolk, and we went quickly to my lodgings; for +that was a strong house enough, and could be barred in such wise +that even if any tried to attack the place in the flight that would +begin directly, it would take too long to break the doors down to +be safe with the host at hand.</p> +<p>Then came Heregar, armed and mounted, with a single man behind +him, and he called for me.</p> +<p>"Ride out with me, King Ranald, for we must count these Danes, +and see that we are not overrating their number. After that we will +join the king, who goes to Glastonbury."</p> +<p>So I bade farewell to Osmund and to Thora, who said nought, but +looked very wistfully, as if she would say words of thanks but +could not; and at that I went quickly, for it seemed hard to leave +her, in some way that was not clear to me, amid all the turmoil of +the place.</p> +<p>But when we were on the road, Heregar said to me:</p> +<p>"It is in my mind that Osmund, your friend, will fare ill among +these Danes. They will hear how he rode back, and will hold that by +his means the king escaped."</p> +<p>"What can be done?"</p> +<p>"The man is one of a thousand, as it seems to me. Let us bid him +leave the town and get back to Guthrum as he can."</p> +<p>"He can have the Danish horses," I said.</p> +<p>Now before sunset we had seen the Danish force, and our hearts +sank. There were full ten thousand men, many of whom were +mounted.</p> +<p>Then we rode back, and found the town in such tumult as it is +not good to think on. There is nothing more terrible to see than +such a flight, and in midwinter.</p> +<p>When we came to my lodging, Heregar went in to find Osmund. I +would not see him again, lest Thora should weep. But in a few +minutes he came out with the jarl.</p> +<p>"Here is a wise man," said Heregar. "He says that he swore to +keep the peace with Alfred, and he will do it. He and the Lady +Thora will go with us. There are one or two also of the other +hostages who blame him for returning. He cannot stay among the +Danes here."</p> +<p>Then I was very glad, and we made haste to have all ready for +Thora's comfort on the ride that might be so long. And so we rode +out after the king along the road to Glastonbury, and I think that +the Danes were in the town half an hour after we left it.</p> +<p>Next we knew that Danes were on the road before us, and that +more were hard after us. Some had skirted the town in order to cut +off the king, and were pursuing him. So we struck off the road into +by-lanes that Heregar knew, resting at lonely houses as we went on. +And when we came to Glastonbury at last, the king was not there, +nor did any know of his fate.</p> +<p>Then we rode, with the Danes swarming everywhere, through the +Sedgemoor wastes to Bridgwater, and found rest at Cannington, +Heregar's great house not far off.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_IX" id="Chapter_IX">Chapter IX</a>. The Sign +of St. Cuthberht.</h2> +<p>I suppose that in our flight from Glastonbury to Bridgwater we +passed through more dangers than we knew of; for Danes were hard +after us, riding even into sight from the town that evening, and +next day coming even to the eastern end of the old bridge, and +bandying words with the townsfolk who guarded it. Across it they +dared not come, for there is a strong earthwork on the little rise +from the river, which guards both bridge and town, and in it were +my Norsemen with the townsfolk.</p> +<p>So we were in safety for a time; and it seemed likely that we +might be so for long if but a few men could be gathered, for here +was a stretch of country that was, as it were, a natural fastness. +Three hundred years ago the defeated Welsh had turned to bay here +while Kenwalch of Wessex and his men could not follow them; and now +it seemed likely that here in turn would Wessex stand her +ground.</p> +<p>It is a great square-sided patch of rolling, forest-covered +country, maybe twelve miles long from north to south, and half as +much across. None can enter it from the north, because there is the +sea, and a wild coast that is not safe for a landing; on the west +the great, steep, fort-crested Quantock Hills keep the border; on +the eastern side is the river Parret, and on the north the Tone, +which joins it. Except at Bridgwater, at the eastern inland corner, +and Taunton, at the western--one at the head of the tidal waters of +the Parret, and the other guarding the place where the Quantocks +end--there is no crossing the great and wide-stretching fens of +Sedgemoor and Stanmoor and the rest that lie on either bank of the +rivers. Paths there are that the fenmen know, winding through mere +and peat bog and swamp, but no host can win through them; and +perhaps those marches are safer borders than even the sea.</p> +<p>If one came from the sea, one must land at Watchet, and then win +a path across the Quantocks, and there is the ancient camp of +Dowsborough to block the way; or else put into the Parret, and +there, at the first landing place, where they say that Joseph of +Arimathaea landed, bearing the holy thorn staff in his hand, is the +strong hill fort of Combwich, old as the days of that Joseph, or +maybe older.</p> +<p>So with walled towns and hill forts the corners of Heregar's +land were kept; and with sea and marsh and hill the sides were +strong, and we thought to find Alfred the king here before us. But +he was not; and next day we rode on to Taunton to seek him there, +for that was the strongest fortress in that part of the west. And +again he was not to be heard of. Then fear for his life began to +creep into our minds, and we came back to Cannington sorely +downcast.</p> +<p>Then Heregar spoke to me very kindly of what he thought I could +best do, and it was nothing more or less than that I should leave +this land, which seemed to have no hope of honour for me now.</p> +<p>"Go rather to Rolf, your countryman," he said. "There is great +talk of his doings in Neustria <a class="EndNoteanc" name= +"EndNote12anc" href="#EndNote12sym" id= +"EndNote12anc"><sup>{xii}</sup></a> beyond the Channel. It is your +kindness only that holds you here, King Ranald, and there wait +glory and wealth for you and your men."</p> +<p>So he urged me for a little while, not giving me time to answer +him as I would; but when I said nothing he stayed his words, and +then I spoke plainly, and it was good to see his face light up as I +did so.</p> +<p>"It shall not be said of me that I left King Alfred, who has +been my good friend, in time of trouble; rather will I stay here +and do what I can to help him out of it. Why, there are ships that +I have put in frame for him in the western ports that the Danes +will not reach yet, if at all. When spring comes we will man them +and make a landing somewhere, and so divide the Danish host at +least."</p> +<p>"Now I will say no more," answered the thane, putting his hand +on mine. "Speak thus to the king when we find him, and it will do +him good, for I think that when he left Chippenham he was well-nigh +despairing."</p> +<p>"It is hard to think that of Alfred," I said.</p> +<p>"Ay; but I saw his face as he rode away just before I sought +you. Never saw I such a look on a man's face before, and I pray +that I may not see it again. It was terrible to look on him, for I +think he had lost all hope."</p> +<p>"For the time, maybe," I said; "but I cannot believe that when +the first weight of the blow passed he was not himself again."</p> +<p>Presently there came a shift of wind and a quick thaw with +driving rain, and floods grew and spread rapidly in the low-lying +lands. One good thing can be said of this weather, and that was +that because of it the Danes burned neither town nor farmstead, +needing all the shelter they could find.</p> +<p>Three days that gale lasted, and then the wind flew round again +to the north, with return of the frost in even greater strength +than before; and the weather-wise fishers and shepherds said that +this betokened long continuance thereof, and so it seemed likely to +be.</p> +<p>But through it all we heard no tidings of the king; and in one +way that was good, for had he been taken by the Danes, they would +have let all men know thereof soon enough. But we feared that he +might have been slain by some party who knew not who he was, and +that fear hung heavily over us all.</p> +<p>Next we had a messenger from Odda, who was at Exeter, asking for +sure word of what had befallen; and the one hope we had yet was +gone, for he too knew nothing.</p> +<p>Very sad and silent was Osmund the jarl, though he and Thora +were most kindly received as honoured guests by the Lady Alswythe +and the household of the thane.</p> +<p>Once I asked him what his plans were, for we were both +strangers, and I knew him best.</p> +<p>"Presently," he said, "I shall try to get back to Guthrum. While +I am here I will be held as if I were no one--as a harmless ghost +who walks the house, neither seeing nor hearing aught. If there +were Welsh to be fought, I would fight beside you all, gladly, for +Alfred; but as the war is against my own folk, I can do nothing. I +will neither fight for them nor fight against them; for King Alfred +and you, my friend, gave me life, and it is yours. I think that +some day I may be of use to Alfred in helping to bring about a +lasting peace."</p> +<p>"If we find him," I said.</p> +<p>"Ay, you will find him. He is hiding now for some wise reason +that we shall know. I think it is not known how his plans are +feared by our folk. I am sure that of this midwinter march the +Danes will say that it is worthy of Alfred himself."</p> +<p>Nevertheless we heard nothing of him, though the thane had men +out everywhere trying to gain news. All that they heard was the +same tale of dismay from whoever they might meet, and I think that +but for a chance we should not have found him until he chose to +come forth from his refuge.</p> +<p>Heregar the thane had a strange serving man, the same who had +ridden with him and me to meet the Danish forces; and this man was +a fenman from Sedgemoor, who knew all the paths through the wastes. +Lean and loose-limbed he was, and somewhat wild looking, mostly +silent; but where his lord went he went also. They said that he had +saved the thane's life more than once in the great battles about +Reading, when the Danish host first came.</p> +<p>This man was out daily, seeking news with the rest; and one day, +just a week after we had come to Cannington, when the frost had +bound everything fast again, he came home and sought his +master.</p> +<p>Heregar and I and Osmund sat together silently before the fire, +and he looked from one to the other of us outlanders.</p> +<p>"Speak out, Dudda," said Heregar, who knew his ways; "here are +none but friends."</p> +<p>"Ay, friends of ours sure enough; but are they the king's?"</p> +<p>"Most truly so. Have you news of him?"</p> +<p>"I have not; but I have heard some fenmen talking."</p> +<p>Then Osmund rose up and went his way silently, as was his wont; +and Dudda grinned at us.</p> +<p>"He is a good Dane," he said; "now I can speak. They say there +is some great lord hiding in the fens beyond the round hill where +Tone and Parret join, that we call the Stane--somewhere by Long +Hill, they say. Now I mind that one day when the king rode with you +across the Petherton heights, he looked out over all the fens, and +called me and asked much of them. And when I told him what he +would, he said, 'Here is a place where a man might lie hid from all +the world if he chose.' So he laughed, and we rode on."</p> +<p>"I mind it," said Heregar; "but it was many years ago."</p> +<p>"I think he may be there, for our king weighs his words, and +does not forget. I held his horse at your door in Chippenham the +other day, and he spoke to me by name, and put me in mind of little +things for which he had laughed at me in those same old days. He is +a good king."</p> +<p>So said Dudda, the rough housecarl; and it is in my mind that +the kindly remembrance would have wiped out many a thought of +wrong, had there been any. That is a kingly gift to remember all, +and no king has ever been great who has not had it; for it binds +every man to his prince when he knows that aught he has done is not +forgotten, so it be good to recall.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that next day, very early, we rode away, +taking Harek and Kolgrim and this man Dudda with us, well armed and +mounted and full of hope, across the southward ridge that looks +down over the fens of the meeting of Tone and Parret, where they +are widest and wildest. No Danes had crossed them yet, and when I +saw what they were like I thought that they never could do so.</p> +<p>And as I looked at the long chains of ice-bound meres and pools +that ran among dense thickets of alder and wide snow-covered +stretches of peat bogs, it seemed that we might search in vain for +one who would hide among them. Only the strange round hill on +Stanmoor seemed to be a point that might be noted on all the level, +though Dudda told us that there were many islets hidden in the +wooded parts.</p> +<p>We went to the lower hills and then to the very edge of the +fenland, skirting along it, and asking here and there of the +cottagers if they knew of any folk in hiding in the islets. But +though we heard of poor people in one or two places, none of them +knew of any thane; and the day wore on, and hope began to grow dim, +save for Dudda's certainty that what he had heard was true.</p> +<p>At last we came to a long spur of high ground that runs out into +the fen, about midway between Bridgwater and Taunton; and there is +the village they call Lyng, where we most hoped to hear good news. +The day was drawing to sunset, and we would hasten; so Heregar went +one way and I another, each to distant cottages that we saw. The +lane down which I and my two comrades rode seemed to lead fenwards, +and it was little more than a track, deep in snow and tree +bordered. The cottage we sought was a quarter mile away when we +left the thane, and as we drew near it we saw an old woman walking +away from it, and from us also. She did not seem to hear us when we +called to her; and, indeed, such was the fear of Danes that often +folk would fly when they saw us, and the faster because we called, +not waiting to find out who we were.</p> +<p>Then from out of the cottage came another old woman, who hobbled +into the track and looked after the first, shaking her fist after +her, and then following her slowly, looking on the ground. She +never glanced our way at all, and our horses made no noise to speak +of in the snow.</p> +<p>We drew up to her, and then I saw that she had a hammer in her +right hand and a broad-headed nail in her left. I wondered idly +what she was about with these things, when she stooped and began to +hammer the nail into the iron-hard ground, and I could hear her +muttering some words quickly.</p> +<p>I reined up to watch her, puzzled, and said to Harek:</p> +<p>"Here is wizardry; or else what is the old dame about?"</p> +<p>"It is somewhat new to me," the scald said, looking on with much +interest; for if he could learn a new spell or charm, he was +pleased as if he had found a treasure.</p> +<p>Then I saw that she was driving the nail into a footprint. There +were three tracks only along the snow--two going away from the +cottage and one returning. That which went and returned was made by +this old woman, as one might see from her last steps, which made a +fourth track from the door.</p> +<p>"She is hammering the nail into her own footprint," I said, +noting this.</p> +<p>Now she sang in a cracked voice, hammering savagely the while; +and now and then she shook her fist or hammer, or both, towards +where the other old dame had gone out of sight round a bend of the +lane.</p> +<p>Then she put her hand to her back and straightened herself with +a sort of groan, as old dames will, and slowly turned round and saw +us.</p> +<p>Whereat she screamed, and hurled the hammer at Kolgrim, who was +laughing at her, cursing us valiantly for Danes and thieves, and +nearly hitting him.</p> +<p>"Peace, good mother," I said; "we are not Danes. Here is earnest +thereof," and I threw her a sceatta from my pouch.</p> +<p>She clutched it from the ice pool where it fell, and stared at +us, muttering yet. Then Harek spoke to her.</p> +<p>"Mother, I have much skill in spells, but I know not what is +wrought with hammer and nail and footprint. I would fain +learn."</p> +<p>"Little know you of spells if you know not that," she said, +having lost all fear of us, as it seemed.</p> +<p>"I am only a northerner," Harek said. "Maybe 'tis a spell +against a sprained ankle, which seems likely. I only know one for +that."</p> +<p>"Which know you?" she said scornfully; "you are over young to +meddle with such like."</p> +<p>"This," said Harek. "It works well if the sprain be bathed with +spring-cold water, while one says it twice daily:</p> +<pre class="verse"> +"'Baldur and Woden +Went to the woodland; +There Baldur's foal fell, +Wrenching its foot.' +</pre> +<p>"That is how it begins."</p> +<p>Then the old woman's eyes sparkled.</p> +<p>"Ay; that is good. Learn it me, I pray you. Now I know that you +have wizardry, for you name the old gods."</p> +<p>"Tell me first what hammer and nail work in footprint."</p> +<p>"Why, yon old hag has overlooked me," she said savagely. "Now, +if one does as I have done, one nails her witchcraft to herself +<a name="EndNote13anc" href="#EndNote13sym" id= +"EndNote13anc"><sup>{xiii}</sup></a>."</p> +<p>"Whose footprint does the nail go into?" Harek asked.</p> +<p>"Why, hers surely. Now this is the spell," and she chanted +somewhat in broad Wessex, and save that Baldur's name and Thor's +hammer also came into it, I do not know what it all was. I waxed +impatient now, for I thought that Heregar might be waiting for +us.</p> +<p>But she and Harek exchanged spells, and then I said:</p> +<p>"Now, dame, know you of any thane in hiding hereabouts?"</p> +<p>Thereat she looked sharply at me.</p> +<p>"I know nothing. Here be I, lamed, in the cottage all day."</p> +<p>"There is a close friend of mine in hiding from the Danes +somewhere here," I said, doubting, from her manner, if she spoke +the truth. "I would take him to a safer place."</p> +<p>"None safer," she answered. "What is his name?"</p> +<p>Then I doubted for a moment; but Harek's quick wit helped +me.</p> +<p>"Godred," he said; for the name by which the king had called +himself once it was likely that he would use again.</p> +<p>"I know of no thanes," she said, though not at once, so that I +was sure she knew somewhat more than she thought safe to tell.</p> +<p>Then she was going, but Harek stayed her.</p> +<p>"Yours is a good spell against the evil eye, mother," he said, +"but I can tell you a better."</p> +<p>"What is it?" she said eagerly.</p> +<p>"News for news," he answered carelessly. "Tell us if you know +aught of this thane, and I will tell you."</p> +<p>"I said not that there was a thane." she said at once.</p> +<p>"Nay, mother; but you denied it not. Come now; I think what I +can tell you will save you trouble."</p> +<p>She thought for a little, weighing somewhat in her mind, as it +seemed, and then she chose to add to her store of witchcraft.</p> +<p>"Yonder, then," she said, nodding to the dense alder thickets +that hid the river Tone from us, across a stretch of frozen mere or +flooded land. "I wot well that he who bides in Denewulf's cottage +is a thane, for he wears a gold ring, and wipes his hands in the +middle of the towel, and sits all day studying and troubling in his +mind in such wise that he is no good to any one--not even turning a +loaf that burns on the hearth before his eyes. Ay, they call him +Godred."</p> +<p>Then my heart leaped up with gladness, and I turned to seek +Heregar; but he was coming, and so I waited. Then the dame +clamoured for her reward, which Harek had as nearly forgotten as +had I.</p> +<p>"Mother," the scald said gravely, "when I work a spell with +hammer and nail, the footprint into which the nail is driven is of +her who cast the evil eye on me."</p> +<p>"Why, so it should be."</p> +<p>"Nay, but you drive it into your own," he said.</p> +<p>She looked, and then looked again. Then she stamped a new print +alongside the nailed one, and it was true. She had paid no heed to +the matter in her fury, and when she knew that she turned pale.</p> +<p>"Man," she cried, "help me out of this. I fear that I have even +nailed the evil overlooking fast to myself."</p> +<p>"Ay, so you have," said Harek; "but it is you who know little of +spells if you cannot tell what to do. Draw the nail out while +saying the spell backwards, and then put it into the right place +carefully. Then you will surely draw away also any ill that she has +already sent you, and fasten it to her."</p> +<p>"Then I think she will shrivel up," said the old witch, with +much content. "You are a great wizard, lord; and I thank you."</p> +<p>"Here is a true saying of a friend of mine," said Heregar, +coming up in time to hear this. "But what has come to you, king? +have you heard aught?"</p> +<p>Now when the old woman heard the thane name the king, before I +could answer she cried out and came and clung to my stirrup, taking +my hand and kissing it, and weeping over it till I was ashamed.</p> +<p>"What is this?" I said.</p> +<p>"O my lord the king!" she cried. "I thought that yon sad-faced +man in Denewulf's house was our king maybe, so wondrous proud are +his ways, and so strange things they hear him speak when he sleeps. +But now I am glad, for I have seen the king and kissed his hand, +and, lo, the sight of him is good. Ay, but glad will all the +countryside be to know that you live."</p> +<p>Then I knew not what to say; but Heregar beckoned to me, +saying:</p> +<p>"Come, leave her her joy; it were cruel to spoil it, and maybe +she will never know her mistake."</p> +<p>So we rode on, and Heregar called Dudda, asking him if he knew +Denewulf's cottage; while in the track stood the witch, blessing +her king as eagerly as she had cursed her gossip just now.</p> +<p>"I know not the path, though I have heard of the cottage," Dudda +said; "but it will be strange if I cannot find a way to the +place."</p> +<p>He took us carefully into the fen for some way until we passed +through a thicket and came to the edge of a mere, and there were +five men who bore fishing nets and eel spears, which had not been +used, as one might suppose, seeing that the ice was nigh a foot +thick after the thaw and heavy frost again.</p> +<p>And those two men who came first were Ethelnoth, the Somerset +ealdorman, and young Ethered of Mercia. It was strange to see those +nobles bearing such burdens; but we knew that we had found the +king.</p> +<p>They saw us, and halted; but Heregar waved his hand, and they +came on, for they knew him. It would be hard to say which party was +the more pleased to meet the other.</p> +<p>"Where is the king?" we asked.</p> +<p>"Come with us, and we will take you to him," Ethered said. "But +supperless you must be tonight. We have nought in the house, and +nothing can we catch."</p> +<p>Then I was surprised, and said:</p> +<p>"Is it so bad as that here? In our land, when the ice is at its +thickest we can take as much fish as we will easily."</p> +<p>"Save us from starvation, Ranald," said Ethered, laughing +ruefully, "and we will raise a big stone heap here in your +honour."</p> +<p>"Kolgrim will show you," I said; "let me go to the king."</p> +<p>"I am a great ice fisherman," said Harek; "let me go also."</p> +<p>Then Heregar laughed in lightness of heart.</p> +<p>"Ay, wizard, go also. There will be charms of some sort needed +before Ethered sees so much as a scale."</p> +<p>Whereon they dismounted, and Kolgrim took his axe from his +saddle bow, asking where the river was, while he wondered that such +a simple matter as breaking a hole in the ice and dropping a line +among the hungry fish, who would swarm to the air, had not been +thought of. We had not yet learned that such a winter as this comes +but seldom to the west of England, and the thanes knew nothing of +our northern ways.</p> +<p>Then Ethelnoth led Heregar and me across twisting and almost +unseen paths, safer now because of the frost, though one knew that +in some places a step to right or left would plunge him through the +crust of hard snow into a bottomless peat bog. The alder thickets +grew everywhere round dark, ice-bound pools of peat-stained water, +and we could nowhere see more than a few yards before us; and it +was hard to say how far we had gone from the upland edge of the +swamp when the ground began to rise from the fen, and grew harder +among better timber. But for the great frost, one would have needed +a boat in many places.</p> +<p>Then we came to a clearing, in which stood a house that was +hardly more than a cottage, and round it were huts and cattle +sheds. And this was where the king was--the house of Denewulf the +herdsman, the king's own thrall. There was a rough-wattled stockade +round the place, and quick-set fences within which to pen the +cattle and swine outside that, and all around were the thickets. +None could have known that such an island was here, for not even +the house overtopped the low trees; and though all the higher +ground was cleared, there were barely two acres above the watery +level--a long, narrow patch of land that lay southeast and +northwest, with its southerly end close to the banks of the river +Tone. Men call the place Athelney now, since the king and his +nobles lay there. It had no name until he came, but I think that it +will bear ever hereafter that which it earned thus.</p> +<p>Two shaggy grey sheepdogs came out to meet us, changing their +angry bark for welcome when they saw Ethelnoth; and a man came to +the door to see what roused them, and he had a hunting spear in his +hand. I took him for some thane, as he spoke to us in courtly wise; +but he was only Denewulf the herdsman himself.</p> +<p>"How fares the king?" asked Ethelnoth.</p> +<p>"His dark hour came on him after you went," Denewulf answered; +"and then the pain passed, and he slept well, and now has just +wakened wonderfully cheerful. I have not seen him so bright since +he came here; and he is looking eagerly for your return, seeming to +expect some news."</p> +<p>"It may be that our coming has been foretold him beforehand," +said Heregar. "Our king has warnings given him in his dreams at +times."</p> +<p>Then from out of the house Alfred's voice hailed us:</p> +<p>"Surely that is the voice of my standard bearer.</p> +<p>"Come in quickly, Heregar, for all men know that hope comes with +you."</p> +<p>We went in; and it was a poor place enough for a king's lodging, +though it was warm and neat. Alfred sat over the fire in the middle +of the larger room of the two which the house had, and a strew of +chips and shreds of feathers and the like was round him; for he was +arrow making--an art in which he was skilful, and he had all the +care and patience which it needs. When we came in he rose up, +shaking the litter from his dress into the fire; and we bent our +knees to him and kissed his hand.</p> +<p>"O my king," said Heregar, "why have you thus hidden +yourself from us? All the land is mourning for you."</p> +<p>Then Alfred looked sadly at him and wistfully, answering:</p> +<p>"First, because I must hide; lastly, because I would be hidden: +but between these two reasons is one of which I repent--because I +despaired."</p> +<p>"Nay," said Denewulf, "it was not despair; it was grief and +anxiousness and thought and waiting for hope. Never have you spoken +of despair, my king."</p> +<p>"But I have felt it," he answered, "and I was wrong. Hope should +not leave a man while he has life, and friends like these, and +counsellors like yourself. Now have I been rebuked, and hope is +given me afresh."</p> +<p>Then he smiled and turned to me.</p> +<p>"Why, Ranald my cousin, this is kindness indeed. I had not +thought that you would bide with a lost cause, nor should I have +thought of blame for you had you gone from this poor England; you +are not bound to her as are her sons."</p> +<p>"My king," I said truly, "there are things that bind more +closely even than birth."</p> +<p>I think he was pleased, for he smiled, and shook his head at me +as though to say that he could not take my saying to himself, as I +meant it. And then, before we could ask him more, he began to think +of our needs.</p> +<p>"Here we have been pressed for food, friends, for the last few +days, and I fear you must fast with us. The deer have fled from our +daily hunting, and the wild fowl have sought open water. Unless our +fishers have luck, which seems unlikely, we must do as well as we +can on oaten bread."</p> +<p>Then Ethelnoth said:</p> +<p>"There have been no fish caught today, my king."</p> +<p>"Why, then, we will wait till the others return; and meanwhile I +will hear all the news, for Ranald and Heregar will have much to +tell me."</p> +<p>So we told him all that we knew, and he asked many questions, +until darkness fell.</p> +<p>"Why are you here, lord king?" asked Heregar; "my hall is +safe."</p> +<p>"Your hall and countryside are safe yet because I am not there," +Alfred answered, fixing his bright eyes on the thane. "The Danes +are hunting for me, and were I in any known place, thither would +they come. Therefore I said that now I choose to bide hidden. +Moreover, in this quiet and loneliness there comes to me a plan +that I think will work out well; for this afternoon, as I slept, I +was bidden to look for a sign that out of hopelessness should come +help and victory."</p> +<p>Just then the dogs rose up and whined at the door, as if friends +came; and there were cheerful voices outside. The door opened, and +in stumbled Ethered, bearing a heavy basket of great fish, which he +cast on the floor--lean green and golden pike, and red-finned +roach, in a glittering, flapping heap.</p> +<p>"Here is supper!" he cried joyfully, "and more than supper, for +each of us is thus laden. Fish enough for an army could we have +taken had we not held our hands. I could not have thought it +possible."</p> +<p>Whereat Alfred rose up and stared, crossing himself.</p> +<p>"<i>Deo gratias</i>," he said under his breath, and then said +aloud, "Lo, this is the sign of which I spoke even now--that my +fishers should return laden with spoil, even for an army, although +frost and snow have prevented them from taking fish for many days, +and today was less likelihood of their doing so than ever."</p> +<p>"Ranald knew well how this would cheer you, King Alfred," said +Ethered, thinking that I had spoken of this as a proof that all was +not lost, in some way.</p> +<p>"Ranald said nought; but the sign came from above, thus," the +king said gravely. "In my dream the holy Saint Cuthberht stood by +my side, and reproved me sharply for my downheartedness and +despair, and for my doubt of help against the heathen; and when he +knew that I was sorry, he foretold to me that all would yet be +well, and that I should obtain the kingdom once more with even +greater honour than I have had--with many more wondrous promises. +And then he gave me this sign, as I have told you and, behold, it +has come, and my heart is full of thankfulness. Now I know that all +will be well with England."</p> +<p>Then said Denewulf, who it was plain took no mean place with the +king and thanes:</p> +<p>"Say how this miracle was wrought, I pray you, for it is surely +such."</p> +<p>"Hither came King Ranald and his two friends and bade us make +holes in the ice and fish through them. So we did, and this is what +came thereof," said Ethered.</p> +<p>"Therefore King Ranald and his coming are by the hand of God," +said Denewulf. "Therein lies the miracle."</p> +<p>Then I was feared, for all were silent in wonder at the coming +to pass of the sign; and it seemed to me that I was most truly +under a power stronger than that of the old gods, who never wrought +the like of this.</p> +<p>Then came Harek's voice outside, where he hung up fish to freeze +against the morrow; and he sang softly some old saga of the fishing +for the Midgard snake by Asa Thor. And that grated on me, though I +ever waited to hear what song the blithe scald had to fit what was +on hand, after his custom. Alfred heard too, and he glanced at me, +and I was fain to hang my head.</p> +<p>"Ranald, who brought to pass the sign, shall surely share in its +bodings of good," he said, quickly and kindly. "I think that he is +highly favoured."</p> +<p>Then in came my comrades, and they bent to the king, and he +thanked them; and after that was supper and much cheerfulness. +Harek sang, and Alfred, and after them Denewulf. Much I marvelled +at the wisdom of this strange man, but I never knew how he gained +it. King Alfred was ever wont to say that in him he had found his +veriest counsellor against despair in that dark time; and when in +after days he took him from the fen and made him a bishop, he +filled the place well and wisely, being ever the same humble-minded +man that I had known in Athelney <a class="EndNoteanc" name= +"EndNote14anc" href="#EndNote14sym" id= +"EndNote14anc"><sup>{xiv}</sup></a>.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_X" id="Chapter_X">Chapter X</a>. Athelney and +Combwich.</h2> +<p>In the morning King Alfred took us to the southern end of his +island, and there told us what his plans were. And as we listened +they seemed to us to be wiser than mortal mind could have made, so +simple and yet so sure were they, as most great plans will be. It +is no wonder that his people hold that he was taught them from +above.</p> +<p>He bade us look across the fens to the wooded heights of Selwood +Forest, to south and east, and to the bold spur of the Polden Hills +beyond the Parret that they call Edington. There was nought but fen +and river and marsh between them and us--"impassable by +the Danes who prowled there. Only at the place where the two rivers +join was a steep, rounded hill, that stood up strangely from the +level--the hill that they call the Stane, on Stanmoor; and there +were other islands like this on which we stood, unseen among the +thickets, or so low that one might not know of them until upon +them.</p> +<p>"Now," he said, "sooner or later the Danes will know I am here, +where they cannot reach me. Therefore I will keep them watching +this place until I can strike them a blow that will end the trouble +once for all. They will be sure that we gather men on the Quantock +side, whence Heregar can keep them; and so, while they watch for us +to attack them thence, we will gather beyond Selwood, calling all +the thanes from Hants and Wilts and Dorset and Somerset to meet me +on a fixed day, and so fall on them. Now we will build a fort +yonder on Stane hill that will make them wonder, and so the plan +will begin to work. For I have only told you the main lines +thereof; the rest must go as can be planned from day to day."</p> +<p>Then he looked steadfastly at the Selwood heights, and +added:</p> +<p>"And if the plan fails, and the battle I look for goes against +us, there remain Heregar's places yet. Petherton, Combwich, and +Dowsborough are good places, where a king may die in a ring of +foes, looking out over the land for which his life is given."</p> +<p>"We shall not fail, my king," said Heregar. "Devon will gather +to you across the Quantocks also."</p> +<p>"Ay," he said; "and you will need them with you."</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"Hubba is in Wales, and is likely to come here when he hears +that his fellows are gathering against us. Then will Devon be +needed at Combwich in Parret mouth, or at Watchet."</p> +<p>"That will be Devon's work," the king said. "If Hubba comes +before your ships are ready to meet him, he must at least be driven +to land elsewhere, or our stronghold is taken behind us."</p> +<p>Now I was so sure that Hubba would come, that this seemed to me +to be the weakest part of the king's plan. But Alfred thought +little of it.</p> +<p>"My stronghold seems to be on Quantock side; it is rather beyond +Selwood, in the hearts of my brave thanes and freemen. Fear not, +cousin. Hubba will come, and you and Heregar will meet him; and +whether you win or not, my plan holds."</p> +<p>Then I knew that the king saw far beyond what was plain to me, +and I was very confident in him. And I am sure that I was the only +man who had the least doubt from the beginning.</p> +<p>Now, after all was planned, Heregar and I rode back to his +place, and sent word everywhere that the king was safe, though he +commanded us to tell no man where he lay as yet. None but thanes +were to be in the island with him; and from that time the name we +knew it by began, as one by one the athelings crossed the fen paths +thereto, and were lost, as it were, in the hiding place.</p> +<p>Then we wrought there at felling timber and hewing, until we had +bridged the river and made a causeway through the peat to Stanmoor +hill, and then began to make a triple line of earthworks around its +summit. No carelessly-built fort was this, for the king said: "If +the nobles build badly, there will be excuse for every churl to do +the like hereafter. Therefore this must needs be the most +handsomely-wrought fort in all Wessex."</p> +<p>There came to us at this fort many faithful workmen, sent from +the towns and countryside, until we had a camp there. But every +night, after working with us and cheering all with his voice and +example, Alfred went back to Athelney with us; and none would seek +to disturb him there, so that for long none quite knew, among the +lesser folk, where he bided. Presently the queen and athelings came +there to him, and were safe.</p> +<p>That time in the fens was not altogether unpleasant, though the +life was hard. Ever was Alfred most cheerful, singing and laughing +as we wrought, and a word of praise from him was worth more than +gold to every man. And then there were the hunting, the fishing, +and the snaring of wild fowl, that were always on hand to supply +our wants, though now we had plenty of food from the Quantock side. +I know this, that many a man who was in Athelney with Alfred was +the better therefor all the days of his after life. Men say that +there is a steadfast look in the faces of the Athelney thanes, by +which they can be well known by those who note the ways of men.</p> +<p>The frost lasted till February went out in rain and south winds. +And then the Danes began to gather along the southern hills, +watching us. By that time we had made causeways to other islets +from the fort, and the best of these was to Othery, a long, flat +island that lay to the east, nearer to the Polden Hills and +Edington.</p> +<p>So one day the king sent for me as we wrought at the fort, and +both he and I were horny handed and clay stained from the work. I +came with spade in hand, and he leaned on a pick. Whereat he +laughed.</p> +<p>"Faith, brother king, now can I speak in comrade's wise to my +churls as you speak to your seamen. Nor do I think that I shall be +the worse ruler for that."</p> +<p>Then he took my arm, and pointed to Edington hill.</p> +<p>"For many nights past I have seen watch fires yonder," he said; +"and that is a place where I might strike the Danes well. So I +would draw them thither in force. Do you feel as if a fight would +be cheerful after this spade work?"</p> +<p>Now I could wish for nothing better, and I said so.</p> +<p>"Well, then," he went on, laughing at my eagerness, "go to +Ethelnoth, and take twenty men, and do you and he fall on that post +from Othery by night; and when you have scattered it, come back +into the fen. I would have you lose no men, but I would make the +Danes mass together by attack on some one point, and that as soon +as may be, before Hubba comes. I do not want to hold their +place."</p> +<p>Now that was the first of daily attacks on the Danish posts, at +different places along the Selwood and Polden hills, until they +thought that we wished to win Edington height, where we began and +annoyed them most often. So I will tell how such a raid fared.</p> +<p>Good it was to lay aside pick and spade and take sword Helmbiter +again, and don mail and helm; and I made Harek fence with me, lest +I should have lost my sword craft through use of the weapons +whereby the churl conquers mother earth. But once the good sword +was in my hand I forgot all but the warrior's trade.</p> +<p>So Ethelnoth and I and twenty young thanes went in the evening +to Othery island, and there found a fenman to guide us, and so went +to the foot of Edington hill just as darkness fell. The watch-fire +lights, that were our guide, twinkled above us through the trees +that were on the hillside; and we made at once for them, sending on +the fenman to spy out the post before we were near it. It was very +dark, and it rained now and then.</p> +<p>When he came back to where we had halted, he said that there +were about twenty tents, pitched in four lines, with a fire between +each line; and that the men were mostly under cover, drinking +before setting watch, if they set any at all.</p> +<p>So we drew nearer, skirting round into cover of some trees that +came up to the tents, for the hilltop was bare for some way. The +lighted tents looked very cheerful, and sounds of song and laughter +came from them, and now and then a man crossed from one to another, +or fed the fires with fresh wood, that hissed and sputtered as he +cast it on.</p> +<p>"How shall we attack?" said Ethelnoth.</p> +<p>"Why, run through the camp in silence first and cut the tent +lines, and then raise a war shout and come back on them. Then we +may slay a few, and the rest will be scared badly enough."</p> +<p>Thereat we both laughed under our breath, for it seemed like a +schoolboy's prank. Well, after the long toil in the fen, we were +like boys just freed from school, though our game was the greatest +of all--that of war--the game of Hodur's playground, as we Norse +say.</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"After we come through for the second time, we must take to this +cover, and so get together at some place by the hill foot. There is +a shed by a big tree that can be found easily."</p> +<p>So we passed the wood, and our comrades chuckled. It was good +sport to see the shadows of the careless Danes on the tent walls, +and to know that they dreamed of nothing less than that Saxons were +on them. Four rows of tents there were, and there were twenty-two +of us; so we told off men to each row, and then made for them at a +moment when no man was about--hacking at the ropes, and laughing to +see the tents fall. It was strange to watch the shadows start up +and stand motionless, as the first patter of feet came and the +first blows fell, and then bustle, helpless and confused, with +savage shouts and curses, as the heavy canvas and skins fell in +upon them.</p> +<p>Now we were through the camp, and the outcries were loud behind +us. Two or three tents did not fall, and from them the men swarmed, +half armed and startled, not knowing if this was not some sorry +jest at first; and then rang our war cry from the dark, and we were +back upon them. We were but two-and-twenty to a hundred, but they +knew not what was on hand, while we did; and so we cut through them +without meeting with any hurt. Two tents were on fire and blazing +high, and blackened men cut and tore their way out of them howling; +and I think that more than one Dane was cut down by his comrades in +the panic that fell on all.</p> +<p>Yet even as we passed into the cover and went our way back +towards the fen, some bolder spirits began to rally, and a horn was +blown. But we were gone, leaving six slain and many more wounded +among them, while not one of us was scratched.</p> +<p>They did not follow us, and we heard the clamour we had caused +going on for some time after we had gained the fen. Presently, too, +when we reached Othery, we saw a fire signal lit to call for help, +and we were well content. Doubtless those Danes waked under arms +all that night through.</p> +<p>After that these attacks were seldom so easy, for the Danes kept +good watch enough; but they were ever the same in most ways. +Suddenly in the night would come the war cry and the wild rush of +desperate men on some Danish outpost, and before they knew what to +do we were away and into the fen again. We grew to know every path +well before long, and sometimes we would fall on small parties of +our foes when they were on the march or raiding the cattle, and cut +through them, and get back to our fastness.</p> +<p>Once or twice we were followed in the grey of early morning; but +few Danes ever got back from that pursuit. We would cut them off +amid the peat bogs, or they would founder therein, and sink under +the weight of armour.</p> +<p>Then they tried to force some fenmen they caught to guide them +to us at Othery. Once the brave fenman led them to where they dared +not move till daylight came, while the blue fen lights flitted +round them like ghosts in the dark; and then the fen people swarmed +round them, and ended them with arrows and sling stones from a +distance. They tried no more night attacks on us after that. But +again they came in some force by daylight, and we had a strange +fight on a narrow strip of hard land in Sedgemoor, with all +advantage on our side. No Danes won back to the Polden Hills.</p> +<p>Then they dared not try the fens any more, and daily we kept +their sentries watching, and nightly we fell on outposts, until at +last they thought our force grew very great, and began to gather on +Edington hill, even as Alfred wished. And this saved many a village +and farm and town from plunder, for the fear of Alfred the king +began to grow among his foes.</p> +<p>Then the king made his next move; for, now that the way was +open, he sent to Odda at Exeter, bidding him move up to Taunton by +some northerly road, gathering what Devon men he could on the way. +There is hardly a stronger town in Wessex than the great fortress +that Ine the king made.</p> +<p>At this time I began to be full of thoughts about my ships. But +they could hardly be built as yet; and most of them were in +southern havens, whence, even were they ready, one could not bring +them round the stormy Land's End in early March. Yet the weather +was mild and open, and I began to think that at any time Hubba +might bring his Danes across the narrow Severn sea to join his +kinsmen at Edington. We heard, too, that Guthrum, the king of East +Anglia, was there now, and that he had summoned every warrior who +would leave the land he had won to come to him.</p> +<p>Men have blamed Guthrum for treachery in this; but seeing that +the peace was broken, and that he must needs fight for the peace at +least of his kingdom, I hold that this is not right. At all events, +Alfred blamed him not in the time to come. Nevertheless, I suppose +that in men's minds he always will be held answerable for what the +other chiefs wrought of ill, because he bore the name of king from +the first, and ruled East Anglia. No Saxon, who is used to hold his +king as over all, will understand how little power a host-king of +the north has.</p> +<p>Now all this while my good ship lay at Bridgwater, and with her +were fifty of my men, who were well quartered among the townsfolk, +and helped to guard the bridge. And, as I have said, two ships were +being built there. So one day in the third week in March I rode +away with Kolgrim from Athelney, to see how all things were going +on there, meaning also to go to Heregar's place for a time, having +messages to give him from the king.</p> +<p>Harek was coming with me; but Alfred asked me to spare him for +this time.</p> +<p>"I have to learn somewhat from the scald," he said.</p> +<p>"Wizardry, my king?" I asked, laughing, for that was ever a jest +at the scald's expense after it was known how we found out that +Alfred was at Denewulf's house.</p> +<p>"Nay, but song," he answered. "Now I see not why I should not +tell you who put the thought into my mind; but I am going, as you +did, to spy out the Danish camp. And I will go as a gleeman, and be +welcome enough as a Saxon who has enough love of Danes to learn +some northern sagas for them!"</p> +<p>"My king," I cried, "this is too perilous altogether."</p> +<p>He looked quaintly at me.</p> +<p>"Go to, cousin; are you to have all the glory? If you went, why +not I? Maybe I too may find a chance of helping some fair maiden on +the way back."</p> +<p>Then I prayed him to do nothing rash, for that he was the one +hope of England.</p> +<p>"And maybe the one man in England who can do any good by going, +therefore," he answered. "And neither you nor I would ask any man +to do for us what we durst not do ourselves."</p> +<p>"You will be known, my king," I said.</p> +<p>Whereon he held out his hands, which were hard and horny now +with hard work, and he laughed as he did so.</p> +<p>"Look at those," he said, "and at my unkempt hair and beard! +Verily I may be like Alfred the king in some ways, but not in +these. They will pass me anywhere."</p> +<p>So I could not dissuade him, and ever as I tried to do so he +waxed more cheerful, and made sport of me, throwing my own doings +in my teeth, and laughing about Thora. So I was fain to get away +from his presence, lest I should grow angry at last. And when I was +going he said:</p> +<p>"Have no fear, cousin; I will not go unless I am well +prepared."</p> +<p>So I went, and next day was back in Athelney, riding hard; for +Hubba's ships had been sighted from the Quantocks, and they were +heading for the Parret. What I looked for and feared was +coming.</p> +<p>Then Alfred sent messengers to Odda, who had come to Taunton two +days before this. And he gathered every man from the fen, and we +went to Bridgwater, leaving our little force there, and so rode on +the way to Combwich, thinking to see the sails of the ships in +Bridgwater Bay. But a shift of wind had come, and they were yet +over on the Welsh coast, waiting for the tide to enable them to +come down on us.</p> +<p>By that time a fire burned on the highest spur of the Quantocks +to tell us that Odda was there, and at once another was lit on the +Combwich fort to bring him to us, for it seemed certain that here +we must fight the first battle of Alfred's great struggle.</p> +<p>"Here you must meet this newcomer and drive him away, if it can +be done, or if not, hinder him from coming further; or if that is +impossible, do your best. I would have you remember that defeat +here is not loss of all hope, for beyond Selwood lies our real +gathering. But victory, even if dearly bought, will almost win the +day for us."</p> +<p>So Alfred said, and we, who began to see what his great plan +was, were cheered.</p> +<p>In the evening Odda came with eight hundred men of Devon. Alfred +had two hundred maybe, and my few men and the townsfolk made +another two hundred. But Hubba had twenty-three longships, whose +crews, if up to fighting strength, would not be less than a hundred +in each.</p> +<p>So we watched till the tide fell, when he could not come into +the Parret, and then I went back to Heregar's hall. It seemed very +bare, for all goods had been sent up to the great refuge camp of +Dowsborough, to which all day long the poor folk had been flying, +driving with them their sheep and cattle and swine, that they might +save what they could. But with Odda had come his daughter, the Lady +Etheldreda, who would not leave him; and she and the Lady Alswythe +and Thora were yet in the house, and Osmund the jarl sat in the +hall, listless and anxious of face. It was an ill time for him; but +there were none of us who did not like him well, and feel for him +in his helplessness.</p> +<p>"What news?" he said, when he saw me come into the hall.</p> +<p>"Hubba will be here on the next tide--with early morning," I +said.</p> +<p>He sighed, and rising up went to the doorway and looked out to +the hills.</p> +<p>"I would that I could make these two noble ladies seek refuge +yonder," he said; "but one will not leave her father, nor the other +her husband."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"At least I think you should take Thora there. This is a +difficult place for you."</p> +<p>"I know Hubba," he said, "and if I abide here I may be of use. I +need not tell you that you are fighting the best warrior of our +time, and that with too small a force."</p> +<p>"Well," I said, "you and I can speak plainly, neither of us +being Saxons. We shall be beaten by numbers, and you mean that you +will be able to save these ladies by staying?"</p> +<p>"Ay," he said. "And if by any chance Alfred wins, I may be able +to ask for mercy for the conquered."</p> +<p>Then came in Thora, and her face was troubled. She had been +trying to make Etheldreda go to the hill fort, where all the women +and children of the countryside had been sent.</p> +<p>"It is of no use," she said; "they will bide here."</p> +<p>"Well," said Osmund, "then we will stay also. I and our friend +have spoken thereof, and it seems well that we do so."</p> +<p>I suppose they had talked of this before, for she made no +answer, but sat down wearily enough before the fire; and Osmund and +I went out to the courtyard, for we were both restless.</p> +<p>Then Heregar came in on his white horse, and saw Osmund, and +called to him, asking of the same business, for he had asked the +jarl to speak about it as a friend. So I went in again, and Thora +sat by herself yet, looking up to see who came now. I went and +stood by her, staring into the fire, and feeling as if I wanted to +go out again. Restlessness was in the very air while we waited for +the coming fight.</p> +<p>"King Ranald," she said, after a little silence, "I wonder if +ever a maiden was in such sad doubt as I. I cannot wish that these +dear ladies, who have made a friend of me, should see their folk +beaten, and maybe slain; and cannot wish that my own kin should be +beaten either. It seems that in either way I must find heavy +sorrow."</p> +<p>That was true; but it was certain that her own people were the +cause of all the trouble, though I could not say so. I put it this +way:</p> +<p>"I think that if your people are driven off there will be peace +the sooner, and maybe they will not land when they find us waiting. +I know, too, that those who have loved ones in the battle that may +be are in a harder case than yours, dear lady."</p> +<p>Then she looked up at me once, and a flush came slowly over her +pale face, and she answered nothing. I thought that she felt some +shame that a warrior like her father should bide here, without +moving hand or foot, when the war horns were blowing. So I +said:</p> +<p>"Harder yet would it be if the jarl were in the battle against +our friends. Then would the fear of his loss be a terror to you +also."</p> +<p>Now came in Osmund, and straightway Thora rose up, turning away +from us both, and went from the hall. The jarl looked after her +curiously and sadly.</p> +<p>"This is a strange business for the girl," he said.</p> +<p>"She seems almost as troubled because you are not fighting as if +you were in danger by doing so," I answered, with that thought +still in my mind.</p> +<p>Thereat the jarl stared at me.</p> +<p>"What has put that into your head?" he asked.</p> +<p>I told him what she and I had said, adding that I feared I had +seemed to hint somewhat discomforting.</p> +<p>Then said Osmund, looking in my face with a half smile:</p> +<p>"She is glad I am honourably out of this business, and the +trouble is not that. There are one or two, maybe, whom she would +like to see as safe in the same way."</p> +<p>Then it flashed through my dull mind that perhaps I was one of +these, and the thought was pleasant to me.</p> +<p>"Well," I said, "there are the thane, and his young son, the +king's page, who is here. They have been very kind to her."</p> +<p>"Also a wandering king who took her out of danger," he said +then.</p> +<p>"Ay; I shall be glad if she thinks of me."</p> +<p>There were a little laugh and a rustling behind us, and one +said:</p> +<p>"Either you are the least conceited of men or the blindest, King +Ranald, or you would know what is amiss."</p> +<p>I turned, and saw the Lady Etheldreda herself, and I bowed to +her in much confusion.</p> +<p>"O you men!" she said. "Here you will let the poor girl break +her heart in silence, while you fight for glory, or somewhat you +think is glory, without a word to say that you care that she shall +see what you win. Of course she thinks of you, even night and day. +How else should it be, when you have been as a fairy prince to +her?"</p> +<p>Then I knew for myself that among all the wild life of Athelney +and the troubles of the king the thought of Thora had been pleasant +to me; but now I was confused, having the matter brought home to me +suddenly, and, as it were, before I was ready to shape all my +thoughts towards her. So all that I could say was foolish +enough.</p> +<p>"I am a poor sort of fairy prince, lady."</p> +<p>"Ay," she said; "I am as good a fairy godmother, maybe. And +perhaps I should have said nothing--at this time. But, Ranald, the +maiden weeps for your danger, for, at the very least, she owes you +much."</p> +<p>Then I said, humbly as I felt:</p> +<p>"That is more honour to me than I deserve."</p> +<p>"That is for her to say," answered the fair lady, turning to +where Osmund had been.</p> +<p>But he was now in the doorway, looking out again to the hills. +So she was silent, and I thought of somewhat.</p> +<p>"There is none in this land or in any other--of whom I think as +I do of Thora," I said; "but my mind has been full of warfare and +trouble with the king. Now, if I may, I will ask for somewhat that +I may wear for her sake in the fight, and so she will know that I +think of her."</p> +<p>"Now that is well said," answered Etheldreda. "But you must ask +it for yourself."</p> +<p>Thereat I thought for a moment, and at last I said that I would +not do so.</p> +<p>"If I might, I would ask you to gain this favour for me," I +said; "for I think that a parting would be very hard, as things +have come about."</p> +<p>"You are a wiser man than I thought you, Ranald," she said; and +so she went from me, and I stayed by the fire, thinking thoughts +that were sweet and yet troublous, for beyond tomorrow's fight I +could not see.</p> +<p>Then the lady came back, and with her she brought a little +glove, worn and shapely from the hand that it belonged to.</p> +<p>"She bids me give this to her king and warrior," Etheldreda +said. "I did but tell her that you asked a token that she minded +you."</p> +<p>"It was well," I answered. "What said she?"</p> +<p>"Nought at once. But her sadness went, and her face changed--ay, +but she is beyond any of us in beauty when her eyes light up in +that way--and she fetched this, and then said 'Say, if you think +that he will care to know it, that this is the glove wherein I rode +to Wareham.'</p> +<p>"Do you care to know it, Ranald?"</p> +<p>"Ay, with all my heart," I said.</p> +<p>And so I put it very carefully under the broad, golden-studded +baldric of Sigurd's sword. And it would not stay there, and +Etheldreda laughed at me, and took a little golden brooch like a +cross that she wore, and pinned it through glove and baldric, +making all safe.</p> +<p>"There," she said, "is a token from me also, though it was +unasked. Bear yourself well, Ranald, for our eyes are on you. If +Hubba comes indeed, we women folk will be in the fort."</p> +<p>Then I said, being at a loss for words enough:</p> +<p>"I would I had the tongue of Harek the scald, that I might thank +you for gift and words, my fairy princess."</p> +<p>"I have half a mind to take it back for that fine saying," she +answered.</p> +<p>And then she gave me her hand, and I kissed it; and she went +from me with her eyes full of tears for all the trouble that was on +us, though she had tried bravely to carry it off lightly.</p> +<p>Then I would stay in the house no longer, but went out to the +fort, and sat down by the great Dragon banner of Wessex, Heregar's +charge, that floated there, and ate and drank with the other +chiefs, and waited. But my mind was full of what I had heard, and +the war talk went on round me without reaching my ears.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_XI" id="Chapter_XI">Chapter XI</a>. The +Winning of "The Raven."</h2> +<p>Now we none of us like much to speak of the fight that came next +morning, for it went ill enough. Yet we were outnumbered by twice +our force, for some more of the host beyond the fens made Alfred +send many of his men back to watch the crossing at Bridgwater.</p> +<p>Hubba brought his ships up on the tide, and when he saw that we +were waiting for him, he made as if to go on up the river; and we +began to move from our position, thinking that he would go and fall +on the town. Then, very suddenly, he turned his ships' bows to the +bank at the one place where he saw that the land was high almost to +the river's edge; and before we knew that we must be there to stay +him, his men were ashore, and had passed the strip of marsh, and +were on a long, gentle rise that ends in Cannington hill and the +Combwich fort, half a mile away.</p> +<p>We fought well for an hour, and then our men began to give on +either wing, for they were, as I would have it remembered, raw +levies that Odda had brought with him--valiant men and strong, but +with no knowledge of how to fight in line or how to hold together. +And when a force like that begins to go, it is ended.</p> +<p>Hard fought we in the centre after that. There were the Athelney +thanes, and my fifty men, and Odda's Exeter and Taunton townsfolk, +who had fought before; but when the wings broke, Hubba's great +force of veterans lapped round us, and we had nought left us but to +cut our way out, and make the best retreat we could. My men shouted +as they struck, in our Norse way; but a deadly silence fell on the +Saxons, and I thought that, as they grew quiet, their blows became +ever more stern and fell, until at last even Hubba's vikings gave +way before the hard-set faces and steadfast eyes of the +west-country spearmen, whom no numbers seemed to daunt, and they +drew back from us for a space.</p> +<p>Then we were clear of them, and at once Ethelnoth closed in on +the king, taking his horse's rein, and praying him to fly to +Bridgwater, where a stand could be made. And at last he persuaded +him, and they turned. Then fearing that this might set the example +for general flight, I spoke to Odda, and we shouted to the men to +stand fast and hold back pursuit; and so a guard of some fifty +thanes went with Alfred, and we faced the Danes even yet.</p> +<p>They saw what was done, and roared, and charged on us; and we +began to retreat slowly, fighting all the way, up the long slope of +land towards the fort. But I saw Heregar's horse rear and fall, and +the banner went down, and I thought him slain in that attack.</p> +<p>Presently they let us go. We won ever to better ground, and they +had to fight uphill; and then we gained the fort, and there they +durst not come.</p> +<p>Then rode towards me a man in silver armour that was dinted and +hacked--shieldless, and with a notched sword in his hand. It was +Heregar.</p> +<p>"I thought you slain, friend," I said gladly.</p> +<p>"Would that I were! for my charge is lost; they have my banner," +he answered.</p> +<p>"That may be won back yet," I said. "But there is no shame to +you; we were outnumbered by more than two to one."</p> +<p>"I have borne it through ten battles," he said, and that was +all; but he put his face in his hands and groaned.</p> +<p>Now I looked out over the field we had left, and saw the Danes +scattering in many ways. Some were going in a long line up the +steep hill beyond which the village lay, and over this line swayed +and danced the lost banner. There was a crowd of our men from the +broken wings gathered there--drawn together by the king as he fled, +as I knew afterwards; and I think the Danes bore our banner with +them in order to deceive them. I knew that the lane was deep and +hollow up which they must go, and there were woods on either +side.</p> +<p>Whereat I sprang up.</p> +<p>"Thane," I said, "here is a chance for us to win back the +banner, as I think."</p> +<p>He looked up sharply, and I pointed.</p> +<p>"Let us ride at once into the wood, and wait for them to pass +us. Then, if we dare, we can surely dash through them."</p> +<p>Kolgrim sat close to me, and our horses were tethered to a +spear. He rose up when he heard me speak, saying:</p> +<p>"Here is more madness. But trust to Ranald's luck, thane."</p> +<p>Then in a few more minutes we were riding our hardest towards +the wood. I heard Odda shout after us from the entrance to the fort +as we went, but we heeded him not.</p> +<p>We edged up to the deep lane through the trees until we were so +near that we could almost see into it. The banner was at the head +of the column, and there were no mounted men with it. Hubba had +brought no horses with him from across the sea.</p> +<p>Then we waited for a long minute, hearing the tramp of the +coming men, and their loud talk and laughter as they boasted of +their prize. They were going very carelessly.</p> +<p>"If we get it," I whispered to the thane, whose eyes were +shining, "ride hard up the hill to our folk who are there."</p> +<p>He nodded and then before us fluttered the folds of his +treasure. Instantly he spurred his great white horse, and leaped +straight at it into the lane, and after him on either side came +Kolgrim and I.</p> +<p>A great howl rose from the startled Danes, and I saw Heregar +wheel his horse and tear the banner from the man who held it, +cutting down another warrior who tried to catch his bridle. Then +Helmbiter was hard at work for a moment, and Kolgrim's axe rattled +on a helm or two; and we were away up the lane before the shouting +and confusion were over, none of the Danes knowing but that more of +us would follow from out the cover.</p> +<p>One or two arrows, shot by men who found their wits sooner than +the rest, pattered after us, and we gained the hilltop and the +great cheer that went up from our few men who were there made the +Danes halt and waver, and at last turn back to the open again.</p> +<p>We stayed on that hilltop for an hour. Then the Danes were +coming up in force, and there was no hope in staying, so we got +back to the fort before they could cut us off.</p> +<p>Soon after this there was a general movement on the part of our +foes, and before evening we were surrounded on all sides by strong +posts, and it was plain that we were not to move from the fort.</p> +<p>Now this is not very large, but it is very strong--the hill +which has been fortified being some two hundred feet high, and +steep sided as a house roof on all sides but the east, where the +entrance must needs be. But this again has outworks; and the road +into the ramparts from the long slope of Cannington hill to the +southward runs slantwise through them, so that the gap it makes in +the first line is covered by the second. And both upper and lower +rampart go right round the circle of the hilltop, and are very +strong, having been made by the British folk, who well understood +such matters, and had such fighters as the old Romans and our own +forefathers to deal with. Some parts of the works were of piled +stones, and the rest of earth, as the ground required.</p> +<p>There is but one way in which that fort could be taken by force, +as I think, and that is by attacking on all sides at once, which +needs a greater force than would ever be likely to come against it. +Moreover, on one side the marshy course of the Combwich stream +would hinder any heavy onslaught.</p> +<p>So inside these ramparts were we with some six hundred men, and +there we were watched by three times our number. There was a strong +post on Cannington hill, between us and Bridgwater; another--and +that the main body--between us and the ships, on a little, sharp +hill crest across a stony valley two bowshots wide that lay between +it and the fort; and so we were well guarded.</p> +<p>At first this seemed of little moment, for we were to stay Hubba +before the place; and for a while there was nothing but rejoicing +over the return of the banner. Then I found there was no water in +the place, and that we had but what food each man happened to carry +with him. Presently that want of water became terrible, for our +wounded began to cry for it piteously. Maybe it was as well that we +had few with us, because the field was left in the hands of the +Danes.</p> +<p>Up and down among those few went Etheldreda and Alswythe and +Thora, tending them and comforting them, where we had sent them--to +the highest point of the hilltop, inside the upper rampart; and I +could see the flutter of their dresses now and then from where I +watched beside Odda on the lower works. I had spoken to neither +since we came here.</p> +<p>Towards dusk I spoke to Odda, and he gave me twenty men; and +gathering all the vessels of any sort that would hold water, we +climbed over the rampart next the marsh, and stole down to the +nearest pool and brought back all we could, using helms and +leathern cloaks and the like, for want of buckets. We got back +safely that time, and I sent the same men again, thinking that +there was no danger, and so not going myself.</p> +<p>They got back, indeed, but with a party of Danes after them; and +but for our arrow flights from the earthworks, they would have had +to fight, and lose what they brought. After that Hubba knew what we +needed, and sent a strong picket to keep us from the marsh.</p> +<p>So the night passed and we had some hopes that a force might +come to our help from Bridgwater in the morning, for it was +possible that the king would be able to gather men there. It was a +slender hope, though, for the host on Polden Hills had to be +watched.</p> +<p>All day we waited, and no help came; and with evening the last +food had gone. It had rained heavily, however, and the want of +water was past for the time. The Danes never moved from their +places, waiting to starve us out; and in the last light of evening +a small party came across the little valley from the main body, +bearing a white flag in token of parley. Hubba bid us yield, and +our lives should be spared.</p> +<p>"It is good of Hubba to give us the chance of living a little +longer," answered Odda; "but we will wait here a while, so please +him."</p> +<p>The Danes threatened us, and mocked, and so went back. We had no +more messages from their chief after that.</p> +<p>That night we slept round the standard where it flapped on the +hilltop. The men watched, turn by turn, along the lower ramparts; +and the Danes were not so near that we could be surprised by them, +for there was no cover to hide their coming. Nestled under the +northwest rampart was a little hut--some shepherd's shelter where +the three poor ladies were bestowed. Osmund the jarl sat a little +apart from us, but all day and night he had been tending the +wounded well. Harek who, as befitted a scald, was a good leech, +said that the jarl knew almost as much of the craft as he.</p> +<p>Now, in the early morning, when the light was grey, I woke, +hearing the rattle of arms and the quiet passing of the word as the +men changed guard, and I thought I would go round the ramparts; and +then Odda woke also. The rest slept on, for they had taken their +turns on watch--Heregar with his arm round the pole of the +standard, and his sword beneath his head.</p> +<p>Odda looked at me as we sat up stiffly, and spoke what was in +his mind and mine also.</p> +<p>"I have a mind to send Osmund to Hubba, and ask him to let the +women go hence. There is nought to eat today."</p> +<p>"There is enough kept for them," I said; for Heregar had seen to +that, and none had grudged a share.</p> +<p>"Ay," he answered; "but what are we to do? Are we to be starved +like rats here?"</p> +<p>"There are the half-dozen horses," I said.</p> +<p>"And nought to cook them withal. I would that the king would +come."</p> +<p>"It is in my mind that he cannot," I answered; "there has been +some move of the other host."</p> +<p>Now that was true, for Guthrum's great following had suddenly +swept down towards Bridgwater, and that could not be left. They +were camped now at the foot of the hill, watching there as Hubba +watched us.</p> +<p>Then some one came, stepping lightly, but with clank of mail, +towards us; and I glanced round, thinking that some message was +brought from the ramparts. Odda turned idly at the same time, and +he started up.</p> +<p>"Ah!" he said, under his breath, "what is this?"</p> +<p>A tall maiden, mail clad and bearing a broad-bladed spear, stood +beside us; and I thought her one of the Valkyrias--Odin's +messengers--come to us, to fight for us in some strife to which she +would lead us. I rose too, saluting.</p> +<p>"Skoal to the shield maiden!" I said.</p> +<p>"Skoal to the heroes!" she answered; and then I knew the voice, +though, under the helm and in the grey light, the face of the +ealdorman's daughter Etheldreda had been strange to me. And Odda +knew also.</p> +<p>"What would you in this guise, my daughter?" he cried.</p> +<p>"I think that I have come as Ranald thought--as a Valkyria to +lead you to battle," she answered, speaking low, that she might not +wake the tired warriors around her. "There is but one thing for us +to do, and that is to die sword in hand, rather than to perish for +want of food and water here."</p> +<p>I know that this had been in my mind, and most likely in Odda's +also; but Alfred might come.</p> +<p>"We wait the king," the ealdorman said.</p> +<p>"No use," she answered. "One may see all the Polden Hills from +this place, and tonight there are no fires on Edington height, +where we have been wont to see them."</p> +<p>Odda groaned. "My Etheldreda, you are the best captain of us +all," he said.</p> +<p>Then suddenly Heregar rose up on his elbow from beside the +standard, crying strangely:</p> +<p>"Ay, Father Eahlstan--when the tide is low. Somerset and Dorset +side by side. What say you, father--Somerset and Devon? Even +so."</p> +<p>The other sleepers stirred, and the lady turned and looked on +the thane, but he slept even yet.</p> +<p>"Heregar dreams of the bishop he loved, and of the great fight +they fought yonder and won thirty rears ago," she said <a name= +"EndNote15anc" href="#EndNote15sym" id= +"EndNote15anc"><sup>{xv}</sup></a>.</p> +<p>"Worn out is the brave thane," said I. "Strange dreams come to +one when that is so."</p> +<p>Then Heregar woke, and saw the maiden, and rose up at her +side.</p> +<p>"Dear lady," he asked, "what is this?"</p> +<p>"Ranald thought me a Valkyria, friend; and I come on a +Valkyria's errand."</p> +<p>"I had a strange dream but now," Heregar said, as if it dwelt in +his mind, so that he hardly heeded what Etheldreda answered him. "I +thought that Bishop Eahlstan stood by me as in the old days, and +minded me of words that I spoke long ago, words that were taught me +by a wise woman, who showed me how to trap the Danes, when the tide +left their ships aground, so that they had no retreat. Then he +said, 'Even again at this time shall victory be when the tide is +low.' And I said that Somerset and Dorset would fail not at this +time. Then said he, 'Somerset and Devon.' Then it seemed that he +blessed me and passed. Surely I think that he would tell us that +victory is before us."</p> +<p>Now the other sleepers woke, and listened wondering. The light +was strong, and I looked away towards the Danes between us and the +river. Their fires were burning up one by one as they roused also; +but I thought there was some bustle down at the shore of the river, +where the ships were now afloat on the rising tide.</p> +<p>Then Etheldreda spoke to us in words that were brave and good to +hear--words to make a man long to give his life for country and for +friends--telling us that, since we must needs die, it was well that +we should fall sword in hand, ridding England of her foes man to +man, rather than perish in this place for nought.</p> +<p>And when she ended the chiefs were silent, looking on the Danes +with eyes that gleamed; and Kolgrim put the thoughts of all into +words when he said:</p> +<p>"Once or twice has the Berserker fury come on me when my master +has been in peril. Berserker again will you drive me, lady, so that +I care not for six foemen against me or sixty."</p> +<p>Then Odda cried:</p> +<p>"What goes on yonder? Do they leave us?" and he shaded his eyes +against the rising sun, and pointed. Certainly the Danes were +drawing towards the ships in parties of twenty and thirty at a +time, but their sentries went on their beats without heeding them. +There was no movement, either, among those on the other hill, and +the Raven banner that told of Hubba's presence was not borne +away.</p> +<p>Now we forgot all but that here was a new hope for us, and we +watched for half an hour. Then it was plain that full half the +force was drawn off, and that the Danes were crossing the river in +the ships. We saw them land on the opposite shore, where the road +comes down to the Combwich crossing, that can only be used at +lowest tides; and they marched eastward, doubtless in search of +cattle and plunder.</p> +<p>Then Heregar's eyes shone, and he said:</p> +<p>"Now has our time come, even as Eahlstan foretold to me. In two +hours or three none of that force can return, and we have but half +as many again as ourselves left here for us to deal with."</p> +<p>"Let me lead you on them," said Etheldreda.</p> +<p>Then with one voice we prayed her to bide in the fort, and for +long she would not be persuaded. But we told her that the men would +fight as well under her eye as if they were led by her--if, indeed, +her presence did not weaken them, in fear for her safety--and so at +last she gave way.</p> +<p>After that there was no more doubt as to what should be done; +but Odda went round among the men, and spoke to them in such wise +that he stirred their hearts to die bravely hand to hand with the +Danes. And I thought that some of us might live to see a great if +dearly-bought victory; for it was certain that not one of these +Saxons but meant to die before he left the field.</p> +<p>Then Heregar and Osmund went with Etheldreda to the other two +ladies, and they bade them take the horses and fly to Dowsborough +camp as soon as the fighting drew every Dane to the eastward side +of the fort and left the way clear. Osmund would go with them, and +so no fear for them was on our minds.</p> +<p>Then we got the soundest of the wounded down to the lower +rampart, and drew off the men there towards the gateway, so that +the Danes might think our movement was but a changing of guard; +then we waited until we saw that the ships on the far bank had +taken the ground.</p> +<p>Then we sallied out, and as I went I looked back once. Three +women stood alone on the hilltop, and one waved to us. That was the +Valkyria, for her mail sparkled in the sun; but I had eyes only for +that one whom I thought I should not see again, whose little glove +was on my heart.</p> +<p>Now, if we were desperate, Odda was not the man to waste any +chance of victory that there might be. We went swiftly up the long +slope of Cannington hill, and fell on the post there before they on +the main guard could reach them. There was no withstanding the +terrible onset of our Saxons; half that force was slain, and the +rest were in full flight in a few minutes.</p> +<p>Then we went steadily down the hill to where Hubba himself +waited for us. His war horns were blowing, to call in every man who +was within hearing; and his men were formed in line four deep at +the foot of the spur on which their camp had been.</p> +<p>Now, when I saw this I looked on our men, who were in column +again; and it seemed to me that the old Norse plan would be good, +for it was certain that on this field we meant to stay.</p> +<p>"Ealdorman," I said, "while there is yet time let us form up in +a wedge and go through that line. Then shall we fight back to back, +and shall have some advantage. I and my men, who have axes, will go +first."</p> +<p>Then my few vikings cried, "Ay, king!" and shouted; whereat Odda +laughed grimly.</p> +<p>"Go on, Berserker--axes must needs lead--we will do it."</p> +<p>Then we changed the ranks quickly, and I and Kolgrim and Harek +made the point of that wedge. Heregar and the banner were in the +midst, and Odda himself was not far behind me, putting his best men +along the two foremost faces of the wedge.</p> +<p>"We shall not be foremost long," I said; "we shall be surrounded +when once we are through the line."</p> +<p>But as we came on, Hubba closed up his men into a dense, square +mass.</p> +<p>"Ho!" said Harek to me; "you are wrong, my king."</p> +<p>Now we were close at hand, and the Danish arrows flew among us, +and the javelins fell pretty thickly. I think that a wedge bears +this better than any other formation, for it is easy to stop the +weapons that reach it.</p> +<p>Our men were silent now, and I was glad, having known already +what that meant; but the Danes began to yell their war cries. Then +we were within ten paces of them, and I gripped shield and axe and +gave the word to charge, and Odda answered it.</p> +<p>Then was such a terrible roar from the Saxons as I had never +heard--the roar of desperate men who have their foes before them, +more awful than any war shout. And at that even the vikings shrank +a little, closing their ranks, and then, with all the weight of the +close-ranked wedge behind me, we were among them, and our axes were +at work where men were driven on one another before us; and the +press thinned and scattered at last, while the Danes howled, and +for a moment we three and a few lines behind us stood with no +foemen before us, while all down the sides of the wedge the fight +raged. Then we halted, and the Danes lapped round us. I do not know +that we lost more than two men in this first onset, so heavy was +it; but the Danes fell everywhere.</p> +<p>Now began fighting such as I had heard of, but had never seen +before. The scalds sing of men who fought as fights a boar at bay +in a ring of hounds, unfearing and silent; and so fought we. My axe +broke, and I took to sword Helmbiter, and once Kolgrim went +Berserker, and howled, and leaped from my side into a throng which +fell on us, and drove them back, slaying three outright, and +meeting with no hurt.</p> +<p>Our wedge held steady. Men fell, but we closed up; and there +grew a barrier of slain before us. I had not seen Hubba since we +first closed in, and then he had been a little to the right of +where we struck his line, under a golden banner, whereon was a +raven broidered, that hung motionless in the still morning air.</p> +<p>Presently the Danish onslaught slackened. Men were getting away +from their line to the rear, worn out or wounded, and the hill +beyond them was covered with those who had fallen out. They had +beaten against our lines as one beats on a wall--hewing out stones, +indeed, but without stirring it. They had more hurt than we.</p> +<p>Odda pushed to my side, and said to me:</p> +<p>"What if we advance towards the hill crest?"</p> +<p>"Slowly, then," I said.</p> +<p>He passed the word, and we began to move, and the Danes tried to +stay us. Then their attack on the rear face of the wedge slackened +and ceased, and they got round before us to fight from the higher +ground. At once Odda saw that an attack in line as they wavered +thus would do all for us, so he swung his hard Devon levies to +right and left on us Norsemen as the centre--maybe there were +twenty of us left at that time--and as the wings swung forward with +a rolling cheer, the Danes crumbled away before them, and we drove +them up the little hill and over the brow, fighting among the +half-burnt watch fires and over heaps of plunder, even to where the +tall "Raven" drooped from its staff.</p> +<p>Then I saw the mighty Hubba before me; and had I not known it +already, one might see defeat written in his face as he looked +across to his ships. His men were back now, and stood on the far +shore, helpless. Then was a cheer from our left, and he looked +there, and I looked also.</p> +<p>Out of the fort came our wounded--every one who could put one +foot before another--a strange and ghastly crowd of fifty or sixty +men who would yet do what they might for England. And with them was +a mixed crowd of thralls and village folk, bearing what arms they +could find on the place whence we drove the first Danes, and forks, +and bill hooks, and heavy staves.</p> +<p>I do not know if the Danes saw what manner of force came to our +help; but I think they did not. Many broke and fled to the ships; +but Hubba's face grew hard and desperate, and he cried to his men +to stand, and they gathered round him and the Raven banner.</p> +<p>Once again our great wedge formed up, and again charged into the +thick of the Danes. Then I faced the great chief, and men fell back +from us to see what fight should be. But from beside me came +Odda.</p> +<p>"My fight, Ranald," he said, and strode before the Dane.</p> +<p>His sword was gone--the hilt and three inches of blade hung from +his wrist--and his shield was notched and gashed. His only weapon +was the broad-bladed Saxon spear, ashen shafted, with iron studs +along its length below the head. He was a head shorter than the +Dane, who was, in truth, the most splendid warrior I had ever seen; +and he bore a broad axe, wedge beaten and gold inlaid. There was +not much to choose between his shield and Odda's, but I thought the +spear the weaker weapon.</p> +<p>"Axe against spear," said Harek; "here is somewhat of which to +sing."</p> +<p>Once Odda feinted, lunging at Hubba's face; and the Dane raised +his shield a little, but did not move else, nor did his eyelids so +much as flinch, and his steady look never left his foe's face. +Then, as Odda recovered, the great axe flashed suddenly, and fell +harmless as its mark sprang back from its sweep; while like light +the spear point went forward over the fallen axe, that recovered +too slowly to turn it, and rang true on the round shield that met +it.</p> +<p>I had not thought much of spear play until now, for we think +little of the weapon.</p> +<p>Again the Saxon lunged, and Hubba hewed at the spear shaft, +splintering it a little as the quick-eyed spearman swung it away +from the blow. Then the butt was over Odda's left shoulder, and +before one could tell that its swing aside had ended, forward flew +the point, darting from left to right over Hubba's arm that had not +yet recovered from the lost axe blow, and behind the shield's rim. +That blow went home, and the mighty Dane reeled and fell.</p> +<p>One moment's silence, and then a howl from the Danes who +watched, and they flew on us, bearing us back a pace or two. Odda +went down under the rush that was made on him, and I called to my +comrades, and stood over him, and beat them back. But Hubba's fall +was the end.</p> +<p>Even as I stood there, there came a rash of men from our ranks +past me; and I cheered, for I saw Heregar's silver mail driving +straight for the Raven standard, at the head of the young thanes +who were the shield wall of the Dragon of Wessex. Then, too, closed +in the wounded men and the country folk; and the Danes broke and +fled towards the ships in disorder. We followed for a little way, +and then the thralls ended matters. They say that not one Dane +reached the river's bank, beyond which their comrades watched and +raged, powerless to help them.</p> +<p>I went back to where Odda had fallen, and at that time there +rose a thundering cheer of victory from our wearied line, and helms +were cast into the air, and weapons waved in wild joy. That roused +one who lay before me, and white and shaking, up rose Odda from +among the slain. I went to him, and got my arm round him; and again +the men cheered, and little by little the colour came back to his +face.</p> +<p>"I thought you slain outright," I said; "are you much hurt?"</p> +<p>"I cannot tell," he said. "I believe I am sound in limb, but my +wind is gone. It is ill for a stout man to have mail-clad Danes +hurled on him by heavy-handed vikings."</p> +<p>So he said, gasping, but trying to laugh. And, indeed, he was +unwounded, save for a cut or two, and he still grasped his red +spear in his right hand.</p> +<p>Now I looked on our men, and saw that we might not bide for +another fight. Already some whom the wild joy of battle had kept +strong in spite of wounds were falling among their comrades, and it +seemed to me that wounds were being bound up everywhere.</p> +<p>But there was a token of victory that made these seem as +nothing. In the midst of all Heregar stood with the Dragon banner, +and by his side his son-in-law, Turkil the thane of Watchet, bore +the captured "Raven."</p> +<p>Harek the scald looked at it once, and then went to its heavy +folds, and scanned carefully the runes that were thereon.</p> +<p>"Ho, comrades!" he cried joyfully, "here is a winning that will +be sung of long after our names are forgotten. This is the magic +Raven that was wrought with wizardry and spells by the daughters of +Ragnar Lodbrok. Ill will this news fall on Danish ears from end to +end of England. This is worth two victories."</p> +<p>"I have seen it many times before," said Heregar; "nor is this +the only time that I have tried to win it. But never before have I +seen it hanging motionless as it hung today. There seems to be +somewhat in the tale they tell of its flapping foreboding +victory."</p> +<p>"Ay," said Odda. "Today they despised us, and bore it not +forward; therefore it flapped not, seeing that there was no wind +where it hung."</p> +<p>The ealdorman called us together then, and pointed to the Danes +who were massed beyond the river.</p> +<p>"Now it is time for us to go. We have won a good fight, and some +of us are yet alive. It will not be well to lose all by biding here +to be slain to the last man now. Shall we go to Bridgwater or to +the Quantocks, and so to Taunton?"</p> +<p>Then Heregar said:</p> +<p>"To the hills; for we should be penned in Bridgwater between +this force and the other. I think that while we are yonder they +will not do much on this side the Parret; and men will ever gather +to us."</p> +<p>Then we took our wounded and went back to the fort--four hundred +men out of six hundred who sallied out, where we thought that none +would return. But how many Danes we left on the field it is hard to +say. Some say six hundred, and some more; and it may be so. Their +graves are everywhere over the hill where they fell. When the tide +rose we were gone; and Hubba's men sought the body of their chief, +and raised a mound over it. But they had no mind to stay on our +side of the river, and they went to the Polden Hills, and laid the +land waste far and wide, even to holy Glastonbury, until they +joined Guthrum's force at Edington.</p> +<p>Now one may know in what wise Etheldreda the brave shield maiden +met us, as we came back from that hard-won field, with words of +praise and thanks. But Thora stood not with her as we passed +through the fort gates, where she waited on the rampart with the +Lady Alswythe. Nor had she watched the fight at all, being torn +with sorrow and fear alike.</p> +<p>I found her presently, while the men made litters whereon to +bear our wounded to safety, having cleansed the stains of war from +my armour. King Harald's mail had kept me from wound worth +notice--though, indeed, I hardly know how it was that I was unhurt +thus. Kolgrim would not use his arm for many days, and Harek was +gashed in arm and thigh also.</p> +<p>When Osmund heard my tread, he started up from where he sat +beside Thora, looking away towards the hills to which we were +going, and greeted me warmly.</p> +<p>"It was a good fight, Ranald, and well won," he said.</p> +<p>Then Thora turned slowly, and looked at me fearfully, as if she +feared me. I was grieved, and would have gone away; but she drew +nearer, and the fear went from her eyes when she saw that I was +safe, knowing little of what I had been through. And at last she +smiled faintly, saying:</p> +<p>"King Ranald, they say my warrior has fought well."</p> +<p>"It had been strange had I not, Thora," I said.</p> +<p>"I think I should have hated my own kin had you fallen," she +said then.</p> +<p>"Ay," said Osmund, "war sees strange chances, and a man's +thoughts are pulled in many ways. Many a time have I seen Dane +fight with Dane on the old shores; and I can welcome a victor +heartily, even if it is my own kin who have been beaten. Presently +we Danes will fight for our new homes in England against such a +landing from beyond seas as you have met."</p> +<p>There was some scratch on my shield arm that drew Thora's eyes +at this time, and as the jarl spoke she came quickly to me, taking +some light scarf she had from her dress at the same moment.</p> +<p>"You are hurt," she said; "though it is little. Let me bind it +for you."</p> +<p>I suffered her to do so, saying nothing, but smiling at her, +while the colour came brightly into her face as she wrought. The +jarl smiled also, turning away presently as some new shouting came +up from the fort gateway, where men welcomed those who bore back +the spoils from the slain.</p> +<p>Then Thora had finished, and I put my arm round her and kissed +her once.</p> +<p>"My lady," I said, "it was worth the wound that you should tend +it."</p> +<p>And so she looked up at me frankly, and we knew well what had +grown up between us since the day when we had ridden together into +Wareham streets.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_XII" id="Chapter_XII">Chapter XII</a>. +Edington Fight.</h2> +<p>Now after this we held the great Dowsborough fort on Quantocks +for a few days, looking out over the land that should see the +greatest deeds of Alfred, the wise king, from Glastonbury in the +east to the wide stretches of the great wood, Selwood Forest, +beyond the Stanmoor fens; and there, in the clear air, and with +plenty of good provender from the smiling Taunton vale behind us, +we grew strong again.</p> +<p>The Danes marched on Bridgwater, and the garrison must needs +leave the place and retreat to the heights at Petherton, and there +hide. I was grieved that my good ship was in Danish hands, but at +least I knew that they would not harm her; and such was our faith +in Alfred the king, that I believed that I should have her back. +Old Thord came up to us when his charge was thus lost.</p> +<p>"Maybe they will finish painting her, and we shall be able to +launch her, when we go back, without more trouble," he said. "Two +of Hubba's ships, moreover, are worth having."</p> +<p>Then the king rode up to us, and told us that we had done well, +and that the great plan yet held. Already he had messengers out +throughout all the southern counties, and already men were +gathering through the land and filling the towns that the Danes +were leaving.</p> +<p>"When I know that the Danes have their eyes fixed on Quantock +side again, I shall strike," he said.</p> +<p>So began again the life in Athelney and at Stanmoor fort; but +now the Devon men gathered openly on our hills, and every day the +Danish force grew also. When the last fight came, there would be an +end to either one side or the other, and Guthrum knew it.</p> +<p>Once in that time I rode with Alfred, and saw Neot again; and if +it were but for a few hours that we might stay with him, he found +time to speak with me, asking if I had learned aught of his faith +as yet.</p> +<p>"I have been in Athelney," I answered, "and I saw what might the +holy Name has at Chippenham. The old gods have passed from me."</p> +<p>Little have I said of this, for one cannot speak of inmost +thoughts; but so it was. Yet I think that, had I been older, the +old faith would have died more slowly from my mind. So it was also +with Harek the scald, but I think that he was Christian in heart +before I had bent my mind to the matter in earnest. Long talks had +he with Denewulf, the wise herdsman, while I listened.</p> +<p>So holy Neot rejoiced greatly over us, bidding me seek baptism +at once.</p> +<p>"Nay, father," I said; "I fear it, knowing what it is. Let me +bide for a time till I am stronger in these deep things."</p> +<p>He tried to persuade me gently, but at last let me be, knowing +that I spoke in earnest and with all wish to seek it rightly.</p> +<p>So we left him on the day after we came, and went back to +Athelney, and Alfred was very silent all the way.</p> +<p>"What ails you, my king?" I asked him at last, fearing that his +pain, which had left him of late altogether, might return.</p> +<p>"I will tell you, cousin," he said. "Plainly has Neot shown me +that all these troubles have come from my own pride and self will +when first I was king. It is a long chain of happenings, of which +you would know nought were I to try to tell you. But so it has +been, and I weep therefor in my very heart."</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"What is past is past, King Alfred, and best friend. Look on to +the days to come, for I think that there shall rise a new and +happier England before the winter comes again. There is no man whom +I have met in all the hosts in whose heart is not love and best +thoughts of you. Old days are forgotten as if they had never been, +save that you led and conquered in the great battles beyond the +Thames."</p> +<p>He held out his hand to me, and took mine and gripped it, saying +no word, and riding on in silence for a mile and more. And after +that he was of good cheer again till we came to Exeter, and there I +stayed to see how fared my ships, for it was time they were in the +water again.</p> +<p>Well had my men and the Saxon wrights wrought at building. If +all went like this, King Alfred would have a fleet that could sweep +the seas from Dover to Orme's Head, and keep his land from new +plunderers at least.</p> +<p>In a week I came back to Athelney, and there was good cheer, and +all were in the best of heart, for things went well. Messengers +came and went across the winding paths from the southern hills, and +Ethered met me laughing, and said:</p> +<p>"The king has robbed you of your glory, Ranald. He has been into +the Danish camp--even to the presence of Guthrum himself."</p> +<p>Then I would hear of this from Alfred himself.</p> +<p>"Ay," he said, when he had greeted me and heard that the ships +were almost ready, "I have outdone you; for I have played the +gleeman as I planned, and have been in the midst of them yonder on +Edington hill."</p> +<p>"It was an awesome risk to run, my king," I said.</p> +<p>"Which you taught me yourself, cousin. Howbeit I met no damsel, +and I had no companion to return with but him with whom I +went--Heregar's young son, my page. Thane is he now by right of +unfearing service. Once, when I climbed the hill, I began to fear +greatly, and I stayed, and asked the boy if he was afraid to go on. +Tell me truly, Ranald, did you fear when you were in Wareham?"</p> +<p>"Truly I feared at first," I answered; "but since I was there +when it came on me, I must even go through with the business. So it +passed."</p> +<p>"Well, I am glad you confess it," he answered, "for I was minded +to turn and run when the first lights of the great camp showed +through the trees. Then the boy answered me, 'My king, why should I +fear when you are with me?' I was ashamed, and took Harek's harp +from him--for he carried it--and went forward boldly, singing the +song of Gunnar in the snake pit. And it seemed to me that Harek +would have chosen that song as fitting my case; for, putting Danes +for snakes, I was in a close place enough. The warriors came out +when they heard me; and I was well treated, and listened as I +drank. Many things I learned."</p> +<p>Now I cannot believe that Alfred feared at all. He was surely +but anxious, and took that feeling for fear. So think all his +people.</p> +<p>"It seems that they thought I sang well," he went on; "so they +took me to Guthrum. He indeed looked sharply at me once, and maybe +twice; but I went on singing Harek's songs, and paid no heed to +him. Presently he gave me a great horn of ale from his own table, +and this gold bracelet that I wear also, and sent me away. Then I +went about the camp and heard the talk. One man asked me if I had +seen Alfred, and what he was like. 'Faith,' said I, 'men say I am +like him.' Whereat they laughed long at me and at the king also. +Then heard I the truth about my own looks for once. I had some +trouble in getting away, but at last I seemed to wax hoarse, and so +made as if I would go to Bridgwater, and left them, promising to +come again. Ay, and I will keep my promise," he said; "but as +Harek's heathen songs say, it is the sword's mass that I will sing +to them."</p> +<p>Then his eyes glowed, and he was silent, and I wondered at the +courage and resource in the slight figure that was before me.</p> +<p>"All goes well, and the plan is good," he went on directly. +"They look for some easily-beaten attack from this side of the +Parret, and at the first sign thereof will leave Edington height +for the level ground below, as they did when Hubba came. Then when +they turn, on Edington hill will be our levy suddenly--a levy of +which they have not dreamed. And there will be the greatest fight +that England has seen yet, and after that there will be a Saxon +overlord of England against whom none will dare rise."</p> +<p>"May it be so, my king," I answered.</p> +<p>"It will be so," he said. "Here in this cottage have I had the +word that tells me thereof; and you, Ranald, brought the sign that +made the word sure to me."</p> +<p>I minded it, and I knew that for all my life my ways were bound +to the service of Alfred the king; for my fate was linked with his, +as it seemed, from my first coming.</p> +<p>It was not long now before the day came that will never be +forgotten; for word was brought in from every quarter that thanes +and freemen and churls alike would not be behind when Alfred gave +the word, and he sent back to bid them meet him at Ecgbryht's +Stone, beyond Selwood, on Whitsunday. There is a great and strong +camp there on a rocky hill that looks out far and wide, near the +two great roads, British and Roman, that cross in the vale beneath; +and to that all were to gather, for there would the Golden Dragon +be set up. Men call it White Sheet Castle.</p> +<p>On the day before I rode to Odda, who had already drawn his men +to the Petherton ridge above Bridgwater, and told him what the +king's word was. Then I went on up the long side of the Quantocks, +and spoke in the Maytime woods with Thora, telling her--for she was +a warrior's daughter, and was worthy of a warrior's love--that I +must be at the king's side. And so she bade me fight bravely, +speaking many noble and loving words to me, until I must go. Then I +led her back to Osmund in his place among the rough huts within the +wide circle of the camp ramparts, that now held but a few poor folk +from the Parretside lands.</p> +<p>"King Alfred makes some new move," I said to him, "and it is +possible that we may not meet again. I think that what is coming +will end all the trouble between Saxon and Dane."</p> +<p>He shook his head.</p> +<p>"Some day it will end," he said, "but not in my time or +yours--not until the Danes have grown to know that England is their +home, and that they are English by birth and right of time--maybe +not till Denmark has ceased to send forth the sons for whom she has +no place in her own borders."</p> +<p>Then I answered that perhaps he was right. I did not see into +things as far as he, and I was a stranger in the land.</p> +<p>"But this at last will give a strong overlord to England," I +said.</p> +<p>"Ay, for the time. So long as a strong king rules, there will be +less trouble indeed; but if Alfred's sons are weak, it will begin +afresh. England will no longer bear two kings; and while there is a +Saxon kingdom alongside a Danish, there cannot be lasting +peace."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"What of yourself? Shall you go back to Guthrum when this is +over?"</p> +<p>"I cannot tell," he answered. "What my fate is I know not yet. +What mean you to do if all goes well for Alfred? Shall you bide in +England?"</p> +<p>We had walked apart now, and were looking over all the fair +Quantock vale beneath us. I think there is no fairer lookout in all +England: land and river and hills and sea, and beyond the sea the +blue mountains of the Welsh coast--ever changing and ever beautiful +under sun and cloud and flying shadows.</p> +<p>"I have found the fairest land under the northern sun," I said; +"and I have found the best king, as I think. I shall bide here. One +other thing I have found of which I hardly dare to think, so many +are the chances of wartime. Yet, jarl, but for them I should not +have met with Thora, though in my heart I believe that I should not +have spoken to her yet."</p> +<p>"I would not have had it otherwise," he said, kindly taking my +arm. "I have seen what was coming long before Etheldreda spoke. It +has been good for Thora that she did so, whatever befalls."</p> +<p>Then we spoke of my promised place with the king, as if his +victory were certain. Indeed, I believe that we both had no thought +of its being otherwise.</p> +<p>"I do not know, however," said Osmund, "if your taking a Danish +wife will be well received. It may be likely that Alfred will wish +you to be bound to him by some tie of that nearness which shall be +of his making."</p> +<p>I had not thought of that, but it was a thing that was common +enough. Harald Fairhair was wont to give a rich wife to some chief +whom he would keep at his side.</p> +<p>"If that is so, I shall go hence," I said. "There are things +that come before friendship."</p> +<p>"Well," he answered, "we shall see. There is always a place for +us both at Rolf's side in his new-won land."</p> +<p>"Yet I should be loth to leave Alfred," I said most truly. "I +think that this is the only thing that would make me do so."</p> +<p>"Thora would not stand in your way to honour with him, nor would +I," said Osmund.</p> +<p>"Honour with Alfred shall not stand in my way, rather," I +answered. "But we speak of chances, as I think."</p> +<p>We said no more, and he bade me farewell.</p> +<p>I went back to Alfred somewhat sad, and yet with many thoughts +that were good and full of hope; and soon I had little time to do +aught but look on at the way in which the king's plans worked out +most wonderfully.</p> +<p>On the eve of the great Whitsunday festival we set out through +the fen paths southward to the hills and the first woodlands of +Selwood Forest, and when the morning came we were far in its +depths, passing eastward towards the place where we were to meet +the levy.</p> +<p>Presently we turned aside to a little woodland chapel that had +escaped the sight of the Danes, and from a hut beside it came out +an old priest, white-bearded and bent with age and scanty fare. At +first he feared that the heathen had found him at last; yet he +looked bravely at us, catching up the crucifix that hung at his +side and clasping it in both his hands as he stood in the open +doorway of his church, as if to stay us from it.</p> +<p>Alfred rode forward to him when he saw his fear.</p> +<p>"Father, I am Alfred the king," he said. "Far have I ridden on +this holy day. Now I would fain hear mass and have your blessing +before we go on."</p> +<p>Thereat the old priest gave thanks openly to the King of kings, +who had brought Alfred again into the land, and hastened to make +ready. So that was the king's Whitsuntide mass, and we three +heathen and our few men must bide outside while the others went +into the holy place and returned with bright faces and happy; for +this was a service to which we might not be admitted, though all +knew that we would be Christians indeed ere long.</p> +<p>So at last we came to the ancient castle, and saw the valley to +north and east beneath its height, bright everywhere with sparkling +arms that gleamed from lane and field and forest glade, as all +Wessex gathered to meet their king.</p> +<p>Then the Golden Dragon that we had lost and won was unfurled; +and the war horns blew bravely enough to wake the mighty dead whose +mounds were round about us; and soon the hillside was full of men +who crowded upwards and filled the camp and ramparts and fosse, so +that before sunset Alfred had a host that any king might be proud +to call his own. Yet he would call it not Alfred's force, but +England's.</p> +<p>Standing on the old ramparts, he spoke to them, while all the +great gathering was silent. And the words he said sank into the +heart of every man who heard, so that he felt as if on his arm +alone it rested to free England, and that his arm could not fail. +Not long did the king speak, but when he ended there rose a +cheering that was good to hear, for it came from hearts that had +been made strong to dare aught that might come.</p> +<p>After that he spoke to the thanes, giving each one his place, +and telling them all that he had planned, so that each knew what +was looked for from him. It seemed that he had forgotten nothing, +and that the day must go as he said he thought it would.</p> +<p>Men slept on their arms that night, without watch fires, lest +any prowling Danes should see that somewhat was on hand, although +Guthrum had drawn to him every man from out of Wessex, as was said, +and as seemed true. I have heard tales from some that in the night +the warriors who lie resting in the mounds around their old +stronghold came forth and wandered restless along the ramparts, +longing to take their part again in the mighty struggle they knew +was coming. I saw nothing, but Harek the scald says he saw.</p> +<p>Next day we marched towards our foes. Eighteen miles we went, +and then came to the holy place Glastonbury, where the burnt ruins +spoke again, as it were, to the warriors of wrong and cruelty to be +avenged.</p> +<p>There we were, but eight miles from the foe, and that night we +lay in a great meadow they called Iglea, deep down in the folds of +the hills, where even so great a host might be hidden for many days +if no chance betrayed them. Alfred took a few of us when night +came, and climbed the steep tor above Glastonbury town. Thence we +could see the long line of fires on Polden Hills that marked where +the Danes slept, all unknowing that any host could be gathered in +their rear.</p> +<p>In the grey of morning we set our ranks in order. I was with +Alfred, with Ethered of Mercia and Ethelnoth, and more nobles whom +I knew; and my few men were in the shield wall, among the best +warriors of the Saxon levies. None grudged that honour to those who +had made the point of the wedge that broke Hubba's ranks and won +the Raven banner.</p> +<p>Now, in our Norse land there is ever sacrifice to the Asir when +one leads a host to battle, that luck may be on the right side; and +now I was to see a more wondrous thing than even that. I knew by +this time the meaning of what I saw, and there crept into my heart +a wish that I might take full part therein with Alfred, who had +taught me.</p> +<p>When all the ranks were ordered, and the deep columns were drawn +up on Iglea meadows in three sides of a square, there came a little +train of robed monks, at whose head was Bishop Sigehelm of +Sherborne, before whom went a tall gilded cross. Careworn and +anxious looked the good fathers, for there was not one of them who +had not a tale of Danish cruelty and destruction to tell, and more +than one had hardly escaped with his life; but now their faces were +brighter with new hope as they came into the open side of the armed +square and waited for a moment.</p> +<p>Alfred and we stood before them, and the bishop raised his hand. +At that we all knelt, with a strange clash and rattle of arms that +went round the great host and ceased suddenly, so that the +stillness was very great.</p> +<p>Then was only the voice of the bishop, who in a clear tone spoke +the words of peace to those who should pass hence in the coming +battle, that they might fight bravely, and even rejoice in +death.</p> +<p>So he shrived the host, and at the end they said "Amen" in one +voice.</p> +<p>Thereafter the bishop prayed to the Lord of hosts--not such a +prayer as I had been wont to hear, but more wonderful, and with no +boasting therein, nor, as it were, any hate of the foe, but rather +the wish that the strife should make for peace, and even blessing +to them.</p> +<p>Then he lifted his hand and blessed all the host as they bared +their heads, and again the last word rolled deep and strong round +the ranks, and that was all; then Alfred cried cheerily to his men, +and we began our march that must needs end in battle.</p> +<p>There is a great road that climbs up the slope of the Polden +Hills from Glastonbury and then runs along their top to Edington +and beyond, and by this way we went, among pleasant woodlands. +Guthrum's own place was on the spur of Edington, because thence one +looks out on all the land that Alfred held, from the fort at Stane +hill to Bridgwater and Combwich and the sea beyond. That was only +eight miles from us, and was the point which we would win. Thence +to Bridgwater is five miles, and the town was now held in force by +the Danes; and where the road leaves the hills to cross the marsh +to the bridge and town, two miles away, was a camp that guarded the +causeway through the level.</p> +<p>We went quickly as a great host may, and Alfred had so ordered +matters that even as we set out from Iglea, Odda and his force were +moving in battle array from the Petherton heights on the Quantock +side of the town, as if to attack it. That was what Guthrum had +looked for since the time we had beaten Hubba, and the only attack +which could have seemed possible in any way.</p> +<p>It is likely that he overrated the number which Odda had with +him; for those who escaped us at Combwich had not been near enough +to see from the far side of the river how small our force was, and +would make much of those who had been able to overcome their +mightiest chief. Moreover, since that time seven weeks had gone by, +and the gathering of Devon might be greater yet. So it was, indeed; +but Odda had not a thousand men. Perhaps, too, the Danes feared +some sally from the fens; but however it was, they made not the +mistake which destroyed Hubba by despising us rashly, for Guthrum +drew his whole force together, and left the hills for a march +towards the town which he heard was threatened.</p> +<p>So when we came to Edington, Guthrum's hill fort was empty, save +for a camp guard to keep the country folk who lurked in wood and +fen from pillaging it. These men fled, and we stood on the ridge +without striking one blow; and King Alfred turned to us, and cried +that surely his plan was working out well.</p> +<p>Then our host lined the ridge, and a mighty Saxon cheer from ten +thousand throats went pealing across the valley below us, and they +say that shout was heard even in Bridgwater. Guthrum heard it as he +rode with his host across the long causeway, and his men heard it +and halted, and saw in their rear the blaze of war gear that shone +from their own lines, and knew that they were pent in between fens +and hills, with an unknown force ready to fall on them.</p> +<p>Whereon a panic very nearly seized them. Hubba's end was fresh +in their minds, and it needed all that Guthrum could say to prevent +them making for the town. But he minded them of old victories, and +bade them not fear to face the despised Saxons once again, and they +rallied. But it was noon before he could lead them to attack us, +and by that time he learned that Odda had halted above the town, +and need not be feared. But by that time also every post of vantage +along the hills was in our hands, and if Edington height was to be +held by Danes again, it must be won by hard fighting. That is a +thing that no Dane shrinks from, and now for Guthrum there was +nought else to be done, for he was surrounded, as it were.</p> +<p>No man saw the whole of that fight, for it began at noon, as I +have said, when Guthrum turned to find the hillward road blocked +behind him. And from that time on it raged from spur to spur and +point to point, as step by step the Danes won back to the +hillsides. But the crest of the hill they never gained, save where +for a time they might set foot and be driven headlong in turn by +those who had given way before them at first. And so the fight +swept on to the base of Edington hill and along its sides, for +there Alfred had held his best men in reserve. Already the Danes +had made for themselves some shallow lines of earthworks along the +crest, and now these were manned against their own attack.</p> +<p>Men who looked on from afar tell strange tales of the shouts and +cries that rang among the quiet Polden hills and woodlands that day +for long hours. It was very still, as it chanced, and the noise of +battle went far and wide from the place where Saxon and Dane fought +their greatest fight for mastery.</p> +<p>Ever rode Alfred with the light of battle on his face, confident +and joyous, among his men from post to post. Ever where the tide of +battle seemed to set against us his arm brought victory again, +until at last Guthrum drew his men together for one final attack +that should end the day.</p> +<p>On Edington hillside he massed them, and steadily they came on +under shield in a dense column to where, in their own camp, we +waited under the Dragon banner. Half our men, the best spearmen of +the force, were lying down resting, but along the little ridges of +the earthworks the archers stood, each knowing that he fought under +the eye of the king he loved.</p> +<p>"This is the end," said Alfred, as the Danes came on. "Be ready, +spearmen, when I give the word."</p> +<p>And they lay clutching their weapons, with their eyes fixed on +him as he stood on the hilltop, surrounded by his thanes, gazing on +the last assault of the Danes, whose archers from the wings were +already at work, so that the men of the shield wall closed in +around him.</p> +<p>I think that the Danes had no knowledge of what force was hidden +by the hill brow. For when they were within half arrow shot, and +Alfred gave the word, and the long ranks of spearmen leaped from +the ground and closed up for their charge, a waver went along the +shielded line, and they almost halted, though it passed, and they +came on even more swiftly.</p> +<p>Then Alfred lifted his sword and shouted, and, with that awful +roar that I had heard before on the Combwich meadows, over the hill +crest and down upon the Danes the spearmen rushed. The lines met +with a mighty crash of steel on steel, and while one might count +two score they swayed in deadly hand-to-hand strife. Then Guthrum's +men gave back one pace, and howled, and won their place again, and +again lost it.</p> +<p>Then forward went Alfred and his shield wall, and I was on one +side of him and Ethered of Mercia on the other, while after him +came Heregar, bearing the banner. The Danes in the centre closed up +as they saw us come, and there were shouts in which Guthrum's name +was plain to be heard, and I saw him across a four-deep rank of his +men.</p> +<p>Straight for him went Alfred, and the Danish line grew thin +before us. But as their king went forward our Saxons cheered again +and pressed their attack home, and right and left the Danish line +fell back and broke. At that a wild shout and charge with levelled +spears swept them down the hillside in full rout, and the end had +come. His courtmen closed round Guthrum and bore him from before +us, and the full tide of pursuit swept him away before we reached +him.</p> +<p>Alfred stayed his horse and let the men go on. His face was good +to see as he glanced round at the hills to our right; but when it +fell on the slain, who lay thickly where the lines had met, he +bared his head and looked silently on them for a space, while his +lips moved as if he prayed.</p> +<p>Then he said:</p> +<p>"These have given their lives not in vain, for they have helped +to bring peace, and have died to set an English king over the +English land."</p> +<p>He put on his crown-circled helm again, and as he did so, among +the fallen there was a stir and movement, and the wounded rose up +on arms and knees and turned on their sides, and raised their +hands, waving broken weapons, and crying in a strange, wearied +voice that yet had a ring of victory in it:</p> +<p>"Waeshael to Alfred the king!"</p> +<p>For the silence that had fallen, and the lessening shouts of the +pursuers, told them that they had won, and they were content.</p> +<p>Thereat Alfred flushed red, and I think that he almost wept, for +he turned from us. And then he spoke to the men who yet stood round +him, and said:</p> +<p>"Let every man who has any knowledge of care for the wounded, or +who has known a wound of his own and the way it was cared for, go +among these brave ones and help them."</p> +<p>Nor would he leave the place till he saw men going up and down +among the hurt, tending them as well as they could; and he was the +more content when he saw Bishop Sigehelm and many other clergy come +on the field from the rear, where he had bidden them stay. The +bishop had mail under his robes, having been eager to join in the +fight, as would Eahlstan, his great forerunner, have certainly +joined; but Alfred would not suffer him to do so.</p> +<p>Once more Guthrum tried to rally his men, when the flight bore +him to his camp at the hill foot, on the way across the fens to the +town. There was a sharp fight there, and Ethelnoth was wounded as +he led on his men; and thence the Danes fled to Bridgwater, making +no more delay. So close on them were our men that Guthrum's +housecarls closed the gates after their king on many of their +comrades, who fell under the Saxon spear in sight of safety. Nor +did we give them time to drive in the cattle that were gathered +from all the countryside to the meadows round the place.</p> +<p>Then came Thord to me and put me in mind of somewhat.</p> +<p>"Now is our work to be done, king. These Danes will take Hubba's +ships and be gone down the river next. We must stop them in some +way, for the king's plan is to starve them out, as it seems."</p> +<p>We had left the king at that time, for we would not suffer him +to join in pursuit, which has its dangers, if men turn desperate +and make a stand, as many did, dying like brave warriors that they +were. So I rode on quickly with my followers, and came to the river +bank below the bridge. The Danes were swarming on the ramparts of +the fortress like angry bees, and in the ships, which lay beneath +the walls, men were busy, even as Thord had guessed they would be, +making ready to sail when tide served. We could not reach them by +any means, for every boat had been taken from this side long ago, +when the first news of defeat was brought back by flying +horsemen.</p> +<p>Then Thord's face glowered under his helm, and he pointed to the +ship that was farthest from the bridge, and therefore likely to be +the first to start away when the tide was full. It was my own ship, +which they had got afloat.</p> +<p>"Thor's hammer smite them!" he growled; "they have launched the +old keel without finishing her painting--just as I left her. How +are we to stay their going off with her?"</p> +<p>"Is there a chain cable anywhere?" I asked.</p> +<p>"Not one in the place," he said; "and if we did get one across +the river, we should have to fight to keep the far end of it."</p> +<p>The tide was rising fast, and I thought we should surely lose +every ship, while Guthrum and his chiefs would escape us at the +same time. One might line the banks with archers, certainly, but +that would not stay the going. Evening was closing in, moreover. By +midnight they would be gone, and I was in a difficulty out of which +I could not see my way.</p> +<p>Suddenly Thord smote his hands together, and his face grew +brighter.</p> +<p>"I have it," he cried. "There is an old vessel that lies in a +creek a mile down the river. A great buss <a name="EndNote16anc" +href="#EndNote16sym" id="EndNote16anc"><sup>{xvi}</sup></a> she +is, and worth nothing; but she will float, and maybe will be afloat +now. If we can sink her across the channel in a place that I know, +not one of these ships will get away till she is raised."</p> +<p>Then I called every man to me whom I could see, and we went +quickly to the place where this buss was, and she was just afloat. +Thord knew where her tackle was kept, and he had the oars out--what +there were of them at least, for they were old and rotten enough. +Then we had to shove her off and get her boat into the water, and +the vessel itself floated up on the tide towards the narrow place +where she might best be sunk to block the channel against ships +that came from the town.</p> +<p>We had not gone far when there came a sound at which I started, +for it was nothing more or less than the quick beat of oars coming +down the river against the tide. Thord and I and eight men of my +own crew were in the buss, while I had maybe thirty men ashore who +were keeping pace with us along the bank. The rest of my own men +were with these, and one shouted that he could see the ship, and +that it was our own, crammed with men too.</p> +<p>Now at first it seemed as if the only thing for us to do was to +go ashore in the boat as quickly as we could and get away; but +Thord cried to me:</p> +<p>"Then will the Danes take our ship to sea, and we have lost her +for good. It should not be said of us that we let her go without a +blow struck to save her."</p> +<p>"Sink this hulk straightway, then," I said, falling to work, +with the axe I had in thy hand, on the lowest strakes. My men +leaped to work as well, and in two minutes the seams began to gape, +and then was a rush of water from broken planking that sent us over +the side and into the boat in hot haste.</p> +<p>Then we pulled for shore, towing the bows of the fast-sinking +buss with us till they grounded in the mud, and even as her stern +swung with the tide across the channel she lurched and sank.</p> +<p>"We should have bided in her and fought," growled Thord. "Now in +five minutes we shall see the bottom ripped out of our own ship by +our own deed."</p> +<p>But a foot of the bows and the mast of the buss stood out of the +water, and I thought the Danes would see these marks.</p> +<p>Even as we gained the shore our dragon stem swept round the bend +that had hidden us, and came on swiftly. Then the Danes saw us, and +those on the fore deck shouted, and the oars plashed wildly, and +many on the side next to us stopped altogether; and at the same +time the steersman saw the stem of the wreck, and, as I think, lost +his head between fear of it and the sudden appearance of the foe +whom he thought he had escaped. The larboard oars were going yet, +and the starboard had almost stopped. He paid no heed to it, and +the ship swung over. Then the tide caught her bows, and in a moment +she ran hard and fast on our bank, and the men in her fell right +and left with the shock.</p> +<p>I had seen what was coming, and so had Thord, and we ran our +best to meet her as she struck. The tide was a good one, and she +came well on the hard bank, and there was no need to tell my men +what to do. Before the Danes knew what had happened we were +climbing over the bows on board, and the Danes aft were leaping +into the river to get away from us.</p> +<p>Some few tried to fight; but there must have been two hundred +men packed along the gangways, and they could do nothing. They +threw themselves into the water like the rats that had left the old +buss even now, and we slew many, and the good ship was our own +again. Some of the Danes got ashore on the far bank, some were met +by our Saxons on this side, and but few got back to Bridgwater, for +the river had most of them.</p> +<p>Another ship was coming at this time, but those in her heard the +shouting and the cries; and it would seem that their hearts failed +them, for they went back before we could see more than the tall +mast above the banks from our decks.</p> +<p>Then we thought we might rest, for we were wearied out; but +Thord would not suffer us to do so till he had got the ship +carefully below the wreck, so that she was free. Had we waited for +the next tide we could not have done it, as it turned out; for the +rise of flood shortened quickly to the neap tides, and a bank of +mud grew round the sunken hull, making the channel impassable +altogether for the time, and so the last way of escape for Guthrum +and his men was barred.</p> +<p>So I thought we had done well, and left Thord and my men to +guard the ship and take her back to Combwich, where she would lie +safely in the creek, while I rode to Alfred, almost sleeping on my +wearied horse as I went.</p> +<p>There were two wrecks in that place in the morning; for they +brought down one of Hubba's ships in the dark on the next tide, and +she ran on the sunken stem of the buss, and went down almost at +once. After that no more attempt was made to fly by water.</p> +<p>Then began a siege that lasted for a fortnight, without anything +happening that is worth telling; for the fear of Alfred was on the +Danes, and they had not heart so much as to make one sally from the +gates.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_XIII" id="Chapter_XIII">Chapter XIII</a>. The +Greatest Victory.</h2> +<p>Now in a few days it was plain that Alfred held the Danes in the +hollow of his hand as it were, and could do what he would with +them. At first we looked for messengers from the place, to treat +with him for peace; but none came. From the town at times we could +hear shoutings and the noise of men who quarrelled, as if there +were divided counsels among them that led to blows. They were very +short of food also, because all their stores of cattle were left +outside the walls, as I have said, so that we fared the better for +their plundering while we waited.</p> +<p>At the end of the first week, therefore, Alfred sent a message +under flag of truce, and told the chiefs that he was willing to +hear what they would say; and next day Guthrum asked that some +chiefs might come and speak with him. But Alfred would not trust +the Danes enough to send any of his nobles into the town, and bade +Guthrum come out to the camp and say what he had to say. But he +would not. Then one day, when Alfred held counsel as to what was +best to be done to ensure lasting peace, I said that I thought Jarl +Osmund might be of use, for he could go between the two camps in +safety.</p> +<p>That seemed good to the king, and Heregar and I rode to find +him, crossing the tidal ford at Combwich, where we heard from +village folk who had returned that the Danish lord bided in +Heregar's house beyond the fort.</p> +<p>There I thought I should find Thora, and we went quickly. The +place looked very deserted, and when we came to the courtyard gates +it seemed more so, for the Maytime had sprinkled the gay-patterned +paving of grey and white shore pebbles with blades of grass and +weeds that sprang up between them everywhere for want of +tendance.</p> +<p>Only the Lady Alswythe and a few of her servants were there now, +for the Lady Etheldreda had taken Thora with her to Taunton when +she left the hills. It had not been so safe here, though there was +little plunder to bring the Danes to the place now. So I need not +say that I was grievously disappointed, though in the dismantled +hall sat Osmund, listlessly shaping a bow stave, and waiting for +what turn of fortune should take him next.</p> +<p>Very glad, as one might think, were both the lady and the jarl +for our coming, and we had to tell them all the tale of the working +of Alfred's plan, and of the great fight. And when that was heard, +we told the jarl of Alfred's wish to treat with Guthrum and the +other chiefs through him.</p> +<p>That Osmund would gladly do; indeed, he said that, in hopes of +being thus useful, he had stayed so near at hand.</p> +<p>So he and the thane talked long of the matter--for Alfred had +sent messages--while I spoke with the lady, of Thora mostly.</p> +<p>It did not seem to me that I had any part in the king's business +with the Danes, and so presently I thought that I could do no +better than ride to Taunton to see Thora, who I feared might be in +trouble or doubt as to my safety.</p> +<p>So I rode there with Kolgrim. At that time the scald was laid up +with a wound in the camp, and the king seemed to miss his presence, +and to care for his welfare as if he were his brother; but, indeed, +he made every man with whom he had to do feel as if his king were +his best friend.</p> +<p>There is not much need for me to tell what manner of welcome I +had at Taunton from Thora. As for Etheldreda, she would have me +tell her everything, and I sat with those two, until night came and +rest, talking of all the time past. But of the time to come Thora +said nothing, and once or twice when Etheldreda left us and we were +alone for a little while, so that I could try to plan out somewhat, +she would but turn the talk again.</p> +<p>In the morning I found out how this was. She had gathered from +Osmund somewhat of his thoughts about what Alfred's plan for me +might be, and was unhappy therefore, not wishing to stand in my way +to honour with the king. So she told me when I pressed her a little +to speak of what I would do; and when I said that there should be +nothing that I would let stand between us, she was the more +troubled yet.</p> +<p>So at last I went and found Etheldreda, and prayed her to come +and speak with Thora.</p> +<p>"Falling out already?" she said, laughing.</p> +<p>"Not so, but a greater trouble than that," I said, "one that +will need your help before it is mended."</p> +<p>"Ay, I suppose you could patch up a quarrel for yourselves," she +said. "What is this mighty trouble?"</p> +<p>So she came and sat by Thora, taking her hand and kissing her, +and we told her what Osmund's thoughts were.</p> +<p>"There is such enmity between Saxon and Dane," Thora said, "that +it is not likely that the king will trust one who will wed one of +his foe's daughters."</p> +<p>It was plain that Etheldreda thought the same; but she cheered +us both, saying that she would do all that she could to help us, +and that Odda would not be behind in the matter. After all, if we +were to wait for a while, things might be very different after a +little time of peace. And so we were content.</p> +<p>So I went back to Alfred next day, and when he heard where I had +been he smiled a little, and said:</p> +<p>"One thing I must tell you, my Norseman, and that is that our +thanes who know little of you will be jealous that you should have +much dealing with any Dane as yet."</p> +<p>Which made me the more uneasy; for though I might think that the +king, at all events, was not displeased with me, others, and the +wishes of others, might be too strong for him to go against.</p> +<p>But my affairs are little things compared with what was on hand +at this time, and on the same day Alfred spoke to me about somewhat +that he would have me do for him.</p> +<p>In the town the Danes were in the greatest straits by this time, +for by no means could they get stores of any sort to them, so close +was the watch round the place. Osmund had been in and out once or +twice, and Guthrum had received him well enough, and it was thought +that there would be no long delay now before the siege was at an +end by the submission of the Danes to any terms they might gain, +and the more so that an assault on the fortress would surely have +been successful, ending in the fall of all its defenders.</p> +<p>But Alfred was most willing to be merciful, and he had bidden +Osmund tell Guthrum and his chiefs that if he might name twelve +hostages for himself the rest should go free, while Guthrum should +hold the East Anglian kingdom for him as under-king.</p> +<p>But this was what Alfred would have me do.</p> +<p>"One other thing there is," he said. "If there is to be any +brotherhood between us, it must be as between Christians. The ways +of persecution must be forgotten and that cannot come to pass until +the chiefs at least have accepted the faith."</p> +<p>"It is strange to me, my king," I said, "that Guthrum, who has +been in England for ten years, is not Christian by this time."</p> +<p>"Ay, but his hosts are heathen," the king answered. "Now I think +I can speak to you as if no longer a heathen at least?"</p> +<p>"As a Christian, my king," I answered.</p> +<p>"Well, then," he said, smiling on me, "go and speak to Guthrum +and tell him what I have said. I think that he will listen to you +better than if I sent a priest or even Bishop Sigehelm. Warrior may +speak to warrior plainly."</p> +<p>Now this was a hard thing for me to do, as it seemed. Maybe it +was the hardest thing he could have asked me. But it was in my mind +that I could not but go to Guthrum and give the message, else would +I seem to deny the faith that I loved. Alfred saw at once that I +was troubled in some way, and I believe that he knew well what the +seeming doubt was.</p> +<p>"Once you brought a token of good to me," he said. "Now that was +all unknowing. Go now and take a message of good to Guthrum openly, +and have no fear."</p> +<p>"What shall I say?"</p> +<p>"Mind not that at all," he answered; "what is needed will come +to you."</p> +<p>So I said that I would go if Harek might come with me, for his +words were ever ready. But Alfred would not suffer that. I must go +without help from a scald, taking only my own words; and at last I +consented, though indeed my only fear was that I might not succeed +by reason of my slowness of speech.</p> +<p>Then I went to Osmund, and told him that I was to go into the +town with him next day, for that is how Alfred planned for me; and +I told him also what my part in the business was to be. Whereon he +surprised me.</p> +<p>"I do not know that your errand is so hopeless as you seem to +think," he said. "Guthrum has harmed no Christians in East Anglia +since he was king there."</p> +<p>"Well," I answered, "I hope it may be easy, though I doubt +it."</p> +<p>I would not say more then, but, being anxious, went and spoke +long with Harek. The brave scald's wounds were deep, though he had +said little of them. Some say that he saved the life of Ethelnoth +at the time when that ealdorman was struck down, and that also is +Ethelnoth's story; though the scald says that if so it was by +accident, and less worth speaking of than many braver deeds that +were wrought and went untold that day.</p> +<p>"Here have I been in England but six months or so, and I have +more to sing of than ever I learned with Harald Fairhair," he said +one day, as he made songs on his bed while his wounds were +healing.</p> +<p>And he spoke the truth. Never was a winter so full of deeds +wrought by a king and a valiant people that were worth a scald's +remembrance.</p> +<p>Now Osmund had a last message from Alfred that day, and in the +morning we went together to the bridge. There Guthrum's own +courtmen met us, and they took us into the fortress, beyond which +lies the town, so that we saw little of what straits the host might +be in by this time. In the fortress itself all seemed in order at +least; and there was a guard set at the door of the well-built hut +where the Danish king was, as if some state were yet kept up.</p> +<p>There Guthrum welcomed us, and with him were many chiefs, on +whose faces was the same care-worn look that Osmund had borne when +I saw him at Exeter before Alfred.</p> +<p>"Two messages come to you today," Osmund said; "one by my mouth, +and the other by that of King Ranald Vemundsson, who is with me. I +think you may hear both, and answer them both favourably."</p> +<p>Guthrum made no reply, but took his seat at the upper end of the +one room the hut had; and all the chiefs sat also, leaving us +messengers standing.</p> +<p>Then said Osmund:</p> +<p>"I think it right that I should stand in the presence of my +king, but the son of King Vemund should not do so in any less +presence than that of his overlord."</p> +<p>Thereat Guthrum smiled a little.</p> +<p>"I have heard that Harald of Norway came to blows with his +brother kings because they would not stand before him, and that +others have left that kingdom because they did not choose to do so. +Sit down, King Ranald. Your father's name was well known to all of +us in the old days. I am glad to see his son, though maybe I should +not say so."</p> +<p>"We would rather that he were on our side," said one of the +other chiefs.</p> +<p>Then they set places for both of us, and we waited for Guthrum's +word.</p> +<p>"Well," he said, wearily enough, "let us hear what King Alfred +says."</p> +<p>"Few are his words," said Osmund:</p> +<p>"'Let Guthrum suffer me to choose any hostages that I will for +myself, let him swear to keep the peace hereafter as my under-king +beyond Thames, doing homage to me, and he shall go hence with his +host in honour.' There is also the message of Ranald to add +hereto."</p> +<p>Now I thought that the faces of the chiefs showed that they +thought these terms very light; but they said nothing as yet.</p> +<p>Guthrum turned to me.</p> +<p>"Well, King Ranald?"</p> +<p>"Alfred the king bids me say that he would fain treat with you +hereafter as a brother altogether. And that can only be if the +great trouble between Dane and Saxon is removed--that is, if +Guthrum becomes a Christian."</p> +<p>Now I expected some outburst of scorn and wrath on this, but +instead of that a silence fell, in which the chiefs looked at one +another; and Guthrum gazed at me steadfastly, so that I felt my +face growing hot under his eyes, because I knew I must say more, +and that of myself and my own wishes most likely.</p> +<p>Then Guthrum said slowly:</p> +<p>"Why has he not sent some priest to say this?"</p> +<p>"Because he thought that a warrior would listen best to a +brother warrior," I answered.</p> +<p>"Ay, that is true," said the king. "Are you a Christian, +therefore?"</p> +<p>"I am as yet unbaptized," I said. "I have taken the prime +signing on me, as have many others; but I shall certainly seek +baptism shortly."</p> +<p>"You came here as a heathen, then?"</p> +<p>"As a heathen altogether, except that I had no hatred of +Christians," I answered, not quite seeing what the king would +know.</p> +<p>"What turned your mind so far from the old gods that you should +be a fit messenger on such a matter to us?"</p> +<p>"I have learned from Alfred and Neot," I answered, "and I know +that I have found what is true."</p> +<p>Then Guthrum turned to Osmund.</p> +<p>"What say you, jarl? you have been with Alfred also."</p> +<p>"When Ranald is baptized, I shall be so with him," the jarl +answered simply.</p> +<p>And that was the first word thereof that I had heard from +him.</p> +<p>Then an older chief spoke sharply to us.</p> +<p>"What profit do you look to make thereout--either of you?"</p> +<p>"Certainty of better things both in this life and in that to +come," I answered.</p> +<p>"Ay, so they always say," the chief growled; "but what place +with Alfred in return?"</p> +<p>"It is likely that I shall gain no place with him," I said. +"Jarl Osmund knows that I do not count on that."</p> +<p>"Ay," said Osmund, "I know it. Nor will any man think that I +seek honour at Alfred's hands."</p> +<p>Then Guthrum rose up, and spoke gravely and yet very +determinedly, as if this was no new matter to him.</p> +<p>"Here, chiefs, are two good and tried warriors who willingly +choose Alfred's faith. You and I have heard thereof since we were +in England; and many a man have we seen die, since we have been +here, because he would not give it up. I mind me of Edmund, the +martyred king, whom Ingvar, our great chief, slew, and of Humbert +the bishop, and many more lesser folk. Tell me truly how much you +have thought of the Asir in these last years?"</p> +<p>But none answered. It was with them as with me: the Asir were +not of England.</p> +<p>"One thing," said Guthrum, "has gone against our taking up the +English faith--we have thought the words of peace have made men +cowardly. Now we know that is not so. Here is one who withstood +Hubba, and round the walls watch Christian men who have beaten us +sturdily."</p> +<p>Then he stayed his words for a little, and his voice sank, and +he looked round and added:</p> +<p>"Moreover, the words of the new faith are good. I will accept +King Alfred's brotherhood altogether."</p> +<p>Then one or two more of the younger chiefs spoke, and said that +they would do so also; but again the elder warrior spoke +fiercely.</p> +<p>"Is this forced on us as part of the peace making?"</p> +<p>"It is not," I answered. "It is, as I have said, the wish for +brotherhood altogether."</p> +<p>Then said Guthrum:</p> +<p>"That is enough. I do not think that we need be ashamed to be +conquered altogether by King Alfred."</p> +<p>"One more word," said the old chief. "Are we to have no +hostages?"</p> +<p>"There can be no exchange of hostages," said Osmund.</p> +<p>"Things are all on the side of the Saxon," he growled.</p> +<p>"Ay, they are, in more ways than that," said Guthrum. "We have +no power to say a word. It is in my mind that we could not have +looked for such mildness at the king's hands. For there is no +denying that we are at his mercy.</p> +<p>"What say you, as a stranger, Ranald?"</p> +<p>"I have known the ways of Harald of Norway," I answered. "I +think that he would not have left a man of this host alive."</p> +<p>Whereon the old warrior laughed shortly, and was silent while +Guthrum bade us go back to Alfred and thank the king for his word, +saying that an answer should be given as soon as the word of the +host had been taken in open Thing.</p> +<p>So Alfred won Guthrum to the faith, and greatly did he rejoice +when he heard what the Danish king had said. I think he was more +glad yet when he knew that Osmund would become Christian also, and +he urged us both to be baptized at once.</p> +<p>"Let us be so with Guthrum," I asked.</p> +<p>"That will be fitting," he answered, "for I think you have won +him over."</p> +<p>But I hold that Guthrum and more of his chiefs had been won by +the deaths of those martyrs of whom he spoke long before the choice +was set before him. One cannot tell how this was wrought in the +mind of the Danes altogether by the hand of God. Some will ever +say, no doubt, that they took the Cross on them by necessity; but I +know that it was not so. Nor have their lives since that time given +any reason for the thought.</p> +<p>Then Alfred asked the name of that old warrior who withstood us, +and Osmund told him.</p> +<p>"I will have that chief as a hostage," the king said, "for I +think that he is worth taming."</p> +<p>"I think that King Alfred's hostages are not in any way to be +pitied," Osmund said.</p> +<p>"Save that they are kept from home and friends, I would have +them as happy as may be," the king answered; "but I would have none +presume on what mercy came to you, Jarl Osmund, for the sake of the +Christmastide message."</p> +<p>"I think that none will do so," Osmund said. "There is full +knowledge among my kin that you showed mercy when justice was about +to be done, and well they know that your kindness was not weakness. +It is likely that the mercy shown here also will do more for peace +than would even destruction of your enemies."</p> +<p>So it seemed at last, for on the fourteenth day of the siege the +Danes accepted the king's terms with one consent. And more than +that, Guthrum and thirty of his chiefs asked that they might be +baptized; which was a wonder to all of our host.</p> +<p>Now I have said nothing about the life in the great camp before +Bridgwater, for it had nothing of much note to me, though it was +pleasant enough. I think there was some jealousy of me among the +younger thanes at one time; but it passed because I would not +notice it, and also because I took no sort of authority on me, +being only the king's guest and warrior as yet. But I did find a +few young thanes of Odda's following who knew somewhat of the sea, +and I was wont to talk with them often of the ships and the like, +until I knew they would be glad to take to the viking's path with +me in the king's ships, bringing their men with them. And often +Alfred spoke with me of the matter, until I was sure that he would +have me stay.</p> +<p>It was but a few days after the peace had been made when Alfred +went to a great house he had at Aller, which lies right amidst the +marshes south of Athelney. We had saved that house and the church +by our constant annoyance of the Danes, with many another house and +village along the fen to which they dared not come for fear of us +at last. Guthrum was to come to him there, and I think that he +chose the place because there at least was nought to bring thoughts +of defeat to the Danes, and there they could be treated as guests, +apart from the great camp and fortress. Great were the preparations +there for the high festival that should be when Alfred himself +should take Guthrum to the font.</p> +<p>Then came Neot on foot, with Guerir his fellow hermit, from +Cornwall, to be present; and Harek and I rejoiced as much as the +king that he had come.</p> +<p>"I think I must answer for you two at the font," he said.</p> +<p>"For Kolgrim also, I pray you, Father Neot," said I; "for he +will be baptized with us."</p> +<p>"Ay, for honest Kolgrim also," he answered; "but what of old +Thord, my reprover?"</p> +<p>"He will have nought to do with the new faith," I said. "But at +least he does not blame us for leaving the old gods. He says he is +too old to learn what we younger men think good."</p> +<p>"I will seek him and speak with him again," Neot said. "I think +I owe him somewhat."</p> +<p>Then we thanked the holy man for the honour that he was showing +us; but he put thanks aside, saying that we were his sons in the +truth, and that the honour was his rather.</p> +<p>Now in the seven weeks that we waited for Guthrum at Aller, +while the priests whom Alfred sent taught him and his chiefs what +they should know rightly before baptism, Osmund and I were wont to +go to Taunton, across the well-known fens, and bide for days at a +time in Odda's house there, and we told Thora for what we +waited.</p> +<p>She had come to England, when she was quite a child, with the +first women who came into East Anglia, and already she knew much of +Christianity from the Anglian thralls who had tended her. And when +she had heard more of late from Etheldreda and Alswythe, she had +longed to be of the same faith as these friends of hers, and now +rejoiced openly.</p> +<p>"Ranald," she said, "I had not dared to speak of this to my +father, but I was wont to fear the old gods terribly. They have no +place for a maiden in their wild heaven. There are many more Danish +ladies who long for this change, even as I have longed. Yet I still +fear the wrath of Odin for you and my father."</p> +<p>"The old gods are nought--they have no power at all," I said, +bravely enough; though even yet I had a little fear in thus defying +them, as it seemed.</p> +<p>"Then I will dread them no more," she answered. "Nor do I think +that you need fear them."</p> +<p>So I comforted her, and bade her ask more of Etheldreda, who +would gladly teach her; and the matter passed by in gladness, as a +trouble put away, for she and I were at one in this. I will say +that I had half feared that she whom I loved would have been angry +with me.</p> +<p>Now on that night Osmund and I and Harek would ride to Heregar's +house over the shoulder of the Quantocks, with some message we had +to take to him from Alfred; and we went without any attendants, for +the twelve miles or so would have no risk to any one, and the +summer evening was long and bright.</p> +<p>Yet we were later in starting away than we should have been, and +so when we were among the wilder folds of the hills, where the bare +summits rise from wooded slopes and combes, we were overtaken by a +heavy thunderstorm that came up swiftly from the west behind us, +darkening the last sunset light with black clouds through which the +lightning flickered ceaselessly.</p> +<p>We rode on steadily, looking for some place of shelter; but it +grew very dark, and the narrow track was rough, and full of loose +stones that made the going slow. Presently the clouds settled down +on the hill crest and wrapped us round, and the storm broke afresh +on us, with thunder that came even as the darkness was changed to +blue brightness with the lightning flashes that played around us +almost unceasing. There was no rain yet and no wind, and the heat +grew with the storm.</p> +<p>Soon the nearness of the flashes scared our horses, and we had +to dismount and lead them, and in the darkness we lost the little +track among the heavy heather. And then there seemed to me to be a +new sound rising among the thunder, and I called to Harek, bidding +him hearken.</p> +<p>It came from seaward, and swelled up louder and louder and +nearer, until it passed over our heads--the yelp and bay of Odin's +wild hounds, and the trample and scream of his horses and their +dead riders. A great fear fell on me, so that the cold sweat stood +on my forehead, while the hunt seemed everywhere above us for a +moment, and then passed inland among the thunder that hardly +drowned its noises.</p> +<p>Then Osmund the jarl cried out:</p> +<p>"That was Odin's hunt. I have heard it before, and ill came +thereof. He hunts us who forsake him."</p> +<p>And out of the darkness Harek answered, without one shake in his +brave voice:</p> +<p>"Odin's hunt in truth it was, and the ill comes to Odin, who +must leave this land before the might of the Cross. We who bear the +sign of might he cannot touch."</p> +<p>Then I remembered myself, and the fear passed from me, and I was +ashamed. I had no doubt now that there was need for Odin's wrath, +seeing that he was surely defeated. And Osmund was silent also, +thinking doubtless the same things; for he had taken on him the +prime signing long ago, and had forgotten it maybe.</p> +<p>Then we went on, and the storm grew wilder. Harek sang now, but +what the words were I cannot tell. I think they were some that he +had learned from Alfred.</p> +<p>Now we began to go down the southern slope of the highest neck +of the hill, as it seemed, though we could not rightly say where we +were, and in a little silence that came between the thunderclaps I +heard the rattle of hoofs as of another rider coming after us, +going faster than we dared.</p> +<p>"Here is one who knows the hill well," I said; "maybe he will +guide us."</p> +<p>And then the lightning showed the horseman close to us. He +reined up, and cried in a great voice:</p> +<p>"Ho, strangers! are you wandering here?"</p> +<p>"Ay; we are lost till the storm passes. Can you guide us to +shelter before the rain comes?" I said.</p> +<p>"Whence come you?" he asked.</p> +<p>"We are Alfred's men from Taunton--going to the thane's house at +Cannington."</p> +<p>"Ay, is that so? Then I will guide you. Follow," he said, and he +rode on.</p> +<p>One could see him plainly when the lightning came, and it showed +a tall man, grey bearded, and clad in a long hooded horseman's +cloak, under which gleamed golden-shining mail. Well mounted on a +great horse he was also, and its sides were white with foam on the +dark skin, as though he had ridden hard.</p> +<p>We mounted and went after him, with the lightning playing round +us and glancing from the mail of our leader as his arm threw the +cloak back over his shoulder from time to time. He led us along the +hill crest northward, crossing the places where the fire beacons +had been; and we wondered whither he was taking us, for shelter +here was none. And now the storm grew wilder, with the wind and +chill of coming rain.</p> +<p>Then he turned downhill, riding fast until we came to a place +where rocks lay loose and scattered everywhere, and our horses +stumbled among them. There he reined up suddenly, holding up his +hand, and shouting through the uproar of wind and thunder:</p> +<p>"Hold, for your lives! Hearken!"</p> +<p>We stayed motionless, listening, and again we heard the cry and +clang of Odin's hunt, coming now from inland over us, and I made +the sign of the Cross on my breast, in fear thereof.</p> +<p>"Ho for Odin's hunt!" the strange man cried, in his mighty +voice. "Hear it, Alfred's men, for you shall join it and ride the +wind with him if you defy him."</p> +<p>"We fear him not," said Harek; "he has no power over us."</p> +<p>"Has he not?" the man roared, facing full upon us; and as he did +so the lightning glared on him, and I saw that his drawn sword was +aloft, and that from its point glowed a blue flame, and that blue +flames also seemed to start from his horse's ears. One-eyed the man +was also, and he glowered on us under shaggy eyebrows.</p> +<p>Harek saw also, and he raised his hand towards the man and +signed the holy sign, crying:</p> +<p>"Speak! who are you?"</p> +<p>Thereat the man gave a hoarse roar as of rage, and his horse +reared, trampling wildly on the loose rocks, and, lo, he was gone +from before our eyes as if he had never been, while the thunder +crashed above us and below us everywhere!</p> +<p>"Odin! the Cross has conquered!" Harek cried again, in a voice +that was full of triumph; and the blood rushed wildly through me at +the thought of what I had seen.</p> +<p>Then Harek's horse shifted, and his hoof struck a great stone +that rolled as if going far down the hill, and then stopped, and +maybe after one could count five came a crash and rattle underneath +us that died away far down somewhere in the bowels of the hill. And +at that Osmund shouted suddenly:</p> +<p>"Back to the hill; we are on the brink of the old mine shaft! +Back, and stay not!"</p> +<p>Nor did we wait, but we won back to the higher ground before we +drew rein.</p> +<p>"We have met with Odin himself," Osmund said when we stopped and +the thunder let him speak.</p> +<p>"Ay, and have driven him hellwards by the might of the holy +sign," said Harek. "Nearly had he lured us to death, unbaptized as +we are, in that place."</p> +<p>"Come," said Osmund; "I know where we are now. We are well-nigh +under the great fort, and there is a farm near at hand."</p> +<p>We found that soon and the rain came, and the storm spent its +fury and passed as we sat under cover in the stables waiting. Then +came the moonlight and calm, and the sweetness of rain-soaked earth +and flowers refreshed, and we went on our way wondering, and came +to the thane's with the first daylight. And I thought that our +faces were pale and marked with the terror of the things through +which we had gone, and maybe also with a new light of victory +<a name="EndNote17anc" href="#EndNote17sym" id= +"EndNote17anc"><sup>{xvii}</sup></a>.</p> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Chapter_XIV" id="Chapter_XIV">Chapter XIV</a>. King +Alfred's Will.</h2> +<p>When we came back to Aller, the first thing that I did was to +tell Neot of our meeting with Odin while his wild hunt went on +through the tempest, telling him how that I had feared unwisely, +and also of Harek's brave withstanding of the danger.</p> +<p>"It is said that our forefathers met Odin in like wise in the +days of the first christening of our race," he said. "I do not know +what to make thereof, seeing that I hold Odin as nought; but I +think this, that in some way Satan tried to destroy you before you +were baptized. Wherefore, whether Odin or mortal man drew you to +that place, I have no doubt what power saved you."</p> +<p>But Sigehelm thought that we had met with Satan himself in the +shape of the old god, and so also thought Guerir the hermit, who +told strange tales of like appearings among the Welsh hills where +he was born.</p> +<p>As for Alfred the king, he marvelled, and said even as Neot. But +he added this:</p> +<p>"I know the mine shaft well, and it is in my mind that some day +Odin's bones will be found at the bottom thereof. Nevertheless +there is more than mortal in what has happened to you by way of +trial."</p> +<p>Now came the time when Guthrum and his thirty comrades should +seek the king, and I have no words to tell of that time when in the +peaceful church we heathen stood white-robed and unarmed altogether +at the font, while Sigehelm, with a wonderful gathering of priests, +enlisted us as warriors of the Cross. It was, as all men think, the +most mighty victory that Alfred had ever gained.</p> +<p>At that time he chose Guthrum as his own son in the faith, and +named him Athelstan <a name="EndNote18anc" href= +"#EndNote18sym" id="EndNote18anc"><sup>{xviii}</sup></a>, as the +first and most noble stone of the new building up of the church +among the Danes. Neot would not have our names changed, for he said +we had wronged the faith in them not at all. Odda stood for Osmund, +as Neot for us.</p> +<p>After that was joyous feasting, and the loosing of the chrism +bands at Alfred's royal town of Wedmore, whither we went in bright +procession through the long summer day. Four days we bided there, +till we knew that the great Danish host was on its march homewards, +and then Guthrum and his comrades must join it. But before he went +he accepted from Alfred the gifts that an under-king should take +from his overlord, and they were most splendid. All men knew by +those tokens given and taken that Alfred was king indeed, and that +Guthrum did but hold place by his sufferance. Those two parted in +wondrous friendship with the new bond of the faith woven round +them, and the host passed from Wessex and was gone.</p> +<p>Yet, as ever, many a long year must pass by before the track of +the Danes should be blotted out from the fair land they had laid +waste. Everywhere was work to hand on burnt hall and homestead, +ruined church, and wasted monastery. There was nought that men +grieved over more than the burning of King Ine's church at +Glastonbury, for that had been the pride of all the land. Once, +after the Chippenham flight, the monks had dared to go out in sad +procession to meet the fierce raiders at the long dike that bars +the way to Avalon, and for that time they had won safety for the +place--maybe by the loss of their treasures given as ransom, or, as +some say, by the power of fearless and unarmed men; for there were +men in the Danish host whose minds were noble, and might well be +touched thereby. But Hubba's men could not be withheld after they +had lost their mighty leader, and the place must feel their fury of +revenge.</p> +<p>Now after the host was gone we went back to Taunton, and there +Alfred called together his Witan, that he might set all things in +order with their help; and at that time, before the levies were +dismissed, he bade me seek out such men as would take to the ships +as his paid seamen. Therein I had no hard task, for from the ruined +coast towns came seafarers, homeless and lonely, asking nought +better than to find a place in the king's fleet, and first of all +were the Parret-mouth men and my fisher of Wareham. Presently, with +one consent, the Witan made me leader of the king's Wessex sea +levies, offering me the rank and fee of an English ealdorman, with +power to demand help in the king's name from all sea-coast sheriffs +and port reeves in whatever was needed for the ships, being +answerable to the throne only for what I should do. And that I +accepted willingly for love of Alfred, who was my friend, and for +the sake of comradeship with those valiant men who had fought +beside me when Hubba fell, and at Edington.</p> +<p>Then must I set myself to my new charge, having nought to do +with all the inland work that was before the king; and when the +next day's business was over, I went to tell him of this wish of +mine, and of some other matters that were on my mind whereof one +may easily guess.</p> +<p>Alfred sat in his private chamber in the great house that King +Ine built, and on the table before him were a great ink horn and +other writing gear, and beside him sat on a low stool his chaplain, +reading to him out of a great book while the king wrote. The rough +horn cage wherein was a candle, that he had planned in wind-swept +Athelney, stood close at hand, against the time of dusk that was +near. Ever was Alfred planning things like this, even in his +greatest troubles; and therein he was wise, for it is not good to +keep the mind full of heavy things alone. Moreover, as we wondered +at his skilful devices in these little things, we took heart from +his cheerful pleasure in them.</p> +<p>When the chamberlain brought me in, the great book was put +aside, and the pen set down, and the king looked up at me with his +bright smile.</p> +<p>"Welcome, my ship thane," he said. "Come and sit here beside me. +I have somewhat to read to you."</p> +<p>So I sat down wondering, and he turned back to some place in his +writing, and took the little knife that lay by him--for he had lost +his jewelled book staff in Athelney--and running its point along +the words, read to me from the writings of some old Roman what he +had been busy putting into good Saxon:</p> +<p>"Now when the Roman folk would make a fleet hastily, and had no +rowers, nor time to train them rightly, they built stages like to +the oar benches of a ship in a certain lake, and so taught the men +the swing and catch of the long oars."</p> +<p>"Will not that plan serve us, Ranald?" he said.</p> +<p>"Ay, lord," I answered, laughing. "In good truth, if a man can +learn to keep time, and swing rightly, and back water, and the +like, on such a staging, it is somewhat. But it will be hard work +pulling against dead water from a stage that moves not. Nor will +there be the roll and plunge of waves that must be met."</p> +<p>"Nor the sore sickness whereof Odda speaks," Alfred said, with +his eyes twinkling. "But I think that if the Romans found the plan +good, it will be so for us."</p> +<p>So we talked of this for a while, and I will say now that in +after days we tried it, and the plan worked well enough, at least +in the saving of time. Alfred's book learning was ever used for the +good of his people, and this was but one way in which he found +ready counsel for them.</p> +<p>This was pleasant talk enough, and neither I nor the king grew +weary thereof, but the good monk slept at last, and presently the +darkness fell, and Alfred dismissed him.</p> +<p>One came and lit the torches on the wall, and still we spoke of +my work, until at last Alfred said:</p> +<p>"So you must be busy, and I am glad. When will you set out, and +where will you go first?"</p> +<p>Now what I wanted to ask him was where Osmund the jarl had gone. +He had ridden to Taunton from Aller, that he might be present at +Thora's christening, and that their chrism loosing <a name= +"EndNote19anc" href="#EndNote19sym" id= +"EndNote19anc"><sup>{xix}</sup></a> might be held at the same +time; and I had looked to find both here, but they were gone. Nor +had they left any word for me, and I was troubled about that. So I +was about to tell the king what was in my mind concerning Thora +first of all, and my heart began to beat strangely. But he waited +not for me to answer him.</p> +<p>"Stay," he said, smiling a little. "Before you go I must have a +hostage from my wild viking, lest he be, as it were, let loose on +the high seas where I cannot reach him."</p> +<p>Then he laughed, at my puzzled face, I suppose, and I saw that +he had some jest that pleased him.</p> +<p>"What hostage can I give, lord king?" I said. "Shall I leave +Harek and his harp with you?"</p> +<p>"Harek would charm our ears, and would escape," Alfred answered. +"Nay, but I must give you house and lands for a home, and therein +you shall leave a fair wife, whose loneliness will bring you ashore +now and then."</p> +<p>I thought there was more to come, and I liked not this at all, +for it went too closely with my fears of what might be. So I bowed, +and answered nothing as yet, while he looked laughingly at me.</p> +<p>"Why," he cried, "half my thanes would have gone wild with joy +if I had promised them either half of what I have said I would give +to you. Are you so fond of the longships and the restless waves +that you will not be bound to the shore?"</p> +<p>"Nay, my king," I said; "but I cannot yet rightly understand all +that you mean for me."</p> +<p>"Well, it means that I must find you a rich wife, as I think I +can. What say you to that fair lady of Exeter town and +Taunton--Odda's daughter, Etheldreda?"</p> +<p>"My king," I answered, somewhat over-gladly maybe, "Ethelnoth of +Somerset, my good comrade, might have some grudge against me if I +cast favouring eyes in that direction. Let this bide for a little +while, I pray you, King Alfred. Yet I would not have you think me +ungrateful, for indeed I know well what kindness is in your thought +for me."</p> +<p>"Nay, but I have it in my mind that you were fond of going to +Taunton not so long since, and one might well think that a maiden's +hair drew you. Well, if Ethelnoth has outdone you there, I am sorry +for your sake, not his. Cheer up, nevertheless. There are more +maidens and well dowered in our broad Wessex coasts, and I am +minded to see how far you will obey your new overlord."</p> +<p>"This is great kindness, King Alfred," I answered; "but we +Northmen are apt to keep some matters wherein to prove our freedom. +I pray you not to press this on me."</p> +<p>"Faith," he said, as if to himself, "this viking might be in +love already, so wrathful grows he--</p> +<p>"Now, Ranald, it is true that I have set my mind on your wedding +a maiden who is rich, and dowered with a coast town, and a good +harbour, moreover, where you might keep all your ships under your +own eye. I would not have you disappoint me so soon."</p> +<p>Then I said plainly,</p> +<p>"King Alfred, I am loth to do so. But from the very first day +that I set foot in England there has been one maiden whose ways +have seemed to be bound up with my own, and I can wed none but her. +If it does not seem good to you that I should do so now, let me +wait till times have grown easier between Saxon and Dane. I think +that you may know well that I shall fight none the worse for you if +I must strive to win your consent."</p> +<p>"That is straightforward," he said, smiling as if he would seem +content. "Let it be so. But it is only fair that before we close +this bargain you should see the well-dowered fair lady of whom I +speak."</p> +<p>"I will do so if this matter is unknown to her," I answered, +"else would be trouble, perhaps, and discomfort. But it is of no +use. I have eyes and heart but for that one. Do I know the lady +already, perhaps?"</p> +<p>"I believe that you may do so," Alfred said, looking grieved, in +a strange way, as if he were half minded to laugh at me for all his +seeming vexation. "Odda says that you do, and so also says +Etheldreda. Her name is Thora, daughter of Jarl Osmund, and she +will have Wareham town and Poole in right of her marriage, as dower +to her and to my sea captain."</p> +<p>So spoke the king quickly, and then he could make pretence no +longer, but laughed joyously, putting his hands on my shoulders and +shaking me a little, while he cried:</p> +<p>"Ay, Ranald; I did but play with you. True lover you are indeed, +as I thought. If you are faithful to the king as to the maiden of +your choice, both she and I are happy, and it is well."</p> +<p>Then I knew not how to thank him; but he said that Etheldreda +and Odda, Heregar and the Lady Alswythe, and maybe Guthrum also, as +Thora's guardian, were to be thanked as well.</p> +<p>"You have found many friends here in England already, Ranald my +cousin," Alfred said. "Wait until you meet some gathering of them +all at Wareham, presently perhaps, where Osmund and Thora are +preparing for a wedding--and then make a great thanking if you +will, and save words. But I wonder that I have never heard of this +matter from you before, for we have been close comrades."</p> +<p>"You must have heard thereof today, my king," I answered; "and +you were but beforehand with me. I could speak of such things now +that peace has come. Yet I feared that you would be against my +wedding a Danish lady."</p> +<p>"It was a natural thought," answered Alfred; "but Thora and +Osmund are ours, surely. Perhaps I should have doubted were your +mind set on any other. But I have no fears for you."</p> +<p>Then he pondered a little, and went on:</p> +<p>"You say that peace has come. So it has--for a time; and had we +to do only with the force that is in England now, I think it would +grow and strengthen. We cannot drive out the Danes, and there is +room in England for both them and us, and in the days to come the +difference of race will be forgotten--not in our time, Ranald, but +hereafter, as long years go by. Some day one of my line, if God +will, shall reign alone over a united England, stronger for the new +blood that has come among us. But it is a great charge that I give +to you, Ranald. What we have to fear are the new hosts that come +from Denmark, and only a strong fleet can stay them from our +shores. I can deal with those who are here, and these in time will +help me against fresh comers to the land. There is that in English +soil that makes every settler an Englishman in heart. But there is +warfare before us yet, and the fleet must break the force of the +storm, if it cannot altogether turn it aside."</p> +<p>Then his grave voice changed, and he laughed.</p> +<p>"Heavy things are these to speak in the ears of a bridegroom, +but you know all I mean. Now go your ways, and seek Odda, who will +rejoice to see you; for word comes from him that his master, Thord +the viking, is saying hard things to him because the men do not +come in readily to man the ships. At the summer's end I shall be in +Winchester, and thence I will come to Wareham to see the fleet, and +your wedding also. Go now, and all good go with you."</p> +<p>So Alfred the king set me forth in brotherly wise, speaking on +the morrow to my men to bid them serve him and England well under +me. And after that all came to pass as the king had planned, and at +the summer's end there was a bright wedding for us in Wareham town, +while in the wide haven rode at anchor the best fleet that England +had ever seen.</p> +<p>So that is how I came to be called "King Alfred's Viking," and +made this land my home. What this Wessex fleet of mine has done +since those days has been written by others in better words than I +can compass; and Harek, whom they call "King Alfred's Scald" +nowadays, has made song of what he has seen at my side in English +waters; and more he may have to make yet, for the North has not yet +sent forth all her hosts. Only I will say this, that if we have not +been altogether able to stay the coming of new Danish fleets to the +long seaboard that must needs lie open to them here and there till +our own fleets are greater, at least they know that the host may no +longer come and go as they will, for Alfred's ships have to be +reckoned with.</p> +<p>Now of ourselves I will add that Thora and I have many friends, +but the best and closest are those whom we made in the days when +Hubba came and fell under the shadow of the Quantock Hills, and +they do not forget us.</p> +<p>Into our house sometimes come Heregar and Ethered, Denewulf the +wise and humble, Odda, and many more, sure of welcome. Only the +loved presence of Neot the holy is wanting, for he died in Cornwall +in that year of the end of the troubles, and I think that in him I +lost more than any save Alfred himself.</p> +<p>Osmund went back to East Anglia for a time, but there he grew +wearied with the wrangling of the Danish chiefs as they shared out +the new land between them; so he bides with us, finding all his +pleasure in the life of farm and field, which is ever near to the +heart of a Dane. With him goes old Thord, grumbling at the thralls +in strange sea language, and yet well loved. Not until he was +wounded sorely in a sea fight we had and won under the Isle of +Wight would he leave the war deck; but even now he is the first on +board when the ships come home, and he is the one who orders all +for winter quarters or for sailing.</p> +<p>Now for long I would that I might look once more on Einar of the +Orkneys, my kind foster father, who still bided there in peace, +hearing of him now and then as some Norse ship, on her way to join +Rolf's fleet in the new land of the Northmen beyond our narrow +seas, put into our haven for repair, perhaps after the long voyage, +or to see if King Alfred would hire her men for a cruise against +the common foe--the Danes. And it was not until the news of his +death came thus to me that the home longing for the old lands +altogether left me; but since that day my thoughts have been, and +will be, for England only. I have no thought or wish that I were +sharer in Rolf's victories, nor have my comrades, Harek and Kolgrim +and Thord; for we have with Alfred more than the viking could have +given us.</p> +<p>I suppose that in days to come out of this long strife shall be +wrought new strength and oneness for England, even as Alfred in his +wisdom foresees; but as yet sword Helmbiter must be kept sharp, and +the ships must be ever ready. But unless the wisdom of Alfred is +forgotten, there will never again be wanting a ship captain of +English race, as when I, a stranger, was called to the charge of +the king's ships in Wessex. The old love of the sea is waking in +the hearts of the sons of Hengist.</p> +<p>Therefore I am content, for here have I found the sweetest wife, +and the noblest master, and the fairest land that man could wish. +And the fear of the old gods is taken from me, and to me has come +honour, and somewhat of the joy of victory in a good cause--the +cause of freedom and of peace.</p> +<p>Now I write these things as springtime grows apace, and at any +time--today, or tomorrow, or next day--into our hall may come +Kolgrim my comrade, his scarred face bright with the light of +coming battle, to say that Danish ships are once more on the +gannet's path; and the sword of Sigurd will rattle in the golden +scabbard, and a great English cheer will come from the haven, for +King Alfred's ships are ready.</p> +<h2>The End.</h2> +<hr /> +<h2><a name="Notes" id="Notes">Notes</a>.</h2> +<div id="EndNote1"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote1sym" href= +"#EndNote1anc" id="EndNote1sym">i</a> A Norse homestead +consisted of several buildings--the great hall standing alone and +apart from the domestic arrangements.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote2"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote2sym" href= +"#EndNote2anc" id="EndNote2sym">ii</a> The Norse assembly, +corresponding to a Saxon "Folkmote," or representative council for +a district.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote3"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote3sym" href= +"#EndNote3anc" id="EndNote3sym">iii</a> Unearthly. The trolls +were the demons of the Northern mythology.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote4"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote4sym" href= +"#EndNote4anc" id="EndNote4sym">iv</a> Byrnie, the close-fitting +mail shirt.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote5"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote5sym" href= +"#EndNote5anc" id="EndNote5sym">v</a> The consecrated silver +ring kept in the temple of the district, and worn by the godar, or +priest, at all assemblies where it might be necessary to administer +an oath. Odin, Frey, and Niord were always called to witness an +oath on this ring.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote6"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote6sym" href= +"#EndNote6anc" id="EndNote6sym">vi</a> God-rede = "good +counsel," or "God's counsel," as Alfred means "elves' counsel."</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote7"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote7sym" href= +"#EndNote7anc" id="EndNote7sym">vii</a> Asser's +"Life of Alfred." This illness never left the +king from his twentieth year to his death. Probably it was +neuralgic, as it seems to have been violent pain without lasting +effect.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote8"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote8sym" href= +"#EndNote8anc" id="EndNote8sym">viii</a> This was called "prime +signing," and was practically the admission of the heathen as a +catechumen.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote9"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote9sym" href= +"#EndNote9anc" id="EndNote9sym">ix</a> The "Havamal" was the +Northern poem which practically embodied the ancient code of morals +and behaviour.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote10"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote10sym" href= +"#EndNote10anc" id="EndNote10sym">x</a> The use of bells was +popular early in England, and not less so because a freeman who +could afford to build a church with a bell tower became a thane in +consequence.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote11"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote11sym" href= +"#EndNote11anc" id="EndNote11sym">xi</a> The national +representative assembly, and origin of our parliament.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote12"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote12sym" href= +"#EndNote12anc" id="EndNote12sym">xii</a> Now Normandy, and so +called after Rolf's Northmen.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote13"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote13sym" href= +"#EndNote13anc" id="EndNote13sym">xiii</a> This charm against +the "evil eye" was used in the west of England until quite lately, +and may still linger. The charm against sprains is one yet recorded +in the original tongue.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote14"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote14sym" href= +"#EndNote14anc" id="EndNote14sym">xiv</a> Alfred had Denewulf +instructed, and made him Bishop of Winchester.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote15"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote15sym" href= +"#EndNote15anc" id="EndNote15sym">xv</a> In 845 A.D. Bishop +Eahlstan and the levies of Somerset and Dorset defeated the first +Danes who landed in Wessex, at the mouth of the Parret.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote16"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote16sym" href= +"#EndNote16anc" id="EndNote16sym">xvi</a> Trading vessel, more +heavily built than the swift longships.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote17"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote17sym" href= +"#EndNote17anc" id="EndNote17sym">xvii</a> The "wild hunt" is +still believed to pass over Cannington and the Quantock Hills, the +sounds of the migration of flocks of sea fowl probably keeping the +tradition alive.</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote18"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote18sym" href= +"#EndNote18anc" id="EndNote18sym">xviii</a> Athelstan = "noble +stone."</p> +</div> +<div id="EndNote19"> +<p><a class="EndNotesym" name="EndNote19sym" href= +"#EndNote19anc" id="EndNote19sym">xix</a> Confirmation.</p> +</div> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's King Alfred's Viking, by Charles W. Whistler + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KING ALFRED'S VIKING *** + +***** This file should be named 14034-h.htm or 14034-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/4/0/3/14034/ + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/old/14034.txt b/old/14034.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..42b9c77 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/14034.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9452 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of King Alfred's Viking, by Charles W. Whistler + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: King Alfred's Viking + A Story of the First English Fleet + +Author: Charles W. Whistler + +Release Date: November 13, 2004 [EBook #14034] +[Date last updated: July 28, 2006] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KING ALFRED'S VIKING *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + +King Alfred's Viking +A Story of the First English Fleet +by Charles W. Whistler. + + + +Preface. + + +The general details and course of events given in this story are, so +far as regards the private life and doings of King Alfred, from his +life as written by his chaplain, Asser. One or two further incidents +of the Athelney period are from the later chroniclers--notably the +sign given by St. Cuthberht--as are also the names of the herdsman +and the nobles in hiding in the fen. + +That Alfred put his first fleet into the charge of "certain +Vikings" is well known, though the name of their chief is not +given. These Vikings would certainly be Norse, either detached from +the following of Rolf Ganger, who wintered in England in 875 A.D. +the year before his descent on Normandy; or else independent rovers +who, like Rolf, had been driven from Norway by the high-handed +methods of Harald Fairhair. Indeed, the time when a Norse +contingent was not present with the English forces, from this +period till at least that of the battle of Brunanburh in 947 A.D. +would probably be an exception. + +There are, therefore, good historic grounds for the position given +to the hero of the story as leader of the newly-formed fleet. The +details of the burning of his supposed father's hall, and of the +Orkney period, are from the Sagas. + +Much controversy has raged over the sites of Ethandune and the +landing place of Hubba at Kynwith Castle, owing probably to the +duplication of names in the district where the last campaign took +place. The story, therefore, follows the identifications given by +the late Bishop Clifford in "The Transactions of the Somerset +Archaeological Society" for 1875 and other years, as, both from +topographic and strategic points of view, no other coherent +identification seems possible. + +The earthworks of the Danish position still remain on Edington +hill, that looks out from the Polden range over all the country of +Alfred's last refuge, and the bones of Hubba's men lie everywhere +under the turf where they made their last stand under the old walls +and earthworks of Combwich fort; and a lingering tradition yet +records the extermination of a Danish force in the neighbourhood. +Athelney needs but the cessation of today's drainage to revert in a +very few years to what it was in Alfred's time--an island, alder +covered, barely rising from fen and mere, and it needs but little +imagination to reproduce what Alfred saw when, from the same point +where one must needs be standing, he planned the final stroke that +his people believed was inspired directly from above. + +It would seem evident from Alfred's method with Guthrum that he +realized that this king was but one among many leaders, and not +directly responsible for the breaking of the solemn peace sworn at +Exeter and Wareham. His position as King of East Anglia has gained +him an ill reputation in the pages of the later chronicles; but +neither Asser nor the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle--our best authorities-- +blames him as they, for his contemporaries knew him to be but a +"host king," with no authority over newcomers or those who did not +choose to own allegiance to him. + +Save in a few cases, where the original spelling preserves a lost +pronunciation, as in the first syllable of "Eadmund," the modern +and familiar forms of the names have been used in preference to the +constantly-varying forms given by the chroniclers. Bridgwater has +no Saxon equivalent, the town being known only as "The Bridge" +since the time when the Romans first fortified this one crossing +place of the Parret; and the name of the castle before which Hubba +fell varies from Cynuit through Kynwith to Kynwich, whose +equivalent the Combwich of today is. Guthrum's name is given in +many forms, from Gytro to Godramnus. Nor has it been thought worth +while to retain the original spelling AElfred, the ae diphthong +having been appropriated by us to an entirely new sound; while our +own pronunciation of the name slightly broadened as yet in Wessex, +is correct enough. + +The exact relationship of St. Neot to Alfred, beyond that he was a +close kinsman, is very doubtful. He has been identified with a +brother, Athelstan of East Anglia, who is known to have retired to +Glastonbury; but there is no more than conjecture, and I have been +content with "cousinship." + +C. W. Whistler + +Stockland, 1898. + + + +Chapter I. The Seeking of Sword Helmbiter. + + +Men call me "King Alfred's Viking," and I think that I may be proud +of that name; for surely to be trusted by such a king is honour +enough for any man, whether freeman or thrall, noble or churl. +Maybe I had rather be called by that name than by that which was +mine when I came to England, though it was a good title enough that +men gave me, if it meant less than it seemed. For being the son of +Vemund, king of Southmereland in Norway, I was hailed as king when +first I took command of a ship of my own. Sea king, therefore, was +I, Ranald Vemundsson, but my kingdom was but over ship and men, the +circle of wide sea round me was nought that I could rule over, if I +might seem to conquer the waves by the kingship of good seaman's +craft. + +One may ask how I came to lose my father's kingdom, which should +have been mine, and at last to be content with a simple English +earldom; or how it was that a viking could be useful to Alfred, the +wise king. So I will tell the first at once, and the rest may be +learned from what comes after. + +If one speaks to me of Norway, straightway into my mind comes the +remembrance of the glare of a burning hall, of the shouts of savage +warriors, and of the cries of the womenfolk, among whom I, a +ten-year-old boy, was when Harald Fairhair sent the great Jarl +Rognvald and his men to make an end of Vemund, my father. For +Harald had sworn a great oath to subdue all the lesser kings in the +land and rule there alone, like Gorm in Denmark and Eirik in +Sweden. So my father's turn came, and as he feasted with his ninety +stout courtmen, the jarl landed under cover of the dark and fell on +him, surrounding the house and firing it. Then was fierce fighting +as my father and his men sallied again and again from the doors and +were driven back, until the high roof fell in and there was a +sudden silence, and an end. + +Then in the silence came my mother's voice from where she stood on +the balcony of the living house across the garth {i}. I mind +that she neither wept nor shrieked as did the women round her, and +her voice was clear and strong over the roaring of the flames. I +mind, too, the flash of helms and armour as every man turned to +look on her who spoke. + +"Coward and nidring art thou, Rognvald, who dared not meet Vemund, +my husband, in open field, but must slay him thus. Ill may all +things go with thee, till thou knowest what a burning hall is like +for thyself. I rede thee to the open hillside ever, rather than +come beneath a roof; for as thou hast wrought this night, so shall +others do to thee." + +Then rose a growl of wrath from Rognvald's men, but the great Jarl +bade them cease, and harm none in all the place. So he went down to +his ships with no more words and men said that he was ill at ease +and little content, for he had lost as many men as he had slain, so +stoutly fought my father and our courtmen, and had earned a curse, +moreover, which would make his nights uneasy for long enough. + +Then as he went my mother bade me look well at him, that in days to +come I might know on whom to avenge my father's death. After that +she went to her own lands in the south, for she was a jarl's +daughter, and very rich. + +Not long thereafter Harald Fairhair won all the land, and then +began the trouble of ruling it; and men began to leave Norway +because of the new laws, which seemed hard on them, though they +were good enough. + +Now two of Jarl Rognvald's sons had been good friends of my father +before these troubles began, and one, Sigurd, had been lord over +the Orkney Islands, and had died there. The other, Jarl Einar, fell +out with Rognvald, his father, and we heard that he would take to +the viking path, and go to the Orkneys, to win back the jarldom +that Sigurd's death had left as a prey to masterless men and +pirates of all sorts. So my mother took me to him, and asked him +for the sake of old friendship to give me a place in his ship; for +I was fourteen now, and well able to handle weapons, being strong +and tall for my age, as were many of the sons of the old kingly +stocks. + +So Einar took me, having had no part in his father's doings towards +us, and hating them moreover. He promised to do all that he might +towards making a good warrior and seaman of me; and he was ever +thereafter as a foster father to me, for my own had died in the +hall with Vemund. It was his wish to make amends thus, if he could, +for the loss his folk had caused me. + +Of the next five years I need speak little, for in them I learned +the viking's craft well. We won the Orkneys from those who held +them, and my first fight was in Einar's ship, against two of the +viking's vessels. After that we dwelt in Sigurd's great house in +Kirkwall, and made many raids on the Sutherland and Caithness +shores. I saw some hard fighting there, for the Scots are no babes +at weapon play. + +Then when I was nineteen, and a good leader, as they said, the +words that my mother spoke to Jarl Rognvald came true, and he died +even as he had slain my father. + +For Halfdan and Gudrod, Harald Fairhair's sons, deeming that the +Jarl stood in their way to power in Norway, burned him in his hall +by night, and so my feud was at an end. But the king would in +nowise forgive his sons for the slaying of his friend, and outlawed +them. Whereon Halfdan came and fell on us in the Orkneys; and that +was unlucky for him, for we beat him, and Jarl Einar avenged on him +his father's death. + +Now through this it came to pass that I saw Norway for the last +time, for I went thither in Einar's best ship to learn if Harald +meant to make the Orkneys pay for the death of his son--which was +likely, for a son is a son even though he be an outlaw. + +So I came to my mother's place first of all, and full of joy and +pleasant thoughts was I as we sailed into the well-remembered fiord +to seek the little town at its head. And when we came there, nought +but bitterest sorrow and wrath was ours; for the town was a black +heap of ruin, and the few men who were left showed me where the +kindly hands of the hill folk had laid my mother, the queen, in a +little mound, after the Danish vikings, who had fallen suddenly on +the place with fire and sword, had gone. They had grown thus bold +because the great jarl was dead, and the king's sons had left the +land without defence. + +There I swore vengeance for this on every viking of Danish race +that I might fall in with; for I was wild with grief and rage, as +one might suppose. I set up a stone over the grave of my mother, +graving runes thereon that should tell who she was and also who +raised it; for I was skilled in the runic lore, having learned much +from one of Einar's older men who had known my father. + +Thereafter we cruised among the islands northwards until we learned +that Harald was indeed upon us, and then I saw my last of Norway as +we headed south again, and the last hilltop sank beneath the sea's +rim astern of us. I did not know that so it would be at that +time--it is well that one sees not far into things to come--but +even now all my home seemed to be with Einar; and that also was not +to last long, as things went. How that came about I must tell, for +the end was that I came to Alfred the king. + +When we came back to Kirkwall, I told the jarl all that I had done +and learned; and grieved for me he was when he heard of my mother's +death. Many things he said to me at that time which made him dearer +to me. Then after a while he spoke of Harald, who, as it seemed, +might come at any time. + +"We cannot fight Norway," he said, "so we must even flit hence to +the mainland and wait until Harald is tired of seeking us. It is in +my mind that he seeks not so much for revenge as for payment of +scatt from our islands. Now he has a reason for taking it by force. +He will seek to fine us, and then make plans by which I shall hold +the jarldom from him for yearly dues." + +So he straightway called the Thing {ii} of all the Orkney folk, +who loved him well, and put the matter before them; and they set to +work and did his bidding, driving the cattle inland and scattering +them, and making the town look as poor as they might. + +Then in three days' time we sailed away laughing; for none but +poor-looking traders were left, and no man would think that never +had the Orkneys been so rich as in Einar's time. And he bade them +make peace with the king when he came, and told them that so all +would be well, for Harald would lay no heavy weregild on so poor a +place for his son's slaying. + +Southward we went to Caithness, and so westward along the +Sutherland coast; for we had taken no scatt there for this year, +and Einar would use this cruise to do so, seeing that we must put +to sea. We were not the first who had laid these shores under rule +from the Orkneys, for Jarl Sigurd had conquered them, meeting his +death at last in a Sutherland firth, after victory, in a strange +way. + +He fought with a Scottish chief named Melbrigda of the Tusks, and +slew him, and bore back his head to the ships at his saddle bow. +Then the great teeth of the chief swung against the jarl's leg and +wounded it, and of that he died, and so was laid in a great mound +at the head of the firth where his ships lay. After that, the +Orkneys were a nest of evil vikings till we came. + +So it had happened that, from the time when it was made over him, +Jarl Sigurd's mound had been untended, for we ourselves had never +been so far south as this firth before. Indeed, it had been so laid +waste by Sigurd's men after his death that there was nought to go +there for. But at this time we had reason for getting into some +quiet, unsought place where we should not be likely to be heard of, +for the king had over-many ships and men for us to meet. So after a +week's cruising we put into that firth, and anchored in the shelter +of its hills. + +There is no man of all our following who will forget that day, +because of what happened almost as soon as the anchor held. It was +very hot that morning, and what breeze had been out in the open sea +was kept from us now by the hills, so that for some miles we had +rowed the ships up the winding reaches of the firth; and then, as +we laid in the oars and the anchorage was reached, there crept from +inland a dim haze over the sun, dimming the light, and making all +things look strange among the mountains. Then the sounds of the +ships seemed to echo loudly over the still water and when all the +bustle of anchoring was over, the stillness seemed yet greater, for +the men went to their meals, and for a while spoke little. + +Einar and I sat on his after deck under the awning, and spoke in +low voices, as if afraid to raise our tones. + +"There is a thunderstorm about," I said. + +"Ay--listen," the jarl answered. + +Then I heard among the hills, far up the firth beyond us, a strange +sound that seemed to draw nearer, like and yet unlike thunder, +roaring and jarring ever closer to us, till it was all around us +and beneath us everywhere, and our very hearts seemed to stop +beating in wonder. + +Then of a sudden the ship was smitten from under the keel with a +heavy, soundless blow, and the waters of the firth ebbed and flowed +fiercely about us; and then the sound passed on and down the firth +swiftly and strangely as it had come, and left us rocking on the +troubled waters that plashed and broke along the rocks of the +shore, while the still, thick air seemed full of the screams of the +terrified eagles and sea birds that had left them. + +"Odin defend us!" the jarl said; "what is this?" + +I shook my head, looking at him, and wondering if my face was white +and scared as his and that of every man whom I could see. + +Now we waited breathless for more to come, but all was quiet again. +The birds went back to their eyries, and the troubled water was +still. Then presently our fears passed enough to let us speak with +one another; and then there were voices enough, for every man +wished to hear his own again, that courage might return. + +Then a man from the Orkneys who had been with Jarl Sigurd came aft +to us, and stood at the break of the deck to speak with Einar. + +"Jarl," he said, almost under his breath, "it is in my mind that +Sigurd, your brother, is wroth because his mound has been untended +since we made it." + +Then Einar said: + +"Was it so ill made that it needs tending?" + +"It was well made, jarl; but rain and frost and sun on a new-made +mound may have wrought harm to it. Or maybe he thinks that enough +honour has not been paid him. He was a great warrior, jarl, and +perhaps would have more sacrifice, and a remembrance cup drunk by +his own brother at his grave." + +Now this man's name was Thord, the same who taught me runes--a good +seaman and leader of men, and one who was held to be wise in more +matters than most folk. So his word was to be listened to. + +"You know more of these matters than I, Thord," Einar answered. "Is +it possible that Sigurd could work this?" + +"Who knows what a dead chief of might cannot work?" Thord said. "I +think it certain that Sigurd is angry for some reason; and little +luck shall we have if we do not appease his spirit." + +Then the jarl looked troubled, as well he might, for to go near the +mound that held an angry ghost was no light matter. It lay far up +the firth, Thord said, and the ships could not go so far. But Einar +was very brave, and when he had thought for a little while he said: + +"Well, then, I will take boat and go to Sigurd's mound and see if +he ails aught. Will any man come with me, however?" + +I liked not the errand, as may be supposed, but I could not leave +my foster father to go alone. + +"I will be with you," I said. "Will not Thord come also?" + +"Ay," the grim Orkney man answered. + +Now all our crew were listening to us, and I looked down the long +gangways by chance, and when I did so no man would meet my eye. +They feared lest they should be made to go to this haunted place, +as it seemed--all but one man, who sat on the mast step swinging +his feet. This was Kolgrim the Tall, the captain of the fore deck, +a young man and of few words, but a terrible swordsman, and knowing +much of sea craft. And when this man saw that I looked at him, he +nodded a little and smiled, for he had been a friend of mine since +I had first come to Einar. + +"Two men to row the boat will be enough, jarl," I said. "Kolgrim +yonder will come with us." + +"Well," the jarl answered, "maybe four of us are enough. We shall +not fright Sigurd with more, and maybe would find it hard to get +them to come." + +So he called Kolgrim, and he said that he would go with us, and +went to get the boat alongside without more words. + +Then the jarl and I and Thord armed ourselves--for a warrior should +be met by warriors. The men were very silent, whispering among +themselves, until the jarl was ready and spoke to them. + +"Have no fear for us," he said. "Doubtless my brother needs +somewhat, and calls me. I am going to find out what it is and +return." + +So we pushed off, Thord and Kolgrim rowing. It was strange to look +back, as we went, on the ships, for not a soul stirred on board +them, as it seemed, so intently were we watched; and the water was +like a sheet of steel under them, so that they were doubled. + +Presently they were hidden as we rounded a turn in the firth, and +we were alone among the hills, and the lonesomeness was very great. +There was no dwelling anywhere along the shores, nor in the deep +glens that came down to them, each with its noisy burn falling +along it. Once I saw deer feeding far up at the head of a valley +that opened out, but they and the eagles were the only living +things we could see beside the loons that swam and dived silently +as we neared them. + +The silence and the heat weighed on us, and we went for a mile or +more without a word. Then we turned into the last reach of the +water, and saw Sigurd's mound beside its edge at the very head of +the firth, where the hills came round in a circle that was broken +only by the narrow waters and the valley that went beyond them +among the mountains. It was a fitting resting place for one who +would sleep in loneliness; but I thought that I had rather lie +where I could look out on the sea I loved, and see the long ships +pass and the white waves break beneath me. + +Now all seemed very peaceful here in the hot haze that brooded over +the still mountains, and there seemed to be nought to fear. We drew +swiftly up to the mound, with the plash of oars only to break the +silence, and there was nought amiss that we could see. They had +made it on a little flat tongue of land that jutted from the +mountain's foot into the deep water, so that on two sides the mound +was close to its edge. So we pulled on softly round the tongue of +land, being maybe about fifty paces from the mound across the +water. And when we saw the other side of Sigurd's resting place, +the oars stayed suddenly, and the jarl, who held the tiller, swung +the boat away from the shore, and I think I knew then what fear +was. + +The mound was open. There was a wide, brown scar, as of +freshly-moved earth, across its base, reaching from the level to +six or eight feet of its height, as though half the grass-grown +side had been shorn away by a sword cut; and in the midst of that +scar was a doorway, open to the grave's heart, low and stone built. +Some of the earth that had fallen lay before it on the water's +edge, but the rest was doubtless in the water, for there was but a +narrow path between bank and mound. + +At that sight we stared, thinking we should surely see the grim +form of Sigurd loom gigantic and troll-like {iii} across the +doorway; and the jarl half rose from his seat beside me, and cried +out with a great voice: + +"Sigurd--my brother!" + +I think he knew not what or why he cried thus, for he sank back +into his place and swayed against me, while his cry rang loud among +the hills, and the eagles answered it. + +And I grasped my sword hilt, as one does in some sudden terror, +staring at the open mound; while old Thord muttered spells against +I know not what, and Kolgrim looked at me, pale and motionless. + +Then came the sharp, mocking cry of a diver, that rang strangely; +and at once, without order. Thord dug his oar blade into the water +and swung the boat round, and when once Kolgrim's back was towards +that he feared, he held water strongly and then the boat was about, +and we were flying from the place towards the ships, before we knew +what was being done, panic stricken. + +But Einar said never a word, and the two rowers slackened their +pace only when the bend of the firth hid the mound from our sight. + +Then said I, finding that Einar spoke not: + +"What are we flying from? there was nought to harm us." + +For I began to be ashamed. Thereat Kolgrim stopped rowing, and +Thord must needs do likewise, though he said: + +"It is ill for us to stay here. The dead jarl is very wroth." + +"I saw nought to fray us; the cry we heard was but that of a loon." + +But Thord shook his head. The silence of the place had made all +things seem strange, with the dull light that was over us, and the +great heat among the towering hills. + +"The mound was freshly opened," he said. "I saw earth crumbling +even yet from the broken side. The blow we felt was that which +Sigurd struck when he broke free." + +Then at last Einar spoke, and his voice was strange: + +"I have left my brother unhonoured, and he is angry. What must be +done?" + +Now I cannot tell what hardiness took hold of me, but it seemed +that I must needs go back and see more of this. I was drawn to do +so, as a thing they fear will make some men long to face it and +know its worst, not as if they dared so much as when they must. + +"I think we should have waited to ask Sigurd that," I said; and +Einar looked strangely at me. + +"Would you have us return?" he asked. + +"Why not?" said I. "If the great jarl has called us as it seems, +needs must that we know what he wills." + +Then said Thord: + +"I helped to lay him in that place, and I mind how he looked at +that time. Somewhat we left undone, doubtless. I dare not go back." + +Einar looked at the hills, leaning his chin on his hand, and said +slowly, when Thord had done: + +"That is the first time Thord has said 'I dare not.' Now I would +that I had stayed to fight Harald and fall under his sword before. +I too must say the same. I have left my brother unhonoured, and I +dare not go back." + +Pale and drawn the jarl's face was, and I knew he meant what he +said. Nevertheless it seemed to me that some one must know what +Sigurd willed. + +"Jarl Einar," I said, "this is a strange business, and one cannot +tell what it means. Now Sigurd was my father's close friend, and I +have had nought to do with him. I will go back, therefore, and +learn what I can of him. I think he will not harm me, for he has no +reason to do so. Moreover if he does, none will learn what he +needs." + +"I have heard," said Thord, "that a good warrior may ask what he +will of a dead hero, so that he shows no fear and is a friend. If +his courage fails, however, then he will be surely destroyed." + +Then I said: + +"I have no cause to fear Sigurd, save that he is a ghost. I do not +know if I fear him as such; that is to be seen." + +Now Einar laid his hand on mine and spoke gravely: + +"I think it is a hero's part to do what you say. If you go back and +return in safety, the scalds will sing of you for many a long day. +Go, therefore, boldly; this is not a matter from which you should +be held back, as it has come into your mind." + +Then said Thord: + +"It will be well to ask Sigurd for a token whereby we may know that +he sends messages by you." + +And Einar said on that: + +"In Sigurd's hand is his sword Helmbiter. I think he will give that +to the man who dares speak to him, for he will know that it goes +into brave hands. Ask him for it bravely." + +"Put me ashore, therefore, before my courage goes," I said; and +they pulled the boat to the bank where I could step on a rock and +so to shore. And when I was there, Kolgrim rose up and followed me +without a word. + +"Bide here for two hours, jarl, and maybe I will return in that +time," I said. "Farewell." + +So I turned away as they answered me, thinking that Kolgrim held +the boat's painter. But he came after me, and I spoke to him: + +"Why, Kolgrim, will you come also?" + +"You shall not go alone, Ranald the king's son; I will come with +you as far as I dare." + +"That is well," I answered, and with that wasted no more words, but +climbed the hillside a little, and then went steadily towards where +the mound was, with Kolgrim close at my shoulder, and the jarl and +Thord looking fixedly after us till we were out of sight. + + + +Chapter II. The Gifts of Two Heroes. + + +I will not say that my steps did not falter when we came to whence +we could see the mound. But it was lonely and still and silent; no +shape of warrior waited our coming. + +"Almost do I fear to go nearer," said Kolgrim. + +"Put fear away, comrade," said I; "we shall fare ill if we turn our +backs now." + +"Where you go I go," he answered, "though I am afraid." + +"The next best thing to not being afraid is to be afraid and not to +show it," I said then, comforting myself also with a show of wisdom +at least. "Maybe fear is the worst thing we have to face." + +So we went on more swiftly, and at last were on the tongue of land +on the tip of which the mound stood. Still, since we could not see +the open doorway, which was towards the water, the place seemed not +so terrible. Yet I thought that by this time we should have seen +Sigurd, or maybe heard his voice from the tomb. So now I dared to +call softly: + +"Jarl Sigurd, here is one, a friend's son, who will learn what you +will." + +My voice seemed to fill all the ring of mountains with echoes, but +there was no answer. All was still again when the last voice came +back from the hillsides. + +Then I went nearer yet, and passed to the waterside, where I could +look slantwise across the doorway. And again I called, and waited +for an answer that did not come. + +"It seems that I must go even to the door, and maybe into the +mound," I said, whispering. + +"Not inside," said Kolgrim, taking hold of my arm. + +But I had grown bolder with the thought that the hero seemed not +angry, and now I had set my heart on winning the sword of which the +jarl had told me, and I thought that I dared go even inside the +tomb to speak with Sigurd. + +"Bide here, and I will go at least to the door," said I. + +So I stepped boldly before it, standing on the heap of newly-fallen +earth that had slipped from across it. The posts and lintel of the +door were of stone slabs such as lay everywhere on the hillsides, +and I stood so close that I could touch them. The doorway was not +so high that I could see into it without stooping, for it was +partly choked with the fallen earth, and I bent to look in. But I +could only see for a few feet into the passage, as I looked from +light to darkness. + +"Ho, Jarl Sigurd! what would you? Why have you opened your door +thus?" + +Very hollow my voice sounded, and that was all. + +"Sigurd of Orkney--Sigurd, son of Rognvald--I am the son of Vemund +your friend. Speak to me!" + +There was no answer. A bit of earth crumbled from the broken side +of the mound and made me start, but I saw nothing. So I stepped +away from the door and back to my comrade, who had edged nearer the +place, though his face showed that he feared greatly. + +"I think that the mound has been rifled," I said. "Sigurd would +have us know it and take revenge." + +"No man has dared to go near that doorway till you came, Ranald +Vemundsson," Kolgrim answered. "Now I fear that he plans to lure +you into the mound, and slay you there without light to help you. +Go no further, maybe you will be closed up with the ghost." + +That was not pleasant to think of, but I had seen nought to make me +fear to go in. There was no such unearthly light shining within the +mound as I had heard of in many tales of those who sought to speak +with dead chiefs. + +"Well, I am going in," I said stoutly; "but do you hide here, and +make some noise that I may know you are near me. It is the silence +that frays me. + +"What can I do?" he said. "I know no runes that are of avail. It +would be ill to disturb this place with idle sounds." + +That seemed right, but I thought I could not bear the silence--silence +of the grave. I must know that he was close at hand. Then a thought +came to me, and I unfastened the silver-mounted whetstone that hung +from my belt and gave it him. + +"Whet your sword edge sharply," I said. "That is a sound a hero +loves, for it speaks of deeds to be done." + +"Ay, that is no idle sound," he said, and drew his sword gladly. +The haft of the well-known blade brought the light into his eyes +again. I drew my own sword also. + +"If you need me, call, and I think I shall not fail you," he +whispered. "It shall not be said that I failed you in peril." + +"I know it," I answered, putting my hand on his shoulder. + +Then I went boldly, and stepped into the passage. The whetstone +sang shrill on the sword edge as it kissed the steel behind me, and +the sound was good to hear as I went into darkness with my weapon +ready. + +I half feared that my first step would be my last, but it was made +in safety. Very black seemed the low stone-walled passage before +me, and I had to stoop as I went on, feeling with my left hand +along the wall. The way was so narrow that little light could pass +my body, and therefore it seemed to grow darker as I went deeper +into the mound's heart. + +Five steps I took, and then my outstretched hand was on the post +that ended the passage, and beyond that I felt nothing. I had come +to the inner doorway, and before me was the place where Sigurd lay. +Yet no fiery eyes glared on me, and nothing stirred. The air was +heavy with a scent as of peat, and the sound of the whetstone +seemed loud as I stood peering into the darkness. + +I moved forward, and somewhat rattled under my foot, and I started. +Then my fear left me altogether, for I had trodden on dry bones, +and shuddered at the first touch of them in that place. I had faced +fear, and had overcome it; maybe it was desperation that made me +cool then, for it was certain now that I must be slain or else +victor over I knew not what. + +So I took one pace forward into the chamber, and stood aside from +the doorway; and the grey light from the passage came in and filled +all the place, so that it fell first on him whom I had come to +seek--Jarl Sigurd of Orkney. + +And when I saw, a great awe fell upon me, and a sadness, but no +terror; and in my heart I would that hereafter I might rest as +slept the hero where the hands that had loved him had placed him. + +Into the silent place came once more with me the clank of mail and +weapons that he had loved, and from without the song of the keen +sword edge whispered to him; but these could not wake him. +Peacefully he seemed to sleep as I stood by his side, and I thought +that I should take back no word of his to the jarl, his brother, +whom both he and I loved. + +They had brought the great carven chair on which he was wont to sit +on his ship's quarterdeck, and thereon had set the jarl, as though +he yet lived, and did but sleep as he sat from weariness after +fight, with helm and mail upon him. Shield and axe rested on either +side of him, ready to hand, against the chair; and behind him, +along the wall, were his spears, ashen shafted and rune graven. + +His blue, fur-trimmed cloak was round him, and before him was a +little table, heavy and carved, whereon were vessels for food, +empty now save for dust that showed that they had been full. And +across his knees was his sword, golden hilted, with a great yellow +cairngorm in the pommel, and with gold-wrought patterns from end to +end of the scabbard--such a sword as I had never seen before. His +right hand held the hilt, and his left rested on the shield's rim +beside him; and so Sigurd slept with his head bowed on his breast, +waiting for Ragnaroek and the last great fight of all. + +The light seemed to grow stronger as I looked, or my eyes grew used +to it, and then I saw that the narrow chamber was full of things, +though I minded them afterwards, for now I was as in a dream, +noting only the jarl himself. Costly stuffs were on the floor, and +mail and helms and more weapons. Gold work there was also, and in +one corner lay the dried-up body of a great wolf hound, coiled as +in sleep where it had been chained. Another had been tied by the +passage doorway, where I had stepped on it; and below a spar that +stood across a corner lay a tumbled heap of feathers that had been +a falcon. + +Many more things there were maybe, but this I saw at last--that the +jarl's right foot rested on the skull of a man whose teeth had been +long and tusk-like. It was the head of the Scot whose teeth had +been his death. + +Now the sword drew my eyes, for Einar bade me ask for it, else I +think I had gone softly hence without a word, so peaceful seemed +the dead. And as I looked again, I saw that the hand holding the +hilt was dry and brown and shrunken, so that one might see all the +bones through the skin, and at first I was afraid to ask. + +At last I said, and my mouth was dry: + +"Jarl Einar, your brother, bids me ask for sword Helmbiter, great +Sigurd. Let me take it, that he may know how you rest in peace." + +But Sigurd stirred not nor spoke; and slowly I put out my hand on +the sword to take it very gently, but his grasp was yet firm on it. +Then, as I bent to see if it had tightened when I would draw the +sword away, I could see beneath the helm the face of the dead, +shrunken indeed and brown, but as of one at rest and beyond anger. + +Once more then I took the jarl's sword in my right hand, and raised +his hand with my left, putting my own weapon by against the wall. +And then the hilt slipped from the half-open fingers, and the sword +was mine, and my hand held the jarl's. And it seemed to me that he +gave it me, and that I must thank him for such a gift. The sword +though it was sheathed, was not girt to him, and its golden-studded +belt was twisted about it, and it was no imperfect giving. + +So I spoke in a low voice: + +"Jarl Sigurd, I thank you. If my might is aught, the sword will be +used as you would have used it. Surely I will say to Einar that you +rest in peace, and we will come here and close your mound again in +all honour." + +I set back his hand then, and it seemed empty and helpless, not as +a warrior's should be. So I ungirt my own weapon--a good plain +sword that I had won from a viking in Caithness--and laid it in the +place of that he had given me. And as I put the thin fingers on its +hilt, almost thinking that they would chose around it, a ring +slipped from them into my hand, as if he would give that also, and +I kept it therefore. + +Then for a minute I stood before Jarl Sigurd, waiting to see if he +had any word; but when he spoke not, I lifted the sword and saluted +him. + +"Skoal to Jarl Sigurd; rest in peace, and farewell." + +Then I went forth softly, and came out into sunshine; for the wind +was singing round the hilltops, and the dun mist had gone. Then I +was ware that the sound of the stone on the sword edge had long +ceased, and I looked for Kolgrim. + +He was lying on the grass in the place where I had left him, but he +was on his face, and the sword and whetstone were flung aside from +him. At first I feared that he had been in some way slain because +of his terror; but when I came near, I saw that his shoulders +heaved as if he wept. Then I stood over him, treading softly. + +"Kolgrim," I said. + +At that he looked up, and a great light came into his face, and he +sprang to his feet and threw his arms round me, weeping, yet with a +strong man's weeping that does but come from bitter grief. + +"Master," he cried, "O master I thought you lost--and I dared not +follow you." + +"I have met with no peril," I said, "nor have I been long gone." + +"More than two hours, master, have you been in that place--two long +hours. See how the sun has sunk since you left me!" + +So indeed it seemed, though I knew not that I had been so long. I +had stayed still and gazed on that strange sight without stirring +for what seemed but a little while. Yet I had thought long thoughts +in that time, and I mind every single thing in that dim chamber, +even to the markings on the stones that made its walls and roof and +floor. + +"See," I said, "Jarl Sigurd has given me the sword!" + +Kolgrim gazed in wonder. There was no speck of dust on the broad +blade as I drew it, and the waving lines of the dwarf-wrought steel +and gold-inlaid runes were clear and bright along its middle for +half its length. For the mound was very dry, and they had covered +all the chamber with peat before piling the earth over it. + +"Let us go back to Jarl Einar; he will fear for us," I said, +sheathing the sword and girding it to me. + +So we went across the meadow, and even as we went a blast of cold +wind came from, over the mountains, and with it whirled the black +thunderclouds of the storm that had been gathering all day. We ran +to an overhanging rock on the hillside and crept beneath it, while +the thunder crashed and the lightning struck from side to side of +the firth, and smote the wind-swept water that was white with foam. + +"Master," said Kolgrim, "the Jarl Sigurd is wroth; he repents the +sword gift." + +But I did not think that he had aught to do with this. For, as any +hill-bred man could tell, the storm had been brewing in the heat, +and was bound to come, and would pass to and fro among the hills +till it was worn out. + +Nevertheless, when it passed away in pouring rain that swept like a +hanging sheet of moving mist down the glens from the half-hidden +mountains, and the sun shone out brightly again over the clear-cut +purple hillsides and rippling water, I looked at the mound in +wonder. For it was closed. We had sought shelter in a place near +that whence we saw the mound in coming, and could see the fallen +side, though not the doorway, looking across its front. And now the +slope of the bank seemed to have been made afresh, as on the day +when Sigurd had been closed in, years ago. None could say, save +those who had seen it, where the opening into the grave-chamber +might be. + +Now both the opening and closing of Sigurd's grave mound seem very +strange to me. Thord and the scalds will have it that he himself +wrought both. As for me, I know not. In after days I told this to +Alfred the king when he wondered at my sword, and he said that he +thought an earthquake opened and washing rain closed the mound, but +that it happened strangely for me. I cannot gainsay his wise words, +and I will leave the matter so. + +Thereafter Kolgrim and I went back to Einar, who yet waited for us. +Glad was he to see us return in safety; but both he and Thord were +speechless when they saw the jarl's sword girt to me and the jarl's +golden ring on my hand. Neither they nor any one else will believe +that I met with no peril; and the tale that the scalds made +hereafter of the matter is over wonderful, in spite of all I may +say. For they think it but right that I should not be over boastful +of my deeds. + +But Jarl Einar looked on sword and ring, and said: + +"Well have you won these gifts. My brother is in peace in his +resting place now. I hold that he called for you." + +So we went back to the ships, and there for many days the men +stared at Kolgrim and me strangely. They say I was very silent for +long, and it is likely enough. Moreover, Einar was wont to say that +I seemed five years older from that day forward. + +We went no more to the place of the mound, for it seemed to need no +care of earthly hands. Nor were any wishing to go to so awesome a +place, and we left the firth next day, for the men waxed uneasy +there. + +But on that day Einar gave me the great ship that we had taken from +Halfdan, the king's son, saying that he would add to Sigurd's +giving. Also he bade me choose what men I would for her crew, +bidding me thank him not at all, for I was his foster son, and a +king by birth moreover. + +So when I knew that this would please him, I chose Thord for my +shipmaster, and Kolgrim for marshal, as we call the one who has +charge of the ordering of the crew. And I chose a hundred good men +whom I knew well, so that indeed I had the best ship and following +in Norway, as I thought. At least there were none better, unless +Harald Fairhair might match me. + +Now there was one thing that pleased me not at this time, and that +was that Kolgrim, my comrade, never called me aught but "master" +since I came from Sigurd's presence--which is not the wont of our +free Norsemen with any man. Nor would he change it, though I was +angry, until I grew used to it in time. + +"Call me not 'master,' Kolgrim, my comrade," I said; "it is +unfittinq for you." + +At last he answered me in such wise that I knew it was of no more +use to speak of it. + +"Master of mine you are, Ranald the king, since the day when you +dared more than I thought man might, while I lay like a beaten +hound outside, and dared not go within that place to see what had +become of you. Little comradeship was mine to you on that day, and +I am minded to make amends if I can. I think I may dare aught +against living men for you, though I failed at that mound. I will +give life for you, if I may." + +I told him that what he had done was well done, and indeed he had +had courage to go where none else had dared; for I had ties of +friendship that made me bold to meet Jarl Sigurd, and might go +therefore where he might not. It was well that he did not come into +the presence of the dead. + +"Therefore we are comrades, not master and man," I said. + +"Nay, but master and man--lord and thrall," he answered. + +So I must let him have his way, but he could not make me think of +him as aught but a good and brave comrade whom I loved well. + +They hailed me as king when I went on board my ship for the first +time with my own men, as I have said. Then our best weapon smith +asked for gold from the men, and they gave what they had--it was in +plenty with us of Einar's following--and made a golden circlet +round my helm, that they might see it and follow it in battle. + +It was good to wear the crown thus given willingly, but in the end +it sent me from north to south, as will be seen. That, however, is +a matter with which I will not quarrel, for it sent me to Alfred +the king. + +We had left the firth two days, cruising slowly northward, when one +ship came from the north and met us, not flying from our fleet, but +bearing up to join us. And when she was close, there came a hail to +tell Einar that she bore a messenger from Harald the king in peace, +and presently we hove to while this messenger went on board the +Jarl's ship. + +Then it seemed that Einar had been right, and that Harald would lay +a fine on the islands for Halfdan's slaying, and so give them back +to Einar to hold for him. The messenger was Thiodolf, Harald's own +scald, and he put the matter very plainly before the jarl, so that +he thought well of the offer, but would nevertheless not trust +himself in the king's power before all was certain, and confirmed +by oath. Whereon Thiodolf said that one must see the king on the +Jarl's part, and so I seemed the right man to go, as the jarl's +foster son and next in command to him. + +"Nevertheless," said Thiodolf, "I would not advise you to sail in +Halfdan's ship, for that might wake angry thoughts, and trouble +would come especially as Halfdan took her without leave when he was +outlawed." + +So I took the Jarl's cutter, manning her with enough men of my own +crew; and Kolgrim came with me, and we sailed to Kirkwall in +company with Thiodolf the scald. + +Then when Thiodolf took me into his presence, I saw Harald Fairhair +for the first time, as he sat to receive Einar's messenger in the +great hall that Sigurd had built and which we had dwelt in. Then I +thought that never before could have been one more like a king. +Hereafter, when sagamen will sing of a king in some fancied story, +they will surely make him like King Harald of Norway. I myself have +little skill to say what he was like beyond this--that never had I +seen a more handsome man, nor bigger, nor stronger. King-like he +was in all ways, and his face was bright and pleasant, though it +was plain that it would be terrible if he was angry, or with the +light of battle upon it. + +The hair, whence he had his name, was golden bright and shining, +and beard and eyebrows were of the same colour. But his eyes were +neither grey nor blue altogether, most piercing, seeming to look +straight into a man's heart, so that none dared lie to him. + +I think that it is saying much for King Harald that, though his +arms and dress were wonderfully rich and splendid, one cared only +to look on his face; and that though many men of worth were on the +high place with him, there seemed to be none but he present. + +When the scald told the king who I was, and what was my errand, +with all ceremony, he looked fixedly at me, so that I was ashamed, +and grew red under his gaze. Then he smiled pleasantly, and spoke +to me. His voice was as I thought to hear it--clear and steady, and +yet deep. + +"So, Ranald Vemundsson, you are worthy of your father. It may be +that you bear me ill will on his account, but I would have you +forget the deeds done that Norway might be one, and the happier +therefor." + +"Had my father been slain in fair fight, lord king," I said, "no +ill will had been thought of. It has not been in my mind that you +bade Rognvald slay him as he did. And that Jarl is dead, and the +feud is done with therefore. Jarl Einar is my foster father, +moreover." + +"That is well said," answered Harald. "But I thought Sigurd must +have fostered you; he was ever a close friend of Vemund's." + +I did not know why the king thought this, though the reason was at +my side; so I only said that my mother had given me to Einar's +keeping, and the king said no more at that time about it. + +After that I gave the Jarl's messages, and the king heard them well +enough, though it seemed to Einar that the weregild to be paid was +over heavy, and he had bidden me tell Harald that it was so. +Therefore the king said that he would give me an answer on the +morrow, and I went away into the town well pleased with his kindly +way with me. + +There was a feast made for me that night, and after it I must sit +still and hear the scalds sing of the deeds of Harald the king, +which was well enough. But then Thiodolf rose up and sang a great +saga about the winning of Sigurd's sword, wherein it seemed that I +had fought the dead jarl, and bale fires, and I know not what. He +had heard strange tales from Einar's men, if they told him all that +he sang. + +Some men may be pleased to hear their own deeds sung of, with more +added thus; but I was not used to it, and the turning of all eyes +to me made me uncomfortable. But Harald had paid no sort of heed to +what they sang of him, and so I tried to look at my ease, and gave +the scald a bracelet when he ended. + +"Overmuch make you of that matter, scald," said I quietly. + +He laughed a little, and answered: + +"One has to fill in what a warrior will not tell of himself." + +Now the men shouted when I gave Thiodolf the bracelet, and Harald +looked quickly at me. Then I thought that maybe I had overdone the +gift, though Einar had ever told me that a good scald deserved good +reward, and Thiodolf was well known as the best in Norway. It was a +heavy ring, silver gilt, and of good design, that I took from the +same viking whose sword I gave to Sigurd. + +"Overpaid am I," the scald said, putting it on his arm. + +"You are the first who has ever sung of me," I answered; "and the +voice and tune were wonderful, if the saga was too strong for me." + +Then Harald smiled again, and praised Thiodolf also, and I thought +no more of the matter. The feast was pleasant enough in the hall, +full of Harald's best men and chiefs, though it seemed strange to +sit as a guest in Einar's house. + +Now on the next morning I was to speak with the king about Einar's +business, and I went to him unarmed, as was right, save for helm +and Sigurd's sword. He was in the jarl's own chamber, and with him +were Thiodolf and a young scald named Harek, who sat with things +for writing before him, which was what I had never seen before. + +We talked for some time, and all went well for peace; but one more +message was to go and come between the king and Einar, and so I +said I would sail at once. + +"Not so much need for haste but that you can bide here for a day or +two," Harald said. "I will not have you complain of my hospitality +hereafter. And Thiodolf and Harek here want to learn more about +Sigurd's sword and its winning." + +"If I tell them the truth, I shall spoil their saga, lord king!" I +said, laughing. + +"Trust the scalds to mind you do not," he answered. "There are +times when I have to ask them which of my own doings they are +singing about now. But is there no wonder in the tale?" + +So I told him just how the matter was. And when he heard of the +noise, and the stroke with which the ships were smitten, he said, +looking troubled, as I thought: + +"Sigurd is stronger now that he is dead than when he lived. We felt +that stroke even here." + +But when I told how I had seen the dead jarl, his face grew +thoughtful, and at last he said: + +"So shall I lie some day in a grave mound. It is passing strange to +think on. I would that if one comes to my side he may step gently +as you, Ranald Vemundsson." + +"Else will that comer fare ill," said Thiodolf. + +The king glanced up at him, and his face changed, and he said, +smiling grimly: + +"Maybe. I think none will win my sword from me." + +Then he had Kolgrim sent for, and Thord, and they told him truly +what they had seen, and how they had fared in the matter. + +"You are a truth teller, Kolgrim the Tall," Harald said. "Now if +you will leave Einar's service and come and be of my courtmen, I +will speak to the jarl and make matters right with him, and it +shall be worth your while." + +Then my comrade answered plainly: + +"I am no jarl's man now, King Harald; I belong to King Ranald here, +and I will not leave him." + +"So," said Harald, knitting his brows suddenly, "we have two kings +in the room, as it seems; and you dare choose another instead of +me." + +"Not so, King Harald," Kolgrim answered, with all respect; "I chose +between the jarl and my king. If there is peace between you and the +jarl, I suppose we are all your men." + +Now Harald's face was growing black, and I could see that his anger +was rising. But he stayed what words he was about to speak, and +only said: + +"Jarl Einar is well served when he has a king in his train." + +Then he rose up and turned to Thiodolf, who was looking anxious. + +"Bid King Ranald to the feast tonight. He knows my words to Einar +his foster father, and I have no more to say." + +So I was dismissed, and was not sorry to be outside the hall. + +"Let us get down to the ship," said Thord. "Here is trouble +brewing, as I think." + +So we went on board, and I wished that we might go. Yet the king +had bidden me stay, and I had no reason for what would be +discourteous at least, if it did not look like flight. What the +trouble was we could hardly understand. + +In an hour's time or so I saw Thiodolf and the young scald Harek +coming along the wharf and towards our ship, which lay clear of +Harald's vessels, and next the harbour mouth. They came over the +gang plank, and I welcomed them, but I saw that they had somewhat +special to say to me. + +They sat down under the after awning with me, and at once Thiodolf +said: + +"That was an unlucky speech of your comrade's just now. No man +dares name himself king in Harald's presence--not even his own +sons. It is the one thing that he will not bear." + +"So it seemed," said I; "and, in truth, he had enough trouble with +under kings not long since. But he knows what a sea king is--no +king at all, so to speak. He need not grudge the old title." + +"That is not all," Thiodolf said. "It is in his mind that he has to +guard yet against risings of men of the old families of the kings, +and thinks you are likely to give him trouble. Maybe the portent of +the blow that spread from Sigurd's tomb to us has seemed much to +him. 'Here,' he says, 'is one who will gather masterless men to him +in crowds because he wears Sigurd's sword and ring, and has gained +with them the name of a hero. Already he has two of Einar's best +men at his heels. Yet I like him well enough, and I have no fault +to find with him, save that he puts a gold circle round his helm +and is called king--as he would have been but for me. Go to him, +therefore, and tell him to keep out of my way. I will not have two +kings in Norway.'" + +"Well," I said, "that is plain speaking. But I cannot help what the +men call me. The king makes overmuch of the business. I am not +foolish enough to try to overturn Harald Fairhair." + +"Maybe," said Thiodolf, "but those are his words. I rede you get +away quickly on the next tide." + +"Ay," said Harek. "Harald is mild of mood now, because you made no +secret of what men call you. Five years ago you would not have +escaped hence at all." + +"Then," said I, "I will go. I think you are right. Vemund's son +troubles Harald;" and I laughed, and added, "I have to thank you +for kindly counsel, scalds, as I think. Farewell. Tide serves at +any time now, and I will get my men and be gone." + +"That is wise," they answered. "Einar must find some other +messenger, if he comes not himself, after you return." + +They went, and I called two or three men and sent them into the +town for their comrades who were at friends' houses and in the +guest house where we were lodged, while Kolgrim made ready for +instant sailing. + +The next thing that I was ware of was that there was a fight on the +wharf end next the town, and men were running to it. Then I heard +my own name shouted on one part, and that of Eric, the king's young +son, on the other. So I was going to lead down twenty men to quiet +the scuffle, when my people had the best of the matter, and broke +through the throng, cheering, and came on to me. The rest did not +follow them, for they saw that I was coming, and the wharf was +clear behind them but for three of their foes who stayed where they +had fallen. + +Then another man broke away from the crowd, and came running after +my folk. It was Harek the scald, with his head broken. + +"Here are fine doings," said Kolgrim, as the men swarmed on board. +"What is on hand now?" + +"It is not done with yet," said a man: "look at yon ship." + +Then came Harek, out of breath, and pale. + +"Let me on board, King Ranald, or I am a dead man," he cried. + +"Come, then!" I answered; and he ran across the plank, and Kolgrim +pulled it in after him. All my men were come. + +Then I looked at the ship spoken of. Men were swarming into her, +and were making ready to sail. But if she meant to stay our going, +she was too far up the harbour, and we were already casting off the +shore ropes. + +"Hold on," said Thord; "here come the other scald and two men." + +The crowd that was yet round the fallen men had parted to let +Thiodolf pass, and he came quickly. One of the men bore a chest, +and the other a bale of somewhat. They gave these over the gunwale +to my people, and Thiodolf spoke to me from the wharf. + +"These are gifts from Harald to Einar's foster son," he said. "He +bids me say that you have done your errand well, and that this is +to prove it. Also he says that Ranald, son of Vemund, may need mail +to keep his kingship withal, and so he has sent you a suit." + +"That is a hard saying," I answered; "is it insult?" + +"Nay, but a broad hint only. The gift is most goodly." + +"Well," said I, "it is plain that he will warn me from Norway. I +will leave you, good friend, to say for me what should be said. +Maybe if I sent a message it would go wrongly from my lips." + +Thiodolf laughed, and bade me farewell. He paid no heed to Harek, +who sat on the deck with his back to him. + +Then Kolgrim whistled shrill to his men, and we began to move down +to the harbour mouth. I heard a sharp voice hurrying the men in the +other ship; but they could not be ready in time to catch us. + +When we were well out to sea, I asked Harek what all this was +about. + +"Your going has spoiled a plan that Eric, the king's son, had made. +He wanted your sword, and thought also that to rid himself now of +Vemund's son might save him trouble when the crown came to him, as +it will. You were to be set on as you came from the feast tonight +to the guest quarters, as if in a common broil between your men and +his. Then he found you were going, and tried to stay your men, and +next to take these gifts from Thiodolf and me, being very angry, +even to trying to cut me down. Lucky for me that his sword turned +in his hand. But he would have had me slain tonight, certainly, for +he says that it was our fault that you are getting away. He fears +Thiodolf, however. Now I must take service with you, if you will +have me." + +It seemed to me that I was making friends with one hand and enemies +with the other, and that last rather more quickly than was well. So +I laughed, and answered: + +"I suppose that if I have a scald of my own, King Harald will blame +me for overmuch kingship. However, he is angry enough already, and +maybe a good friend will balance that to me. So if you will indeed +cast in your lot with me, I am glad!" + +So I took his hand, and more than friends have he and I been from +that day forward. + +Now, when I looked at Harald's strangely-given gifts, I had reason +to say that he was open handed. The chest held two mail shirts, one +of steel rings, gold ornamented and fastened, and the other of +scales on deerskin, both fit for a king. There were two helms also, +one to match either byrnie {iv}, and a seax that was fit to +hang with Sigurd's sword. As for the bale, that held furs of the +best, and blue cloth and scarlet. If Harald banished me, it was for +no ill will; and it was handsomely done, as though he would fit me +out for the viking's path in all honour, that men might not deem me +outlawed for wrongdoing. So I have no ill word to say against him. +Five years later he would have troubled about me and my kingship +not at all; now he must be careful, for his power was not at its +full. + +As for young Eric, I suppose that he boasted ever after that he had +put me to flight; but I do not know that it matters if he did. + +So I came back to Durness, where I was to meet with Einar; and +peace was made between him and the king, and he thought it well to +go and speak with him. Then he and I must part, and that was hard. + +"Now must you go your own way, son Ranald, for Harald is too strong +for us. Maybe that is best for you, for here shall I bide in peace +in Orkney; and that is not a life for a king's son--to sit at a +jarl's table in idleness, or fight petty fights for scatt +withholden and the like. Better for you the wide seas and the lands +where you may make a name, and maybe a kingdom, for yourself. Yet I +shall miss you sorely." + +So he said, and I knew that he was right. Maybe the spirit of the +sword I had won got hold of me, as they say will happen; for I had +waxed restless of late, and I had tried to keep it from Einar. Now +I hated myself for it, seeing at hand what I had longed for. + +So he went north to meet Harald, and of our parting I will not say +more. I could not then tell that I should not see him again, and +that was well: but I know that when I saw the last flicker of his +sails against the sky, I felt more lonely even than at the +graveside in Southmere. + +Yet I was in no worse case than were many nobly-born men at that +time; for whosoever would not bow to Harald and his new laws must +leave Norway, and her bravest were seeking new homes everywhere. +Some had gone to far-off Iceland, and some to East Anglia; some to +the Greek emperor, or Gardariki, and more yet to Ireland. But the +greatest viking of all, Rolf, the son of Rognvald, Einar's young +brother, had gone to France or England, with a mighty following; +for Harald had outlawed him among the first who broke his law by +plundering on the Norway coasts. A good law it was, but it was new, +and so went against the grain at first. Rolf had sworn to make a +new kingdom for himself, and why should not I do the same? + +So when I was in the open sea again, with all the world before me, +as the long sea-miles passed I grew lighthearted, and many were the +thoughts of great deeds to come that filled my mind. + + + +Chapter III. Odda, the Ealdorman of Devon. + + +Now I steered eastward from Sutherland, and sailed down the east +coasts of Scotland and England; and there is nothing to say about +such a cruise, that had nought more wonderful in it than the +scaring of the folk when we put in for food. I had made up my mind +to go to Ireland for the winter, where, as every Northman knew, +there were kingdoms to be won--having no wish to be Rolf's +follower, seeing he was but a jarl's son; and finding that England +had no overlord, seeing that even now Alfred of Wessex and Guthrum +of East Anglia were fighting for mastery, so that the whole land +was racked and torn with strife. + +Maybe I thought too much of myself at that time, but I was in no +haste to do aught but cruise about and find where I might best make +a name. I had but my one ship and crew, and I would not throw them +away on some useless business for want of care in choosing. + +Now, when we came into the English Channel, a gale began to blow up +from the southwest; and we held over to the French shore, and there +put into a haven that was sheltered enough. The gale strengthened, +and lasted three days; but the people were kindly enough, being of +Saxon kin, who had settled there under the headland they call +Greynose, since Hengist's times of the winning of England across +the water. And when the gale was over, we waited for the sea to go +down, and then came a fair wind from the eastward, as we expected. +So we got provisions on board, and sailed westward again, taking a +long slant over to the English coast, until we sighted the great +rock of Portland; and then the wind came off the land, and in the +early morning veered to the northwest. + +The tide was still with us as the light strengthened; then as the +day broke, with the haze of late summer over the land, we found +that we were right in the track of a strange fleet that was coming +up fast from the westward--great ships and small, in a strange +medley and in no sort of order, so that we wondered what they would +be. + +"Here comes Rolf Ganger back from Valland," said Kolgrim. "He has +gathered any vessels he could get together, and is going to land in +England." + +"We will even head out to sea from across their course," I said. +"Maybe they are Danes from Exeter, flying from the Saxons." + +So we headed away for the open channel until at least we knew more. +The fleet drew up steadily, bringing the tide with them; and +presently we fell to wondering at the gathering. For there were +some half-dozen ships that were plainly Norse like ourselves, maybe +twenty Danish-built longships, and about the same number of heavy +trading vessels. There were a few large fishing boats also; but +leading the crowd were five great vessels the like of which none of +us had ever seen or heard of before. And even as we spoke of them, +two of these shook out reefs in their sails, and drew away from the +rest across channel, as if to cut us off. + +"Ho, men," I said, when I saw that, "get to arms; for here they +come to speak with us. Maybe we shall have to fight--and these are +no easy nuts to crack!" + +Whereat the men laughed; and straightway there was the pleasant +hustle and talk of those who donned mail shirt and helm and set the +throwing weapons to hand with all good will. + +"Let us keep on our course," I said to Kolgrim. "We will see if we +cannot weather on these ships, and anyway shall fight them better +apart from the rest. It is a fine breeze for a sailing match." + +So we held on; and the two great ships to windward of us began to +gain on us slowly, which was a thing that had never been done by +any ship before. I do not know that even Harald Fairhair had any +swifter ship than this that Halfdan had taken in his flight from +home. Kolgrim waxed very wroth when it became plain that these +could outsail us. + +"There is witchcraft about those great hulks," he growled. "They +are neither Norse, nor Frisian, nor Danish, but better than all +three put together." + +"I have sailed in ships, and talked of ships, and dreamed of them +moreover, since I could stand alone," said Thord, "but I never so +much as thought of the like of these. If they belong to some new +kind of viking, there are hard times in store for some of us." + +"Faith," said I, "I believe they have swept up and made prizes of +all that medley astern of them." + +So we held on for half an hour, and all that time they gained +steadily on us; and we neared them quickly at last, for we tried to +hold across their bows and weather on them. That was no good, for +they were as weatherly as we. + +Now we could see that their decks were covered with armed men, and +it seemed certain that they meant to make prize of us. The leading +ship was maybe half a mile ahead of the other, and that a mile from +us--all three close-hauled as we strove to gain a weather berth. +Then the leading ship put her helm up and stood across our course, +and the second followed her. + +"We must out oars now if we are to weather on them," said Kolgrim +at last. + +Then the men shouted; and I looked at the second ship, to which +they were pointing. Her great sail was overboard, for the halliards +had gone--chafed through maybe, or snapped with the strain as she +paid off quickly. Then a new hope came to me. + +"Men," I said, "let us take the other vessel, and then come back on +this; they are worth winning." + +They cheered. And now the fight seemed to be even--ship to ship at +least, if our foe was larger and higher and swifter than ours; for +I thought that he would hardly have a crew like mine. + +We up helm and stood away on the new course the foe had taken, +leaving the crippled ship astern very fast. And now we began to +edge up towards the other vessel, meaning to go about under her +stern, and so shoot to windward of her on the other tack. But then +I thought of a plan which might help us in the fighting. There had +seemed little order and much shouting on board the ship we had left +when her sail fell, and maybe there was the same want of discipline +here. + +"Out oars, men! Keep them swinging, but put no weight on them. Let +them pull after us and tire themselves. I have a mind to see how +our dragon looks on yonder high stem head." + +The men laughed grimly, and the oars were run out. One called to +me: + +"Maybe they beat us in sailing, king; we can teach them somewhat in +weapon play." + +"See how they get their oars out," said Kolgrim, with a sour grin; +"a set of lubbers they are." + +One by one, and in no order, the long oars were being got to work. +The great ship was half as long again as ours, pulling twenty-eight +oars a side to our twenty. But while ours rose and fell as if +worked by one man, theirs were pulled anyhow, as one might say. + +"Better are they at sailing than rowing," said Thord. + +Nevertheless they flew down on us, and that because we only made a +show of rowing. + +Then we laid on the oars, and came head to wind. The sail rattled +down, and was stowed on deck; and silently we waited, arrows on +string, for the fight that was now close at hand. + +Then the great ship hove up, head to wind, right ahead of us, and a +loud hail came from her. + +"Who knows what tongue he talks?" I said. "I cannot make him out +rightly." + +"'Tis West Saxon," said an old warrior from the waist. "He asks who +we are and what is our business." + +"Tell him therefore, if you can speak in his way," I answered; "and +ask the same of him." + +So a hail or two went backwards and forwards, and then: + +"Says he is Odda, jarl or somewhat of Devon in Wessex, and bids us +yield to Alfred the king." + +"In truth," said I, "if he had not spoken of yielding, I had had +more to say to a king who can build ships like these. Now we will +speak with him on his own deck. Tell him he will have to fight us +first." + +The old warrior sent a mighty curt hail back in answer to Odda's +summons; then our war horns blew, and the oars rose and fell, and +we were grinding our bows alongside the great ship's quarter before +they knew we were there. Alfred's men had yet somewhat to learn of +fighting in a sea way, as it seemed, for we were on their deck aft +before they had risen from their oar benches. There were but one or +two men on the quarter deck, besides the steersman, to oppose us. +Odda thought we should lay our ship alongside his towering sides if +we fought, as I suppose, for he was amidships. + +So we swept the decks from aft forward without any hurt to +ourselves: for the Saxons were hampered with the oars, and fell +backward over them, and hindered one another. It was strange to +hear my men laughing in what seemed most terrible slaughter; for +their foes fell before they were smitten, and lay helpless under +the oars, while their comrades fell over them. + +So we won to the foot of the mast, and then found that there were +some on board who were none so helpless: for as we came they swung +the great yard athwart ships, and that stayed us; while over the +heap of canvas glared those who would make it hard for us to win +the ship altogether. + +But before we came to stern fighting, I had a word to say; so I +called for Odda. + +A square built, brown-bearded man with a red, angry face pushed his +way to the front of his men, and frowned at me. + +"What will you? here am I," he said shortly. + +One could understand his words well enough when face to face, for +he spoke in the mixed tongue that any Northman understands, the +plain words of which all our kin have in common. + +"I am no foe of Alfred's," I said; "I do not know, therefore, why I +should fight you." + +"Are you not for the Danes?" he said. + +"I hate them more or less, and I have no traffic with them." + +"Well, then, what will you?" + +"You bade me yield, and therefore I am here. Now I think it is a +matter to be seen whether of us does so." + +"It seems that you have slain about half my men," he said. +"Nevertheless, I do not give up without fighting for the rest of my +ship that you have not won." + +"That is well said," I answered. + +But the men were laughing, for Kolgrim had stooped, and, reaching +under an oar bench, had dragged out a rower by the neck. The man +swore and struggled; but Kolgrim hove him up, and lifted him over +the yard to Odda's feet. + +"They are all like that, Saxon," he said cheerfully. "Maybe there +is a head or two broken; 'tis mostly what we call seasickness, +however." + +Odda looked at the man, who seemed wretched enough, but had no +hurt; then he stared at our laughing faces, and his own brow began +to clear. + +"It comes into my mind," he said, "that maybe you would listen to +me if I owned first that you have the best of us, and then asked +you to fight for Alfred of Wessex. We need the help of such men as +you just now; and if you hate Danes, we have work enough for you." + +"One may certainly listen to that," I answered, laughing. + +"What say you, men? Shall we cast in our lot with Alfred for a +while?" + +"We follow you, Ranald the king," Kolgrim answered for all. "If it +seems good to you, it is good for us. There will be fighting +enough, I trow, if all we have heard is true." + +Then said Odda: + +"And that before long. There is a Danish fleet in Poole Harbour +that is to bring Danes from Wareham to the help of those whom +Alfred holds in Exeter. We have to meet this fleet and scatter it." + +"Then," said old Thord, "your men must be better handled, for Danes +are no new swordsmen or seamen either." + +Now the men stood listening to our talk, and this sort of saying +was not good for them to hear, if they were to meet the foe soon +with a good hope of victory. So Odda said quickly: + +"If you will indeed fight for us, you must trust to Alfred to give +you fitting reward. I do not know what I might say about that, +having thought of no such chance as this. But there is no man who +can complain of him." + +I had heard that the king was ever open handed, but also that at +this time he had little to give. Maybe, however, we might help him +to riches again. I had the men to think of, but I will say for +myself that I had not thought of asking what reward or pay should +be given. + +I sheathed my sword, and held out my hand to Odda across the yard +that was between us; and he grasped it honestly, while the men on +either side cheered. + +"Stay here and speak with me," Odda said. "Now we must get back to +the fleet." + +Then went back to our ship, all but Thord and half a dozen +warriors, whom he kept as guard for me, I suppose; and the +grappling lines were cast off. Then we made sail again, and headed +to rejoin the rest of the Saxon vessels. Odda's crippled ship had +repaired her damage at this time, and went with us. But first it +was plain that she thought we had taken her consort, for she +prepared to fight us, and Odda had to hail her once or twice before +she was sure of what had happened. Then her crew cheered also. + +Now Odda took me aft, and we sat together on his quarter deck. +Thord came also, and leaned on the rail beside us, looking with +much disfavour at the crew, who were plainly landsmen at sea for +the first time, if they were stout fighting men enough. Maybe there +were ten seamen among the hundred and fifty, but these had handled +the ship well under canvas, as we knew. + +"You have come in good time, King Ranald," Odda said. "You see what +state we are in; can you better it for us?" + +"Many things I can see that need strengthening," I answered. "But +you seem to take me into your counsels over soon, seeing that I +have just fallen on you sword in hand." + +"Why," said Odda frankly, "it is just your way of speaking to me +sword in hand that makes me sure that I can trust you. I cannot +deny that you had this ship at your mercy, and that the other would +have been yours next; and you knew it, and yet spoke me fair. So it +is plain that you mean well by us." + +"Ay," said I, "but for your bidding me to yield, there would have +been no fighting at all, when I knew to whom the ships belonged." + +"You have put a thought in my mind, and I am glad you did board us, +seeing there is no harm done," Odda answered. "I will tell you what +it is. Send me some of your men to order my people and tell them +how to prepare for battle. Here am I sent to sea for the first +time, with good warriors enough who are in like case, and a few +seamen who can sail the ship and know nought else." + +"You have some Norsemen yonder, if I mistake not," I said, looking +at the fleet which we were nearing. + +"Ay--wandering vikings who care nought for what I say. They were +going to Rolf, and the king persuaded them to take this cruise +first. If you can make them follow you, there will be another +matter for which I shall be more than thankful." + +Thereat Thord growled: "They will follow Ranald Vemundsson well +enough; have no care about that." + +Then said I: + +"These are the finest ships I have ever seen. Where did they come +from?" + +"Alfred, our king, planned them," said Odda, with much pride; "and +they were built by our own men, working under Frisian shipwrights, +in Plymouth." + +"How will you like to command one of these, Thord?" I asked then. + +"I like the ship well enough. The crew is bad. And then, whose +command is the fleet under?" + +"Take the ship, Thord, and lick my crew into shape; and Ranald, +your king, shall command the fleet," Odda said plainly. + +"Fair and softly," said Thord bluntly. "I can do the two things you +ask me; but will your men follow Ranald?" + +"Faith," said Odda, "if I say they are to do so, they must." + +So in the end I left Thord and my seamen with Odda; but I would not +take his place, only saying that I would lead the Norsemen, and +that he could follow our plans. I would put more good men into each +of his five ships, and they should do what they could. At least +they could teach the Saxons how to board a ship, and how to man +their own sides against boarders from a foe. + +Those Norsemen said they would gladly follow the son of King Vemund +and foster son of Einar the jarl; and so we led the strange fleet, +and held on eastward with a light breeze all that day, making +little way when the tide turned, and held back by the slower +vessels. Men in plenty there were, but ill fitted for aught but +hand fighting; though I had more Norsemen sent into the larger +ships, such as those that had been taken from the Danes and the +better trading vessels. One might soon see the difference in the +trim and order on board as the vikings got to work and the Saxons +overcame their sickness. + +Now we might meet the Danes at any time, and I could not tell how +matters would go. One thing was certain, however, and that was that +they looked for no gathering of ships by Alfred. We should +certainly take them by surprise, and I hoped, therefore, that they +would be in no trim for fighting. + +There was a very swift cutter belonging to the Norsemen, and as +night fell I sent her on to keep watch along the shore for the +first coming of the Danes, while we shortened sail; for the mouth +of Poole Harbour was not far distant, and if we passed that we +should be seen, and perhaps it would be guessed that we were not a +friendly fleet. Towards evening, too, the wind shifted, and blew +more off the shore, and that might bring them out from their haven. +Kolgrim, who was weather wise, said that a shift of wind to the +southward was coming presently. + +When morning came, the high cliffs of Swanage were on our bow, the +wind was yet steady from off shore, and beyond the headland lay +Poole Harbour, at whose head is Wareham, where the Danes were. It +is a great sea inlet with a narrow mouth, and one must have water +enough on a rising tide to enter it. Now the ebb was running, and +if the Danes came this morning, it would be soon. + +They came, as it seemed, for the cutter was flying back to us under +sail and oars; and before she reached us, the first Danish ships +were clear of the Swanage headlands, making for the offing. Then I +got my ships into line abreast, and Thord worked up Odda's five +alongside us to seaward; and all the while the Danish sails hove +into sight in no sort of order, and seeming so sure that none but +friends could be afloat that they paid no heed to us. + +Soon there were full a hundred vessels of all sorts off Swanage +point, and the cutter brought word that there were but twenty more. +Then I ran up my fighting flag, and everywhere along our line rose +a great cheering as we hoisted sail and sped down on the foe. It +was long since the seas had borne a fleet whence the Saxon war cry +rang. + +The leading Danes were ahead of us as we gathered way, and their +long line straggled right athwart our course. We should strike +their midmost ships; and at last they saw what was coming, and +heard the din of war horns and men's voices that came down wind to +them, and there were confusion and clamour on their decks, and +voices seemed to call for order that did not come. + +Then one or two longships from among them struck sail and cleared +for action, and on these swooped Alfred's great ships. Odda's +crashed upon and sank the first she met, and plunged and shook +herself free from the wreck, and sought another. And beyond her the +same was being wrought; and cheers and cries were strangely mixed +where those high bows went forward unfaltering. + +Now a ship crowded with men was before me. As we boarded, her crew +were yet half armed, and struggling to reach the weapon chests +through the press, even while our dragon head was splintering the +gunwale; and I leaped on board her, with my men after me and Harek +beside me. + +Then sword Helmbiter was let loose for the first time since Sigurd +wielded her; and though a great and terrible cry came from over the +water as one of Alfred's ships sank another Dane, I could look no +more, for there was stern fighting before me. + +What a sword that was! Hardly could my arm feel the weight of it as +it swung in perfect balance, and yet I knew the weight it had as it +fell. Helm and mail seemed as nought before the keen edge, and the +shields flew in twain as it touched them. + +Forward I went, and aft went Harek the scald, and there was soon an +end. The Danes went overboard, swimming or sinking, as their fate +might be, and only the slain bided before us. The ship was ours, +and I looked round to see what should be next. No other ship had +come to help our prey. + +Then I saw a wonderful sight. Panic terror had fallen on the Danes, +and not one ship of all that great fleet was not flying down the +wind without thought of fighting. Among them went our vessels, +great and small, each doing her work well; and the Saxon shouts +were full of victory. + +So we must after them, and once more we boarded a longship, and had +the victory; and then we were off the haven mouth, and with the +flood tide the wind was coming up in gusts from the southeast that +seemed to bode angry weather. By that time no two Danish ships were +in company, and the tide was setting them out to sea. + +"Here is a gale coming," said Kolgrim, looking at the sky and the +whitening wave crests. "We had best get our ships into this haven +while we can." + +It seemed that Thord was of the same mind, for now he was heading +homeward, and the other Saxons were putting about and following +him. So I got men into the best of the ships we had taken, and +waited till Thord in Odda's ship led the way, and so followed into +Poole Harbour. + +Well it was for us that we had refuge so handy. For by noonday the +gale was blowing from the southwest, and two Danish ships were +wrecked in trying to gain the harbour--preferring to yield to us +rather than face the sea, with a lee shore, rocky and hopeless, +waiting for them. + +We went into the Poole inlet, which is on the eastern side of the +wide waters of the haven, and there found good berths enough. The +village was empty, save for a few Saxon fishermen, who hailed us +joyfully. And then Odda made for us as good a feast as he might in +the best house that was there, bidding every shipmaster to it. +Merry enough were all, though we had but ship fare; for the Saxons +had great hopes from this victory. + +Now Odda made much of what I had done--though it was little +enough--saying that I and my men deserved well of Alfred, and that +he hoped that we should stay with him for this winter, which would +perhaps see the end of the war. + +"Why," said I, "things would have been much the same if I had not +been here." + +"That they would not," he answered. "I should have blundered past +this place in the night, and so lost the Danes altogether; or if I +had not done that, they would soon have found out what state my men +were in. You should have heard old Thord rate them into order; it +is in my mind that he even called me--Odda the ealdorman--hard +names in his broad Norse tongue. But at least he gave us somewhat +more to think of than the sickness that comes of heaving planks +that will by no means keep steady for a moment." + +He laughed heartily at himself, and then added: + +"Good King Alfred thought not at all of that matter. Now I can +shift the whole credit of this victory to your shoulders, and then +he will not believe that I am the born sea captain that he would +have me think myself." + +"I will not have that," I said, "for I have not deserved it." + +"Ay; but, I pray you, let me put it from myself, else shall I be +sent to sea again without any one to look to for advice," he said +earnestly, and half laughing at the same time. "I did but take +command of this fleet because the king could find no one else at a +pinch. Heaven defend me from such a charge again!" + +"Now you have only the Exeter Danes to deal with," I said. + +"How many men might these ships have held?" he asked. + +"Maybe five thousand," I answered. + +Thereat his face changed, and he rose up from his seat at the high +table, and said that he would go down to see that the ships were +safe, for the gale was blowing heavily as the night fell. + +So we went outside the house, and called a man, telling him to find +one of the Poole fishermen and bring him to speak to us. + +"There were twelve thousand Danes in Wareham," he said, "for more +have come lately. I thought they would all have been in the ships." + +"If that had been possible, not one would have seen the morning's +light," I answered, "for their ships are lost in this gale +certainly." + +Now I will say that I was right. The wrecks strewed the shore of +Dorset and Hants next morning; and if any men won to land, there +waited for them the fishers and churls, who hated them. No Danish +fleet was left in the channel after that gale was spent. + +When the fisher came, he told us that as many more Danes were left +in Wareham, and that those from Poole had fled thither when they +saw what had happened to the fleet. + +"Shall you march on Wareham and scatter them, or will they fall on +us here?" I asked; for we had no more than two thousand men at +most. + +"I would that I knew what they thought of this business," he +answered; "but I shall not move tonight. It is far by land, and I +suppose we could not get the ships up in the dark." + +So he posted pickets along the road to Wareham, and we went back to +the house for a while. And presently, as it grew dark, a wild +thought came into my mind. I would go to Wareham with a guide, and +see what I could find out of the Danish plans. Maybe there were +fewer men than was thought, or they might be panic-stricken at our +coming in this wise; or, again, they might march on us, and if so, +we should have to get to sea again, to escape from double our +numbers. + +Now the more I thought of this, the more I grew bent on going, for +I was sure that we must know what was going on. And at last I took +Odda aside while Harek sang among the men, and told him what I +would do. + +At first he was against my running the risk; but I told him that a +Norseman might go safely where a Saxon could not among the Danes, +and at last I persuaded him. Then I called Kolgrim, and we went out +together into the moonlight and the wind, to find the fisherman we +had spoken with already and get him to act as guide. I think that +Odda did not expect to see either of us again; and when I came to +know more of Saxons, I learned that he trusted me most fully, for +many thanes would have thought it likely that I went on some +treacherous errand. + + + +Chapter IV. Jarl Osmund's Daughter. + + +To my mind, no gale seems so wild as one that comes at the time of +full moon, when the clouds break up and fly in great masses of +black and silver against the deeper sky beyond, while bright light +and deepest shadow chase each other across land and sea beneath +them. Kolgrim and I stood under the lee of a shed, waiting for the +fisher to get his boat afloat, and looked out on bending trees and +whitened water, while beyond the harbour we could see the great +downs, clear cut and dark, almost as well as by day, so bright it +was. + +It was low water now, which was good for us, for the winding +channels that lead up to Wareham were sheltered under their bare +banks. We could hear the thunder of the surf along the rocky coast +outside, when the wind ceased its howling for a moment; and at high +water the haven had been well nigh too stormy for a small boat. Now +we should do best to go by water, for wind was with us; though, +unless the gale dropped very quickly, we could not return in her, +for there would be a heavy sea and tide against us if we could get +away before it turned, while if we were long wind against tide +would be worse yet. + +The fisherman was eager to help us against the Danes, who had made +him work for nought; and so in half an hour we were flying up the +haven on the first rise of tide, and the lights of Wareham town +grew plainer every moment. From the number of twinkling sparks that +flitted here and there, it would seem that many folk were waking, +even if some movement were not on hand. + +Presently we turned into the channel that bends to the southwest +from the more open water, and the town was before us. The fisher +took to his oars now, lowering the scrap of sail that had been +enough to drive us very swiftly before the gale so far. + +Wareham stands on the tongue of land between two rivers' mouths, +and the tide was setting us into the northward of these. That was +the river one would have to cross in coming to or from Poole, and +maybe we should learn as much there as anywhere. + +There were three ships on the mud, but even in the moonlight it was +plain that they were not seaworthy. There were wide gaps in their +bulwarks, which none had tried to mend, and the stem head of one +was gone. + +"These ships were hurt in the storm of lest week," the fisher said, +as we drifted past them; "there was hardly one that came in unhurt. +But the Danes were eager to go, and mended them as they could." + +Perhaps that was partly the reason why we gained so easy a victory, +I thought at the time, and afterwards knew that I was right. They +had suffered very much, while we lay across channel in safety. + +There loomed before us the timbers of a strong bridge that had been +over the north river, when we were fairly in it and under the +nearer houses of the town. But now it was broken down, and the gap +in its middle was too wide for hasty repair. + +"When was this done?" I asked the fisherman. + +"Since yesterday," he answered. + +Now this seemed to me to indicate that the Danes meant to guard +against attack by land from Poole; also that they overrated our +numbers, which was probable in any case, seeing that a fleet had +fled from before us. + +There were wharves on the seaward side of the bridge, but none were +beyond; and the houses stood back from the water, so that there was +a sort of open green between it and them. There were no people +about, but we could hear shouts from the town now and then. + +"Let us go ashore and speak with some one," I said; "it is of no +use our biding here on the water." + +Kolgrim and I were fully armed, and had boat cloaks with us which +covered us well, and we thought none would question who we were if +we mixed among the men in some inn or other gathering place. So we +bade the fisher wait for us, and found the stairs, and went to the +wide green along the waterside, and across it to the houses, which +were mostly poor enough here. + +Many of them stood open, and in one a fire burned on the hearth, +but all were empty. So we turned into a street that led seemingly +from one bridge to the other across the town. Here men were going +hither and thither with torches, and groups were outside some of +the houses. To the nearest of these I went, as if I had all right +to be in the place. + +They were bringing goods out of the house, and loading a cart with +them. + +"Here is a flitting," said Kolgrim, "and another or two are on hand +yonder." + +I stayed a man who came past me from out of a house. + +"I have fled from Poole," I said. "What is in the wind here? Are we +to leave Wareham also?" + +"If you come from Poole, you should know that it is time we did +so," he answered shortly. "I suppose you saw the whole business." + +"So I did," I answered. "What are the orders?" + +"Pack up and quit with all haste," said he. "You had better get to +work if you have aught to save." + +"Shall we go to Exeter, or back to Mercia?" I said. + +"Exeter they say; but I know not. Why not go and ask Jarl Osmund +himself--or follow the crowd and hinder no one with questions?" + +He hurried on; but then some men began to question us about the +doings off Swanage, and Kolgrim told them such tales that they +shivered, and soon we had a crowd round us listening. Nor did I +like to hurry away, for I heard a man say that we were Northmen, by +our voices. But there were plenty of our folk among the Danes. + +Then came a patrol of horsemen down the street, and they bade the +loiterers hurry. I drew Kolgrim into an open doorway, and stood +there till they passed, hearing them rate their fellows for delay. + +"Wareham will be empty tomorrow," I said. "Now we can go; we have +learned enough." + +Still I would see more, for there seemed no danger. Every man was +thinking of himself. So we went across the town, and as we came +near the western bridge the crowd grew very thick. + +We heard before long that the army was as great as Odda had +thought, and that they were going to Exeter. Already the advance +guard had gone forward, but this train of followers would hardly +get clear of the town before daylight. They had heard great +accounts of our numbers, and I wished we had brought the ships up +here at once. There would have been a rout of the Danes. + +But the place was strange to me, and to Odda also, so that we could +not be blamed. + +We got back by the way we came, and then knew that we could in no +way take the boat to Poole. The gale was raging at its highest, and +thatch was flying from the exposed roofs. It would be dead against +us; and the sea was white with foam, even in the haven. So we must +go by road, and that was a long way. But we must get back to Odda, +for he should be in Wareham before the Danes learned, maybe, that +their flight was too hurried. + +Now it seemed to me that to leave Wareham was not so safe as to +come into it, for no Dane would be going away from the place. +However, the bridge was down; and if it had not been done in too +great haste, any fugitives from the country would have come in. So +that maybe we should meet no one on the road that goes along the +shore of the great haven. + +The fisherman ferried us over to the opposite shore, and then tied +his boat to the staging of the landing place, saying that he was +well known and in no danger. He would sleep now, and bring his boat +back when the wind fell. So we left him, thanking him for his +goodwill. + +Grumbling, as men will, we set out on our long walk in the gale. We +could not miss the road, for it never left the curves of the shore, +and all we had to do was to be heedful of any meetings. There might +be outposts even yet, watching against surprise. + +However, we saw no man in the first mile, and then were feeling +more secure, when we came to a large farmstead which stood a short +bowshot back from the road, with a lane of its own leading to the +great door. What buildings there were seemed to be behind it, and +no man was about; but there was light shining from one of the high +windows, as if some one were inside, and plain to be seen in the +moonlight were two horses tied by the stone mounting block at the +doorway. + +"Here is a chance for us, master," said my comrade, coming to a +stand in the roadway. "I must try to steal these horses for +ourselves. If Danes are in the place, they have doubtless stolen +them; and if Saxons, they will get them back." + +"There will be no Saxon dwelling so near the Danes," I said. "Maybe +the place is full of Danes--some outpost that is careless." + +"Careless enough," said Kolgrim. "If they are careless for three +minutes more, they have lost their horses." + +Then we loosened our swords in their sheaths, and drew our seaxes, +and went swiftly up the grassy lane. The wind howled round the +house so that none would hear the clank of mail, which we could not +altogether prevent. But the horses heard us, and one shifted about +and whinnied as if glad to welcome us. + +At that we ran and each took the bridle of that next him, and cut +the halter that was tied to the rings in the wall, looking to see +the doors thrown open at any moment. Then we leaped to the saddles +and turned to go. The hoofs made a great noise on the paving stones +before the doorway, yet there was no sound from inside the house. + +That seemed strange to me, and I sat still, looking back with the +horse's head turned towards the main road. + +"Stay not, master," Kolgrim said. "'Tis some outpost, and the men +have slept over the farmhouse ale. Maybe the stables behind are +full of horses. Have a care, master; the door opens!" + +He was going; but I waited for a moment, half expecting to see a +spear point come first, and my hand was on my sword hilt. But the +great heavy door swung slowly, as if the one who opened it had +trouble with its weight. So I must needs see who came. Maybe it was +some old man or woman whose terror I could quiet in a few words. + +Then the red firelight from within shone out on me, and in the +doorway, with arms raised to post and door on either hand, stood a +tall maiden, white robed, with gold on neck and arm. The moonlight +on her seemed weird with the glow of the fire shining through the +edges of her hood and sleeves. I could see her face plainly, and it +was fair and troubled, but there was no fear in her looks. + +"Father, is this you?" she said quietly. + +I could make no answer to that, and she looked intently at me; for +the moon was beyond me, and both Kolgrim and I would seem black +against it, as she came from the light within, while the wind, keen +with salt spray, was blowing in her face. + +"Who is it?" she said again. "I can scarcely see for moon and wind +in my eyes." + +"Friends, lady," I said, for that at least was true in a way. + +"Where are my horses? Have you seen aught of our thralls, who +should have left them?" she asked, looking to whence we had just +taken the beasts. + +Now I was ashamed to have taken them, for she was so plainly alone +and helpless, and I could not understand altogether how it could be +so. I was sure that she was Danish, too. + +"How is it that you have not fled, lady?" I asked. "Surely you +should have gone." + +"Ay; but the thralls fled when they heard the news. Has not my +father sent you back for me?" + +This seemed a terrible plight for the maiden, and I knew not what +to say or do. She could not be left in the way of our Saxons if +they came on the morrow, and I could not take her to Poole. And so, +lest I should terrify her altogether, I made up my mind even as she +looked to me for an answer. + +"I think your father is kept in Wareham in some way. Does he look +for you there?" + +"Ay, surely," she answered; but there was a note as of some new +fear in her voice. "Has aught befallen him? Have the Saxons come?" + +"All is well in Wareham yet," I answered. "Now we will take you to +your father. But we are strangers, as you may see." + +Then I called to Kolgrim, who was listening open eyed to all this, +and backed away from the door a little. + +"What is this madness, master?" he whispered hoarsely. + +"No madness at all. Ten minutes' ride to Wareham with the maiden, +give her to the fisherman to take to her friends, and then ride +away--that is all. Then we shall be in Poole long before any look +for us, for we are in luck's way." + +Kolgrim laughed. + +"Strange dangers must I run with you, master; but that is what one +might look for with Ranald of the Sword." + +Then I got off the horse, which was very strong and seemed quiet, +and went to the maiden again. + +"It will be best for you to come with us, lady," I said "we will +see you safely to Wareham." + +The light fell on my arms now, and they were splendid enough, being +Harald Fairhair's gift, which I had put on for the fight, seeing +that the men loved to see their king go bravely, and being, +moreover, nowise loth to do so myself. She seemed to take +heart--for she was well nigh weeping now--when she saw that I was +not some wandering soldier of the great host. + +"My horses, two of them should be here," she said. "I bade the +thralls leave them when they fled." + +So she thought not that we had loosed them, and did not know her +own in the moonlight. Maybe she had no knowledge as to which of +many had been left, and I was glad of that, for so her fear was +less. + +"You must ride with us," I said, "and I would ask you to come +quickly; even now the host is leaving Wareham." + +"Ay, is that so? Then my father is busy," she said, and then she +faltered a little, and looked at me questioningly. "I cannot go +without my nurse, and she is very sick. I think she sleeps now. Men +feared her sickness so that we brought her here from the town. But +indeed there is nought to fear; there is no fever or aught that +another might take from her." + +Then I grew fairly anxious, for this was more than I had looked +for. I knew that it was likely that she would soon be missed and +sought for; yet I could not think of leaving her to that chance, +with the bridge broken moreover. + +I gave the bridle to Kolgrim then to hold. + +"Let me see your nurse," I said gently; "I have some skill in these +troubles." + +She led me into the house without a word. All the lower story was +in one great room, with a hearth and bright fire thereon in the +centre. Beyond that was a low bed, to which the maiden went. A very +old woman, happed in furs and heavy blankets, lay on it, and it +needed but one look to tell me that she needed no care but the +last. Past need of flight was she, for she was dead, though so +peacefully that her watcher had not known it. + +"The sleep is good, is it not?" the maiden said, looking anxiously +into my face. + +"It is good, lady," I answered, taking off my helm. "It is the best +sleep of all--the sleep that heals all things." + +The maiden looked once at the quiet face, and once more at me, with +wide eyes, and then she knew what I meant, and turned quickly from +me and wept silently. + +I stood beside her, not daring to speak, and yet longing to be on +the road. And so still were we that Kolgrim got off his horse and +came to the door and called me, though not loudly. + +I stepped back to him. + +"Come again in a few minutes and say one word--'Saxons'" I +whispered, "then we shall go." + +He nodded and drew back. I think the maiden had not heard me move, +for she was bent over the bed and what lay thereon. It seemed very +long to me before I heard my comrade at the door. + +"Saxons, master!" he said loudly. + +"Say you so?" I answered, and then I touched the maiden's arm +gently. + +"Lady, we must go quickly," I said. "The dame is past all help of +ours, and none can harm her. Come, I pray you." + +She stood up then, still looking away from me, and I drew the +covering over the still face she gazed at. + +"You must leave her, and I know these Saxons will not wrong the +dead," said I gently. "Your father will miss you." + +"I am keeping you also in danger," she answered bravely. "I will +come." + +"Loth to go am I," she said, as she gathered her wrappings to her +and made ready very quickly, "for it seems hard. But hard things +come to many in time of war." + +After that she ceased weeping, and was, as I thought, very brave in +this trouble, which was indeed great to her. And when she was clad +in outdoor gear, she bent once more over the bed as in farewell, +while I turned away to Kolgrim and made ready the horses. Then she +came, and mounted behind me on a skin that I had taken from a chair +before the hearth. + +Then we were away, and I was very glad. The good horse made nothing +of the burden, and we went quickly. Many a time had I ridden +double, with the rough grip of some mail-shirted warrior round my +waist, as we hurried back to the ships after a foray; but this was +the first time I had had charge of a lady, and it was in a strange +time and way enough. I do not know if it was in the hurry of +flight, or because they had none, but the horses had no saddles +such as were for ladies' use. + +So I did not speak till we were half a mile from the house, and +then came a hill, and we walked, because I feared to discomfort my +companion. Then I said: + +"Lady, we are strangers, and know not to whom we speak nor to whom +we must take you." + +There was a touch of surprise in her voice as she answered: + +"I am the Lady Thora, Jarl Osmund's daughter." + +Then I understood how this was the chief to whom the man I spoke +with first had bidden me go for orders. It was plain now that he +was up and down among the host ordering all things, and deeming his +daughter in safety all the while. He had not had time to learn how +his cowardly folk had fled and left their mistress, fearing perhaps +the sickness of the old dame as much as the Saxon levies. + +Now no more was said till we came to the riverside, where the flood +tide was roaring through the broken timbers of the bridge. The +fisher slept soundly despite the noise of wind and water, and +Kolgrim had some trouble in waking him. + +"How goes the flight?" I asked him when he came ashore with the +boat's painter in his hand. + +"Faith, master, I know not. I have slept well," he said. + +Now by this time it seemed to me that I ought to take the lady into +a safe place, and I would go myself rather than leave her to the +fisherman, who was rough, and hated the Danes heartily, as I knew. +Moreover, I had a new plan in my head which pleased me mightily. +Then I thought that if I were to meet any man who suspected me, +which was not likely, the Lady Thora would be pass enough for me. +So I told Kolgrim to bide here for me, and he said at first that he +must be with me. However, I made him stay against his will at last, +telling him what I thought. + +Then the fisher put us across quickly, and went back to the far +side to wait my return. + +I asked Thora where I must take her to find the jarl. + +"To his house, surely," she said. + +"I do not know the way from here," I answered; "I fear you must +lead me." + +"As you will," she said, wondering. "It is across the town +certainly." + +That was bad for me, perhaps, but I should find that out presently. +So we went across the open, and came to the road through the town +along which I had been before. It was clearer, though there were +yet many people about. + +Now when we were in the shadow of the first houses, Thora stopped +suddenly and looked hard at me. + +"Will you tell me if I am heading you into danger?" she said. + +"What danger is possible?" I answered. "There are no Saxons here +yet." + +"Not one?" she said meaningly. "I may be wrong--it does seem +unlikely but I think you do not belong to us. Your speech is not +like ours altogether, and your helm is gold encircled, as if you +were a king." + +"Lady," I said, "why should you think that I am not of your people? +Let us go on to the jarl." + +"Now I know that you are not. Oh, how shall I thank you for this?" + +Then she glanced at my helm again, and drew a sudden little quick +breath. + +"Is it possible that you are Alfred of Wessex? It were like what +they say of him to do as you have done for a friendless maiden." + +Then she caught my hand and held it in both of hers, looking half +fearfully at me. + +"Lady," I said, "I am not King Alfred, nor would I be. Come, let us +hasten." + +"I will take you no further," she said then. "Now I am sure that +you are of the Northmen that were seen with the Saxons. You are not +of us, and I shall lose you your life." + +Then came the quick trot of horses, and I saw a little troop coming +down the street, their arms flashing in the streaks of moonlight +between the houses. + +"I will see you in good hands, Lady Thora," I answered. "Who are +these coming?" + +"It is my father," she said, and drew me back deeper into shadow. + +After the horsemen and beside them ran men who bore planks and +ropes, and it was plain that the jarl had found out his loss, and +hastened to bridge the gap and cross the river. + +I saw that I could keep up the pretence no longer. + +"Let me walk behind you as your servant," I said. "If any heed me, +I pray you make what tale you can for me." + +"What can I say to you in thanks?" she cried quickly, and letting +go my hand which she yet held. "If you are slain, it is my fault. +Tell me your name at least." + +"Ranald Vemundsson, a Northman of King Alfred's," I said. "Now I am +your servant--ever." + +Then Thora left my side suddenly, and ran forward to meet the +foremost horseman--for they were close to us--calling aloud to +Osmund to stay. And he reined up and leaped from his horse with a +cry of joy, and took her in his arms for a moment. + +I got my cloak around me, pulling the hood over my helm, and stood +in the shadow where I was. I saw the jarl lift his daughter into +the saddle, and the whole troop turned to go back. The footmen cast +down their burdens where each happened to be, and went quickly +after them; and I was turning to go my way also, when a man came +riding back towards me. + +"Ho, comrade," he said, "hasten after us. Mind not the things left +in the boat. There is supper ere we go." + +I lifted my hand, and he turned his horse and rode away, paying no +more heed to me. That was a good tale of things left that Thora had +made in case I was seen to be going back to the boat. + +Then I waxed light hearted enough, and thought of my other plan. +Kolgrim saw me coming, and the boat was ready. + +"Have you flint and steel?" I said to the fisher as I got into the +boat. + +"Ay, master, and tinder moreover, dry in my cap." + +"Well, then, take me to those ships we saw. I have a mind to scare +these Danes." + +It was a heavy pull against the sea to where they lay afloat now, +though it was not far. I fired all three in the cabins under the +fore deck, so that, as their bows were towards the town, the light +would not be seen till I was away. + +Then we went swiftly back to Kolgrim, and as I mounted and rode +off, the blaze flared up behind us, for the tarred timbers burned +fiercely in the wind. + +"That will tell Odda that the Danes are flying. And maybe it will +save Wareham town from fire, for they will think we are on them. So +I have spoiled Jarl Osmund's supper for him." + +Then I minded that this would terrify the Lady Thora maybe, and +that put me out of conceit with my doings for a moment. But it was +plain that she was brave enough, for there were many things to fray +her in the whole of this matter, though perhaps it was because +Kolgrim stayed beyond the river that she made so sure that I was a +man of King Alfred's and no friend to the Danes. + +So we rode away, pleased enough with the night's work, and reached +Poole in broad daylight, while the gale was slackening. Well +pleased was Odda to see me back, and to hear my news. + +Then he asked me what I would do next. There seemed to be no more +work at sea, and yet he would have me speak with King Alfred and +take some reward from him. And I told him that the season grew +late, and that I would as soon stay in England for this winter as +anywhere. + +"What will you do next in the matter of these Danes, however?" was +my question. + +Then he said: + +"I must chase them through the country till they are within the +king's reach. He has the rest pent in Exeter, and there will be +trouble if they sail out to join these. I must follow them, +therefore, end send men to Alfred to warn him. Then he will know +what to do. Now I would ask you to take the ships back into the +river Exe and join us there." + +I would do that willingly, and thought that if the wind held fair +after the gale ended, I might be there before he joined the king by +land. But I should have to wait for a shift to the eastward before +sailing. + +So Odda brought his men ashore, and marched on Wareham and thence +after the Danes, not meaning to fight unless some advantage showed +itself, for they were too many, but to keep them from harming the +country. And I waited for wind to take me westward. + +Then the strange Norsemen left us. They had gained much booty in +the Danish ships, for they carried what had been won from the +Saxons, and what plunder should be taken was to be their share in +due for their services. They were little loss, for they were +masterless vikings who might have given trouble at any time if no +plunder was to be had, and I was not sorry to see them sail away to +join Rolf Ganger in France. + +Now these men would have followed me readily, and so I should have +been very powerful at sea, or on any shore where I cared to land. +But Odda had made me feel so much that I was one in his counsel, +and a friend whom he valued and trusted, that I had made this +warfare against the Danes my own quarrel, as it were in his +company. Already I had a great liking for him, and the more I heard +of Alfred the king, the more I wished to see him. At the least, a +man who could build ships like these, having every good point of +the best I knew, and better than any ever heard of before, was +worth speaking with. I thought I knew somewhat of the shipwright's +craft, and one thinks much of the wisdom of the man who is easily +one's master in anything wherein one has pride. + +Moreover, Alfred's men were wont to speak of him with little fear, +but as if longing for his praise. And I thought that wonderful, +knowing only Harald Fairhair and the dread of him. + + + +Chapter V. Two Meetings in England. + + +It was not long before the shift of wind that I looked for came, +and at once I took all the ships round to the river Exe. Odda had +left me all the seamen he had, and they were enough for the short, +fair passage. We came to the haven in the river, and there heard +what news there was, and it was good enough. Odda had sent +well-mounted men to reach the king by roads away from the +retreating Danes, and he had been ready for them. He drew off his +levies from before the walls of the town, and let his enemies pass +him; then he and Odda fell on their rear and drove them into +Exeter, and there was holding them. It was well done; for though +the host sallied from the town to meet the newcomers, they gained +nothing but a share in the rout that followed when Odda closed on +the rear guard and the king charged the flank. + +Now we heard that as soon as we landed. And then I had my first +knowledge of the ways of a Saxon levy. For no sooner were the ships +berthed than their crews began to leave them, making for their +homes. + +One or two men I caught in the act of leaving in the early morning, +and spoke sharply to them, for it seemed that soon there would be +ships enough and not a man to tend them. Whereon they answered: + +"We have done what we were called up for, and more also. Now may +others take our places. What more would you have? We have won our +victory, and the ships are not needed for a while." + +So they went, and nothing I could say would stay them. I waxed +angry on that, and I thought I might as well sail for Ireland as +not. There seemed no chance of doing aught here, where men would +throw away what they had won of advantage. + +So I went back to my own ship and sat under the after awning, in no +good temper. Thord and Kolgrim were yet busy in and about the +vessels, making all secure, and setting men to work on what needed +repairing. Presently Harek the scald came and sat with me, and I +grumbled to my heart's content about this Saxon carelessness and +throwing away of good luck. + +Many Saxons--men from camp, and freemen of the place, and some +thanes--came, as one might expect, to stare at the ships and their +prizes. I paid no heed to them as the day went on, only wishing +that Odda would come and speak to me about his doings, for I had +sent word to him that we were in the river. Sometimes a thane would +stay and speak with me from the wharf alongside which my own ship +was with one or two others, and they were pleasant enough, though +they troubled me with over many thanks, which was Odda's fault. +However, I will say this, that if every man made as little of his +own doings and as much of those of his friends as did the honest +ealdorman, it were well in some ways. + +By and by, while we were talking, having got through my grumble, +Kolgrim came along the shore with some Saxon noble whom he had met; +and this stranger was asking questions about each ship that he +passed. I suppose that Kolgrim had answered many such curious folk +already; for when he came near and we could hear what he was +saying, I was fain to laugh, for, as sailors will, he was telling +the landsman strange things. + +"What do we pull up the anchor with?" he was saying. "Why, with +yonder big rope that goes from masthead to bows." and he pointed to +the great mainstay of our ship. "One must have a long purchase, if +you know what that is." + +"Ah, 'tis wonderful," said the Saxon. + +Then he caught my eye, and saw that I was smiling. He paid no heed +to me, however, but looked long at the ship that lay astern of +ours--one of the captured Danes. Thord had set a gang of shore folk +to bend the sail afresh to a new yard, for the old one had been +strained in the gale that came before the fight. + +"What are those men doing, friend?" he asked Kolgrim directly. + +"Bending a sail," answered my comrade listlessly, trusting, as it +would seem, to the sea language for puzzlement enough to the +landsman. + +"So," said the Saxon, quite quietly. "It was in my mind that when a +sail was bent to the yard it was bent with the luff to the fore end +thereof." + +At which words Kolgrim started, in a way, and looked first at the +riggers and then back at the Saxon, who moved no muscle of his +face, though one might see that his eyes twinkled. And I looked at +the riggers also, and saw that the Saxon was right, and that the +men had the square-cut sail turned over with the leech forward and +the luff aft. The sail was half laced to the yard, and none but a +man who knew much of ships would have seen that aught was wrong. + +Then Kolgrim's face was so red, and angry, and full of shame all at +once, that I had the best laugh at him that had come to me for many +a day. And he did not bide with the Saxon any longer, but went on +board the ship hastily, and said what he had to say to the riggers. +The Saxon stood, and looked after him with a smile breaking over +his pleasant face, and I thought that maybe I owed him some amends +for my comrade's rough jesting, though indeed he had his revenge. + +So I came ashore and spoke to him. He was a slight, brown-haired +man of about thirty, bearded and long-haired after the Saxon +fashion, and I thought he seemed to be recovering from some wound +or sickness that had made him white and thin. He wore his beard +long and forked, which may have made him look thinner; but he +seemed active and wiry in his movements--one of those men who make +up for want of strength by quickness and mastery of their weapons. +Soberly dressed enough he was, but the cloth of his short cloak and +jerkin was very rich, and he had a gold bracelet and brooch that +seemed to mark him as high in rank. + +"My comrade has been well caught, thane," I said; "he will be more +careful what tales he tells the next comer. But I think he was +tired of giving the same answers to the same questions to all who +come to see us." + +"Likely enough," the Saxon answered, laughing a little. "I asked to +see the prizes and the vikings' ships, and he showed me more than I +expected." + +Then he looked along the line of vessels that he had not yet +passed, and added: + +"I thought there were more Norse ships with Odda." + +I told him how the other vikings had left us with their plunder at +Wareham, saying that I thought they could well be spared at that +time. + +"However," I said, "I did not count on the Saxons leaving their +vessels so soon." + +"Then I take it that I am speaking with King Ranald, of whom Odda +has so much to say," he said, without answering my last words. + +"I am Ranald Vemundsson," I said; "but this ship is all my kingdom +now. Harald Fairhair has the land that should have been mine. I am +but a sea king." + +Then he held out his hand, saying that there was much for which +every Saxon should thank me, and I passed that by as well as I +could, though I was pleased with the hearty grip he gave me. + +"So long as Odda is satisfied it is enough," I said. "If I have +helped him a little, I have helped a man who is worth it." + +"Well," said the thane, "you seem to be pleased with one another. +Now I should like to see this ship of yours, of which he has so +much to say." + +We went over her, and it was plain that this thane knew what he was +talking about. I wondered that the king had not set him in command +instead of Odda, who frankly said what was true--that he was no +sailor. I supposed that this man, however, was not of high rank +enough to lead so great a gathering of Saxons, and so I said +nothing to him about it. + +By and by we sat on the after deck with Harek, and I had ale +brought to us, and we talked of ship craft of all sorts. Presently, +however, he said: + +"What shall you do now--if one may ask?" + +"I know not. When I sailed from Wareham, I thought to have seen +more sea service with Alfred your king. But now his men are going +home, and in a day or two, at this rate, there will be none left to +man the ships." + +"We can call them up again when need is," he answered. + +"They should not go home till the king sends them," I said. "This +is not the way in which Harald Fairhair made himself master of +Norway. Once his men are called out they know that they must bide +with him till he gives them rest and sends them home with rewards. +It is his saying that one sets not down the hammer till the nail is +driven home, and clinched moreover." + +"That is where the Danes are our masters," the Saxon said, very +gravely. "Our levies fight and disperse. It was not so in the time +of the great battles round Reading that brought us peace, for they +never had time to do so. Then we won. Now the harvest wants +gathering. Our people know they are needed at home and in the +fields." + +"They must learn to know that home and fields will be better served +by their biding in arms while there is a foe left in the land. What +says Alfred the king?" I said. + +"Alfred sees this as well as you, or as any one but our freemen," +he answered; "but not yet can he make things go as he knows they +should. This is the end at which he ever aims, and I think he will +teach his people how to fight in time. I know this, that we shall +have no peace until he does." + +"Your king can build a grand ship, but she is of no use without men +in her day by day, till they know every plank of her." + +"Ay," said the Saxon; "but that will come in time. It is hard to +know how to manage all things." + +"Why," I said, "if the care of a ship is a man's business, for that +he will care. You cannot expect him to care for farm and ship at +once, when the farm is his living, and the ship but a thing that +calls him away from it." + +"What then?" + +"Pay the shipman to mind the sea, that is all. Make his ship his +living, and the thing is done." + +"It seems to me," the thane said, "that this can be done. I shall +tell the king your words." + +"As you will," I answered; "they are plain enough. I would say also +that Harald our king has about him paid warriors whose living is to +serve him, and more who hold lands on condition that they bear arms +for him at any time." + +Now Harek had listened to all this, and could tell the thane more +of Harald's ordering of things than I; so he took up the talk for a +time, and presently asked about the war and its beginning. + +"Faith," answered the Saxon, with a grim smile, "I cannot tell when +the war began, for that was when the first Danes came to the +English shores. But if you mean the trouble that is on hand now, it +is easily told. Ten years has this host been in England--coming +first with Ingvar and Halfden and Hubba, the three sons of Lodbrok. +Ingvar has gone away, and Guthrum takes his place. Halfden is in +Northumbria, Hubba is in Wales, and Guthrum is king over East +Anglia and overlord of Mercia. It is Guthrum against whom we are +fighting." + +"He is minded to be overlord of all England," said Harek. + +"That is to be seen if a Dane shall be so," the Saxon answered, +flushing. "We beat them at first, as I have said, and have had +peace till last year. Then they came to Wareham from East Anglia. +There they were forced to make peace, and they swore on the holy +ring {v} to depart from Wessex; and we, on our part, swore +peace on the relics of the holy saints. Whereon, before the king, +Alfred, was ware of their treachery, they fell on our camp, slew +all our horsemen, and marched here. Then we gathered the levies +again--ay, I know why you look so impatiently, King Ranald--and +came here after them. As for the rest, you have taken your part. +Now we have them all inside these walls, and I think we have done." + +Then his face grew dark, and he added: + +"But I cannot tell. What can one do with oath breakers of this +sort?" + +Then I said: + +"Surely you do not look for the men of one chief to be bound by +what another promises?" + +He looked wonderingly at me for a moment, and then said: + +"How should it be that the oath of their king should not bind the +people?" + +"Why," said I, "you have spoken of several chiefs. If Guthrum +chooses to make peace, that is not Halfden's business, or Hubba's, +or that of any chief who likes it not. One is as free as the +other." + +"What mean you? I say that Guthrum and his chiefs swore by the +greatest oath they knew to return to Mercia." + +"If they swore by the holy ring, there is no doubt that they who +swore would keep the oath. But that does not bind those who were +against the peace making. So I suppose that they who held not with +the peace made by the rest fell on you, when your levies went home +after their wont. One might have known they would do so." + +Thereat the thane was silent for a while, and I saw that he was +troubled. It seemed to be a new thought to him at this time that +the Danish hosts in England were many, and each free to act in the +way its own chief thought best, uniting now and then, and again +separating. This he must needs have learned sooner or later, but +the knowledge came first to him there before Exeter walls. + +Presently he said: + +"I have believed that all the Danes were as much one under Guthrum +their king as are my folk under theirs. I cannot see the end of +this war." + +"It will end when Alfred the king is strong enough always to have +men in the field to face every leader that will fall on him," Harek +said. "What King Ranald says is true. It is as if his own father +had minded what Harald had sworn in the old days." + +"Wherefore Harald brought all Norway under him, that every man +should mind what he said," the Saxon answered. + +Then came three or four more thanes along the shore, and he rose up +and waved his hand to them. + +"Here are more butts for Kolgrim," he said, laughing. "Now, King +Ranald, I must go to my friends. But I have learned much. I think +you must speak with the king before you go, and I will tell him all +you have said." + +"Maybe we shall meet again," said I, taking his offered hand. "I +think I would see Alfred; but he is over wise, from all accounts, +to learn aught from me." + +"King Alfred says that wisdom comes little by little, and by +learning from every one. I belong to the court, and so shall surely +meet you if you do come to speak to him." + +Then I asked the thane's name. + +"Godred {vi} men say it is," he answered, laughing; "but that +means better counsel than belongs to me." + +So he went ashore and joined the thanes, who had gone slowly along +the road, and we lost sight of him. + +"Yonder goes a pleasant comrade enough," I said to Harek. + +"Ay," the scald answered; "but if that is not Alfred the king +himself, I am much in error." + +"It is not likely. I think he is a bigger man and older, from all +accounts," I said carelessly. "Moreover, he would not have put up +with Kolgrim's jests as he did." + +"One knows not; but I thought he spoke of 'my folk' once. And he +seemed to ask more than would a simple thane, and in a different +way." + +However, it seemed to me that Harek had found a marvel for himself, +and I laughed at him for supposing that Alfred the king would come +there to speak to any man. + +Now towards evening Odda came, and with him many servants and a +train of wagons. He would make a feast for us in the best house of +the village, by the king's order. Every one of us was called, and +all the leading Saxon shipmen, when all was ready, and it was a +kingly feast enough. + +While they were making it ready, the ealdorman came to me on board +the ship, and welcomed me in most friendly wise. + +"I have a message for you, King Ranald," he said presently. "Some +thanes have been to me from the king, and he bids me ask you to +come and speak with him." + +"I saw a thane here this morning who was anxious for me to see the +king," I said. "A pleasant man enough--one Godred." + +"Ay, Godred is pleasant enough," Odda said, smiling, "but he is a +terrible man for asking questions." + +He laughed again, as if he knew the man well, and was pleased to +think of him and his ways. + +"None of his questions are foolish, however," I said. "I was +pleased with him." + +"It is well if you pleased him, for he is a powerful man at court," +said Odda. + +"I do not know if I pleased him, or if it makes any difference to +me what power he has," I said carelessly. "If I want any man to +speak for me to the king--which is not likely--I should come to you +first." + +"Speak for yourself," laughed Odda, "that is the best way with +Alfred." + +So we planned to go to Exeter with the next morning's light. Odda +would bide here for the night, after the feast. + +Now after we had finished eating, and the ale and mead and the wine +the king had sent in our honour were going round, and the gleemen +were singing at times, there came a messenger into the house, and +brought me a written message from the king himself, as he said. + +"Much good are these scratches to me," said I to Odda. "Can you +read them?" + +"I can read nought but what is written in a man's face," he said. + +So I gave the scroll to Harek, who sat next me, thinking that maybe +the scald could read it. He pored over it for a while. + +"It is of no use, king," he said. "It is in my mind that I know +which is the right way up of the writing, but I am not sure." + +So I laughed, and asked aloud if any man present could read. There +were a good many thanes and franklins present to feast in our +honour. + +Then rose up a man, in a long brown hooded habit girt with a cord, +from below the salt where he sat among the servants. He had a long +beard, but was very bald. His hair grew in a thick ring round his +head; which was strange, for he seemed young. + +"I am here, ealdorman," he said to Odda; "I will read for King +Ranald." + +Now all eyes turned to see who spoke, and in a moment Odda rose up +hastily and went down the long room till he came to where the man +stood. Then I was amazed, for the ealdorman went on one knee before +him, and said: + +"Good my lord, I knew not that you were here among the crowd. I +pray you come to the high seat." + +"When will you remember that titles and high places are no longer +pleasing to me?" the man said wearily. "I tire of them all. Rise +up, Odda, my friend, and let me be." + +"I will not rise without your blessing, nevertheless," said the +ealdorman. + +Whereon the man spoke a few words to him softly and quickly, +signing with his hand crosswise over him. + +Then I said to those about me, who were watching all this in +silence: + +"Who is this strange man?" + +"It is Neot the holy, King Alfred's cousin," one answered, +whispering. + +"That is a strange dress for an atheling," I said; but they hushed +me. + +Now it seemed that Odda tried again to draw this Neot to the high +table, but he would not come. + +Then I said to old Thord, who sat over against me beyond Odda's +empty chair: + +"This is foolishness; or will he not honour the king's guests?" + +But a thane shook his head at me, whispering behind his hand: + +"It is humbleness. He has put his rank from him, and will not be +held as being above any man." + +Then spoke old Thord: + +"Maybe he can put his rank away among men who know him not, and +that is a good humbleness in a way. But where all know what his +birth is, he has but to be humble and kind in ways and speech, and +then men will think more thereof than they will if they see him +pretending to be a churl." + +Now Thord's voice was rough with long years of speaking against the +wash of the waves, and the thunder of wind in sail and rigging, and +the roll and creak of oars; and as he said this, every one turned +towards him, for a silence had fallen on the crowd of folk who +watched Neot the king's cousin and his strife with Odda. + +So Neot heard, and his face flushed a little, and he looked hard at +Thord and smiled curiously, saying: + +"In good truth the old warrior is right, and I am foolish to hide +here now I am known. Let me go and sit by him." + +Then Odda led him to the upper end of the room, and every one rose +as he passed by. I drew myself nearer to the ealdorman's place, and +made room for him where only the table was between him and Thord, +for that bench was full. + +So he put his hand on my shoulder and sat down, looking over to +Thord, and saying with a quiet smile: + +"Thanks for that word in season, friend." + +But the old warrior was somewhat ashamed, and did but shift in his +seat uneasily. + +"Ay, ay," he growled; "I cannot keep my voice quiet." + +Neot laughed, and then turned to me and held out his hand for the +king's letter, which I gave him. + +He ran his eyes over the writing very quickly, and then said: + +"Here is nothing private; shall I read aloud?" + +But the thanes fell to talking quickly, and I nodded. + +"Alfred the king to his cousin Ranald Vemundsson, greeting. Odda +the ealdorman of Devon, and one Godred, have spoken to me of +yourself--one telling of help given freely and without question of +reward or bargain made, and the other of certain plain words spoken +this morning. Now I would fain see you, and since the said Godred +seems to doubt if you will come to me, I ask it under my own hand +thus. For I have thanks to give both to you and your men, and also +would ask you somewhat which it is my hope that you will not refuse +me. Therefore, my cousin, I would ask you to come with our +ealdorman tomorrow and hear all I would say." + +Then Neot said, + +"That is all. I think you will not refuse so kindly an invitation. +The writing is the king's own, and here is his name at the end." + +So he showed it me. The letter was better written than the name, as +it seemed to me. + +"I will take your word for it," I said, laughing as I looked; "but +it is a kindly letter, and I will surely come." + +"Ay; he has written to you as to an equal," Odda said. + +"That is so. Now I would have the good king know that I am not +that; I am but a sea king. Maybe he thinks that I shall be a good +ally, and makes more of my power than should be. I told Godred the +thane as plainly as I could what I was, this morning." + +"Why, then," said Neot, smiling, "Godred has told the king, no +doubt." + +"I hope he has," I answered, "but I doubt it. Nevertheless it is +easy to tell the king myself when I see him." + +After that we talked about other matters, and it became plain that +this Neot was a wonderfully wise man, and, as I thought, a holy one +in truth, as they called him. There is that about such an one that +cannot be mistaken. + +Harek sang for us, and pleased all, and into his song came, as one +might suppose, a good deal about the Asir. And then Neot began to +ask me a good deal about the old gods, as he called them. I told +him what I knew, which was little enough maybe, and so said that +Harek knew all about them, and that he should rather ask him. + +He did not care to do that, but asked me plainly if I were a +Christian. + +"How should I be?" I said. "Odda is the first Christian man I have +spoken with, to my knowledge. So, if I were likely to leave my own +faith, I have not so much as heard of another." + +"So you are no hater of Christians?" he said. + +"Surely not. Why should I be? I never thought of the matter." + +Then he said: + +"Herein you Norsemen are not like the Danes, who hate our faith, +and slay our priests because of their hatred." + +"More likely because Christian means Saxon to them, or else because +you have slain them as heathens. Northmen do not trouble about +another nation's faith so long as their own is not interfered with. +Why should they? Each country has its own ways in this as in other +matters." + +Thereat Neot was silent, and asked me no more. Hereafter I learned +that hatred of race had made the hatred of religion bitter, until +the last seemed to be the greatest hatred of all, adding terror and +bitterest cruelty to the struggle for mastery. + +Presently, before it was very late, Neot rose up and spoke to Odda, +bidding him farewell. Then he came to me, and said: + +"Tell the king that we have spoken together, and give him this +message if you will that I go to my place in Cornwall, and shall be +there for a while." + +Then he passed to Thord, and took his hard hand and said: + +"Good are words that come from an honest heart. I have learned a +lesson tonight where I thought to have learned none." + +"I marvel that you needed to learn that," Thord said gruffly. + +"So do I, friend," answered Neot; "but one is apt to go too far in +a matter which one has at heart, sometimes before one is aware. +Then is a word in season welcome." + +Then he thanked Harek for his songs, and went, the Saxons bowing as +he passed down the long table with Odda. + +"That is a wise man and a holy," said Thord. + +"Ay, truly," answered the thane who had told me about him. "I mind +when he and Alfred the king were the haughtiest and most +overbearing of princes. But when Neot found out that his pride and +wrath and strength were getting the mastery in his heart, he thrust +himself down there to overcome them. So he grows more saintlike +every day, and has wrought a wondrous change in the king himself. +He is the only man to whom Alfred will listen in reproof." + +"That is likely," I said, not knowing aught of the holy bishops who +were the king's counsellors; "kings brook little of that sort. But +why does he wear yon strange dress?" + +"He has taken vows on him, and is a hermit," the thane said; but I +did not know what he meant at the time. + +It was some Saxon way, I supposed, and cared not to ask more. + +So it came to pass that I met one of the two most wonderful men in +England, and I was to see the other on the morrow. Yet I had no +thought that I should care to stay in the land, for it seemed +certain from what Odda told me that peace would be made, and peace +was not my business nor that of my men. + +So in a way I was sorry that the war was at an end, seeing that we +came for fighting and should have none. + +Then came a thought to me that made me laugh at myself. I was glad, +after all, that we were not going sword foremost into Exeter town, +because of the Lady Thora, who was there. I suppose it would not +have been reasonable had I not had that much thought for the brave +maiden whom I had helped out of danger once. + + + +Chapter VI. Alfred the King. + + +Odda the ealdorman and I rode gaily into the king's camp in the +bright August morning, with Harek and Kolgrim and Thord beside us, +and after us fifty of my men in their best array; which was saying +much, for Einar the jarl was generous, and we had spoiled Halfdan, +the king's son, moreover. So there was a shouting when we came to +the camp, and men ran together to stare at the vikings and their +king. + +In the midst of the camp, which was strong enough, and looked out +on the old city, flew a banner whereon was a golden dragon--the +banner of Wessex. And it stood before a great pavilion, which was +the court for the time, and where we should find the king waiting +for us. There were several other tents joined to this great one, so +that into them the king might retire; and there was a wide space, +round which walked spearmen as sentries, between it and any other +tent. + +Some Devon thanes met us, and our men dismounted at the same time +as we. Then Odda led us four to the door of the pavilion, and we +were ushered in with much ceremony. + +Inside the great tent was like a round hall, carpeted, and +tapestry-hung in a way I had never seen before. There were many +richly-dressed nobles present, and most of these were grouped round +a high place over against the door, where I saw at once that the +king sat on a throne in all state. + +Now, coming from bright sunshine into the cool shadow of the place, +I was dazzled at first; but Kolgrim's eyes were quick, and we had +hardly crossed the threshold, if I might call it so, when he +plucked at my cloak. + +"Master," he whispered, "let me bide with the men; this is no place +for me." + +"Hush," I whispered; "the king is yonder." + +"Ay, master--let me go--the king is Godred whom I jested with." + +Harek was smiling, and he pulled Kolgrim forward. + +"Have no fear," he said; "those who play bowls expect rubs." + +Then the king came down from his throne and towards us. He had on +gilded armour beneath his long, ermine-trimmed blue cloak, and that +pleased me. He had sword and seax, but no helm, though that was on +a table by the throne--for he wore a crown. + +Then I too saw that Godred, as he called himself, was, as the scald +had guessed rightly, the king, and I was a little angry that he had +tricked me thus. But he was laughing at Kolgrim as he came, and my +anger passed at once. King or thane, here was a pleasant greeting +enough. + +He held out his hand to Odda first and then to me. The Saxon kissed +it, bending one knee, which was doubtless right for him, as owning +allegiance thereto. But I shook hands in our own way, saying: + +"Skoal to Alfred the king." + +Which seemed to please him, for he answered: + +"Welcome to King Ranald. I am glad my letter brought you. My +counsellor, Godred, feared you might not care to come." + +"The letter turned the scale, lord king," I said. "Yet I would have +you remember what I said yesterday about my kingship." + +"Ay, cousin, I mind it," he answered, laughing. "Also I mind that a +king's son is a king's son, whatever else he may be called." + +Then he shook hands with Harek, and after that turned to Kolgrim, +holding out his hand also to him. + +"Concerning sails," he said gravely, "I have many questions to ask +you. Is it to the starboard hand that the bolt rope goes, or to the +other board?" + +"I pray you to forget my foolishness, lord king," cried Kolgrim, +growing very red and shame faced. + +"That I shall not," the king answered, laughing. "I owe you thanks +for such a jest as I have not played on a man for many a long day. +Truly I have been more light hearted for my laugh ever since." + +"Ay, lord, you had the laugh of me," Kolgrim said, grinning +uneasily. + +Then the king nodded gaily to him and asked who Thord was. + +"This is my master in sea craft," said Odda. "Verily I fear him as +I have feared no man since I was at school. But he cured the +seasickness of me." + +"Maybe I forgot the sickness when I sent landsmen to sea in all +haste," said the king. "Nevertheless, Thord, how fought they when +blows were going?" + +"Well enough, king. And I will say that what I tried to teach them +they tried to learn," answered Thord. + +"Wherein is hope. You think that I may have good seamen in time, +therefore?" + +"Ay, lord. It is in the blood of every man of our kin to take to +the sea. They are like hen-bred ducklings now, and they do but want +a duck to lead them pondwards. Then may hen cackle in vain for +them." + +The king laughed. + +"Faith," he said, "I--the hen--drove Odda into the pond. He is, +according to his own account, a poor duckling." + +"Let him splash about a little longer, lord king," said Thord. + +But Odda spoke with a long face. + +"Not so, King Alfred, if you love me. Landsman am I, and +chicken-hearted at sea. Keep the gamecock to mind the farmyard; +there be more birds than ducks needed." + +"Make a song hereof, Harek," said the king. "Here is word play +enough for any scald." + +Then sang Harek, laughing, and ever ready with verses: + +"The gamecock croweth bravely, +And guardeth hawk-scared hen roost; +But when the sea swan swimmeth +Against the shoreward nestings, +There mighty mallard flappeth, +And frayeth him from foray; +Yet shoreward if he winneth, +The gamecock waits to meet him." + +"That is in my favour," said Odda. "Mind you the scald's words, I +pray you, lord king, and send me to my right place, even with hawk +on one side and swan on the other." + +So a pleasant laugh went round, and then the king went back to his +throne, and spoke words of open thanks to us of the fleet who had +gained him such victory. Good words they were, neither too few nor +too many, such as would make every man who heard them long to hear +the like of himself again. + +Now, while he was speaking, men came to the tent door and waited +for his words to end; and then one came forward and told a noble, +who seemed to be ordering the state which was kept, that Danish +lords had come to speak with the king. + +It seemed that this was expected, for when he heard it, Alfred bade +that they should be brought in. + +There were six of them in all, and they were in handsome dresses, +but without mail, though not unarmed. The leader of them was Jarl +Osmund, whom I had seen for a moment in Wareham street. I thought +that his handsome face was careworn, as though peace would be +welcome to him. But he and all his comrades carried themselves +bravely. + +Now there was long converse between the king and these chiefs, and +it seemed that peace would be made. + +Yet Alfred's face was hard as he spoke to them--not like the bright +looks with which he had jested with us just now, or the earnest +kingly regard which had gone with his words of thanks. + +Presently the Danes said that the whole force would retire into +Mercia beyond Thames, harming none by the way, and keeping peace +thereafter, if the conditions were honourable. + +Then the king flashed out into scorn: + +"What honour is to be looked for by oath breakers?" + +"We are not oath breakers, King Alfred," Osmund said, looking him +in the face. + +"Once did the Danes swear to me on their holy ring, which seems to +me to be their greatest oath, and they broke the peace so made. +What is that but that they are forsworn?" + +"We swore nought to you, lord king," Osmund said. "Half of the men +with us came newly from across the sea but a week or so since. +Guthrum and those who swore are in their own land." + +Then the king glanced at me, suddenly, as it would seem, +remembering what I had told him of the freedom of the chiefs. + +"Ha! now I mind me of a word spoken in time," he said. "It has +seemed to me that there was oath breaking; maybe I was wrong. I +will take your words that you have not done so. Is that amends +enough?" + +"It is well said, lord king," Osmund answered gravely. + +"But," Alfred went on, "I must have the word of every chief who is +in Exeter, and they must speak for every man. Tell me in all truth +if there are those who would not make peace with me?" + +Then said Osmund: + +"Some will not, but they are few." + +"What if you make peace and they do not? what shall you do with +them?" + +"They must go their own way; we have no power over them." + +"Has not Guthrum?" + +"No more than we. A free Dane cannot be hound, unless he chooses, +by another man's word." + +Then Alfred said plainly: + +"I cannot treat for peace till I have the word of every chief in +Exeter. Go your ways and let that be known." + +So Osmund bowed, and went out with his fellows. And when he had +gone, the king turned to me. + +"Have I spoken aright, King Ranald?" + +"In the best way possible, lord king," I answered. + +"Go after those Danish lords," the king said to one of his thanes, +"and bid them to feast with me tonight, for I think that I have +said too much to them." + +So they were bidden to the king's feast presently, and I suppose +they could do nought but come, for it was plain that he meant to +honour them. After they had gone back into the town, Alfred spoke +with my men, and what he said pleased them well. + +Then he went to his resting tent, and I walked with Odda to his +quarters, and sat there, waiting for the king to send for me to +speak with him, as I expected. But word came that he would wait +till he had heard more of the Danish answer to his message before +we spoke together of that he had written of to me. So he prayed me +to wait in the camp till he had seen the Danes again, and told Odda +to find quarters for us. + +"So we shall have a good talk together," the ealdorman said. "I am +glad you are not going back to the ships yet." + +So was I, for all this fresh life that I had not seen before +pleased me. Most of all I wished to see more of Alfred and the +state in which he lived. + +Now, just when I was ready for the feast, and was sitting with +Odda, there came a guard to the tent and said that the chief of the +Danes was seeking King Ranald. + +Then Odda said: + +"What wills he? we have no traffic with Danes." + +"He would speak with King Ranald," the man said. + +Then said I: + +"If it is Osmund the jarl, I think I know why he comes.--Let him +come in here and speak before you, ealdorman." + +"Why, do you know him?" + +"I cannot rightly say that I do, but I nearly came to do so." + +Then Odda wondered, and answered: + +"Forgive me; one grows suspicious about these Danes. I will go +hence, and you shall speak with him alone. Maybe he wants your word +with the king, because you know the ways of the viking hosts." + +"No," said I; "stay here. Whatever it is he has to say cannot be +private; nor would I hear anything from him that you might not." + +"As you will. Let him come here," Odda said; and the man went out. + +Then entered Jarl Osmund, richly dressed for the king's feast, and +he looked from one of us to the other as we rose to greet him. +Suddenly he smiled grimly. + +"I looked to find strangers, and was about to ask for King Ranald. +However, Odda the ealdorman and I have met before, as I am +certain." + +"Faith, we have," said Odda. "Nor am I likely to forget it. It was +at Ashdown fight." + +"And elsewhere," said the jarl. "But it was ever fair fighting +between us." + +"Else had you slain me when I was down," said Odda frankly, and +with a smile coming into his face. + +"The score is even on that count," said Osmund, and with that, with +one accord their hands met, and they laughed at each other. + +That was good to see, and ever should things be so between brave +foes and honest. + +Then Osmund looked at me. + +"Now have I met with two men whom I have longed to see," he said, +"for you must be King Ranald Vemundsson. Two foes I have--if it +must be so said--of whom I have nought but good to say." + +"So," laughed Odda. "When fought you twain, and which let the other +go?" + +"We have not fought," the jarl answered. "But I have deeper reason +for thanking Ranald than for sparing my own life, or for staying a +blow in time out of sheer love of fair play." + +Then he took my hand and looked me in the face. + +"It was a good deed and noble that you wrought for me but the other +day," he said earnestly. "I do not know how to thank you enough. My +daughter laid command on me that I should seek you and tell you +this; but indeed I needed no bidding when I heard how she escaped." + +"I had been nidring had I not helped a lady in need," I said, being +in want of better words. + +"What is all this?" said Odda; for I had told him nought of the +matter, not seeing any reason to do so. + +Then Osmund must needs tell him of what Kolgrim and I had done; and +the ealdorman laughed at me, though one might see that the affair +pleased him. + +"This king," he said, "having no kingdom of his own, as he says, +goes about helping seasick ealdormen and lonely damsels, whereby he +will end with more trouble on his hands than any kingdom would give +him." + +"I am only one," I said; "Kolgrim and Thord are in this also." + +Then Osmund took a heavy gold bracelet from his arm. + +"This is for Kolgrim, your comrade," he said, half doubtfully, "if +I may give it him in remembrance of a brave deed well done. Will he +be too proud to accept it?" + +"I may give it him, certainly," I said, taking the gift. + +Then Odda would not be behindhand, and he pulled off his own +armlet. + +"If Kolgrim is to be remembered, Thord will never be forgotten. +Give this to him in sheer gratitude for swearing at me in such wise +that he overcame the sore sickness that comes of the swaying of the +deck that will not cease." + +"Give it him yourself, ealdorman," I said. "You know him over well +to send it by another. It would not be so good a gift." + +"As you will," he answered. "But I fear that viking terribly. Black +grows his face, and into his beard he blows, and the hard Norse +words grumble like thunder from his lips. Then know I that Odda the +ealdorman has been playing the land lubber again, and wonder what +is wrong. Nor is it long ere I find out, and I and my luckless crew +are flying to mind what orders are howled at us. In good truth, if +Alfred ever needs me to hurry in aught, let him send Thord the +viking to see that I do so. One may know how I fear him, since I +chose rather to risk battle with Jarl Osmund on shore than to bide +near him in my own ship any longer." + +Then the jarl and I laughed till our sides ached, and Odda joined +us when he could not help it, so doleful was his face and solemn +were his words when he told his tale. But I knew that he and Thord +were the best of friends after those few days in the ship together, +and that the rough old viking had given every man of the crew +confidence. Nevertheless he was apt to rage somewhat when things +went in slovenly wise. + +So Odda helped me through with Osmund's thanks, and I was glad. I +was glad also that the horns blew for the feast, so that no more +could be said about the Wareham doings. + +Now I sat close to King Alfred at the feast, and saw much of his +ways with men. I thought it plain that he had trouble at times in +keeping back the pride and haughtiness which I had heard had been +the fault in both Neot and himself, for now and then they showed +plainly. Then he made haste to make amends if one was hurt by what +he had said in haste. But altogether I thought him even more kingly +than the mighty Harald Fairhair in some ways. + +Truly he had not the vast strength and stature of Norway's king, +but Alfred's was the kingliness of wisdom and statecraft. + +Once I said to Odda: + +"Can your king fight?" + +"Ay, with head as well as with hand," he answered. "His skill in +weapon play makes up for lack of weight and strength. He is maybe +the best swordsman and spearman in England." + +I looked again at him, and I saw that since last I turned my eyes +on him he had grown pale, and now his face was drawn, and was +whitening under some pain, as it would seem; and I gripped Odda's +arm. + +"See!" I said, "the king dies! he is poisoned!" + +And I was starting up, but the ealdorman held me back. + +"I pray you pay no heed," he said urgently. "It is the king's dark +hour; he will be well anon." + +But nevertheless Alfred swayed in his seat, and two young thanes +who stood waiting on him came to either side and helped him up, and +together they took him, tottering, into the smaller tent that +opened behind the throne; while all the guests were silent, some in +fear, like myself, but others looking pityingly only. + +Then a tall man in a dress strange to me--a bishop, as I knew +presently--rose up, and said to those who knew not what was the +matter: + +"Doubtless all know that our good king is troubled with a strange +illness that falls on him from time to time. This is such a time. +Have no fear therefore, for the pain he suffers will pass. He does +not will that any should be less merry because of him." + +So the feast went on, though the great empty chair seemed to damp +the merriment sadly. I asked Odda if this trouble often befell the +king. + +"Ay, over often," he said, "and one knows not when it will come. No +leech knows what it is, and all one can say is that it seems to +harm him not at all when it has gone." + +I asked no more, but the king did not come back to the feast, as he +would at times when things happened thus. It seemed that often the +trouble fell on him when feasting, and some have said that it was +sent to prevent him becoming over proud, at his own prayer +{vii}. + +Soon the Danes rose up, and would go. Some of the great thanes set +them forth with all honour, and the feast ended. There was no long +sitting over the wine cup at Alfred's board, though none could +complain that he stinted them. + +Then the tall bishop who had spoken just now came to me. + +"The king will speak with you now, King Ranald, if you will come," +he said. + +So I went with him, and Odda came also. The king was lying on a +couch without his heavy state robes, and when we entered the small +tent the attendants left him. He was very pale, but the pain seemed +to have gone, and he looked up pleasantly at me. + +"My people are used to this, cousin," he said, "but I fear I put +you out sorely." + +"I thought you poisoned," I said; "but Odda told me not to fear." + +"Ay, that has been the thought of others before this," he said. +"Have you ever seen the like in any man? I ask every stranger, in +hopes that I may hear of relief." + +"No, I have not, lord king," I answered; "but I can grave runes +that will, as I think, keep away such pain if you bear them on you. +Thord, whom you know, taught me them. Maybe it would be better for +him to grave them, for runes wrongly written are worse than none, +and these are very powerful." + +"That is a kindly thought, cousin," Alfred answered; "but I am sure +that no runes will avail when the prayers of my people, from holy +Neot to the little village children, do not. And I fear that even +would they heal me, I must sooner bear the pain than seek to magic +spells." + +"Nay, but try them, King Alfred," I said; "there is no ill magic in +them." + +Now he saw that I was in earnest, and put me by very kindly. + +"I must ask Sigehelm, our bishop here, who is my best leech next to +Neot. + +"What say you, father?" + +"Even as you have said, my king." + +"Maybe, bishop," said I, "you have never tried the might of runes?" + +Whereat the good man held up his hands in horror, making no answer, +and I laughed a little at him. + +"Well, then," said the king, "we will ask Neot, for mostly he seems +to say exactly what I do not." + +"Neot has gone to Cornwall, and I had forgotten to give you that +message from him. He says he will be there for a time," I said, +rather ashamed at having let slip the message from my mind. + +"So you saw him?" said Alfred. + +"I knew he went to the ships yesterday after Godred came back," he +added, laughing. + +"He read my letter for me, and after that I had a good deal of talk +with him," I said. + +"Then," said Sigehelm, "you have spoken with the best man in all +our land." + +Now the king said that he would let the question of the runes, for +which he thanked me, stand over thus; and then he asked me to sit +down and hear what he would ask me to do for him, if I had no plans +already made for myself. + +I said that I had nothing so certainly planned but that I and my +men would gladly serve him. + +"Then," he said, "I would ask you to winter with me, and set my +ships in order. There will be work for you and all your men, for +you shall give them such command in any ship of mine as you know +they are best fitted for. I would ask you to help me carry out that +plan of which you spoke to me when I was Godred." + +When Odda heard that, he rubbed his hands together, saying: + +"Ay, lord king, you have found the right man at last." + +"Then in the spring you shall take full command of the fleet we +will build and the men we shall raise; and you shall keep the seas +for me, if by that time we know that we can work well together." + +He looked hard at me, waiting my answer. + +"Lord king," I said at last, "this is a great charge, and they say +that I am always thought older than I am, being given at least five +winters beyond the two-and-twenty that I have seen;" for I thought +it likely that the king held that I had seen more than I had. + +"I was but twenty when I came to the throne," he answered. "I have +no fear for you. More than his best I do not look for from any man; +nor do I wonder if a man makes mistakes, having done so many times +myself." + +Here Sigehelm made some sign to the king, to which he paid no heed +at the time, but went on: + +"As for your men, I will give them the same pay that Harald of +Norway gives to his seamen, each as you may choose to rank them for +me. You may know what that is." + +"Harek the scald knows," I said. "They will be well pleased, for +the pay is good, and places among Harald's courtmen are much sought +for." + +Then Alfred smiled, and spoke of myself. + +"As for King Ranald himself, he will be my guest." + +"I am a wandering viking, and I seem to have found great honour," I +said. "What I can do I will, in this matter. Yet there is one thing +I must say, King Alfred. I would not be where men are jealous of +me." + +"The only man likely to be so is Odda," the king answered. "You +must settle that with him. It is the place that he must have held +that you are taking. No man in all England can be jealous of a +viking whose business is with ships. But Odda put this into my mind +at first, and then Godred found out that he was right." + +"Lord king," said I, "had I known who you were at that time, I +should have spoken no differently. We Northmen are free in speech +as in action." + +"So says Odda," replied Alfred, smiling. "He has piteous tales of +one Thord, whom you sent to teach him things, and the way in which +he was made to learn." + +"Nevertheless," said Odda, "I will not have Thord blamed, for it is +in my mind that we should have learned in no other way so quickly." + +Again the bishop signed to the king, and Alfred became grave. + +"Here is one thing that our good Sigehelm minds me of. It seems +that you are a heathen." + +"Why, no, if that means one who hates Christians," I said. +"Certainly I do not do that, having no cause to do so. Those whom I +know are yourself, and Neot, and Odda, and one or two more only." + +"That is not it," said the king. "What we call a heathen is one who +worships the old gods--the Asir." + +"Certainly I do that--ill enough." + +"Then," said Alfred, while Odda shifted in his seat, seeming +anxious as to how I should take this, "it is our rule that before a +heathen man can serve with us, he shall at least be ready to learn +our faith, and also must be signed with the cross, in token that he +hates it not {viii}." + +"Why should I not learn of your faith?" I said. "Neot asked me of +mine. As for the other, I do not know rightly what it means. I see +your people sign themselves crosswise, and I cannot tell why, +unless it is as we hallow a feast by signing it with Thor's +hammer." + +"It is more than that," Alfred said, motioning to Sigehelm to say +nothing, for he was going to speak. "First you must know what it +means, and then say if you will be signed therewith." + +Then he said to Sigehelm: + +"Here is one who will listen to good words, not already set against +them, as some Danes are, by reason of ill report and the lives of +bad Christians. Have no fear of telling him what you will." + +Now, if I were to serve King Alfred, it seemed to me to be only +reasonable that I should know the beliefs of those with whom I had +to do. Then I minded me of Neot, and his way of asking about my +gods, as if the belief of every man was of interest to him. + +"Here is a deep matter to be talked of, King Alfred," I said. "It +does not do to speak lightly and carelessly of such things. Nor am +I more than your guest as yet, willing to hear what you would have +me know. When winter has gone, and you know if I shall be any good +to you, then will be question if I enter your service altogether, +and by that time I shall know enough. Maybe I shall see Neot again; +he and I began to speak of these things." + +Then Sigehelm said: + +"I think this is right, and Neot can tell you more in a few words +than I in many. Yet whatever you ask me I will try to tell you." + +"I want to speak with Neot," answered the king, "and we will ride +together and seek him when peace is made. I have many things to say +to him and ask him. We will go as soon as it is safe." + +So ended my talk with King Alfred at that time, and I was well +content therewith. So also were my men, for it was certain that +every one of them would find some place of command, were it but +over a watch, when Alfred's new sea levies were to be trained. + +Many noble Saxons I met in the week before peace was made with the +Danes in Exeter, for all the best were gathered there. Most of all +I liked Ethered, the young ealdorman of Mercia, and Ethelnoth, the +Somerset ealdorman, and Heregar, the king's standard bearer, an +older warrior, who had seen every battle south of Thames since the +long ago day when Eahlstan the bishop taught his flock how to fight +for their land against the heathen. + +These were very friendly with me, and I should see more of them if +I were indeed to ward the Wessex coasts, and for that reason they +made the more of me. + +Now I saw no more of Osmund the jarl, for Odda knew that the lesser +folk would mistrust me if I had any doings with the Danes. Maybe I +was sorry not to see the Lady Thora; but if I had seen her, I do +not know what I should have said to her, having had no experience +of ladies' ways at any time, which would have made me seem foolish +perhaps. + + + +Chapter VII. The Pixies' Dance. + + +I do not know that there is anything more pleasant after long weeks +at sea than to have a good horse under one, and to be riding in the +fresh winds of early autumn over new country that is beautiful in +sunlight. So when at last every Danish chief had made submission, +and the whole host had marched back to what they held as their own +land in Mercia, going to Gloucester, as was said, with Odda and +Ethered the ealdormen hanging on their rear with a great levy, I +rode with King Alfred to find Neot his cousin gaily enough. Thord +stayed with the ships, but the scald and Kolgrim were with me, and +the king mounted us well. Ethelnoth of Somerset came also, and some +forty men of the king's household; and all went armed, for the +country we had to cross was of the wildest, though we went by the +great road that runs from west to east of England, made even before +the Romans came. But it crossed the edge of Dartmoor, the most +desolate place in all the land, where outlaws and masterless men +found fastnesses whence none could drive them. + +One could not wish for a more pleasant companion than Alfred, and +the miles went easily. We had both hawks and hounds with us, for +there was game in plenty, and the king said that with the ending of +the war, and the beginning of new hopes for his fleet, he would +cast care aside for a little. So he was joyous and free in speech, +and at times he would sing in lightness of heart, and would bid +Harek sing also, so that it was pleasant to hear them. Ever does +Harek say that no man sings better than Alfred of England. + +In late afternoon we came to the wild fringe of Dartmoor, and here +the king had a guest house in a little village which he was wont to +use on these journeys to see Neot. We should rest there, and so +cross the wastes in full daylight. So he went in, maybe fearing his +sickness, which was indeed a sore burden to him, though he was wont +to make light of it; but Ethelnoth asked me if we should not spend +the hours of evening light in coursing a bustard or two, for many +were about the moorland close at hand. They would be welcome at the +king's table, he said; and I, fresh from the sea and camp, asked +for nothing better than a good gallop over the wide-stretching +hillsides. + +So we took fresh horses from those that were led for us, and rode +away. We took hawks--the king had given me a good one when we +started, for a Saxon noble ever rides with hawk on wrist--and two +leash of greyhounds. + +I was for putting my arms aside, but the ealdorman said it was +better not to do so, by reason of the moor folk, who were wild +enough to fall on a small party at times. It was of little moment, +however; for we rode in the lighter buff jerkins instead of heavy +mail, and were not going far. + +Ethelnoth took two men with him, and my two comrades were with +me--Kolgrim leading the hounds in leash beside his horse. We went +across the first hillside, and from its top looked northward and +westward as far as one could see over the strange grey wastes of +the moorland. + +Then from the heather almost under our feet rose a great bustard +that ran down wind with outstretched wings before us, seeking the +lonelier country. Kolgrim whooped, and slipped the leash, and the +hounds sprang after it, and we followed cheering. It was good to +feel the rush of hillside air in our faces, and the spring and +stretch of the horses under us, and to see the long-reached hounds +straining after the great bird that might well be able to escape +them. + +I suppose that Ethelnoth started a second bird. I did not look +behind me to see what any man was doing, but followed the chase +round the spur of a granite-topped hillside, and forgot him. For +when the bustard took wing for a heavy flight, and lit and ran +again, and again flew with wings that failed each time more and +more, while the strong legs were the stronger for the short rest, +and when the good hounds were straining after it, one could not +expect me to care for aught but that. + +It had been strange if I thought of anything but the sport. I knew +there were two horsemen close by, a little wide on either flank, +but behind me. So we took the bird after a good chase, and then I +knew that we had in some way shaken off the Saxons, and that we +three vikings were together. It did not trouble us, for one looks +for such partings, and Ethelnoth had his own bounds. So we went on, +and found another bustard, and took it. + +"Now we must go back," I said; "one must have a thought for the +king's horses." + +So we turned, and then a heron rose from a boggy stream below us, +and that was a quarry not to be let go. I unhooded the falcon and +cast her off, and straightway forgot everything but the most +wonderful sight that the field and forest can give us--the dizzy +upward climbing circles of hawk and heron, who strive to gain the +highest place cloudwards, one for attack, the other for safety. + +The evening sunlight flashed red from the bright under feathers of +the strong wings as the birds swung into it from the shadow of the +westward hill, and still they soared, drifting westward with the +wind over our heads. Then with a great rushing sound the heron gave +up, and fell, stone-like, from the falcon that had won to air above +him at last. At once the long wings of his enemy closed halfway, +and she swooped after him. + +Then back and up, like a sword drawn at need, went the heron's +sharp beak; and the falcon saw it, and swerved and shot past her +nearly-taken prey. Again the heron began to tower up and up with a +harsh croak that seemed like a cry of mockery; then the wondrous +swing and sweep of the long, tireless wings of the passage hawk, +and the cry of another heron far off, scared by its fellow's note; +and again for us a canter over the moorland, eye and hand and knee +together wary for both hawk above and good horse below, till the +falcon bound to the heron, and both came to the ground, and there +was an end in the grey shadow of the Dartmoor tors. Ay, but King +Alfred's hawk was a good one! + +"Now, where shall we seek Ethelnoth?" I said. + +"No good seeking him," said Harek. "We had better make our way back +to the village." + +We coupled up the greyhounds again and hooded the falcon, and rode +leisurely back over our tracks for some way. The sun set about that +time into a purple bank of mist beyond the farther hills. One does +not note how the miles go when one finds sport such as this, and +presently we began to be sure that we had ridden farther than we +had thought. We knew, as we thought, the direction from which we +had come, and steered, sailor-wise, by the sunset. But we could +take no straight course because of the hills, and we were as often +off the line as on. + +Then crept up the mist from the valleys, and we had nought to steer +by, for the wind dropped. Then I said: + +"Let the horses take us home; they know better than we." + +So we rode on slowly until darkness came, but never saw so much as +a light that might guide us. And presently we let the dogs loose, +thinking that they would go homewards. But a greyhound is not like +a mastiff, and they hung round us, careless, or helpless, in the +mists and darkness. + +Presently we came to a place where the horses stopped of their own +accord. There was a sheer rock on one side, and the hill was steep +below us, and a stream brawled somewhere before us. + +"Well," I said, "here we stay for the night. It is of no use +wandering any longer, and the night is warm." + +We thought nothing of this, for any hunter knows that such a chance +may befall him in a strange and wild country. So we laughed +together and off-saddled and hobbled the horses, and so sat down +supperless to wait for morning under the rock. The mist was clammy +round us, thinning and then thickening again as the breaths of wind +took it; but the moon would rise soon, and then maybe it would go. + +We had no means of making a fire, and no cloaks; so sleep came +hardly, and we talked long. Then the dogs grew uneasy, and +presently wandered away into the fog and darkness. I thought that +perhaps they heard some game stirring, and did not wonder at them. + +Now I was just sleeping, when I heard the sharp yelp of a dog in +pain, and sat up suddenly. Then came a second, and after that the +distant sound of voices that rose for a moment and hushed again. + +"We must be close to the village after all," I said, for my +comrades were listening also; "but why did the hounds yell like +that?" + +"Some old dame has taken the broomstick to them," said Kolgrim. +"They are hungry, and have put their noses into her milk pails." + +"It is too late for open doors," I said; "unless they have found +our own lodging, where some are waiting for us. But there they +would not be beaten." + +"Ho!" said Kolgrim, in another minute or so, "yonder is a fire." + +The wind had come round the hillside and swept the mist away for a +moment, and below us in the valley was a speck of red light that +made a wide glow in the denser fog that hung there. One could +hardly say how far off it was, for fog of any sort confuses +distance; but the brook seemed to run in the direction of the fire, +and it was likely that any house stood near its banks. + +"Let us follow the brook and see what we can find," I said +therefore. "These mists are chill, and I will confess that I am +hungry. We cannot lose our way if we keep to the water, and the +horses will be safe enough." + +Anything was better, as it seemed to us, than trying to think that +we slept comfortably here, and so we rose up and went down the +banks of the stream at once; and the way proved to be easy enough, +if rocky. The bank on this side was higher, and dry therefore, so +that we had no bogs to fear. We knew enough of them in the Orkneys +and on the Sutherland coast. + +The white mist grew very thick, but the firelight glow grew redder +as we went on, and at last we came near enough to hear many voices +plainly; but presently, when one shouted, we found that the tongue +was not known to us. + +"Now it is plain whom we have come across," I said. "This is a camp +of the Cornish tin traders, of whom the king told us. They are +honest folk enough, and will put us on the great road. They must be +close to it." + +That seemed so likely that we left the brook and began to draw +nearer to the fire, the voices growing plainer every moment, though +we could see no man as yet. + +Now, all of a sudden, every voice was silent, and we stopped, +thinking we were heard perhaps; though it did seem strange to me +that no dogs were about a camp of traders. I was just about to call +out that we were friends, when there began a low, even beating, as +of a drum of some sort, and then suddenly a wild howl that sounded +like a war cry of maddened men, and after that a measured tramping +of feet that went swiftly and in time to a chant, the like of which +I had never heard before, and which made me grasp Harek by the arm. + +"What, in Odin's name, is this?" r said, whispering. + +"Somewhat uncanny," answered the scald. "Let us get back to the +horses and leave this place." + +Then we turned back, and Kolgrim's foot lit on a stone that rolled +from under it, and he fell heavily with a clatter of weapons on the +scattered rocks of the stream bank. + +There was a howl from the firelight, and the chanting stopped, and +voices cried in the uncouth tongue angrily, and there came a +pattering of unshod feet round us in the thickness, with a word or +two that seemed as if of command, and then silence, but for +stealthy footfalls drawing nearer to us. And I liked it not. + +We pulled Kolgrim up, and went on upstream, drawing our swords, +though I yet thought of nothing but tin merchants whom we had +disturbed in some strange play of their own. Doubtless they would +take us for outlaws. + +Now through the fog, dark against the flickering glow of the fire, +and only seen against it, came creeping figures; and I suppose that +some dull glitter of steel from helms or sword hilts betrayed us to +them, for word was muttered among them, and the rattle of stones +shifted by bare feet seemed to be all round us. I thought it time +to speak to them. + +"We are friends, good people," I said. "We mean no harm, and have +but lost our way." + +There was a whistle, and in a moment the leaping shadows were on +us. Kolgrim went down under a heavy blow on his helm, and lay +motionless; and Harek was whirled by a dozen pairs of hands off his +feet, and fell heavily with his foes upon him. I slew one, or +thought I slew him, and I stood over Kolgrim and kept them back +with long sword sweeps, crying to them to hold, for we were +friends--King Alfred's guests. + +Now they were yelling to one another, and one threw a long-noosed +line over me from behind. It fell over my arms, and at once they +drew it tight, jerking me off my feet. As I went down, a howling +crowd fell on me and took the good sword from me, and bound me hand +and foot, having overpowered me by sheer numbers. + +Then they looked at Kolgrim, and laughed, and left him. I was sure +he was dead then, and I fell into a great dumb rage that seemed +like to choke me. + +They dragged the scald and me to the fire, and I saw into what +hands we had fallen, and I will say that I was fairly afraid. For +these were no thrifty Cornish folk, but wild-looking men, black +haired and bearded, clad in skins of wolf, and badger, and deer, +and sheep, with savage-eyed faces, and rough weapons of rusted iron +and bronze and stone. So strange were their looks and terrible in +the red light of the great fire, that I cried to Harek: + +"These be trolls, scald! Sing the verses that have power to scare +them." + +Now it says much for Harek's courage that at once he lifted up no +trembling voice and sang lustily, roaring verses old as Odin +himself, such as no troll can abide within hearing of, so that +those who bore him fell back amazed, and stared at him. Then I saw +that on the arms and necks of one or two of these weird folk were +golden rings flashing, and I saw, too, that our poor greyhounds lay +dead near where I was, and I feared the more for ourselves. + +But they did not melt away or fly before the spells that Harek +hurled at them. + +"These be mortal men," he said at last, "else had they fled ere +now." + +By this time they had left me, helpless as a log, and were standing +round us in a sort of ring, talking together of slaying us, as I +thought. I mind that the flint-tipped spears seemed cruel weapons. +At last one of them said somewhat that pleased the rest, for they +broke into a great laugh and clapped their hands. + +"Here is a word I can understand," said Harek, "and that is +'pixies.'" + +But I was looking to see where our swords were, and I saw a man +take them beyond the fire and set them on what seemed a bank, some +yards from it. Then they went to the scald and began to loosen his +bonds, laughing the while. + +"Have a care, Harek," I cried. "Make a rush for the swords beyond +the fire so soon as you are free." + +"I am likely to be hove into the said fire," said the scald, very +coolly. "Howbeit I see the place where they are." + +Then he gave a great bound and shout: but the numbers round him +were too great, and they had him down again, and yet he struggled. +This was sport to these savages, and those who were not wrestling +with him leaped and yelled with delight to see it. And I wrestled +and tore at my bonds; but they were of rawhide, and I could do +nothing. + +Then Harek said, breathing heavily: + +"No good; their arms are like steel about me." + +Then some came and dragged me back a little, and set me up sitting +against a great stone, so I could see all that went on. Now I +counted fifty men, and there were no women that I could see +anywhere. Half of these were making a great ring with joined hands +round the fire, and some piled more fuel on it--turf and branches +of dwarf oak trees--and others sat round, watching the dozen or so +that minded Harek. One sat cross-legged near me, with a great pot +covered tightly with skin held between his knees. + +Next they set Harek on his feet, and led him to the ring round the +fire. Two of the men--and they were among the strongest of +all--loosened their hands, and each gripped the scald by the wrist +and yelled aloud, and at once the man beat on the great pot's cover +drum-wise, and the ring of men whirled away round the fire in the +wild dance whose foot beats we had heard as we came. Then those who +sat round raised the chant we heard also. + +I saw Harek struggle and try to break away; but at that they +whirled yet more quickly, and he lost his footing, and fell, and +was dragged up; and then he too must dance, or be haled along the +ground. My eyes grew dizzy with watching, while the drum and the +chant dulled into a humming in my brain. + +"This cannot go on for long," I thought. + +But then, from among those who sat round and chanted, I saw now one +and now another dart to the ring and take the place of a dancer who +seemed to tire; and so at last one came and gripped Harek's wrist +and swung into the place of his first holder before he knew that +any change was coming, and so with the one on the other side of +him. + +Then it was plain that my comrade must needs fall worn out before +long, and I knew what I was looking on at. It was the dance of the +pixies, in truth--the dance that ends but with the death of him who +has broken in on their revels--and I would that I and Harek had +been slain rather with Kolgrim by the stream yonder. + +At last the scald fell, and then with a great howl they let him go, +flinging him out of the circle like a stone, and he lay in a heap +where they tossed him, and was quite still. + +Then the dancers raised a shout, and came and sat down, and some +brought earthen vessels of drink to refresh them, while they began +to turn their eyes to me, whose turn came next. + +Whereon a thought came into my mind, and I almost laughed, for a +hope seemed to lie in a simple trick enough. That I would try +presently. + +Now I looked, and hoped to see Harek come to himself; but he did +not stir. He lay near the swords, and for the first time now, +because of some thinning of the mist, I saw what was on the bank +where these had been placed. There was a great stone dolmen, as +they call it--a giant house, as it were, made of three flat stones +for walls, and a fourth for a roof, so heavy that none know how +such are raised nowadays. They might have served for a table, or +maybe a stool, for a Jotun. The two side walls came together from +the back, so that the doorway was narrow; and a man might stand and +keep it against a dozen, for it was ten feet high, and there was +room for sword play. One minds all these things when they are of no +use to him, and only the wish that they could be used is left. +Nevertheless, as I say, I had one little hope. + +It was not long before the savage folk were ready for my dance, and +they made the ring again, refreshed. The drum was taken up once +more, and a dozen men came and unbound me. I also struggled as +Harek had struggled, unavailingly. When I was quiet they led me to +the circle, and I watched for my plan to work. + +When I was within reach of the two who should hold me, I held out +my hands to grasp theirs, without waiting for them to seize me. The +man on my right took my wrist in a grasp like steel; but the other +was tricked, and took my hand naturally enough. Whereat my heart +leaped. + +"Now will one know what a grip on the mainsheet is like!" I +thought; and even as the hand closed there came the yell, and the +thud of the earthen drum, and I was whirled away. + +Now I kept going, for my great fear was that I should grow dizzy +quickly. I was taller than any man in the ring, and once I found +out the measure of the chant I went on easily, keeping my eyes on +the man ahead of me. That was the one to my right; for they went +against the sun, which is an unlucky thing to do at any time. + +Once we went round, and I saw the great dolmen and the gleam of +sword Helmbiter beneath it. Then it was across the fire, and again +I passed it. I could not choose my place, as it seemed, and +suddenly with all my force I gripped the hand I held and around the +hones of it together, so that no answering grip could come. In a +moment the man let go of his fellow with the other hand, and +screamed aloud, and cast himself on the ground, staying the dance, +so that those after him fell over us. I let go, and swung round and +smote my other holder across the face; and he too let go, and I was +free, and in the uproar the dancers knew not what had happened. +Smiting and kicking, I got clear of them, and saw that the dolmen +towered across the fire, and straightway I knew that through the +smoke was the only way. I leaped at it, and cleared it fairly, +felling a man on the other side as I did so. + +Then I had Helmbiter in my hand, and I shouted, and stepped back to +the narrow door of the dolmen, and there stood, while the wild men +gathered in a ring and howled at me. One ran and brought the long +line that had noosed me before, but the stone doorway protected me +from that; and one or two hurled spears at me, clumsily enough for +me to ward them off. + +So we stood and watched each other, and I thought they would make a +rush on me. Harek lay within sweep of my sword, and his weapon was +nearer them than me, and one of them picked it up and went to +plunge it in him. + +Then I stepped out and cut that man down, and the rest huddled back +a little at my onslaught. Whereon I drew my comrade back to my +feet, lest they should bring me out again and noose me. + +As I did that, the one who seemed to be the chief leaped at me, +club in air; but I was watching for him, and he too fell, and I +shouted, to scare back the rest. + +There was an answering shout, and Kolgrim, with the Berserker fury +on him, was among the wild crowd from out of the darkness, and his +great sword was cutting a way to my side. + +Then they did not stay for my sword to be upon them also, but they +fled yelling and terror stricken, seeming to melt into the mist. In +two minutes the firelit circle was quiet and deserted, save for +those who had fallen; and my comrade and I stared in each other's +faces in the firelight. + +"Comrade," I cried in gladness, "I thought you were slain." + +"The good helm saved me," he answered; "but I came round in time. +What are these whom we have fought?" + +I suppose the fury kept him up so far, for now I saw that his face +was ashy pale, and his knees shook under him. + +"Are you badly hurt?" I asked. + +"My head swims yet--that is all. Where is the scald?" + +I turned to him and pointed. Kolgrim sat down beside him and bent +over him, leaning against the stone of the great dolmen. + +"I do not think he is dead, master," he said. "Let us draw him +inside this house, and then he will be safe till daylight--unless +the trolls come back and we cannot hold this doorway till the sun +rises." + +"They are men, not trolls," I said, pointing to the slain who lay +between us and the fire in a lane where Kolgrim had charged through +them, "else had we not slain them thus." + +"One knows not what Sigurd's sword will not bite," he said. + +"Why, most of that is your doing," I said, laughing a little. + +But he looked puzzled, and shook his head. + +"I mind leaping among them, but not that I slew any." + +Now I thought that he would be the better for food. There had been +plenty of both food and drink going among these wild people, +whatever they were, and they had not waited to take anything. So I +said I would walk round the fire and see what I could find, and +went before he could stay me. + +I had not far to go either, for there were plentiful remains of a +roasted sheep or two set aside with the skins, and alongside them a +pot of heather ale; so that we had a good meal, sitting in the door +of the dolmen, while the moon rose. But first we tried to make +Harek drink of the strong ale. He was beginning to breathe heavily +now, and I thought he would come round presently. Whether he had +been hurt by the whirling of the dance or by the fall when they +cast him aside, I could not tell, and we could do no more for him. + +"Sleep, master," said Kolgrim, when we had supped well; "I will +watch for a time." + +And he would have it so, and I, seeing that he was refreshed, was +glad to lie down and sleep inside the dolmen, bidding him wake me +in two hours and rest in turn. + +But he did not. It was daylight when I woke, and the first ray of +the sun came straight into the narrow doorway and woke me. And it +waked Harek also. Kolgrim sat yet in the door with his sword across +his knees. + +"Ho, scald!" I said, "you have had a great sleep." + +"Ay, and a bad dream also," he answered, "if dream it was." + +For now he saw before us the burnt-out fire, and the slain, and the +strangely-trampled circle of the dance. + +"No dream, therefore," he said. "Is it true that I was made to +dance round yon fire till I was nigh dead?" + +"True enough. I danced also in turn," I said. + +And then I told him how things had gone after his fall. + +"Kolgrim has fought, therefore, a matter of fifty trolls," I said; +"which is more than most folk can say for themselves." + +Whereat he growled from the doorway: + +"Maybe I was too much feared to know what I was doing." + +We laughed at him, but he would have it so; and then we ate and +drank, and spoke of going to where we had left the horses, being +none so sure that we should find them at all. + +Now the sun drank up the mists, and they cleared suddenly; and when +the last wreaths fled up the hillsides and passed, we saw that the +horses yet fed quietly where we had left them, full half a mile +away up the steep rise down which the stream came. + +And it was strange to see what manner of place this was in +daylight, for until the mist lifted we could not tell in the least, +and it was confused to us. Now all the hillsides glowed purple with +heather in a great cup round us, and we were on a little rise in +the midst of them whereon stood the dolmen, and the same hands +doubtless that raised it had set up a wide circle of standing +stones round about it, such as I have seen in the Orkneys. It was +not a place where one would choose to spend the night. + +There was no sign of the wild folk anywhere outside the stone +circle. They had gone, and there seemed no cover for them anywhere, +unless they dwelt in clefts and caves of the bare tors around us. +So we feared no longer lest there should be any ambush set for us, +and went about to see what they had left. + +There were the long line that had noosed me, the earthen drum with +its dry skin head, the raw hide thongs we had been bound with, and +the food and drink; and that was all save what weapons lay round +the slain, and the bodies of the two good greyhounds. + +"These are but men, and not trolls as one might well think," I +said, looking on those who lay before us. + +One whom I had slain had a heavy gold torque round his neck, and +twisted gold armlets, being the chief, as I think. Kolgrim took +these off and gave them to me, and then he went to the drum and +dashed it on a stone and broke it, saying nothing. + +"Let us be going," I said. "These folk will come back and see to +their dead." + +But Kolgrim looked at the drumhead and took it, and then coiled the +long line on his arm. + +"Trust a sailor for never losing a chance of getting a new bit of +rigging," said Harek, laughing; for he seemed none the worse for +the things of last night, which indeed began to seem ghostly and +dreamlike to us all. "But what good is the bit of skin?" + +"Here be strange charms wrought into it," Kolgrim said. "It will +make a sword scabbard that will avail somewhat against such like +folk if ever we meet them again." + +Truly there were marks as of branded signs on the bit of skin, and +so he kept it; and I hung the gold trophies in my belt, and Harek +took some of the remains of our supper: and so we went to the +horses, seeing nothing of the wild men anywhere. + +Very glad were the good steeds to see us come, and the falcon, who +still sat on the saddle where I had perched her, spread her wings +and ruffled her feathers to hear us. I unhooded and fed her; and we +washed in the stream, and set out gaily enough, making southward, +for so we thought we should strike the great road. And at last, +when we saw its white line far off from a steep hillside, I was +glad enough. + +I cannot tell how we had reached our halting place through the +hills in the dark, nor could I find it again directly. It was +midday before we reached the road, riding easily; so that, what +with the swift gallop of the hunting and the long hours of riding +in mist and darkness, we had covered many miles. We saw no house +till we were close to the road, and then lit on one made of stones +and turf hard by it, where an old woman told us that no party had +been by since daylight. + +So we turned eastward and rode to meet the king, and did so before +long. He had left men at his village to wait for us in case we came +back there; but he laughed at us for losing ourselves, though he +said he had no fear for sailors adrift in the wilds when Ethelnoth +came in without us. + +But when, as we rode on, I told him what had befallen us, he +listened gravely, and at last said: + +"I have heard the like of this before. Men say that the pixies +dwell in the moorland, and will dance to death those who disturb +them. What think you of those you have seen?" + +I said that, having slain them, one could not doubt that they were +men, if strange ones. + +"That is what I think," he answered. "They are men who would be +thought pixies. Maybe they are the pixies. I believe they are the +last of the old Welsh folk who have dwelt in these wilds since the +coming of the Romans or before. There were the like in the great +fens of East Anglia and Mercia when Guthlac the Holy went there, +and he thought them devils. None can reach these men or know where +they dwell. Maybe they are heathen, and their dance in that stone +ring was some unholy rite that you have seen. But you have been +very far into the wastes, and I have never seen those stones." + +And when he handled the gold rings, he showed me that they were +very old; but when he handled the drumhead and looked at the marks +thereon, he laughed. + +"Here is the magic of an honest franklin's cattle brand. I have +seen it on beasts about the hills before now. The pixies have made +a raid on the farmer's herds at some time." + +Now I think that King Alfred was right, and that we had fallen into +the hands of wild Welsh or Cornish moor folk. But one should hear +Kolgrim's tale of the matter as he shows his sword sheath that he +made of the drumhead; for nothing would persuade him that it was +not of more than mortal work. + +"Had the good king been in that place with us, he would have told a +different tale altogether," he says. + +So we went on our journey quietly, and ever as we went and spoke +with Alfred, I began to be sure that this pale and troubled king +was the most wondrous man that I had ever seen. And now, as I look +back and remember, I know that in many ways he was showing me that +the faith he held shaped his life to that which seemed best in him +to my eyes. + +I know this, that had he scoffed at the Asir, I had listened to +Neot not at all. But when we came to his place, I was ready, and +more than ready, to hear what he had to tell me. + + + +Chapter VIII. The Black Twelfth-Night. + + +When we came to the little out of the way village among the Cornish +hills near which Neot, the king's cousin, had his dwelling, I +thought it strange that any one should be willing to give up the +stirring life at court for such a place as this. Here was only one +fair-sized house in the place, and that was built not long before +by the king for his own use when he came here, which was often. And +Neot's own dwelling was but a little stone-walled and turf-roofed +hut, apart from all others, on the hillside, and he dwelt there +with one companion--another holy man, named Guerir, a Welshman by +birth--content with the simple food that the villagers could give +him, and spending his days in prayer and thought for the king and +people and land that he loved. + +But presently, as I came to know more of Neot, it seemed good that +some should live thus in quiet while war and unrest were over the +country, else had all learning and deeper thought passed away. It +is certain from all that I have heard, from the king himself and +from others, that without Neot's steady counsel and gathered wisdom +Alfred had remained haughty and proud, well-nigh hated by his +people, as he had been when first he came to the throne. + +At one time he would drive away any who came to him with plaints or +tales of wrong and trouble; but Neot spoke to him in such wise that +he framed his ways differently. And now I used to wonder to see him +stay and listen patiently to some rambling words of trifling want, +told by a wayside thrall, to which it seemed below his rank to +hearken, and next I would know that it was thus he made his people +love him as no other king has been loved maybe. There was no man +who could not win hearing from him now. + +It is said of him that when Neot showed him the faults in his ways, +he asked that some sickness, one that might not make him useless or +loathsome to his people, might be sent him to mind him against his +pride, and that so he had at first one manner of pain, and now this +which I had seen. It may be so, for I know well that so he made it +good for him, and he bore it most patiently. Moreover, I have never +heard that it troubled him in the times of direst need, though the +fear of it was with him always. + +Now what Alfred and Neot spoke of at this time I cannot say, except +that it was certainly some plan for the good of the land. I and my +comrades hunted and hawked day by day until the evening came, and +then would sup plainly with the king, and then sit at Neot's door +in the warm evening, and talk together till the stars came out. + +Many things we spoke of, and Neot told me what I would. I cannot +write down those talks, though I mind every word of them. But there +was never any talk of the runes I had offered. + +Neot spoke mostly, but Alfred put in words now and then that ever +seemed to make things plainer; and I mind how Ethelnoth the +ealdorman sat silent, listening to questions and answers that maybe +he had never needed to put or hear concerning his own faith. + +At first I was only asking because the king wished it, then because +I grew curious, and because I thought it well to know what a +Saxon's faith was if I was to bide among Alfred's folk. Kolgrim +listened, saying nought. But presently Harek the scald would ask +more than I, and his questions were very deep, and I thought that +as days went on he grew thoughtful and silent. + +Then one evening the song woke within the scald's breast, and he +said to Neot: + +"Many and wise words have you spoken, Father Neot. Hear now the +song of Odin--the Havamal--and tell me if you have aught to equal +it." + +"Sing, my son," the good man answered. "Wisdom is from above, and +is taught in many ways." + +Then Harek sang, and his voice went over the hillsides, echoing +wonderfully; while we who heard him were very still, unwilling to +lose one word or note of the song. Many verses and sayings of the +"Havamal" I knew, but I had not heard it all before. Now it seemed +to me that no more wisdom than is therein could be found {ix}. + +So when Harek ended Neot smiled on him, and said: + +"That is a wondrous song, and I could have listened longer. There +is little therein that one may not be wiser in remembering." + +"There is nought wiser; it is Odin's wisdom," said Harek. + +Now the old hermit, Guerir, Neot's friend, sat on the stone bench +beside the king, and he said: + +"Hear the words of the bards, the wondrous 'triads' of old time." + +And he chanted them in a strange melody, unlike aught I had ever +heard. And they, the old savings, were wise as the "Havamal" +itself. But he stopped ere long, saying: + +"The English words will not frame the meaning rightly. I do no +justice to the wisdom that is hidden." + +Then Neot turned to the king, and said: + +"Sing to Harek words from the book of Wisdom that we know. I think +you can remember it well." + +"I have not rhymed it," the king answered; "but sometimes the song +shapes itself when it is needed." + +He took Guerir's little harp and tuned it afresh and sang. And in +the words were more wisdom than in the Havamal or in the song of +the bards, so that I wondered; and Harek was silent, looking out to +the sunset with wide eyes. + +Not long did the king sing, as it seemed to us; and when he ceased, +Harek made no sign. + +"Sing now, my cousin, words that are wiser than those; even sing +from the songs of David the king." + +So said Neot; and Alfred sang again very wondrously, and as with +some strange awe of the words he said. Then to me it seemed that +beside these the words of Odin were as nought. They became as words +of the wisdom of daily life, wrung from the lips of men forced to +learn by hardness and defeat and loss; and then the words that +Alfred had first sung were as those of one who knew more than Odin, +and yet spoke of daily troubles and the wisdom that grows thereout. +But now the things that he sang must needs have come from wisdom +beyond that of men--wisdom beyond thought of mine. And if so it +seemed to me, I know not how the heart of the scald, who was more +thoughtful and knew more than I, was stirred. + +He rose up when Alfred ceased, and walked away down the hillside +slowly, as in a dream, not looking at us; and the kindly Saxons +smiled gently, and said nothing to rouse him. + +It is in my mind that Harek's eyes were wet, for he had lost +somewhat--his belief in things he held dearest and first of +all--and had as yet found nothing that should take its place. There +is nought harder than that to a man. + +When he had passed out of hearing, I said: + +"Are there wiser things yet that you may sing?" + +"Ay, and that you may learn, my son," answered Neot. "Listen." + +Then he spoke words from Holy Writ that I know now--the words that +speak of where wisdom may be found. And he said thereafter, and +truly, that it was not all. + +Then I seemed to fear greatly. + +"Not now, my king, not now," I said; "it is enough." + +Then those two spoke to me out of their kind hearts. Yet to me the +old gods were very dear, and I clung to them. Neither Neot nor the +king said aught against them, being very wise, at that time. + +Presently Harek came back, and his eyes were shining. + +"Tell me more of this learning," he said, casting himself down on +the grass at Alfred's feet. "Scald have I been since I could sing, +and nought have I heard like this." + +"Some day," Neot said; "it is enough now that you should know what +you have heard." + +So ended that strange song strife on Neot's quiet hillside. The sun +set, and the fleecy mists came up from the little river below, and +we sat silent till Alfred rose and said farewell, and we went to +the guest house in the village. + +Now I think that none will wonder that after we had been with Neot +for those ten days, we were ready and willing to take on us the +"prime signing," as they called it, gladly and honestly. So we were +signed with the cross by Neot, and Alfred and Ethelnoth and Guerir +were our witnesses. + +I know that many scoff at this, because there are heathen who take +this on them for gain, that they may trade more openly, or find +profit among Christian folk, never meaning or caring to seek +further into the faith that lies open, as it were, before them. But +it was not so with us, nor with many others. We were free to serve +our old gods if we would, but free also to learn the new faith; and +to learn more of it for its own sake seemed good to us. + +So we went back to Exeter with the king, and Neot came for a few +miles with us, on foot as was his wont, parting from us with many +good words. And after he was gone the king was cheerful, and spoke +with me about the ordering of the fleet we were to build, as though +he were certain that I should take command of it in the spring. + +And, indeed, after that time there was never any question among us +three vikings about it. It seemed to us that if we had lost Norway +as a home, we had gained what would make as good a country; and, +moreover, Alfred won us to him in such wise that it seemed we could +do nought but serve him. There can be few who have such power over +men's hearts as he. + +Exeter seemed very quiet when we came back; for the Danes were +gone, and the king's levies had dispersed, and only the court +remained, though that was enough to make all the old city seem very +gay to those who had known it only in the quiet of peace. + +One man was there whom I had hardly thought to meet again, and that +was Osmund the Danish jarl. For he was a hostage in the king's +hands, to make more sure that the peace would be kept. I knew there +were hostages to be given by the beaten host; but I had not asked +who they were, and had been at the ships when they were given up, +ten of them in all, and of the best men among the Danes. + +Alfred treated his captives very well, giving them good lodgings, +and bating them often at his own table, so that I saw much of +Osmund. And more than that, I saw much of the Lady Thora, his +daughter, who would not leave him. I do not think that there could +be more certain manner of beginning a close friendship between a +warrior and the lady whom he shall learn to hold first in his +heart, than that in which I first met this fair maiden. + +Now one will say that straightway I must fall in love with her, but +it was not so: first of all, because I had not time, since every +day Alfred planned new ships with me and Thord; and next, because I +was his guest, and Osmund was his hostage. Maybe I thought not much +of that, however, not having the thoughts of a Saxon towards a +Dane. But I will say this, that among all the fair ladies of the +queen's household there was none of whom I thought at all; while of +what Thora would say I thought often, and it pleased me that the +Lady Etheldreda, Odda's fair eldest daughter, took pity on the +lonely maiden, and made much of her after a time. + +Three weeks I was in Exeter, and then the king went eastward +through his country to repair what damage had been done. Then I +took up my work for him, and got out my ship and sailed westward, +putting into every harbour where a ship might be built, and set the +shipwrights to work, having with me royal letters to sheriffs and +port reeves everywhere that they should do what I ordered them. In +each yard I left two or three of my men, that they should oversee +all things; because if one Saxon thinks he knows better than his +fellow, he will not be ruled by him, whereas no man can dispute +what a born viking has to say about ship craft. It seemed that all +were glad of our coming, and the work began very cheerfully. + +All this took long, but at last I came up the Severn, and so into +the river Parret--for the weather would serve me no longer and laid +up the ship in a creek there is at Bridgwater, where Heregar, the +king's standard bearer, was sheriff. He made me very welcome at his +great house near by, at Cannington, and then rode with me to +Bristol; and there I set two ships in frame, and so ended all I +could do for the winter. King Alfred would have a fleet when the +spring came. + +Then Heregar and I would go to Chippenham, to spend the time of the +Yule feast with King Alfred; and we rode there with Harek and +Kolgrim, and were made most welcome. Many friends whom I had made +at Exeter were there, and among them, quiet and yet hopeful of +release, were the hostages. + +That was a wonderful Yule to me; but I will say little of it, for +the tale of the most terrible Twelfth Night that England has ever +known overshadows it all, though there were things that I learned +at that time, sitting in the church with Harek, at the west end, +and listening, that are bright to me. But they are things by +themselves, and apart from all else. + +Now peace was on all the land, and the frost and snow were bright +and sharp everywhere; so that men said that it was a hard winter, +and complained of the cold which seemed nothing to us Northmen. +Maybe there was a foot of snow in deep places, and the ice was six +inches thick on the waters; and the Saxons wondered thereat, saying +that they minded the like in such and such years before. Then I +would tell them tales of the cold north to warm them, but I think +they hardly believed me. + +The town was full of thanes and their families who had been called +to Alfred's Yule keeping, and it was very bright and pleasant among +them all, though here and there burnt ruins made gaps between the +houses, minding one that the Danes had held the place not so long +since. + +So they kept high feasting for Yule and the New Year, and the last +great feast was for Twelfth Night, and all were bidden for that, +and there was much pleasant talk of what revels should be in the +evening. + +The day broke very bright and fair, with a keen, windless frost +that made the snow crisp and pleasant to ride over, hindering one +in no way. And there was the sun shining over all in a way that +made the cold seem nought to me, so that I had known nothing more +pleasant than this English winter, having seen as yet nothing of +the wet and cold times that come more often than such as this. +Then, too, the clear ringing of the bells from every village near +and far was new to me, and I thought I had heard nothing sweeter +than the English call to the church for high festival {x}. + +So I went to the king, and asked him if I might take with me the +Danish jarl for a ride beyond the town; for the hostages were only +free inside the walls, and I knew this would please Osmund and +Thora well. I said that I would see to his safety and be answerable +for him. + +"This must be Osmund, I suppose," the king said, smiling. "I have +heard how you came to know him and his fair daughter at Wareham. It +was well done, though maybe I should blame you for running +over-much risk." + +"I think I ran little, lord king," I said; "and I could have done +no less for the poor maiden." + +"Surely; but I meant that to go at all was over dangerous." + +"I am ready to do the same again for you, my king," I said. "And +after all I was in no danger." + +Then said the king, smiling gravely at me: + +"Greater often are the dangers one sees not than those which one +has to meet. I have my own thoughts of what risk you ran. + +"Well, take your fair lady and the jarl also where you will. But +the feast is set for two hours after noon, and all must be there." + +So I thanked him, and he bade me ask his steward for horses if I +would, and I went straight to Osmund from his presence. + +"I think it will be a more pleasant ride than our last," said +Thora. "Yet that is one that I shall not forget." + +Then I tried to say that I hoped she did not regret it either, but +I minded me of the loved nurse she had to leave, and was silent in +time. Yet I thought that she meant nothing of sorrow in the +remembrance as she spoke. + +We called out my two comrades, for Osmund liked them well, and rode +away northward, that the keen air might be behind us as we +returned. That was all the chance that led us that way, and it was +well that we were so led, as things turned out. + +The white downs and woodlands sparkling with frost were very +beautiful as we rode, and we went fast and joyously in the fresh +air; but the countryside was almost deserted, for the farmsteads +were burned when the Danes broke in on the land last spring, and +few were built up as yet. The poor folk were in the town now, for +the most part, finding empty houses enough to shelter them, and +none left to whom they belonged. + +Now we rode for twelve miles or so, and then won to a hilltop which +we had set as our turning place. I longed to stand there and look +out over all this country, that seemed so fair after the rugged +northern lands I had known all my life. But when we were there we +saw a farmstead just below us, on the far slope of the gentle hill; +and we thought it well to go there and dismount, and maybe find +some food for ourselves and the horses before turning back. + +So we went on. It was but a couple of furlongs distant, and the +buildings lay to the right of the road, up a tree-shaded lane of +their own. + +We turned into this, and before we had gone ten yards along it I +halted suddenly. I had seen somewhat that seemed strange, and +unmeet for the lady to set eyes on. + +"Bide here, jarl," I said, "and let us go on and see what is here; +the place looks deserted." + +And I looked meaningly at him, glancing at Thora. + +But he had seen what had caught my eye, and he stayed at once, +turning back into the main road, and beckoning Harek to come with +him and Thora, for some reason of his own. + +Then Kolgrim and I went on. What we had seen was a man lying +motionless by the farm gate, in a way that was plain enough to me. +And when we came near, we knew that the man had been slain. He was +a farm thrall, and he had a pitchfork in his hand, the shaft of +which was half cut through, as with a sword stroke that he had +warded from him, though he had not stayed a second cut, for so he +was killed. + +"Here is somewhat strangely wrong," I said. + +"Outlaws' work," answered Kolgrim; for the wartime had made the +masterless folk very bold everywhere, and the farm was lonely +enough. + +We rode through the swinging gate, and then we saw three horses by +the stable yard paling, and with them was an armed man, who saw us +as we came round the house, and whistled shrilly. Whereon two +others came running from the building, and asked in the Danish +tongue what he called for. The first man pointed to us, and all +three mounted at once. They were in mail and helm, fully armed. + +Now we were not, for we had thought of no meeting such as this, and +rode in woollen jerkins and the like, and had only our swords and +seaxes, as usual; but for the moment I did not think that we should +need either. Outlaws such as I took them for do not make any stand +unless forced. + +Presently one of the men, having mounted leisurely enough, called +to us. + +"There is no plunder to be had," he said, "even if you were not too +late; our folk cleared out the place over well last time." + +Then a fourth man, one who seemed of some rank, rode from beyond +the house, passing behind us without paying any heed to us, except +that he called to the men to follow him, and so went down the lane +towards where Osmund was waiting with Harek. + +All this puzzled me, and so I cried to the three men: + +"What do you here? Whose men are you?" + +At that they looked at one another--they were not more than ten +yards from us now--and halted. + +"You should know that," one said; and then he put his hand to his +sword suddenly, adding in a sharp voice: + +"These be Saxons; cut them down." + +When hand goes to sword hilt one knows what is coming, and even as +the man said his last words I was on them, and Kolgrim was not a +pace behind me. The Dane's sword was out first; but I was upon him +in time. His horse swerved as mine plunged forward, and I rode him +down, horse and man rolling together in the roadway. Then the man +to my right cut at me, and I parried the blow and returned it. Then +that horse was riderless, and I heard Kolgrim laugh as his man went +down with a clatter and howl. + +My horse plunged on for a few steps, and then I turned. Kolgrim had +one horse by the bridle, and was catching that which had fallen. I +caught the other, and so we looked at each other. + +"This is your luck, master," said Kolgrim. + +"Well," said I, "these are Danes, and I do not think they are +wanderers either. Here are forage bags behind the saddles. One +would say that they were on the march if this were not mid-winter +and time of peace. The horsemen in advance of a host, or the like." + +Then Kolgrim said: + +"Where has the other man gone? I had forgotten him for the moment." + +"Bide here and see if any poor farm folk are yet alive," I said. "I +will ride after him." + +So I gave the horse I was holding to my comrade, and went back +quickly down the lane to where Osmund and the other two were. The +man I sought was speaking with the jarl, whose face was white and +troubled. Harek was looking red and angry, but on Thora's face was +written what I could not understand--as it were some fear of a new +terror. + +Now it was plain that all three were very glad of my coming; but +the stranger looked round for a single glance, and then went on +speaking to Osmund. + +"Be not a fool, jarl," he said angrily. "Here is your chance; let +it not slip." + +"I tell you that my word shall not be broken," Osmund replied, very +coldly and sternly. + +"What say you, girl?" the man said then, turning to Thora. "Short +shrift will be the jarl's when Alfred finds that we are on him." + +But Thora turned away without a word, and then the Dane spoke to +me: + +"Here! you are another hostage, I suppose." + +"I am not," I answered. + +"Well, then, here is Jarl Osmund, if you know him not, and he is +one. Tell him that what I say is true, and that Chippenham town +will be burned out tonight king and all." + +I saw that the Dane, seeing that I was armed, and not clad in the +Saxon manner altogether, took me for one of his own people. And +from his words it was plain that some of the Danish chiefs had +broken away from Guthrum, and were making this unheard-of +mid-winter march to surprise Alfred. Most likely they were +newcomers into Mercia, and had nought to do with the Exeter host. + +"Maybe it is true," I answered; "but I am no Dane." + +He laughed loudly. + +"Why, then, you are one of Alfred's Norsemen! Now I warn you to get +away from Chippenham, for it is unsafe, and there will be no king +to pay you tomorrow. I think that you will say with me that it were +better for Osmund to come with me to meet the host than to go back +to Alfred and be hung before he flies--if he gets news of us in +time to do so." + +Herein the man was right, for Alfred had warned the chiefs at +Exeter that he held the hostages in surety for peace on the part of +all and any Danes. But I thought I might learn more, so I said: + +"Guthrum thinks little of his friends' lives." + +"Guthrum!" the Dane answered sneeringly; "what have we to do with +him and his peace making?" + +"What then are you Hubba's men?" + +"He is in Wales. Think you that we are all tied to the sons of +Lodbrok?" + +"You might have worse leaders," I said. + +And just then Kolgrim came along the lane, leading the three +horses, and on them were the armour and weapons of the slain. It +was not my comrade's way to leave for other folk aught that was +worth having. + +At once the Dane knew what had happened, and he swung his horse +round and spurred it fiercely, making for flight. Then Harek looked +at me and touched his sword hilt, and I nodded. It was well to let +no tidings of our knowledge go back to the host. After the Dane +therefore went Harek, and I looked at Osmund. + +"Jarl," I said, "I am in a strait here. If you go back, your life +is in Alfred's hands." + +"I know it," he said, smiling faintly. "It is a hard place maybe +for us both, but there is only one way. You must get back to the +king, and I with you; for you have to answer for me, and my word is +passed not to escape." + +Then Thora said: + +"The king is just, as all men know. How should he slay you for what +you cannot help?" + +"Ay," he answered, smiling at her, "that is right." + +So she was satisfied, knowing nought perhaps of what the place of a +hostage is. + +So we started back to Chippenham quickly, and after us I heard +Harek coming. He had a led horse when he joined us, and I knew that +none would take word to the Danish host that the king was warned. + +When we came to the hilltop over which we had ridden so blithely an +hour ago or less, we looked back, and at first saw nothing. Then +over the white brow of a rolling down that shone in the level +sunlight came a black speck that grew and lengthened, sliding, as +it were, like a snake down the hillside. And that line sparkled +like ice in the sunlight from end to end; for it was the Danish +host on the march, and in two hours they would be where we stood, +and in two more they who were mounted would be in Chippenham +streets, where Alfred had not enough men even to guard the gates +against such a force as was coming. + +Then we rode hard for the lives of all who were in the town, and as +I went I thought also that we rode to the death of the brave, +honest jarl who was beside me, saying nothing, but never letting +his horse falter. Just as bravely rode Thora. + +In an hour we were at the gates, and I rode straight to the king's +house, and sought him on urgent business. + +Ethered of Mercia came out to me. + +"What is it, Ranald?" he said. "The Witan is set now." + +I told him in few words, and his face changed. + +"It seems impossible in frost and snow," he said. + +"Ay; but there are proofs," I said, pointing through the great +doorway. + +There was my party, and Kolgrim was binding a wound on Harek's arm +of which I knew nought till that moment, and the led horses and +spoils were plain enough to say all. + +Then Ethered made haste and took me to the great hall, where Alfred +sat with some thirty thanes of his Witan {xi}, and many clergy. +I knew they were to meet on some business that I had nought to do +with. Ethered went to the king without any ceremony, and speaking +low told him my message. Whereon the king's face grew white and +then red, and he flashed out into terrible wrath: + +"Forsworn and treacherous!" he cried, in a thick voice that shook +with passion. "The hostages--chain them and bring them here. Their +friends shall find somewhat waiting them here that shall make them +wish they had kept their oaths!" + +Then he said to me: + +"Speak out, Ranald, and tell these thanes your news." + +I spoke plainly, and they listened with whitening faces and +muttered oaths. And when I ceased, one cried, hardly knowing what +he said, as I think: + +"This outlander rode with Osmund the Dane to bring them on us even +now." + +"Silence!" Alfred said; and then in a cold voice he asked me: + +"Where is this Osmund? I suppose he has fled to his people." + +"That he has not, though he could have done so," I answered. +"Moreover, the Dane I spoke with said in so many words that this is +no host of Guthrum's." + +At that Alfred frowned fiercely. + +"Whose then? What good is a king if he cannot make his people keep +their oaths?" + +There was a stir at the door, and the eyes of all turned that way. +And when the thanes saw that the hostages were being led in, with +Osmund at their head, a great sullen growl of wrath broke from +them, and I thought all hope was gone for the lives of those +captives. + +"Hear you this?" the king said, in a terrible voice, when the noise +ceased. "By the deed of your own people your lives are forfeit. +They have broken the peace, and even now are marching on us. Your +leader, Osmund himself, has seen them." + +"It is true," Osmund said. "We are in the king's hands." + +Then Alfred turned to the Witan, who were in disorder, and in +haste, as one might see, to be gone to their houses and fly. + +"You heard the Danish oath taken at Exeter; what is your word on +this?" + +They answered in one voice: + +"Slay them. What else?" + +"You hear," said the king to the Danes. "Is not the sentence just?" + +"It is what one might look for," Osmund answered, "but I will say +this, that this is some new band of Danes, with whom we have nought +to do." + +"What!" said Alfred coldly; "will you tell me that any Dane in the +country did not know that I held hostages for the peace? Go to. + +"See to this matter, sheriff." + +Then the sheriff of Chippenham came forward, and it seemed to me +that it was of no use for me to say aught; yet I would try what I +could do, so I spoke loudly, for a talk had risen among the thanes. + +"What is this, lord king? Will you slay Osmund the jarl, who has +kept his troth, even to coming back to what he knew would be his +death? You cannot slay such a man for the oath breaking of others." + +Then the king looked long at me, and the sheriff stayed, and at +first I expected passionate words; but the king's rage was cold and +dreadful now. + +"His friends slay him--not I," he answered. + +Then of a sudden I minded somewhat, and clear before me stood a +test by which I might know certainly if it were good that I should +leave the Asir and follow the way of the white Christ. + +"King Alfred," I said, "I have heard the bishop tell, in the great +church here, of a king who slew the guiltless at Christmastide. +There was nought too hard for any to say of that man. Moreover, I +have heard strange and sweet words of peace at this time, of +forgiveness of enemies and of letting go of vengeance. Are these +things nought, or are they indeed those by which you guide +yourselves, as Neot says?" + +He was silent, gazing fixedly on me; and all the Witan were +speechless, listening. + +"These men are enemies maybe, but they at least have done nought. +Shall you avenge yourself on them for the wrongdoing of others?" + +Then the king's face changed, and he looked past me, and in his +eyes grew and shone a wondrous light, and slowly he lifted up his +hand, and cried, in a great voice that seemed full of joy: + +"Hear this, O ye Danes and foes of the Cross. For the love of +Christ, and in His name, I bid you go in peace!" + +And then, as they stared at him in wonder and awe at his look and +words, Alfred said to me: + +"Unbind them, my brother, and let them go--nay, see them safely to +some strong house; for the poor folk may slay them in their blind +anger, even as would I have done." + +Then no man hindered me--for it seemed as if a great fear, as of +the might of the holy name, had fallen on all--and I went and cut +the bonds of the captives. And as I did so, Osmund said in a low +voice to me: + +"First daughter and then father. We owe our lives to you." + +"Nay," I answered, "but to the Christians' faith." + +Then I hurried them out before news of what was on hand could get +among the townsfolk, and we went quickly to my lodgings; for that +was a strong house enough, and could be barred in such wise that +even if any tried to attack the place in the flight that would +begin directly, it would take too long to break the doors down to +be safe with the host at hand. + +Then came Heregar, armed and mounted, with a single man behind him, +and he called for me. + +"Ride out with me, King Ranald, for we must count these Danes, and +see that we are not overrating their number. After that we will +join the king, who goes to Glastonbury." + +So I bade farewell to Osmund and to Thora, who said nought, but +looked very wistfully, as if she would say words of thanks but +could not; and at that I went quickly, for it seemed hard to leave +her, in some way that was not clear to me, amid all the turmoil of +the place. + +But when we were on the road, Heregar said to me: + +"It is in my mind that Osmund, your friend, will fare ill among +these Danes. They will hear how he rode back, and will hold that by +his means the king escaped." + +"What can be done?" + +"The man is one of a thousand, as it seems to me. Let us bid him +leave the town and get back to Guthrum as he can." + +"He can have the Danish horses," I said. + +Now before sunset we had seen the Danish force, and our hearts +sank. There were full ten thousand men, many of whom were mounted. + +Then we rode back, and found the town in such tumult as it is not +good to think on. There is nothing more terrible to see than such a +flight, and in midwinter. + +When we came to my lodging, Heregar went in to find Osmund. I would +not see him again, lest Thora should weep. But in a few minutes he +came out with the jarl. + +"Here is a wise man," said Heregar. "He says that he swore to keep +the peace with Alfred, and he will do it. He and the Lady Thora +will go with us. There are one or two also of the other hostages +who blame him for returning. He cannot stay among the Danes here." + +Then I was very glad, and we made haste to have all ready for +Thora's comfort on the ride that might be so long. And so we rode +out after the king along the road to Glastonbury, and I think that +the Danes were in the town half an hour after we left it. + +Next we knew that Danes were on the road before us, and that more +were hard after us. Some had skirted the town in order to cut off +the king, and were pursuing him. So we struck off the road into +by-lanes that Heregar knew, resting at lonely houses as we went on. +And when we came to Glastonbury at last, the king was not there, +nor did any know of his fate. + +Then we rode, with the Danes swarming everywhere, through the +Sedgemoor wastes to Bridgwater, and found rest at Cannington, +Heregar's great house not far off. + + + +Chapter IX. The Sign of St. Cuthberht. + + +I suppose that in our flight from Glastonbury to Bridgwater we +passed through more dangers than we knew of; for Danes were hard +after us, riding even into sight from the town that evening, and +next day coming even to the eastern end of the old bridge, and +bandying words with the townsfolk who guarded it. Across it they +dared not come, for there is a strong earthwork on the little rise +from the river, which guards both bridge and town, and in it were +my Norsemen with the townsfolk. + +So we were in safety for a time; and it seemed likely that we might +be so for long if but a few men could be gathered, for here was a +stretch of country that was, as it were, a natural fastness. Three +hundred years ago the defeated Welsh had turned to bay here while +Kenwalch of Wessex and his men could not follow them; and now it +seemed likely that here in turn would Wessex stand her ground. + +It is a great square-sided patch of rolling, forest-covered +country, maybe twelve miles long from north to south, and half as +much across. None can enter it from the north, because there is the +sea, and a wild coast that is not safe for a landing; on the west +the great, steep, fort-crested Quantock Hills keep the border; on +the eastern side is the river Parret, and on the north the Tone, +which joins it. Except at Bridgwater, at the eastern inland corner, +and Taunton, at the western--one at the head of the tidal waters of +the Parret, and the other guarding the place where the Quantocks +end--there is no crossing the great and wide-stretching fens of +Sedgemoor and Stanmoor and the rest that lie on either bank of the +rivers. Paths there are that the fenmen know, winding through mere +and peat bog and swamp, but no host can win through them; and +perhaps those marches are safer borders than even the sea. + +If one came from the sea, one must land at Watchet, and then win a +path across the Quantocks, and there is the ancient camp of +Dowsborough to block the way; or else put into the Parret, and +there, at the first landing place, where they say that Joseph of +Arimathaea landed, bearing the holy thorn staff in his hand, is the +strong hill fort of Combwich, old as the days of that Joseph, or +maybe older. + +So with walled towns and hill forts the corners of Heregar's land +were kept; and with sea and marsh and hill the sides were strong, +and we thought to find Alfred the king here before us. But he was +not; and next day we rode on to Taunton to seek him there, for that +was the strongest fortress in that part of the west. And again he +was not to be heard of. Then fear for his life began to creep into +our minds, and we came back to Cannington sorely downcast. + +Then Heregar spoke to me very kindly of what he thought I could +best do, and it was nothing more or less than that I should leave +this land, which seemed to have no hope of honour for me now. + +"Go rather to Rolf, your countryman," he said. "There is great talk +of his doings in Neustria {xii} beyond the Channel. It is your +kindness only that holds you here, King Ranald, and there wait +glory and wealth for you and your men." + +So he urged me for a little while, not giving me time to answer him +as I would; but when I said nothing he stayed his words, and then I +spoke plainly, and it was good to see his face light up as I did +so. + +"It shall not be said of me that I left King Alfred, who has been +my good friend, in time of trouble; rather will I stay here and do +what I can to help him out of it. Why, there are ships that I have +put in frame for him in the western ports that the Danes will not +reach yet, if at all. When spring comes we will man them and make a +landing somewhere, and so divide the Danish host at least." + +"Now I will say no more," answered the thane, putting his hand on +mine. "Speak thus to the king when we find him, and it will do him +good, for I think that when he left Chippenham he was well-nigh +despairing." + +"It is hard to think that of Alfred," I said. + +"Ay; but I saw his face as he rode away just before I sought you. +Never saw I such a look on a man's face before, and I pray that I +may not see it again. It was terrible to look on him, for I think +he had lost all hope." + +"For the time, maybe," I said; "but I cannot believe that when the +first weight of the blow passed he was not himself again." + +Presently there came a shift of wind and a quick thaw with driving +rain, and floods grew and spread rapidly in the low-lying lands. +One good thing can be said of this weather, and that was that +because of it the Danes burned neither town nor farmstead, needing +all the shelter they could find. + +Three days that gale lasted, and then the wind flew round again to +the north, with return of the frost in even greater strength than +before; and the weather-wise fishers and shepherds said that this +betokened long continuance thereof, and so it seemed likely to be. + +But through it all we heard no tidings of the king; and in one way +that was good, for had he been taken by the Danes, they would have +let all men know thereof soon enough. But we feared that he might +have been slain by some party who knew not who he was, and that +fear hung heavily over us all. + +Next we had a messenger from Odda, who was at Exeter, asking for +sure word of what had befallen; and the one hope we had yet was +gone, for he too knew nothing. + +Very sad and silent was Osmund the jarl, though he and Thora were +most kindly received as honoured guests by the Lady Alswythe and +the household of the thane. + +Once I asked him what his plans were, for we were both strangers, +and I knew him best. + +"Presently," he said, "I shall try to get back to Guthrum. While I +am here I will be held as if I were no one--as a harmless ghost who +walks the house, neither seeing nor hearing aught. If there were +Welsh to be fought, I would fight beside you all, gladly, for +Alfred; but as the war is against my own folk, I can do nothing. I +will neither fight for them nor fight against them; for King Alfred +and you, my friend, gave me life, and it is yours. I think that +some day I may be of use to Alfred in helping to bring about a +lasting peace." + +"If we find him," I said. + +"Ay, you will find him. He is hiding now for some wise reason that +we shall know. I think it is not known how his plans are feared by +our folk. I am sure that of this midwinter march the Danes will say +that it is worthy of Alfred himself." + +Nevertheless we heard nothing of him, though the thane had men out +everywhere trying to gain news. All that they heard was the same +tale of dismay from whoever they might meet, and I think that but +for a chance we should not have found him until he chose to come +forth from his refuge. + +Heregar the thane had a strange serving man, the same who had +ridden with him and me to meet the Danish forces; and this man was +a fenman from Sedgemoor, who knew all the paths through the wastes. +Lean and loose-limbed he was, and somewhat wild looking, mostly +silent; but where his lord went he went also. They said that he had +saved the thane's life more than once in the great battles about +Reading, when the Danish host first came. + +This man was out daily, seeking news with the rest; and one day, +just a week after we had come to Cannington, when the frost had +bound everything fast again, he came home and sought his master. + +Heregar and I and Osmund sat together silently before the fire, and +he looked from one to the other of us outlanders. + +"Speak out, Dudda," said Heregar, who knew his ways; "here are none +but friends." + +"Ay, friends of ours sure enough; but are they the king's?" + +"Most truly so. Have you news of him?" + +"I have not; but I have heard some fenmen talking." + +Then Osmund rose up and went his way silently, as was his wont; and +Dudda grinned at us. + +"He is a good Dane," he said; "now I can speak. They say there is +some great lord hiding in the fens beyond the round hill where Tone +and Parret join, that we call the Stane--somewhere by Long Hill, +they say. Now I mind that one day when the king rode with you +across the Petherton heights, he looked out over all the fens, and +called me and asked much of them. And when I told him what he +would, he said, 'Here is a place where a man might lie hid from all +the world if he chose.' So he laughed, and we rode on." + +"I mind it," said Heregar; "but it was many years ago." + +"I think he may be there, for our king weighs his words, and does +not forget. I held his horse at your door in Chippenham the other +day, and he spoke to me by name, and put me in mind of little +things for which he had laughed at me in those same old days. He is +a good king." + +So said Dudda, the rough housecarl; and it is in my mind that the +kindly remembrance would have wiped out many a thought of wrong, +had there been any. That is a kingly gift to remember all, and no +king has ever been great who has not had it; for it binds every man +to his prince when he knows that aught he has done is not +forgotten, so it be good to recall. + +So it came to pass that next day, very early, we rode away, taking +Harek and Kolgrim and this man Dudda with us, well armed and +mounted and full of hope, across the southward ridge that looks +down over the fens of the meeting of Tone and Parret, where they +are widest and wildest. No Danes had crossed them yet, and when I +saw what they were like I thought that they never could do so. + +And as I looked at the long chains of ice-bound meres and pools +that ran among dense thickets of alder and wide snow-covered +stretches of peat bogs, it seemed that we might search in vain for +one who would hide among them. Only the strange round hill on +Stanmoor seemed to be a point that might be noted on all the level, +though Dudda told us that there were many islets hidden in the +wooded parts. + +We went to the lower hills and then to the very edge of the +fenland, skirting along it, and asking here and there of the +cottagers if they knew of any folk in hiding in the islets. But +though we heard of poor people in one or two places, none of them +knew of any thane; and the day wore on, and hope began to grow dim, +save for Dudda's certainty that what he had heard was true. + +At last we came to a long spur of high ground that runs out into +the fen, about midway between Bridgwater and Taunton; and there is +the village they call Lyng, where we most hoped to hear good news. +The day was drawing to sunset, and we would hasten; so Heregar went +one way and I another, each to distant cottages that we saw. The +lane down which I and my two comrades rode seemed to lead fenwards, +and it was little more than a track, deep in snow and tree +bordered. The cottage we sought was a quarter mile away when we +left the thane, and as we drew near it we saw an old woman walking +away from it, and from us also. She did not seem to hear us when we +called to her; and, indeed, such was the fear of Danes that often +folk would fly when they saw us, and the faster because we called, +not waiting to find out who we were. + +Then from out of the cottage came another old woman, who hobbled +into the track and looked after the first, shaking her fist after +her, and then following her slowly, looking on the ground. She +never glanced our way at all, and our horses made no noise to speak +of in the snow. + +We drew up to her, and then I saw that she had a hammer in her +right hand and a broad-headed nail in her left. I wondered idly +what she was about with these things, when she stooped and began to +hammer the nail into the iron-hard ground, and I could hear her +muttering some words quickly. + +I reined up to watch her, puzzled, and said to Harek: + +"Here is wizardry; or else what is the old dame about?" + +"It is somewhat new to me," the scald said, looking on with much +interest; for if he could learn a new spell or charm, he was +pleased as if he had found a treasure. + +Then I saw that she was driving the nail into a footprint. There +were three tracks only along the snow--two going away from the +cottage and one returning. That which went and returned was made by +this old woman, as one might see from her last steps, which made a +fourth track from the door. + +"She is hammering the nail into her own footprint," I said, noting +this. + +Now she sang in a cracked voice, hammering savagely the while; and +now and then she shook her fist or hammer, or both, towards where +the other old dame had gone out of sight round a bend of the lane. + +Then she put her hand to her back and straightened herself with a +sort of groan, as old dames will, and slowly turned round and saw +us. + +Whereat she screamed, and hurled the hammer at Kolgrim, who was +laughing at her, cursing us valiantly for Danes and thieves, and +nearly hitting him. + +"Peace, good mother," I said; "we are not Danes. Here is earnest +thereof," and I threw her a sceatta from my pouch. + +She clutched it from the ice pool where it fell, and stared at us, +muttering yet. Then Harek spoke to her. + +"Mother, I have much skill in spells, but I know not what is +wrought with hammer and nail and footprint. I would fain learn." + +"Little know you of spells if you know not that," she said, having +lost all fear of us, as it seemed. + +"I am only a northerner," Harek said. "Maybe 'tis a spell against a +sprained ankle, which seems likely. I only know one for that." + +"Which know you?" she said scornfully; "you are over young to +meddle with such like." + +"This," said Harek. "It works well if the sprain be bathed with +spring-cold water, while one says it twice daily: + +"'Baldur and Woden +Went to the woodland; +There Baldur's foal fell, +Wrenching its foot.' + +"That is how it begins." + +Then the old woman's eyes sparkled. + +"Ay; that is good. Learn it me, I pray you. Now I know that you +have wizardry, for you name the old gods." + +"Tell me first what hammer and nail work in footprint." + +"Why, yon old hag has overlooked me," she said savagely. "Now, if +one does as I have done, one nails her witchcraft to herself +{xiii}." + +"Whose footprint does the nail go into?" Harek asked. + +"Why, hers surely. Now this is the spell," and she chanted somewhat +in broad Wessex, and save that Baldur's name and Thor's hammer also +came into it, I do not know what it all was. I waxed impatient now, +for I thought that Heregar might be waiting for us. + +But she and Harek exchanged spells, and then I said: + +"Now, dame, know you of any thane in hiding hereabouts?" + +Thereat she looked sharply at me. + +"I know nothing. Here be I, lamed, in the cottage all day." + +"There is a close friend of mine in hiding from the Danes somewhere +here," I said, doubting, from her manner, if she spoke the truth. +"I would take him to a safer place." + +"None safer," she answered. "What is his name?" + +Then I doubted for a moment; but Harek's quick wit helped me. + +"Godred," he said; for the name by which the king had called +himself once it was likely that he would use again. + +"I know of no thanes," she said, though not at once, so that I was +sure she knew somewhat more than she thought safe to tell. + +Then she was going, but Harek stayed her. + +"Yours is a good spell against the evil eye, mother," he said, "but +I can tell you a better." + +"What is it?" she said eagerly. + +"News for news," he answered carelessly. "Tell us if you know aught +of this thane, and I will tell you." + +"I said not that there was a thane." she said at once. + +"Nay, mother; but you denied it not. Come now; I think what I can +tell you will save you trouble." + +She thought for a little, weighing somewhat in her mind, as it +seemed, and then she chose to add to her store of witchcraft. + +"Yonder, then," she said, nodding to the dense alder thickets that +hid the river Tone from us, across a stretch of frozen mere or +flooded land. "I wot well that he who bides in Denewulf's cottage +is a thane, for he wears a gold ring, and wipes his hands in the +middle of the towel, and sits all day studying and troubling in his +mind in such wise that he is no good to any one--not even turning a +loaf that burns on the hearth before his eyes. Ay, they call him +Godred." + +Then my heart leaped up with gladness, and I turned to seek +Heregar; but he was coming, and so I waited. Then the dame +clamoured for her reward, which Harek had as nearly forgotten as +had I. + +"Mother," the scald said gravely, "when I work a spell with hammer +and nail, the footprint into which the nail is driven is of her who +cast the evil eye on me." + +"Why, so it should be." + +"Nay, but you drive it into your own," he said. + +She looked, and then looked again. Then she stamped a new print +alongside the nailed one, and it was true. She had paid no heed to +the matter in her fury, and when she knew that she turned pale. + +"Man," she cried, "help me out of this. I fear that I have even +nailed the evil overlooking fast to myself." + +"Ay, so you have," said Harek; "but it is you who know little of +spells if you cannot tell what to do. Draw the nail out while +saying the spell backwards, and then put it into the right place +carefully. Then you will surely draw away also any ill that she has +already sent you, and fasten it to her." + +"Then I think she will shrivel up," said the old witch, with much +content. "You are a great wizard, lord; and I thank you." + +"Here is a true saying of a friend of mine," said Heregar, coming +up in time to hear this. "But what has come to you, king? have you +heard aught?" + +Now when the old woman heard the thane name the king, before I +could answer she cried out and came and clung to my stirrup, taking +my hand and kissing it, and weeping over it till I was ashamed. + +"What is this?" I said. + +"O my lord the king!" she cried. "I thought that yon sad-faced man +in Denewulf's house was our king maybe, so wondrous proud are his +ways, and so strange things they hear him speak when he sleeps. But +now I am glad, for I have seen the king and kissed his hand, and, +lo, the sight of him is good. Ay, but glad will all the countryside +be to know that you live." + +Then I knew not what to say; but Heregar beckoned to me, saying: + +"Come, leave her her joy; it were cruel to spoil it, and maybe she +will never know her mistake." + +So we rode on, and Heregar called Dudda, asking him if he knew +Denewulf's cottage; while in the track stood the witch, blessing +her king as eagerly as she had cursed her gossip just now. + +"I know not the path, though I have heard of the cottage," Dudda +said; "but it will be strange if I cannot find a way to the place." + +He took us carefully into the fen for some way until we passed +through a thicket and came to the edge of a mere, and there were +five men who bore fishing nets and eel spears, which had not been +used, as one might suppose, seeing that the ice was nigh a foot +thick after the thaw and heavy frost again. + +And those two men who came first were Ethelnoth, the Somerset +ealdorman, and young Ethered of Mercia. It was strange to see those +nobles bearing such burdens; but we knew that we had found the +king. + +They saw us, and halted; but Heregar waved his hand, and they came +on, for they knew him. It would be hard to say which party was the +more pleased to meet the other. + +"Where is the king?" we asked. + +"Come with us, and we will take you to him," Ethered said. "But +supperless you must be tonight. We have nought in the house, and +nothing can we catch." + +Then I was surprised, and said: + +"Is it so bad as that here? In our land, when the ice is at its +thickest we can take as much fish as we will easily." + +"Save us from starvation, Ranald," said Ethered, laughing ruefully, +"and we will raise a big stone heap here in your honour." + +"Kolgrim will show you," I said; "let me go to the king." + +"I am a great ice fisherman," said Harek; "let me go also." + +Then Heregar laughed in lightness of heart. + +"Ay, wizard, go also. There will be charms of some sort needed +before Ethered sees so much as a scale." + +Whereon they dismounted, and Kolgrim took his axe from his saddle +bow, asking where the river was, while he wondered that such a +simple matter as breaking a hole in the ice and dropping a line +among the hungry fish, who would swarm to the air, had not been +thought of. We had not yet learned that such a winter as this comes +but seldom to the west of England, and the thanes knew nothing of +our northern ways. + +Then Ethelnoth led Heregar and me across twisting and almost unseen +paths, safer now because of the frost, though one knew that in some +places a step to right or left would plunge him through the crust +of hard snow into a bottomless peat bog. The alder thickets grew +everywhere round dark, ice-bound pools of peat-stained water, and +we could nowhere see more than a few yards before us; and it was +hard to say how far we had gone from the upland edge of the swamp +when the ground began to rise from the fen, and grew harder among +better timber. But for the great frost, one would have needed a +boat in many places. + +Then we came to a clearing, in which stood a house that was hardly +more than a cottage, and round it were huts and cattle sheds. And +this was where the king was--the house of Denewulf the herdsman, +the king's own thrall. There was a rough-wattled stockade round the +place, and quick-set fences within which to pen the cattle and +swine outside that, and all around were the thickets. None could +have known that such an island was here, for not even the house +overtopped the low trees; and though all the higher ground was +cleared, there were barely two acres above the watery level--a +long, narrow patch of land that lay southeast and northwest, with +its southerly end close to the banks of the river Tone. Men call +the place Athelney now, since the king and his nobles lay there. It +had no name until he came, but I think that it will bear ever +hereafter that which it earned thus. + +Two shaggy grey sheepdogs came out to meet us, changing their angry +bark for welcome when they saw Ethelnoth; and a man came to the +door to see what roused them, and he had a hunting spear in his +hand. I took him for some thane, as he spoke to us in courtly wise; +but he was only Denewulf the herdsman himself. + +"How fares the king?" asked Ethelnoth. + +"His dark hour came on him after you went," Denewulf answered; "and +then the pain passed, and he slept well, and now has just wakened +wonderfully cheerful. I have not seen him so bright since he came +here; and he is looking eagerly for your return, seeming to expect +some news." + +"It may be that our coming has been foretold him beforehand," said +Heregar. "Our king has warnings given him in his dreams at times." + +Then from out of the house Alfred's voice hailed us: + +"Surely that is the voice of my standard bearer. + +"Come in quickly, Heregar, for all men know that hope comes with +you." + +We went in; and it was a poor place enough for a king's lodging, +though it was warm and neat. Alfred sat over the fire in the middle +of the larger room of the two which the house had, and a strew of +chips and shreds of feathers and the like was round him; for he was +arrow making--an art in which he was skilful, and he had all the +care and patience which it needs. When we came in he rose up, +shaking the litter from his dress into the fire; and we bent our +knees to him and kissed his hand. + +"O my king," said Heregar, "why have you thus hidden yourself +from us? All the land is mourning for you." + +Then Alfred looked sadly at him and wistfully, answering: + +"First, because I must hide; lastly, because I would be hidden: but +between these two reasons is one of which I repent--because I +despaired." + +"Nay," said Denewulf, "it was not despair; it was grief and +anxiousness and thought and waiting for hope. Never have you spoken +of despair, my king." + +"But I have felt it," he answered, "and I was wrong. Hope should +not leave a man while he has life, and friends like these, and +counsellors like yourself. Now have I been rebuked, and hope is +given me afresh." + +Then he smiled and turned to me. + +"Why, Ranald my cousin, this is kindness indeed. I had not thought +that you would bide with a lost cause, nor should I have thought of +blame for you had you gone from this poor England; you are not +bound to her as are her sons." + +"My king," I said truly, "there are things that bind more closely +even than birth." + +I think he was pleased, for he smiled, and shook his head at me as +though to say that he could not take my saying to himself, as I +meant it. And then, before we could ask him more, he began to think +of our needs. + +"Here we have been pressed for food, friends, for the last few +days, and I fear you must fast with us. The deer have fled from our +daily hunting, and the wild fowl have sought open water. Unless our +fishers have luck, which seems unlikely, we must do as well as we +can on oaten bread." + +Then Ethelnoth said: + +"There have been no fish caught today, my king." + +"Why, then, we will wait till the others return; and meanwhile I +will hear all the news, for Ranald and Heregar will have much to +tell me." + +So we told him all that we knew, and he asked many questions, until +darkness fell. + +"Why are you here, lord king?" asked Heregar; "my hall is safe." + +"Your hall and countryside are safe yet because I am not there," +Alfred answered, fixing his bright eyes on the thane. "The Danes +are hunting for me, and were I in any known place, thither would +they come. Therefore I said that now I choose to bide hidden. +Moreover, in this quiet and loneliness there comes to me a plan +that I think will work out well; for this afternoon, as I slept, I +was bidden to look for a sign that out of hopelessness should come +help and victory." + +Just then the dogs rose up and whined at the door, as if friends +came; and there were cheerful voices outside. The door opened, and +in stumbled Ethered, bearing a heavy basket of great fish, which he +cast on the floor--lean green and golden pike, and red-finned +roach, in a glittering, flapping heap. + +"Here is supper!" he cried joyfully, "and more than supper, for +each of us is thus laden. Fish enough for an army could we have +taken had we not held our hands. I could not have thought it +possible." + +Whereat Alfred rose up and stared, crossing himself. + +"Deo gratias," he said under his breath, and then said aloud, "Lo, +this is the sign of which I spoke even now--that my fishers should +return laden with spoil, even for an army, although frost and snow +have prevented them from taking fish for many days, and today was +less likelihood of their doing so than ever." + +"Ranald knew well how this would cheer you, King Alfred," said +Ethered, thinking that I had spoken of this as a proof that all was +not lost, in some way. + +"Ranald said nought; but the sign came from above, thus," the king +said gravely. "In my dream the holy Saint Cuthberht stood by my +side, and reproved me sharply for my downheartedness and despair, +and for my doubt of help against the heathen; and when he knew that +I was sorry, he foretold to me that all would yet be well, and that +I should obtain the kingdom once more with even greater honour than +I have had--with many more wondrous promises. And then he gave me +this sign, as I have told you and, behold, it has come, and my +heart is full of thankfulness. Now I know that all will be well +with England." + +Then said Denewulf, who it was plain took no mean place with the +king and thanes: + +"Say how this miracle was wrought, I pray you, for it is surely +such." + +"Hither came King Ranald and his two friends and bade us make holes +in the ice and fish through them. So we did, and this is what came +thereof," said Ethered. + +"Therefore King Ranald and his coming are by the hand of God," said +Denewulf. "Therein lies the miracle." + +Then I was feared, for all were silent in wonder at the coming to +pass of the sign; and it seemed to me that I was most truly under a +power stronger than that of the old gods, who never wrought the +like of this. + +Then came Harek's voice outside, where he hung up fish to freeze +against the morrow; and he sang softly some old saga of the fishing +for the Midgard snake by Asa Thor. And that grated on me, though I +ever waited to hear what song the blithe scald had to fit what was +on hand, after his custom. Alfred heard too, and he glanced at me, +and I was fain to hang my head. + +"Ranald, who brought to pass the sign, shall surely share in its +bodings of good," he said, quickly and kindly. "I think that he is +highly favoured." + +Then in came my comrades, and they bent to the king, and he thanked +them; and after that was supper and much cheerfulness. Harek sang, +and Alfred, and after them Denewulf. Much I marvelled at the wisdom +of this strange man, but I never knew how he gained it. King Alfred +was ever wont to say that in him he had found his veriest +counsellor against despair in that dark time; and when in after +days he took him from the fen and made him a bishop, he filled the +place well and wisely, being ever the same humble-minded man that I +had known in Athelney {xiv}. + + + +Chapter X. Athelney and Combwich. + + +In the morning King Alfred took us to the southern end of his +island, and there told us what his plans were. And as we listened +they seemed to us to be wiser than mortal mind could have made, so +simple and yet so sure were they, as most great plans will be. It +is no wonder that his people hold that he was taught them from +above. + +He bade us look across the fens to the wooded heights of Selwood +Forest, to south and east, and to the bold spur of the Polden Hills +beyond the Parret that they call Edington. There was nought but fen +and river and marsh between them and us--"impassable by the Danes +who prowled there. Only at the place where the two rivers join was +a steep, rounded hill, that stood up strangely from the level--the +hill that they call the Stane, on Stanmoor; and there were other +islands like this on which we stood, unseen among the thickets, or +so low that one might not know of them until upon them. + +"Now," he said, "sooner or later the Danes will know I am here, +where they cannot reach me. Therefore I will keep them watching +this place until I can strike them a blow that will end the trouble +once for all. They will be sure that we gather men on the Quantock +side, whence Heregar can keep them; and so, while they watch for us +to attack them thence, we will gather beyond Selwood, calling all +the thanes from Hants and Wilts and Dorset and Somerset to meet me +on a fixed day, and so fall on them. Now we will build a fort +yonder on Stane hill that will make them wonder, and so the plan +will begin to work. For I have only told you the main lines +thereof; the rest must go as can be planned from day to day." + +Then he looked steadfastly at the Selwood heights, and added: + +"And if the plan fails, and the battle I look for goes against us, +there remain Heregar's places yet. Petherton, Combwich, and +Dowsborough are good places, where a king may die in a ring of +foes, looking out over the land for which his life is given." + +"We shall not fail, my king," said Heregar. "Devon will gather to +you across the Quantocks also." + +"Ay," he said; "and you will need them with you." + +Then said I: + +"Hubba is in Wales, and is likely to come here when he hears that +his fellows are gathering against us. Then will Devon be needed at +Combwich in Parret mouth, or at Watchet." + +"That will be Devon's work," the king said. "If Hubba comes before +your ships are ready to meet him, he must at least be driven to +land elsewhere, or our stronghold is taken behind us." + +Now I was so sure that Hubba would come, that this seemed to me to +be the weakest part of the king's plan. But Alfred thought little +of it. + +"My stronghold seems to be on Quantock side; it is rather beyond +Selwood, in the hearts of my brave thanes and freemen. Fear not, +cousin. Hubba will come, and you and Heregar will meet him; and +whether you win or not, my plan holds." + +Then I knew that the king saw far beyond what was plain to me, and +I was very confident in him. And I am sure that I was the only man +who had the least doubt from the beginning. + +Now, after all was planned, Heregar and I rode back to his place, +and sent word everywhere that the king was safe, though he +commanded us to tell no man where he lay as yet. None but thanes +were to be in the island with him; and from that time the name we +knew it by began, as one by one the athelings crossed the fen paths +thereto, and were lost, as it were, in the hiding place. + +Then we wrought there at felling timber and hewing, until we had +bridged the river and made a causeway through the peat to Stanmoor +hill, and then began to make a triple line of earthworks around its +summit. No carelessly-built fort was this, for the king said: "If +the nobles build badly, there will be excuse for every churl to do +the like hereafter. Therefore this must needs be the most +handsomely-wrought fort in all Wessex." + +There came to us at this fort many faithful workmen, sent from the +towns and countryside, until we had a camp there. But every night, +after working with us and cheering all with his voice and example, +Alfred went back to Athelney with us; and none would seek to +disturb him there, so that for long none quite knew, among the +lesser folk, where he bided. Presently the queen and athelings came +there to him, and were safe. + +That time in the fens was not altogether unpleasant, though the +life was hard. Ever was Alfred most cheerful, singing and laughing +as we wrought, and a word of praise from him was worth more than +gold to every man. And then there were the hunting, the fishing, +and the snaring of wild fowl, that were always on hand to supply +our wants, though now we had plenty of food from the Quantock side. +I know this, that many a man who was in Athelney with Alfred was +the better therefor all the days of his after life. Men say that +there is a steadfast look in the faces of the Athelney thanes, by +which they can be well known by those who note the ways of men. + +The frost lasted till February went out in rain and south winds. +And then the Danes began to gather along the southern hills, +watching us. By that time we had made causeways to other islets +from the fort, and the best of these was to Othery, a long, flat +island that lay to the east, nearer to the Polden Hills and +Edington. + +So one day the king sent for me as we wrought at the fort, and both +he and I were horny handed and clay stained from the work. I came +with spade in hand, and he leaned on a pick. Whereat he laughed. + +"Faith, brother king, now can I speak in comrade's wise to my +churls as you speak to your seamen. Nor do I think that I shall be +the worse ruler for that." + +Then he took my arm, and pointed to Edington hill. + +"For many nights past I have seen watch fires yonder," he said; +"and that is a place where I might strike the Danes well. So I +would draw them thither in force. Do you feel as if a fight would +be cheerful after this spade work?" + +Now I could wish for nothing better, and I said so. + +"Well, then," he went on, laughing at my eagerness, "go to +Ethelnoth, and take twenty men, and do you and he fall on that post +from Othery by night; and when you have scattered it, come back +into the fen. I would have you lose no men, but I would make the +Danes mass together by attack on some one point, and that as soon +as may be, before Hubba comes. I do not want to hold their place." + +Now that was the first of daily attacks on the Danish posts, at +different places along the Selwood and Polden hills, until they +thought that we wished to win Edington height, where we began and +annoyed them most often. So I will tell how such a raid fared. + +Good it was to lay aside pick and spade and take sword Helmbiter +again, and don mail and helm; and I made Harek fence with me, lest +I should have lost my sword craft through use of the weapons +whereby the churl conquers mother earth. But once the good sword +was in my hand I forgot all but the warrior's trade. + +So Ethelnoth and I and twenty young thanes went in the evening to +Othery island, and there found a fenman to guide us, and so went to +the foot of Edington hill just as darkness fell. The watch-fire +lights, that were our guide, twinkled above us through the trees +that were on the hillside; and we made at once for them, sending on +the fenman to spy out the post before we were near it. It was very +dark, and it rained now and then. + +When he came back to where we had halted, he said that there were +about twenty tents, pitched in four lines, with a fire between each +line; and that the men were mostly under cover, drinking before +setting watch, if they set any at all. + +So we drew nearer, skirting round into cover of some trees that +came up to the tents, for the hilltop was bare for some way. The +lighted tents looked very cheerful, and sounds of song and laughter +came from them, and now and then a man crossed from one to another, +or fed the fires with fresh wood, that hissed and sputtered as he +cast it on. + +"How shall we attack?" said Ethelnoth. + +"Why, run through the camp in silence first and cut the tent lines, +and then raise a war shout and come back on them. Then we may slay +a few, and the rest will be scared badly enough." + +Thereat we both laughed under our breath, for it seemed like a +schoolboy's prank. Well, after the long toil in the fen, we were +like boys just freed from school, though our game was the greatest +of all--that of war--the game of Hodur's playground, as we Norse +say. + +Then I said: + +"After we come through for the second time, we must take to this +cover, and so get together at some place by the hill foot. There is +a shed by a big tree that can be found easily." + +So we passed the wood, and our comrades chuckled. It was good sport +to see the shadows of the careless Danes on the tent walls, and to +know that they dreamed of nothing less than that Saxons were on +them. Four rows of tents there were, and there were twenty-two of +us; so we told off men to each row, and then made for them at a +moment when no man was about--hacking at the ropes, and laughing to +see the tents fall. It was strange to watch the shadows start up +and stand motionless, as the first patter of feet came and the +first blows fell, and then bustle, helpless and confused, with +savage shouts and curses, as the heavy canvas and skins fell in +upon them. + +Now we were through the camp, and the outcries were loud behind us. +Two or three tents did not fall, and from them the men swarmed, +half armed and startled, not knowing if this was not some sorry +jest at first; and then rang our war cry from the dark, and we were +back upon them. We were but two-and-twenty to a hundred, but they +knew not what was on hand, while we did; and so we cut through them +without meeting with any hurt. Two tents were on fire and blazing +high, and blackened men cut and tore their way out of them howling; +and I think that more than one Dane was cut down by his comrades in +the panic that fell on all. + +Yet even as we passed into the cover and went our way back towards +the fen, some bolder spirits began to rally, and a horn was blown. +But we were gone, leaving six slain and many more wounded among +them, while not one of us was scratched. + +They did not follow us, and we heard the clamour we had caused +going on for some time after we had gained the fen. Presently, too, +when we reached Othery, we saw a fire signal lit to call for help, +and we were well content. Doubtless those Danes waked under arms +all that night through. + +After that these attacks were seldom so easy, for the Danes kept +good watch enough; but they were ever the same in most ways. +Suddenly in the night would come the war cry and the wild rush of +desperate men on some Danish outpost, and before they knew what to +do we were away and into the fen again. We grew to know every path +well before long, and sometimes we would fall on small parties of +our foes when they were on the march or raiding the cattle, and cut +through them, and get back to our fastness. + +Once or twice we were followed in the grey of early morning; but +few Danes ever got back from that pursuit. We would cut them off +amid the peat bogs, or they would founder therein, and sink under +the weight of armour. + +Then they tried to force some fenmen they caught to guide them to +us at Othery. Once the brave fenman led them to where they dared +not move till daylight came, while the blue fen lights flitted +round them like ghosts in the dark; and then the fen people swarmed +round them, and ended them with arrows and sling stones from a +distance. They tried no more night attacks on us after that. But +again they came in some force by daylight, and we had a strange +fight on a narrow strip of hard land in Sedgemoor, with all +advantage on our side. No Danes won back to the Polden Hills. + +Then they dared not try the fens any more, and daily we kept their +sentries watching, and nightly we fell on outposts, until at last +they thought our force grew very great, and began to gather on +Edington hill, even as Alfred wished. And this saved many a village +and farm and town from plunder, for the fear of Alfred the king +began to grow among his foes. + +Then the king made his next move; for, now that the way was open, +he sent to Odda at Exeter, bidding him move up to Taunton by some +northerly road, gathering what Devon men he could on the way. There +is hardly a stronger town in Wessex than the great fortress that +Ine the king made. + +At this time I began to be full of thoughts about my ships. But +they could hardly be built as yet; and most of them were in +southern havens, whence, even were they ready, one could not bring +them round the stormy Land's End in early March. Yet the weather +was mild and open, and I began to think that at any time Hubba +might bring his Danes across the narrow Severn sea to join his +kinsmen at Edington. We heard, too, that Guthrum, the king of East +Anglia, was there now, and that he had summoned every warrior who +would leave the land he had won to come to him. + +Men have blamed Guthrum for treachery in this; but seeing that the +peace was broken, and that he must needs fight for the peace at +least of his kingdom, I hold that this is not right. At all events, +Alfred blamed him not in the time to come. Nevertheless, I suppose +that in men's minds he always will be held answerable for what the +other chiefs wrought of ill, because he bore the name of king from +the first, and ruled East Anglia. No Saxon, who is used to hold his +king as over all, will understand how little power a host-king of +the north has. + +Now all this while my good ship lay at Bridgwater, and with her +were fifty of my men, who were well quartered among the townsfolk, +and helped to guard the bridge. And, as I have said, two ships were +being built there. So one day in the third week in March I rode +away with Kolgrim from Athelney, to see how all things were going +on there, meaning also to go to Heregar's place for a time, having +messages to give him from the king. + +Harek was coming with me; but Alfred asked me to spare him for this +time. + +"I have to learn somewhat from the scald," he said. + +"Wizardry, my king?" I asked, laughing, for that was ever a jest at +the scald's expense after it was known how we found out that Alfred +was at Denewulf's house. + +"Nay, but song," he answered. "Now I see not why I should not tell +you who put the thought into my mind; but I am going, as you did, +to spy out the Danish camp. And I will go as a gleeman, and be +welcome enough as a Saxon who has enough love of Danes to learn +some northern sagas for them!" + +"My king," I cried, "this is too perilous altogether." + +He looked quaintly at me. + +"Go to, cousin; are you to have all the glory? If you went, why not +I? Maybe I too may find a chance of helping some fair maiden on the +way back." + +Then I prayed him to do nothing rash, for that he was the one hope +of England. + +"And maybe the one man in England who can do any good by going, +therefore," he answered. "And neither you nor I would ask any man +to do for us what we durst not do ourselves." + +"You will be known, my king," I said. + +Whereon he held out his hands, which were hard and horny now with +hard work, and he laughed as he did so. + +"Look at those," he said, "and at my unkempt hair and beard! Verily +I may be like Alfred the king in some ways, but not in these. They +will pass me anywhere." + +So I could not dissuade him, and ever as I tried to do so he waxed +more cheerful, and made sport of me, throwing my own doings in my +teeth, and laughing about Thora. So I was fain to get away from his +presence, lest I should grow angry at last. And when I was going he +said: + +"Have no fear, cousin; I will not go unless I am well prepared." + +So I went, and next day was back in Athelney, riding hard; for +Hubba's ships had been sighted from the Quantocks, and they were +heading for the Parret. What I looked for and feared was coming. + +Then Alfred sent messengers to Odda, who had come to Taunton two +days before this. And he gathered every man from the fen, and we +went to Bridgwater, leaving our little force there, and so rode on +the way to Combwich, thinking to see the sails of the ships in +Bridgwater Bay. But a shift of wind had come, and they were yet +over on the Welsh coast, waiting for the tide to enable them to +come down on us. + +By that time a fire burned on the highest spur of the Quantocks to +tell us that Odda was there, and at once another was lit on the +Combwich fort to bring him to us, for it seemed certain that here +we must fight the first battle of Alfred's great struggle. + +"Here you must meet this newcomer and drive him away, if it can be +done, or if not, hinder him from coming further; or if that is +impossible, do your best. I would have you remember that defeat +here is not loss of all hope, for beyond Selwood lies our real +gathering. But victory, even if dearly bought, will almost win the +day for us." + +So Alfred said, and we, who began to see what his great plan was, +were cheered. + +In the evening Odda came with eight hundred men of Devon. Alfred +had two hundred maybe, and my few men and the townsfolk made +another two hundred. But Hubba had twenty-three longships, whose +crews, if up to fighting strength, would not be less than a hundred +in each. + +So we watched till the tide fell, when he could not come into the +Parret, and then I went back to Heregar's hall. It seemed very +bare, for all goods had been sent up to the great refuge camp of +Dowsborough, to which all day long the poor folk had been flying, +driving with them their sheep and cattle and swine, that they might +save what they could. But with Odda had come his daughter, the Lady +Etheldreda, who would not leave him; and she and the Lady Alswythe +and Thora were yet in the house, and Osmund the jarl sat in the +hall, listless and anxious of face. It was an ill time for him; but +there were none of us who did not like him well, and feel for him +in his helplessness. + +"What news?" he said, when he saw me come into the hall. + +"Hubba will be here on the next tide--with early morning," I said. + +He sighed, and rising up went to the doorway and looked out to the +hills. + +"I would that I could make these two noble ladies seek refuge +yonder," he said; "but one will not leave her father, nor the other +her husband." + +Then I said: + +"At least I think you should take Thora there. This is a difficult +place for you." + +"I know Hubba," he said, "and if I abide here I may be of use. I +need not tell you that you are fighting the best warrior of our +time, and that with too small a force." + +"Well," I said, "you and I can speak plainly, neither of us being +Saxons. We shall be beaten by numbers, and you mean that you will +be able to save these ladies by staying?" + +"Ay," he said. "And if by any chance Alfred wins, I may be able to +ask for mercy for the conquered." + +Then came in Thora, and her face was troubled. She had been trying +to make Etheldreda go to the hill fort, where all the women and +children of the countryside had been sent. + +"It is of no use," she said; "they will bide here." + +"Well," said Osmund, "then we will stay also. I and our friend have +spoken thereof, and it seems well that we do so." + +I suppose they had talked of this before, for she made no answer, +but sat down wearily enough before the fire; and Osmund and I went +out to the courtyard, for we were both restless. + +Then Heregar came in on his white horse, and saw Osmund, and called +to him, asking of the same business, for he had asked the jarl to +speak about it as a friend. So I went in again, and Thora sat by +herself yet, looking up to see who came now. I went and stood by +her, staring into the fire, and feeling as if I wanted to go out +again. Restlessness was in the very air while we waited for the +coming fight. + +"King Ranald," she said, after a little silence, "I wonder if ever +a maiden was in such sad doubt as I. I cannot wish that these dear +ladies, who have made a friend of me, should see their folk beaten, +and maybe slain; and cannot wish that my own kin should be beaten +either. It seems that in either way I must find heavy sorrow." + +That was true; but it was certain that her own people were the +cause of all the trouble, though I could not say so. I put it this +way: + +"I think that if your people are driven off there will be peace the +sooner, and maybe they will not land when they find us waiting. I +know, too, that those who have loved ones in the battle that may be +are in a harder case than yours, dear lady." + +Then she looked up at me once, and a flush came slowly over her +pale face, and she answered nothing. I thought that she felt some +shame that a warrior like her father should bide here, without +moving hand or foot, when the war horns were blowing. So I said: + +"Harder yet would it be if the jarl were in the battle against our +friends. Then would the fear of his loss be a terror to you also." + +Now came in Osmund, and straightway Thora rose up, turning away +from us both, and went from the hall. The jarl looked after her +curiously and sadly. + +"This is a strange business for the girl," he said. + +"She seems almost as troubled because you are not fighting as if +you were in danger by doing so," I answered, with that thought +still in my mind. + +Thereat the jarl stared at me. + +"What has put that into your head?" he asked. + +I told him what she and I had said, adding that I feared I had +seemed to hint somewhat discomforting. + +Then said Osmund, looking in my face with a half smile: + +"She is glad I am honourably out of this business, and the trouble +is not that. There are one or two, maybe, whom she would like to +see as safe in the same way." + +Then it flashed through my dull mind that perhaps I was one of +these, and the thought was pleasant to me. + +"Well," I said, "there are the thane, and his young son, the king's +page, who is here. They have been very kind to her." + +"Also a wandering king who took her out of danger," he said then. + +"Ay; I shall be glad if she thinks of me." + +There were a little laugh and a rustling behind us, and one said: + +"Either you are the least conceited of men or the blindest, King +Ranald, or you would know what is amiss." + +I turned, and saw the Lady Etheldreda herself, and I bowed to her +in much confusion. + +"O you men!" she said. "Here you will let the poor girl break her +heart in silence, while you fight for glory, or somewhat you think +is glory, without a word to say that you care that she shall see +what you win. Of course she thinks of you, even night and day. How +else should it be, when you have been as a fairy prince to her?" + +Then I knew for myself that among all the wild life of Athelney and +the troubles of the king the thought of Thora had been pleasant to +me; but now I was confused, having the matter brought home to me +suddenly, and, as it were, before I was ready to shape all my +thoughts towards her. So all that I could say was foolish enough. + +"I am a poor sort of fairy prince, lady." + +"Ay," she said; "I am as good a fairy godmother, maybe. And perhaps +I should have said nothing--at this time. But, Ranald, the maiden +weeps for your danger, for, at the very least, she owes you much." + +Then I said, humbly as I felt: + +"That is more honour to me than I deserve." + +"That is for her to say," answered the fair lady, turning to where +Osmund had been. + +But he was now in the doorway, looking out again to the hills. So +she was silent, and I thought of somewhat. + +"There is none in this land or in any other--of whom I think as I +do of Thora," I said; "but my mind has been full of warfare and +trouble with the king. Now, if I may, I will ask for somewhat that +I may wear for her sake in the fight, and so she will know that I +think of her." + +"Now that is well said," answered Etheldreda. "But you must ask it +for yourself." + +Thereat I thought for a moment, and at last I said that I would not +do so. + +"If I might, I would ask you to gain this favour for me," I said; +"for I think that a parting would be very hard, as things have come +about." + +"You are a wiser man than I thought you, Ranald," she said; and so +she went from me, and I stayed by the fire, thinking thoughts that +were sweet and yet troublous, for beyond tomorrow's fight I could +not see. + +Then the lady came back, and with her she brought a little glove, +worn and shapely from the hand that it belonged to. + +"She bids me give this to her king and warrior," Etheldreda said. +"I did but tell her that you asked a token that she minded you." + +"It was well," I answered. "What said she?" + +"Nought at once. But her sadness went, and her face changed--ay, +but she is beyond any of us in beauty when her eyes light up in +that way--and she fetched this, and then said 'Say, if you think +that he will care to know it, that this is the glove wherein I rode +to Wareham.' + +"Do you care to know it, Ranald?" + +"Ay, with all my heart," I said. + +And so I put it very carefully under the broad, golden-studded +baldric of Sigurd's sword. And it would not stay there, and +Etheldreda laughed at me, and took a little golden brooch like a +cross that she wore, and pinned it through glove and baldric, +making all safe. + +"There," she said, "is a token from me also, though it was unasked. +Bear yourself well, Ranald, for our eyes are on you. If Hubba comes +indeed, we women folk will be in the fort." + +Then I said, being at a loss for words enough: + +"I would I had the tongue of Harek the scald, that I might thank +you for gift and words, my fairy princess." + +"I have half a mind to take it back for that fine saying," she +answered. + +And then she gave me her hand, and I kissed it; and she went from +me with her eyes full of tears for all the trouble that was on us, +though she had tried bravely to carry it off lightly. + +Then I would stay in the house no longer, but went out to the fort, +and sat down by the great Dragon banner of Wessex, Heregar's +charge, that floated there, and ate and drank with the other +chiefs, and waited. But my mind was full of what I had heard, and +the war talk went on round me without reaching my ears. + + + +Chapter XI. The Winning of "The Raven." + + +Now we none of us like much to speak of the fight that came next +morning, for it went ill enough. Yet we were outnumbered by twice +our force, for some more of the host beyond the fens made Alfred +send many of his men back to watch the crossing at Bridgwater. + +Hubba brought his ships up on the tide, and when he saw that we +were waiting for him, he made as if to go on up the river; and we +began to move from our position, thinking that he would go and fall +on the town. Then, very suddenly, he turned his ships' bows to the +bank at the one place where he saw that the land was high almost to +the river's edge; and before we knew that we must be there to stay +him, his men were ashore, and had passed the strip of marsh, and +were on a long, gentle rise that ends in Cannington hill and the +Combwich fort, half a mile away. + +We fought well for an hour, and then our men began to give on +either wing, for they were, as I would have it remembered, raw +levies that Odda had brought with him--valiant men and strong, but +with no knowledge of how to fight in line or how to hold together. +And when a force like that begins to go, it is ended. + +Hard fought we in the centre after that. There were the Athelney +thanes, and my fifty men, and Odda's Exeter and Taunton townsfolk, +who had fought before; but when the wings broke, Hubba's great +force of veterans lapped round us, and we had nought left us but to +cut our way out, and make the best retreat we could. My men shouted +as they struck, in our Norse way; but a deadly silence fell on the +Saxons, and I thought that, as they grew quiet, their blows became +ever more stern and fell, until at last even Hubba's vikings gave +way before the hard-set faces and steadfast eyes of the +west-country spearmen, whom no numbers seemed to daunt, and they +drew back from us for a space. + +Then we were clear of them, and at once Ethelnoth closed in on the +king, taking his horse's rein, and praying him to fly to +Bridgwater, where a stand could be made. And at last he persuaded +him, and they turned. Then fearing that this might set the example +for general flight, I spoke to Odda, and we shouted to the men to +stand fast and hold back pursuit; and so a guard of some fifty +thanes went with Alfred, and we faced the Danes even yet. + +They saw what was done, and roared, and charged on us; and we began +to retreat slowly, fighting all the way, up the long slope of land +towards the fort. But I saw Heregar's horse rear and fall, and the +banner went down, and I thought him slain in that attack. + +Presently they let us go. We won ever to better ground, and they +had to fight uphill; and then we gained the fort, and there they +durst not come. + +Then rode towards me a man in silver armour that was dinted and +hacked--shieldless, and with a notched sword in his hand. It was +Heregar. + +"I thought you slain, friend," I said gladly. + +"Would that I were! for my charge is lost; they have my banner," he +answered. + +"That may be won back yet," I said. "But there is no shame to you; +we were outnumbered by more than two to one." + +"I have borne it through ten battles," he said, and that was all; +but he put his face in his hands and groaned. + +Now I looked out over the field we had left, and saw the Danes +scattering in many ways. Some were going in a long line up the +steep hill beyond which the village lay, and over this line swayed +and danced the lost banner. There was a crowd of our men from the +broken wings gathered there--drawn together by the king as he fled, +as I knew afterwards; and I think the Danes bore our banner with +them in order to deceive them. I knew that the lane was deep and +hollow up which they must go, and there were woods on either side. + +Whereat I sprang up. + +"Thane," I said, "here is a chance for us to win back the banner, +as I think." + +He looked up sharply, and I pointed. + +"Let us ride at once into the wood, and wait for them to pass us. +Then, if we dare, we can surely dash through them." + +Kolgrim sat close to me, and our horses were tethered to a spear. +He rose up when he heard me speak, saying: + +"Here is more madness. But trust to Ranald's luck, thane." + +Then in a few more minutes we were riding our hardest towards the +wood. I heard Odda shout after us from the entrance to the fort as +we went, but we heeded him not. + +We edged up to the deep lane through the trees until we were so +near that we could almost see into it. The banner was at the head +of the column, and there were no mounted men with it. Hubba had +brought no horses with him from across the sea. + +Then we waited for a long minute, hearing the tramp of the coming +men, and their loud talk and laughter as they boasted of their +prize. They were going very carelessly. + +"If we get it," I whispered to the thane, whose eyes were shining, +"ride hard up the hill to our folk who are there." + +He nodded and then before us fluttered the folds of his treasure. +Instantly he spurred his great white horse, and leaped straight at +it into the lane, and after him on either side came Kolgrim and I. + +A great howl rose from the startled Danes, and I saw Heregar wheel +his horse and tear the banner from the man who held it, cutting +down another warrior who tried to catch his bridle. Then Helmbiter +was hard at work for a moment, and Kolgrim's axe rattled on a helm +or two; and we were away up the lane before the shouting and +confusion were over, none of the Danes knowing but that more of us +would follow from out the cover. + +One or two arrows, shot by men who found their wits sooner than the +rest, pattered after us, and we gained the hilltop and the great +cheer that went up from our few men who were there made the Danes +halt and waver, and at last turn back to the open again. + +We stayed on that hilltop for an hour. Then the Danes were coming +up in force, and there was no hope in staying, so we got back to +the fort before they could cut us off. + +Soon after this there was a general movement on the part of our +foes, and before evening we were surrounded on all sides by strong +posts, and it was plain that we were not to move from the fort. + +Now this is not very large, but it is very strong--the hill which +has been fortified being some two hundred feet high, and steep +sided as a house roof on all sides but the east, where the entrance +must needs be. But this again has outworks; and the road into the +ramparts from the long slope of Cannington hill to the southward +runs slantwise through them, so that the gap it makes in the first +line is covered by the second. And both upper and lower rampart go +right round the circle of the hilltop, and are very strong, having +been made by the British folk, who well understood such matters, +and had such fighters as the old Romans and our own forefathers to +deal with. Some parts of the works were of piled stones, and the +rest of earth, as the ground required. + +There is but one way in which that fort could be taken by force, as +I think, and that is by attacking on all sides at once, which needs +a greater force than would ever be likely to come against it. +Moreover, on one side the marshy course of the Combwich stream +would hinder any heavy onslaught. + +So inside these ramparts were we with some six hundred men, and +there we were watched by three times our number. There was a strong +post on Cannington hill, between us and Bridgwater; another--and +that the main body--between us and the ships, on a little, sharp +hill crest across a stony valley two bowshots wide that lay between +it and the fort; and so we were well guarded. + +At first this seemed of little moment, for we were to stay Hubba +before the place; and for a while there was nothing but rejoicing +over the return of the banner. Then I found there was no water in +the place, and that we had but what food each man happened to carry +with him. Presently that want of water became terrible, for our +wounded began to cry for it piteously. Maybe it was as well that we +had few with us, because the field was left in the hands of the +Danes. + +Up and down among those few went Etheldreda and Alswythe and Thora, +tending them and comforting them, where we had sent them--to the +highest point of the hilltop, inside the upper rampart; and I could +see the flutter of their dresses now and then from where I watched +beside Odda on the lower works. I had spoken to neither since we +came here. + +Towards dusk I spoke to Odda, and he gave me twenty men; and +gathering all the vessels of any sort that would hold water, we +climbed over the rampart next the marsh, and stole down to the +nearest pool and brought back all we could, using helms and +leathern cloaks and the like, for want of buckets. We got back +safely that time, and I sent the same men again, thinking that +there was no danger, and so not going myself. + +They got back, indeed, but with a party of Danes after them; and +but for our arrow flights from the earthworks, they would have had +to fight, and lose what they brought. After that Hubba knew what we +needed, and sent a strong picket to keep us from the marsh. + +So the night passed and we had some hopes that a force might come +to our help from Bridgwater in the morning, for it was possible +that the king would be able to gather men there. It was a slender +hope, though, for the host on Polden Hills had to be watched. + +All day we waited, and no help came; and with evening the last food +had gone. It had rained heavily, however, and the want of water was +past for the time. The Danes never moved from their places, waiting +to starve us out; and in the last light of evening a small party +came across the little valley from the main body, bearing a white +flag in token of parley. Hubba bid us yield, and our lives should +be spared. + +"It is good of Hubba to give us the chance of living a little +longer," answered Odda; "but we will wait here a while, so please +him." + +The Danes threatened us, and mocked, and so went back. We had no +more messages from their chief after that. + +That night we slept round the standard where it flapped on the +hilltop. The men watched, turn by turn, along the lower ramparts; +and the Danes were not so near that we could be surprised by them, +for there was no cover to hide their coming. Nestled under the +northwest rampart was a little hut--some shepherd's shelter where +the three poor ladies were bestowed. Osmund the jarl sat a little +apart from us, but all day and night he had been tending the +wounded well. Harek who, as befitted a scald, was a good leech, +said that the jarl knew almost as much of the craft as he. + +Now, in the early morning, when the light was grey, I woke, hearing +the rattle of arms and the quiet passing of the word as the men +changed guard, and I thought I would go round the ramparts; and +then Odda woke also. The rest slept on, for they had taken their +turns on watch--Heregar with his arm round the pole of the +standard, and his sword beneath his head. + +Odda looked at me as we sat up stiffly, and spoke what was in his +mind and mine also. + +"I have a mind to send Osmund to Hubba, and ask him to let the +women go hence. There is nought to eat today." + +"There is enough kept for them," I said; for Heregar had seen to +that, and none had grudged a share. + +"Ay," he answered; "but what are we to do? Are we to be starved +like rats here?" + +"There are the half-dozen horses," I said. + +"And nought to cook them withal. I would that the king would come." + +"It is in my mind that he cannot," I answered; "there has been some +move of the other host." + +Now that was true, for Guthrum's great following had suddenly swept +down towards Bridgwater, and that could not be left. They were +camped now at the foot of the hill, watching there as Hubba watched +us. + +Then some one came, stepping lightly, but with clank of mail, +towards us; and I glanced round, thinking that some message was +brought from the ramparts. Odda turned idly at the same time, and +he started up. + +"Ah!" he said, under his breath, "what is this?" + +A tall maiden, mail clad and bearing a broad-bladed spear, stood +beside us; and I thought her one of the Valkyrias--Odin's +messengers--come to us, to fight for us in some strife to which she +would lead us. I rose too, saluting. + +"Skoal to the shield maiden!" I said. + +"Skoal to the heroes!" she answered; and then I knew the voice, +though, under the helm and in the grey light, the face of the +ealdorman's daughter Etheldreda had been strange to me. And Odda +knew also. + +"What would you in this guise, my daughter?" he cried. + +"I think that I have come as Ranald thought--as a Valkyria to lead +you to battle," she answered, speaking low, that she might not wake +the tired warriors around her. "There is but one thing for us to +do, and that is to die sword in hand, rather than to perish for +want of food and water here." + +I know that this had been in my mind, and most likely in Odda's +also; but Alfred might come. + +"We wait the king," the ealdorman said. + +"No use," she answered. "One may see all the Polden Hills from this +place, and tonight there are no fires on Edington height, where we +have been wont to see them." + +Odda groaned. "My Etheldreda, you are the best captain of us all," +he said. + +Then suddenly Heregar rose up on his elbow from beside the +standard, crying strangely: + +"Ay, Father Eahlstan--when the tide is low. Somerset and Dorset +side by side. What say you, father--Somerset and Devon? Even so." + +The other sleepers stirred, and the lady turned and looked on the +thane, but he slept even yet. + +"Heregar dreams of the bishop he loved, and of the great fight they +fought yonder and won thirty rears ago," she said {xv}. + +"Worn out is the brave thane," said I. "Strange dreams come to one +when that is so." + +Then Heregar woke, and saw the maiden, and rose up at her side. + +"Dear lady," he asked, "what is this?" + +"Ranald thought me a Valkyria, friend; and I come on a Valkyria's +errand." + +"I had a strange dream but now," Heregar said, as if it dwelt in +his mind, so that he hardly heeded what Etheldreda answered him. "I +thought that Bishop Eahlstan stood by me as in the old days, and +minded me of words that I spoke long ago, words that were taught me +by a wise woman, who showed me how to trap the Danes, when the tide +left their ships aground, so that they had no retreat. Then he +said, 'Even again at this time shall victory be when the tide is +low.' And I said that Somerset and Dorset would fail not at this +time. Then said he, 'Somerset and Devon.' Then it seemed that he +blessed me and passed. Surely I think that he would tell us that +victory is before us." + +Now the other sleepers woke, and listened wondering. The light was +strong, and I looked away towards the Danes between us and the +river. Their fires were burning up one by one as they roused also; +but I thought there was some bustle down at the shore of the river, +where the ships were now afloat on the rising tide. + +Then Etheldreda spoke to us in words that were brave and good to +hear--words to make a man long to give his life for country and for +friends--telling us that, since we must needs die, it was well that +we should fall sword in hand, ridding England of her foes man to +man, rather than perish in this place for nought. + +And when she ended the chiefs were silent, looking on the Danes +with eyes that gleamed; and Kolgrim put the thoughts of all into +words when he said: + +"Once or twice has the Berserker fury come on me when my master has +been in peril. Berserker again will you drive me, lady, so that I +care not for six foemen against me or sixty." + +Then Odda cried: + +"What goes on yonder? Do they leave us?" and he shaded his eyes +against the rising sun, and pointed. Certainly the Danes were +drawing towards the ships in parties of twenty and thirty at a +time, but their sentries went on their beats without heeding them. +There was no movement, either, among those on the other hill, and +the Raven banner that told of Hubba's presence was not borne away. + +Now we forgot all but that here was a new hope for us, and we +watched for half an hour. Then it was plain that full half the +force was drawn off, and that the Danes were crossing the river in +the ships. We saw them land on the opposite shore, where the road +comes down to the Combwich crossing, that can only be used at +lowest tides; and they marched eastward, doubtless in search of +cattle and plunder. + +Then Heregar's eyes shone, and he said: + +"Now has our time come, even as Eahlstan foretold to me. In two +hours or three none of that force can return, and we have but half +as many again as ourselves left here for us to deal with." + +"Let me lead you on them," said Etheldreda. + +Then with one voice we prayed her to bide in the fort, and for long +she would not be persuaded. But we told her that the men would +fight as well under her eye as if they were led by her--if, indeed, +her presence did not weaken them, in fear for her safety--and so at +last she gave way. + +After that there was no more doubt as to what should be done; but +Odda went round among the men, and spoke to them in such wise that +he stirred their hearts to die bravely hand to hand with the Danes. +And I thought that some of us might live to see a great if +dearly-bought victory; for it was certain that not one of these +Saxons but meant to die before he left the field. + +Then Heregar and Osmund went with Etheldreda to the other two +ladies, and they bade them take the horses and fly to Dowsborough +camp as soon as the fighting drew every Dane to the eastward side +of the fort and left the way clear. Osmund would go with them, and +so no fear for them was on our minds. + +Then we got the soundest of the wounded down to the lower rampart, +and drew off the men there towards the gateway, so that the Danes +might think our movement was but a changing of guard; then we +waited until we saw that the ships on the far bank had taken the +ground. + +Then we sallied out, and as I went I looked back once. Three women +stood alone on the hilltop, and one waved to us. That was the +Valkyria, for her mail sparkled in the sun; but I had eyes only for +that one whom I thought I should not see again, whose little glove +was on my heart. + +Now, if we were desperate, Odda was not the man to waste any chance +of victory that there might be. We went swiftly up the long slope +of Cannington hill, and fell on the post there before they on the +main guard could reach them. There was no withstanding the terrible +onset of our Saxons; half that force was slain, and the rest were +in full flight in a few minutes. + +Then we went steadily down the hill to where Hubba himself waited +for us. His war horns were blowing, to call in every man who was +within hearing; and his men were formed in line four deep at the +foot of the spur on which their camp had been. + +Now, when I saw this I looked on our men, who were in column again; +and it seemed to me that the old Norse plan would be good, for it +was certain that on this field we meant to stay. + +"Ealdorman," I said, "while there is yet time let us form up in a +wedge and go through that line. Then shall we fight back to back, +and shall have some advantage. I and my men, who have axes, will go +first." + +Then my few vikings cried, "Ay, king!" and shouted; whereat Odda +laughed grimly. + +"Go on, Berserker--axes must needs lead--we will do it." + +Then we changed the ranks quickly, and I and Kolgrim and Harek made +the point of that wedge. Heregar and the banner were in the midst, +and Odda himself was not far behind me, putting his best men along +the two foremost faces of the wedge. + +"We shall not be foremost long," I said; "we shall be surrounded +when once we are through the line." + +But as we came on, Hubba closed up his men into a dense, square +mass. + +"Ho!" said Harek to me; "you are wrong, my king." + +Now we were close at hand, and the Danish arrows flew among us, and +the javelins fell pretty thickly. I think that a wedge bears this +better than any other formation, for it is easy to stop the weapons +that reach it. + +Our men were silent now, and I was glad, having known already what +that meant; but the Danes began to yell their war cries. Then we +were within ten paces of them, and I gripped shield and axe and +gave the word to charge, and Odda answered it. + +Then was such a terrible roar from the Saxons as I had never +heard--the roar of desperate men who have their foes before them, +more awful than any war shout. And at that even the vikings shrank +a little, closing their ranks, and then, with all the weight of the +close-ranked wedge behind me, we were among them, and our axes were +at work where men were driven on one another before us; and the +press thinned and scattered at last, while the Danes howled, and +for a moment we three and a few lines behind us stood with no +foemen before us, while all down the sides of the wedge the fight +raged. Then we halted, and the Danes lapped round us. I do not know +that we lost more than two men in this first onset, so heavy was +it; but the Danes fell everywhere. + +Now began fighting such as I had heard of, but had never seen +before. The scalds sing of men who fought as fights a boar at bay +in a ring of hounds, unfearing and silent; and so fought we. My axe +broke, and I took to sword Helmbiter, and once Kolgrim went +Berserker, and howled, and leaped from my side into a throng which +fell on us, and drove them back, slaying three outright, and +meeting with no hurt. + +Our wedge held steady. Men fell, but we closed up; and there grew a +barrier of slain before us. I had not seen Hubba since we first +closed in, and then he had been a little to the right of where we +struck his line, under a golden banner, whereon was a raven +broidered, that hung motionless in the still morning air. + +Presently the Danish onslaught slackened. Men were getting away +from their line to the rear, worn out or wounded, and the hill +beyond them was covered with those who had fallen out. They had +beaten against our lines as one beats on a wall--hewing out stones, +indeed, but without stirring it. They had more hurt than we. + +Odda pushed to my side, and said to me: + +"What if we advance towards the hill crest?" + +"Slowly, then," I said. + +He passed the word, and we began to move, and the Danes tried to +stay us. Then their attack on the rear face of the wedge slackened +and ceased, and they got round before us to fight from the higher +ground. At once Odda saw that an attack in line as they wavered +thus would do all for us, so he swung his hard Devon levies to +right and left on us Norsemen as the centre--maybe there were +twenty of us left at that time--and as the wings swung forward with +a rolling cheer, the Danes crumbled away before them, and we drove +them up the little hill and over the brow, fighting among the +half-burnt watch fires and over heaps of plunder, even to where the +tall "Raven" drooped from its staff. + +Then I saw the mighty Hubba before me; and had I not known it +already, one might see defeat written in his face as he looked +across to his ships. His men were back now, and stood on the far +shore, helpless. Then was a cheer from our left, and he looked +there, and I looked also. + +Out of the fort came our wounded--every one who could put one foot +before another--a strange and ghastly crowd of fifty or sixty men +who would yet do what they might for England. And with them was a +mixed crowd of thralls and village folk, bearing what arms they +could find on the place whence we drove the first Danes, and forks, +and bill hooks, and heavy staves. + +I do not know if the Danes saw what manner of force came to our +help; but I think they did not. Many broke and fled to the ships; +but Hubba's face grew hard and desperate, and he cried to his men +to stand, and they gathered round him and the Raven banner. + +Once again our great wedge formed up, and again charged into the +thick of the Danes. Then I faced the great chief, and men fell back +from us to see what fight should be. But from beside me came Odda. + +"My fight, Ranald," he said, and strode before the Dane. + +His sword was gone--the hilt and three inches of blade hung from +his wrist--and his shield was notched and gashed. His only weapon +was the broad-bladed Saxon spear, ashen shafted, with iron studs +along its length below the head. He was a head shorter than the +Dane, who was, in truth, the most splendid warrior I had ever seen; +and he bore a broad axe, wedge beaten and gold inlaid. There was +not much to choose between his shield and Odda's, but I thought the +spear the weaker weapon. + +"Axe against spear," said Harek; "here is somewhat of which to +sing." + +Once Odda feinted, lunging at Hubba's face; and the Dane raised his +shield a little, but did not move else, nor did his eyelids so much +as flinch, and his steady look never left his foe's face. Then, as +Odda recovered, the great axe flashed suddenly, and fell harmless +as its mark sprang back from its sweep; while like light the spear +point went forward over the fallen axe, that recovered too slowly +to turn it, and rang true on the round shield that met it. + +I had not thought much of spear play until now, for we think little +of the weapon. + +Again the Saxon lunged, and Hubba hewed at the spear shaft, +splintering it a little as the quick-eyed spearman swung it away +from the blow. Then the butt was over Odda's left shoulder, and +before one could tell that its swing aside had ended, forward flew +the point, darting from left to right over Hubba's arm that had not +yet recovered from the lost axe blow, and behind the shield's rim. +That blow went home, and the mighty Dane reeled and fell. + +One moment's silence, and then a howl from the Danes who watched, +and they flew on us, bearing us back a pace or two. Odda went down +under the rush that was made on him, and I called to my comrades, +and stood over him, and beat them back. But Hubba's fall was the +end. + +Even as I stood there, there came a rash of men from our ranks past +me; and I cheered, for I saw Heregar's silver mail driving straight +for the Raven standard, at the head of the young thanes who were +the shield wall of the Dragon of Wessex. Then, too, closed in the +wounded men and the country folk; and the Danes broke and fled +towards the ships in disorder. We followed for a little way, and +then the thralls ended matters. They say that not one Dane reached +the river's bank, beyond which their comrades watched and raged, +powerless to help them. + +I went back to where Odda had fallen, and at that time there rose a +thundering cheer of victory from our wearied line, and helms were +cast into the air, and weapons waved in wild joy. That roused one +who lay before me, and white and shaking, up rose Odda from among +the slain. I went to him, and got my arm round him; and again the +men cheered, and little by little the colour came back to his face. + +"I thought you slain outright," I said; "are you much hurt?" + +"I cannot tell," he said. "I believe I am sound in limb, but my +wind is gone. It is ill for a stout man to have mail-clad Danes +hurled on him by heavy-handed vikings." + +So he said, gasping, but trying to laugh. And, indeed, he was +unwounded, save for a cut or two, and he still grasped his red +spear in his right hand. + +Now I looked on our men, and saw that we might not bide for another +fight. Already some whom the wild joy of battle had kept strong in +spite of wounds were falling among their comrades, and it seemed to +me that wounds were being bound up everywhere. + +But there was a token of victory that made these seem as nothing. +In the midst of all Heregar stood with the Dragon banner, and by +his side his son-in-law, Turkil the thane of Watchet, bore the +captured "Raven." + +Harek the scald looked at it once, and then went to its heavy +folds, and scanned carefully the runes that were thereon. + +"Ho, comrades!" he cried joyfully, "here is a winning that will be +sung of long after our names are forgotten. This is the magic Raven +that was wrought with wizardry and spells by the daughters of +Ragnar Lodbrok. Ill will this news fall on Danish ears from end to +end of England. This is worth two victories." + +"I have seen it many times before," said Heregar; "nor is this the +only time that I have tried to win it. But never before have I seen +it hanging motionless as it hung today. There seems to be somewhat +in the tale they tell of its flapping foreboding victory." + +"Ay," said Odda. "Today they despised us, and bore it not forward; +therefore it flapped not, seeing that there was no wind where it +hung." + +The ealdorman called us together then, and pointed to the Danes who +were massed beyond the river. + +"Now it is time for us to go. We have won a good fight, and some of +us are yet alive. It will not be well to lose all by biding here to +be slain to the last man now. Shall we go to Bridgwater or to the +Quantocks, and so to Taunton?" + +Then Heregar said: + +"To the hills; for we should be penned in Bridgwater between this +force and the other. I think that while we are yonder they will not +do much on this side the Parret; and men will ever gather to us." + +Then we took our wounded and went back to the fort--four hundred +men out of six hundred who sallied out, where we thought that none +would return. But how many Danes we left on the field it is hard to +say. Some say six hundred, and some more; and it may be so. Their +graves are everywhere over the hill where they fell. When the tide +rose we were gone; and Hubba's men sought the body of their chief, +and raised a mound over it. But they had no mind to stay on our +side of the river, and they went to the Polden Hills, and laid the +land waste far and wide, even to holy Glastonbury, until they +joined Guthrum's force at Edington. + +Now one may know in what wise Etheldreda the brave shield maiden +met us, as we came back from that hard-won field, with words of +praise and thanks. But Thora stood not with her as we passed +through the fort gates, where she waited on the rampart with the +Lady Alswythe. Nor had she watched the fight at all, being torn +with sorrow and fear alike. + +I found her presently, while the men made litters whereon to bear +our wounded to safety, having cleansed the stains of war from my +armour. King Harald's mail had kept me from wound worth +notice--though, indeed, I hardly know how it was that I was unhurt +thus. Kolgrim would not use his arm for many days, and Harek was +gashed in arm and thigh also. + +When Osmund heard my tread, he started up from where he sat beside +Thora, looking away towards the hills to which we were going, and +greeted me warmly. + +"It was a good fight, Ranald, and well won," he said. + +Then Thora turned slowly, and looked at me fearfully, as if she +feared me. I was grieved, and would have gone away; but she drew +nearer, and the fear went from her eyes when she saw that I was +safe, knowing little of what I had been through. And at last she +smiled faintly, saying: + +"King Ranald, they say my warrior has fought well." + +"It had been strange had I not, Thora," I said. + +"I think I should have hated my own kin had you fallen," she said +then. + +"Ay," said Osmund, "war sees strange chances, and a man's thoughts +are pulled in many ways. Many a time have I seen Dane fight with +Dane on the old shores; and I can welcome a victor heartily, even +if it is my own kin who have been beaten. Presently we Danes will +fight for our new homes in England against such a landing from +beyond seas as you have met." + +There was some scratch on my shield arm that drew Thora's eyes at +this time, and as the jarl spoke she came quickly to me, taking +some light scarf she had from her dress at the same moment. + +"You are hurt," she said; "though it is little. Let me bind it for +you." + +I suffered her to do so, saying nothing, but smiling at her, while +the colour came brightly into her face as she wrought. The jarl +smiled also, turning away presently as some new shouting came up +from the fort gateway, where men welcomed those who bore back the +spoils from the slain. + +Then Thora had finished, and I put my arm round her and kissed her +once. + +"My lady," I said, "it was worth the wound that you should tend +it." + +And so she looked up at me frankly, and we knew well what had grown +up between us since the day when we had ridden together into +Wareham streets. + + + +Chapter XII. Edington Fight. + + +Now after this we held the great Dowsborough fort on Quantocks for +a few days, looking out over the land that should see the greatest +deeds of Alfred, the wise king, from Glastonbury in the east to the +wide stretches of the great wood, Selwood Forest, beyond the +Stanmoor fens; and there, in the clear air, and with plenty of good +provender from the smiling Taunton vale behind us, we grew strong +again. + +The Danes marched on Bridgwater, and the garrison must needs leave +the place and retreat to the heights at Petherton, and there hide. +I was grieved that my good ship was in Danish hands, but at least I +knew that they would not harm her; and such was our faith in Alfred +the king, that I believed that I should have her back. Old Thord +came up to us when his charge was thus lost. + +"Maybe they will finish painting her, and we shall be able to +launch her, when we go back, without more trouble," he said. "Two +of Hubba's ships, moreover, are worth having." + +Then the king rode up to us, and told us that we had done well, and +that the great plan yet held. Already he had messengers out +throughout all the southern counties, and already men were +gathering through the land and filling the towns that the Danes +were leaving. + +"When I know that the Danes have their eyes fixed on Quantock side +again, I shall strike," he said. + +So began again the life in Athelney and at Stanmoor fort; but now +the Devon men gathered openly on our hills, and every day the +Danish force grew also. When the last fight came, there would be an +end to either one side or the other, and Guthrum knew it. + +Once in that time I rode with Alfred, and saw Neot again; and if it +were but for a few hours that we might stay with him, he found time +to speak with me, asking if I had learned aught of his faith as +yet. + +"I have been in Athelney," I answered, "and I saw what might the +holy Name has at Chippenham. The old gods have passed from me." + +Little have I said of this, for one cannot speak of inmost +thoughts; but so it was. Yet I think that, had I been older, the +old faith would have died more slowly from my mind. So it was also +with Harek the scald, but I think that he was Christian in heart +before I had bent my mind to the matter in earnest. Long talks had +he with Denewulf, the wise herdsman, while I listened. + +So holy Neot rejoiced greatly over us, bidding me seek baptism at +once. + +"Nay, father," I said; "I fear it, knowing what it is. Let me bide +for a time till I am stronger in these deep things." + +He tried to persuade me gently, but at last let me be, knowing that +I spoke in earnest and with all wish to seek it rightly. + +So we left him on the day after we came, and went back to Athelney, +and Alfred was very silent all the way. + +"What ails you, my king?" I asked him at last, fearing that his +pain, which had left him of late altogether, might return. + +"I will tell you, cousin," he said. "Plainly has Neot shown me that +all these troubles have come from my own pride and self will when +first I was king. It is a long chain of happenings, of which you +would know nought were I to try to tell you. But so it has been, +and I weep therefor in my very heart." + +Then said I: + +"What is past is past, King Alfred, and best friend. Look on to the +days to come, for I think that there shall rise a new and happier +England before the winter comes again. There is no man whom I have +met in all the hosts in whose heart is not love and best thoughts +of you. Old days are forgotten as if they had never been, save that +you led and conquered in the great battles beyond the Thames." + +He held out his hand to me, and took mine and gripped it, saying no +word, and riding on in silence for a mile and more. And after that +he was of good cheer again till we came to Exeter, and there I +stayed to see how fared my ships, for it was time they were in the +water again. + +Well had my men and the Saxon wrights wrought at building. If all +went like this, King Alfred would have a fleet that could sweep the +seas from Dover to Orme's Head, and keep his land from new +plunderers at least. + +In a week I came back to Athelney, and there was good cheer, and +all were in the best of heart, for things went well. Messengers +came and went across the winding paths from the southern hills, and +Ethered met me laughing, and said: + +"The king has robbed you of your glory, Ranald. He has been into +the Danish camp--even to the presence of Guthrum himself." + +Then I would hear of this from Alfred himself. + +"Ay," he said, when he had greeted me and heard that the ships were +almost ready, "I have outdone you; for I have played the gleeman as +I planned, and have been in the midst of them yonder on Edington +hill." + +"It was an awesome risk to run, my king," I said. + +"Which you taught me yourself, cousin. Howbeit I met no damsel, and I +had no companion to return with but him with whom I went--Heregar's +young son, my page. Thane is he now by right of unfearing service. +Once, when I climbed the hill, I began to fear greatly, and I stayed, +and asked the boy if he was afraid to go on. Tell me truly, Ranald, +did you fear when you were in Wareham?" + +"Truly I feared at first," I answered; "but since I was there when +it came on me, I must even go through with the business. So it +passed." + +"Well, I am glad you confess it," he answered, "for I was minded to +turn and run when the first lights of the great camp showed through +the trees. Then the boy answered me, 'My king, why should I fear +when you are with me?' I was ashamed, and took Harek's harp from +him--for he carried it--and went forward boldly, singing the song +of Gunnar in the snake pit. And it seemed to me that Harek would +have chosen that song as fitting my case; for, putting Danes for +snakes, I was in a close place enough. The warriors came out when +they heard me; and I was well treated, and listened as I drank. +Many things I learned." + +Now I cannot believe that Alfred feared at all. He was surely but +anxious, and took that feeling for fear. So think all his people. + +"It seems that they thought I sang well," he went on; "so they took +me to Guthrum. He indeed looked sharply at me once, and maybe +twice; but I went on singing Harek's songs, and paid no heed to +him. Presently he gave me a great horn of ale from his own table, +and this gold bracelet that I wear also, and sent me away. Then I +went about the camp and heard the talk. One man asked me if I had +seen Alfred, and what he was like. 'Faith,' said I, 'men say I am +like him.' Whereat they laughed long at me and at the king also. +Then heard I the truth about my own looks for once. I had some +trouble in getting away, but at last I seemed to wax hoarse, and so +made as if I would go to Bridgwater, and left them, promising to +come again. Ay, and I will keep my promise," he said; "but as +Harek's heathen songs say, it is the sword's mass that I will sing +to them." + +Then his eyes glowed, and he was silent, and I wondered at the +courage and resource in the slight figure that was before me. + +"All goes well, and the plan is good," he went on directly. "They +look for some easily-beaten attack from this side of the Parret, +and at the first sign thereof will leave Edington height for the +level ground below, as they did when Hubba came. Then when they +turn, on Edington hill will be our levy suddenly--a levy of which +they have not dreamed. And there will be the greatest fight that +England has seen yet, and after that there will be a Saxon overlord +of England against whom none will dare rise." + +"May it be so, my king," I answered. + +"It will be so," he said. "Here in this cottage have I had the word +that tells me thereof; and you, Ranald, brought the sign that made +the word sure to me." + +I minded it, and I knew that for all my life my ways were bound to +the service of Alfred the king; for my fate was linked with his, as +it seemed, from my first coming. + +It was not long now before the day came that will never be +forgotten; for word was brought in from every quarter that thanes +and freemen and churls alike would not be behind when Alfred gave +the word, and he sent back to bid them meet him at Ecgbryht's +Stone, beyond Selwood, on Whitsunday. There is a great and strong +camp there on a rocky hill that looks out far and wide, near the +two great roads, British and Roman, that cross in the vale beneath; +and to that all were to gather, for there would the Golden Dragon +be set up. Men call it White Sheet Castle. + +On the day before I rode to Odda, who had already drawn his men to +the Petherton ridge above Bridgwater, and told him what the king's +word was. Then I went on up the long side of the Quantocks, and +spoke in the Maytime woods with Thora, telling her--for she was a +warrior's daughter, and was worthy of a warrior's love--that I must +be at the king's side. And so she bade me fight bravely, speaking +many noble and loving words to me, until I must go. Then I led her +back to Osmund in his place among the rough huts within the wide +circle of the camp ramparts, that now held but a few poor folk from +the Parretside lands. + +"King Alfred makes some new move," I said to him, "and it is +possible that we may not meet again. I think that what is coming +will end all the trouble between Saxon and Dane." + +He shook his head. + +"Some day it will end," he said, "but not in my time or yours--not +until the Danes have grown to know that England is their home, and +that they are English by birth and right of time--maybe not till +Denmark has ceased to send forth the sons for whom she has no place +in her own borders." + +Then I answered that perhaps he was right. I did not see into +things as far as he, and I was a stranger in the land. + +"But this at last will give a strong overlord to England," I said. + +"Ay, for the time. So long as a strong king rules, there will be +less trouble indeed; but if Alfred's sons are weak, it will begin +afresh. England will no longer bear two kings; and while there is a +Saxon kingdom alongside a Danish, there cannot be lasting peace." + +Then I said: + +"What of yourself? Shall you go back to Guthrum when this is over?" + +"I cannot tell," he answered. "What my fate is I know not yet. What +mean you to do if all goes well for Alfred? Shall you bide in +England?" + +We had walked apart now, and were looking over all the fair +Quantock vale beneath us. I think there is no fairer lookout in all +England: land and river and hills and sea, and beyond the sea the +blue mountains of the Welsh coast--ever changing and ever beautiful +under sun and cloud and flying shadows. + +"I have found the fairest land under the northern sun," I said; +"and I have found the best king, as I think. I shall bide here. One +other thing I have found of which I hardly dare to think, so many +are the chances of wartime. Yet, jarl, but for them I should not +have met with Thora, though in my heart I believe that I should not +have spoken to her yet." + +"I would not have had it otherwise," he said, kindly taking my arm. +"I have seen what was coming long before Etheldreda spoke. It has +been good for Thora that she did so, whatever befalls." + +Then we spoke of my promised place with the king, as if his victory +were certain. Indeed, I believe that we both had no thought of its +being otherwise. + +"I do not know, however," said Osmund, "if your taking a Danish +wife will be well received. It may be likely that Alfred will wish +you to be bound to him by some tie of that nearness which shall be +of his making." + +I had not thought of that, but it was a thing that was common +enough. Harald Fairhair was wont to give a rich wife to some chief +whom he would keep at his side. + +"If that is so, I shall go hence," I said. "There are things that +come before friendship." + +"Well," he answered, "we shall see. There is always a place for us +both at Rolf's side in his new-won land." + +"Yet I should be loth to leave Alfred," I said most truly. "I think +that this is the only thing that would make me do so." + +"Thora would not stand in your way to honour with him, nor would +I," said Osmund. + +"Honour with Alfred shall not stand in my way, rather," I answered. +"But we speak of chances, as I think." + +We said no more, and he bade me farewell. + +I went back to Alfred somewhat sad, and yet with many thoughts that +were good and full of hope; and soon I had little time to do aught +but look on at the way in which the king's plans worked out most +wonderfully. + +On the eve of the great Whitsunday festival we set out through the +fen paths southward to the hills and the first woodlands of Selwood +Forest, and when the morning came we were far in its depths, +passing eastward towards the place where we were to meet the levy. + +Presently we turned aside to a little woodland chapel that had +escaped the sight of the Danes, and from a hut beside it came out +an old priest, white-bearded and bent with age and scanty fare. At +first he feared that the heathen had found him at last; yet he +looked bravely at us, catching up the crucifix that hung at his +side and clasping it in both his hands as he stood in the open +doorway of his church, as if to stay us from it. + +Alfred rode forward to him when he saw his fear. + +"Father, I am Alfred the king," he said. "Far have I ridden on this +holy day. Now I would fain hear mass and have your blessing before +we go on." + +Thereat the old priest gave thanks openly to the King of kings, who +had brought Alfred again into the land, and hastened to make ready. +So that was the king's Whitsuntide mass, and we three heathen and +our few men must bide outside while the others went into the holy +place and returned with bright faces and happy; for this was a +service to which we might not be admitted, though all knew that we +would be Christians indeed ere long. + +So at last we came to the ancient castle, and saw the valley to +north and east beneath its height, bright everywhere with sparkling +arms that gleamed from lane and field and forest glade, as all +Wessex gathered to meet their king. + +Then the Golden Dragon that we had lost and won was unfurled; and +the war horns blew bravely enough to wake the mighty dead whose +mounds were round about us; and soon the hillside was full of men +who crowded upwards and filled the camp and ramparts and fosse, so +that before sunset Alfred had a host that any king might be proud +to call his own. Yet he would call it not Alfred's force, but +England's. + +Standing on the old ramparts, he spoke to them, while all the great +gathering was silent. And the words he said sank into the heart of +every man who heard, so that he felt as if on his arm alone it +rested to free England, and that his arm could not fail. Not long +did the king speak, but when he ended there rose a cheering that +was good to hear, for it came from hearts that had been made strong +to dare aught that might come. + +After that he spoke to the thanes, giving each one his place, and +telling them all that he had planned, so that each knew what was +looked for from him. It seemed that he had forgotten nothing, and +that the day must go as he said he thought it would. + +Men slept on their arms that night, without watch fires, lest any +prowling Danes should see that somewhat was on hand, although +Guthrum had drawn to him every man from out of Wessex, as was said, +and as seemed true. I have heard tales from some that in the night +the warriors who lie resting in the mounds around their old +stronghold came forth and wandered restless along the ramparts, +longing to take their part again in the mighty struggle they knew +was coming. I saw nothing, but Harek the scald says he saw. + +Next day we marched towards our foes. Eighteen miles we went, and +then came to the holy place Glastonbury, where the burnt ruins +spoke again, as it were, to the warriors of wrong and cruelty to be +avenged. + +There we were, but eight miles from the foe, and that night we lay +in a great meadow they called Iglea, deep down in the folds of the +hills, where even so great a host might be hidden for many days if +no chance betrayed them. Alfred took a few of us when night came, +and climbed the steep tor above Glastonbury town. Thence we could +see the long line of fires on Polden Hills that marked where the +Danes slept, all unknowing that any host could be gathered in their +rear. + +In the grey of morning we set our ranks in order. I was with +Alfred, with Ethered of Mercia and Ethelnoth, and more nobles whom +I knew; and my few men were in the shield wall, among the best +warriors of the Saxon levies. None grudged that honour to those who +had made the point of the wedge that broke Hubba's ranks and won +the Raven banner. + +Now, in our Norse land there is ever sacrifice to the Asir when one +leads a host to battle, that luck may be on the right side; and now +I was to see a more wondrous thing than even that. I knew by this +time the meaning of what I saw, and there crept into my heart a +wish that I might take full part therein with Alfred, who had +taught me. + +When all the ranks were ordered, and the deep columns were drawn up +on Iglea meadows in three sides of a square, there came a little +train of robed monks, at whose head was Bishop Sigehelm of +Sherborne, before whom went a tall gilded cross. Careworn and +anxious looked the good fathers, for there was not one of them who +had not a tale of Danish cruelty and destruction to tell, and more +than one had hardly escaped with his life; but now their faces were +brighter with new hope as they came into the open side of the armed +square and waited for a moment. + +Alfred and we stood before them, and the bishop raised his hand. At +that we all knelt, with a strange clash and rattle of arms that +went round the great host and ceased suddenly, so that the +stillness was very great. + +Then was only the voice of the bishop, who in a clear tone spoke +the words of peace to those who should pass hence in the coming +battle, that they might fight bravely, and even rejoice in death. + +So he shrived the host, and at the end they said "Amen" in one +voice. + +Thereafter the bishop prayed to the Lord of hosts--not such a +prayer as I had been wont to hear, but more wonderful, and with no +boasting therein, nor, as it were, any hate of the foe, but rather +the wish that the strife should make for peace, and even blessing +to them. + +Then he lifted his hand and blessed all the host as they bared +their heads, and again the last word rolled deep and strong round +the ranks, and that was all; then Alfred cried cheerily to his men, +and we began our march that must needs end in battle. + +There is a great road that climbs up the slope of the Polden Hills +from Glastonbury and then runs along their top to Edington and +beyond, and by this way we went, among pleasant woodlands. +Guthrum's own place was on the spur of Edington, because thence one +looks out on all the land that Alfred held, from the fort at Stane +hill to Bridgwater and Combwich and the sea beyond. That was only +eight miles from us, and was the point which we would win. Thence +to Bridgwater is five miles, and the town was now held in force by +the Danes; and where the road leaves the hills to cross the marsh +to the bridge and town, two miles away, was a camp that guarded the +causeway through the level. + +We went quickly as a great host may, and Alfred had so ordered +matters that even as we set out from Iglea, Odda and his force were +moving in battle array from the Petherton heights on the Quantock +side of the town, as if to attack it. That was what Guthrum had +looked for since the time we had beaten Hubba, and the only attack +which could have seemed possible in any way. + +It is likely that he overrated the number which Odda had with him; +for those who escaped us at Combwich had not been near enough to +see from the far side of the river how small our force was, and +would make much of those who had been able to overcome their +mightiest chief. Moreover, since that time seven weeks had gone by, +and the gathering of Devon might be greater yet. So it was, indeed; +but Odda had not a thousand men. Perhaps, too, the Danes feared +some sally from the fens; but however it was, they made not the +mistake which destroyed Hubba by despising us rashly, for Guthrum +drew his whole force together, and left the hills for a march +towards the town which he heard was threatened. + +So when we came to Edington, Guthrum's hill fort was empty, save +for a camp guard to keep the country folk who lurked in wood and +fen from pillaging it. These men fled, and we stood on the ridge +without striking one blow; and King Alfred turned to us, and cried +that surely his plan was working out well. + +Then our host lined the ridge, and a mighty Saxon cheer from ten +thousand throats went pealing across the valley below us, and they +say that shout was heard even in Bridgwater. Guthrum heard it as he +rode with his host across the long causeway, and his men heard it +and halted, and saw in their rear the blaze of war gear that shone +from their own lines, and knew that they were pent in between fens +and hills, with an unknown force ready to fall on them. + +Whereon a panic very nearly seized them. Hubba's end was fresh in +their minds, and it needed all that Guthrum could say to prevent +them making for the town. But he minded them of old victories, and +bade them not fear to face the despised Saxons once again, and they +rallied. But it was noon before he could lead them to attack us, +and by that time he learned that Odda had halted above the town, +and need not be feared. But by that time also every post of vantage +along the hills was in our hands, and if Edington height was to be +held by Danes again, it must be won by hard fighting. That is a +thing that no Dane shrinks from, and now for Guthrum there was +nought else to be done, for he was surrounded, as it were. + +No man saw the whole of that fight, for it began at noon, as I have +said, when Guthrum turned to find the hillward road blocked behind +him. And from that time on it raged from spur to spur and point to +point, as step by step the Danes won back to the hillsides. But the +crest of the hill they never gained, save where for a time they +might set foot and be driven headlong in turn by those who had +given way before them at first. And so the fight swept on to the +base of Edington hill and along its sides, for there Alfred had +held his best men in reserve. Already the Danes had made for +themselves some shallow lines of earthworks along the crest, and +now these were manned against their own attack. + +Men who looked on from afar tell strange tales of the shouts and +cries that rang among the quiet Polden hills and woodlands that day +for long hours. It was very still, as it chanced, and the noise of +battle went far and wide from the place where Saxon and Dane fought +their greatest fight for mastery. + +Ever rode Alfred with the light of battle on his face, confident +and joyous, among his men from post to post. Ever where the tide of +battle seemed to set against us his arm brought victory again, +until at last Guthrum drew his men together for one final attack +that should end the day. + +On Edington hillside he massed them, and steadily they came on +under shield in a dense column to where, in their own camp, we +waited under the Dragon banner. Half our men, the best spearmen of +the force, were lying down resting, but along the little ridges of +the earthworks the archers stood, each knowing that he fought under +the eye of the king he loved. + +"This is the end," said Alfred, as the Danes came on. "Be ready, +spearmen, when I give the word." + +And they lay clutching their weapons, with their eyes fixed on him +as he stood on the hilltop, surrounded by his thanes, gazing on the +last assault of the Danes, whose archers from the wings were +already at work, so that the men of the shield wall closed in +around him. + +I think that the Danes had no knowledge of what force was hidden by +the hill brow. For when they were within half arrow shot, and +Alfred gave the word, and the long ranks of spearmen leaped from +the ground and closed up for their charge, a waver went along the +shielded line, and they almost halted, though it passed, and they +came on even more swiftly. + +Then Alfred lifted his sword and shouted, and, with that awful roar +that I had heard before on the Combwich meadows, over the hill +crest and down upon the Danes the spearmen rushed. The lines met +with a mighty crash of steel on steel, and while one might count +two score they swayed in deadly hand-to-hand strife. Then Guthrum's +men gave back one pace, and howled, and won their place again, and +again lost it. + +Then forward went Alfred and his shield wall, and I was on one side +of him and Ethered of Mercia on the other, while after him came +Heregar, bearing the banner. The Danes in the centre closed up as +they saw us come, and there were shouts in which Guthrum's name was +plain to be heard, and I saw him across a four-deep rank of his +men. + +Straight for him went Alfred, and the Danish line grew thin before +us. But as their king went forward our Saxons cheered again and +pressed their attack home, and right and left the Danish line fell +back and broke. At that a wild shout and charge with levelled +spears swept them down the hillside in full rout, and the end had +come. His courtmen closed round Guthrum and bore him from before +us, and the full tide of pursuit swept him away before we reached +him. + +Alfred stayed his horse and let the men go on. His face was good to +see as he glanced round at the hills to our right; but when it fell +on the slain, who lay thickly where the lines had met, he bared his +head and looked silently on them for a space, while his lips moved +as if he prayed. + +Then he said: + +"These have given their lives not in vain, for they have helped to +bring peace, and have died to set an English king over the English +land." + +He put on his crown-circled helm again, and as he did so, among the +fallen there was a stir and movement, and the wounded rose up on +arms and knees and turned on their sides, and raised their hands, +waving broken weapons, and crying in a strange, wearied voice that +yet had a ring of victory in it: + +"Waeshael to Alfred the king!" + +For the silence that had fallen, and the lessening shouts of the +pursuers, told them that they had won, and they were content. + +Thereat Alfred flushed red, and I think that he almost wept, for he +turned from us. And then he spoke to the men who yet stood round +him, and said: + +"Let every man who has any knowledge of care for the wounded, or +who has known a wound of his own and the way it was cared for, go +among these brave ones and help them." + +Nor would he leave the place till he saw men going up and down +among the hurt, tending them as well as they could; and he was the +more content when he saw Bishop Sigehelm and many other clergy come +on the field from the rear, where he had bidden them stay. The +bishop had mail under his robes, having been eager to join in the +fight, as would Eahlstan, his great forerunner, have certainly +joined; but Alfred would not suffer him to do so. + +Once more Guthrum tried to rally his men, when the flight bore him +to his camp at the hill foot, on the way across the fens to the +town. There was a sharp fight there, and Ethelnoth was wounded as +he led on his men; and thence the Danes fled to Bridgwater, making +no more delay. So close on them were our men that Guthrum's +housecarls closed the gates after their king on many of their +comrades, who fell under the Saxon spear in sight of safety. Nor +did we give them time to drive in the cattle that were gathered +from all the countryside to the meadows round the place. + +Then came Thord to me and put me in mind of somewhat. + +"Now is our work to be done, king. These Danes will take Hubba's +ships and be gone down the river next. We must stop them in some +way, for the king's plan is to starve them out, as it seems." + +We had left the king at that time, for we would not suffer him to +join in pursuit, which has its dangers, if men turn desperate and +make a stand, as many did, dying like brave warriors that they +were. So I rode on quickly with my followers, and came to the river +bank below the bridge. The Danes were swarming on the ramparts of +the fortress like angry bees, and in the ships, which lay beneath +the walls, men were busy, even as Thord had guessed they would be, +making ready to sail when tide served. We could not reach them by +any means, for every boat had been taken from this side long ago, +when the first news of defeat was brought back by flying horsemen. + +Then Thord's face glowered under his helm, and he pointed to the +ship that was farthest from the bridge, and therefore likely to be +the first to start away when the tide was full. It was my own ship, +which they had got afloat. + +"Thor's hammer smite them!" he growled; "they have launched the old +keel without finishing her painting--just as I left her. How are we +to stay their going off with her?" + +"Is there a chain cable anywhere?" I asked. + +"Not one in the place," he said; "and if we did get one across the +river, we should have to fight to keep the far end of it." + +The tide was rising fast, and I thought we should surely lose every +ship, while Guthrum and his chiefs would escape us at the same +time. One might line the banks with archers, certainly, but that +would not stay the going. Evening was closing in, moreover. By +midnight they would be gone, and I was in a difficulty out of which +I could not see my way. + +Suddenly Thord smote his hands together, and his face grew +brighter. + +"I have it," he cried. "There is an old vessel that lies in a creek +a mile down the river. A great buss {xvi} she is, and worth +nothing; but she will float, and maybe will be afloat now. If we +can sink her across the channel in a place that I know, not one of +these ships will get away till she is raised." + +Then I called every man to me whom I could see, and we went quickly +to the place where this buss was, and she was just afloat. Thord +knew where her tackle was kept, and he had the oars out--what there +were of them at least, for they were old and rotten enough. Then we +had to shove her off and get her boat into the water, and the +vessel itself floated up on the tide towards the narrow place where +she might best be sunk to block the channel against ships that came +from the town. + +We had not gone far when there came a sound at which I started, for +it was nothing more or less than the quick beat of oars coming down +the river against the tide. Thord and I and eight men of my own +crew were in the buss, while I had maybe thirty men ashore who were +keeping pace with us along the bank. The rest of my own men were +with these, and one shouted that he could see the ship, and that it +was our own, crammed with men too. + +Now at first it seemed as if the only thing for us to do was to go +ashore in the boat as quickly as we could and get away; but Thord +cried to me: + +"Then will the Danes take our ship to sea, and we have lost her for +good. It should not be said of us that we let her go without a blow +struck to save her." + +"Sink this hulk straightway, then," I said, falling to work, with +the axe I had in thy hand, on the lowest strakes. My men leaped to +work as well, and in two minutes the seams began to gape, and then +was a rush of water from broken planking that sent us over the side +and into the boat in hot haste. + +Then we pulled for shore, towing the bows of the fast-sinking buss +with us till they grounded in the mud, and even as her stern swung +with the tide across the channel she lurched and sank. + +"We should have bided in her and fought," growled Thord. "Now in +five minutes we shall see the bottom ripped out of our own ship by +our own deed." + +But a foot of the bows and the mast of the buss stood out of the +water, and I thought the Danes would see these marks. + +Even as we gained the shore our dragon stem swept round the bend +that had hidden us, and came on swiftly. Then the Danes saw us, and +those on the fore deck shouted, and the oars plashed wildly, and +many on the side next to us stopped altogether; and at the same +time the steersman saw the stem of the wreck, and, as I think, lost +his head between fear of it and the sudden appearance of the foe +whom he thought he had escaped. The larboard oars were going yet, +and the starboard had almost stopped. He paid no heed to it, and +the ship swung over. Then the tide caught her bows, and in a moment +she ran hard and fast on our bank, and the men in her fell right +and left with the shock. + +I had seen what was coming, and so had Thord, and we ran our best +to meet her as she struck. The tide was a good one, and she came +well on the hard bank, and there was no need to tell my men what to +do. Before the Danes knew what had happened we were climbing over +the bows on board, and the Danes aft were leaping into the river to +get away from us. + +Some few tried to fight; but there must have been two hundred men +packed along the gangways, and they could do nothing. They threw +themselves into the water like the rats that had left the old buss +even now, and we slew many, and the good ship was our own again. +Some of the Danes got ashore on the far bank, some were met by our +Saxons on this side, and but few got back to Bridgwater, for the +river had most of them. + +Another ship was coming at this time, but those in her heard the +shouting and the cries; and it would seem that their hearts failed +them, for they went back before we could see more than the tall +mast above the banks from our decks. + +Then we thought we might rest, for we were wearied out; but Thord +would not suffer us to do so till he had got the ship carefully +below the wreck, so that she was free. Had we waited for the next +tide we could not have done it, as it turned out; for the rise of +flood shortened quickly to the neap tides, and a bank of mud grew +round the sunken hull, making the channel impassable altogether for +the time, and so the last way of escape for Guthrum and his men was +barred. + +So I thought we had done well, and left Thord and my men to guard +the ship and take her back to Combwich, where she would lie safely +in the creek, while I rode to Alfred, almost sleeping on my wearied +horse as I went. + +There were two wrecks in that place in the morning; for they +brought down one of Hubba's ships in the dark on the next tide, and +she ran on the sunken stem of the buss, and went down almost at +once. After that no more attempt was made to fly by water. + +Then began a siege that lasted for a fortnight, without anything +happening that is worth telling; for the fear of Alfred was on the +Danes, and they had not heart so much as to make one sally from the +gates. + + + +Chapter XIII. The Greatest Victory. + + +Now in a few days it was plain that Alfred held the Danes in the +hollow of his hand as it were, and could do what he would with +them. At first we looked for messengers from the place, to treat +with him for peace; but none came. From the town at times we could +hear shoutings and the noise of men who quarrelled, as if there +were divided counsels among them that led to blows. They were very +short of food also, because all their stores of cattle were left +outside the walls, as I have said, so that we fared the better for +their plundering while we waited. + +At the end of the first week, therefore, Alfred sent a message +under flag of truce, and told the chiefs that he was willing to +hear what they would say; and next day Guthrum asked that some +chiefs might come and speak with him. But Alfred would not trust +the Danes enough to send any of his nobles into the town, and bade +Guthrum come out to the camp and say what he had to say. But he +would not. Then one day, when Alfred held counsel as to what was +best to be done to ensure lasting peace, I said that I thought Jarl +Osmund might be of use, for he could go between the two camps in +safety. + +That seemed good to the king, and Heregar and I rode to find him, +crossing the tidal ford at Combwich, where we heard from village +folk who had returned that the Danish lord bided in Heregar's house +beyond the fort. + +There I thought I should find Thora, and we went quickly. The place +looked very deserted, and when we came to the courtyard gates it +seemed more so, for the Maytime had sprinkled the gay-patterned +paving of grey and white shore pebbles with blades of grass and +weeds that sprang up between them everywhere for want of tendance. + +Only the Lady Alswythe and a few of her servants were there now, +for the Lady Etheldreda had taken Thora with her to Taunton when +she left the hills. It had not been so safe here, though there was +little plunder to bring the Danes to the place now. So I need not +say that I was grievously disappointed, though in the dismantled +hall sat Osmund, listlessly shaping a bow stave, and waiting for +what turn of fortune should take him next. + +Very glad, as one might think, were both the lady and the jarl for +our coming, and we had to tell them all the tale of the working of +Alfred's plan, and of the great fight. And when that was heard, we +told the jarl of Alfred's wish to treat with Guthrum and the other +chiefs through him. + +That Osmund would gladly do; indeed, he said that, in hopes of +being thus useful, he had stayed so near at hand. + +So he and the thane talked long of the matter--for Alfred had sent +messages--while I spoke with the lady, of Thora mostly. + +It did not seem to me that I had any part in the king's business +with the Danes, and so presently I thought that I could do no +better than ride to Taunton to see Thora, who I feared might be in +trouble or doubt as to my safety. + +So I rode there with Kolgrim. At that time the scald was laid up +with a wound in the camp, and the king seemed to miss his presence, +and to care for his welfare as if he were his brother; but, indeed, +he made every man with whom he had to do feel as if his king were +his best friend. + +There is not much need for me to tell what manner of welcome I had +at Taunton from Thora. As for Etheldreda, she would have me tell +her everything, and I sat with those two, until night came and +rest, talking of all the time past. But of the time to come Thora +said nothing, and once or twice when Etheldreda left us and we were +alone for a little while, so that I could try to plan out somewhat, +she would but turn the talk again. + +In the morning I found out how this was. She had gathered from +Osmund somewhat of his thoughts about what Alfred's plan for me +might be, and was unhappy therefore, not wishing to stand in my way +to honour with the king. So she told me when I pressed her a little +to speak of what I would do; and when I said that there should be +nothing that I would let stand between us, she was the more +troubled yet. + +So at last I went and found Etheldreda, and prayed her to come and +speak with Thora. + +"Falling out already?" she said, laughing. + +"Not so, but a greater trouble than that," I said, "one that will +need your help before it is mended." + +"Ay, I suppose you could patch up a quarrel for yourselves," she +said. "What is this mighty trouble?" + +So she came and sat by Thora, taking her hand and kissing her, and +we told her what Osmund's thoughts were. + +"There is such enmity between Saxon and Dane," Thora said, "that it +is not likely that the king will trust one who will wed one of his +foe's daughters." + +It was plain that Etheldreda thought the same; but she cheered us +both, saying that she would do all that she could to help us, and +that Odda would not be behind in the matter. After all, if we were +to wait for a while, things might be very different after a little +time of peace. And so we were content. + +So I went back to Alfred next day, and when he heard where I had +been he smiled a little, and said: + +"One thing I must tell you, my Norseman, and that is that our +thanes who know little of you will be jealous that you should have +much dealing with any Dane as yet." + +Which made me the more uneasy; for though I might think that the +king, at all events, was not displeased with me, others, and the +wishes of others, might be too strong for him to go against. + +But my affairs are little things compared with what was on hand at +this time, and on the same day Alfred spoke to me about somewhat +that he would have me do for him. + +In the town the Danes were in the greatest straits by this time, +for by no means could they get stores of any sort to them, so close +was the watch round the place. Osmund had been in and out once or +twice, and Guthrum had received him well enough, and it was thought +that there would be no long delay now before the siege was at an +end by the submission of the Danes to any terms they might gain, +and the more so that an assault on the fortress would surely have +been successful, ending in the fall of all its defenders. + +But Alfred was most willing to be merciful, and he had bidden +Osmund tell Guthrum and his chiefs that if he might name twelve +hostages for himself the rest should go free, while Guthrum should +hold the East Anglian kingdom for him as under-king. + +But this was what Alfred would have me do. + +"One other thing there is," he said. "If there is to be any +brotherhood between us, it must be as between Christians. The ways +of persecution must be forgotten and that cannot come to pass until +the chiefs at least have accepted the faith." + +"It is strange to me, my king," I said, "that Guthrum, who has been +in England for ten years, is not Christian by this time." + +"Ay, but his hosts are heathen," the king answered. "Now I think I +can speak to you as if no longer a heathen at least?" + +"As a Christian, my king," I answered. + +"Well, then," he said, smiling on me, "go and speak to Guthrum and +tell him what I have said. I think that he will listen to you +better than if I sent a priest or even Bishop Sigehelm. Warrior may +speak to warrior plainly." + +Now this was a hard thing for me to do, as it seemed. Maybe it was +the hardest thing he could have asked me. But it was in my mind +that I could not but go to Guthrum and give the message, else would +I seem to deny the faith that I loved. Alfred saw at once that I +was troubled in some way, and I believe that he knew well what the +seeming doubt was. + +"Once you brought a token of good to me," he said. "Now that was +all unknowing. Go now and take a message of good to Guthrum openly, +and have no fear." + +"What shall I say?" + +"Mind not that at all," he answered; "what is needed will come to +you." + +So I said that I would go if Harek might come with me, for his +words were ever ready. But Alfred would not suffer that. I must go +without help from a scald, taking only my own words; and at last I +consented, though indeed my only fear was that I might not succeed +by reason of my slowness of speech. + +Then I went to Osmund, and told him that I was to go into the town +with him next day, for that is how Alfred planned for me; and I +told him also what my part in the business was to be. Whereon he +surprised me. + +"I do not know that your errand is so hopeless as you seem to +think," he said. "Guthrum has harmed no Christians in East Anglia +since he was king there." + +"Well," I answered, "I hope it may be easy, though I doubt it." + +I would not say more then, but, being anxious, went and spoke long +with Harek. The brave scald's wounds were deep, though he had said +little of them. Some say that he saved the life of Ethelnoth at the +time when that ealdorman was struck down, and that also is +Ethelnoth's story; though the scald says that if so it was by +accident, and less worth speaking of than many braver deeds that +were wrought and went untold that day. + +"Here have I been in England but six months or so, and I have more +to sing of than ever I learned with Harald Fairhair," he said one +day, as he made songs on his bed while his wounds were healing. + +And he spoke the truth. Never was a winter so full of deeds wrought +by a king and a valiant people that were worth a scald's +remembrance. + +Now Osmund had a last message from Alfred that day, and in the +morning we went together to the bridge. There Guthrum's own +courtmen met us, and they took us into the fortress, beyond which +lies the town, so that we saw little of what straits the host might +be in by this time. In the fortress itself all seemed in order at +least; and there was a guard set at the door of the well-built hut +where the Danish king was, as if some state were yet kept up. + +There Guthrum welcomed us, and with him were many chiefs, on whose +faces was the same care-worn look that Osmund had borne when I saw +him at Exeter before Alfred. + +"Two messages come to you today," Osmund said; "one by my mouth, +and the other by that of King Ranald Vemundsson, who is with me. I +think you may hear both, and answer them both favourably." + +Guthrum made no reply, but took his seat at the upper end of the +one room the hut had; and all the chiefs sat also, leaving us +messengers standing. + +Then said Osmund: + +"I think it right that I should stand in the presence of my king, +but the son of King Vemund should not do so in any less presence +than that of his overlord." + +Thereat Guthrum smiled a little. + +"I have heard that Harald of Norway came to blows with his brother +kings because they would not stand before him, and that others have +left that kingdom because they did not choose to do so. Sit down, +King Ranald. Your father's name was well known to all of us in the +old days. I am glad to see his son, though maybe I should not say +so." + +"We would rather that he were on our side," said one of the other +chiefs. + +Then they set places for both of us, and we waited for Guthrum's +word. + +"Well," he said, wearily enough, "let us hear what King Alfred +says." + +"Few are his words," said Osmund: + +"'Let Guthrum suffer me to choose any hostages that I will for +myself, let him swear to keep the peace hereafter as my under-king +beyond Thames, doing homage to me, and he shall go hence with his +host in honour.' There is also the message of Ranald to add +hereto." + +Now I thought that the faces of the chiefs showed that they thought +these terms very light; but they said nothing as yet. + +Guthrum turned to me. + +"Well, King Ranald?" + +"Alfred the king bids me say that he would fain treat with you +hereafter as a brother altogether. And that can only be if the +great trouble between Dane and Saxon is removed--that is, if +Guthrum becomes a Christian." + +Now I expected some outburst of scorn and wrath on this, but +instead of that a silence fell, in which the chiefs looked at one +another; and Guthrum gazed at me steadfastly, so that I felt my +face growing hot under his eyes, because I knew I must say more, +and that of myself and my own wishes most likely. + +Then Guthrum said slowly: + +"Why has he not sent some priest to say this?" + +"Because he thought that a warrior would listen best to a brother +warrior," I answered. + +"Ay, that is true," said the king. "Are you a Christian, +therefore?" + +"I am as yet unbaptized," I said. "I have taken the prime signing +on me, as have many others; but I shall certainly seek baptism +shortly." + +"You came here as a heathen, then?" + +"As a heathen altogether, except that I had no hatred of +Christians," I answered, not quite seeing what the king would know. + +"What turned your mind so far from the old gods that you should be +a fit messenger on such a matter to us?" + +"I have learned from Alfred and Neot," I answered, "and I know that +I have found what is true." + +Then Guthrum turned to Osmund. + +"What say you, jarl? you have been with Alfred also." + +"When Ranald is baptized, I shall be so with him," the jarl +answered simply. + +And that was the first word thereof that I had heard from him. + +Then an older chief spoke sharply to us. + +"What profit do you look to make thereout--either of you?" + +"Certainty of better things both in this life and in that to come," +I answered. + +"Ay, so they always say," the chief growled; "but what place with +Alfred in return?" + +"It is likely that I shall gain no place with him," I said. "Jarl +Osmund knows that I do not count on that." + +"Ay," said Osmund, "I know it. Nor will any man think that I seek +honour at Alfred's hands." + +Then Guthrum rose up, and spoke gravely and yet very determinedly, +as if this was no new matter to him. + +"Here, chiefs, are two good and tried warriors who willingly choose +Alfred's faith. You and I have heard thereof since we were in +England; and many a man have we seen die, since we have been here, +because he would not give it up. I mind me of Edmund, the martyred +king, whom Ingvar, our great chief, slew, and of Humbert the +bishop, and many more lesser folk. Tell me truly how much you have +thought of the Asir in these last years?" + +But none answered. It was with them as with me: the Asir were not +of England. + +"One thing," said Guthrum, "has gone against our taking up the +English faith--we have thought the words of peace have made men +cowardly. Now we know that is not so. Here is one who withstood +Hubba, and round the walls watch Christian men who have beaten us +sturdily." + +Then he stayed his words for a little, and his voice sank, and he +looked round and added: + +"Moreover, the words of the new faith are good. I will accept King +Alfred's brotherhood altogether." + +Then one or two more of the younger chiefs spoke, and said that +they would do so also; but again the elder warrior spoke fiercely. + +"Is this forced on us as part of the peace making?" + +"It is not," I answered. "It is, as I have said, the wish for +brotherhood altogether." + +Then said Guthrum: + +"That is enough. I do not think that we need be ashamed to be +conquered altogether by King Alfred." + +"One more word," said the old chief. "Are we to have no hostages?" + +"There can be no exchange of hostages," said Osmund. + +"Things are all on the side of the Saxon," he growled. + +"Ay, they are, in more ways than that," said Guthrum. "We have no +power to say a word. It is in my mind that we could not have looked +for such mildness at the king's hands. For there is no denying that +we are at his mercy. + +"What say you, as a stranger, Ranald?" + +"I have known the ways of Harald of Norway," I answered. "I think +that he would not have left a man of this host alive." + +Whereon the old warrior laughed shortly, and was silent while +Guthrum bade us go back to Alfred and thank the king for his word, +saying that an answer should be given as soon as the word of the +host had been taken in open Thing. + +So Alfred won Guthrum to the faith, and greatly did he rejoice when +he heard what the Danish king had said. I think he was more glad +yet when he knew that Osmund would become Christian also, and he +urged us both to be baptized at once. + +"Let us be so with Guthrum," I asked. + +"That will be fitting," he answered, "for I think you have won him +over." + +But I hold that Guthrum and more of his chiefs had been won by the +deaths of those martyrs of whom he spoke long before the choice was +set before him. One cannot tell how this was wrought in the mind of +the Danes altogether by the hand of God. Some will ever say, no +doubt, that they took the Cross on them by necessity; but I know +that it was not so. Nor have their lives since that time given any +reason for the thought. + +Then Alfred asked the name of that old warrior who withstood us, +and Osmund told him. + +"I will have that chief as a hostage," the king said, "for I think +that he is worth taming." + +"I think that King Alfred's hostages are not in any way to be +pitied," Osmund said. + +"Save that they are kept from home and friends, I would have them +as happy as may be," the king answered; "but I would have none +presume on what mercy came to you, Jarl Osmund, for the sake of the +Christmastide message." + +"I think that none will do so," Osmund said. "There is full +knowledge among my kin that you showed mercy when justice was about +to be done, and well they know that your kindness was not weakness. +It is likely that the mercy shown here also will do more for peace +than would even destruction of your enemies." + +So it seemed at last, for on the fourteenth day of the siege the +Danes accepted the king's terms with one consent. And more than +that, Guthrum and thirty of his chiefs asked that they might be +baptized; which was a wonder to all of our host. + +Now I have said nothing about the life in the great camp before +Bridgwater, for it had nothing of much note to me, though it was +pleasant enough. I think there was some jealousy of me among the +younger thanes at one time; but it passed because I would not +notice it, and also because I took no sort of authority on me, +being only the king's guest and warrior as yet. But I did find a +few young thanes of Odda's following who knew somewhat of the sea, +and I was wont to talk with them often of the ships and the like, +until I knew they would be glad to take to the viking's path with +me in the king's ships, bringing their men with them. And often +Alfred spoke with me of the matter, until I was sure that he would +have me stay. + +It was but a few days after the peace had been made when Alfred +went to a great house he had at Aller, which lies right amidst the +marshes south of Athelney. We had saved that house and the church +by our constant annoyance of the Danes, with many another house and +village along the fen to which they dared not come for fear of us +at last. Guthrum was to come to him there, and I think that he +chose the place because there at least was nought to bring thoughts +of defeat to the Danes, and there they could be treated as guests, +apart from the great camp and fortress. Great were the preparations +there for the high festival that should be when Alfred himself +should take Guthrum to the font. + +Then came Neot on foot, with Guerir his fellow hermit, from +Cornwall, to be present; and Harek and I rejoiced as much as the +king that he had come. + +"I think I must answer for you two at the font," he said. + +"For Kolgrim also, I pray you, Father Neot," said I; "for he will +be baptized with us." + +"Ay, for honest Kolgrim also," he answered; "but what of old Thord, +my reprover?" + +"He will have nought to do with the new faith," I said. "But at +least he does not blame us for leaving the old gods. He says he is +too old to learn what we younger men think good." + +"I will seek him and speak with him again," Neot said. "I think I +owe him somewhat." + +Then we thanked the holy man for the honour that he was showing us; +but he put thanks aside, saying that we were his sons in the truth, +and that the honour was his rather. + +Now in the seven weeks that we waited for Guthrum at Aller, while +the priests whom Alfred sent taught him and his chiefs what they +should know rightly before baptism, Osmund and I were wont to go to +Taunton, across the well-known fens, and bide for days at a time in +Odda's house there, and we told Thora for what we waited. + +She had come to England, when she was quite a child, with the first +women who came into East Anglia, and already she knew much of +Christianity from the Anglian thralls who had tended her. And when +she had heard more of late from Etheldreda and Alswythe, she had +longed to be of the same faith as these friends of hers, and now +rejoiced openly. + +"Ranald," she said, "I had not dared to speak of this to my father, +but I was wont to fear the old gods terribly. They have no place +for a maiden in their wild heaven. There are many more Danish +ladies who long for this change, even as I have longed. Yet I still +fear the wrath of Odin for you and my father." + +"The old gods are nought--they have no power at all," I said, +bravely enough; though even yet I had a little fear in thus defying +them, as it seemed. + +"Then I will dread them no more," she answered. "Nor do I think +that you need fear them." + +So I comforted her, and bade her ask more of Etheldreda, who would +gladly teach her; and the matter passed by in gladness, as a +trouble put away, for she and I were at one in this. I will say +that I had half feared that she whom I loved would have been angry +with me. + +Now on that night Osmund and I and Harek would ride to Heregar's +house over the shoulder of the Quantocks, with some message we had +to take to him from Alfred; and we went without any attendants, for +the twelve miles or so would have no risk to any one, and the +summer evening was long and bright. + +Yet we were later in starting away than we should have been, and so +when we were among the wilder folds of the hills, where the bare +summits rise from wooded slopes and combes, we were overtaken by a +heavy thunderstorm that came up swiftly from the west behind us, +darkening the last sunset light with black clouds through which the +lightning flickered ceaselessly. + +We rode on steadily, looking for some place of shelter; but it grew +very dark, and the narrow track was rough, and full of loose stones +that made the going slow. Presently the clouds settled down on the +hill crest and wrapped us round, and the storm broke afresh on us, +with thunder that came even as the darkness was changed to blue +brightness with the lightning flashes that played around us almost +unceasing. There was no rain yet and no wind, and the heat grew +with the storm. + +Soon the nearness of the flashes scared our horses, and we had to +dismount and lead them, and in the darkness we lost the little +track among the heavy heather. And then there seemed to me to be a +new sound rising among the thunder, and I called to Harek, bidding +him hearken. + +It came from seaward, and swelled up louder and louder and nearer, +until it passed over our heads--the yelp and bay of Odin's wild +hounds, and the trample and scream of his horses and their dead +riders. A great fear fell on me, so that the cold sweat stood on my +forehead, while the hunt seemed everywhere above us for a moment, +and then passed inland among the thunder that hardly drowned its +noises. + +Then Osmund the jarl cried out: + +"That was Odin's hunt. I have heard it before, and ill came +thereof. He hunts us who forsake him." + +And out of the darkness Harek answered, without one shake in his +brave voice: + +"Odin's hunt in truth it was, and the ill comes to Odin, who must +leave this land before the might of the Cross. We who bear the sign +of might he cannot touch." + +Then I remembered myself, and the fear passed from me, and I was +ashamed. I had no doubt now that there was need for Odin's wrath, +seeing that he was surely defeated. And Osmund was silent also, +thinking doubtless the same things; for he had taken on him the +prime signing long ago, and had forgotten it maybe. + +Then we went on, and the storm grew wilder. Harek sang now, but +what the words were I cannot tell. I think they were some that he +had learned from Alfred. + +Now we began to go down the southern slope of the highest neck of +the hill, as it seemed, though we could not rightly say where we +were, and in a little silence that came between the thunderclaps I +heard the rattle of hoofs as of another rider coming after us, +going faster than we dared. + +"Here is one who knows the hill well," I said; "maybe he will guide +us." + +And then the lightning showed the horseman close to us. He reined +up, and cried in a great voice: + +"Ho, strangers! are you wandering here?" + +"Ay; we are lost till the storm passes. Can you guide us to shelter +before the rain comes?" I said. + +"Whence come you?" he asked. + +"We are Alfred's men from Taunton--going to the thane's house at +Cannington." + +"Ay, is that so? Then I will guide you. Follow," he said, and he +rode on. + +One could see him plainly when the lightning came, and it showed a +tall man, grey bearded, and clad in a long hooded horseman's cloak, +under which gleamed golden-shining mail. Well mounted on a great +horse he was also, and its sides were white with foam on the dark +skin, as though he had ridden hard. + +We mounted and went after him, with the lightning playing round us +and glancing from the mail of our leader as his arm threw the cloak +back over his shoulder from time to time. He led us along the hill +crest northward, crossing the places where the fire beacons had +been; and we wondered whither he was taking us, for shelter here +was none. And now the storm grew wilder, with the wind and chill of +coming rain. + +Then he turned downhill, riding fast until we came to a place where +rocks lay loose and scattered everywhere, and our horses stumbled +among them. There he reined up suddenly, holding up his hand, and +shouting through the uproar of wind and thunder: + +"Hold, for your lives! Hearken!" + +We stayed motionless, listening, and again we heard the cry and +clang of Odin's hunt, coming now from inland over us, and I made +the sign of the Cross on my breast, in fear thereof. + +"Ho for Odin's hunt!" the strange man cried, in his mighty voice. +"Hear it, Alfred's men, for you shall join it and ride the wind +with him if you defy him." + +"We fear him not," said Harek; "he has no power over us." + +"Has he not?" the man roared, facing full upon us; and as he did so +the lightning glared on him, and I saw that his drawn sword was +aloft, and that from its point glowed a blue flame, and that blue +flames also seemed to start from his horse's ears. One-eyed the man +was also, and he glowered on us under shaggy eyebrows. + +Harek saw also, and he raised his hand towards the man and signed +the holy sign, crying: + +"Speak! who are you?" + +Thereat the man gave a hoarse roar as of rage, and his horse +reared, trampling wildly on the loose rocks, and, lo, he was gone +from before our eyes as if he had never been, while the thunder +crashed above us and below us everywhere! + +"Odin! the Cross has conquered!" Harek cried again, in a voice that +was full of triumph; and the blood rushed wildly through me at the +thought of what I had seen. + +Then Harek's horse shifted, and his hoof struck a great stone that +rolled as if going far down the hill, and then stopped, and maybe +after one could count five came a crash and rattle underneath us +that died away far down somewhere in the bowels of the hill. And at +that Osmund shouted suddenly: + +"Back to the hill; we are on the brink of the old mine shaft! Back, +and stay not!" + +Nor did we wait, but we won back to the higher ground before we +drew rein. + +"We have met with Odin himself," Osmund said when we stopped and +the thunder let him speak. + +"Ay, and have driven him hellwards by the might of the holy sign," +said Harek. "Nearly had he lured us to death, unbaptized as we are, +in that place." + +"Come," said Osmund; "I know where we are now. We are well-nigh +under the great fort, and there is a farm near at hand." + +We found that soon and the rain came, and the storm spent its fury +and passed as we sat under cover in the stables waiting. Then came +the moonlight and calm, and the sweetness of rain-soaked earth and +flowers refreshed, and we went on our way wondering, and came to +the thane's with the first daylight. And I thought that our faces +were pale and marked with the terror of the things through which we +had gone, and maybe also with a new light of victory {xvii}. + + + +Chapter XIV. King Alfred's Will. + + +When we came back to Aller, the first thing that I did was to tell +Neot of our meeting with Odin while his wild hunt went on through +the tempest, telling him how that I had feared unwisely, and also +of Harek's brave withstanding of the danger. + +"It is said that our forefathers met Odin in like wise in the days +of the first christening of our race," he said. "I do not know what +to make thereof, seeing that I hold Odin as nought; but I think +this, that in some way Satan tried to destroy you before you were +baptized. Wherefore, whether Odin or mortal man drew you to that +place, I have no doubt what power saved you." + +But Sigehelm thought that we had met with Satan himself in the +shape of the old god, and so also thought Guerir the hermit, who +told strange tales of like appearings among the Welsh hills where +he was born. + +As for Alfred the king, he marvelled, and said even as Neot. But he +added this: + +"I know the mine shaft well, and it is in my mind that some day +Odin's bones will be found at the bottom thereof. Nevertheless +there is more than mortal in what has happened to you by way of +trial." + +Now came the time when Guthrum and his thirty comrades should seek +the king, and I have no words to tell of that time when in the +peaceful church we heathen stood white-robed and unarmed altogether +at the font, while Sigehelm, with a wonderful gathering of priests, +enlisted us as warriors of the Cross. It was, as all men think, the +most mighty victory that Alfred had ever gained. + +At that time he chose Guthrum as his own son in the faith, and +named him Athelstan {xviii}, as the first and most noble stone +of the new building up of the church among the Danes. Neot would +not have our names changed, for he said we had wronged the faith in +them not at all. Odda stood for Osmund, as Neot for us. + +After that was joyous feasting, and the loosing of the chrism bands +at Alfred's royal town of Wedmore, whither we went in bright +procession through the long summer day. Four days we bided there, +till we knew that the great Danish host was on its march homewards, +and then Guthrum and his comrades must join it. But before he went +he accepted from Alfred the gifts that an under-king should take +from his overlord, and they were most splendid. All men knew by +those tokens given and taken that Alfred was king indeed, and that +Guthrum did but hold place by his sufferance. Those two parted in +wondrous friendship with the new bond of the faith woven round +them, and the host passed from Wessex and was gone. + +Yet, as ever, many a long year must pass by before the track of the +Danes should be blotted out from the fair land they had laid waste. +Everywhere was work to hand on burnt hall and homestead, ruined +church, and wasted monastery. There was nought that men grieved +over more than the burning of King Ine's church at Glastonbury, for +that had been the pride of all the land. Once, after the Chippenham +flight, the monks had dared to go out in sad procession to meet the +fierce raiders at the long dike that bars the way to Avalon, and +for that time they had won safety for the place--maybe by the loss +of their treasures given as ransom, or, as some say, by the power +of fearless and unarmed men; for there were men in the Danish host +whose minds were noble, and might well be touched thereby. But +Hubba's men could not be withheld after they had lost their mighty +leader, and the place must feel their fury of revenge. + +Now after the host was gone we went back to Taunton, and there +Alfred called together his Witan, that he might set all things in +order with their help; and at that time, before the levies were +dismissed, he bade me seek out such men as would take to the ships +as his paid seamen. Therein I had no hard task, for from the ruined +coast towns came seafarers, homeless and lonely, asking nought +better than to find a place in the king's fleet, and first of all +were the Parret-mouth men and my fisher of Wareham. Presently, with +one consent, the Witan made me leader of the king's Wessex sea +levies, offering me the rank and fee of an English ealdorman, with +power to demand help in the king's name from all sea-coast sheriffs +and port reeves in whatever was needed for the ships, being +answerable to the throne only for what I should do. And that I +accepted willingly for love of Alfred, who was my friend, and for +the sake of comradeship with those valiant men who had fought +beside me when Hubba fell, and at Edington. + +Then must I set myself to my new charge, having nought to do with +all the inland work that was before the king; and when the next +day's business was over, I went to tell him of this wish of mine, +and of some other matters that were on my mind whereof one may +easily guess. + +Alfred sat in his private chamber in the great house that King Ine +built, and on the table before him were a great ink horn and other +writing gear, and beside him sat on a low stool his chaplain, +reading to him out of a great book while the king wrote. The rough +horn cage wherein was a candle, that he had planned in wind-swept +Athelney, stood close at hand, against the time of dusk that was +near. Ever was Alfred planning things like this, even in his +greatest troubles; and therein he was wise, for it is not good to +keep the mind full of heavy things alone. Moreover, as we wondered +at his skilful devices in these little things, we took heart from +his cheerful pleasure in them. + +When the chamberlain brought me in, the great book was put aside, +and the pen set down, and the king looked up at me with his bright +smile. + +"Welcome, my ship thane," he said. "Come and sit here beside me. I +have somewhat to read to you." + +So I sat down wondering, and he turned back to some place in his +writing, and took the little knife that lay by him--for he had lost +his jewelled book staff in Athelney--and running its point along +the words, read to me from the writings of some old Roman what he +had been busy putting into good Saxon: + +"Now when the Roman folk would make a fleet hastily, and had no +rowers, nor time to train them rightly, they built stages like to +the oar benches of a ship in a certain lake, and so taught the men +the swing and catch of the long oars." + +"Will not that plan serve us, Ranald?" he said. + +"Ay, lord," I answered, laughing. "In good truth, if a man can +learn to keep time, and swing rightly, and back water, and the +like, on such a staging, it is somewhat. But it will be hard work +pulling against dead water from a stage that moves not. Nor will +there be the roll and plunge of waves that must be met." + +"Nor the sore sickness whereof Odda speaks," Alfred said, with his +eyes twinkling. "But I think that if the Romans found the plan +good, it will be so for us." + +So we talked of this for a while, and I will say now that in after +days we tried it, and the plan worked well enough, at least in the +saving of time. Alfred's book learning was ever used for the good +of his people, and this was but one way in which he found ready +counsel for them. + +This was pleasant talk enough, and neither I nor the king grew +weary thereof, but the good monk slept at last, and presently the +darkness fell, and Alfred dismissed him. + +One came and lit the torches on the wall, and still we spoke of my +work, until at last Alfred said: + +"So you must be busy, and I am glad. When will you set out, and +where will you go first?" + +Now what I wanted to ask him was where Osmund the jarl had gone. He +had ridden to Taunton from Aller, that he might be present at +Thora's christening, and that their chrism loosing {xix} might +be held at the same time; and I had looked to find both here, but +they were gone. Nor had they left any word for me, and I was +troubled about that. So I was about to tell the king what was in my +mind concerning Thora first of all, and my heart began to beat +strangely. But he waited not for me to answer him. + +"Stay," he said, smiling a little. "Before you go I must have a +hostage from my wild viking, lest he be, as it were, let loose on +the high seas where I cannot reach him." + +Then he laughed, at my puzzled face, I suppose, and I saw that he +had some jest that pleased him. + +"What hostage can I give, lord king?" I said. "Shall I leave Harek +and his harp with you?" + +"Harek would charm our ears, and would escape," Alfred answered. +"Nay, but I must give you house and lands for a home, and therein +you shall leave a fair wife, whose loneliness will bring you ashore +now and then." + +I thought there was more to come, and I liked not this at all, for +it went too closely with my fears of what might be. So I bowed, and +answered nothing as yet, while he looked laughingly at me. + +"Why," he cried, "half my thanes would have gone wild with joy if I +had promised them either half of what I have said I would give to +you. Are you so fond of the longships and the restless waves that +you will not be bound to the shore?" + +"Nay, my king," I said; "but I cannot yet rightly understand all +that you mean for me." + +"Well, it means that I must find you a rich wife, as I think I can. +What say you to that fair lady of Exeter town and Taunton--Odda's +daughter, Etheldreda?" + +"My king," I answered, somewhat over-gladly maybe, "Ethelnoth of +Somerset, my good comrade, might have some grudge against me if I +cast favouring eyes in that direction. Let this bide for a little +while, I pray you, King Alfred. Yet I would not have you think me +ungrateful, for indeed I know well what kindness is in your thought +for me." + +"Nay, but I have it in my mind that you were fond of going to +Taunton not so long since, and one might well think that a maiden's +hair drew you. Well, if Ethelnoth has outdone you there, I am sorry +for your sake, not his. Cheer up, nevertheless. There are more +maidens and well dowered in our broad Wessex coasts, and I am +minded to see how far you will obey your new overlord." + +"This is great kindness, King Alfred," I answered; "but we Northmen +are apt to keep some matters wherein to prove our freedom. I pray +you not to press this on me." + +"Faith," he said, as if to himself, "this viking might be in love +already, so wrathful grows he-- + +"Now, Ranald, it is true that I have set my mind on your wedding a +maiden who is rich, and dowered with a coast town, and a good +harbour, moreover, where you might keep all your ships under your +own eye. I would not have you disappoint me so soon." + +Then I said plainly, + +"King Alfred, I am loth to do so. But from the very first day that +I set foot in England there has been one maiden whose ways have +seemed to be bound up with my own, and I can wed none but her. If +it does not seem good to you that I should do so now, let me wait +till times have grown easier between Saxon and Dane. I think that +you may know well that I shall fight none the worse for you if I +must strive to win your consent." + +"That is straightforward," he said, smiling as if he would seem +content. "Let it be so. But it is only fair that before we close +this bargain you should see the well-dowered fair lady of whom I +speak." + +"I will do so if this matter is unknown to her," I answered, "else +would be trouble, perhaps, and discomfort. But it is of no use. I +have eyes and heart but for that one. Do I know the lady already, +perhaps?" + +"I believe that you may do so," Alfred said, looking grieved, in a +strange way, as if he were half minded to laugh at me for all his +seeming vexation. "Odda says that you do, and so also says +Etheldreda. Her name is Thora, daughter of Jarl Osmund, and she +will have Wareham town and Poole in right of her marriage, as dower +to her and to my sea captain." + +So spoke the king quickly, and then he could make pretence no +longer, but laughed joyously, putting his hands on my shoulders and +shaking me a little, while he cried: + +"Ay, Ranald; I did but play with you. True lover you are indeed, as +I thought. If you are faithful to the king as to the maiden of your +choice, both she and I are happy, and it is well." + +Then I knew not how to thank him; but he said that Etheldreda and +Odda, Heregar and the Lady Alswythe, and maybe Guthrum also, as +Thora's guardian, were to be thanked as well. + +"You have found many friends here in England already, Ranald my +cousin," Alfred said. "Wait until you meet some gathering of them +all at Wareham, presently perhaps, where Osmund and Thora are +preparing for a wedding--and then make a great thanking if you +will, and save words. But I wonder that I have never heard of this +matter from you before, for we have been close comrades." + +"You must have heard thereof today, my king," I answered; "and you +were but beforehand with me. I could speak of such things now that +peace has come. Yet I feared that you would be against my wedding a +Danish lady." + +"It was a natural thought," answered Alfred; "but Thora and Osmund +are ours, surely. Perhaps I should have doubted were your mind set +on any other. But I have no fears for you." + +Then he pondered a little, and went on: + +"You say that peace has come. So it has--for a time; and had we to +do only with the force that is in England now, I think it would +grow and strengthen. We cannot drive out the Danes, and there is +room in England for both them and us, and in the days to come the +difference of race will be forgotten--not in our time, Ranald, but +hereafter, as long years go by. Some day one of my line, if God +will, shall reign alone over a united England, stronger for the new +blood that has come among us. But it is a great charge that I give +to you, Ranald. What we have to fear are the new hosts that come +from Denmark, and only a strong fleet can stay them from our +shores. I can deal with those who are here, and these in time will +help me against fresh comers to the land. There is that in English +soil that makes every settler an Englishman in heart. But there is +warfare before us yet, and the fleet must break the force of the +storm, if it cannot altogether turn it aside." + +Then his grave voice changed, and he laughed. + +"Heavy things are these to speak in the ears of a bridegroom, but +you know all I mean. Now go your ways, and seek Odda, who will +rejoice to see you; for word comes from him that his master, Thord +the viking, is saying hard things to him because the men do not +come in readily to man the ships. At the summer's end I shall be in +Winchester, and thence I will come to Wareham to see the fleet, and +your wedding also. Go now, and all good go with you." + +So Alfred the king set me forth in brotherly wise, speaking on the +morrow to my men to bid them serve him and England well under me. +And after that all came to pass as the king had planned, and at the +summer's end there was a bright wedding for us in Wareham town, +while in the wide haven rode at anchor the best fleet that England +had ever seen. + +So that is how I came to be called "King Alfred's Viking," and made +this land my home. What this Wessex fleet of mine has done since +those days has been written by others in better words than I can +compass; and Harek, whom they call "King Alfred's Scald" nowadays, +has made song of what he has seen at my side in English waters; and +more he may have to make yet, for the North has not yet sent forth +all her hosts. Only I will say this, that if we have not been +altogether able to stay the coming of new Danish fleets to the long +seaboard that must needs lie open to them here and there till our +own fleets are greater, at least they know that the host may no +longer come and go as they will, for Alfred's ships have to be +reckoned with. + +Now of ourselves I will add that Thora and I have many friends, but +the best and closest are those whom we made in the days when Hubba +came and fell under the shadow of the Quantock Hills, and they do +not forget us. + +Into our house sometimes come Heregar and Ethered, Denewulf the +wise and humble, Odda, and many more, sure of welcome. Only the +loved presence of Neot the holy is wanting, for he died in Cornwall +in that year of the end of the troubles, and I think that in him I +lost more than any save Alfred himself. + +Osmund went back to East Anglia for a time, but there he grew +wearied with the wrangling of the Danish chiefs as they shared out +the new land between them; so he bides with us, finding all his +pleasure in the life of farm and field, which is ever near to the +heart of a Dane. With him goes old Thord, grumbling at the thralls +in strange sea language, and yet well loved. Not until he was +wounded sorely in a sea fight we had and won under the Isle of +Wight would he leave the war deck; but even now he is the first on +board when the ships come home, and he is the one who orders all +for winter quarters or for sailing. + +Now for long I would that I might look once more on Einar of the +Orkneys, my kind foster father, who still bided there in peace, +hearing of him now and then as some Norse ship, on her way to join +Rolf's fleet in the new land of the Northmen beyond our narrow +seas, put into our haven for repair, perhaps after the long voyage, +or to see if King Alfred would hire her men for a cruise against +the common foe--the Danes. And it was not until the news of his +death came thus to me that the home longing for the old lands +altogether left me; but since that day my thoughts have been, and +will be, for England only. I have no thought or wish that I were +sharer in Rolf's victories, nor have my comrades, Harek and Kolgrim +and Thord; for we have with Alfred more than the viking could have +given us. + +I suppose that in days to come out of this long strife shall be +wrought new strength and oneness for England, even as Alfred in his +wisdom foresees; but as yet sword Helmbiter must be kept sharp, and +the ships must be ever ready. But unless the wisdom of Alfred is +forgotten, there will never again be wanting a ship captain of +English race, as when I, a stranger, was called to the charge of +the king's ships in Wessex. The old love of the sea is waking in +the hearts of the sons of Hengist. + +Therefore I am content, for here have I found the sweetest wife, +and the noblest master, and the fairest land that man could wish. +And the fear of the old gods is taken from me, and to me has come +honour, and somewhat of the joy of victory in a good cause--the +cause of freedom and of peace. + +Now I write these things as springtime grows apace, and at any +time--today, or tomorrow, or next day--into our hall may come +Kolgrim my comrade, his scarred face bright with the light of +coming battle, to say that Danish ships are once more on the +gannet's path; and the sword of Sigurd will rattle in the golden +scabbard, and a great English cheer will come from the haven, for +King Alfred's ships are ready. + +The End. + + + +Notes. + + +i A Norse homestead consisted of several buildings--the great +hall standing alone and apart from the domestic arrangements. + +ii The Norse assembly, corresponding to a Saxon "Folkmote," or +representative council for a district. + +iii Unearthly. The trolls were the demons of the Northern +mythology. + +iv Byrnie, the close-fitting mail shirt. + +v The consecrated silver ring kept in the temple of the +district, and worn by the godar, or priest, at all assemblies where +it might be necessary to administer an oath. Odin, Frey, and Niord +were always called to witness an oath on this ring. + +vi God-rede = "good counsel," or "God's counsel," as Alfred +means "elves' counsel." + +vii Asser's "Life of Alfred." This illness never left the king +from his twentieth year to his death. Probably it was neuralgic, as +it seems to have been violent pain without lasting effect. + +viii This was called "prime signing," and was practically the +admission of the heathen as a catechumen. + +ix The "Havamal" was the Northern poem which practically +embodied the ancient code of morals and behaviour. + +x The use of bells was popular early in England, and not less +so because a freeman who could afford to build a church with a bell +tower became a thane in consequence. + +xi The national representative assembly, and origin of our +parliament. + +xii Now Normandy, and so called after Rolf's Northmen. + +xiii This charm against the "evil eye" was used in the west of +England until quite lately, and may still linger. The charm against +sprains is one yet recorded in the original tongue. + +xiv Alfred had Denewulf instructed, and made him Bishop of +Winchester. + +xv In 845 A.D. Bishop Eahlstan and the levies of Somerset and +Dorset defeated the first Danes who landed in Wessex, at the mouth +of the Parret. + +xvi Trading vessel, more heavily built than the swift +longships. + +xvii The "wild hunt" is still believed to pass over Cannington +and the Quantock Hills, the sounds of the migration of flocks of +sea fowl probably keeping the tradition alive. + +xviii Athelstan = "noble stone." + +xix Confirmation. + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's King Alfred's Viking, by Charles W. Whistler + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KING ALFRED'S VIKING *** + +***** This file should be named 14034.txt or 14034.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/4/0/3/14034/ + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/14034.zip b/old/14034.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..09a1a1a --- /dev/null +++ b/old/14034.zip |